JP2020110709A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To increase game amusement.SOLUTION: A game machine including display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images can execute a first performance in which the expectation of winning is high when a second image is displayed after a first image is displayed, and the expectation of winning is low when the second image is displayed after a third image is displayed. In the first performance, when displaying the first image or the third image, after displaying a variation icon at a variation display position, the first image or the third image is hidden, and further, the variation display position out of the variation icon and the variation display position is hidden.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 140

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a game machine capable of executing a display effect using a display device when a game ball is won at a starting opening (for example, refer to Patent Document 1).

In such a gaming machine, it is possible to perform a display effect using a character image, a design, or the like.

JP, 2016-202930, A JP, 2016-198339, A JP, 2016-182376, A

However, even with the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the technology for improving the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made to solve the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to improve the enjoyment of games.

The present invention has been made to solve at least a part of the problems described above, and can be implemented as the following application examples. In addition, the reference numerals in parentheses and supplementary explanations in this column show the correspondence with the embodiments described later in order to facilitate the understanding of the present invention, and do not limit the present invention in any way. ..

[Application example 1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
When the second image is displayed after the first image is displayed, the expectation of winning is high, and when the second image is displayed after the third image is displayed, the winning probability is high. It is possible to execute the first effect in which the expectation level of
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Application example 2]
The gaming machine described in Application Example 1,
In the first effect, when the first image or the third image is displayed, the variable icon is displayed at the variable display position, and then the first image or the third image is not displayed. In addition, the variable display position is hidden from the variable icon and the variable display position.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Application example 3]
The gaming machine according to Application Example 1 or Application Example 2,
In the first effect, a specific image can be displayed as a suggestion for displaying the second image.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Application example 4]
The gaming machine according to any one of Application Example 1 to Application Example 3,
Having a movable body that can appear on the front side of the display means,
In the first effect, the movable body can be operated as a suggestion for displaying the second image.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Application example 5]
The gaming machine according to any one of Application Example 1 to Application Example 4,
After the first effect, it is possible to execute a second effect in which a fourth image is displayed in addition to the second image, and further, an image of the expected degree of hitting by the second image is displayed. is there,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Application example 6]
The gaming machine described in Application Example 5,
In the second presentation, in addition to the fourth image, the first image and the second image are displayed, or the third image and the second image are displayed. May be
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Application example 7]
The gaming machine according to Application Example 5 or Application Example 6,
The first image is a character other than the first character and the second character among the plurality of characters belonging to the first group,
The second image is the first character,
The third image is the second character,
The fourth image is a character that does not belong to the first group,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the present invention, amusement of a game can be improved.

It is a front view of a game machine. It is an enlarged view of indicators. It is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a main control board side of the gaming machine. It is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a sub-control board side of the gaming machine. It is a figure for explaining main ROM and main RAM. It is a figure for demonstrating a sub ROM and a sub RAM. It is a figure for explaining various random numbers used in the game machine. It is a figure for demonstrating determination table T1-T4, T10. It is explanatory drawing of the jackpot type determination table T5. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in a non-time saving state. It is explanatory drawing of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 at the time saving state. It is explanatory drawing of the electric power channel opening pattern determination table T7. It is an explanatory view of a special winning opening opening pattern determination table T8. It is explanatory drawing of the V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9. It is a flow chart of main control main processing. It is a flow chart of main side timer interruption processing. It is a flowchart of a starting opening sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of a special figure 2 prior determination process. It is a flowchart of a special figure 1 prior determination process. It is a flow chart of normal operation processing. It is a flow chart of special operation processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of the jackpot determination process. It is a 1st flowchart of a fluctuation pattern selection process. It is the 2nd flow chart of fluctuation pattern selection processing. It is a flow chart of the special symbol changing process. It is a flowchart of a special symbol determination process. It is a flowchart of a game state management process. It is a flowchart of a game state reset process. It is a flow chart of special electric auditors product processing. It is a flow chart of V opening and closing member operation processing. It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a flow chart of V area sensor detection processing. It is a flow chart of the number of reserved balls. It is a flow chart which shows sub-control main processing. 7 is a flowchart of sub-side timer interrupt processing. It is a flow chart of received command analysis processing. It is a flowchart of a prefetch effect determination process. It is a figure for explaining the composition of a prior judgment information storage area. It is an explanatory view of a prefetch effect pattern determination table T51. It is a flow chart of variation production start processing. It is an explanatory diagram of a core effect pattern determination table T52. It is an explanatory diagram of a chance-up effect pattern determination table T53. It is a flow chart of processing during fluctuation production. It is a flow chart of display control processing. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the 2nd aspect of the 3rd movable accessory 13. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the 2nd aspect of the 1st movable accessory 14. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the 2nd aspect of the 2nd movable accessory 15. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the display effect of the sub display screen 64. It is a 1st figure for demonstrating the hold icon switching production A. It is a 2nd figure for demonstrating holding icon change production A. It is a diagram for explaining a hold icon switching effect B. It is a figure for explaining change icon acquisition production A. It is a figure for explaining change icon acquisition production B. It is a figure for explaining change icon acquisition production C. It is a diagram for explaining a hold icon movement change effect A. It is a diagram for explaining a hold icon movement change effect B. It is a diagram for explaining a hold icon movement change effect C. It is a figure for explaining specific icon stock production A. It is a figure for explaining specific icon stock production B. It is a figure for explaining specific icon stock production C. It is a figure for explaining operation stock production A (first half). It is a figure for explaining operation stock production A (the second half). It is a figure for explaining operation stock production B (the second half). It is a figure for explaining icon figure design production A. It is a figure for explaining icon figure design production B. It is a figure for explaining icon figure design production C. It is a diagram for explaining a hold-time hold icon effect A. It is a diagram for explaining a hold-time hold icon effect B. It is a diagram for explaining a hold icon effect C at reach. It is a figure for explaining special reservation production A. It is a diagram for explaining a special holding effect B. It is a diagram for explaining a special holding effect C. It is a figure for explaining icon success/failure production A. It is a figure for explaining icon success/failure production B. It is a figure for explaining icon success/failure production C. It is a figure for explaining icon selection production A. It is a figure for explaining icon selection production B. It is a figure for explaining icon selection production C. It is the figure which showed the jackpot expectation table classified by icon. It is a figure for explaining icon special change production A. It is a figure for explaining icon special change production B. It is a figure for explaining the change icon jump production A concerned. It is a diagram for explaining the variation icon jump effect B. It is a diagram for explaining the variation icon jump effect C. It is a figure for explaining operation means appearance production A. It is a figure for explaining operation means appearance production B. It is a figure for explaining operation means appearance production C. It is a figure for explaining parts assembly production A. It is a figure for explaining parts assembly production B. It is a figure for explaining parts assembly production C. It is a figure for explaining a decorative design effect A at the time of reach. It is a figure for explaining a decorative design effect B at the time of reach. It is a figure for explaining a decorative design effect C at the time of reach. It is a figure for explaining group promotion effect A. It is a figure for explaining group promotion production B. It is a figure for explaining group promotion production C. It is a figure for explaining stop decoration symbol appearance production A. It is a figure for explaining stop decoration symbol appearance production B. It is a figure for explaining stop decoration symbol appearance production C. It is a figure for explaining design color change production A. It is a figure for explaining design color change production B. It is a figure for explaining design color change production C. It is a figure for explaining color change reach production A. It is a figure for explaining color change reach production B. It is a figure for explaining color change reach production C. It is a figure for explaining character attack production A. It is a figure for explaining character attack production B. It is a figure for explaining character attack production C. It is a diagram for explaining a decorative pattern color change effect A. It is a diagram for explaining a decorative pattern color change effect B. It is a diagram for explaining a decorative pattern color change effect C. It is the figure in order to explain special design production A. It is the figure in order to explain special design production A. It is the figure in order to explain special design production A. It is a figure for explaining a decorative pattern visibility change production A. It is a diagram for explaining a decorative pattern visibility change effect B. It is a diagram for explaining a decorative pattern visibility change effect C. It is a diagram for explaining a decorative symbol rotation stop display effect A. It is a diagram for explaining a decorative symbol rotation stop display effect B. It is a diagram for explaining a decorative symbol rotation stop display effect C. It is a figure for explaining anticipation degree number display production A. It is a figure for explaining expectation degree number display production B. It is a figure for explaining expectation degree number display production C. It is a figure for explaining specific production execution suggestion production A. It is a figure for explaining specific production execution suggestion production B. It is a figure for explaining specific production execution suggestion production C. It is a figure for explaining special direction suggestion production A. It is a figure for explaining special direction suggestion production B. It is a figure for explaining special direction suggestion production C. It is the figure in order to explain production sound effect production A. It is the figure in order to explain production sound effect production B. It is the figure in order to explain the production sound effect production C. It is a figure for explaining lyrics image production A. It is a figure for explaining lyrics image production B. It is a figure for explaining lyrics image production C. It is a diagram for explaining a specific area variable effect A. It is a diagram for explaining a specific area variable effect B. It is a diagram for explaining a specific area variable effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the reliability in a character appearance. It is a figure for explaining reliability change production A. It is a figure for explaining reliability change production B. It is a figure for explaining item superposition production A. It is a figure for explaining item superposition production B. It is a figure for explaining item superposition production C. It is a figure for explaining a game board by a transparent acrylic board. FIG. 146 is a continuation view for explaining the game board of FIG. 146. It is a figure for explaining a movable accessory decoration light emission production. It is a figure for explaining W mode display production A. It is a figure for explaining W mode display production B. It is a figure for explaining W mode display production C. It is a figure for demonstrating the locking method to the upper plate of a sword member. It is a figure for explaining movable part operation warning production A. It is a figure for explaining movable part operation warning production B.

<First Embodiment>
1. Structure of Gaming Machine FIG. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine 1 as one embodiment of the present invention. Below, the left-right direction of the game machine 1 is made to match the left-right direction viewed from the player facing the game machine 1. Further, the front direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as a direction from the gaming machine 1 to the player, and the rear direction of the gaming machine 1 will be described as a direction from the player to the gaming machine 1.

The gaming machine 1 is a pachinko gaming machine that launches a game ball based on a player's firing operation, and when a particular winning device receives a game ball, pays out a predetermined number of game balls to the player based on the winning. is there. The gaming machine 1 includes a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board 2, and the gaming board 2 is attached to the inside of the gaming machine frame 50. The gaming machine frame 50 includes, in addition to the front frame (front frame portion) 53, an outer frame (base frame portion) forming an outer shell of the gaming machine and an inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached inside the outer frame. I have it. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertical rectangular unit arranged on the front side of the outer frame and the inner frame, and includes a handle 60, a hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 61, and a surplus ball receiving plate (lower plate). ) 62, effect button 63, sub display screen 64 (right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen 64L, and upper sub display screen 64U), sword member 65, frame lamp 66, speaker 67, Equipped with. An opening is formed in the center of the front frame 53, and the game area 3 of the game board 2 can be viewed through the opening.

The handle 60 is arranged at the lower right end of the front frame 53 and shoots a game ball with a shooting strength according to the rotation angle. The hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 61 is provided below the front frame 53 and stores game balls. The surplus ball receiving plate (lower plate) 62 is arranged below the ball hitting supply plate (upper plate) 61 and stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the ball hitting supply plate 61. The effect button 63 is an operation unit arranged in the vicinity of the hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 61, and is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of effect executed as the game progresses. The sword member 65 is an operation unit that imitates the shape of a sword, and can be pushed downward by the player at the time of production performed as the game progresses. The sword member 65 is configured to be able to perform a first operation of pushing the entire sword member 65 downward and a second operation of pushing the entire sword member 65 upward. The sub display screen 64 is a screen of the liquid crystal display device, and includes a right sub display screen 64R, a left sub display screen 64L, and an upper sub display screen 64U. The right sub display screen 64R is provided on the right side of the front frame 53, the left sub display screen 64L is provided on the left side of the front frame 53, and the upper sub display screen 64U is provided on the upper side of the front frame 53. The right sub display screen 64R and the left sub display screen 64L are arranged at a pair of positions via the game board 2. The upper sub display screen 64U is arranged above the game board 2. The right sub display screen 64R, the left sub display screen 64L, and the upper sub display screen 64U are arranged so as to surround the opening of the front frame 53. The sub display screen 64 may be a liquid crystal display device or another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The frame lamp 66 includes a right frame lamp and a left frame lamp, is arranged above the front frame 53, and produces a light emission effect during a game or the like. The right frame lamp is an oblique line-shaped light emitting unit arranged between the upper sub display screen 64U and the right sub display screen 64R. The left frame lamp is an oblique line-shaped light emitting unit arranged between the upper sub display screen 64U and the left sub display screen 64L. The speakers 67 are arranged on the upper left side and the upper right side of the front frame 53, and perform sound effects during a game or the like.

The game board 2 includes a game area 3, a rail member 4, a board lamp 5, an image display device 7, a center ornament 10, a fixed winning device (belt) 19, and an ordinary variable winning device (electric chew) 22. , A gate (through chucker) 28, a first big winning device (first attacker) 31, a second big winning device (second attacker) 36, a big winning opening opening starting opening 17, and a general winning opening 27 ( An ordinary winning opening 27), an outlet 16, and a display device 40 are provided.

The game area 3 is an area where a game ball shot by operating the handle 60 flows down, and a plurality of game nails that guide the game ball are provided in a protruding manner. The rail member 4 is arranged at the left end portion of the game area 3, and guides the game ball shot by the operation of the handle 60 toward above the game area 3. The board lamp 5 is arranged on the back side of the game area 3 and emits light from the back side of the game area 3. Here, a part of the panel lamp 5 is connected to the right frame lamp and the left frame lamp so that the form and the light emission are continuous.

The image display device 7 is provided near the center of the game area 3 and has a display screen 7a. The image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the effect design (decorative design) 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed (also referred to as variable display) effect design display area, and the reserved image display in which the reserved images 9A and 9B are displayed. It has an area and a reserved digested image display area (the reserved display area) in which the reserved digested image 9C is displayed. The hold images 9A and 9B are images representing hold and are also referred to as hold icons 9A and 9B. The pending digest image 9C is an image representing the pending, and is also referred to as the pending image 9C, the pending icon 9C, the variation icon 9C, and the variation icon 9C. The hold icon 9C may also be simply called a hold icon.

The effect symbol display area includes three symbol display areas of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. A left effect design (left decorative design) 8L is displayed in the left symbol display area. In the middle symbol display area, a medium effect symbol (medium decorative symbol) 8C is displayed. The right effect design (right decorative design) 8R is displayed in the right design display area. The effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are composed of a plurality of symbols representing numbers “1” to “9”, for example. The variable display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol described later. The image display device 7 is a combination of effect symbols displayed in the symbol display areas on the left, middle, and right, and a first special symbol displayed by a first special symbol display device 41a and a second special symbol display device 41b, which will be described later, and The result of the variable display of the second special symbol (big hit lottery result) can be displayed in a manner that is easy for the player to understand.

For example, when a big hit is won, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with a doublet of "777". If it is out of alignment, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with a dimness such as "637". This makes it easy for the player to understand the progress of the game. The player can grasp the jackpot lottery result by the image display device 7 in addition to the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b. The position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed. Further, as a mode of variable display of effect symbols, a mode of scrolling in the vertical direction may be used, or another mode may be used. What kind of combination of effect symbols is stopped and displayed according to each lottery result is not limited to the above, and can be arbitrarily set. Hereinafter, the effect for displaying the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is also referred to as "effect symbol variation effect", "decorative symbol variation effect", or simply "variation effect" "variable display". In addition, the variation effect of this decorative symbol is counted as one variation effect (variation effect of one cycle) in the period from the start of the change of the special symbol to the stop thereof (also referred to as a special symbol variation period). Therefore, even if there is a case where the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped during the period from when the special symbol starts changing to when it stops, the effect of the temporary stop is included in the variable symbol changing effect.

The image display device 7 can display, in addition to the effect symbol variation effect, a big hit effect performed in parallel with a big hit game (an example of a special game), a demonstration effect for waiting for a customer, and the like on the display screen 7a. In the effect design variation effect, effect images such as background images and character images may be displayed in addition to effect patterns. Further, the image display device 7 is an identification display (fourth symbol, not shown) capable of suggesting that the special symbol is changing or suggesting a lottery result of the special symbol in addition to the effect symbol. May be displayed on the display screen 7a. The identification display (fourth symbol) may be displayed by a light emitting device such as an LED provided in the game area 3.

The reserved image display area displays a first reserved display area for displaying a reserved image 9A according to the number of stored first special figure reservations described below, and a reserved image 9B for a stored number of second special figure reservations described below. And a second hold display area to be operated. Due to the display of the reserved images 9A and 9B, the number of memories of the first special figure reservation displayed on the first special figure reservation display 43a, which will be described later, and the second special figure reservation displayed on the second special figure reservation display 43b. It is possible to display the memory number of the player in an easy-to-understand manner. The pending digest image display area includes a pending digest display area for displaying the pending digest image 9C. The held digestion image 9C corresponds to the effect design (effect design 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a or the display screen 7b, and depending on the display of the hold digested image 9C, the first special figure hold or 2 It is possible to display to the player that the special figure reservation is exhausted (“Execution of special figure reservation” described later) in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

On the right side and the left side of the image display device 7, a movable first so-called gimmick, a first board movable body 14 (also referred to as a first movable accessory 14) is provided. The first movable accessory 14 is configured such that two left and right semicircular members are movable in the left-right direction. The first movable accessory 14 is normally stationary at the left and right retracted positions (FIG. 1) of the image display device 7, and moves so as to approach each other from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a ( It is possible to stand still at the advance position in front of the display screen 7a. The first movable accessory 14 has a ring-shaped decorative portion formed when the left and right members are united at the advanced position and covers a part of the image display device 7.

On the upper side of the image display device 7, there is provided a movable second so-called gimmick second plate movable body 15 (also referred to as a second movable accessory 15). The second movable accessory 15 is configured such that a rectangular member (decoration portion) described as "OARO" is movable in the vertical direction. The second movable accessory 15 is normally stationary at the retreat position above the image display device 7 (FIG. 1), and is moved (advanced) downward from the retreat position toward the center of the display screen 7a to be displayed. It is possible to stand still at the advance position in front of the screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 covers a part of the image display device 7 when stopped at the advanced position.

On the right side and the left side of the image display device 7, there are provided movable third so-called gimmicks, that is, a third movable body 13 (also called a third movable accessory 13). The third movable accessory 13 is configured such that two members arranged on the left and right sides are movable in the left-right direction. A ring-shaped decoration portion is formed on each of the two members, and a circular transparent portion having transparency is provided inside the ring shape. The third movable accessory 13 is normally stationary at the left and right retracted positions (FIG. 1) of the image display device 7 and moves so as to approach each other from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a ( It is possible to stand still at the advance position in front of the display screen 7a. In the third movable accessory 13, when the left and right members are united at the advanced position, the two ring-shaped decorative portions come close to each other to have a spectacle shape and cover a part of the image display device 7.

A stage portion 11 is formed below the center ornament 10. The stage portion 11 has a shape capable of guiding a game ball rolling on the upper surface of the stage portion 11 to a first starting opening 20 described later. A warp portion 12 is provided on the lower left side of the center ornament 10. The warp unit 12 has an inlet portion into which the game ball flows in and an outlet portion from which the game ball flows out, and causes the game ball flowing from the inlet portion to flow out from the outlet portion to the stage portion 11.

The fixed winning device (belly) 19 is arranged below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, and the first starting opening (first starting winning opening, first winning opening) in which the ease of entering a game ball does not always change Port, fixed starting port) 20. The winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 is an opportunity for the lottery of the first special symbol (the big hit lottery). In other words, the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 is a trigger for the acquisition of the jackpot random numbers and the like and the jackpot determination.

The normal variable winning device (electricity chew) 22 is arranged below the first starting opening 20 in the game area 3, and is provided with a second starting opening (second starting winning opening, second entering opening, variable starting opening) 21. ing. The winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 21 is a trigger for the lottery of the second special symbol (small hit and big hit lottery). The power tube 22 includes a movable member 23 in front of the second starting port 21, and the operation of the movable member 23 opens and closes the second starting port 21. The movable member 23 is driven by an electric power solenoid 24 (FIG. 3). The 2nd starting opening 21 can enter a game ball when the movable member 23 is in an open state. It should be noted that, when the movable member 23 is in the open state, it is easier for the electric chew 22 to enter the second starting port 21 than when the movable member 23 is in the closing state. It may be possible to enter the ball.

The gate (through chucker) 28 is arranged above the first big winning device (first attacker) 31 in the game area 3, and is configured to allow a game ball to pass therethrough. The passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is a trigger for the ordinary symbol lottery that determines whether or not to open the electric Chu 22. In other words, the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is a trigger for the acquisition of the normal symbol random number (random number per hit) and the hit determination.

Here, the “special symbol jackpot lottery” means that when the game ball wins the first starting opening 20 or the second starting opening 21, a jackpot random number for special symbol determination is obtained, and the obtained jackpot random number is obtained. It is a process of determining whether or not it is a big hit by comparing it with a value corresponding to a predetermined “big hit”. The lottery result of this "big hit" is not immediately notified to the player, and the variable display of the special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display device 41a or the second special symbol display device 41b, which will be described later, and a predetermined variation. When the time has passed, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), and the player is informed of the lottery result. In the image display device 7, a symbol matching game in which the effect symbols are variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbols is performed, and the lottery result of the big hit is notified to the player more effectively by this symbol matching game.

Further, "small winning lottery for special symbols" means that when the game ball wins the second starting opening 21, a small winning random number for special symbol determination is acquired, and the acquired small winning random number is predetermined. It is a process of determining whether or not a small hit is made by comparing with a value corresponding to "small hit". The lottery result of this "small hit" is not immediately notified to the player, and the variation display of the special symbol is performed on the second special symbol display device 41b described later, and when the predetermined variation time has elapsed, the lottery is performed. The special symbol corresponding to the result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), and the player is informed of the lottery result. In the image display device 7, a symbol matching game is performed in which the effect symbols are variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbols. The symbol matching game more effectively informs the player of the result of the small hit lottery. ..

In addition, the "ordinary symbol lottery" means that when the game ball passes through the gate 28, a random number for ordinary symbol determination is acquired, and the acquired random number is compared with a value corresponding to a predetermined "win". By doing so, it means a process of determining whether or not there is a hit. Regarding the lottery result of this normal symbol, the game ball passes through the gate 28 and the lottery result is not immediately notified, and the ordinary symbol display 42, which will be described later, displays the variation of the ordinary symbol and a predetermined variation. When the time has passed, the ordinary symbol corresponding to the lottery result is fixedly displayed (lit or extinguished), and the player is informed of the lottery result.

The first big winning device (first attacker, first special variable winning device) 31 is arranged at the upper right of the first starting opening 20 in the game area 3, and the first big winning opening (first special winning opening) 30 , V area 39, non-V area 70, and V opening/closing member 71. The first big winning opening 30 includes an opening/closing member (first special winning opening opening/closing member) 32 that allows or hinders the acceptance of the game ball by a swing-type opening/closing operation. The opening/closing member 32 is driven by the first special winning opening solenoid 33 (FIG. 3). The first big winning opening 30 allows game balls to enter when the opening/closing member 32 is in the open state.

The first big winning device 31 has a V area (specific area) 39, a V area sensor 39a (FIG. 3), a non-V area (non-specific area) 70, and a non-V area sensor 70a (FIG. 3). , A first special winning opening sensor 30a (FIG. 3), a V opening/closing member 71, and a V opening/closing member solenoid 73 (FIG. 3). The V area (specific area) 39 and the non-V area (non-specific area) 70 are configured in the first big winning device 31 as areas through which the game balls that have passed through the first big winning opening 30 can pass. .. The first special winning opening sensor 30a is arranged upstream of the V area 39 and the non-V area 70, and detects the winning of the game ball into the first special winning opening 30. The V area sensor 39a is arranged in the V area 39 and detects passage of a game ball into the V area 39. The non-V area sensor 70 a is arranged in the non-V area 70 and detects passage of a game ball into the non-V area 70. The V opening/closing member 71 distributes the game balls that have passed through the first special winning opening 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70. The V opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening/closing member 71. The V opening/closing member 71 is configured to rotate (clockwise and counterclockwise with respect to the game board 2). When the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the V opening/closing member 71 rotates counterclockwise from the origin position to play the game ball. It becomes the 1st state (rotation state) which distributes to V area 39, and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, it becomes the 2nd state (stop state) which is located at the origin and distributes the game ball to non-V area 70. .. The V opening/closing member 71 is not limited to rotational movement, and may have a function of allocating the game ball that has passed through the first special winning opening 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70. You may comprise so that it may move to the left-right direction with respect to the game board 2. That is, when the V open/close member solenoid 73 is energized, the game ball is distributed to the V region 39 (first state), and when the V open/close member solenoid 73 is not energized, the game ball is distributed to the non-V region 70. It may be configured to be in the (second state). In the gaming machine 1, the passage of the gaming ball into the V area 39 is a trigger for the transition to the high probability state described later. That is, the V region 39 is a positive variation operating port. On the other hand, the non-V area 70 does not serve as the probability variation operating port. The first big prize device 31 of the present embodiment further includes a first big prize device discharge sensor (not shown) that counts the number of game balls discharged from the first big prize device 31. The first big winning device discharge sensor is provided at a point where the V area 39 and the non-V area 70 merge downstream, and counts the number of game balls that have passed through the V area sensor 39a or the non-V area sensor 70a.

The second big winning device (second attacker, small hit attacker, second special variable winning device) 36 is arranged above the first big winning opening 30 in the game area 3, and the second big winning opening (second special winning opening). The winning port) 35 is provided. The second special winning opening 35 is provided with an opening/closing member (second special winning opening opening/closing member, movable member) 37 that obstructs or allows the acceptance of the game ball by a swing-type opening/closing operation. The opening/closing member 37 is driven by the second special winning opening solenoid 38 (FIG. 3). The second winning hole 35 allows game balls to enter when the opening/closing member 37 is in the open state. This second big winning device is a small hit attacker that operates when a game ball wins the second starting opening 21 and is won in a small hit lottery.

The special winning opening opening start port 17 is arranged above the first special winning opening 30 in the game area 3, and the first special winning opening 30 is opened when a game ball passes.

The general winning opening 27 is provided in the lower part of the game area 3. The outlet 16 is provided in the lower part of the game area 3, and discharges the game balls that have not won any winning openings to the outside of the game area 3. The display devices 40 are arranged near the center on the right side of the game board 2. Details of the display device 40 will be described later. The general winning opening 29 is located in the lower right part of the game area 3 and is adjacent to the right side of the first big winning opening 30.

The game area 3 has a left game area 3A on the left side and a right game area 3B on the right side from the center in the left-right direction. The hitting method of shooting the game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 3A is called "left hitting". On the other hand, the way of striking the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 3B is called "right hitting". With the gaming machine 1, it is possible to aim for winning in the first starting opening 20 by hitting left. On the other hand, by hitting the right, the player can aim to pass to the gate 28, win the second starting opening 21, the first big winning opening 30, and the second big winning opening 35.

FIG. 2 is an enlarged view of the display device 40. The display devices 40 are a first special symbol display device 41a, a second special symbol display device 41b, an ordinary symbol display device 42, a first special symbol reservation display device 43a, and a second special symbol reservation display device 43b. , A universal figure hold indicator 44, and The first special symbol display 41a variably displays the first special symbol. The second special symbol display 41b variably displays the second special symbol. The normal symbol display 42 variably displays the normal symbol. The 1st special figure reservation indicator 43a displays the memory number of the operation reservation (1st special figure reservation) of the 1st special symbol indicator 41a. The 2nd special figure reservation indicator 43b displays the number of memories of operation reservation (2nd special figure reservation) of the 2nd special symbol indicator 41b. The universal figure hold indicator 44 displays the number of memories of the operation hold (universal figure hold) of the normal symbol indicator 42. The variable display of the first special symbol is triggered by the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 20. The variable display of the second special symbol is triggered by the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 21. In the following, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are also collectively referred to as "special symbol". Further, the first special symbol display device 41a and the second special symbol display device 41b are also collectively referred to as "special symbol display device 41". Further, the first special figure reservation display 43a and the second special figure reservation display 43b are also collectively referred to as "special figure reservation display 43".

The special symbol display device 41 variably displays (variable display) the special symbol (identification information), and then stops the display to draw a lottery (big hit lottery) based on the winning of the first starting opening 20 or the second starting opening 21. Notify the result. The special symbol that is stopped and displayed (stop symbol, a special symbol that is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one special symbol that is selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by the special symbol lottery. If the stop symbol is a special symbol of a predetermined jackpot stop mode (jackpot symbol), the first big winning opening 30 in the open pattern according to the type of jackpot symbol stopped and displayed (type of jackpot hit) Alternatively, a special game (big hit game) for opening the second special winning opening 35 is performed. The opening patterns of the special winning openings (first special winning opening 30 and second special winning opening 35) in the jackpot game will be described later.

After the special symbol (identification information) is variably displayed (variable display), the special symbol display 41 indicates the result of the lottery (small hit lottery) based on the winning of the second starting opening 21 by displaying the stop. The special symbol that is stopped and displayed (stop symbol, a special symbol that is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one special symbol that is selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by the special symbol lottery. When the stop symbol is a special symbol of a predetermined small hit stop mode (small hit symbol), a special game (small hit game) for opening the second special winning opening 35 in a predetermined opening pattern is performed. The opening pattern of the second special winning opening 35 in the small hit game will be described later.

The special symbol display 41 is composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side, and displays a special symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery per special symbol depending on the lighting mode. For example, if you win the jackpot (one of the multiple types of jackpots described below), you will see 1, 2, etc. , 5th and 6th LEDs are lit up to display a jackpot pattern. When the small hit is won, the small hit pattern in which the first and second LEDs from the left are turned on is displayed such as "○○●●●●●●" (○: lit, ●: unlit). In the case of a loss, a lost pattern in which only the LED on the far right is turned on, such as "●●●●●●●○", is displayed. You may employ|adopt the aspect which turns off all the LEDs as a loss design. Before the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display (variable display) of the special symbol is performed over a predetermined variation time. In the variable display mode, for example, each LED may be turned on so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode as long as each LED is not in the stop display (lighting display in a specific mode), and may be an arbitrary lighting mode. For example, in the variable display mode, all LEDs may blink at the same time.

In the gaming machine 1, when there is a winning of a game ball into the first starting opening 20 or the second starting opening 21 (ball entry), the value (numerical value information) of various random numbers such as a jackpot random number acquired for the winning is , And is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 (FIG. 5). Specifically, if it is a winning in the first starting opening 20, it is stored in the first special drawing reservation storage area 85a (FIG. 5) as a first special drawing reservation, and if it is a winning in the second starting opening 21. , And is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b (FIG. 5) as the second special figure reservation. There is an upper limit to the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage area 85, and the upper limit values in the present embodiment are the same for both the first special figure reservation storage area 85a and the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. There are four. The special figure reservation stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 is exhausted when the variable display of the special symbol based on the special figure reservation becomes possible. "Extinguishing special figure reservation" means determining a jackpot random number or the like corresponding to the special figure reservation, and executing variable display of special symbols to show the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 20 or the second starting opening 21 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, that is, the variable display of the special symbol is executed. Even if a prize is won during or during execution of a special game, the right of the jackpot lottery for the prize can be reserved with a predetermined number as an upper limit. The number of special figure reservations is displayed on the special figure reservation indicator 43. The 1st special figure reservation indicator 43a and the 2nd special figure reservation indicator 43b are respectively constituted by four LEDs, for example. Each special figure reservation indicator 43 displays the number of special figure reservations by turning on the LEDs by the number of special figure reservations.

The variable display of the normal symbols is performed by the passage of the game ball to the gate 28. The normal symbol display 42 variably displays (variable display) the normal symbol, and then displays the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 by performing a stop display. The ordinary symbol that is stopped and displayed (ordinary symbol stopped symbol, the ordinary symbol that is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display) is one ordinary symbol selected from a plurality of ordinary symbols by the ordinary symbol lottery. If the universal figure stop symbol is a predetermined specific ordinary symbol (ordinary symbol in a predetermined stopping mode, that is, a normal hit symbol), an auxiliary game that opens the second starting opening 21 in an opening pattern according to the current game state Is done. The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

The normal symbol display 42 is composed of two LEDs, and displays the normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol lottery by its lighting mode. For example, when the lottery result is a win, a normal winning pattern in which both LEDs are turned on is displayed such as "○○" (○: lit, ●: unlit). If the lottery result is a loss, a normal loss symbol such as "●○" in which only the right LED is lit is displayed. A mode in which all the LEDs are turned off may be adopted as the normally lost pattern. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the normal symbol is performed for a predetermined fluctuation time. In the variable display mode, for example, both LEDs may be turned on alternately. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode as long as each LED is not in the stop display (lighting display in a specific mode), and may be an arbitrary lighting mode. For example, in the variable display mode, all LEDs may blink at the same time.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball passes through the gate 28, the value of the ordinary symbol random number (random number per hit) acquired for the passage is stored in the universal figure reservation storage area 86 (FIG. 5) as the ordinary figure reservation. Once remembered. There is an upper limit to the number of universal figure reservations that can be stored in the universal figure reservation storage area 86, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is four. The universal figure hold stored in the universal figure hold storage area 86 is exhausted when the variable display of the ordinary symbols based on the universal figure hold becomes possible. The digestion of the universal figure hold means that the ordinary symbol random number (random number per hit) corresponding to the ordinary figure hold is determined, and the variable display of the ordinary symbol for indicating the determination result is executed. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after that passage, that is, during the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol or the execution of the auxiliary game, the prize is won. Even if there is, it is possible to reserve the right of the ordinary symbol lottery for the passage with a predetermined number as the upper limit. The number of universal figure reservations is displayed on the universal figure reservation indicator 44. The universal figure pending indicator 44 is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of universal figure pending by turning on the LEDs for the number of universal figure pending.

2. Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine The electrical configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described based on FIGS. 3 and 4. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the main control board side of the gaming machine 1. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the sub-control board side of the gaming machine 1. The gaming machine 1 includes a main control board 80 (FIG. 3), a sub control board 90 (FIG. 4), an image control board 100 (FIG. 4), a lamp control board 107 (FIG. 4), and a voice control board 106 ( 4) and the payout control board 110 (FIG. 3). The main control board 80 is a game control board that controls a game profit such as a jackpot lottery and a game state transition, and constitutes a main control unit. The sub control board 90 is an effect control board that controls the effect to be executed as the game progresses, and constitutes a sub control unit together with the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the voice control board 106. The sub control unit can be configured as long as it includes at least the sub control board 90.

The main control board 80 includes a game control microcomputer 81 and an input/output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the main control board 80, and controls the progress of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a main ROM 83 that stores a program for controlling the progress of the game, a main RAM 84 that is used as a work memory, and a main CPU 82 that executes the program stored in the main ROM 83. Contains. Details of the data stored in the main ROM 83 and the details of the storage area provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later. The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits/receives data to/from another board or the like via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 87. The input/output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81.

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 and a relay board 88. The main control board 80 receives signals output from the sensors and outputs signals to the solenoids. The sensors connected via the relay board 88 include a special winning opening opening starting opening sensor 17a, a first starting opening sensor 20a, a second starting opening sensor 21a, a gate sensor 28a, a first special winning opening sensor 30a, a The two major winning opening sensor 35a, the V area sensor 39a, the non-V area sensor 70a, and the normal winning opening sensors 27a and 29a are exemplified. Examples of solenoids connected via the relay board 88 include an electric power solenoid 24, a first special winning opening solenoid 33, a second special winning opening solenoid 38, and a V opening/closing member solenoid 73. The special winning opening opening starting opening sensor 17a is provided inside the special winning opening opening starting opening 17 and detects a game ball that has entered the special winning opening opening starting opening 17. The first starting opening sensor 20a is provided inside the first starting opening 20 and detects a game ball that has won the first starting opening 20. The second starting opening sensor 21a is provided inside the second starting opening 21 and detects a game ball that has won the second starting opening 21. The gate sensor 28a is provided inside the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first special winning opening sensor 30a is provided inside the first special winning opening 30 and detects a game ball that has won the first big winning opening 30. The second special winning opening sensor 35a is provided inside the second special winning opening 35, and detects a game ball that has won the second special winning opening 35. The V area sensor 39a is provided in the V area 39 inside the first special winning opening 30, and detects a game ball that has passed through the V area 39. The non-V area sensor 70a is provided in the non-V area 70 inside the first special winning opening 30, and detects a game ball that has passed through the non-V area 70. The normal winning opening sensor 27a is provided inside the normal winning opening 27, and detects a game ball that has won the normal winning opening 27. The normal winning opening sensor 29a detects a game ball that has passed inside the normal winning opening 29. The electric Chu solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric Chu 22. The first special winning opening solenoid 33 drives the opening/closing member 32 of the first special winning device 31. The second special winning opening solenoid 38 drives the opening/closing member 37 of the second special winning device 36. The V opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening/closing member 71 of the first big winning device 31.

The display devices 40 are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81, the first special symbol display device 41a, the second special symbol display device 41b, the normal symbol display device 42, the first special symbol reservation display device 43a, the second special symbol reservation display device 43b, general figure reservation The display of the display 44 is controlled.

A payout control board 110 is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87. The main control board 80 sends various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. To the payout control board 110, the prize ball payout device 120, the ball rental payout device 130, and the card unit 135 are connected, and the launch device 112 is connected via the launch control circuit 111. The prize ball payout device 120 pays out prize balls. The payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 based on a signal from the game control microcomputer 81 to pay out the prize balls. The prize balls to be paid out are detected by the prize ball sensor 122 for counting. The rental ball payout device 130 pays out a rental ball. Based on a signal from the card unit 135 connected to the gaming machine 1, the payout control board 110 drives the ball rental motor 131 of the ball dispensing device 130 to pay out the ball. The balls to be paid out are detected by the ball rental sensor 132 for counting. The card unit 135 is arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 1 and outputs information on ball lending based on information on the inserted prepaid card or the like. The firing device 112 includes a handle 60 (FIG. 1), a firing motor 113, a touch switch 114, and a firing volume 115. When the player operates the handle 60, the firing device 112 detects the contact of the handle 60 with the touch switch 114 and the rotation amount of the handle 60 with the firing volume 115. Then, the launch motor 113 is driven so that the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the launch volume 115.

A sub control board 90 (FIG. 4) is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection in which only signals can be transmitted from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90. That is, between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) is interposed as a communication direction regulating means.

The sub-control board 90 includes a production control microcomputer 91 and an input/output circuit 95. The effect control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the sub control board 90, and controls the effect of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The effect control microcomputer 91 is a sub ROM 93 that stores a program or the like for controlling effects as the game progresses, a sub RAM 94 that is used as a work memory, and a sub that executes the program stored in the sub ROM 93. The CPU 92 is included. Details of the data stored in the sub ROM 93 and details of the storage area provided in the sub RAM 94 will be described later. The sub ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. The production control microcomputer 91 transmits/receives data to/from another board or the like via the input/output circuit (I/O port section) 95. The input/output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91. An image control board 100, an audio control board 106, a lamp control board 107, and a relay board 108 are connected to the sub control board 90 via an input/output circuit 95.

The image control board 100 includes an image control microcomputer 101, an input circuit 105a, and an output circuit 105b. The image control microcomputer 101 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the image control board 100, and controls the display of the image display device 7 and the sub display screen 64 according to a program. The image control microcomputer 101 includes a CPU 102, a ROM 103, and a RAM 104. In the ROM 103, in addition to a program for performing display control, still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device 7 and the sub display screen 64, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers and symbols. Image data such as a background image and the like (including effect patterns) are stored. The RAM 104 is used as a memory for expanding image data. The CPU 102 executes the program stored in the ROM 103. The effect control microcomputer 91 causes the image control microcomputer 101 to perform display control of the image display device 7 and the sub display screen 64 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The image control microcomputer 101 reads out image data from the ROM 103 based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91, and performs display control based on the read image data.

A speaker 67 is connected to the voice control board 106, and the effect control microcomputer 91 uses the voice control board 106 to output voice, music, and sound effects based on the command received from the main control board 80. Etc. are output. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90. The voice control board 106 may have a CPU mounted thereon, and may cause the CPU to execute voice control based on a command. Further, the voice control board 106 may be mounted with a ROM, and the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 may be caused to execute voice control. Further, the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100.

A frame lamp 66, a panel lamp 5, a first movable accessory 14, a second movable accessory 15, and a third movable accessory 13 are connected to the lamp control board 107, and these are controlled. To do. The effect control microcomputer 91 controls lighting of the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 via the lamp control board 107 based on the command received from the main control board 80. That is, the production control microcomputer 91 creates light emission pattern data (also referred to as data for determining lighting/extinguishment, light emission color, etc., lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5, and the light emission pattern. The light emission of the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 is controlled according to the data. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data. The production control microcomputer 91 operates the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the third movable accessory 13 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The production control microcomputer 91 creates motion pattern data (driving data) that determines the motion mode of each of the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the third movable accessory 13, and the operation pattern data is generated. Accordingly, the operations of the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the third movable accessory 13 are controlled. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. It should be noted that the lamp control board 107 may be mounted with a CPU, and the CPU may execute the lighting control of the lamp and the operation control of the movable accessory members 14 and 15 based on the command. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may be mounted with a ROM, and the ROM may store data regarding the light emission pattern and the operation pattern.

An effect button detection switch 63a and a select button detection switch 68a are connected to the relay board 108. The effect button detection switch 63a detects that the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) has been pressed. When the effect button 63 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the effect button detection switch 63a to the sub control board 90 via the relay board 108. The select button detection switch 68a detects that the select button 68 has been pressed. The relay board 108 is also connected to a sword member detection switch that detects that the sword member 65 has been searched.

3. Data Structure of Gaming Machine The data structure of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. 5A is a diagram for explaining the table stored in the main ROM 83. FIG. 5B is a diagram for explaining the storage area provided in the main RAM 84. FIG. 6A is a diagram for explaining the table stored in the sub ROM 93. FIG. 6B is a diagram for explaining the storage area provided in the sub RAM 94.

In the main ROM 83 (FIG. 5(A)), a jackpot determination table T1, a reach determination table T2, an ordinary symbol hit determination table T3, an ordinary symbol variation pattern determination table T4, a jackpot type determination table T5, and a variation pattern. The determination table T6, the electric Chu opening pattern determination table T7, the special winning opening opening pattern determination table T8, the V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9, and the small hit determination table T10 are stored. These determination tables are referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in main control main processing (described later) executed by the game control microcomputer 81. The specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

In the main RAM 84 (FIG. 5B), a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special operation status set area 84d, a special figure reservation storage area 85, and a general figure reservation storage A region 86 is provided. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) in which a command output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side is set in the main control main process (described later). A fluctuation start command, a fluctuation stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V passage command, a customer waiting standby command, etc. are set. The flag setting area 84b is an area in which a flag indicating the state of the gaming machine or the gaming state is set in the main control main process (described later), and it is a jackpot flag, a jackpot end flag, a first winning flag, a second winning flag, A small hit flag, a V flag, a probability variation flag, a time saving flag, etc. are set. The counter setting area 84c is an area in which counters used in main control main processing (described later) are set, and random number counters, round counters, probability variation counters, time saving counters, and the like are set therein. The special operation status setting area 84d is an area in which the status in the special operation processing described later is set. The special figure reservation storage area 85 includes a first special figure reservation storage area 85a in which a first special figure reservation is stored and a second special figure reservation storage area 85b in which a second special figure reservation is stored. In the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, a random number group (reserved information) such as a random number per special symbol corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth special figure reservations, respectively. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area for storing are provided. In the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, a first random number group (holding information) for storing the first, second, third, and fourth special figure reservations, respectively, is stored. A storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. The universal figure reservation storage area 86 stores a random number group (reserved information) such as ordinary symbol random numbers (per random number) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth universal figure reservations, respectively. There are provided a first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area. In addition to the above area, the main RAM 84 is set with a hit type set buffer in which special figure stop symbol data is set, and drive data for driving the movable accessory 14, 15 or the frame movable body 600. Drive data buffer and the like are provided.

The pre-reading effect pattern determination table T51, the core effect pattern determination table T52, the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53, and the stop symbol pattern determination table T54 are stored in the sub ROM 93 (FIG. 6A). .. These determination tables are referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control main processing (described later) executed by the effect control microcomputer 91. The specific content of each decision table will be described later.

The sub RAM 94 (FIG. 6B) is provided with a command storage area 94a, an effect command set area 94b, a preliminary determination information storage area 94c, and a counter set area 94d. The command storage area 94a is an area (input buffer) in which a command input from the main control unit side is stored in a sub-control main process (described later), and includes a pre-determination command, a reserved ball count command, a fluctuation start command, and a fluctuation. A stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V passage command, a customer waiting standby command, etc. are stored. The effect command set area 94b is an area in which commands output from the sub control board 90 to the image control board 100, the sound control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108 are set in the sub control main processing (described later) ( The output buffer), a variation effect start command, a variation before command, a variation effect end command, an opening effect start command, a round effect start command, an ending effect start command, etc. are set. The prior determination information storage area 94c stores prior determination information in the sub-control main process (described later). The counter setting area 94d is an area in which a counter used in the sub-control main processing (described later) is set, and is a random number counter, a first special figure hold effect counter, a second special figure hold effect counter, a general figure hold effect counter. , A probabilistic effect counter, a time saving effect counter, etc. are set.

FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the gaming machine 1. FIG. 7A shows a random number acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 on the main control unit side, and FIG. 7B shows a random number acquired by the effect control microcomputer 91 on the sub control unit side. There is. The game control microcomputer 81, "big hit random number", "big hit type random number", "reach random number", "fluctuation pattern random number", "normal pattern random number (random number per hit)", "small hit random number" Is configured to be acquired at the timing described below. The “big hit random number” is a random number used for lottery (big hit determination) whether or not it is a big hit, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535. The “big hit type random number” is a random number used for lottery of the winning big hit type (big hit type determination), and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. "Reach random number" is a random number that is used to determine whether to generate a reach in the effect design variation effect showing the result when the jackpot determination is a loss, and a value in the range of 0 to 127. Take Reach is a state in which there is only one effect symbol that is variably displayed among a plurality of effect symbols (decorative symbols), and it depends on which symbol the effect symbol that is variably displayed is stopped and displayed. It is a state (for example, a state of “7↓7”) in which a combination of effect symbols showing a big hit is achieved. The effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the reach state may be displayed as if it is shaking in the display screen 7a. The “variation pattern random number” is a random number used to determine a variation pattern including a variation time, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "ordinary symbol random number (random number per hit)" is used in a lottery (ordinary symbol lottery) as to whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the electric Chu 22. The normal symbol random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 255. The “small hitting random number” is a random number used for lottery (small hitting determination) whether or not it is a small hit, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The “big hit random number”, the “big hit type random number”, the “reach random number”, and the “variable pattern random number” are acquired based on the ball entering the first starting opening 20 or the second starting opening 21. The “small hitting random number” is acquired based on the ball entering the second starting opening 21. The random value group acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, and the random value group acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 is It is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. The “normal symbol random number (random number per hit)” is acquired based on the passage of the gate 28. The acquired normal symbol random number value is stored in the universal symbol holding storage area 86.

The effect control microcomputer 91 is configured to acquire the "look-ahead effect random number" and the "chance up random number" at the timing described later. The “lookahead effect random number” is a random number used to determine the lookahead effect at the time of the variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The “chance up random number” is a random number used for determining the chance up effect at the time of the variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The “prefetch effect random number” is acquired based on the output of the preliminary determination command from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side. The acquired random number value group is stored in the sub RAM 94. The “chance up random number” is acquired based on the output of the fluctuation start command from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side. The acquired random number value is stored in the sub RAM 94.

FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the determination tables T1 to T4 and T10. FIG. 8(A) shows a diagram for explaining the jackpot determination table T1, FIG. 8(B) shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2, and FIG. 8(C). Shows a diagram for explaining the normal symbol hitting determination table T3, FIG. 8(D) shows a diagram for explaining the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, and FIG. 8(E). , A diagram for explaining the small hit determination table T10 is shown.

The jackpot determination table T1 indicates whether the jackpot random number value (any of 0 to 65535) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "jackpot" or "miss". It is a table referred to for determination. In FIG. 8A, when the jackpot random number value is “0 to 164” in the “normal probability state”, it is determined to be a “jackpot” (about probability 1/397), and the jackpot random number value is “0 to 164”. In the case of a numerical value other than (165 to 65535)”, it is indicated that “miss” is determined. Further, in the “high probability state”, when the jackpot random number value is “0 to 649”, it is determined to be a “jackpot” (about probability 1/101), and the jackpot random number value is a value other than “0 to 649 (650 ~65535)" is determined to be "miss". The contents of the “normal probability state” and the “high probability state” will be described later.

In the reach determination table T2, the reach random number value (any of 0 to 127) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "reach" or "no reach". It is a table referred to for determining whether or not. In addition, this reach determination table T2 is not referred to when the obtained jackpot random number value corresponds to the “jackpot”. In FIG. 8B, when the reach random number value is “0 to 13” in the “non-time saving state”, it is determined that “reach is present”, and the reach random number value is a value other than “0 to 13” (14 to 127)”, it is indicated that “no reach” is determined. Further, in the “time saving state”, when the reach random number value is “0 to 5”, it is determined to be “with reach”, and when the reach random number value is “a numerical value other than 0 to 5 (6 to 127)”. Is determined to be “no reach”. The contents of the “time saving state” and the “non-time saving state” will be described later. In the reach determination table T2, the reach in the lost state is less likely to occur in the time saving state than in the non-time saving state. This is to accelerate the digestion speed of the special figure reservation by selecting more reach-less loses with a short fluctuation time in the time saving state.

Ordinary symbol hit determination table T3, the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main processing (described later), the normal symbol random value acquired (any of 0-255) corresponds to "win" or "miss" It is a table referred to in order to determine whether to do. In FIG. 8(C), in the “non-time saving state”, when the normal symbol random number value is “0 to 2”, it is determined to be “win”, and the normal symbol random number value is a numerical value other than “0 to 2 (3 ~255)" is determined to be "miss". Further, in the "time saving state", when the normal symbol random number value is "0 to 254", it is determined as "winning", and when the normal symbol random number value is "a number other than 0 to 254 (255)" , "Loss" is determined.

Normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main processing (described later), depending on the game state (non-time saving state or time saving state), determine how many seconds the variation time of the normal symbol It is a table that is referred to in order to do. In FIG. 8(D), in the "non-time saving state", the variation time of the ordinary symbol is determined to be "30 seconds", and in the "time reduction state", the variation time of the ordinary symbol is determined to be "1 second". Is shown.

The small hitting determination table T10 corresponds to whether the small hitting random number value (any of 0 to 127) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to the “small hit” or “miss”. It is a table referred to in order to determine whether to do. It should be noted that the small hitting determination table T10 is not referred to when the acquired big hit random number value corresponds to the "big hit". In FIG. 8(E), in all states (regardless of game state), when the small hit random number value is "0 to 63", it is determined as "small hit" (probability 1/2), and small hit randomness It is shown that when the numerical value is “numerical value other than 0 to 63 (64 to 127)”, it is determined as “miss”. The small hit determination table T10 is a table that is referred to when the game ball is won in the second starting opening 21 (not referred to when the game ball is winning in the first starting opening 20). The small hit determination table T10 is a table that is not referred to when it is determined to be a “big hit”.

FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot type determination table T5. The jackpot type determination table T5, in the main control main process (described later) by the game control microcomputer 81, depending on the obtained jackpot type random number value (one of 0 to 127), "type of jackpot" and "special symbol" It is a table referred to in order to determine "type". In FIG. 9, when the jackpot type random number value is "0 to 24" when the lottery for the first special symbol (special map 1) is won, it is determined that the jackpot type is "16RV planned big jackpot", The stop symbol 1 (special symbol stop symbol) is determined as "big hit symbol 1". When the jackpot type random number value is "25 to 49", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV passing planned jackpot", and the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "jackpot symbol 2". When the jackpot type random number value is "50 to 55", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (actual 15R) V passing scheduled jackpot", and the special figure stop symbol is determined to be "jackpot symbol 3". When the jackpot type random number value is "56 to 67", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (actually 13R) V passing planned jackpot", and the special figure stop symbol is determined to be "jackpot symbol 4". When the jackpot type random number value is “68 to 127”, the jackpot type is determined to be “16R (actual 13R) V non-passing jackpot”, and the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be “jackpot symbol 5”. On the other hand, when the jackpot type random number value is “0 to 40” when winning in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the jackpot type is determined to be “16RV planned big jackpot”, The stop symbol (special symbol stop symbol) is determined to be "big hit symbol 1". When the jackpot type random number value is "41 to 82", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV passing scheduled jackpot", and the stop symbol (special symbol stop symbol) of special figure 2 is determined to be "big hit symbol 2". .. When the jackpot type random number value is “83 to 127”, the jackpot type is determined to be “16R (actual 13R) V non-passing jackpot”, and the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be “jackpot symbol 5”. In addition, by referring to the jackpot type determination table T5, "special figure stop symbol data" corresponding to the special figure stop symbol, "opening (OP) command" of special game, "round designation command", "ending (ED)" The "command" can also be specified. Regarding the specific contents of "16RV scheduled jackpot", "16R (actual 15R) V scheduled jackpot", "16R (actual 13R) V scheduled jackpot" and "16R (actual 13R) V non-passed jackpot" It will be described later.

FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in the non-time saving state. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in the time saving state. The variation pattern determination table T6 is a table referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) to determine the variation pattern according to the variation pattern random number value (0 to 127) acquired. ..
In FIG. 10, for example, in the non-time saving state, the first start opening 20 is won, the jackpot determination table T1 is determined to be “miss”, the reach determination table T2 is determined to be “reach”, and the number of reserved balls is “1”. It is shown that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be “P7” when the fluctuation pattern random value is “0 to 60”. In addition, in the non-time saving state, the holding of the second starting port 21 is exhausted (because it is difficult to win the second starting port 21 in the non-time saving state, the time saving state (high accurate high base state) ends and the normal state (non (Time saving state, low-probability low base state), the second starting port 21 is released), the jackpot determination table T1 is determined to be a “jackpot”, and the jackpot type determination table T5 is a “16RV passing planned jackpot”. , "Big hit symbol 2 (21H)", and the variation pattern random value is "0 to 127", the variation pattern is determined to be "P22". In addition, in the non-time saving state, the suspension of the second starting opening 21 is exhausted, it is determined as "small hit" in the small hit determination table T10, and when the variation pattern random value is "0 to 127", the variation pattern is " P34” is shown.

In FIG. 11, for example, in the time saving state, the first start opening 20 is won, the jackpot determination table T1 is determined to be “miss”, the reach determination table T2 is determined to be “no reach”, and the number of reserved balls is “3 to 4” and the variation pattern random value is “0 to 127”, the variation pattern is determined to be “P56”. In the time saving state, the player wins the second starting opening 21, is determined to be a “big hit” in the jackpot determination table T1, and is determined to be a “16RV scheduled jackpot” and a “jackpot symbol 2 (21H)” in the jackpot type determination table T5. When the random number value of the fluctuation pattern is "0 to 127", the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P62". Also, in the time saving state, the player wins the second starting opening 21, is determined to be “small hit” in the small hit determination table T10, and when the random number value of the variation pattern is “0 to 127”, the variation pattern is “P74”. It is shown to be judged.

As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, if the variation pattern is determined, the variation time is also determined. For example, in the non-time saving state, when the hold of the second starting port 21 is exhausted and it is determined that the small hit, the variation pattern is determined to be "P34", and the variation time is determined to be 15000 msec. In addition, in the time saving state, when the second start opening 21 is won and it is determined that the small hit, the variation pattern is determined to be "P74", and the variation time is determined to be 3000 msec. In addition, during the time saving state (high accuracy high base state), it is also during the small hit rush (RUSH) period described below until the next big hit, that is, during the small hit rush period, when the second starting opening 21 is won. Since the variation time is 3000 msec and the small hit probability is 1/2, small hits frequently occur in a short time. Then, during the small hit rush period, it is possible to aim for a big hit while increasing the number of game balls on hand. In addition, when the reach is reached, it is also determined whether the reach becomes the normal reach or the super reach (SP reach). Super reach is a reach production in which the variation time after reach is longer than in normal reach. Here, five types of super reach (SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4, SP5) having different fluctuation times are set. In SP1 to SP3, the normal reach is performed and the execution is advanced. The difference between SP1 to SP5 may be, for example, the presence or absence of pseudo-relation. In particular, SP5 is a variation pattern of a dedicated reach in which a pseudo jackpot suggestion is performed by winning in the second starting opening 21 during a small hit rush (RUSH) period that occurs in a time saving state (high accuracy high base state) described later ( "P62"). Note that SP5 also occurs during the hold exhaustion of the second starting opening 21 when the time saving state (high accuracy high base state) ends and the normal state (non-time saving state, low accuracy low base state) is reached. In some cases, the pseudo jackpot suggestion effect may be performed (variation pattern “P22”).

FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the electric charge opening pattern determination table T7. The electric chewing opening pattern determination table T7 is used by the gaming control microcomputer 81 to judge the opening pattern of the electric chewing 22 according to the game state (non-time saving state or time saving state) in the main control main process (described later). It is a referenced table. In FIG. 12A, the open pattern of the power tube 22 is determined to be the “open pattern 11” in the “non-time saving state”, and the open pattern is determined to be the “open pattern 12” in the “time saving state”. Is shown. In FIG. 12B, the contents of the open pattern 11 and the open pattern 12 are shown. In the opening pattern 11, the electric chute 22 is opened once for the opening time and for 0.2 seconds in the opening time. In the opening pattern 12, the number of times of opening is 3, the opening time of each time is 2.0 seconds, and the interval (opening interval) of 1.0 second is opened. However, the opening of the electric Chu 22 is closed even when the opening time remains, when there is a predetermined number of winning game balls (specified winning number, maximum 10).

FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the special winning opening opening pattern determination table T8. The special winning opening opening pattern determination table T8, the game control microcomputer 81, in the main control main processing (described later), according to the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9), the first special winning opening 30 and the second special winning opening It is a table referred to in order to determine the opening pattern of 35. In FIG. 13(A), as the special winning opening opening pattern in the jackpot game, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "12H", "20H", or "21H", the first special winning opening 30 and The opening pattern of the second special winning opening 35 is determined to be "opening pattern 21", and when the special figure stop symbol data is "14H", "15H", "22H", the first special winning opening 30 and the second big winning. The opening pattern of the mouth 35 is determined to be "opening pattern 22", and when the special figure stop symbol data is "13H", the opening pattern of the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35 is "opening pattern 23". It is shown to be judged. Further, in FIG. 13(A), as the special winning opening opening pattern in the small hitting game, when the special figure stop symbol data is "20H", the opening pattern of the second special winning opening 35 is determined to be "opening pattern 25". It is shown that when the special figure stop symbol data is "21H", the opening pattern of the second special winning opening 35 is determined to be the "opening pattern 26".
FIG. 13B shows the contents of the opening pattern 21, the opening pattern 22 and the opening pattern 23 as the special winning opening opening pattern in the jackpot game. In the opening pattern 21, the first big winning opening 30 with the opening time of 29.5 seconds is opened (long opening) at the 1st to 13th and 15th rounds, and the opening number is once at the 14th and 16th rounds. The second special winning opening 35 having an opening time of 29.5 seconds is opened (long opening). In the opening pattern 22, the first big winning opening 30 is opened (long opening) with the opening number of 1 time and the opening time of 29.5 seconds in the 1st to 13th Rs, and the opening number of 1 time and the opening time are opened in the 14th and 16th Rs. The second special winning opening 35 is opened (short opening) for 0.1 seconds, and the first large winning opening 30 is opened (short opening) once at 15R and the opening number is once, and the opening time is 0.1 seconds. .. In the opening pattern 23, the first special winning opening 30 with the opening time of 19.5 and the opening time of 29.5 seconds is opened (long opening) at the 1st to 13th and the 15th opening, and the opening number is once and the opening time is opened at the 14th opening. The second special winning opening 35 is opened (short open) for 0.1 seconds, and the second special winning opening 35 is opened (long open) once at 16R and the opening time is 29.5 seconds. .. However, the opening of the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35, even if the opening time remains, if there is a predetermined number of winning game balls (regular winning number, maximum 9) Will be closed.
FIG. 13C shows the contents of the opening pattern 25 and the opening pattern 26 as the big winning opening opening pattern in the small hit game. In the opening pattern 25, the second special winning opening 35 having the opening number of once and the opening time of 1.0 second is opened. In the opening pattern 26, the number of times of opening is 5, and the second special winning opening 35 is opened with the opening time of 0.3 seconds. That is, in the small hit game, the first big winning opening 30 is not opened, but only the second big winning opening 35 is opened. In addition, the opening pattern 25, when the "16RV scheduled big hit" by the big hit pattern 1 (20H) of special figure 2, during the small hit rush period after the end of the big hit game, and the second after the end of the small hit rush The holding of the starting port 21 is performed during digestion. Opening pattern 26, when the "16RV passing planned jackpot" by jackpot pattern 2 (21H) of special figure 2, during the jackpot rush period after the jackpot game is finished, and the second starting opening after the jackpot rush is finished 21 reservations are made during digestion. That is, the opening pattern 26 is a small hit game performed after the big hit game when the big hit is achieved via the variation pattern (“P62”) of the dedicated reach (SP5) in which a pseudo big hit suggestive effect described later is performed. It has an open pattern. In other words, the big winning opening pattern in the small hit game is different between when the jackpot is achieved through the pseudo jackpot suggestion effect and when the jackpot is achieved without passing the pseudo jackpot suggestion effect.

FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9. The V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9 is for the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 in the main control main process (described later) according to the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9). This is a referenced table. In FIG. 14A, when the special figure stop symbol data is “11H”, “12H”, “20H”, or “21H”, the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 is determined to be the “opening pattern 31”, When the special figure stop symbol data is "13H", the release pattern is determined to be "open pattern 32", and when the special figure stop symbol data is "14H", the release pattern is determined to be "open pattern 33", the special figure It is shown that when the stop symbol data is “15H” or “22H”, the release pattern is determined to be the “release pattern 34”. FIG. 14B shows the contents of the open pattern 31, the open pattern 32, the open pattern 33, and the open pattern 34. In the opening pattern 31, at the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 8th R, when the first prize is won at the first special winning opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a short time with an opening time of 0.1 seconds. At the 10th and 12th R, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a short time with the opening time of 0.1 seconds when the first winning hole 30 receives the first prize, and the opening time when the second winning occurs. The V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 32, at the second, fourth, sixth and twelfth rounds, when the first winning hole 30 receives the first prize, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a short time of 0.1 seconds. At the 8th and 10th Rs, when the first winning hole 30 receives the first winning, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a short time of 0.1 seconds, and when the second winning occurs, the opening time is increased. The V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 33, at the 2nd and 6th rounds, when the first prize is at the first special winning opening 30, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a short time of 0.1 seconds and the second prize is won. At this time, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a long time with a maximum opening time of 31.5 seconds. At the fourth, eighth, tenth, and twelfth rounds, when the first winning hole 30 receives the first prize, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a short time with an opening time of 0.1 seconds. In the opening pattern 34, at the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th, and 12th R's, when the first winning hole 30 receives the first prize, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a short time of 0.1 seconds. ..

4. Explanation of big hit etc. In the gaming machine 1, there are "big hit", "small hit" and "miss" as a result of big hit lottery (special symbol lottery). In the case of "big hit", the "big hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. In the case of "small hit", the "small hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. At the time of "missing", the "missing symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device 41. If you win the jackpot, you open the special winning opening (first big winning opening 30 and second big winning opening 35) in the opening pattern according to the type of special symbol that is stopped (type of big winning) Is executed. The jackpot game is an example of a special game. The jackpot game includes a plurality of round games (a unit opening game), an opening (OP) before the first round game is started, and an ending (ED) after the final round game is finished. There is. Each round game is started by the end of the opening or the end of the previous round game and ended by the start of the next round game. The time (interval time) for closing the special winning opening between round games is included in the open round game before the closing. If you win the small hit, the "small hit game" is executed to open the special winning opening (the second big winning opening 35) in the opening pattern according to the kind of big hit that triggered the occurrence of the small hit rush described later. It

There are multiple types of jackpots. The types of jackpots are as shown in FIG. Here, there are roughly two types of jackpots, namely, "V pass scheduled jackpot" and "V non-passage jackpot".
The "V passing planned jackpot (probable variation jackpot)" is an opening/closing member 32, an opening/closing member 37 and a V opening/closing member in an opening pattern (V passing planned opening pattern) that allows the game ball to pass to the V area 39 during the jackpot game. It is a jackpot that activates 71. In addition, "V passing planned jackpot (probable variation jackpot)" means that the gaming state is a highly accurate and high base state after the jackpot game ends and the next jackpot game is started, and during the period, the second start opening 21 is set. It is a small hit rush period where frequent winnings occur and small hits occur. Here, the special figure stop design data 11H ~ 14H, 20H, 21H jackpot corresponds to "V passing scheduled jackpot (probable variation jackpot)". The combination of the opening patterns of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 is (opening pattern 21: opening pattern 31), (opening pattern 22: opening pattern 33). ), or (opening pattern 23: opening pattern 32), it is possible to pass the game ball to the V area 39 during the jackpot game.
The "V non-passing planned jackpot (normal jackpot)" is an opening/closing member 32, an opening/closing member 37, and an opening/closing member 37 in an opening pattern (V non-passing opening pattern) in which the game ball cannot pass to the V area 39 during the jackpot game. It is a big hit that operates the V opening/closing member 71. The "V non-passing jackpot (normal jackpot)" is a low-probability low base state after the end of the jackpot game, and it is difficult to win a prize in the second starting opening 21 during that period. The small hit rush period does not occur after the big hit game ends. Here, the special figure stop design data 15H, 22H jackpot corresponds to the "V non-passing jackpot". When the combination of the opening patterns of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 is (opening pattern 22: opening pattern 34), the V area during the jackpot game. It becomes impossible for the game ball to pass to 39.
As described above, the opening pattern 22 of the opening/closing member 32 and the opening/closing member 37 serves both as the V passage scheduled opening pattern and the V non-passage scheduled opening pattern.

The “V passing planned jackpot” includes “16RV passing jackpot”, “16R (actual 13R) V passing jackpot”, and “16R (actual 15R) V passing jackpot”. The “16RV scheduled jackpot” has a substantial total number of rounds of 16R. From 1R to 13R and 15R, the first special winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R. 14R and 16R open the second special winning opening 35 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 21). In 10R and 12R, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened long (FIG. 14: opening pattern 31), and passage to the V area 39 in the first special winning opening 30 is easily possible.

The "16R (actual 13R) V passing jackpot" has a total round number of 16R, but the substantial total number of rounds is 13R. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but at 15R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R, and with 14R. Even in 16R, the second special winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 13R) V passing big jackpot", from 14R to 16R, the opening time of the special winning opening is extremely short, and it is a round in which no prize ball can be expected. In other words, the "16R (actual 13R) V passing planned jackpot" is a jackpot of the actual 13R. In 2R and 6R, the V opening/closing member 71 is long opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 33), and passage to the V area 39 in the first special winning opening 30 is easily possible.

The “16R (actual 15R) V passing jackpot” has a total round number of 16R, but the substantial total round number is 15R. In other words, from 1R to 13R and 15R, the first special winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, and in 16R, the second large winning opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R. The second special winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 23). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 15R) V passing big jackpot", 14R is a round in which a special winning opening is extremely short and a prize ball cannot be expected. That is, the "16R (actual 15R) V passing planned jackpot" is a jackpot of substantially 15R. In 8R and 10R, the V opening/closing member 71 is long opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 32), and passage to the V area 39 in the first special winning opening 30 is easily possible.

The “V non-passing jackpot” is the “16R (actual 13R) V non-passing jackpot” of the opening pattern 22 in which the total number of rounds is 16R, but the actual total number of rounds is 13. In other words, from 1R to 13R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but at 15R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R, and with 14R. Even in 16R, the second special winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing jackpot" from 14R to 16R, the opening time of the special winning opening is extremely short, and it is a round in which no prize ball can be expected. In other words, the "16R (actual 13R) V non-passing jackpot" is a jackpot of the actual 13R. In 2R, 4R, 6R, 8R, 10R and 12R, although the V opening/closing member 71 is opened, the opening is a short opening (FIG. 14: opening pattern 34), and the V area 39 in the first special winning opening 30 is opened. It is almost impossible for game balls to pass.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9, the distribution ratio of the jackpot in the lottery of the first special symbol (special map 1) is 68/128 (about 53%) of the planned V passing jackpot (the jackpot with the rush rush), V The non-passing jackpot is 60/128 (about 47%). On the other hand, the distribution rate of the jackpot in the lottery of the second special symbol (special map 2) is the V passing jackpot (the jackpot with the rush rush) is 83/128 (about 64.8%), the V non-passing schedule The jackpot is 45/128 (about 35.2%). In this way, in the gaming machine 1, rather than the jackpot lottery (lottery of the first special symbol) in which the game ball is won in the first start opening 20, the game ball is won in the second start opening 21. The lottery (lottery of the second special symbol) is set to be advantageous to the player.

5. Explanation of gaming state The gaming state of the gaming machine 1 will be described. The game control microcomputer 81 can execute "probability variation control" and "variation time reduction control" for the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display 41 and the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display 42, respectively. Is. Here, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 controls the probability variation for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41 is called "high probability state (high-probability state, probability variation state, probability variation state)", and probability variation The states that are not controlled are simply called "normal probability states (non-high probability states, low probability states, normal states)". The game control microcomputer 81 uses the jackpot determination table (FIG. 8(A)) in which the number of jackpot random numbers determined to be jackpots is higher in the high-probability state than in the normal-probability state, as the probability variation control of the special symbol. A high probability state is realized by performing a jackpot judgment. Therefore, the high-probability state has a higher jackpot probability than the normal-probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is performing the probability variation control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, compared with the case where the probability variation control is not executed, by the special symbol display 41 The probability that the display result (stopped symbol) of the variable display of the special symbol will be a jackpot symbol becomes high.

In addition, the state where the game control microcomputer 81 controls the variation time shortening for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41 is called "time saving state", and the state where the variation time reduction control is not performed is simply "non-time saving state". Say. In the time saving state, the variation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the variation display to the time of deriving and displaying the display result) is shorter than the non-time saving state. The game control microcomputer 81 has a variation pattern determination table T6 (FIGS. 10 and 11) that is determined such that a variation pattern having a short variation time is selected more frequently in the time saving state than in the non-time saving state. The fluctuation pattern used is judged. In other words, when the game control microcomputer 81 is performing the variable time reduction control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, the variable of the special symbol is variable as compared with the case where the variation time reduction control is not executed. It becomes easy to select a short fluctuation time as the fluctuation time of the display. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digesting the special figure reservation becomes faster, and an effective prize (a prize that can be stored as the special figure reservation) to the starting opening is likely to occur. As a result, it is possible to aim for a jackpot while the game progresses smoothly. The game control microcomputer 81 may execute the probability variation control and the variation time reduction control at the same time for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, or may execute only one of them. However, in this example, as will be described later, an embodiment is shown in which the probability variation control and the variation time reduction control are simultaneously executed.

The game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability variation control and variation time reduction control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42 in synchronization with the variation time reduction control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41. That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time reduction control for the normal symbol in the case of the time saving state, and does not execute it in the case of the non-time saving state. The game control microcomputer 81, as a probability variation control of the normal symbol, the number of ordinary symbol random number values (random number values per hit) determined to be normal is more often in the time saving state than in the non-time saving state. Using FIG. 8(C), a hit determination (ordinary symbol determination) is performed. Therefore, in the time saving state, the winning probability is higher than in the normal symbol normal probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 is performing the probability variation control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, compared with the case where not performing the probability variation control, by the normal symbol display 42 The probability that the display result (stopped pattern) of the variable display of the normal symbol is a hit symbol becomes high. In the time saving state, the variation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the non-time saving state. Here, the variation time of the normal symbol is 30 seconds in the non-time saving state, but is 1 second in the time saving state (FIG. 8(D)). Further, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the non-time saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the opening time extension control for the electric Chu 22. In addition, in the time saving state, the number of times of opening the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game is larger than in the non-time saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the opening frequency increase control for the electric chew 22. In the situation where the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the probability variation control and variation time shortening control for the ordinary symbol of the ordinary symbol display 42, and the opening time extension control and the opening number increase control for the electric chew 22, Compared to the case where these controls are not executed, the power tube 22 is frequently opened, and the game ball is frequently won in the second starting opening 21. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of shot balls, increases. Therefore, a state in which these controls are executed is called a "high base state", and a state in which these controls are not executed is called a "low base state". In the high base state, you can aim for a big hit without significantly reducing the number of game balls you have. It should be noted that the high base state is a state in which so-called electric support control (control for supporting winning by the electric starting 22 to the second starting opening 21) is being executed. The high base state (power assist control state) does not have to execute all the above-mentioned controls. That is, among the probability variation control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, the variation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, the opening time extension control for the electric chew 22, and the opening number increase control for the electric chew 22 It suffices to execute the one or more controls so that the power tube 22 can be opened more easily than when the control is not executed. Further, the high base state (electric power control state) may be independently controlled without being associated with the time saving state.

In the gaming machine 1, the gaming state after the jackpot game due to the winning of the V passing planned jackpot is a high-probability state, a time saving state, and a high base state if the V area 39 is passed during the jackpot game. .. This gaming state is particularly referred to as a “high-accuracy high-base state” or a “high-accuracy short-time state”. The high-probability-high base state ends when the variable display of special symbols is executed 10,000 times. In other words, the high-probability-high base state is ended by winning the next big hit (next big hit) and executing the big hit game. In addition, the gaming state after the jackpot game due to the winning of the V non-passing jackpot is the normal probability state (non-high probability) unless the V area 39 is passed during the jackpot game (almost never). State, that is, a state with low probability), a non-time saving state, and a low base state (non-electric power support control state). This gaming state is particularly referred to as "low accurate low base state". The low-probability low-base state may be referred to as a "normal game state" or a "low-probability non-time saving state (also simply referred to as non-time saving state)". When the game machine 1 is played for the first time, the game state after the power is turned on is this low accurate low base state. In addition, although not implemented in this example, there are gaming states of normal probability state (non-high probability state, that is, low probability state), time saving state, and high base state (electric support control state). Probable high base state", "low accurate short time state" (state controlled to at least one of the high probability state and high base state is referred to as "specific game state"). In addition, a state during execution of the special game (big hit game) may be referred to as a "special game state (big hit game state)".

In a high base state such as a high-probability-high base state or a low-probability-high base state, it is advantageous to advance the game by allowing the game ball to enter the right game area 3B (FIG. 1) by right-handing. The electric support control makes it easier to open the electric Chu 22 than in the low base state, and it is easier to win the second starting port 21 than to win the first starting port 20. is there. From this, in the high base state, while passing the game ball to the gate 28, which is a trigger for the normal symbol lottery, the player strikes right to win the game ball to the second starting opening 21. As a result, it is possible to obtain a large number of starting winnings (winnings in the second starting opening 21) and to frequently generate a small hit, as compared with the case of hitting the ball left. In the gaming machine 1, the right-handed game is played even during the big hit game. On the other hand, in the low base state, it is advantageous to advance the game by letting the game ball enter the left game area 3A (FIG. 1) by left-handing. This is because, in the low electric power base state, the electric power support control is not executed, so that the electric power chewing 22 is less likely to be opened than in the high base state, and it is difficult to win a prize in the second starting opening 21. This is because it is easier to win the first starting opening 20 than to win the second starting opening 21. From this, in the low base state, a left hit is performed in order to win the game ball to the first starting opening 20. As a result, it is possible to obtain a large number of starting winnings (winnings in the first starting opening 20) rather than hitting right.

6. Operation of Game Control Microcomputer 81 The operation of the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 (FIG. 3) will be described with reference to FIGS. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers and the like that appear in the explanation of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the main RAM 84. The game control microcomputer 81 corresponds to win/loss determination means (FIG. 23) and win/loss advance determination means (FIGS. 18 and 19).

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart of main control main processing. The game control microcomputer 81 reads a program for executing main control main processing from the main ROM 83 when the power of the game machine 1 is turned on. In the main control main processing, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs initial setting (step S001). In the initial setting, for example, setting of the main CPU 82, resetting of various flags, status, counter, and the like are performed. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". The initial setting is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

After the initial setting, the game control microcomputer 81 prohibits interruption of interruption processing (step S002), and performs normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing (step S003). In this normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing, the game control microcomputer 81 uses various random number counter values (big hit random number value, big hit type random number value, reach random number value, fluctuation pattern random number value) shown in FIG. 7(A). , Normal symbol random number value, small hit random number value) is incremented by 1 and updated. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0", or may be randomly changed. Further, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated by using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC and the like.

After the normal symbol/special symbol main random number updating process, the game control microcomputer 81 permits interruption of the interruption process (step S004). While the interrupt is enabled, the main timer interrupt process (step S005) can be executed. The main-side timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 at a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec cycle). That is, the main-side timer interrupt process is executed every predetermined period (for example, 4 msec period). Then, after the main-side timer interrupt process is completed, until the next main-side timer interrupt process is started, the updating process of various counter values by the normal symbol/special symbol main random number updating process is repeatedly executed. .. When an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 in the interrupt disabled state, the main timer interrupt process is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled.

[Main side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the main timer interrupt processing (FIG. 15: step S005). In the main timer interrupt process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs a random number update process (step S101). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 updates the various random number counter values shown in FIG. 7(A). This random number updating process is the same as the normal symbol/special symbol main random number updating process performed in the main control main process (FIG. 15) described above. That is, the update processing of the various random number counter values is performed during the execution period of the main-side timer interrupt process and other periods (the period from the end of the main-side timer interrupt process to the start of the next main-side timer interrupt process). And both.

After the random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs an input process (step S102). In the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 reads the detection signals detected by various sensors attached to the gaming machine 1 and outputs payout data for paying out prize balls according to the type of the winning opening to the main RAM 84. Set in buffer. The various sensors include, for example, the first starting opening sensor 20a, the second starting opening sensor 21a, the first big winning opening sensor 30a, the second big winning opening sensor 35a, the normal winning opening sensor 27a, and the normal winning opening sensor 29a (Fig. 3).

After the input processing, the game control microcomputer 81 has a starting opening sensor detection processing (step S103), a normal operation processing (step S104), a special operation processing (step S105), a V area sensor detection processing (step S106), a holding ball. The number processing (step S107) is sequentially executed. Details of these processes will be described later. After the number of reserved balls is reached, the game control microcomputer 81 performs an output process (step S108). In the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the command set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 in each process described above to the sub control board 90. After the output processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing (step S109). In other processing, for example, the second special figure reservation indicator 43b is controlled to a display mode showing the number based on the special figure 2 reserved sphere number described later, and the first special figure based on the special figure 1 reserved sphere number. The hold indicator 43a is controlled to a display mode showing the number.

[Starting sensor detection process]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the starting opening sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S103). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not a game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201). This determination is made depending on whether or not the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a. When the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (step S201: NO), the process skips to step S205. When the game ball passes through the gate 28 (step S201: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of normal symbol holding balls is "4 (upper limit value)" (step S202). The normal symbol holding sphere number is the number of ordinary figures held, more specifically, a value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 for counting the number of held figures. If the number of normal symbol holding balls is "4" (step S202: YES), the process skips to step S205. If the number of normal symbol holding balls is "3" or less (step S202: NO), after adding "1" to the number of normal symbol holding balls (step S203), the normal symbol random number acquisition process is performed (step S204). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 acquires the value of the normal symbol random number counter (FIG. 7: the value of label-TRND-H), and the acquired random number value from the first to the general figure reservation storage area 86 of the main RAM 84. Of the fourth storage area, it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the current number of ordinary symbol holding balls.

In step S205, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a game ball has won in the second starting opening 21. This determination is made depending on whether or not the game ball is detected by the second starting opening sensor 21a. When the game ball has not won in the second starting opening 21 (step S205: NO), the process skips to step S210. When the game ball wins (step S205: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the special figure 2 holding ball number is "4 (upper limit value)" (step S206). The special figure 2 reserved number of balls is the number of second special figure reserved, more specifically, a value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 for counting the number of second special figure reserved. If the number of reserved balls of special figure 2 is "4" (step S206: YES), the process skips to step S210. When the special figure 2 reservation sphere number is below 3 (step S206: NO), after adding "1" to the special figure 2 reservation sphere number (step S207), special figure 2 relation random number acquisition processing is done (step. S208). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter (Fig. 7: value of label-TRND-A), the value of jackpot type random number counter (Fig. 7: value of label-TRND-AS), the value of reach random number counter (Fig. 7: label -TRND-RC value), fluctuation pattern random number counter value (Fig. 7: label-TRND-T1 value), and small hit random number counter value (Fig. 7: label-TRND-K value). The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number value group in a storage area corresponding to the current special figure 2 holding ball number among the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure holding storage area 85b. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily stores the acquired random number value group in a buffer (preliminary determination buffer) different from the second special diagram reservation storage area 85b for the later-described special figure 2 preliminary determination processing (FIG. 18). Memory (hold). After the special figure 2 relation random number acquisition processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 2 preliminary determination processing (step S209). The details of the special figure 2 prior determination process will be described later.

In step S210, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not a game ball has won the first starting opening 20. This determination is made depending on whether or not the game ball is detected by the first starting opening sensor 20a. When the game ball has not won in the first starting opening 20 (step S210: NO), this processing is ended. When the game ball wins the first starting opening 20 (step S210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the special figure 1 reserved ball number is "4 (upper limit value)" ( Step S211). The special figure 1 reserved sphere number is the number of the first special figure reserved, and more specifically, a value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 for counting the number of the first special figure reserved. If the number of reserved balls for special figure 1 is "4" (step S211: YES), this processing ends. If the number of special sphere 1 reserved balls is "3" or less (step S211: NO), after adding "1" to the number of special sphere 1 reserved spheres (step S212), a special figure 1-related random number acquisition process is performed (step S212). S213). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter, the value of the jackpot type random number counter, the value of the reach random number counter, and the value of the variation pattern random number counter are acquired in accordance with the above-mentioned special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (step S208). The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number value group in a storage area corresponding to the current number of special figure 1 reserved balls among the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily stores the acquired random number value group in a buffer (preliminary determination buffer) different from the first special diagram reserved storage area 85a for the later-described special figure 1 preliminary determination processing (FIG. 19). Memory (hold). After the special figure 1-related random number acquisition processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 1 preliminary determination processing (step S214). Details of the special figure 1 prior determination process will be described later.

[Special figure 2 pre-determination process]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the special figure 2 prior determination process (FIG. 17: step S209). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S301). When the probability variation flag is OFF (step S301: NO), this process ends. That is, when the probability variation flag is OFF, the preliminary determination is not performed. On the other hand, when the probability variation flag is ON, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the high-probability state table of the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) and performs jackpot pre-determination (step S302). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first obtains the jackpot random number value as the determination value temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). To do. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 uses the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to refer to and the jackpot random number value to make a pre-determination of whether or not a jackpot. Here, since the high probability state (probability change flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81, among the jackpot determination table T1, the table for high probability state (big hit determination value "0" ~ "649") Refer to and judge beforehand whether it is a big hit or not. That is, when the jackpot random number value is "0" to "649", the jackpot is pre-determined, and when it is any other value, the "judgment" is pre-determined. In this embodiment, the pre-judgment is performed by using the big hit judgment table T1 used in the big hit judgment process (FIG. 23) described later. The pre-judgment may be performed using the jackpot judgment table.

When the result of the jackpot pre-determination is “miss” (step S304: NO), the process skips to step S306. On the other hand, when the result of the jackpot pre-determination is "big hit" (step S304: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the jackpot type pre-determination (step S305). In the jackpot type pre-determination, the game control microcomputer 81 first, the jackpot type random number value as the determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 2 relation random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). To get. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs pre-judgment of the jackpot type based on the obtained jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). Here, regardless of whether the jackpot type random number value is "0" to "127", it is preliminarily determined to be a "16RV scheduled jackpot". In addition, in the present embodiment, the prior determination is performed using the jackpot type determination table T5 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) described later. Pre-determination may be performed using the jackpot type determination table for determination.

In step S306, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a variation pattern pre-determination. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first, the variation pattern random number value as the determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 2 relation random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208), Also, the reach random number value is acquired. Next, here, since the time saving state (the time saving flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) for the time saving state, and the jackpot preliminary determination result of step S304, The variation pattern is specified from the reach presence/absence pre-determination result obtained from the reach random number value and the variation pattern random value. In the variation pattern determination table T6 of FIG. 11, the variation pattern selected may differ depending on the number of reserved balls. Here, it is assumed that all the fluctuation patterns that may be selected due to the difference in the number of reserved balls are selected. For example, from the jackpot pre-determination result and the reach presence/absence pre-determination result, the reach loss is pre-determined, and when the variation pattern random value is “60”, the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the number of reserved balls is “1-2. , The selected variation pattern “P64” and the variation pattern “P68” selected if the number of reserved balls is “3 to 4”. In this embodiment, the preliminary determination is performed using the variation pattern determination table T6 used in the variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25) described later, but as another embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T6. The preliminary determination may be performed using a variation pattern determination table for the preliminary determination different from

In step S307, the game control microcomputer 81 creates a preliminary determination command. The pre-determination command includes a jackpot pre-determination result, (a jackpot type pre-determination result in the case of a big hit), and a variation pattern pre-determination result. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the created pre-determination command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S308), and ends this processing.

[Special map 1 pre-determination process]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the special figure 1 prior determination process (FIG. 17: step S214). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S401). Contrary to the above-mentioned Toku-zu 2 pre-determination processing, when the probability variation flag is ON (step S401: YES), this processing ends. That is, when the probability variation flag is ON, the prior determination is not performed. On the other hand, when the probability variation flag is OFF (step S401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for the normal probability state of the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to perform the jackpot predetermination (step). S402). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first obtains the jackpot random number value as the determination value temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer by the special figure 1-related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S213). To do. Next, here, since the normal probability state (probability variation flag is OFF), the game control microcomputer 81, in the jackpot determination table T1, the table for the normal probability state (the jackpot determination value is "0" to "164." It is pre-judged based on "). That is, when the jackpot random number value is “0” to “164”, the jackpot is pre-determined, and when it is any other value, the “miss” is pre-determined. Note that the jackpot pre-determination may use a jackpot determination table for pre-determination different from the jackpot determination table T1. After that, the processes of steps S404 to S408 are the same as steps S304 to S308 of the above-described special figure 2 preliminary determination process (FIG. 18), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

[Normal operation processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the normal operation process (FIG. 16: step S104). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the power cable 22 is operating (step S501). If the power cable 22 is operating (step S501: YES), the process proceeds to step S520. When the power tube 22 is not in operation (step S501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol is changing (step S502). If the normal symbol is changing (step S502: YES), the process skips to step S508. When the normal symbol is not changing (step S502: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0" (step S503). If the number of reserved balls is "0" (step S503: YES), this process ends. When the number of reserved balls is 1 or more (step S503: NO), the number of ordinary symbol reserved balls is decremented by 1 (step S504). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 in the state where the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0", the number of reserved balls of the ordinary symbol is once "1" in step S203 of the starting opening sensor detection process (FIG. 17). , And then the holding is digested in this step S504, and the number of holding balls of the normal symbol immediately becomes “0”. This also applies to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol. That is, in step S207 and step S212 of the starting mouth sensor detection process (FIG. 17), the number of reserved special symbols becomes “1”, and then step S1404 and step in the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) described later. In S1410, the reservation is exhausted and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol becomes "0". Next, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the normal symbol hit determination table T3 (FIG. 8(C)) to perform hit determination (step S505). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81, first, the normal symbol random number value (as the determination value stored in the first storage area of the universal figure reservation storage area 86 (corresponding to the first universal figure reservation) ( The random number per hit) is read. Then, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol random number value, the gaming state (whether or not the time saving state), and the normal symbol hit determination table T3 are used. For example, in the non-time saving state, when the normal symbol random number value is “0” to “2”, it is determined as “win”, and when the normal symbol random number value is other than that, it is determined as “miss”. (See FIG. 8C).

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern with reference to the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 8(D)) (step S506). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines the game state (whether it is a time saving state), and using the determination result of the game state and the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, the normal symbol variation Select the variation time of the normal pattern as a pattern. Here, in the non-time saving state, the variation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "30 seconds", and in the time saving state, the variation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "1 second" (see FIG. 8D). .. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected normal symbol fluctuation pattern to start the variable display of the normal symbol (step S507).

In step S508, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol variation time has elapsed and ended. The variation time of the normal symbol is the variation time selected in step S506 (see FIG. 8D). When the variable time has not ended (step S508: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this processing. That is, the variable display of the normal symbols is continued. On the other hand, when the variation time has ended (step S508: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 stops the variation display (step S509), and in the case of “miss” in the hit determination (step S505), (Step S510: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the hit determination is “win” (step S510: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets a power-chu open pattern (step S511). The opening pattern of the electric Chu 22 is selected with reference to the electric Chu opening pattern determination table T7 (FIG. 12A). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the game state (whether or not it is a time saving state), and uses the determination result of the game state and the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 to open the electric chew 22. Select. Here, "opening pattern 11" is selected in the non-time saving state, and "opening pattern 12" is selected in the time saving state. After the selection of the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the electric Chu operation so as to follow the selected opening pattern (step S512), and ends this processing.

In the above-mentioned step S501, when the electric Chu 22 is operating (step S501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the electric Chu 22 is satisfied (step S520). The closing condition here is that the number of winning prizes to the electric chew 22 has reached a specified maximum winning number (for example, 6), or that the operating time of the electric chew 22 has elapsed and the electric chew 22 is to be closed. It means that one of the things that has been reached is satisfied. The operating time of the power cable 22 is the operating time corresponding to the opening pattern selected in step S511. When the closing condition of the power cable 22 is not satisfied (step S520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this processing. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the electric Chu 22 is satisfied (step S520: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (closes) the electric Chu 22 to stop its operation (Step S521), and this processing To finish.

[Special operation processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the special operation process (FIG. 16: step S105). Here, the processing regarding the special symbol display 41 and the special winning device (the first special winning device 31 and the second special winning device 36) is divided into four stages, and each stage is "1" of the "special operation status", Called "2", "3", "4". When the "special operation status" is "1" (step S1301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special symbol standby process (step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, big hit determination, small hit determination, variation pattern selection, etc. are executed. When the "special operation status" is "2" (step S1301: NO, step S1303: YES), the special symbol changing process is performed (step S1304). In the special symbol changing process, the change stop command is output after the change time has elapsed. When the "special operation status" is "3" (steps S1301, S1303: NO, step S1305: YES), special symbol determination processing is performed (step S1306). In the special symbol determination process, output of the opening command and the like are executed at the time of a big hit. When the "special operation status" is "4" (steps S1301, S1303, S1305: NO), special electric auditors product processing is performed (step S1308). In the special electric auditors product processing, a big hit game and a small hit game are executed. Details of each of the above processes will be described later. The special operation status is "1" by default.

In addition, the special operation process, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are executed in parallel by making the process relating to the first special symbol display device 41a and the process relating to the second special symbol display device 41b independent. It may be configured to be capable of simultaneous fluctuation. In this case, the processing relating to the first special symbol display 41a and the special winning device (the first special winning device 31 and the second special winning device 36) is divided into four stages, and each stage is designated as "special figure 1 operation status". Called "1", "2", "3", "4". In addition, the processing regarding the second special symbol display 41b and the special winning device is divided into four stages, and each stage is defined as "1", "2", "3", "4" of "special diagram 2 operation status". Call. The initial setting of "special figure 1 operation status" and "special figure 2 operation status" is "1". The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not one of the "special figure 1 operation status" and the "special figure 2 operation status" is "4". When either "special figure 1 operation status" or "special figure 2 operation status" is "4", special electric auditors product processing is performed. In the special electric auditors product processing, a big hit game and a small hit game are executed. Specifically, when the special figure 1 operation status is "4", the big hit game by the big hit of special figure 1 is executed. When the special figure 2 operation status is "4", the big hit game or the small hit game by the big hit of special figure 2 is executed. When neither “special figure 1 operation status” nor “special figure 2 operation status” is “4”, the game control microcomputer 81 indicates that “special figure 1 operation status” is “1”, “2” or “3”. The decision is made. When "special figure 1 operation status" is "1", special figure 1 standby processing is performed. In the special figure 1 standby process, the hit determination, the variation pattern selection, and the like of special figure 1 are executed. When the "special figure 1 operation status" is "2", the special figure 1 changing process is performed. In the special figure 1 changing process, the change stop command is output after the change time of special figure 1 has elapsed. When the "special figure 1 operation status" is "3", the special figure 1 confirmation process is performed. In the special figure 1 confirmation process, the opening command is output at the time of a big hit or a small hit in the special figure 1 lottery. After determining whether the "special figure 1 operation status" is "1", "2" or "3", the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the "special figure 2 operation status" is "1" or "2". It is judged whether it is "3". When "special figure 2 operation status" is "1", special figure 2 standby processing is performed. In the special figure 2 standby process, the hit determination and the variation pattern selection of the special figure 2 are executed. When the "special figure 2 operation status" is "2", the special figure 2 changing process is performed. In the special figure 2 changing process, the change stop command is output after the change time of special figure 2 has elapsed. When the "special figure 2 operation status" is "3", the special figure 2 confirmation process is performed. In the special figure 2 confirmation process, the opening command is output at the time of a big hit or a small hit in the special figure 2 lottery. As described above, according to the special operation process of the present embodiment, the waiting process, the changing process, and the confirming process of Toku-zu 1 and the waiting process, the changing process, and the confirming process of Toku-zu 2 are executed in parallel. It On the other hand, the big hit game and the small hit game are executed with priority over the standby process, the variation process, and the confirmation process of special figure 1 and special figure 2.

[Special symbol waiting process]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the special symbol waiting process (FIG. 21: step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the special figure 2 holding ball number is "0" (step S1400). When the special figure 2 reservation sphere number is 0 (step S1400: YES), that is, in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b If not stored, the process moves to step S1407. Toku-zu 2 When the number of reserved balls is "1" or more (step S1400: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a small hit determination process (step S1401). In the small hitting determination processing, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the small hitting determination table T10 (FIG. 8) to perform the small hitting determination. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first sets the small hitting random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. It is read and it is determined whether or not it is a small hit by using the read small hit random number value and the small hit determination table T10. Next, when the result of the small hit determination is "small hit", the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the small hit flag and sets the special figure stop symbol data corresponding to the small hit symbol in the buffer of the main RAM 84. , This process ends. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 executes a big hit determination process (step S1402) and a variation pattern selection process (step S1403). Details of these processes will be described later.

After the variation pattern selection processing, the number of special sphere 2 reserved balls is decremented by one (step S1404). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the storage location of the suspension information (various random number values) stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure suspension storage area 85b to the side to be read from the current position. While shifting by one, the pending information stored in the farthest place from the side to be read in the second special figure pending storage area 85b is cleared (step S1405). For example, when the hold information is stored in the first to third storage areas, the hold information stored in the third storage area is cleared and the hold information is stored in the first to fourth storage areas. If so, the pending information stored in the fourth storage area is cleared. By the above steps, the second special figure reservation is digested in the order in which it is reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9B (the leftmost reserved image 9B among the four reserved images 9B) corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is displayed. It shifts to the reserved digested image display area side and is displayed as the reserved digested image 9C. Further, the reserved images 9B (the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9B from the left among the four reserved images 9B) corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b are respectively on the left side. Shift one (Fig. 1). As a result, the player can recognize that one second special figure reservation has been completed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special figure 2 variation start process (step S1406). In the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing, the fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started, and the fluctuation time timer is set. The fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern selection process is set in the fluctuation time timer. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2". The fluctuation start command (special figure 2 fluctuation start command) set in the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing includes information about the special figure stop symbol data set in the small hit determination processing (step S1401) and the big hit judgment processing. The information about the special figure stop symbol data set at (step S1402) and the information about the variation pattern set at the variation pattern selection process (step S1403) (including information about variation time) are included.

In step S1401, if the special figure 2 holding ball number is "0" (step S1401: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the special figure 1 holding ball number is "0" ( Step S1407). Toku-zu 1 When the number of reserved balls is “0” (step S1407: YES), that is, in the first Toku-zu reservation storage area 85a, the random number group acquired due to the winning of the first starting opening 20 If not stored, the process proceeds to step S1413. When the number of reserved balls of special figure 1 is "1" or more (step S1407: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a big hit determination process (step S1408) and a variation pattern selection process (step S1409). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the number of special sphere 1 reserved balls is decremented by 1 (step S1410). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage locations of the various random number values stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a by one toward the side where it is read from the current position. At the same time, the pending information stored in the farthest place from the side to be read in the first special figure pending storage area 85a is cleared (step S1411). By the above steps, the first special figure reservation is digested in the order in which it is reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9A (the rightmost reserved image 9A among the four reserved images 9A) corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a is displayed. It shifts to the reserved digested image display area side and is displayed as the reserved digested image 9C. Further, the reserved images 9A (the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9A from the left among the four reserved images 9A) corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a are respectively on the right side. Shift one (Fig. 1). Thereby, the player can recognize that one 1st special figure reservation has been completed. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special figure 1 variation start process (step S1412). In the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, the fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started, and the fluctuation time timer is set. The fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern selection process is set in the fluctuation time timer. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2" (step S1406). The fluctuation start command (special figure 1 fluctuation start command) set in the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing includes information on the special figure stop symbol data set in the jackpot determination processing (step S1408) and a fluctuation pattern selection processing ( Information about the variation pattern (including information about variation time) set in step S1409) is included.

In step S1407, when the special figure 1 number of reserved balls is “0” (step S1407: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a standby screen (step). S1413). The standby screen is a demo screen for waiting for customers. The game control microcomputer 81 may make the determination by, for example, turning on or off the demo screen display flag for waiting for customers. If the screen is the standby screen (step S1413: YES), this process ends. When it is not the standby screen (step S1413: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets a customer standby command for displaying a standby scene in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 after a predetermined standby time has elapsed. (Step S1414), the present process ends. As described above, according to the special symbol waiting process of the present embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol based on the first special symbol suspension is executed only when the second special symbol suspension is “0”. That is, the completion of the second special figure reservation is executed prior to the completion of the first special figure reservation. Further, according to the jackpot type determination table T5 of the present embodiment, the jackpot based on the second special figure reservation is more profitable for the player than the lottery based on the first special figure hold (the jackpot for passing V). It is easier to win.

[Big hit judgment processing]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 22: steps S1402 and S1408). Since the big hit determination process (step S1402) of special figure 2 and the big hit determination process (step S1408) of special figure 1 have the same processing flow, they will be described collectively. In the jackpot determination process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S1501). When the probability variation flag is ON (step S1501: YES), the jackpot determination is performed by referring to the high probability state table of the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S1502). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a big hit random number value as a determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process of special figure 2, the big hit random number value stored in the first storage area of the second special figure pending storage area 85b (corresponding to the first of the second special figure pending) is read. In the jackpot determination process of special figure 1, the big hit random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first piece of the first special figure reservation) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is a jackpot using the jackpot determination table T1 and the jackpot random number value to which it refers. Here, since the high-probability state (probability variation flag is ON), it is determined whether or not the big hit is based on the table for the high-probability state (the big hit determination value is “0” to “649”) in the big hit determination table T1. judge.

In step S1501, if the probability variation flag is OFF (step S1501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the table for normal probability state of the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to perform the jackpot determination ( Step S1504). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads the big hit random number value by the same method as in step S1502. Next, here, since it is the normal probability state (the probability variation flag is OFF), whether the big hit is based on the table for the normal probability state (the big hit determination value is “0” to “164”) in the big hit determination table T1. Determine whether or not.

When the result of the jackpot determination is "big hit" (steps S1503, S1505: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the jackpot flag (step S1506) and determines the jackpot type (step S1507). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads the jackpot type random number value as a determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process of special figure 2, the big hit type random number value stored in the first storage area of the second special figure pending storage area 85b is read. In the jackpot determination process of toku-zu 1, the jackpot type random number value stored in the first storage area of the first toku-zu reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the jackpot type based on the read jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). After the jackpot type is determined, the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9) corresponding to the specified jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in step S1503 or step S1505, if the result of the big hit determination is “miss” (the result of the small hit determination is also “miss”), special symbol stop symbol data (01H) corresponding to the lost symbol is provided in the main RAM 84. This is set in the jackpot type buffer (step S1520), and this processing ends.

[Variation pattern selection processing]
24 and 25 are flowcharts of the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22: steps S1403 and S1409). The flow patterns of the variation pattern selection process (step S1403) of FIG. 2 and the variation pattern selection process (step S1409) of FIG. In the variation pattern selection process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the game state is a time saving state (step S1600). Whether or not the time saving state is present is determined by whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When it is in the time saving state (step S1600: YES), the process proceeds to step S1612. When not in the time saving state (step S1600: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602). When the big hit flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the small hit flag is ON (step S1610). When the small hit flag is OFF (step S1610: NO), the process proceeds to step S1607. When the small hit flag is ON (step S1610: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the non-time saving state small hit table of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) to select the fluctuation pattern. (Step S1611). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first sets the fluctuation pattern random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table T6 and the variation pattern random value. Here, as the table for non-time saving state small hits, in the variation pattern determination table T6 for non-time saving states shown in FIG. 10, the portion corresponding to the small hits (the portion whose variation pattern is "P34") is referred to. (Address is set). “P34” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random value.

When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot type is the V passing planned jackpot (step S1604), and the jackpot type determination is set in the main RAM 84. It is performed based on the special symbol stop pattern data.

When the jackpot type is a V-passing jackpot (step S1604: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 changes by referring to the non-time saving state V-passing jackpot table in the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). A pattern is selected (step S1605). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a fluctuation pattern random value as a determination value. For example, in the variation pattern selection process of special figure 2, the variation pattern random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the variation pattern random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first special figure reservation first) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern using the variation pattern determination table T6 and the variation pattern random value. Here, as the table for the non-time saving state V passage planned jackpot, in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. "To "P3", that is, the variation pattern "P21" and "P22" in special figure 2) is set). From the read variation pattern random value, one of “P1” to “P3” is selected as the variation pattern in Toku-zu 1, and “P21” or “P22” is selected in Toku-zu 2.

When the jackpot type is the V non-passing jackpot (step S1604: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the non-time saving state V non-passing jackpot table in the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). Then, the variation pattern is selected (step S1606). Here, as the table for the non-time saving state V non-passing planned jackpot, in the variation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. 10, the portion corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot (the variation pattern in FIG. 1 is The addresses referred to are the portions of "P4" to "P6" (the portion of which the variation pattern is "P23" in special figure 2) are set). From the read variation pattern random value, one of “P4” to “P6” is selected as the variation pattern in Toku-zu 1, and “P23” is selected in Toku-zu 2.

When the small hit flag is OFF in step S1610 (step S1610: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the reach random number value is the reach establishment random number value (step S1607). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a reach random number value as a determination value. In the variation pattern selection process of special figure 2, the reach random number value stored in the first storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b (corresponding to the first second special figure reservation) is read. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the reach random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first special figure reservation first) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the presence/absence of reach using the reach determination table T2 (FIG. 8(B)) and the reach random number value. Here, since the state is the non-time saving state, the reach determination is performed based on the table for the non-time saving state (the reach presence determination value (reach success random number value) is “0” to “13”) in the reach determination table T2. Determine the presence or absence.

When the reach random number value is the reach success random number value (step S1607: YES), that is, when the reach is lost, the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) is in the non-time saving state. The variation pattern is selected with reference to the reach loss table (step S1608). Here, as the table for non-time saving state reachable loss, in the variation pattern determination table T6 for non-time saving state shown in FIG. 10, the portion corresponding to the reachable loss (the variation pattern in FIG. 1 is "P7"- The portion of "P14", that is, the portion of variation patterns "P24" to "P31" in special figure 2) is referred to. In special figure 1, one of “P7” to “P14” is selected as the variation pattern from the read random number value of the variation pattern and the current number of reserved spheres (1 to 4) in the special figure 1. In special figure 2, one of “P24” to “P31” is selected as the variation pattern from the read random number value of the variation pattern and the current number of reserved spheres of special figure 2 (1 to 4). Since the fluctuation pattern to be selected changes depending on the number of reserved balls, the function of shortening fluctuation according to the number of reserved balls operates. That is, in both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, when the number of reserved balls is "3" to "4", the fluctuation time is longer than that when the number of reserved balls is "1" to "2". Shorter fluctuation patterns are being selected more. As a result, when the number of reserved balls is large, it is possible to increase the speed at which the special figure is reserved.

When the reach random number value is not the reach success random number value (step S1607: NO), that is, when there is no reach loss, the game control microcomputer 81 selects the non-time saving state in the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). The variation pattern is selected with reference to the reachless loss table (step S1609). Here, as a table for non-time saving state loss without reach, in the variation pattern determination table T6 for non-time saving state shown in FIG. 10, a portion corresponding to loss without reach (in FIG. 1, the variation pattern is “P15”- The portion of "P16", that is, the portion of variation patterns "P32" to "P33" in the special figure 2) is referred to. In Toku-zu 1, either "P15" or "P16" is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read random-number value of fluctuation pattern and the current number of reserved spheres (1 to 4). In Toku-zu 2, either "P32" or "P33" is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read random-number value of fluctuation pattern and the current number of reserved spheres (1 to 4). In this case as well, the variation pattern selected changes depending on the number of reserved balls, so that the function of shortening variation according to the number of reserved balls operates.

When it is determined in step S1600 that the game state is the time saving state, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (FIG. 25: step S1612). After that, the processes of steps S1614 to S1621 are the same as the processes of steps S1604 to S1611 described above except for the following points, and thus the description thereof will be omitted. The difference between the processing of steps S1614 to S1621 and the processing of steps S1604 to S1611 is that the portions of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 referred to in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, S1619, and S1621 are already described in steps S1605, S1606, and Different from S1608, S1609, and S1611. Specifically, in S1605, S1606, S1608, S1609, and S1611, the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) for the non-time saving state is referred to, whereas in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, S1619, and S1621, The fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for time saving state (FIG. 11) is referred to. For example, in the case of step S1615, that is, when the jackpot type is the planned V passing jackpot, in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state shown in FIG. Is a portion of "P41" to "P43", and the variation pattern is "P61" or "P62" in the special figure 2). From the read variation pattern random value, one of “P41” to “P43” is selected as the variation pattern in Toku-zu 1, and “P61” or “P62” is selected in Toku-zu 2. Further, for example, in the case of step S1616, that is, when the jackpot type is the V non-passing jackpot, the portion corresponding to the V non-passing jackpot in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state shown in FIG. In FIG. 1, the fluctuation pattern is “P44” to “P46”, and in FIG. 2 the fluctuation pattern is “P63”). From the read variation pattern random value, one of “P44” to “P46” is selected as the variation pattern in the special figure 1, and “P63” is selected in the special figure 2. Further, for example, in the case of step S1621, that is, in the case of a small hit, the portion corresponding to the small hit (the portion of "P74") is referred to in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state shown in FIG. "P74" is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read random value of the fluctuation pattern.

After performing the variation pattern selection (steps S1605, S1606, S1608, S1609, S1611, S1615, S1616, S1618, S1619, S1621) as described above, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected variation pattern. (Step S1630) This process ends. Information on the set fluctuation pattern is included in the fluctuation start command and transmitted to the sub-control board 90 in the output process (FIG. 16: step S108). As a result, the variable display of special symbols is started.

[Special symbol changing process]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the special symbol changing process (FIG. 21: step S1304). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the special symbol variation time has elapsed and ended (step S1701). The variation time of the special symbol is a variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25) described above. If the variable time has not ended (step S1701: NO), this processing ends. That is, the variable display of the special symbol started in step S1406 or S1412 of the special symbol waiting process (FIG. 22) is continued. On the other hand, if the variation time has ended (step S1701: YES), the variation stop command is set (step S1702), and the special operation status is set to "3" (step S1703). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing associated with the stop of fluctuation (step S1704). For example, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbol with a symbol corresponding to the set special symbol stop symbol data. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this processing.

[Special symbol confirmation processing]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the special symbol determination process (FIG. 21: step S1306). The game control microcomputer 81 first performs a game state management process (step S1801). The contents of the game state management process will be described later. After the game state management process, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802). When the big hit flag is OFF (step S1802: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the small hit flag is ON (step S1810). When the small hit flag is OFF (step S1810: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "1" (step S1808), and ends this processing. Thereby, the big hit game and the small hit game are not started, the special symbol waiting process (FIG. 22) is entered again, and the big hit judgment and the small hit judgment for the next hold are executed.

When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the jackpot and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member according to the type of the jackpot won (step S1803). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the special winning opening opening pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 13), determines the opening pattern of the special winning opening from the special figure stop symbol data, and sets the determined opening pattern. set. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "opening pattern 21" is set as the opening pattern of the special winning opening. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the V opening/closing member opening pattern determination table T9 (FIG. 14), determines the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 from the special figure stop symbol data, and sets the determined opening pattern. .. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is “11H”, the “opening pattern 31” is set as the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71. The value of the round counter is set to the number of rounds according to the type of the winning jackpot together with the setting of the special winning opening and the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member. The round counter counts the number of unit opening games (round games) executed during the jackpot game. Here, "16" is set in the round counter (FIG. 13(B)).

After setting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a game state reset process (step S1804). The game state reset process is a process for resetting (returning to OFF) the probability variation flag and the time saving flag, the contents of which will be described later. After the game state reset process, in order to start the big hit game, the big hit opening command is set (step S1805), and the opening is started (step S1806). After that, the special operation status is set to "4" (step S1807), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if the small hit flag is ON (step S1810: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the opening pattern of the special winning opening according to the type of the winning small hit rush and big hit (step S1811). .. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the special winning opening opening pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 13), determines the opening pattern of the special winning opening from the special figure stop symbol data, and sets the determined opening pattern. set. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "20H", "opening pattern 25" is set as the opening pattern of the special winning opening. After setting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "4" (step S1807), and ends this processing.

[Game state management processing]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the game state management process (FIG. 27: step S1801). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S2001). When the probability variation flag is OFF (step S2001: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the probability variation flag is ON (step S2001: YES), the value of the probability variation counter is decremented by 1 (step S2002). The probability variation counter is for counting the number of variations of special symbols executed during the high probability state. Here, “10000” is set in the probability variation counter at the time of transition to the high probability state. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" as a result of decrementing the probability variation counter by 1 (step S2003). When the value of the probability variation counter is not "0" (step S2003: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the value of the probability variation counter is “0” (step S2003: YES), the probability variation flag is switched to OFF (step S2004). In addition, when "10000" is set to the probability variation counter, the value of the substantial probability variation counter never becomes "0".

In step S2005, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the time saving flag is ON. When the time saving flag is OFF (step S2005: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2005: YES), the value of the time saving counter is decremented by 1 (step S2006). The time saving counter is for counting the number of times the special symbol has changed during the time saving state. Here, "10000" is set to the time saving counter when the time saving mode is entered. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" as a result of decrementing the time saving counter by 1 (step S2007). When the value of the time saving counter is not "0" (step S2007: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the value of the time saving counter is “0” (step S2007: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2008). When "10000" is set in the hour/hour counter, the value of the actual hour/hour counter does not become "0".

In step S2009, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this processing. The game state designation command includes information about the current game state that has just been set (whether it is a probability variation state, a probability variation counter value, whether it is a time saving state, a time saving counter value, etc.).

[Game state reset processing]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the game state reset process (FIG. 27: step S1804). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability variation flag is ON (step S2101). If the probability variation flag is OFF (step S2101: NO), the process skips to step S2103. When the probability variation flag is ON (step S2101: YES), the probability variation flag is switched to OFF (step S2102). In step S2103, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the time saving flag is ON. If the time saving flag is OFF (step S2103: NO), this process ends. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2103: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2104). That is, while the jackpot game is being executed, the state is a non-high probability state and a non-time saving state. In the gaming machine 1, since it is always in the low base state during the non-time saving state, it is in the low base state during execution of the jackpot game.

[Special electric accessory processing]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the special electric auditors product process (FIG. 21: step S1308). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200). The “big hit end flag” is a flag that indicates that the opening of the big winning devices (the first big winning device 31 and the second big winning device 36) based on the opening pattern is all ended in the big hit game being executed. When the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the process proceeds to step S2230. When the jackpot end flag is OFF (step S2200: NO), V opening/closing member operation processing for operating the V opening/closing member 71 is performed (step S2201). The V opening/closing member 71 of the present embodiment is configured to operate when a predetermined number of game balls are won in the first big winning opening 30, and in the V opening/closing member operation process, according to the V opening/closing member opening pattern T9. Then, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a predetermined period when the predetermined number of game balls is won. Details of the V opening/closing member operation processing will be described later. After the V opening/closing member operation process, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the special winning openings (the first special winning opening 30 and the second special winning opening 35) are open (step S2202). When it is open (step S2202: YES), the process proceeds to step S2210.

When the special winning opening is not open (step S2202: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the condition for opening the special winning opening is satisfied (step S2203). As a condition for opening the special winning opening, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not there is a ball in the special winning opening opening start opening 17. When there is no ball in the special winning opening opening start port 17, it is determined that the conditions are not satisfied. When there is a ball in the special winning opening opening start opening 17, the game control microcomputer 81 further determines whether it is time (timing) for opening the special winning opening. For the time to open the special winning opening, for example, when the opening time of the jackpot has passed and the opening start time in the first round game is reached, or the big winning opening that has been temporarily closed after opening is reopened. It includes the time when the interval time (close time) has passed and the time to start opening again is reached. When the above conditions are not satisfied (step S2203: NO), the process proceeds to step S2220.

When the above conditions are satisfied (step S2203: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special winning opening opening process (step S2207). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the special winning opening (the first special winning opening 30 or the second special winning opening 35) according to the opening pattern (FIG. 13) according to the type of big hit. After the special winning opening opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round designation command (step S2208). The round designation command includes information regarding the number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the output buffer of the main RAM 84. In this embodiment, the special winning opening is not opened a plurality of times during one round game. However, as another embodiment, when the special winning opening is opened a plurality of times during one round game, the game control microcomputer 81 indicates that the opening of the special winning opening is in one round. It may be determined whether or not it is the first release, and the round designation command may be set only in the case of the first release. After the round designation command is set, this processing ends.

In the above-mentioned step S2202, when the special winning opening is being opened (step S2202: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition for the special winning opening is satisfied (step S2210). The closing condition here is that the number of winning prizes at the special winning opening in the round game has reached a specified maximum winning number (for example, 9 per round), or the time for closing the special winning opening is reached. That is, any one of the above (that is, a predetermined opening time (FIG. 13) has elapsed after opening the special winning opening) is satisfied. Then, if the condition for closing the special winning opening is not satisfied (step S2210: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this processing. On the other hand, when the conditions for closing the special winning opening are satisfied (step S2210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (closes) the special winning opening (step S2211).

In the above-mentioned step S2203, if it is not the time (timing) for opening the special winning opening, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2220). Here, one round ends after a predetermined time (here, 2 seconds) has passed since the special winning opening was closed. This is because, as described above, the time (interval time) for closing the special winning opening between round games is included in the open round game before the closing. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time has elapsed after closing the special winning opening. When the round game has not ended (step S2220: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this processing.

When the round game has ended (step S2220: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the value of the round counter to 1 decrement (step S2221) and determines whether the value of the round counter is "0". A determination is made (step S2226). If the value of the round counter is not "0" (step S2226: NO), that is, if the prescribed number of round games has not been exhausted yet, this processing ends to start the next round game. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter is “0”, the jackpot ending command is set as the jackpot ending process for ending the jackpot game (step S2227), and the jackpot ending is started (step S2228). In the present embodiment, the ending time (for example, 18 seconds) in the case where there is a passage of the game ball into the V region 39 in the "16R (substantially 13R) V passing big jackpot" is "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing schedule". It is the same length as the ending time when there is no passage of the game ball to the V area 39 in the "big hit". As a result, even if the player has passed the game ball to the V area 39 by "16R (actual 13R) V passing planned jackpot", "16R (actual 13R) V non-passing jackpot" It is possible to recognize that there is no passage of the game ball into the V area 39 by "." The ending time when there is no passage of the game ball to the V area 39 in "16R (substantially 13R) V passing planned jackpot" is also the same length as these. After the end of the big hit, the big hit end flag is set to ON (step S2229), and this processing ends.

When the jackpot end flag is ON in step S2200 (step S2200: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot ending time has elapsed since the final round has ended. (Step S2230). When the ending time has not elapsed (step S2230: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this processing. On the other hand, when the ending time has elapsed (step S2230: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the jackpot end flag (step S2231) and turns off the jackpot flag (step S2232), and the special operation status. Is set to "1" (step S2233). As a result, in the next special operation process, the special symbol waiting process (step S1302) is executed again. After that, a game state setting process (step S2234) described later is executed, and this process ends.

Further, in the special electric auditors product processing, in addition to the opening processing of the special winning opening (the first special winning opening 30 or the second special winning opening 35) in the big hitting game as described above, the big winning opening in the small hitting game (first The processing for opening the two major winning openings 35) is also performed. Although illustration is omitted, specifically, when the small hit flag is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 follows the opening pattern (FIG. 13) according to the type of the winning small hit rush and the big hit (the big winning opening ( The second special winning opening 35) is opened, and then it is determined whether or not the closing condition for the special winning opening (FIG. 13) is established. If the closing condition for the special winning opening is established, The big prize hole is closed (closed) (the small hit game ends). After that, the small hit flag is turned off and the special operation status is set to "1".

[V open/close member operation processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the V opening/closing member operation process (FIG. 30: step S2201). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the current round game (the relevant round) is the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501). Here, the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, the eighth round, the tenth round, and the twelfth round correspond to the opening rounds of the V opening/closing member 71. The game control microcomputer 81 can determine that the round is open when the value of the round counter is "15", "13", "11", "9", "7", "5". When it is not the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501: NO), this processing ends. This is because it is not necessary to operate the V opening/closing member 71 in the round.

When it is the opening round of the V opening/closing member 71 (step S2501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the first winning flag is ON (step S2502). The “first prize flag” is a flag indicating that the first big winning opening 30 has won the first ball in the round. When the first winning flag is ON (step S2502: YES), the process proceeds to step S2520. When the first winning flag is OFF (step S2502: NO), it is determined whether or not the winning of the first ball is detected (step S2503). When the winning of the first ball has not been detected (step S2503: NO), this processing ends. This is because there is no winning in the first big winning opening 30 in the round and it is not necessary to operate the V opening/closing member 71.

When the winning of the first ball is detected (step S2503: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 opens the V opening/closing member 71 in a short circuit and performs the V effective period setting process (step S2504). In the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)), the V opening/closing member 71 is opened in a short circuit in either case of "short opening" or "long opening". This is because sometimes a short open (here, 0.1 second) is executed. In the short opening of the V opening/closing member 71, since the opening time of the V opening/closing member 71 is very short, the first game ball winning the first big winning opening 30 does not pass through the V area 39 and is not played. It is configured to pass through the V region 70. In the V valid period setting process, during the opening of the V opening/closing member 71, and for several seconds after the V opening/closing member 71 is closed, the V valid period in which the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is valid is set. Here, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the V opening/closing member 71 in a short circuit (0.1 second in this case) according to the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)), and is opening the V opening/closing member 71. And 1 second after closing is set to V valid period. The game control microcomputer 81 sets a period other than the V valid period (including a case where the big hit game is not executed) as a V invalid period in which the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is determined to be invalid. Here, "determining that the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is valid" means that the V flag is turned on based on the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a (V area sensor detection described later). Processing (see FIG. 33)). Further, “determining that the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is invalid” means that the V flag is not turned on even when the game ball is detected by the V area sensor 39a. The V effective period includes a few seconds (ball brush period) after the V opening/closing member 71 is closed because the V opening/closing member 71 and the V area sensor 39a have a physical distance. This is in consideration of the period until the V area sensor 39a detects a game ball that has entered the V area 39 side immediately before the V opening/closing member 71 is closed. That is, here, the V flag is turned ON only when the V passage (passage of the game ball to the V area 39) is detected during the V valid period, and the V flag is set when the V passage is detected outside the V valid period (V invalid period). It is supposed not to turn it on. In addition, when the V flag is ON, the probability variation flag is turned ON, that is, the gaming state after the big hit game is set to a high probability state (see a gaming state setting process (FIG. 32) described later). By doing so, the V flag is turned ON based on the V passage due to an illegal act, and the high probability state is not set. After the V open/close member 71 is short-circuited and the V effective period is set, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag to ON (step S2505), and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2502, if the first winning flag is ON, that is, if the first ball has already been won (step S2502: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the second winning flag is ON. Is performed (step S2520). The “second prize flag” is a flag that indicates that the first big winning opening 30 has won the second ball when the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 in the round is long opening. When the second winning flag is ON (step S2520: YES), the process proceeds to step S2540. When the second winning flag is OFF (step S2520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 in the round is long opening (step S2521). When it is not long open (step S2521: NO), that is, when it is short open, the process proceeds to step S2540. On the other hand, in the case of long opening (step S2521: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the winning of the second ball has been detected (step S2522). When the winning of the second ball is not detected (step S2522: NO), the process proceeds to step S2540.

When the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 opens the V opening/closing member 71 for a long time and performs the V effective period setting process (step S2523). In the opening pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 (FIG. 14(B)), the V opening/closing member 71 is opened for a long time in the case of "long opening" when the second ball is won (longest 31.5 seconds in this case). ) Is executed. In addition, since the maximum round game time for one round is 31.5 seconds (maximum winning opening maximum opening time 29.5 seconds + interval closing time 2 seconds), in general, the second ball wins. The time from time to end of round is less than 31.5 seconds. As will be described later, the V opening/closing member 71 is forcibly closed at the end of the round, and thus the opening time for the long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 is shorter than 31.5 seconds. However, the long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 causes the opening time of the V opening/closing member 71 to be relatively long. Therefore, at least a part of the game balls after the second ball that has won the first big winning opening 30 has the V area 39. Is configured to pass. In the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the opening of the V opening/closing member 71 to the V valid period, and sets the V invalid period together with the closing of the V opening/closing member 71 at the end of the round. After long opening of the V opening/closing member 71 and V valid period setting processing, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the second winning flag to ON (step S2524), and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2540, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the V opening/closing member 71 is open. When the V opening/closing member 71 is open (step S2540: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2550). As described above, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time (here, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the special winning opening was closed. Make a decision.

When the round game is finished (step S2550: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2551), the V opening/closing member closing process and the V invalid period. A setting process is performed (step S2552). Here, at the end of the round game, the game control microcomputer 81 forcibly closes the V opening/closing member 71, and after a few seconds (here, 1 second) elapses after the V opening/closing member 71 is closed, the V invalid period is started. Set and finish this process.

When the round game is not finished (step S2550: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the V opening/closing member 71 is satisfied (step S2560). The closing condition of the V opening/closing member 71 can be exemplified by, for example, if a short opening is made, that a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds) has elapsed after the opening of the V opening/closing member 71. When the closing condition is satisfied (step S2560: YES), the V opening/closing member closing process and the V invalid period setting process are performed (step S2552), and the present process ends. When the closing condition is not satisfied (step S2560: NO), the V opening/closing member 71 is in the open state, and the present processing is ended while the V effective period is continued.

In step S2540, when the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the V opening/closing member 71 is closed (step S2540: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2571). When the round has ended (step S2571: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2572), and ends this processing. When the round has not ended (step S2571: NO), this processing ends.

[Game state setting process]
32 is a flowchart of the game state setting process (FIG. 30: step S2234). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the V flag is ON (step S2301). When the V flag is OFF (step S2301: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 advances the processing to step S2309. On the other hand, in step S2301, if the V flag is ON (step S2301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the probability variation flag (step S2304), sets "10000" in the probability variation counter (step S2305), The V flag is turned off (step S2306). Further, the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the time saving flag (step S2307) and sets "10000" in the time saving counter (step S2308). As a result, the gaming state after the big hit game this time becomes a "high probability state", a "time saving state", and a "high base state" (that is, a highly accurate high base). This high-probability-high base state ends when the variable display of the special symbol is performed 10,000 times or the next big hit is won, and either condition is satisfied.
In the high-probability state, the jackpot probability is about 1/101, and in reality, it is a big jackpot before the jackpot lottery is performed 10,000 times in the highly accurate and high base state. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the jackpot in the special symbol 2 (via the second starting port) in the time saving state and the V jackpot planned to pass V (special symbol stop symbol data 20H, 21H) is the jackpot game. If V is passed inside, it is almost guaranteed that the gaming state after the big hit will be a highly accurate and high base state until the next big hit, and a small hit rush.

In step S2309, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this processing. The game state designation command includes information about the game state that has just been set.

[V area sensor detection processing]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the V area sensor detection processing (FIG. 16: step S106). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the V area sensor 39a detects a game ball (step S2601). When the game ball is not detected by the V area sensor 39a (step S2601: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, if there is a detection (step S2601: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is during the V effective period (step S2602). The V valid period is a period set by the V valid period setting process (steps S2504 and S2523) of the V opening/closing member operation process (FIG. 31). The V valid period is set to a few seconds (ball brush period) after opening or closing the V opening/closing member 71 during the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, the eighth round, the tenth round, and the twelfth round. To be done. When it is not in the V valid period (step S2602: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is in the V valid period (step S2602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag (step S2603), sets the V passage command (step S2604), and finishes this processing. ..

[Reserved ball count processing]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the number of reserved balls (FIG. 16: step S107). The game control microcomputer 81 first reads the special figure 1 reserved sphere number, the special figure 2 reserved sphere number, and the normal symbol reserved sphere number stored in the main RAM 84 (step S2701). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the reserved ball number command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2702). The reserved sphere number command is a command for notifying the reserved sphere number to the sub-control board 90, and includes information on the special figure 1 reserved sphere number, the special figure 2 reserved sphere number, and the normal symbol reserved sphere number. .. After setting the number of reserved balls command, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this processing.

7. Operation of Performance Control Microcomputer 91 The operation of the performance control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 45. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, and the like that appear in the description of the operation of the production control microcomputer 91 are provided in the sub RAM 94.

[Sub-control main processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the sub-control main processing. When the game machine 1 is powered on, the effect control microcomputer 91 reads a program for executing the sub-control main processing from the sub-ROM 93. In the sub-control main processing, the production control microcomputer 91 first performs CPU initialization processing (step S4000). In the CPU initialization processing, for example, setting of the sub CPU 92, resetting of various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are performed. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". The CPU initialization process is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

After the CPU initialization process, the effect control microcomputer 91 prohibits interruption of the interruption process (step S4015) and performs a random number update process (step S4020). In this random number updating process, the effect control microcomputer 91 updates the random number counter value shown in FIG. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0", or may be randomly changed. Further, the random number values may be added one by one or two or more. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number.

After the random number update processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 permits interruption of the interruption processing (step S4025). While the interrupt is enabled, the sub-side timer interrupt process (step S4035) can be executed. The sub timer interrupt process is executed based on the interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the sub CPU 92 at a predetermined cycle. That is, the sub-side timer interrupt process is executed every predetermined period. Then, the random number updating process is repeatedly executed after the sub-side timer interrupt process is completed and before the sub-side timer interrupt process is started next.

[Sub timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the sub timer interrupt processing (FIG. 35: step S4035). The production control microcomputer 91 first performs a received command analysis process (step S4300). Details of the received command analysis processing will be described later. After the received command analysis process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a variable effect in-progress process (step S4305). The variation production process is processing for setting a pre-variation end command at a specific timing during the variation production to execute the specific display production on the display screen 7a, and the details thereof will be described later. After the variation effect mid-process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a switch process (step S4310). In the switch process, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the display content of the display screen 7a based on the switch data (edge data and level data) output based on the detection signal from the effect button detection switch 63a. .. After the switch process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a command transmission process (step S4315). In the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets various commands set in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub RAM 94 in the received command analysis process or the like to the image control board 100, the sound control board 106, and the lamp control board 107. , To the relay board 108. The image control board 100 that has received the various commands uses the image display device 7 to execute display effects according to the received commands. In addition, the voice control board 106 that has received various commands executes a voice effect in which voice is output from the speaker 67 according to the received commands. The lamp control board 107 that has received various commands executes a lamp effect that controls the light emission of the panel lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 in accordance with the received commands. After the command transmission processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4320) and ends this processing. In other processing, for example, random number updating processing or the like is performed.

[Reception command analysis processing]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the received command analysis process (FIG. 36: step S4300). The effect control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not a prior determination command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4415). If it has been received (step S4415: YES), prefetch effect determination processing is performed (step S4420). The "prefetching effect determination process" is a process of determining whether or not to execute the prefetching effect and a prefetching effect pattern to be executed. Details of the prefetching effect determination processing will be described later. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4415: NO), the above prefetching effect determination process is skipped. The look-ahead effect is an effect that suggests that the pending information newly stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 is likely to include a big hit, and is executed during the variable effect.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4445). If it is received (step S4445: YES), the hold display process is performed (step S4450). In the hold display process, provided in the counter set area 94d of the sub RAM 94, based on the information about the special figure 1 reserved sphere number, the special figure 2 reserved sphere number, and the normal symbol reserved sphere number included in the reserved sphere number command. The values of the first special figure holding effect counter, the second special figure holding effect counter, and the general figure holding effect counter that have been obtained are updated. As a result, not only the main control board 80 side but also the sub control board 90 side can hold the information of each reserved ball number. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91, the reserved image 9A displayed on the display screen 7a, based on the values of the first special figure hold effect counter, the second special figure hold effect counter, and the general figure hold effect counter, 9B is updated. On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls command has not been received (step S4445: NO), the above-mentioned reserved display process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a fluctuation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4455). If it has been received (step S4455: YES), a variation effect start process is performed (step S4460). The "variation effect start process" is a process of selecting a variation effect pattern (content) to be executed during special symbol variation. Details of the variation effect start processing will be described later. On the other hand, if not received (step S4455: NO), the above-described variation effect start processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4465). If it has been received (step S4465: YES), a variation effect end process is performed (step S4470). "Variation effect end process" is a process for stopping the variation effect executed during the special symbol variation. In the fluctuation effect ending process, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a counter or the like based on the analysis result of the fluctuation stop command, and sets a fluctuation effect ending command for ending the fluctuation effect. As a result, the decorative design corresponding to the changing special figure 1 or special figure 2 is stopped and displayed. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a prior determination information shift process (FIG. 39) described later. If the fluctuation stop command has not been received (step S4465: NO), the fluctuation effect ending process described above is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an opening command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4475). If received (step S4475: YES), the opening effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4480). The "opening effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an opening effect pattern (content) to be executed at the start of a special game (big hit game). In the opening effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the opening command, and sets, in the opening command, information on the special figure stop symbol data set at the time of the jackpot winning determination, in the sub RAM 94. Then, an effect pattern of the opening effect that is set in advance corresponding to the hit type indicated by the special figure stop pattern data is selected, and an opening effect start command for starting the selected opening effect is set as the effect command setting area of the sub RAM 94. Set to 94b. When the opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 outputs a predetermined opening effect image to the ROM 103. Read out from the display screen and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, in step S4475, when the opening command is not received (step S4475: NO), the above-described opening effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a round designation command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4485). If it has been received (step S4485: YES), a round effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4490). The "round effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an open game effect pattern (contents) to be executed during the opening of the special winning opening or the interval between the openings in the special game (big hit game). In the round effect pattern determination processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the round designation command, and sets information regarding special figure stop symbol data and information regarding the number of rounds included in the round designation command in the sub RAM 94. To do. Then, the effect pattern of the round effect set in advance corresponding to the hit type and the number of rounds indicated by the special figure stop design data is selected, and a round effect start command for starting the selected round effect is issued in the sub RAM 94. It is set in the command set area 94b. When the round effect start command set in the effect command setting area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined round effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. In addition, in step S4485, when the round designation command is not received (step S4485: NO), the above-described round effect pattern determination processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an ending command is received from the main control board 80 (step S4495). When it is received (step S4495: YES), the ending effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4500). The "ending effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an ending effect pattern (content) to be executed during the ending of a special game (big hit game or small hit game). In the ending effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the ending command, and sets information regarding special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command in the sub RAM 94. Then, the ending effect pattern corresponding to the hit type indicated by the special figure stop design data is selected, and the ending effect start command for starting the selected ending effect is set in the output buffer of the sub RAM 94. When the ending effect start command set in the effect command setting area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined ending effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. If the ending command has not been received (step S4495: NO), the ending effect pattern determination process described above is skipped.

Then, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4545). In other processing, for example, the effect control microcomputer 91, when receiving the game state designating command, information on the game state included in the game state designating command (whether it is a high probability state, whether it is a time saving state, a certain change). The counter, the value of the time saving counter, etc.) are held in the sub RAM 94. Further, when the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the V passage command, the effect control microcomputer 91 causes the sub RAM 94 to hold the information of the V passage. In addition, the production control microcomputer 91 performs a process based on a command (customer waiting standby command, RAM clear notification command, etc.) other than the above, and ends this process.

[Prefetching effect determination process]
38 is a flowchart of the prefetching effect determination process (FIG. 37: step S4420). The production control microcomputer 91 first performs a preliminary determination information rewriting process (step S4601). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 includes a jackpot pre-determination result (jackpot determination information), a jackpot type pre-determination result (jackpot type information), and a variation included in the preliminary determination command received from the main control board 80. The pattern preliminary determination result (variation pattern information) is stored in the preliminary determination information storage area 94c.

FIG. 39 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of the advance determination information storage area 94c. The pre-determination information storage area 94c stores pre-reading effect pattern information in addition to the above-described big hit determination information, big hit type information, and variation pattern information. The prefetch effect pattern information is information indicating the content of the prefetch effect executed during the variable effect, and is selected in step S4604 described later. In FIG. 39(A), the jackpot determination information “Loss” and the variation pattern information “P72” and “P73” are the first to third as the preliminary determination results corresponding to the first to third of the special figure 2 reservations, respectively. The state is shown in which the result is stored in the storage area and the preliminary determination result corresponding to the change is stored in the area. FIG. 39(B) shows that the special figure 2 has been won from the state of FIG. 39(A), and the pre-determination information included in the pre-determination command received from the main control board 80 is the fourth piece of the special figure 2 reserved. The state stored in the corresponding fourth storage area is shown. Here, the jackpot determination information “big hit”, the jackpot type information “21H”, and the variation pattern information “P61” are stored as the preliminary determination information. In addition, in addition, the first to fourth storage areas corresponding to the first to fourth special figure 2 reservations and the corresponding areas corresponding to the variation are respectively referred to as “pattern A” as prefetch effect pattern information. Is set. FIG. 39(C) shows a state in which the variation has ended from the state of FIG. 39(B) and the preliminary determination information shift processing has been executed. Specifically, the prior determination information stored in the first storage area is shifted to the relevant area, the preliminary determination information stored in the second to fourth storage areas is shifted to the first to third storage areas, and The pre-determination information in the four storage areas is cleared. The prior determination information shift process is executed in the variation effect end process (FIG. 37: step S4470).

Returning to FIG. 38, subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the prefetch effect pattern information is stored in the advance determination information storage area 94c (step S4602). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the prefetch effect pattern information is not stored in the relevant area of the pre-determination information storage area 94c or any of the first to fourth storage areas. If the prefetch effect pattern information is stored (step S4602: YES), this processing ends. That is, when the prefetching effect pattern information is stored in any of the area of the preliminary determination information storage area 94c and the first to fourth storage areas, the prefetching effect pattern information is not newly selected and stored. On the other hand, when the pre-reading effect pattern information is not stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4602: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines that the pre-determination result included in the received pre-determination command is “big hit”. Alternatively, it is determined whether or not there is a "reach with loss" (step S4603). Whether or not it is “big hit” or “miss with reach” can be determined by, for example, a variation pattern preliminary determination result (variation pattern information). When the pre-determination result included in the received pre-determination command is “miss without reach” (step S4603: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 ends this process. This is because there is no need to perform look-ahead production. On the other hand, when the pre-judgment result included in the received pre-judgment command is “big hit” or “miss with reach” (step S4603: YES), pre-reading effect execution judgment for determining whether to execute pre-reading effect, Also, the prefetch effect pattern is selected (step S4604). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the value of the counter of the pre-reading effect random number, and refers to the acquired random number value and the pre-reading effect pattern determination table T51 stored in the sub ROM 93 to perform the pre-reading effect. Whether or not to perform it, and the prefetching effect pattern for performing the prefetching effect are determined.

FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining the prefetch effect pattern determination table T51. In FIG. 40, when the pre-determination result is “big hit” and the pre-reading effect random value is “0 to 55”, the pre-reading effect is “none”, and when the pre-reading effect random value is “56 to 67”, the pre-reading effect is When "pattern A" is selected and the prefetching effect random value is "68 to 127", "pattern B" is selected as the prefetching effect. When the pre-determination result is “miss with reach” and the look-ahead effect random number value is “0 to 107”, the look-ahead effect is “none”, and when the look-ahead effect random number value is “108 to 114”, the look-ahead effect is used. When "pattern A" is selected and the prefetching effect random value is "115 to 127", "pattern B" is selected as the prefetching effect. The type and content of the prefetch effect pattern and the range of the selected random number value can be set arbitrarily.

Returning to FIG. 38, if it is determined in step S4604 that the prefetching effect is to be executed (step S4605: YES), the selected prefetching effect pattern is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4606). Here, when the prefetching effect pattern is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c, not only the storage area corresponding to the received pre-determination command among the first to fourth storage areas but also the storage area prior to the corresponding storage area is stored. The look-ahead effect pattern is also stored in the area and the area. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39(B), not only is “pattern A” set in the fourth storage area corresponding to the received pre-determination command, but also the first to third storage areas and the area concerned. Also, set "Pattern A". As a result, the pre-reading effect pattern A is also executed in the variation effect executed before the variation effect corresponding to the fourth storage area is executed (variation effect corresponding to the area and the first to third storage areas). .. Whether or not the look-ahead effect is executed in the variable effect corresponding to the area depends on the progress status of the variable effect. That is, in the variation effect, if the timing to execute the prefetching effect has already passed, the prefetching effect is not executed, but if it is before the timing to execute the prefetching effect, it is executed at that timing. This will be described later. When it is determined in step S4604 that the prefetch effect is not executed (step S4605: NO), the process is ended.

[Variation effect start processing]
FIG. 41 is a flowchart of the variation effect start process (FIG. 37: step S4460). The effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the variation start command (step S5000). Here, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets, in the sub RAM 94, information regarding the special figure stop symbol data included in the variation start command, and information regarding the variation pattern. The set information includes game state information indicating the current game state, symbol information indicating a symbol as a determination result of the hit determination process of Toku-zu 1 or Toku-zu 2, and the like. The game state information and the symbol information acquired here can be appropriately referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a basic effect pattern determination process (step S5010). The basic effect pattern determination process is performed by a basic configuration of the variable effect (for example, display of a background image on the image display device 7 and its switching, display of a predetermined character and its operation, output of a melody or a sound effect using the speaker 67). , Lighting control of lamps, etc.). The variable effect is completed by superimposing an additional effect such as a chance-up effect and a look-ahead effect on the core effect. The effect control microcomputer 91 refers to the basic effect pattern determination table T52 stored in the sub ROM 93 to determine the basic effect pattern.

FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining the core effect pattern determination table T52. In FIG. 42, a plurality of types of basic production patterns that perform normal reach production, a plurality of types of basic production patterns that perform SP1 production, a plurality of types of basic production patterns that perform SP2 production, and a plurality of types of basic production patterns that perform SP3 production, Multiple types of basic production patterns that perform SP4 production, multiple types of basic production patterns that perform SP5 production (dedicated reach production pattern in which pseudo-big hit suggestion production described below is performed), and multiple types of basic production that perform reachless loss production A pattern and a plurality of types of core effect patterns that perform small hit effects are set. The type of core effect pattern can be set arbitrarily. Here, for example, when the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is "P1", the core effect pattern for performing the SP1 effect is selected. Further, when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P72", the basic effect pattern for performing the reach effect loss effect is selected. Further, when the variation pattern included in the variation start command is "P74", the basic effect pattern for performing the small hit effect is selected.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the core effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a chance-up effect pattern determination process (step S5015). The chance-up effect pattern determination process is a process for determining an additional effect to be superimposed on the variable effect. The effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the value of the counter of the chance-up random number and refers to the acquired random number value and the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 stored in the sub ROM 93 to determine the chance-up effect pattern.

FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53. Here, only the portion of the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 that determines the variable effect pattern of the special figure 1 in the non-time saving state is shown. That is, FIG. 43 shows a chance-up effect pattern that is executed when the variation patterns included in the variation start command are "P1" to "P16". The chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 is a portion that determines the chance-up effect pattern that is executed when the variation pattern is "P21" to "P34" "P41" to "P56" "P61" to "P74". It may or may not be equipped.

In FIG. 43, "2-NO", "2-SP1", "2-SP2", "2-SP3", "3-NO", "3-SP1", "3-SP2", "3-SP3", " "4-NO", "4-SP1", "4-SP2", "4-SP3", and "ANO" are set. These chance effect patterns correspond to various chance up effects described later.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the chance-up effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 further refers to the random number value and the stop symbol pattern determination table T54, and a combination of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R to be stopped and displayed, etc. May be determined. From these, what kind of effect is to be performed as the variable effect is determined.

The effect control microcomputer 91 sets the variable effect start command in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub RAM 94 so that the variable effect based on the variable effect pattern determined in steps S5010 to S5015 is realized. Step S5020). When the variation effect start command set in the effect command setting area 94b of the sub RAM 94 is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 displays the variation effect image. It is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Then, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the variable effect timer (step S5030), and ends this processing. A variation time (FIG. 42) according to the variation pattern variation pattern included in the variation start command is set in the variation effect timer. For example, when the variation pattern is "P1", "40 seconds" is set in the variation effect timer.

[Processing during fluctuation production]
FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the variation effect during processing (FIG. 36: step S4305). The production control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the variation production is being performed (step S4701). Whether or not the variation effect is being performed can be determined by, for example, whether or not the variation effect timer is zero. When the variation effect is not in progress (step SS4701: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, when the variation effect is being produced (step SS4701: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it is the timing to set the before-variation-end command in the effect command setting area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4702). The pre-variation end command is a command for the effect control microcomputer 91 to notify the image control board 100 and the like that it is a specific timing during the change effect, and the image control board 100 receives the pre-variation end command. The effect contents are switched or a specific image is displayed in accordance with the information included in the command before the end of fluctuation.

If it is not the time to set the pre-variation end command (step S4702: NO), this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is the timing to set the command before change end (step S4702: YES), it is determined whether or not there is prefetch effect pattern information in the area of the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4703). If there is pre-reading effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: YES), the command before change end including the pre-reading effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4704). On the other hand, if there is no look-ahead effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: NO), a pre-change end command that does not include the look-ahead effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4705). As a result, if there is pre-reading effect pattern information in the area, a pre-change end command including the pre-reading effect pattern information is transmitted to the image control board 100 2 seconds before the end of the change effect. Then, the image control microcomputer 101 starts the prefetching effect of displaying the prefetching effect image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. On the other hand, even when there is no look-ahead effect pattern information in the area, the pre-change end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 2 seconds before the end of the change. Here, if the notice image is already displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the image control microcomputer 101 starts the notice fade effect for fading the notice image.

8. Operation of Image Control Microcomputer 101 The operation of the image control microcomputer 101 provided on the image control board 100 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIG. A buffer and the like that appear in the description of the operation of the image control microcomputer 101 are provided in the RAM 104. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of the display control process. When the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, the image control microcomputer 101 reads the program from the ROM 103, and after the CPU initialization process, the display control process is repeatedly executed. In the display control process, first, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a variation effect start command has been received from the sub control board 90 (step S5001). When it is received (step S5001: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts the variation effect display (step S5002). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the received variation effect start command, reads a predetermined variation effect image instructed in the variation effect start command from the ROM 103, and displays it on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Display it. On the other hand, if not received (step S5001: NO), the above process is skipped.

Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the pre-variation end command is received from the sub control board 90 (step S5003). If it has been received (step 5003: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 starts the prefetch effect display (step S5004). Specifically, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the pre-variation end command, and when the pre-variation end command includes pre-reading effect pattern information, reads a predetermined pre-reading effect image from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the image display device. 7 is displayed on the display screen 7a. Even when the pre-variation end command does not include the prefetch effect pattern information, if the notice image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the notice fade effect for fading the notice image is displayed. Do it. On the other hand, if not received (step S5003: NO), the above processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the variation effect end command has been received from the sub control board 90 (step S5005). When it is received (step 5005: YES), the image control microcomputer 101 reads the image in which the variation effect is stopped and displayed from the ROM 103, and performs the variation effect stop display to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. (Step S5006). On the other hand, if not received (step S5005: NO), the above process is skipped.

Subsequently, the image control microcomputer 101 performs other processing (step S5007). In the other processing, for example, when the image control microcomputer 101 receives the opening effect start command, it reads the predetermined opening effect image instructed in the opening effect start command from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen of the image display device 7. It is displayed on 7a. Further, when the round effect start command is received, a predetermined round effect image designated by the round effect start command is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, when the ending effect start command is received, the predetermined ending effect image instructed in the ending effect start command is read out from the ROM 103, displayed on the display screen 7a, and this processing is ended.

9. Operation of the panel movable body and display effect of the sub display screen 64 Using FIG. 46 to FIG. 49, of the panel movable body (the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the third movable accessory 13) The operation and the display effect of the sub display screen 64 (the right sub display screen 64R, the left sub display screen 64L, and the upper sub display screen 64U) will be described. The effect control microcomputer 91 drives to operate the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the third movable accessory 13 during a game effect (display effect), an initial operation when the power is turned on, or the like. Take control. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a display effect of displaying a specific image on the sub display screen 64 during the game effect (display effect), the initial operation at the time of turning on the power, or the like.

FIG. 46 is an explanatory view illustrating the second aspect of the third movable accessory 13. The third movable accessory 13 includes a left movable accessory 13L and a right movable accessory 13R. Each of the left movable accessory 13L and the right movable accessory 13R is configured to be movable in the left-right direction, and a ring-shaped decorative portion (left decorative portion and right decorative portion) is attached to the tip side. That is, the left side decoration portion and the right side decoration portion each have a ring shape. The left decorative portion and the right decorative portion are each provided with a circular transparent portion having transparency inside the ring shape. As shown in FIG. 1, the third movable accessory 13 is in a retracted position (home position) in which the left movable accessory 13L is stored on the left side of the display screen 7a and the right movable accessory 13R is stored on the right side of the display screen 7a. It can be stationary (first aspect). At this time, the left movable accessory 13L and the right movable accessory 13R are partially visible. As for the third movable accessory 13, the left movable accessory 13L and the right movable accessory 13R advance from the state of FIG. 1 toward the center of the display screen 7a (in a direction in which they approach each other), as shown in FIG. By moving, the left decoration part and the right decoration part are close to each other at the advanced position (deployment position), and one decorative member (union accessory) is formed (second mode). Here, the united accessory forms spectacles. That is, the left decorative portion and the transparent portion correspond to the left frame and the lens, and the right decorative portion and the transparent portion correspond to the right frame and the lens. In the second aspect, the combined accessory in which the left decorative portion and the right decorative portion are combined covers a part near the center of the display screen 7a on the front surface of the image display device 7, and the display screen 7a is visually recognized from the transparent portion. Stationary when possible. The third movable accessory 13 can move from the advance position shown in FIG. 46 to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1 and can stand there.

FIG. 47 is an explanatory view illustrating the second aspect of the first movable accessory 14. As shown in FIG. 47, the first movable accessory 14 includes a left movable accessory 14L and a right movable accessory 14R. Each of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R is configured to be movable in the left-right direction, and half of the ring-shaped decorative portion (the left decorative portion and the right decorative portion) is attached to the tip side. That is, each of the left side decoration portion and the right side decoration portion has an arc shape that is half the ring shape. As shown in FIG. 1, the first movable accessory 14 is at a retracted position (home position) in which the left movable accessory 14L is stored on the left side of the display screen 7a and the right movable accessory 14R is stored on the right side of the display screen 7a. It can be stationary (first aspect). At this time, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are partially visible. As shown in FIG. 47, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14 advance from the state of FIG. 1 toward the center of the display screen 7a (in the direction in which they approach each other). By moving, the left decoration portion and the right decoration portion are united at the advanced position (deployed position) to form one decorative member (united accessory) (second aspect). Here, the united accessory forms the contour of the face. In the second aspect, the combined accessory in which the left decoration portion and the right decoration portion are combined covers the part near the center of the display screen 7a on the front surface of the image display device 7 and is displayed from the opening formed in the center. The screen 7a stands still while being visible. That is, the united accessory is formed so that only the contour of the face is formed, the central portion of the face is not present, and the display screen 7a is visible instead. Then, the face image is displayed on the display screen 7a corresponding to the opening formed in the center of the united combination object, so that the face of the person is completed as a whole. That is, a combination effect of an accessory and an image that completes one target (for example, a human face) by displaying a missing portion (for example, the central portion of the face) in the combined auditor as an image on the display screen 7a. Can be performed. The first movable accessory 14 can be moved from the advanced position shown in FIG. 47 to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1 and can be stopped there.

FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying the second aspect of the second movable accessory 15. The second movable accessory 15 is provided with a rectangular decorative portion described as “OARO” and is configured to be vertically movable. As shown in FIG. 1, the second movable accessory 15 can be stationary at the retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a (first mode). At this time, a part of the second movable accessory 15 is in a visually difficult state. The second movable accessory 15 can be moved downward from the state of FIG. 1 toward the center of the display screen 7a and can be stationary at the advanced position (deployed position) shown in FIG. 48 (second mode). .. In the second aspect, the decoration unit stops on the front surface of the image display device 7 so as to cover the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 can move to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1 by moving (retracting) upward from the advance position of FIG. 48, and can rest there.

FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying the display effect of the sub display screen 64 (the right sub display screen 64R, the left sub display screen 64L, and the upper sub display screen 64U). The right sub display screen 64R, the left sub display screen 64L, and the upper sub display screen 64U can independently display images. Further, it is possible to perform an effect linked with the image on the display screen 7a.

10. Example effects, effect examples, modifications, and aspect examples of the present embodiment Below, each example effect (display effect example, accessory moving effect example) of the present embodiment will be described. In addition, an effect example, a modified example, and an aspect example with respect to the effect example will also be described. As described above, the effect described below is based on various information (big hit determination information, big hit type information, variation pattern information, pre-determination information, etc.) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81, and the effect control microcomputer 91 ( This is an effect realized by the image control microcomputer 101). The following display effect example is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Further, the hold display (hold icon) may be omitted in the display effect example.

The holding icon switching effects A and B will be described below with reference to FIGS. 50 to 52. In this way, the hold icon switching effect can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the hold icon switching effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the image display device 7. The image is displayed on the screen 7a.

[Holding icon switching effect A]
50 and 51 are diagrams for explaining the hold icon switching effect A. The hold icon switching effect is an effect in which the modes of a plurality of hold icons are switched. The mode of the hold icon includes the shape, color, action, size, etc. of the hold icon. In the hold icon switching effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 50(A), in the normal state, during the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, three hold icons 9A and a change icon (the hold icon ) 9C is displayed. Each of the three hold icons 9A and the change icon 9C has a round shape (spherical shape). In this state, when the game ball wins the fixed winning device (belt) 19, a fourth hold icon 9A is newly displayed on the leftmost side, as shown in FIG. 50(B). At this time, the newly displayed hold icon has a star shape (star shape).

Next, as shown in FIG. 50(C), of the three round-shaped hold icons 9A displayed before the fourth hold icon 9A is added, the leftmost hold icon (3 from the right) is displayed. The shape of the second hold icon) 9A changes from a round shape to a star shape. After that, as shown in FIG. 50(D), the shape of the second hold icon 9A from the right changes from a round shape to a star shape, and as shown in FIG. The holding icon 9A on the right side of the number changes from a round shape to a star shape. That is, as shown in FIGS. 50(A) to (E), when the fourth hold icon 9A is additionally displayed in the shape of a star, all the hold icons 9A displayed before that are displayed as 4 stars. The circle shape changes to a star shape in order from the side closer to the second hold icon. Here, the shapes of the three hold icons that have been displayed before are sequentially changed by the look-ahead at the time of winning corresponding to the fourth hold icon.

Next, as shown in FIG. 50(F), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped, and the circular variation icon (holding icon) 9C disappears. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 50(G), the four star-shaped hold icons 9A shift rightward, and the right-most hold icon 9A changes to the variable icon display area (the hold display area, the hold digested image display area). ), and the variable icon 9C is displayed. At the same time, the next fluctuation starts. Here, along with the variable display of the decorative pattern, the production of the mini game image in which the humanoid character catches the star-shaped icon falling from above is executed. The shape (star) of the icon falling from above corresponds to the shape (star) of the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (hold icon). That is, at the time of a change corresponding to the star-shaped change icon (when the star-shaped change icon is held down), a mini game effect in which the star-shaped icon drops is executed.

As shown in FIG. 50(H), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped, and the star-shaped variation icon 9C disappears. When a human-shaped character catches four star-shaped icons in the mini game, the same number of points as the caught icons are displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. The number of points is represented by the number of black stars. Here, during this change, a winning of the game ball to the fixed winning device (belt) 19 occurs, and a new fourth hold icon 9A is displayed on the leftmost side. At this time, the newly displayed hold icon has a round shape (spherical shape). That is, it is newly displayed after the star-shaped hold icon (the star-shaped hold icon 9A in FIG. 50(B), the third hold icon 9A from the right in FIG. 50(H)) that is the target of prefetching. The holding icon that is displayed is a circle.

As shown in FIG. 50(I), one circular and three star-shaped hold icons 9A shift to the right, and the rightmost hold icon 9A (star) is displayed in the variable icon display area (the hold display). Area) and become the variable icon 9C. At the same time, the next fluctuation starts. When the fluctuation starts, the same effect of the mini game image as in FIG. 50(G) is executed. In other words, since this time is also a change corresponding to the star-shaped change icon 9C, a mini-game effect in which a star-shaped icon whose shape corresponds to the change icon falls is executed.

As shown in FIG. 50(J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are fixedly stopped, and the star-shaped variation icon 9C disappears. If the doll character fails to catch the star-shaped icon (0 catches) by the mini game, the points displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a do not change. That is, the number of black stars does not change. Here, during this change, a winning of the game ball to the fixed winning device (belt) 19 occurs, and a new fourth hold icon 9A is displayed on the leftmost side. At this time, the newly displayed hold icon has a round shape (spherical shape). That is, the hold icon that is newly displayed after the star-shaped hold icon (the second hold icon 9A from the right in FIG. 50(J)) that is the target of prefetching is represented by a round shape. It becomes the second circle-shaped hold icon.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 51(A), the two circle-shaped and two star-shaped holding icons 9A shift and move to the right, and the rightmost holding icon 9A (star-shaped) moves to the variable icon display area ( It moves to the relevant hold display area) and becomes the variable icon 9C. At the same time, the next fluctuation starts. When the fluctuation starts, the same effect of the mini game image as in FIG. 50(G) is executed. In other words, since this time is also a change corresponding to the star-shaped change icon 9C, a mini-game effect in which a star-shaped icon whose shape corresponds to the change icon falls is executed.

As shown in FIG. 51(B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are fixedly stopped, and the star-shaped variation icon 9C disappears. When the doll character catches two icons in the mini game, the number of points displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a is increased by 2 to 6. That is, the number of stored black star is 6. Here, during this change, a winning of the game ball to the fixed winning device (belt) 19 occurs, and a new fourth hold icon 9A is displayed on the leftmost side. At this time, the newly displayed hold icon has a round shape (spherical shape). That is, since the hold icon newly displayed after the star-shaped hold icon (the first hold icon 9A in FIG. 51(B)) that is the target of prefetch is represented by a circular shape, three hold icons are displayed. It becomes a circle-shaped hold icon.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 51(C), the three round and one star-shaped holding icons 9A shift and move to the right, and the rightmost holding icon 9A (star) changes to the variable icon display area ( It moves to the relevant hold display area) and becomes the variable icon 9C. That is, the pre-read target hold icon becomes a change icon, and the corresponding change is started. When the fluctuation starts, an icon image ICG larger than the hold icon 9C that imitates the round hold icon 9C is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Then, six black star-shaped images representing points move toward the icon image ICG and are absorbed by the icon image ICG. The color of the icon image ICG changes in order according to the number of absorbed black star-shaped images. The order in which the colors change is from a color with a low expectation of jackpots to a color with a high expectation. For example, the order is blue→green→red. As a result, the icon image ICG becomes a color with a higher expectation of a big hit as the number of absorbed black star-shaped images increases.

As shown in FIG. 51D, the icon image ICG moves toward the position where the variable icon 9C is displayed when the absorption of the points (black star-shaped image) ends. Here, a prize for a game ball is generated during this change, and a new fourth hold icon 9A is displayed on the leftmost side. At this time, the newly displayed hold icon has a round shape (spherical shape). That is, the hold icon newly displayed after the star-shaped hold icon (change icon 9C in FIG. 51D) that is the target of prefetching is represented by a circular shape, and thus the fourth circular shape. Becomes the hold icon.

The icon image ICG moves while shrinking, comes into contact with the variable icon 9C, and becomes the variable icon 9C as shown in FIG. 51(E). Then, as shown in FIG. 51(F), the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and the variation corresponding to this variation icon 9C ends.

In FIG. 51(G), the four circular holding icons 9A shift and move to the right, and the rightmost holding icon 9A (circular) moves to the variable icon display area (the relevant holding display area) and changes. It becomes the icon 9C. At the same time, while the next change is started, the effect of the mini game image is not executed. That is, this time is a change corresponding to the circular change icon 9C, and therefore, the mini game effect in which star-shaped icons whose shapes do not correspond to those of the change icon falls is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 51(H), the shapes of the three hold icons 9A simultaneously (simultaneously) change from a round shape to a star shape at a specific timing during change. After that, when a game ball wins during this change, a new fourth hold icon 9A is displayed on the leftmost side, as shown in FIG. 51(I). At this time, the newly added hold icon has a round shape. That is, the hold icons that are newly displayed after the shape of the hold icons 9A all at once changed from a round shape to a star shape are represented by a round shape. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 81(J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are fixedly stopped, and the circular variation icon 9C disappears.

[Hold icon switching effect B]
FIG. 52 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon switching effect B. The hold icon switching effect is an effect in which the modes of a plurality of hold icons are switched. The mode of the hold icon includes the shape, color, action, size, etc. of the hold icon. In the hold icon switching effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 52(A), in the normal state, the three hold icons 9A and the change icon (the hold icon are displayed while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are being displayed in a variable manner. ) 9C is displayed. Each of the three hold icons 9A and the change icon 9C has a round shape (spherical shape).

In this state, when the game ball wins the fixed winning device (belt) 19, a fourth hold icon 9A is newly displayed on the leftmost side, as shown in FIG. 52(B). At this time, the newly added and displayed hold icon has a shape representing the Roman letter “G”. Simultaneously with the new display of the fourth hold icon 9A, the shapes of all other hold icons 9A change from the round shape to the G shape. Here, the shapes of the three hold icons that have been displayed from the front change at the same time due to the look-ahead at the time of winning corresponding to the fourth hold icon.

Next, as shown in FIG. 52C, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are fixedly stopped, and the circular variation icon 9C disappears. Then, as shown in FIG. 52(D), the four G-shaped holding icons 9A shift to the right, and the rightmost holding icon 9A shifts to the variable icon display area (the holding display area, the held digested image display area). ) To become the change icon 9C. At the same time, the next fluctuation starts. Here, along with the variable display of the decorative pattern, the production of the battle video between the teammate character CRA and the enemy character CRB is executed. The name of the ally character CRA (here, "GORO") corresponds to the shape (G shape) of the hold icon 9A and the change icon (the hold icon) 9C. That is, at the time of a change corresponding to the G-shaped change icon, an effect (including the ally character CRA is included) in which an image (here, the name of the ally character CRA includes G) is displayed. Battle production) is executed.

As shown in FIG. 52(E), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are fixedly stopped, and the G-shaped variation icon 9C disappears. When the teammate character CRA wins (wins) the enemy character CRB in the battle video, the number of wins (points) is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. The number of wins (points) is represented by the number of black stars. Here, during this change, a winning of the game ball to the fixed winning device (belt) 19 occurs, and a new fourth hold icon 9A is displayed on the leftmost side. At this time, the newly displayed hold icon has a round shape (spherical shape). That is, the hold icon newly displayed after the G-shaped hold icon (the third hold icon 9A from the right in FIG. 52(E)) that is the target of prefetching is represented by a circle.

As shown in FIG. 52(F), one circular and three G-shaped hold icons 9A shift and move to the right, and the rightmost hold icon 9A (G-type) is displayed in the variable icon display area (the hold display). Area) and becomes the change icon 9C. At the same time, the next fluctuation starts. When the variation starts, the same battle video effect as in FIG. 52D is executed. That is, since the time corresponding to the G-shaped variation icon 9C also changes this time, an effect in which an image corresponding to the variation icon appears is executed. That is, the battle effect in which the ally character CRA having the name “GORO” including the Roman character “G” represented by the variable icon appears is executed.

As shown in FIG. 52(G), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are fixedly stopped, and the G-shaped variation icon 9C disappears. In the battle video, when the ally character CRA loses (defeats) the enemy character CRB, the number of wins displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a does not change. That is, the number of black stars does not change. Here, during this change, a winning of the game ball to the fixed winning device (belt) 19 occurs, and a new fourth hold icon 9A is displayed on the leftmost side. At this time, the newly displayed hold icon has a round shape (spherical shape). That is, since the hold icon newly displayed after the G-shaped hold icon (the second hold icon 9A from the right in FIG. 52(G)) that is the target of prefetching is represented by a circular shape, It becomes the second circle-shaped hold icon.

Subsequently, the two circle-shaped and two G-shaped hold icons 9A shift and move to the right, and the rightmost hold icon 9A (G-shape) moves to the change icon display area (the hold display area) and changes. It becomes the icon 9C. At the same time, the next fluctuation starts. When the variation starts, the same battle video effect as in FIG. 52D is executed. That is, since the time corresponding to the G-shaped variation icon 9C also changes this time, an effect in which an image corresponding to the variation icon appears is executed. That is, the battle effect in which the ally character CRA having the name “GORO” including the Roman character “G” represented by the variable icon appears is executed.

As shown in FIG. 52(H), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are fixedly stopped, and the G-shaped variation icon 9C disappears. In the battle video, when the teammate character CRA wins (wins) the enemy character CRB, the number of wins displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a is increased by one to two. That is, the number of stored black star is 6.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 52(I), the two circle-shaped and one G-shaped holding icons 9A shift and move to the right, and the rightmost holding icon 9A (G-shaped) moves to the variable icon display area ( It moves to the hold display area) and becomes the variable icon 9C. That is, the pre-read target hold icon becomes a change icon, and the corresponding change is started. When the fluctuation starts, an icon image ICG larger than the hold icon 9C that imitates the round hold icon 9C is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Then, two black star-shaped images representing the number of wins move toward this icon image ICG, and are absorbed by the icon image ICG. The color of the icon image ICG changes in order according to the number of absorbed black star-shaped images. The order in which the colors change is from a color with a low expectation of jackpots to a color with a high expectation. For example, the order is blue→green→red. As a result, the icon image ICG becomes a color with a higher expectation of a big hit as the number of absorbed black star-shaped images increases.

As shown in FIG. 52(J), the icon image ICG moves toward the position where the variable icon 9C is displayed after the absorption of the points (black star-shaped image) is completed. The icon image ICG moves while shrinking and comes into contact with the variable icon 9C to become the variable icon 9C.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the hold icon switching effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 50(C) to 50(E), the first effect in which the three circular holding icons 9A are switched from the circular shape to the star shape, and the first effect. After the effect, as shown in FIG. 50(H), a second effect in which a new circular hold icon is additionally displayed, and after the second effect, as shown in FIG. It is possible to execute a third effect in which the displayed circular-shaped hold icon and the three star-shaped hold icons are shifted. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel effect that has never been seen before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIG. 52.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 52(B), in the first effect, the three circular holding icons are changed from the circular shape to G at the timing when the new holding icon is additionally displayed. Switch to shape. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel effect that has never been seen before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 50 to 51, in the first effect, the three circular hold icons are changed from the round shape to the star shape by the look-ahead corresponding to the new hold icon. It will switch, and a new hold icon will also be displayed in a star shape. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel effect that has never been seen before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIG. 52.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 50(G) to (J) and FIGS. 51(A) to (B), after the third effect, the star-shaped hold icon can be held and consumed. During the change, the fourth effect using the image corresponding to the image represented by the star-shaped hold icon is executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel effect that has never been seen before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIG. 52.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 51(C) to (E), in the fourth effect, points are accumulated during a plurality of fluctuations, and the last of the star-shaped hold icons is accumulated. During the change corresponding to the hold icon, the last hold icon is changed to a mode corresponding to the accumulated point. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel effect that has never been seen before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIG. 52.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 50(H), (J), 51(B), and (D), when a new winning is made during the fourth effect, a new According to this configuration in which the hold icon of the first aspect is additionally displayed, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented novel effect, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIG. 52.

[Modification]
The following is a modification of the hold icon switching effect.
[Modification 1]
In the hold icon switching effect A, when the fourth hold icon 9A is additionally displayed in a star shape as shown in FIGS. 50(A) to (E), all the hold icons displayed before that are displayed. While the icon 9A changes from a circular shape to a star shape, the variable icon 9C does not change. However, in FIGS. 50(A) to (E), the fourth holding icon 9A is additionally displayed in a star shape, and all the holding icons 9A displayed before that are changed from a round shape to a star shape. When changing, the variable icon 9C may also change to a star shape. The same applies to the hold icon switching effect B (FIG. 52).

[Modification 2]
In the hold icon switching effect A, when the fourth hold icon 9A is additionally displayed in a star shape as shown in FIGS. 50(A) to (E), all the hold icons displayed before that are displayed. The icon 9A is assumed to change from a round shape to a star shape. However, in FIGS. 50(A) to (E), the fourth hold icon 9A is first newly displayed in a round shape, then changed to a star shape, and thereafter, all of the previously displayed icons are displayed. The hold icon 9A may change from a round shape to a star shape. The same applies to the hold icon switching effect B (FIG. 52). In FIG. 52, the fourth hold icon 9A is newly displayed in a round shape, and then all hold icons 9A including the newly added hold icon are changed from a circle shape to a star shape all at once (simultaneously). You may.

[Modification 3]
The hold icon switching effects A and B are assumed to be executed in the normal state. However, the hold icon switching effects A and B may be executed in the time saving state. In this case, the effect executed in the hold icon 9A of the hold icon switching effects A and B may be executed by the hold icon 9B.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect A1-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a hold icon,
A first effect in which the plurality of hold icons are switched from the first aspect to the second aspect;
A second effect in which a new hold icon of the first aspect is additionally displayed after the first effect,
After the second effect, it is possible to execute a third effect in which the additionally displayed hold icon of the first aspect and the plurality of hold icons of the second aspect are shifted.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A1-2]
A gaming machine according to Aspect A1-1,
In the first effect, the plurality of hold icons are switched from the first aspect to the second aspect at a timing when a new hold icon is additionally displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A1-3]
A gaming machine according to Aspect A1-2,
In the first effect, the plurality of hold icons are switched from the first mode to the second mode by prefetch corresponding to the new hold icon, and the new hold icon is also in the second mode. Displayed by
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-3,
After the third effect, during the plurality of changes corresponding to the hold exhaustion of the plurality of hold icons of the second aspect, an image corresponding to the image represented by the hold icon of the second aspect is used. 4 effect is executed,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A1-5]
A gaming machine described in Aspect A1-4,
In the fourth effect, points are accumulated during the plurality of changes, and the last hold icon is accumulated during the change corresponding to the last hold icon among the plurality of hold icons of the second aspect. Change to the mode corresponding to the point,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A1-6]
A gaming machine according to Aspect A1-4 or A1-5,
When a new prize is awarded during the fourth effect, a new hold icon of the first aspect is additionally displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The change icon acquisition effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55, for example, the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and other movable accessory disposed around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are easy to see in the drawings. Therefore, it is omitted.

This change icon acquisition effect can be executed over a plurality of variable effects (variable display) by the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 (for example, variation effect start command, pre-determination command), and includes an instruction to execute the change icon acquisition effect, the ROM 103 is included. The corresponding image data is read from and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

The background image used in the change icon acquisition effect (referred to as “specific background image”) is a specific image that is not normally included in the background image. For example, a specific image such as a lunar image, a space image, or an image inside a spacecraft. Has become. The normal background image is a normal image such as a city image, a forest image, a sea image, a seabed image, and an underground image. The specific background image and the normal background image may be a still image or a moving image.

Here, the change icon acquisition effect A will be described first, the change icon acquisition effect B and the change icon acquisition effect C will be sequentially described.

[Change icon acquisition performance A]
The change icon acquisition effect A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a diagram for explaining the change icon acquisition effect A. The change icon acquisition effect A is performed over a plurality of variable effects (variable display) by the decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 53(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative design 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative design 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. In the display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side, the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (symbol: the number “1” to the number “9”) is started. When the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative design is started, the display of the decorative design that is stopped and displayed changes from the opaque state to the translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed to the high speed display mode. .. Thereby, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semitransparent decorative pattern which is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped). Note that the decorative pattern is in a display mode in which the decorative pattern moves in small increments in the vertical direction when the temporary stop display is performed.

The variation icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, which are currently changing as the end of the first special map reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (on the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (on the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad from the position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The reserved display positions 9Ad are arranged and displayed linearly along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

Although the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad both have a rectangular shape, they may have the same size or different sizes. In the present embodiment, both the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad have a rectangular shape, and the size of the variable display position 9Cd (distance in the horizontal direction) is the size of the hold display position 9Ad (the horizontal direction). Distance dimension) is larger than that (the distance dimension in the vertical direction is the same distance dimension). This is so that the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd can be distinguished from the hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad.

Here, a white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, a white spherical retention icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and second hold display positions 9Ad to fourth hold are displayed. The hold icon is not displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one stocked icon that has not been digested for the hold icon.

In addition, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbol, is supported. In addition to the hold icon 9A, which corresponds to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 The special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21 are arranged and displayed as unillustrated numbers on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 is shown in blue on the left side, and the number of the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21 is shown in red. The numbers are arranged on the upper side of the center of the display screen 7a so as to be spaced apart from each other on the right side and are always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as the number of reserved balls as numerical values, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and it is easy to intuitively understand. Note that these numbers are arranged on the forefront side of the display screen 7a and other images are displayed behind the foreground of the display screen 7a so that visibility is not hindered by the other images. It is like this.

Here, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “icon”) will be briefly described. Due to the difference in shape and color, the difference in expectation in winning in the lottery corresponding to the icon. Is represented. For example, of the four icons, a yellow (gold) star icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest likelihood of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hit, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hit, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hit. The smile sphere icon is further set to have a high expectation of being a jackpot in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (Rainbow (hit jackpot)).

In FIG. 53(A), the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, the game ball enters the first starting opening 20, and the change icon acquisition effect A is started by the look-ahead effect, and FIG. ), the variable display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the area in which the change icon 9C and the hold icon 9A are displayed and the peripheral area are difficult to visually recognize due to the flash light FH (disappear). ). In addition, since the game ball has entered the first starting opening 20, two holding icons 9A are present.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting opening 20 and the second starting opening 21.

As the flashing light FH disappears, the presence of the variable display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the change icon 9C and the hold icon 9A can be visually recognized, and at this time, the flashlight FH is displayed. Before and after the change, the shapes of the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, and the change icon 9C and the hold icon 9A change.

Specifically, the shape of the variable display position 9Cd before the flash FH is displayed is a rectangular image arranged below the variable display position 9Cd as shown in FIG. 53(B). In contrast, the shape of the variable display position 9Cd after the flash FH is displayed is an image in which only the four corners of the square shape surrounding the variable icon 9C are represented by white lines, as shown in FIG. 53(C). Has become. Further, the shapes of the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad before the flash FH is displayed are, as shown in FIG. 53B, the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. While the rectangular image is arranged below, the shapes of the first holding display position 9Ad to the fourth holding display position 9Ad after the flash FH is displayed are as shown in FIG. 53(C). In addition, of the four corners of the square shape surrounding the hold icon 9A, only the lower two corners have a shape represented by white lines.

The shapes of the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad after the flash FH is displayed are the shapes of the specific display positions used as the effect in the change icon acquisition effect A. By displaying the shape of the variable display position 9Cd after FH is displayed and the shapes of the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad after the flash FH is displayed differently, The change icon 9C and the hold icon 9A can be distinguished from each other. The start of the change icon acquisition effect A can also be transmitted to the player by changing the shapes of the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad.

In addition, while the change icon 9C and the hold icon 9A before the flash FH is displayed are white spherical icons as shown in FIG. 53B, after the flash FH is displayed. The variation icon 9C and the hold icon 9A in FIG. 53 are, as shown in FIG. 53C, an effect button image (light off state) imitating the effect button 63. This effect button image is an image that prompts the player to operate (press operation) the effect button 63, does not indicate the degree of expectation of winning, and is a specific icon used as an effect in the change icon acquisition effect A. That is, the change icon 9C and the hold icon 9A are switched to the same specific icon in the change icon acquisition effect A.

In FIG. 53(C), the flash FH disappears from the display screen 7a, and the shapes of the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the change icon 9C and the hold icon 9A, When is changed, a message MG1 "Press the button to obtain the changed icon!" is displayed in one line above the variable icon 9C and the hold icon 9A in small characters. At this point, all the effect button images of the variable icon 9C and the hold icon 9A are in the off state, and even if the player operates (presses down) the effect button 63, no effect is reflected in the effect.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 53(D), the left decorative design 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "1", the middle decorative design 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the right decorative design 8R is displayed with the number "3". When the message MG1 is stopped and displayed, the message MG1 disappears from the display screen 7a, and the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a when the variation effect (variation display) ends. In FIGS. 53A to 53D, the city image THG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a as a normal background image.

Subsequently, the city image THG1 which is the normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched to the moon image THG2 as the specific background image, and is displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad as shown in FIG. 53(E). When the hold icon 9A that has been displayed moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the display mode in which the effect button image that is the variable icon 9C blinks is displayed, and the player operates (presses) the effect button 63. Is transmitted, and the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 is prompted. At this time, in the center of the display screen 7a, in a large character (about 4 times the size of the small character), the message MG1 "Press the button to get the change icon!" is displayed in two lines on the display screen 7a. Also, the variable regions of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are moved to the upper left corner of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R fluctuate rapidly ( Variable display). The left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R during the change are difficult to visually recognize.

After that, the message MG1 "Press the button to get the change icon!" is displayed with the large character (about 4 times the size of the small character) displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. It moves to the upper right corner of the screen 7a while being reduced, and is displayed in two lines in a size smaller than a large character and larger than a small character (about twice the size of a large tree of a small character). As described above, as the display mode of the message MG1, the small characters shown in FIG. 53(C) are displayed in one line and the large characters shown in FIG. The image displayed in two lines with a double size) and the image displayed in two lines with a size larger than a small character (about twice the size of a large tree of small characters) after that in FIG. There are three display modes in total, and when the change icon acquisition effect A is being performed, the same content is displayed in three display modes. The content of the message MG1 is played by an unprecedented expression method. You can emphasize and convey to others.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 53(F), when the player operates (presses down) the effect button 63, or the player does not operate (press down) the effect button 63 for a predetermined period (for example, a left decorative pattern). 8L, middle decoration pattern 8C, right decoration pattern 8R 3 seconds after the change effect (variable display) is started, a message MG2 indicating whether or not the change icon has been acquired is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. It Here, the change icon cannot be acquired and the message MG2 of "sorry!" is displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the left decorative design 8L is stopped and displayed by the number "2", the middle decorative design 8C is stopped and displayed by the number "1", and the right decorative design 8R is stopped and displayed by the number "3", so that it is lost. Then, the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a as the variation effect (variation display) ends.

Then, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd and becomes the change icon 9C, a display mode in which the effect button image that is the change icon 9C blinks, The player is informed that the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 is valid, and the operation of the effect button 63 (pressing operation) is prompted. At this time, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are changed at high speed (variable display).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 53(G), when the player operates (presses down) the effect button 63, or the player does not operate (press down) the effect button 63 for a predetermined period (for example, a left decorative pattern). 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R 3 seconds after the variable effect (variable display) is started, a message MG2 indicating whether the change icon has been acquired is displayed again in the center of the display screen 7a. To be done. In this case, the message MG2 that "Change!" can be acquired and "acquire!" is displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are still rendered at high speed (variable display), and the variable icon 9C does not disappear from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, when the message MG2 disappears from the display screen 7a, the change icon HI is stock-displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 53(H). After that, as shown in FIG. 53(I), the white spherical icon displayed as the icon becomes about 1.5 times larger in size and appears in the center of the display screen 7a together with the flash light. Then, when the stocked change icon HI is activated, a lightning bolt runs from the change icon HI toward the appeared white spherical icon, and the size of the appeared white spherical icon increases, and the icon is displayed as a maximum. Compared to the size of the white spherical icon that was displayed, it is about 4 times the size.

After that, as shown in FIG. 53(J), the change icon HI disappears from the display screen 7a, and the white spherical icon switches to a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon to appear, and this star-shaped icon blinks. The moving icon 9C is moved toward the variable display position 9Cd where the effect button image that is the variable icon 9C is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 53(K), the effect icon image that is the variable icon 9C is switched to the star icon. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd in which the four corners of the square shape are represented by white lines and the first reserved display positions 9Ad to 4th reserve in which the lower two corners of the four corners of the square shape are represented by white lines. The display positions 9Ad and disappear from the display screen 7a. After this, the message MG1 also disappears from the display screen 7a. Note that the star-shaped icon is reduced in size during movement, but is larger than the size of the white spherical icon displayed in FIG. 53A, which is about 1.5 times the size. ..

After that, as shown in FIG. 53(L), the moon surface image THG2 as the specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched again to the city image THG1 which is the normal background image (at this time, the city image as the normal background image. The THG1 may be switched to another normal image (for example, an underground image), the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R that have been moved to the upper left corner of the display screen 7a are returned to the original variable areas. The display is changed at high speed (variable display), and the variable display position 9Cd of the rectangular image and the first holding display position 9Ad to the fourth holding display position 9Ad of the rectangular image are displayed again on the display screen 7a. As a result, the changed icon acquisition effect A ends. After the change icon acquisition effect A, various effects may be further continued, and when the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are stopped and displayed in the same design, it becomes a big hit and thereafter. When the big hit game (big hit production) is started, when the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are not stopped and displayed in the same design, it is out.

[Change icon acquisition effect B]
Next, the change icon acquisition effect B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining the change icon acquisition effect B. The change icon acquisition effect B is performed over a plurality of variable effects (variable display) by the decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 54(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative design 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative design 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. In the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side, the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (symbol: the number “1” to the number “9”) is started. When the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative design is started, the display of the decorative design that is stopped and displayed changes from the opaque state to the translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed to the high speed display mode. .. Thereby, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semitransparent decorative pattern which is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped). Note that the decorative pattern is in a display mode in which the decorative pattern moves in small increments in the vertical direction when the temporary stop display is performed.

The variation icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, which are currently changing as the end of the first special map reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (on the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (on the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad from the position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The reserved display positions 9Ad are arranged and displayed linearly along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

Although the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad both have a rectangular shape, they may have the same size or different sizes. In the present embodiment, both the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad have a rectangular shape, and the size of the variable display position 9Cd (distance in the horizontal direction) is the size of the hold display position 9Ad (the horizontal direction). Distance dimension) is larger than that (the distance dimension in the vertical direction is the same distance dimension). This is so that the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd can be distinguished from the hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad.

Here, a white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, a white spherical retention icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and second hold display positions 9Ad to fourth hold are displayed. The hold icon is not displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one stocked icon that has not been digested for the hold icon.

In addition, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbol, is supported. In addition to the hold icon 9A, which corresponds to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 The special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21 are arranged and displayed as unillustrated numbers on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 is shown in blue on the left side, and the number of the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21 is shown in red. The numbers are arranged on the upper side of the center of the display screen 7a so as to be spaced apart from each other on the right side and are always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as the number of reserved balls as numerical values, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and it is easy to intuitively understand. Note that these numbers are arranged on the forefront side of the display screen 7a and other images are displayed behind the foreground of the display screen 7a so that visibility is not hindered by the other images. It is like this.

Here, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “icon”) will be briefly described. Due to the difference in shape and color, the difference in expectation in winning in the lottery corresponding to the icon. Is represented. For example, of the four icons, a yellow (gold) star icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest likelihood of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hit, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hit, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hit. The smile sphere icon is further set to have a high expectation of being a jackpot in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (Rainbow (hit jackpot)).

In FIG. 54(A), the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, the game ball enters the first starting opening 20, and the change icon acquisition effect B is started by the look-ahead effect. ), the variable display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the area in which the change icon 9C and the hold icon 9A are displayed and the peripheral area are difficult to visually recognize due to the flash light FH (disappear). ). In addition, since the game ball has entered the first starting opening 20, two holding icons 9A are present.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting opening 20 and the second starting opening 21.

As the flashing light FH disappears, the presence of the variable display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the change icon 9C and the hold icon 9A can be visually recognized, and at this time, the flashlight FH is displayed. Before and after the change, the shapes of the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, and the change icon 9C and the hold icon 9A change.

Specifically, the shape of the variable display position 9Cd before the flash FH is displayed is a rectangular image arranged below the variable display position 9Cd as shown in FIG. 54(B). On the other hand, the shape of the variable display position 9Cd after the flash FH is displayed is, as shown in FIG. 54C, an image in which only the four corners of the square shape surrounding the variable icon 9C are represented by white lines. Has become. Further, the shapes of the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad before the flash FH is displayed are, as shown in FIG. 54B, the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. While the rectangular image is arranged below, the shapes of the first reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad after the flash FH is displayed are as shown in FIG. 54(C). In addition, of the four corners of the square shape surrounding the hold icon 9A, only the lower two corners have a shape represented by white lines.

The shapes of the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad after the flash FH is displayed are the shapes of the specific display positions used as the effect in the change icon acquisition effect B. By displaying the shape of the variable display position 9Cd after FH is displayed and the shapes of the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad after the flash FH is displayed differently, The change icon 9C and the hold icon 9A can be distinguished from each other. The start of the change icon acquisition effect B can also be transmitted to the player by changing the shapes of the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad.

Further, while the change icon 9C and the hold icon 9A before the flash FH is displayed are white spherical icons as shown in FIG. 54B, after the flash FH is displayed. As shown in FIG. 54(C), the change icon 9C and the hold icon 9A in FIG. 5 are sword images simulating the sword member 65, and are specific icons used as effects in the change icon acquisition effect B. That is, the change icon 9C and the hold icon 9A are switched to the same specific icon in the change icon acquisition effect B. Although the sword image is similar to the sword member 65, even if the player pushes the sword member 65, it is not reflected in the effect in the change icon acquisition effect B.

In FIG. 54(C), the flash FH disappears from the display screen 7a, and the shapes of the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the change icon 9C and the hold icon 9A, When the change occurs, a message MG1 "Repel and acquire the change icon!" is displayed in a line above the change icon 9C and the hold icon 9A in a small character on the display screen 7a.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 54(D), the left decorative design 8L is stopped and displayed with the number “1”, the middle decorative design 8C is stopped and displayed with the number “2”, and the right decorative design 8R is displayed with the number “3”. When the message MG1 is stopped and displayed, the message MG1 disappears from the display screen 7a, and the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a when the variation effect (variation display) ends. 54(A) to 54(D), the city image THG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a as a normal background image.

Subsequently, the city image THG1 which is the normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched to the moon image THG2 as the specific background image, and is displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad as shown in FIG. 54(E). When the held icon 9A that has been moved to the variable display position 9Cd becomes the variable icon 9C, a large character (about four times the size of the small character) is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a to "repel. The message MG1 "Get the change icon!" is displayed in two lines on the display screen 7a, and the variable areas of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are moved to the upper left corner of the display screen 7a and left. The decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are changed at high speed (variable display). The left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R during the change are difficult to visually recognize.

Then, on the display screen 7a, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB start fighting, and then the large character (about four times the size of the small character) displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The message MG1 "Repel and acquire the change icon!" moves to the upper right corner of the display screen 7a while being reduced, and is smaller than a large character and larger than a small character (compared to a large tree of a small character). It is displayed in two lines with a size about twice as large). As described above, as the display mode of the message MG1, the small characters shown in FIG. 54C are displayed in one line, and the large characters shown in FIG. Double size) and two lines after display in FIG. 54(E) with a size larger than a small character (about twice the size of a large tree of small characters). There are three display modes in total, and when the change icon acquisition effect B is being performed, the same content is displayed in three display modes. You can emphasize and convey to others.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 54(F), when a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds after the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R start changing effect (changing display)), A message MG2 indicating whether or not the change icon has been acquired is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Here, since the ally character CRA has been defeated and the enemy character CRB has won, the change icon cannot be acquired and the message MG2 "Sorry!" is arranged on the left side of the enemy character CRB and displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the left decorative design 8L is stopped and displayed by the number "2", the middle decorative design 8C is stopped and displayed by the number "1", and the right decorative design 8R is stopped and displayed by the number "3", so that it is lost. Then, the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a as the variation effect (variation display) ends.

Subsequently, when the hold icon 9A displayed in the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the change icon 9C, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are high speed. The variable effect (variable display) is displayed. As a result, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB start fighting again.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 54(G), when a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds after the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R start changing effect (variable display)), A message MG2 indicating whether or not the change icon has been acquired is displayed again in the center of the display screen 7a. Here, since the ally character CRA has won and the enemy character CRB has been defeated, the change icon can be acquired, and a message MG2 "acquire!" is displayed on the display screen 7a arranged to the left of the ally character CRA. At this time, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are still rendered at high speed (variable display), and the variable icon 9C does not disappear from the display screen 7a.

Then, when the message MG2 disappears from the display screen 7a, the change icon HI is stock-displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 54(H). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 54(I), the white spherical icon displayed as the icon becomes about 1.5 times larger in size and appears in the center of the display screen 7a together with the flash light. Then, when the stocked change icon HI is activated, a lightning bolt runs from the change icon HI toward the appeared white spherical icon, and the size of the appeared white spherical icon increases, and the icon is displayed as a maximum. Compared to the size of the white spherical icon that was displayed, it is about 4 times the size.

After that, as illustrated in FIG. 54(J), the change icon HI does not disappear from the display screen 7a and the white spherical icon does not switch to another icon, that is, the white spherical icon displayed in FIG. 54(a). The icon becomes the same as the icon No. 1 and the icon change has failed, and the white spherical icon moves toward the variable display position 9Cd where the sword image, which is the variable icon 9C, is reduced.

After that, as shown in FIG. 54K, the sword image, which is the variation icon 9C, is switched to the white spherical icon reduced to the original size. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd in which the four corners of the square shape are represented by white lines and the first reserved display positions 9Ad to 4th reserve in which the lower two corners of the four corners of the square shape are represented by white lines. The display positions 9Ad and disappear from the display screen 7a. After this, the message MG1 also disappears from the display screen 7a.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 54L, the moon surface image THG2 as the specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched again to the city image THG1 which is the normal background image (at this time, the city image as the normal background image. The THG1 may be switched to another normal image (for example, an underground image), the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R that have been moved to the upper left corner of the display screen 7a are returned to the original variable areas. The display is changed at high speed (variable display), and the variable display position 9Cd of the rectangular image and the first holding display position 9Ad to the fourth holding display position 9Ad of the rectangular image are displayed again on the display screen 7a. As a result, the change icon acquisition effect B ends. After the change icon acquisition effect B, various effects may be further continued, and when the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are stopped and displayed in the same design, it becomes a big hit, and thereafter. When the big hit game (big hit production) is started, when the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are not stopped and displayed in the same design, it is out.

[Change icon acquisition performance C]
Next, the change icon acquisition effect C will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining the change icon acquisition effect B. The change icon acquisition effect C is performed over a plurality of variable effects (variable display) by the decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 55(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative design 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative design 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. In the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side, the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (symbol: the number “1” to the number “9”) is started. When the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative design is started, the display of the decorative design that is stopped and displayed changes from the opaque state to the translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed to the high speed display mode. .. Thereby, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semitransparent decorative pattern which is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped). Note that the decorative pattern is in a display mode in which the decorative pattern moves in small increments in the vertical direction when the temporary stop display is performed.

The variation icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, which are currently changing as the end of the first special map reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (on the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (on the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad from the position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The reserved display positions 9Ad are arranged and displayed linearly along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

Although the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad both have a rectangular shape, they may have the same size or different sizes. In the present embodiment, both the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad have a rectangular shape, and the size of the variable display position 9Cd (distance in the horizontal direction) is the size of the hold display position 9Ad (the horizontal direction). Distance dimension) is larger than that (the distance dimension in the vertical direction is the same distance dimension). This is so that the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd can be distinguished from the hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad.

Here, a white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, a white spherical retention icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad to the third hold display position 9Ad, and a fourth hold is displayed. The hold icon is not displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, there are three stock icons that have been stocked without being digested.

In addition, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbol, is supported. In addition to the hold icon 9A, which corresponds to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 The special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21 are arranged and displayed as unillustrated numbers on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 is shown in blue on the left side, and the number of the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21 is shown in red. The numbers are arranged on the upper side of the center of the display screen 7a so as to be spaced apart from each other on the right side and are always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as the number of reserved balls as numerical values, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and it is easy to intuitively understand. Note that these numbers are arranged on the forefront side of the display screen 7a and other images are displayed behind the foreground of the display screen 7a so that visibility is not hindered by the other images. It is like this.

Here, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “icon”) will be briefly described. Due to the difference in shape and color, the difference in expectation in winning in the lottery corresponding to the icon. Is represented. For example, of the four icons, a yellow (gold) star icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest likelihood of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hit, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hit, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hit. The smile sphere icon is further set to have a high expectation of being a jackpot in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (Rainbow (hit jackpot)).

In FIG. 55(A), the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, the game ball enters the first starting opening 20, and the change icon acquisition effect C is started by the look-ahead effect. ), the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the area in which the variable icon 9C and the hold icon 9A are displayed and the peripheral area are difficult to visually recognize (disappear due to the flash FH). ). In addition, since the game ball has entered the first starting opening 20, there are four hold icons 9A.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting opening 20 and the second starting opening 21.

As the flashing light FH disappears, the presence of the variable display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the change icon 9C and the hold icon 9A can be visually recognized, and at this time, the flashlight FH is displayed. Before and after the change, the shapes of the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, and the change icon 9C and the hold icon 9A change.

Specifically, the shape of the variable display position 9Cd before the flash FH is displayed is a rectangular image arranged below the variable display position 9Cd as shown in FIG. 55(B). On the other hand, the shape of the variable display position 9Cd after the flash FH is displayed is an image in which only the four corners of the square shape surrounding the variable icon 9C are represented by white lines, as shown in FIG. 55(C). Has become. Further, the shapes of the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad before the flash FH is displayed are, as shown in FIG. 55B, the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. While the rectangular image is arranged below, the shapes of the first reserved display position 9Ad to the fourth reserved display position 9Ad after the flash FH is displayed are as shown in FIG. 55(C). In addition, among the four corners of the square shape surrounding the hold icon 9A, only the lower two corners have a shape represented by white lines.

The shapes of the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad after the flash FH is displayed are the shapes of the specific display positions used as the effect in the change icon acquisition effect C. By displaying the shape of the variable display position 9Cd after FH is displayed and the shape of the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad after the flash FH is displayed differently, The change icon 9C and the hold icon 9A can be distinguished from each other. The start of the change icon acquisition effect C can also be transmitted to the player by changing the shapes of the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad.

Further, while the change icon 9C and the hold icon 9A before the flash FH is displayed are white spherical icons as shown in FIG. 55B, after the flash FH is displayed. As shown in FIG. 55C, the change icon 9C and the hold icon 9A in FIG. 5 are sword images simulating the sword member 65, and are specific icons used as effects in the change icon acquisition effect C. That is, the change icon 9C and the hold icon 9A are switched to the same specific icon in the change icon acquisition effect C. Although the sword image is similar to the sword member 65, it is not reflected in the effect in the change icon acquisition effect C even if the player pushes the sword member 65.

In FIG. 55(C), the flash FH disappears from the display screen 7a, and the shapes of the variable display position 9Cd and the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the change icon 9C and the hold icon 9A, Is changed, a message MG1 "Repel and acquire the changed icon!" is displayed in a line above the change icon 9C and the hold icon 9A in a small character on the display screen 7a.

Then, as shown in FIG. 55(D), the left decorative design 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "1", the middle decorative design 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the right decorative design 8R is displayed with the number "3". When the message MG1 is stopped and displayed, the message MG1 disappears from the display screen 7a, and the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a when the variation effect (variation display) ends. 55(A) to 55(D), the city image THG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a as a normal background image.

Subsequently, the city image THG1 which is the normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched to the moon image THG2 as the specific background image, and is displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad as shown in FIG. 55(E). When the held icon 9A moved to the variable display position 9Cd and changed to the variable icon 9C, a large character (about four times the size of the small character) was displayed in the center of the display screen 7a to "repel. The message MG1 "Get change icon!" is displayed in two lines on the display screen 7a, and the variable areas of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are moved to the upper left corner of the display screen 7a and left. The decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are changed at high speed (variable display). The left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R during the change are difficult to visually recognize.

Then, on the display screen 7a, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB start fighting, and then the large character (about four times the size of the small character) displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The message MG1 "Repel and acquire the change icon!" moves to the upper right corner of the display screen 7a while being reduced, and is smaller than a large character and larger than a small character (compared to a large tree of a small character). It is displayed in two lines with a size about twice as large). As described above, as the display mode of the message MG1, the small characters shown in FIG. 55(C) are displayed in one line, and the large characters shown in FIG. Double size) and two lines after that in FIG. 55(E) with a size larger than a small character (about twice the size of a large tree of small characters). There are three display modes in total, and when the change icon acquisition effect C is being performed, the same content is displayed in three display modes. The content of the message MG1 is played by an unprecedented expression method. You can emphasize and convey to others.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 55(F), when a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds after the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R start changing effect (variable display)), A message MG2 indicating whether or not the change icon has been acquired is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Here, since the ally character CRA has been defeated and the enemy character CRB has won, the change icon cannot be acquired and the message MG2 "Sorry!" is arranged on the left side of the enemy character CRB and displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the left decorative design 8L is stopped and displayed by the number "2", the middle decorative design 8C is stopped and displayed by the number "1", and the right decorative design 8R is stopped and displayed by the number "3", so that it is lost. Then, the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a as the variation effect (variation display) ends.

Subsequently, when the hold icon 9A displayed in the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the change icon 9C, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are high speed. The variable effect (variable display) is displayed. As a result, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB start fighting again.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 55(G), when a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds after the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R start changing effect (variable display)), A message MG2 indicating whether or not the change icon has been acquired is displayed again in the center of the display screen 7a. Here, since the ally character CRA has won and the enemy character CRB has been defeated, the change icon can be acquired, and a message MG2 "acquire!" is displayed on the display screen 7a arranged to the left of the ally character CRA. At this time, the left decorative design 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "1", the middle decorative design 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "3", and the right decorative design 8R is stopped and displayed with the number "2". Then, the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a as the variation effect (variation display) ends.

Subsequently, when the message MG2 disappears from the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 55(H), the change icon HI is stock-displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, and subsequently displayed in the first hold display position 9Ad. When the held icon 9A moved to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the variable icon 9C, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are rapidly rendered (variably displayed). As a result, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB start fighting again.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 55(I), when a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds after the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R start changing effect (changing display)), A message MG2 indicating whether or not the change icon has been acquired is displayed again in the center of the display screen 7a. Here, since the ally character CRA has been defeated and the enemy character CRB has won, the change icon cannot be acquired and the message MG2 "Sorry!" is arranged on the left side of the enemy character CRB and displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the left decorative design 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "1", the middle decorative design 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the right decorative design 8R is stopped and displayed with the number "3", so that it is lost. Then, the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a as the variation effect (variation display) ends.

Subsequently, when the hold icon 9A displayed in the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the change icon 9C, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are high speed. The variable effect (variable display) is displayed. As a result, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB start fighting again.

Then, as shown in FIG. 55(J), when a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds after the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R start changing effect (changing display)), A message MG2 indicating whether or not the change icon has been acquired is displayed again in the center of the display screen 7a. Here, since the ally character CRA has won and the enemy character CRB has been defeated, the change icon can be acquired, and a message MG2 "acquire!" is displayed on the display screen 7a arranged to the left of the ally character CRA. At this time, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are still rendered at high speed (variable display), and the variable icon 9C does not disappear from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, when the message MG2 disappears from the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 55(K), another change icon HI is stocked above the change icon HI already displayed in stock at the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. It is displayed and the change icons HI and HI are arranged side by side in two lines. After that, the white spherical icon displayed as an icon increases its size by about 1.5 times and flashes. Appears in the center of the display screen 7a. Then, when the two change icons HI and HI which are arranged side by side in the vertical direction are activated, the lightning bolt is emitted from the two change icons HI and HI which are arranged side by side toward the white spherical icon that appears. The size of the white spherical icon that has appeared increases, and is about four times as large as the size of the white spherical icon displayed as the icon at the maximum.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 55(L), the two change icons HI and HI arranged side by side disappear from the display screen 7a, and switch from the white spherical icon to the smiley spherical icon having red and appear. Then, it moves toward the variable display position 9Cd where the sword image, which is the variable icon 9C in which the icon of the smiling sphere blinks, is reduced and reduced.

After that, as shown in FIG. 55(M), the sword image, which is the variation icon 9C, is switched to the smiling sphere icon. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd in which the four corners of the square shape are represented by white lines and the first reserved display positions 9Ad to 4th reserve in which the lower two corners of the four corners of the square shape are represented by white lines. The display positions 9Ad and disappear from the display screen 7a. After this, the message MG1 also disappears from the display screen 7a. Although the icon of the smiling sphere is reduced during movement, it is larger than the size of the white spherical icon displayed in FIG. 55(a) and is about 1.5 times the size. ..

Then, as shown in FIG. 55(N), the moon surface image THG2 as the specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched again to the city image THG1 which is the normal background image (at this time, the city image as the normal background image. The THG1 may be switched to another normal image (for example, an underground image), the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R that have been moved to the upper left corner of the display screen 7a are returned to the original variable area. Then, the variable display position (variation display) is performed at high speed, and the variable display position 9Cd of the rectangular image and the first holding display position 9Ad to the fourth holding display position 9Ad of the rectangular image are displayed again on the display screen 7a. As a result, the change icon acquisition effect C ends. After the change icon acquisition effect C, various effects may be further continued, and when the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are stopped and displayed in the same design, it becomes a big hit and thereafter. When the big hit game (big hit effect) is started, while the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are not stopped and displayed in the same design, it is out.

[Effect example]
Below, the example of an effect of change icon acquisition production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the change icon acquisition effect A of FIG. 53, the change icon acquisition effect B of FIG. 54, and the change icon acquisition effect C of FIG. 55, a first starting opening into which a game ball can enter 20 (ball entrance) and an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying a plurality of types of images, and related to the entrance of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 (ball entrance). In the change icon acquisition effect A, it is possible to execute a prefetch effect in which the change icon 9C and the hold icon 9A are switched to an effect button image simulating the effect button 63 and displayed, and the change icon acquisition effects B and C are executed. In this case, it is possible to execute the prefetching effect by switching to the sword image that imitates the sword member 65, and when switching to the specific icon, the change icon HI that can change (up) the expected degree of hit is displayed and the change icon is displayed. The first effect capable of acquiring HI (FIG. 53(F), (G) in the change icon acquisition effect A, FIG. 54(F), (G) in the change icon acquisition effect B, and FIG. 55 in the change icon acquisition effect C). (F), (G), (J)) can be executed. According to this configuration, by switching the variable icon 9C and the hold icon 9A to the same specific icon, it is possible to contribute to eliminating the monotonousness of the hold icon 9A in the digestion mode, and the expected degree of winning. It is possible to give the player an opportunity to acquire a changeable (changeable) change icon HI. Therefore, interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the change icon acquisition effect A of FIG. 53, the change icon acquisition effect B of FIG. 54, and the change icon acquisition effect C of FIG. It is like this. According to this configuration, even if there is a single or a plurality of hold icons 9A, the first effect can be executed. If there are one or more hold icons 9A, the first effect can be executed. Therefore, even if only one hold icon 9A exists, the degree of expectation of winning the player is high. It is possible to continue to give a sense of expectation that the change icon HI that can be increased is obtained, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play due to the number of hold icons 9A.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first effect in the change icon acquisition effect A of FIG. 53, the change icon acquisition effect B of FIG. 54, and the change icon acquisition effect C of FIG. It is possible to obtain an opportunity to acquire the icon HI. According to this configuration, since it is possible to obtain the opportunity to acquire the change icon HI by the number of the specific icons, the degree of expectation of winning due to the occurrence of the change icon acquisition effect A, the change icon acquisition effect B, and the change icon acquisition effect C. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation of up. Note that the number of hold icons 9A (that is, the number of specific icons) does not have to match the number of change icons that can be acquired, and even when only one hold icon 9A exists, When the change icon acquisition effect A, the change icon acquisition effect B, and the change icon acquisition effect C are performed, there are cases where the change icon cannot be acquired, and cases where one change icon can be acquired. Sometimes two change icons can be obtained, and sometimes three change icons can be obtained.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first effect in the change icon acquisition effect A of FIG. 53, the change icon acquisition effect B of FIG. 54, and the change icon acquisition effect C of FIG. When the variation icon 9C that has been switched to the specific icon is consumed and disappears due to the end of the variation effect (variation display), the hold icon 9A that has been switched to the specific icon is in a certain direction (the variation display that displays the variation icon 9C. It is possible to shift to the position 9Cd). According to this configuration, it is possible to visually inform the player of the degree of decrease in the number of specific icons, and to inform the player of the remaining number of acquisition opportunities of change icons.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first effect in the change icon acquisition effect A of FIG. 53, the change icon acquisition effect B of FIG. 54, and the change icon acquisition effect C of FIG. The change icon HI cannot be acquired during the variation effect (during variation display) when the look-ahead effect changes the variation icon 9C and the hold icon 9A to the specific icon. Although the variation icon 9C may be used as a notice ("variation effect" that changes the display mode) for a variation effect (during variation display), the variation icon 9C in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is: It is also used as a notice notifying the start of the first effect that is about to start (that is, in the next change effect (the next change effect)), not the advance notice for the change effect (while the change effect is being displayed). This is different from the use of the variation icon 9C as a notice for (variable display).

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first effect in the change icon acquisition effect A of FIG. 53, the change icon acquisition effect B of FIG. 54, and the change icon acquisition effect C of FIG. When the hold icon 9A becomes the change icon 9C and the change effect (change display) is started, the change icon HI can be acquired during the change effect (during change display), and the acquired change icon HI can be stocked. It has become. According to this configuration, since the acquired change icon HI is not immediately digested at the time of acquisition but is stocked, the player can grasp the number of the acquired change icon HI, and the stocked change icon HI. Expectations for the effect of the activation of the icon HI, that is, expectations for an increase in the degree of expectation of winning, increase.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, the first effect after the first effect in the change icon acquisition effect A of FIG. 53, the change icon acquisition effect B of FIG. 54, and the change icon acquisition effect C of FIG. 55. The second effect of switching from the variation icon 9C, which is a lightning bolt emitted from the change icon HI stocked by the change icon to the specific icon, to the icon indicating the degree of expectation of winning (in the change icon acquisition effect A, FIG. 53(I), FIG. 54(I) can be executed in the changed icon acquisition effect B, and FIG. 55(K) can be executed in the changed icon acquisition effect C. According to this configuration, when the second effect is performed, the effect of activating the already stocked change icons HI is exerted, so that the player can increase the number of stocked change icons HI and the expectation of winning. You can find relationships (laws) yourself.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of change icon acquisition production is shown.
[Modification 1]
The change icon acquisition effect A of FIG. 53, the change icon acquisition effect B of FIG. 54, and the change icon acquisition effect C of FIG. 55 are performed based on the game ball entering the first starting opening 20. .. In other words, it was performed in a so-called left-handed gaming state. However, it may be performed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second starting opening 21. In other words, it may be performed in a so-called right-handed gaming state.

[Modification 2]
In the change icon acquisition effect A of FIG. 53, the change icon acquisition effect B of FIG. 54, and the change icon acquisition effect C of FIG. 55, the game ball entered the first starting opening 20 and was started by the look-ahead effect. However, it is also possible to decide whether or not to carry out by a unique lottery by the sub control board 90 without using the prefetch effect. In this case, in order to execute any one of the change icon acquisition effects A, the change icon acquisition effect B, and the change icon acquisition effect C over the plurality of change effects (variation display) by the decorative pattern, the sub control board It is necessary for 90 to adjust the progress of the change icon acquisition effect in real time in consideration of the effect time indicated by the variation effect start command from the main control board 80.

[Modification 3]
In the change icon acquisition effect A of FIG. 53, the change icon acquisition effect B of FIG. 54, and the change icon acquisition effect C of FIG. 55, the change icon HI is displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. However, it may be displayed on the display screen of another image display device provided separately from the image display device 7. The other image display device may be provided on the game board 2 together with the image display device 7, or may be provided on the front frame 53. By doing so, since there are a plurality of image display devices, it is possible to increase variations in the display modes of the plurality of image display devices.

[Modification 4]
In the change icon acquisition effect A of FIG. 53, the change icon acquisition effect B of FIG. 54, and the change icon acquisition effect C of FIG. 55, the change icon HI is displayed on the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. However, the game board 2 or the front frame 53 is provided with a plurality of three-dimensionally shaped structures imitating change icons, and the number of change icons acquired by the number of lights emitted from these structures is transmitted to the player. You may

[Modification 5]
In the change icon acquisition effect A of FIG. 53, the change icon acquisition effect B of FIG. 54, and the change icon acquisition effect C of FIG. 55, lightning is emitted from the stocked change icon HI and disappears from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Was there. At this time, the stocked change icon HI may disappear from the display screen 7a due to a display mode in which the stocked change icon HI explodes due to the lightning emitted by itself. It may disappear from the display screen 7a in a display mode in which it is shattered.

[Modification 6]
In the change icon acquisition effect A of FIG. 53, the change icon acquisition effect B of FIG. 54, and the change icon acquisition effect C of FIG. 55, the hold icon 9A and the change icon 9C are all white balls with the lowest expectation. It was supposed to be done when it became an icon. However, for example, it may be performed when the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are different icons. For example, when the variation icon 9C is a smiling sphere icon and the hold icon 9A is a white spherical icon, one of the change icon acquisition effect A, the change icon acquisition effect B, and the change icon acquisition effect C is performed. May be. Although this variation icon 9C may be used as a notice during variation production (during variation display) (“variation production” that changes the display mode), it is used as a notice during variation production (during variation display). Instead, it is used as a notice to notify the start of the change icon acquisition effect A, the change icon acquisition effect B, and the change icon acquisition effect C that are started in the next change display (next change display).

[Modification 7]
The change icon acquisition effect A of FIG. 53, the change icon acquisition effect B of FIG. 54, and the change icon acquisition effect C of FIG. May be.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect A2-1]
A gaming machine comprising a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter and a display unit capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
It is possible to execute a pre-reading effect of switching the variable icon and the hold icon to the same specific icon in association with the entry of the game ball into the entry slot,
When switched to the specific icon, it is possible to display a change icon capable of changing the degree of expectation of winning and execute the first effect capable of acquiring the change icon.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A2-2]
A gaming machine according to Aspect A2-1,
The hold icon is single or plural,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A2-3]
A gaming machine according to Aspect A2-1 or A2-2,
In the first effect, it is possible to obtain an opportunity to acquire the change icons by the number of the specific icons.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A2-1 to A2-3,
In the first effect, when the variable icon that has switched to the specific icon is consumed and disappears due to the end of the variable effect, the hold icon that has switched to the specific icon shifts in a certain direction. ,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A2-1 to A2-4,
In the first effect, the change icon cannot be acquired during the change effect at the time when the prefetch effect switches the change icon and the hold icon to the specific icon.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A2-1 to A2-5,
In the first effect, when the hold icon switched to the specific icon becomes the change icon and the change effect is started, the change icon can be acquired during the change effect, and the acquired change icon is stocked. To do
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A2-7]
A gaming machine according to Aspect A2-6,
After the first effect, a lightning bolt is emitted from the change icon stocked by the first effect, and the variable icon that has been switched to the specific icon is switched to an icon that indicates a degree of expectation of winning. It is possible to execute the production of
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The holding icon movement change effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 56 to 58. This hold icon movement change effect can be executed during a change effect of the decorative symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the hold icon movement change effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image display device 7 displays. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Hold icon movement change effect A]
FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon movement change effect A. The hold icon movement change effect is an effect in which the aspect changes while the image representing the hold icon moves. The aspect here includes the shape, color, action, size, etc. of the image representing the hold icon. In the hold icon movement change effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 56(A), in the normal state, the three hold icons 9A and the hold icon (change) are displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Icon) 9C is displayed. Both the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C have a round shape (spherical shape). Here, since both the hold icon 9C and the hold icon 9A have the same shape (hold icon shape), these are collectively referred to as "hold icons 9A and 9C". The hold icon (change icon) 9C is displayed in the hold display area (change icon display area, hold digested image display area) below the center of the display screen 7a. Below this hold display area, a horizontally long rectangular image for indicating the position of the hold display area is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 56(B), the character image of "holding change pseudo continuous start!!" is displayed on the display screen 7a at a certain timing during change. At the same time, the hold icon (variable icon) 9C moves to the upper left. At this time, the three hold icons 9A disappear (are not displayed) from the display screen 7a. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 56(C), the holding icon 9C stops at a predetermined position (first position) at the lower left of the display screen 7a. The first position is located to the left of the hold display area. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are in the reach mode of "6↓6".

As shown in FIG. 56D, the holding icon 9C moves from the first position toward the holding display area in the right direction. In the reachable decorative pattern, the character image of "holding change" is temporarily stopped in place of the middle decorative pattern 8C. The color of the hold icon 9C changes in accordance with the temporary stop of the character image of "hold change". That is, when the character image of "holding change" is temporarily stopped in place of the medium decoration pattern 8C during the pseudo continuous effect, the mode of the holding icon 9C is changed. Here, the color of the hold icon 9C changes. The order in which the color of the hold icon 9C changes is from a color with a lower expectation of a big hit to a higher color. For example, the order is blue→green→red.

As shown in FIG. 56(E), as the pseudo continuous effect, the temporarily stopped decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing again. The hold icon 9C continues to move to the right. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 56(F), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are temporarily stopped again. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped at "567". Since the middle decoration pattern 8C is not temporarily stopped at the character image of "holding change" this time, the color of the holding icon 9C does not change. The hold icon 9C continues to move to the right.

As shown in FIG. 56(G), the temporarily stopped decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change again as a pseudo continuous effect. The hold icon 9C continues to move to the right. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 56(H), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are temporarily stopped again. Here, after the reach state of “3↓3”, the character image of “holding change” is temporarily stopped in place of the middle decorative pattern 8C. The color and shape of the hold icon 9C changes in accordance with the temporary stop of the character image of "hold change". That is, when the character image of "holding change" is temporarily stopped again in place of the medium decoration pattern 8C during the pseudo continuous production, the color and shape of the holding icon 9C changes to a mode with higher expectation.

As shown in FIG. 56(I), the decoration symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that have been temporarily stopped start to change again as a pseudo continuous effect. The hold icon 9C continues moving rightward, reaches the hold display area, and stops. That is, the hold icon 9C returns to the initial position. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 56(J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stop. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped in the manner of the big hit of "333".

[Hold icon movement change effect B]
FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon movement change effect B. The hold icon movement change effect is an effect in which the aspect changes while the image representing the hold icon moves. The aspect here includes the shape, color, action, size, etc. of the image representing the hold icon. In the hold icon movement change effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 57(A), in the normal state, the three hold icons 9A and the hold icon (change Icon) 9C is displayed. Both the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C have a round shape (spherical shape). Here, since both the hold icon 9C and the hold icon 9A have the same shape (hold icon shape), these are collectively referred to as "hold icons 9A and 9C". The hold icon (change icon) 9C is displayed in the hold display area (change icon display area, hold digested image display area) below the center of the display screen 7a. Below this hold display area, a horizontally long rectangular image for indicating the position of the hold display area is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 57(B), a character image of "holding change pseudo continuous start!!" is displayed on the display screen 7a at a certain timing during change. At the same time, the hold icon (variable icon) 9C moves to the upper left. At this time, the three hold icons 9A disappear (are not displayed) from the display screen 7a. Then, as shown in FIG. 57(C), the holding icon 9C stops at a predetermined position (first position) at the lower left of the display screen 7a. Further, a specific image BG is newly displayed below the display screen 7a. The specific image BG is a horizontally long rectangular image, the left end corresponds to the first position, and the right end corresponds to the reserved display area. A numerical image SG is newly displayed on the upper left of the hold icon 9C. The number image SG represents the remaining number of pseudo runs. Here, "4" is represented. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are in the reach mode of "6↓6".

As shown in FIG. 57(D), the holding icon 9C moves on the specific image BG from the left end to the right end. That is, it moves from the first position toward the reserved display area in the right direction. The position (display position) of the holding icon 9C with respect to the specific image BG represents (notifies) the remaining period in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed. The numerical image SG moves along with the movement of the hold icon 9C. That is, the numerical image SG moves at the same distance with respect to the moving holding icon 9C. In the reachable decorative pattern, the character image of "holding change" is temporarily stopped in place of the middle decorative pattern 8C. The color of the hold icon 9C changes in accordance with the temporary stop of the character image of "hold change". That is, when the character image of "holding change" is temporarily stopped in place of the medium decoration pattern 8C during the pseudo continuous effect, the mode of the holding icon 9C is changed. Here, the color of the hold icon 9C changes. The order in which the color of the hold icon 9C changes is from a color with a lower expectation of a big hit to a higher color. For example, the order is blue→green→red. The provisional stop of the middle decorative pattern 8C completes one of the pseudo runs, and the number image SG changes from "4" to "3".

As shown in FIG. 57(E), the temporarily stopped decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing again as a pseudo continuous effect. The hold icon 9C continues to move to the right on the specific image BG. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 57(F), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are temporarily stopped again. Here, after the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are temporarily stopped at "5" and "7", they are temporarily stopped at the character image "G!" instead of the middle decorative design 8C. Along with the temporary stop of the character image of "Point Get!", a black star-shaped point is displayed on the specific image BG. This black star-shaped point increases (accumulates) one by one each time the character image of "Point Get!" is temporarily stopped instead of the middle decoration pattern 8C during the pseudo continuous period. Then, an effect using this point is executed at the last variation of the pseudo-people. The provisional stop of the middle decorative pattern 8C completes one of the pseudo runs, and the number image SG changes from "3" to "2".

As shown in FIG. 57(G), the temporarily stopped decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change again as a pseudo continuous effect. The hold icon 9C continues to move to the right on the specific image BG. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 57(H), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are temporarily stopped again. Here, after the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are temporarily stopped in the reach state of “3↓3”, the character image of “holding change” is temporarily stopped instead of the middle decorative design 8C. The color and shape of the hold icon 9C changes in accordance with the temporary stop of the character image of "hold change". That is, when the character image of "holding change" is temporarily stopped again in place of the medium decoration pattern 8C during the pseudo continuous production, the color and shape of the holding icon 9C changes to a mode with higher expectation. The provisional stop of the middle decorative pattern 8C completes one of the pseudo runs, and the number image SG changes from "2" to "1".

As shown in FIG. 57(I), the temporarily stopped decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing again as a pseudo continuous effect. The hold icon 9C continues to move to the right, and stops when it reaches the right end of the specific image BG. Almost at the same time, the specific image BG disappears. As a result, the hold icon 9C is stopped in the hold display area. That is, the hold icon 9C returns to the initial position. Because of the last change of the pseudo-people, the production using the accumulated black star-shaped points is executed. Here, the black star-shaped point moves while expanding, and a predetermined effect is executed in the center of the display screen 7a. Then, as shown in FIG. 57(J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped in the manner of the big hit of "333".

[Hold icon movement change effect C]
FIG. 58 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon movement change effect C. The hold icon movement change effect is an effect in which the aspect changes while the image representing the hold icon moves. The aspect here includes the shape, color, action, size, etc. of the image representing the hold icon. In the hold icon movement change effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 58(A), in the normal state, the three hold icons 9A and the hold icon (change Icon) 9C is displayed. Both the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C have a round shape (spherical shape). Here, since both the hold icon 9C and the hold icon 9A have the same shape (hold icon shape), these are collectively referred to as "hold icons 9A and 9C". The hold icon (change icon) 9C is displayed in the hold display area (change icon display area, hold digested image display area) below the center of the display screen 7a. Below this hold display area, a horizontally long rectangular image for indicating the position of the hold display area is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 58(B), the character image of "holding change pseudo continuous start!!" is displayed on the display screen 7a at a certain timing during change. At the same time, the hold icon (variable icon) 9C and the three hold icons 9A disappear (are not displayed) from the display screen 7a. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 58(C), a hold icon image 9D representing the hold icons 9A and 9C is newly displayed at a predetermined position (first position) at the lower left of the display screen 7a. The hold icon image 9D may be the hold icons 9A and 9C, or may be an image imitating the hold icons 9A and 9C. A specific image BG is newly displayed below the display screen 7a. The specific image BG is a horizontally long rectangular image, the left end corresponds to the first position, and the right end corresponds to the reserved display area. A number image SG is newly displayed on the upper left of the hold icon image 9D. A part of the number image SG is displayed so as to overlap the hold icon image 9D. The number image SG represents the remaining number of pseudo runs. Here, "4" is represented. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C and 8R are in the reach mode of "6↓6".

As shown in FIG. 58D, the hold icon image 9D moves on the specific image BG from the left end to the right end. That is, it moves from the first position toward the reserved display area in the right direction. The position (display position) of the hold icon image 9D with respect to the specific image BG represents (notifies) the remaining period in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed. The numerical image SG moves along with the movement of the hold icon image 9D. That is, the numerical image SG moves in a state of being overlapped with the upper left of the moving hold icon image 9D. In the reachable decorative pattern, the character image of "holding change" is temporarily stopped in place of the middle decorative pattern 8C. The color of the hold icon image 9D changes in accordance with the temporary stop of the character image of "hold change". That is, when the character image of "holding change" is temporarily stopped in place of the medium decoration pattern 8C during the pseudo continuous effect, the mode of the holding icon image 9D changes. Here, the color of the hold icon image 9D changes. The order in which the color of the hold icon image 9D changes is from a color with a lower expectation of a big hit to a higher color. For example, the order is blue→green→red. The provisional stop of the middle decorative pattern 8C completes one of the pseudo runs, and the number image SG changes from "4" to "3".

As shown in FIG. 58(E), the temporarily stopped decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change again as a pseudo continuous effect. The hold icon image 9D continues to move to the right on the specific image BG. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 58(F), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are temporarily stopped again. Here, after the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are temporarily stopped at "5" and "7", they are temporarily stopped at the character image "Point Get!" instead of the middle decorative design 8C. Along with the temporary stop of the character image of "Point Get!", a black star-shaped point is displayed on the specific image BG. This black star-shaped point increases (accumulates) one by one each time the character image of "Point Get!" is temporarily stopped instead of the middle decoration pattern 8C during the pseudo continuous period. Then, an effect using this point is executed at the last variation of the pseudo-people. The provisional stop of the middle decorative pattern 8C completes one of the pseudo runs, and the number image SG changes from "3" to "2".

As shown in FIG. 58(G), as the pseudo continuous effect, the temporarily stopped decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing again. The hold icon image 9D continues to move to the right on the specific image BG. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 58(H), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are temporarily stopped again. Here, after the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are temporarily stopped in the reach state of “3↓3”, the character image of “holding change” is temporarily stopped instead of the middle decorative design 8C. The color and shape of the hold icon image 9D change in accordance with the temporary stop of the character image of "hold change". That is, when the character image of "holding change" is temporarily stopped again in place of the middle decoration pattern 8C during the pseudo continuous production, the color and shape of the holding icon image 9D change to a mode with higher expectation. The provisional stop of the middle decorative pattern 8C completes one of the pseudo runs, and the number image SG changes from "2" to "1".

As shown in FIG. 58(I), the temporarily stopped decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing again as a pseudo continuous effect. The hold icon image 9D continues to move to the right, and stops there when reaching the right end of the specific image BG. Almost at the same time, the specific image BG disappears. Then, the hold icon 9C in the same mode as the hold icon image 9D is displayed in the hold display area. That is, an effect is produced in which the hold icon 9C is returned to the initial position. When the hold icon image 9D is the hold icon 9C itself, it means that the hold icon image 9D has returned to the original position. Because of the last change of the pseudo-people, the production using the accumulated black star-shaped points is executed. Here, the black star-shaped point moves while expanding, and a predetermined effect is executed in the center of the display screen 7a. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 58(J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stop. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped in the manner of the big hit of "333".

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the hold icon movement change effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56 and FIG. 57, the first effect in which the color changes while the hold icon 9C (the image representing the hold icon) moves, and the first effect The hold icon 9C of the changed color can be executed with the second effect displayed in the hold display area. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel effect that has never been seen before, and the interest can be improved. Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58, a first effect in which the color changes while the hold icon image 9D (an image representing the hold icon) moves, and after the first effect, The hold icon image 9D of the changed color can be executed with the second effect displayed in the hold display area (variable icon display area, hold digested image display area). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel effect that has never been seen before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56(A), FIG. 57(A), and FIG. 58(A), the hold icon 9C (image representing the hold icon) before the first effect. Can be executed in the hold display area (variable icon display area, hold digested image display area), and after the third effect, the first effect is executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel effect that has never been seen before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, in the first effect, the hold icon 9C (image representing the hold icon) is displayed in the hold display area (change icon) from the first position. Display area, reserved digested image display area). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel effect that has never been seen before, and the interest can be improved. Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58, in the first effect, the hold icon image 9D (image showing the hold icon) is displayed in the hold display area (variable icon display) from the first position. Area, hold digested image display area). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel effect that has never been seen before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, in the first effect, a pseudo continuous effect of the decorative symbol is executed, and when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the decorative symbol is replaced with the “holding change”. When the character image “” is displayed, the color of the hold icon 9C (the image representing the hold icon) changes. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel effect that has never been seen before, and the interest can be improved. Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58, in the first effect, a pseudo continuous effect of the decorative symbol is executed, and when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the decorative symbol 8C is replaced with “Hold change”. When the character image “” is displayed, the color of the hold icon 9D (the image representing the hold icon) changes. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel effect that has never been seen before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 57, in the first effect, the numerical image SG representing the remaining number of pseudo runs moves together with the suspension icon 9C (image representing the suspension icon). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel effect that has never been seen before, and the interest can be improved. Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58, in the first effect, the numerical image SG representing the remaining number of pseudo-relations moves together with the hold icon 9D (image representing the hold icon). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel effect that has never been seen before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 57, in the first effect, the hold icon 9C (image representing the hold icon) moves on the specific image BG to hold the specific image BG. The display position of the icon 9C (the image representing the hold icon) notifies the remaining period in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel effect that has never been seen before, and the interest can be improved. Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58, in the first effect, the hold icon 9D (image representing the hold icon) moves on the specific image BG, and with respect to the specific image BG. The display position of the hold icon 9D (an image representing the hold icon) notifies the remaining period in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel effect that has never been seen before, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
The following is a modification of the hold icon movement change effect.
[Modification 1]
In the hold icon movement change effects A and B, the color is changed while the hold icon 9C moves as an image representing the hold icon. However, in the hold icon movement change effects A and B, the hold icon whose color changes while moving may be an image (icon image) imitating the hold icon 9C instead of the hold icon 9C.

[Modification 2]
In the hold icon movement change effects A and B, the color is changed while the hold icon 9C moves as an image representing the hold icon. However, in the hold icon movement change effects A and B, the hold icons whose colors change while moving may be the hold icons 9A and 9B instead of the hold icon 9C. In this case, the hold icons 9A and 9B may be configured to face the hold image display area instead of heading to the hold display area (variable icon display area, hold digested image display area) from the first position. ..

[Modification 3]
In the hold icon movement change effects A and B, the hold icon 9C whose color changes while moving and the hold icon 9C displayed in the hold display area (variable icon display area, hold digested image display area) are the same. It doesn't have to be. That is, the hold icon 9C may disappear from the display screen 7a once when moving from the hold display area or when arriving at the hold display area, or displayed as moving and in the hold display area. The size, shape, and color may change depending on the time of arrival, or the position may slightly shift before and after the arrival.

[Modification 4]
The hold icon movement change effects A to C are assumed to be executed in the normal state. However, the hold icon movement change effects A to C may be executed in the time saving state. In this case, the holding icon C of the holding icon movement change effects A to C may move to the left after moving to the right.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect A3-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is an image representing a hold icon,
A first effect in which the color of the hold icon changes while moving,
A game machine characterized in that, after the first effect, an image representing the withholding icon of a changed color can be executed with a second effect displayed in the withdrawal icon display area.
◇ [Aspect A3-2]
A gaming machine according to Aspect A3-1,
Before the first effect, it is possible to execute a third effect in which an image representing the hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area,
The game machine characterized in that the first effect is executed after the third effect.
◇ [Aspect A3-3]
A gaming machine according to Aspect A3-1 or A3-2,
In the first effect, the image representing the hold icon moves from a first position different from the hold icon display area toward the hold icon display area.
◇ [Aspect A3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A3-1 to A3-3,
In the first effect, a pseudo-relation effect of a decorative design is executed, and when a predetermined image is displayed instead of the decorative design when the decorative design is temporarily stopped, the color of the image representing the hold icon changes. Characteristic gaming machine.
◇ [Aspect A3-5]
A gaming machine according to Aspect A3-4,
In the first effect, an image representing the remaining number of pseudo-relations moves together with the image representing the hold icon.
◇ [Aspect A3-6]
A game machine according to Aspect A3-4 or A3-5,
In the first effect, the image representing the hold icon moves on a specific image, and the display position of the image representing the hold icon with respect to the specific image notifies the remaining period in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed. A gaming machine characterized by:

Specific icon stock effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 59 to 61. 59 to 61, for example, the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and other movable accessory disposed around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are easy to see in the drawings. Therefore, it is omitted.

This specific icon stock production is one of a plurality of pseudo-relational productions, and during the variation production (during the variation display), the variation production (variation display) by the decorative pattern is continuously performed a plurality of times. It is something that is That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (for example, variation effect start command) received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute a specific icon stock effect, the corresponding image from the ROM 103 is included. The data is read and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

The background image used in the specific icon stock rendering (referred to as "specific background image") is a specific image that is not normally included in the background image. Has become. The normal background image is a normal image such as a city image, a forest image, a sea image, a seabed image, and an underground image. The specific background image and the normal background image may be a still image or a moving image.

Here, first, the specific icon stock effect A will be described, and then the specific icon stock effect B and the specific icon stock effect C will be sequentially described.

[Specific icon stock production A]
The specific icon stock effect A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining the specific icon stock effect A. The specific icon stock effect A is one of a plurality of pseudo continuous effects, and during the variable effect (during the variable display), the variable effect (variable display) by the decorative pattern is continuously performed a plurality of times. It is something that will be done.

First, as shown in FIG. 59(A), the city image THG1 is displayed as a normal background image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, In the display mode in which the right decorative design 8R of the stereoscopic image is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a, the variation effect (variable display) of the decorative design (design: number "1" to number "9") Be started. When the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative design is started, the display of the decorative design that is stopped and displayed changes from the opaque state to the translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed to the high speed display mode. .. Thereby, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semitransparent decorative pattern which is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped). Note that the decorative pattern is in a display mode in which the decorative pattern moves in small increments in the vertical direction when the temporary stop display is performed.

The variation icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, which are currently changing as the end of the first special map reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (on the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (on the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad from the position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The reserved display positions 9Ad are arranged and displayed linearly along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

Here, a white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, a white spherical retention icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and second hold display positions 9Ad to fourth hold are displayed. The hold icon is not displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one stocked icon that has not been digested for the hold icon. In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting opening 20 and the second starting opening 21.

In addition, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbol, is supported. In addition to the hold icon 9A, which corresponds to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 The special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21 are arranged and displayed as unillustrated numbers on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 is shown in blue on the left side, and the number of the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21 is shown in red. The numbers are arranged on the upper side of the center of the display screen 7a so as to be spaced apart from each other on the right side and are always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as the number of reserved balls as numerical values, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and it is easy to intuitively understand. Note that these numbers are arranged on the forefront side of the display screen 7a and other images are displayed behind the foreground of the display screen 7a so that visibility is not hindered by the other images. It is like this.

Here, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “icon”) will be briefly described. Due to the difference in shape and color, the difference in expectation in winning in the lottery corresponding to the icon. Is represented. For example, of the four icons, a yellow (gold) star icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest likelihood of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hit, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hit, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hit. The smile sphere icon is further set to have a high expectation of being a jackpot in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (Rainbow (hit jackpot)).

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative design is started in FIG. 59(A), the left decorative design 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "1", and the middle decorative design 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "2". , The right decorative design 8R is stopped and displayed by the number "3", and thus the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 59(B), the city image THG1 which is the normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched to the moon image THG2 as the specific background image and displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad. When the white spherical holding icon 9A that had been moved to the fluctuation display position 9Cd becomes the white spherical fluctuation icon 9C, the numeral image (here, numeral 4) 9Cz is arranged in front of the fluctuation icon 9C. In the display mode, the message MG1 "stock icons!" is displayed in a line in the approximate center of the display screen 7a, and the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad disappear from the display screen 7a.

The size of the variation icon 9C and the size of the number image 9Cz may be the same, or one of them may be large. Further, when the number image 9Cz is arranged on the back side of the variation icon 9C, it is better to make the size of the number image 9Cz larger than the size of the variation icon 9C in view of the visibility of the number image 9Cz.

The number 4 represented by the number image 9Cz at this time point indicates the remaining number of continuous fluctuations due to the pseudo run. That is, the player is informed that the variation effect (variation display) by the decorative pattern is continuously performed for the remaining four times in the variation effect (variation display) at this point.

The message MG1 disappears from the display screen 7a immediately before the variation effect (variation display) by the first (first) decorative pattern by the pseudo sequence is started, and the variation effect (variation display by the first (first) decorative pattern by the pseudo sequence is disappeared. ) Is started, then, as shown in FIG. 59(C), the left decorative design 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number “3”, the middle decorative design 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number “2”, and the right The decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1", and the fluctuating effect (variable display) by the first (first) decorative pattern by the pseudo-link is finished, and the numerical image 9Cz of the variable icon 9C is changed from the number 4 to the number 3. Becomes Thereby, the player is informed that the variation effect (variation display) by the decorative pattern is continuously performed for the remaining three times in the variation effect (variation display).

When the fluctuating effect (variation display) by the second decorative design by the pseudo-relation is started, as shown in FIG. 59(D), the left decorative design 8L is then temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the right decorative. The symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "5", and the change icon HI appears as a specific icon from the variation area of the middle decoration symbol 8C, and the change icon HI is activated to digest the change icon HI without stocking it.

When this change icon HI appears, as shown in FIG. 59(E), the change icon HI moves downward so as to draw an arc toward the change icon 9C and collides with the change icon 9C. Here, although the change icon HI collides with the change icon 9C, the change icon 9C having a white sphere does not change to another shape icon due to this collision, and the change icon 9C fails.

As shown in FIG. 59(F), the variation of the variation icon 9C has failed, and the variation effect (variation display) by the second decorative design by the pseudo-link is finished, and the numerical image 9Cz of the variation icon 9C is a numeral 3 to a numeral. It becomes 2. This tells the player that the variation effect (variation display) in the variation effect (variation display) is continuously performed for the remaining two times.

When the fluctuating effect (variation display) by the third decorative design by the pseudo-relation is started, as shown in FIG. 59(G), the left decorative design 8L is then temporarily stopped and displayed with the number “6”, and the right decorative. The symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "4", and the change icon HI appears again as a specific icon from the variation area of the middle decoration symbol 8C, and the change icon HI is activated to digest the change icon HI without stocking it.

When this change icon HI appears, as shown in FIG. 59(H), the change icon HI moves downward so as to draw an arc toward the change icon 9C and collides with the change icon 9C. Here, although the change icon HI collides with the fluctuation icon 9C, the collision does not change the white spherical fluctuation icon 9C to another icon, and the fluctuation icon 9C fails again.

As shown in FIG. 59(I), the variation of the variation icon 9C has failed, and the variation effect (variation display) by the third decorative pattern by the pseudo-link is finished, and the numeric image 9Cz of the variation icon 9C is a number from 2 to 2. It becomes 1. As a result, the player is informed that the variation effect (variation display) by the decorative pattern is performed only once in the variation effect (variation display).

When the variation effect (variation display) by the fourth (last) decorative design by the pseudo-relation is started, as shown in FIG. 59(J), the left decorative design 8L is then temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "5". , The middle decoration pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "6", the right decoration pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "7", and the variable effect (variation display) by the fourth (last) decorative pattern by pseudo-linking is displayed. 59, the moon image THG2 as the specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched again to the city image THG1 which is the normal background image (at this time, the city as the normal background image is displayed). The image THG1 may be switched to another normal image (for example, an underground image), the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad are displayed again on the display screen 7a. As a result, the specific icon stock production A ends.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 59(L), the left decorative design 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "5", the middle decorative design 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "6", and the right decorative design 8R is displayed with the number "7". It is stopped and displayed, and becomes out of order, and as a result, the white spherical variation icon 9C that cannot be changed from the white spherical icon to another icon in the specific icon stock effect A disappears from the display screen 7a.

[Specific icon stock production B]
Next, the specific icon stock effect B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining the specific icon stock effect B. The specific icon stock effect B is one of a plurality of pseudo continuous effects, and during the variable effect (during the variable display), the variable effect (variable display) by the decorative pattern is continuously performed a plurality of times. It is something that will be done.

First, as shown in FIG. 60(A), the city image THG1 is displayed as a normal background image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, In the display mode in which the right decorative design 8R of the stereoscopic image is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a, the variation effect (variable display) of the decorative design (design: number "1" to number "9") Be started. When the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative design is started, the display of the decorative design that is stopped and displayed changes from the opaque state to the translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed to the high speed display mode. .. Thereby, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semitransparent decorative pattern which is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped). Note that the decorative pattern is in a display mode in which the decorative pattern moves in small increments in the vertical direction when the temporary stop display is performed.

The variation icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, which are currently changing as the end of the first special map reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (on the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (on the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad from the position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The reserved display positions 9Ad are arranged and displayed linearly along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

Here, a white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, a white spherical retention icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and second hold display positions 9Ad to fourth hold are displayed. The hold icon is not displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one stocked icon that has not been digested for the hold icon. In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting opening 20 and the second starting opening 21.

In addition, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbol, is supported. In addition to the hold icon 9A, which corresponds to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 The special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21 are arranged and displayed as unillustrated numbers on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 is shown in blue on the left side, and the number of the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21 is shown in red. The numbers are arranged on the upper side of the center of the display screen 7a so as to be spaced apart from each other on the right side and are always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as the number of reserved balls as numerical values, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and it is easy to intuitively understand. Note that these numbers are arranged on the forefront side of the display screen 7a and other images are displayed behind the foreground of the display screen 7a so that visibility is not hindered by the other images. It is like this.

Here, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “icon”) will be briefly described. Due to the difference in shape and color, the difference in expectation in winning in the lottery corresponding to the icon. Is represented. For example, of the four icons, a yellow (gold) star icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest likelihood of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hit, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hit, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hit. The smile sphere icon is further set to have a high expectation of being a jackpot in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (Rainbow (hit jackpot)).

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative design is started in FIG. 60(A), the left decorative design 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "1", and the middle decorative design 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "2". , The right decorative design 8R is stopped and displayed by the number "3", and thus the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 60(B), the city image THG1 which is the normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched to the moon image THG2 as the specific background image and displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad. When the white spherical holding icon 9A that had been moved to the fluctuation display position 9Cd becomes the white spherical fluctuation icon 9C, the numeral image (here, numeral 4) 9Cz is arranged in front of the fluctuation icon 9C. In the display mode, the message MG1 "stock icons!" is displayed in a line in the approximate center of the display screen 7a, and the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad disappear from the display screen 7a. The size of the variation icon 9C and the size of the number image 9Cz may be the same, or one of them may be large. Further, when the number image 9Cz is arranged on the back side of the variation icon 9C, it is better to make the size of the number image 9Cz larger than the size of the variation icon 9C in view of the visibility of the number image 9Cz.

The number 4 represented by the number image 9Cz at this time point indicates the remaining number of continuous fluctuations due to the pseudo run. That is, the player is informed that the variation effect (variation display) by the decorative pattern is continuously performed for the remaining four times in the variation effect (variation display) at this point.

The message MG1 disappears from the display screen 7a immediately before the variation effect (variation display) by the first (first) decorative pattern by the pseudo sequence is started, and the variation effect (variation display by the first (first) decorative pattern by the pseudo sequence is disappeared. ) Is started, then, as shown in FIG. 60(C), the left decorative design 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number “3”, the middle decorative design 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number “2”, and the right The decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1", and the fluctuating effect (variable display) by the first (first) decorative pattern by the pseudo-link is finished, and the numerical image 9Cz of the variable icon 9C is changed from the number 4 to the number 3. Becomes Thereby, the player is informed that the variation effect (variation display) by the decorative pattern is continuously performed for the remaining three times in the variation effect (variation display).

When the fluctuating effect (variation display) by the second decorative design by the pseudo-relation is started, then the left decorative design 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2" as shown in FIG. The symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "5", and the change icon HI appears as a specific icon from the variation area of the middle decoration symbol 8C, and the change icon HI is activated to digest the change icon HI without stocking it.

When this change icon HI appears, as shown in FIG. 60(E), the change icon HI moves downward so as to draw an arc toward the change icon 9C and collides with the change icon 9C.

When the change icon HI collides with the change icon 9C, as shown in FIG. 60(F), the change icon 9C having a white spherical shape changes to a yellow (gold) star icon, and the change icon 9C changes. Be successful.

The change of the change icon 9C is successful, and the change effect (change display) by the second decorative pattern by the pseudo-link is finished, and the number image 9Cz of the change icon 9C changes from the number 3 to the number 2. This tells the player that the variation effect (variation display) in the variation effect (variation display) is continuously performed for the remaining two times.

When the fluctuating effect (variation display) by the third decorative design by the pseudo-relation is started, as shown in FIG. 60(G), the left decorative design 8L is then temporarily stopped and displayed with the number “6”, and the right decorative. The pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "4", and the battle effect icon AI appears as a specific icon from the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the battle effect icon AI is not digested and stocked, so as to be stocked. ), the battle effect icon AI draws a curve toward the lower right corner of the display screen 7a so as to pass between the right decorative design 8R in which the battle effect icon AI is temporarily displayed and the variation icon 9C. To move. The battle effect icon AI indicates a battle effect that is developed (started or developed) after the end of the specific icon stock effect B. In this battle effect, two characters (an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB) are used. It is a production that fights, and it is a production with high expectations for jackpots.

When the battle effect icon AI moves to the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 60(I), the character image "AIa" having a predetermined color (for example, red) above the battle effect icon AI is left. It is displayed on the display screen 7a in a display form of a downward slope (upward slope to the right), and the stocking of the battle effect icon AI is successful.

The battle effect icon AI is successfully stocked, and the second variable effect (variable display) by the decorative pattern by the pseudo-link ends, and the numerical image 9Cz of the variable icon 9C changes from the numeral 2 to the numeral 1. As a result, the player is informed that the variation effect (variation display) by the decorative pattern is performed only once in the variation effect (variation display).

When the variation effect (variation display) by the fourth (last) decorative design by the pseudo-relation is started, the character image AIa disappears from the display screen, and then the left decorative design 8L is displayed, as shown in FIG. 60(J). The number "5" is displayed as a temporary stop, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed as a temporary stop by the number "6", the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed as a temporary stop by the number "7", and the fourth (last) decoration by pseudo-linking After the variable effect (variable display) by the pattern ends, as shown in FIG. 60(K), the moon surface image THG2 is switched to the city image THG1 which is the normal background image as the specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a. (At this time, the city image THG1 may be switched to another normal image (for example, an underground image) as the normal background image), the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad are displayed again on the display screen 7a. As a result, the specific icon stock effect B ends.

After that, as shown in FIG. 60(L), the variation by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R is started again, and by the activation of the stocked battle effect icon AI, FIG. 60(M). , (N), the battle effect is developed (started, developed), and the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight each other. In the battle effect, the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad disappear from the display screen 7a, and further, the change icon 9C (in the present embodiment, although the hold icon 9A does not exist at this point, the hold icon 9A exists. If the hold icon 9A also disappears from the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB is defeated, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are the same design. The stop display is performed, and the jackpot game (jackpot effect) is started after that, while the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins. Left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C, right The decorative design 8R is not stopped and displayed with the same design, and is lost. When the battle effect is finished and the jackpot or the deviation is confirmed, the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad are displayed again on the display screen 7a. In the embodiment, although the hold icon 9A does not exist at this point, when the hold icon 9A exists, the hold icon 9A is also displayed again on the display screen 7a.

[Specific icon stock production C]
Next, the specific icon stock effect C will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining the specific icon stock effect C. The specific icon stock effect C is one of a plurality of pseudo continuous effects, and during the variable effect (during the variable display), the variable effect by the decorative pattern (variable display) is continuously performed a plurality of times. It is something that will be done.

First, as shown in FIG. 61(A), the city image THG1 is displayed as a normal background image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, In the display mode in which the right decorative design 8R of the stereoscopic image is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a, the variation effect (variable display) of the decorative design (design: number "1" to number "9") Be started. When the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative design is started, the display of the decorative design that is stopped and displayed changes from the opaque state to the translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed to the high speed display mode. .. Thereby, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semitransparent decorative pattern which is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped). Note that the decorative pattern is in a display mode in which the decorative pattern moves in small increments in the vertical direction when the temporary stop display is performed.

The variation icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, which are currently changing as the end of the first special map reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (on the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (on the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad from the position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The reserved display positions 9Ad are arranged and displayed linearly along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

Here, a white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, a white spherical retention icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and second hold display positions 9Ad to fourth hold are displayed. The hold icon is not displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one stocked icon that has not been digested for the hold icon. In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting opening 20 and the second starting opening 21.

In addition, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbol, is supported. In addition to the hold icon 9A, which corresponds to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 The special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21 are arranged and displayed as unillustrated numbers on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 is shown in blue on the left side, and the number of the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21 is shown in red. The numbers are arranged on the upper side of the center of the display screen 7a so as to be spaced apart from each other on the right side and are always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as the number of reserved balls as numerical values, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and it is easy to intuitively understand. Note that these numbers are arranged on the forefront side of the display screen 7a and other images are displayed behind the foreground of the display screen 7a so that visibility is not hindered by the other images. It is like this.

Here, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “icon”) will be briefly described. Due to the difference in shape and color, the difference in expectation in winning in the lottery corresponding to the icon. Is represented. For example, of the four icons, a yellow (gold) star icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest likelihood of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hit, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hit, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hit. The smile sphere icon is further set to have a high expectation of being a jackpot in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (Rainbow (hit jackpot)).

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative design is started in FIG. 61(A), the left decorative design 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "1", and the middle decorative design 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "2". , The right decorative design 8R is stopped and displayed by the number "3", and thus the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 61B, the city image THG1 which is the normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched to the moon image THG2 as the specific background image and displayed at the first reserved display position 9Ad. When the white spherical holding icon 9A that had been moved to the fluctuation display position 9Cd becomes the white spherical fluctuation icon 9C, the numeral image (here, numeral 4) 9Cz is arranged in front of the fluctuation icon 9C. In the display mode, the message MG1 "stock icons!" is displayed in a line in the approximate center of the display screen 7a, and the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad disappear from the display screen 7a. The size of the variation icon 9C and the size of the number image 9Cz may be the same, or one of them may be large. Further, when the number image 9Cz is arranged on the back side of the variation icon 9C, it is better to make the size of the number image 9Cz larger than the size of the variation icon 9C in view of the visibility of the number image 9Cz.

The number 4 represented by the number image 9Cz at this time point indicates the remaining number of continuous fluctuations due to the pseudo run. That is, the player is informed that the variation effect (variation display) by the decorative pattern is continuously performed for the remaining four times in the variation effect (variation display) at this point.

The message MG1 disappears from the display screen 7a immediately before the variation effect (variation display) by the first (first) decorative pattern by the pseudo sequence is started, and the variation effect (variation display by the first (first) decorative pattern by the pseudo sequence is disappeared. ) Is started, then, as shown in FIG. 61(C), the left decorative design 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number “3”, the middle decorative design 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number “2”, and the right The decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1", and the fluctuating effect (variable display) by the first (first) decorative pattern by the pseudo-link is finished, and the numerical image 9Cz of the variable icon 9C is changed from the number 4 to the number 3. Becomes Thereby, the player is informed that the variation effect (variation display) by the decorative pattern is continuously performed for the remaining three times in the variation effect (variation display).

When the fluctuating effect (variation display) by the second decorative design by the pseudo-relation is started, then the left decorative design 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2" as shown in FIG. 61(D), and the right decorative. The symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "5", and the change icon HI appears as a specific icon from the variation area of the middle decoration symbol 8C, and the change icon HI is activated to digest the change icon HI without stocking it.

When this change icon HI appears, as shown in FIG. 61(E), the change icon HI moves downward so as to draw an arc toward the variation icon 9C and collides with the variation icon 9C.

When the change icon HI collides with the change icon 9C, as shown in FIG. 61(F), the change icon 9C having a white spherical shape changes to a yellow (gold) star icon, and the change icon 9C changes. Be successful.

The change of the change icon 9C is successful, and the change effect (change display) by the second decorative pattern by the pseudo-link is finished, and the number image 9Cz of the change icon 9C changes from the number 3 to the number 2. This tells the player that the variation effect (variation display) in the variation effect (variation display) is continuously performed for the remaining two times.

When the fluctuating effect (variation display) by the third decorative design by the pseudo-relation is started, as shown in FIG. 61(G), the left decorative design 8L is then temporarily stopped and displayed with the number “6”, and the right decorative. The symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "4", and the button effect icon BI appears as a specific icon from the variable region of the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the button effect icon BI is not digested and stocked, so as to be stocked in FIG. ), the button effect icon BI draws a curve toward the lower right corner of the display screen 7a so as to pass between the right decorative pattern 8R in which the button effect icon BI is temporarily stopped and the variation icon 9C. To move. The button effect icon BI indicates a button effect that is developed (started or developed) after the end of the specific icon stock effect C, and in this button effect, the player operates (presses) the effect button 63. It is an effect that can intervene in the effect that is urged to proceed and cause a change in the effect image, and is an effect with a lower expectation of a big hit than the battle effect described later, but the effect button 63 of the player. Since a change can be generated in the effect image by the operation (pressing operation), the player can fully enjoy the sense of accomplishment with respect to the operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 63 due to the change in the effect image. It has become.

When the button effect icon BI moves to the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, the character image BIa of "stock" having a predetermined color (for example, red) is left above the button effect icon BI as shown in FIG. 61(I). It is displayed on the display screen 7a in a display mode of a downward slope (upward slope to the right), and the stock of the button effect icon BI is successful.

The stock of the button effect icon BI is successful, and the second variable effect (variable display) by the decorative pattern by the pseudo-link is finished, and the numerical image 9Cz of the variable icon 9C is changed from the numeral 2 to the numeral 1. As a result, the player is informed that the variation effect (variation display) by the decorative pattern is performed only once in the variation effect (variation display).

When the variation effect (variable display) by the fourth (last) decorative design by the pseudo-relation is started, the character image BIa disappears from the display screen, and then the left decorative design 8L is displayed, as shown in FIG. 61(J). The number "5" is displayed as a temporary stop, the right decoration pattern 8R is temporarily displayed as a number "7", and the battle effect icon AI appears as a specific icon from the variable area of the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the battle effect icon AI is consumed. Instead, in order to stock, the battle effect icon AI is in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a so as to pass between the right decorative symbol 8R in which the battle effect icon AI is temporarily displayed and the variation icon 9C, The button effect icon BI which is already displayed in stock is moved upward to draw a curve. The battle effect icon AI indicates a battle effect that is developed (started or developed) after the end of the specific icon stock effect C. In this battle effect, two characters (an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB) are used. It is a production that fights, and it is a production with high expectations for jackpots.

When the battle effect icon AI moves above the button effect icon BI, as shown in FIG. 61(K), the character image AIa “stock” having a predetermined color (for example, red) above the battle effect icon AI is left. It is displayed on the display screen 7a in a display mode of a downward slope (upward slope to the right), and the stocking of the battle effect icon AI is successful.

Then, the character image BIa disappears from the display screen, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "5", the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "6", and the right decorative pattern 8R is the number "7". Is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the fourth (last) variation effect (variation display) by the decorative pattern by pseudo-relation ends, and as a specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 61(L). The moon image THG2 is switched again to the city image THG1 which is the normal background image (at this time, the city image THG1 may be switched to another normal image (for example, an underground image) as the normal background image), and the variable display position 9Cd. And the hold display position 9Ad is displayed again on the display screen 7a. As a result, the specific icon stock effect C ends.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 61(M), the variation by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R is started again, and in the order in which they are stocked, first, the initially stocked button effect icon. As shown in FIG. 61(N), the button effect is developed (started or developed) by the activation of BI, a large button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the button image BG is displayed. A message MG2 "Push!" is displayed on the display screen 7a. Thereby, the development (start, development) of the button effect is notified to the player, and the player is further prompted to operate (press operation) the effect button 63. At this time, the button effect icon BI disappears from the display screen 7a, and the character "corner" image CI indicating completion of activation is displayed on the display screen 7a instead of the button effect icon BI.

When the button effect is completed, this time, the battle effect icon AI, which is secondly stocked, activates (starts and develops) the battle effect, although not shown. At this time, the battle effect icon AI disappears from the display screen 7a, and the character "corner" image CI indicating completion of activation is displayed on the display screen 7a instead of the battle effect icon AI. As a result, the "corner" images CI are displayed in a state where they are vertically arranged in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a. When the battle effect is developed (started or developed), the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB will fight. In the battle production, when the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB is defeated, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are stopped and displayed with the same design, and a big hit is followed by a big hit game ( When the team character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are not stopped and displayed in the same design. It will be out of the way.

[Effect example]
Below, the effect example of specific icon stock production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the specific icon stock effect A of FIG. 59, the specific icon stock effect B of FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock effect C of FIG. 61, an image display device capable of displaying a plurality of types of images. 7 (display means) is provided, a predetermined effect can be executed, and a change icon HI or the like is displayed as a specific icon that can change (up) the expected degree of winning each time pseudo-relation is performed, and the specific icon is acquired. Possible first effects (FIG. 59(D) to (I) in the specific icon stock effect A, FIG. 60(D) to (J) in the specific icon stock effect B, and FIG. 61(D) in the specific icon stock effect C). ~(K)) can be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to obtain a specific icon whose expected degree of winning can be changed (upgradable) each time a pseudo-repeating is performed, which contributes to eliminating monotony in the production. It is possible to give the player the acquisition of the change icon HI or the like as a specific icon that can change (up) the expected degree of winning. Therefore, interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the specific icon stock effect A of FIG. 59, the specific icon stock effect B of FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock effect C of FIG. 61, when the specific icon is acquired as the specific icon It is possible to include a first specific icon (change icon HI) that is consumed by the second specific icon (a battle effect icon AI, etc.) that is stocked without being digested when the specific icon is acquired. There is. According to this configuration, the player does not know what kind of specific icon is displayed, and even if the specific icon stock production is started, the specific icon that appears can be predicted. Since it is not possible, it is possible to prevent the freshness of the specific icon stock rendering from being easily lost, and it is possible to increase variations in the specific icon rendering.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first effect in the specific icon stock effect A in FIG. 59, the specific icon stock effect B in FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock effect C in FIG. 61, the first specific icon (change When the icon HI) is acquired, the display mode of the variable icon 9C can be changed to another display mode. According to this configuration, when the first specific icon (change icon HI) is acquired, it is possible to change the display mode of the variable icon 9C to another display mode and increase the degree of expectation. Therefore, the appearance of the first specific icon (change icon HI) can be noticed.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first effect of the specific icon stock effect A of FIG. 59, the specific icon stock effect B of FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock effect C of FIG. When there are a plurality of patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) reach is not formed. According to this configuration, by performing the pseudo rendition without forming the reach, it is possible to give the player a sense of speed with respect to the progress of the specific icon stock production, and suppress the player's irritability for the pseudo rendition. Can contribute to

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the specific icon stock effect B of FIG. 60 and the specific icon stock effect C of FIG. 61, when the pseudo rendition is finished and the first effect is finished, the stock is given by the first effect. 60 (G) to (J) in the specific icon stock production B, and FIG. 61 in the specific icon stock production C related to the created second specific icon (the battle production icon AI, the button production icon BI, etc.). (G) to (K) can be executed. According to this configuration, in the pseudo rendition, the period of the effect of stocking the second specific icon by the first effect, and at the end of the pseudo rendition, the period of the effect of activating the second specific icon stocked by the second effect. And, the player can experience it continuously, and further, since other productions are continuously developed (started and developed) after the specific icon stock production, expectation for a big hit against other productions It is possible to enhance the feeling in the first stage production of the specific icon stock production.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the second effect in the specific icon stock effect A of FIG. 59, the specific icon stock effect B of FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock effect C of FIG. The hold icon 9A may be displayed on the screen. According to this configuration, when the presence of the hold icon 9A is not an obstacle when expressing the world view by the progress of the second effect, the hold icon 9A can be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and can be held. When the presence of the icon 9A is an obstacle, it can be erased from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In other words, it is possible to prevent the hold icon 9A from interfering with the second effect by displaying the hold icon 9A on the display screen 7a or deleting it from the display screen 7a when the hold ball exists. The variable icon 9C can also be displayed on the display screen 7a or erased from the display screen 7a to prevent the hold icon 9A from interfering with the second effect. Further, it is possible to prevent the hold icon 9A from interfering with the second effect by displaying the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad on or off the display screen 7a. ..

[Modification]
Below, the modification of the strange specific icon stock production is shown.
[Modification 1]
The specific icon stock effect A of FIG. 59, the specific icon stock effect B of FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock effect C of FIG. .. In other words, it was performed in a so-called left-handed gaming state. However, it may be performed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second starting opening 21. In other words, it may be performed in a so-called right-handed gaming state.

[Modification 2]
In the first effect of the specific icon stock effect A of FIG. 59, the specific icon stock effect B of FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock effect C of FIG. 61, the variation icon 9C is the variation display position 9Cd (the variation icon display position). It was displayed without moving from to another position. However, in the first effect, when the variation icon 9C moves from the variation display position 9Cd (the variation icon display position) to another position, the variation icon 9C approaches the variation display position 9Cd every time pseudo-linking is performed. You may do it. By doing so, the variation icon 9C approaches the variation display position 9Cd (the variation icon display position) every time the pseudo-linking is performed, so that the variation icon 9C is displayed as the remaining number of pseudo-links. A sense of distance between the position and the variation display position 9Cd (the variation icon display position) can be intuitively and easily transmitted to the player. The "other position" may be, for example, the left side or the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 from the change display position 9Cd (the change icon display position), or the image display device 7 may be displayed. It may be near the upper left corner or the upper right corner of the display screen 7a, or may be at the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Modification 3]
In the first effect of the specific icon stock effect A of FIG. 59, the specific icon stock effect B of FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock effect C of FIG. 61, the variation icon 9C is the variation display position 9Cd (the variation icon display position). It was displayed without moving from to another position. However, in the first effect, when the variation icon 9C moves from the variation display position 9Cd (the variation icon display position) to another position, the variation icon 9C approaches the variation display position 9Cd every time pseudo-linking is performed. Further, even if the hold ball exists, the hold icon 9A may not be displayed in the area where the variation icon 9C moves. By doing so, the variation icon 9C approaches the variation display position 9Cd (the variation icon display position) every time the pseudo-linking is performed, so that the variation icon 9C is displayed as the remaining number of pseudo-links. A sense of distance between the position and the variation display position 9Cd (the variation icon display position) can be transmitted to the player in an intuitive and easy-to-understand manner, and further, the presence of a holding ball in the area where the variation icon 9C moves. When the hold icon 9A is displayed, the hold icon 9A obstructs the moving change icon 9C by deleting the hold icon 9A from the display screen 7a so as not to disturb the visual confirmation of the change icon 9C. It can be prevented. The "other position" may be, for example, the left side or the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 from the change display position 9Cd (the change icon display position), or the image display device 7 may be displayed. It may be closer to the upper left corner or closer to the upper right corner of the display screen 7a.

[Modification 4]
In the specific icon stock production A of FIG. 59, the specific icon stock production B of FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock production C of FIG. 61, the number of times of pseudo-repeating is four. However, the number of times of pseudo-repeating may be 5, 6, 7, or 8. With this, it is possible to increase the chances of acquiring the specific icon (change icon HI, etc.).

[Modification 5]
In the specific icon stock effect A of FIG. 59, the specific icon stock effect B of FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock effect C of FIG. 61, the number of times of pseudo-repeating is fixed at 4 times in advance. However, each time the specific icon stock production is performed, the number of pseudo-repetitions may be changed to any of 4 to 8 times. By doing so, the chance of an opportunity to acquire the specific icon (such as the change icon HI) can be changed every time the specific icon stock effect is performed, so that the variation of the specific icon stock effect can be increased.

[Modification 6]
In the specific icon stock effect A of FIG. 59, the specific icon stock effect B of FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock effect C of FIG. 61, a display mode in which the number image 9Cz is arranged on the front side of the variable icon 9C as the number of pseudo runs. It was. However, the indicator may be displayed at a predetermined position on the display screen 7a (for example, a position above the fluctuation icon 9C) to display the number of times of pseudo-repeating. In this way, the level gauge of the indicator decreases each time the pseudo-repeating is performed, so that the remaining number of the pseudo-repeating can be transmitted intuitively and easily. The indicator may be displayed at a predetermined position on the display screen 7a together with the display mode in which the numerical image 9Cz is arranged on the front side of the variable icon 9C, or the state in which the numerical image 9Cz is lost from the variable icon 9C ( It may be displayed at a predetermined position on the display screen 7a together with the fluctuation icon 9C alone.

[Modification 7]
In the specific icon stock effect A of FIG. 59, the specific icon stock effect B of FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock effect C of FIG. 61, a display mode in which the number image 9Cz is arranged on the front side of the variable icon 9C as the number of pseudo runs. It was. However, the variation icon 9C may move the "Sugoroku" square each time the pseudo-link is performed. In this case, the variation icon 9C may be advanced one by one for each square every time the pseudo-repeating is performed, and the dice image may be displayed on the display screen 7a, and the dice image may be displayed. You may make it a goal to move the squares toward the goal.

[Modification 8]
In the specific icon stock effect A of FIG. 59, the specific icon stock effect B of FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock effect C of FIG. 61, various symbols are numeric symbols and no character image is provided. However, character images are provided for odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, “7” and “9” respectively, and character images are provided for even numbers “2”, “4”, “6” and “8”. Alternatively, when the specific icon stock effect is started, the character images provided for odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, “7” and “9” may be deleted. This makes it possible for the player to easily emphasize the state where the special icon stock effect has been switched to the special effect. The odd numbers "1", "3", "5", "7" and "9" all have the same bright green color, and the even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" When all have the same bright blue color, even if the specific icon stock effect is started, various colors of the numerical design are inherited and are not changed to other colors. As a result, even if the character images provided for the odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, “7” and “9” are deleted by switching to the special effect of the specific icon stock effect, the numbers are deleted. It is possible to make it difficult for the determination of symbols to be affected.

[Modification 9]
In the specific icon stock effect A of FIG. 59, the specific icon stock effect B of FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock effect C of FIG. 61, a plurality of symbols (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, The reach by the right decorative pattern 8R) was not formed. However, a reach may be formed. By doing this, while performing pseudo-relation, it is possible to give the player a sense of speed with respect to the progress of the specific icon stock production until the reach is formed, and suppress the player's irritability for the pseudo-relation. Can contribute to Further, when the reach is formed, the specific icon stock effect is stopped, the variable effect (variable display) is continued, and the second specific icon (battle effect that is stocked without being digested when the specific icon is acquired. When there is an icon AI or the like), the second specific icon (the battle effect icon AI or the like) is activated and consumed.

[Modification 10]
In the specific icon stock effect A of FIG. 59, the specific icon stock effect B of FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock effect C of FIG. 61, the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20. The second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the starting opening 21 is arranged and displayed as a numeral not shown in the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Since these numbers are displayed as the number of holding balls as numerical values, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish them by being confused with various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, since the image is arranged on the forefront side of the display screen 7a and the other image is displayed behind the foreground of the display screen 7a, the visibility is not hindered by the other image. It was In the present embodiment, when the specific icon stock effect is started, the display mode is such that the numerical image 9Cz is arranged in front of the variable icon 9C. The numerical image 9Cz showed the remaining number of continuous fluctuations due to the pseudo run. This may cause the player to misunderstand the number (the number of reserved balls) arranged and displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a as the remaining number of continuous fluctuations due to the pseudo-link. Therefore, in place of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, one of the sub display screens 64 (the right sub display screen 64R, the left sub display screen 64L, and the upper sub display screen 64U is displayed (for example, On the right sub-display screen 64R)), a number displayed with the number of holding balls described above as a numerical value may be displayed. In this way, the number displayed as the number of reserved balls is not misunderstood by the player as the remaining number of continuous fluctuations by the pseudo-relation, and the number of reserved balls is displayed as a numerical value. The numbers can be made difficult to distinguish because they are confused with various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and can be intuitively understood.

[Modification 11]
In the specific icon stock effect A of FIG. 59, the specific icon stock effect B of FIG. 60, and the specific icon stock effect C of FIG. 61, some of the effects described may not be provided, and other effects are added. May be.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect A4-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
It is possible to execute a first effect capable of acquiring the specific icon by displaying a specific icon that can change the degree of expectation for each pseudo-relation.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A4-2]
A gaming machine according to Aspect A4-1,
The specific icon may include a first specific icon that is consumed when the specific icon is acquired, and a second specific icon that is stocked without being digested when the specific icon is acquired,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A4-3]
A gaming machine according to Aspect A4-1 or A4-2,
In the first effect, it is possible to change the display mode of the (corresponding) variable icon to another display mode when the first specific icon is acquired.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A4-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A4-1 to A4-3,
In the first effect, the reach may not be formed by a plurality of symbol images when the pseudo-relation is performed,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A4-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A4-1 to A4-4,
In the first effect, when the (corresponding) fluctuation icon moves from the (corresponding) fluctuation icon display position to another position, the (corresponding) fluctuation icon display position approaches each time the pseudo link is performed. ,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A4-6]
A gaming machine according to Aspect A4-5,
In the first effect, even if there is a hold ball, the hold icon is not displayed in the area where the (corresponding) variable icon moves.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A4-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A4-2 to A4-6,
When the pseudo-relation is ended and the first effect is ended, a second effect associated with the second specific icon stocked by the first effect can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A4-8]
A gaming machine according to Aspect A4-7,
In the second effect, a hold icon may be displayed when a hold ball exists.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The operation stock production A (first half), the operation stock production A (second half), and the operation stock production B (second half) will be described below with reference to FIGS. 62 to 64. This operation stock effect can be executed during the effect effect of changing the effect symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the operation stock effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main display device is read. 7 is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a of 7.

[Operation stock production A (first half)]
FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining the operation stock effect A (first half).
First, as shown in FIG. 62(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect pattern starts changing. Here, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing at high speed. Note that three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation and the variable image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(B) or FIG. 62(D), a temporary stop effect is executed. The temporary stop effect is an effect in which the effect design is temporarily stopped in a predetermined mode. There are two types of temporary stop effects. It is a mode in which the special symbol is temporarily stopped instead of the medium effect symbol 8C as shown in FIG. 62(B), and a mode in which the medium effect symbol 8C is temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 62(D).

In the temporary stop effect shown in FIG. 62(B), the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped at "1", the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped at "2", and the special symbol is temporarily stopped instead of the middle effect symbol 8C. I showed you how. The special pattern is a button image BG simulating the effect button 63. For example, the changing production symbol is provisionally stopped in the order of the left effect symbol 8L, the right effect symbol 8R, and the special symbol.

When the special symbol is temporarily stopped instead of the medium effect symbol 8C as shown in FIG. 62(B), the stock effect is executed as shown in FIG. 62(C). That is, the stock effect is an effect executed when the special symbol is temporarily stopped in the temporary stop effect. In the stock effect, the button image BG as a special symbol is reduced and is moved from the central portion of the display screen 7a to the lower right portion as indicated by an arrow Y. Then, the reduction button image BGS is displayed on the lower right portion of the display screen 7a.

In the temporary stop effect shown in FIG. 62(D), the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped at "4", the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped at "9", and the middle effect symbol 8C is temporarily stopped at "3". I showed you how. For example, the effect design that is changing is provisionally stopped in the order of left effect design 8L→right effect design 8R→medium effect design 8C.

After the stock effect shown in FIG. 62C or the temporary stop effect shown in FIG. 62D, the variation start effect shown in FIG. Becomes In the present embodiment, a repetitive pseudo continuous effect is performed in which such a pseudo continuous effect is repeated seven times. Then, in the repeated pseudo continuous effect, the button image BG as the special symbol is stopped instead of the middle effect symbol 8C (FIG. 62(B)), and the stock effect is executed (FIG. 62(C)). In the repetitive pseudo continuous production, the following description will be continued assuming that the stock production has been executed four times.

After the end of the repeated pseudo continuous effect, the reach formation effect is executed as shown in FIG. 62(E). The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect design is temporarily stopped in the reach mode. Here, both the left effect design 8L and the right effect design 8R are temporarily stopped at "5". At this time, the stocked reduction button images BGS are displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a so as to be stacked.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(F), the operation promotion effect is executed. In the operation promotion effect, the topmost reduction button image BGS among the reduction button images BGS stacked on the right side of the display screen 7a is moved and enlarged as indicated by the arrow Y, and the characters "PUSH" are displayed. The button image BG is displayed. Further, a message image MSG “press” is displayed above the button image BG. Here, the description will be continued assuming that the player has pressed the effect button 63.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(G), the development effect is executed. The development effect is an effect that notifies the progress from the normal reach effect to the super reach effect. Here, a message image MSG of "Development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Also at this time, reduction button images BGS are displayed so as to be stacked on the right side of the display screen 7a. Even when the player does not press the effect button 63 in the operation promotion effect of FIG. 62(F), the development effect is executed after the effective period of the effect button 63.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(H), a battle effect (start) is executed. The battle effect is an effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB engage in a battle. If the teammate character CRA wins over the enemy character CRB, it becomes a big hit. In the battle production (start), the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed so as to face each other in the center of the display screen 7a.

[Operation stock production A (second half)]
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining the operation stock effect A (second half).
First, as shown in FIG. 63(A), an operation promotion effect is executed. In the operation promotion effect, the topmost reduction button image BGS of the reduction button images BGS stacked on the right side of the display screen 7a is moved and enlarged as indicated by the arrow Y, and the characters "PUSH" are displayed. The button image BG is displayed. Further, a message image MSG “press” is displayed above the button image BG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(B), a battle effect (initial) is executed. In the battle effect (initial stage), the enemy character CRB moves to the ally character CRA side, and the enemy character CRB becomes dominant. Also at this time, the reduction button images BGS are displayed so as to be stacked on the right side of the display screen 7a. Further, when the player presses the effect button 63 in the operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 63(A), a message image MSG called "chance" is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. When the player does not press the effect button 63 in the operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 63(A), the message image MSG of "chance" is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(C), the operation promotion effect is executed. In the operation promotion effect, the topmost reduction button image BGS among the reduction button images BGS stacked on the right side of the display screen 7a is moved and enlarged as indicated by the arrow Y, and the characters "PUSH" are displayed. The button image BG is displayed. Further, a message image MSG “press” is displayed above the button image BG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(D), a battle effect (middle term) is executed. In the battle production (middle period), the ally character CRA moves to the enemy character CRB side, and the ally character CRA becomes dominant. Also at this time, the reduction button image BGS is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. Further, when the player presses the effect button 63 in the operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 63(C), a message image MSG of "great chance" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. If the player does not press the effect button 63 in the operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 63(C), the message image MSG of "large chance" is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(E), the operation promotion effect is executed. In the operation promotion effect, the reduction button image BGS on the right side of the display screen 7a is moved and enlarged as indicated by the arrow Y, and the button image BG on which the characters “PUSH” are displayed is displayed. Further, a message image MSG “press” is displayed above the button image BG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(F), a battle effect (end) is executed. In the battle production (at the end), the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight in the center. Note that when the player presses the effect button 63 in the operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 63(E), a message image MSG of "intense heat" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. When the player does not press the effect button 63 in the operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 63(E), the message image MSG of "heat" is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(G), a win/loss notification effect is executed. The winning/losing notification effect is an effect of notifying the victory or defeat of the teammate character CRA. When the teammate character CRA wins, the winning is confirmed. Here, it is assumed that the teammate character CRA has won. At this time, the teammate character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Further, a message image MSG of "win" is displayed. In the case of a loss, for example, the enemy character is displayed and the message image "defeat" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(H), the fixed stop effect (win) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (winning), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are fixedly stopped in a winning manner. Here, a state is shown in which all of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the left and right are definitely stopped at "5". In the case of a loss, for example, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are fixedly stopped at "5", and the middle effect symbol 8C is definitely stopped at "6".

[Operation stock production B (second half)]
FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining the operation stock effect B (second half). The operation stock effect B (first half) is the same as the operation stock effect A (first half), and a description thereof will be omitted.
In the operation stock effect B (second half), first, as shown in FIG. 64(A), the operation promotion effect is executed. In the operation promotion effect, the topmost reduction button image BGS of the reduction button images BGS stacked on the right side of the display screen 7a is moved and enlarged as indicated by the arrow Y, and the characters "PUSH" are displayed. The button image BG is displayed. Further, a message image MSG “press” is displayed above the button image BG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(B), a battle effect (initial) is executed. In the battle effect (initial stage), the enemy character CRB moves to the ally character CRA side, and the enemy character CRB becomes dominant. Also at this time, the reduction button images BGS are displayed so as to be stacked on the right side of the display screen 7a. Further, when the player presses the effect button 63 in the operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 64(A), a message image MSG of "chance" is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. When the player does not press the effect button 63 in the operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 64(A), the message image MSG of "chance" is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(C), the operation promotion effect is executed. In the operation promotion effect, the topmost reduction button image BGS among the reduction button images BGS stacked on the right side of the display screen 7a is moved and enlarged as indicated by the arrow Y, and the characters "PUSH" are displayed. The button image BG is displayed. Further, a message image MSG “press” is displayed above the button image BG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(D), a battle effect (middle term) is executed. In the battle production (middle period), the ally character CRA moves to the enemy character CRB side, and the ally character CRA becomes dominant. Also at this time, the reduction button image BGS is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. Further, when the player presses the effect button 63 in the operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 64(C), a message image MSG of "great chance" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. If the player does not press the effect button 63 in the operation promotion effect shown in FIG. 64(C), the message image MSG of “large chance” is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(E), the operation promotion effect is executed. In the operation promotion effect, the reduction button image BGS on the right side of the display screen 7a is moved and enlarged as indicated by the arrow Y, and the button image BG on which the characters “PUSH” are displayed is displayed. Further, a message image MSG “press” is displayed above the button image BG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(F), a winning finalization effect is executed. The winning confirmation effect is an effect for definitely notifying that the winning is achieved. Here, the teammate character CRA is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, a message image MSG of “hit” is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(G), a win/loss notification effect is executed. The winning/losing notification effect is an effect of notifying the victory or defeat of the teammate character CRA. Here, the teammate character CRA is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. Further, a message image MSG of "win" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(H), the fixed stop effect (win) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (winning), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are fixedly stopped in a winning manner. Here, a state is shown in which all of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the left and right are definitely stopped at "5".

[Effect example]
Below, the example of the effect of operation stock production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the temporary stop effect (FIGS. 62(B) and (D)) is followed by the variation start effect (FIG. 62(A)) to repeat the pseudo effect effect. To execute. Then, in this repeated pseudo continuous effect, the button image BG as the special symbol is stopped instead of the middle effect symbol 8C (FIG. 62(B)), and the stock effect is executed (FIG. 62(C)). With this configuration, the player can be surprised and expected, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the operation promotion effect is executed by the number of the reduced button images BGS stocked in the stock effect (FIG. 62(B)), and the operation of the effect button 63 becomes effective (FIG. 62(F), FIG. 63(A)(C)(E), and FIG. 64(A)(C)(E)). According to this configuration, the more the reduced button images BGS are stocked, the more expectations can be given to the player, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the button image BG as the special symbol is stopped instead of the middle effect symbol 8C in the repeated pseudo consecutive effect constituted by seven times of pseudo consecutive effects (FIG. 62(B)). ), the stock effect is executed (FIG. 62(C)). According to this configuration, expectations are increased for a predetermined number of times of the pseudo continuous production, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the stock image is executed by stopping the button image BG as the special symbol in place of the medium effect symbol 8C in the pseudo continuous effect (FIG. 62(B)) (FIG. 62( C)). In the stock effect, the button image BG as a special symbol is reduced, and is moved and held from the central portion of the display screen 7a to the lower right portion as indicated by an arrow Y. With this configuration, the number of stocks can be easily understood, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the operation promotion effect, the reduction button image BGS on the right side of the display screen 7a moves and is enlarged as shown by the arrow Y, and the button image BG on which the character “PUSH” is displayed is displayed. It is displayed (FIG. 62(F), FIG. 63(A)(C)(E), FIG. 64(A)(C)(E)). With this configuration, the operation of the effect button 63 can be effectively promoted, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the operation promotion effect (FIG. 62(F), FIG. 63(A)(C)(E), FIG. 64(A)(C)(E)) is the reach formation effect (FIG. 62(E)). According to this configuration, it is possible to make the reach formation have an expectation, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of operation stock production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the example in which the button image BG as the special symbol is temporarily stopped instead of the middle effect symbol 8C is given, but the special symbol is temporarily stopped instead of the left effect symbol 8L or the right effect symbol 8R. Good.

[Modification 2]
In the above, the repetitive pseudo continuous effect is composed of seven pseudo continuous effects, but it may be configured to be less than seven times or more than seven times. Furthermore, the number of times of the pseudo continuous production may be dynamically changed. For example, the higher the number of times of the pseudo continuous production, the higher the degree of expectation of winning may be set.

[Modification 3]
In the above, the case where the stock production is performed four times has been described as an example, but the number of stock productions is not particularly limited. For example, as the number of stock productions increases, the degree of expectation of winning may increase.

[Modification 4]
In the above, the operation of the effect button 63 has been described as an example, but the operation section is not limited to the operation of the effect button 63 as long as the operation unit can be operated by the player.

[Modification 5]
In the above, the effect on the first special figure hold is taken as an example, but the effect on the second special figure hold may be used.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect A5-1]
A gaming machine having an operation section that can be operated by a player,
Stock production that displays the operation unit image that imitates the operation unit and holds the operation unit image in the screen in the repeated pseudo continuous production that repeats the pseudo continuous production in which the production pattern that started to change temporarily stops and starts changing again Is feasible,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A5-2]
A gaming machine according to Aspect A5-1,
After the repetitive pseudo continuous production, it is possible to execute an operation unit production in which the operation of the operation unit is valid according to the number of the operation unit images held in the screen in the stock production.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A5-3]
A gaming machine according to Aspect A5-1 or A5-2,
The repetitive simulated rendition is composed of a predetermined number of the simulated renditions,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A5-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A5-1 to A5-3,
In the stock effect, the operation unit image is displayed as a special symbol when the effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the pseudo continuous effect, and then the operation unit image is reduced and held,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A5-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A5-2 to A5-4,
In the operation unit effect, the operation unit image held in the screen is enlarged to promote the operation of the operation unit,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A5-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A5-2 to A5-5,
The operation section production is executed through the reach formation production in which the production design is temporarily stopped in a predetermined mode after the repeated pseudo continuous production.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A5-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A5-1 to A5-6,
When the operation unit is operated during a period in which the operation of the operation unit is effective in the operation unit effect, it is possible to execute a confirmation notification effect that definitely informs that it is a hit.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The icon numeral design effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 65 to 67. This icon numerical symbol production can be executed during the variation production of the special symbol. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90, and if the variation pattern is a predetermined variation pattern, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a. It is a production realized by.

[Icon numerical figure production A]
FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining the icon numeral symbol design effect A. In this icon numeral design effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 65(A), decorative design variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are varied. In the decorative symbol variation effect, the variation icon 9C and the hold icon 9A are displayed below the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(B), icon movement effect 1 is performed. In this icon movement effect 1, a numerical design 8X having the same form (same shape, same color, same design) as the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R, one holding icon 9A, and a guide rail image XA1 are displayed. .. This numerical design 8X is a design in the same mode as one of the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R, 1 to 9, and in the example of FIG. 65(B), the decorative design "6". A design in the same mode as the design is displayed. Further, the numeral pattern 8X is such that the display screen 7a is randomly moved or stopped. Further, one hold icon 9A displayed in the icon movement effect 1 is one hold icon of the hold icons 9A displayed in the decorative symbol variation effect, and in the example of FIG. 65(B), FIG. In A), it corresponds to the hold icon closest to the change icon 9C. The guide rail image XA1 is an image for guiding the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9A is arranged inside the cylinder. Then, the hold icon 9A moves a predetermined distance toward the variable icon display area for displaying the variable icon and stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(C), the icon movement effect 2 is performed. In this icon movement effect 2, the numerical symbol 8X randomly moves to the right and left and stops. Further, in the icon movement effect 2, the hold icon 9A moves along the guide portion of the guide rail image XA1 toward the variable icon display area for a predetermined distance and then stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(D), the icon movement effect 3 is performed. In this icon movement effect 3, while the numeral symbol 8X moves randomly, the hold icon 9A moves along the guide rail image XA1 and reaches the variable icon display area and stops. In this case, thereafter, this hold icon 9A functions as the change icon 9C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(E), a decorative symbol stop effect is performed. In this decorative symbol stop effect, the changing decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stop changing and form a stopped symbol array. In the example of FIG. 65(E), the stop symbol array is “6 7 6”, which is a lost symbol array. Further, in this decorative symbol stop effect, the hold icon 9A that has been moved in the icon movement effect is the variable icon 9C.

In the icon numeral design effect A, the larger the number of movements/stops of the hold icon 9A, the higher the jackpot expectation.

[Icon number pattern production B]
FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining the icon numeral symbol design effect B. In this icon numeral design effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 66(A), decorative design variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are varied. In the decorative symbol variation effect, the variation icon 9C and the hold icon 9A are displayed below the display screen 7a. These icons are circular and white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(B), icon movement effect 1 is performed. In this icon movement effect 1, a numerical design 8X having the same form (same shape, same color, same design) as the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R, one holding icon 9A, and a guide rail image XA1 are displayed. .. This numerical design 8X is a design in the same mode as one of the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R, 1 to 9, and in the example of FIG. 66(B), the decorative design "6". A design in the same mode as the design is displayed. Further, the numeral pattern 8X and one holding icon 9A are arranged adjacent to each other and associated with each other. One hold icon 9A displayed in the icon movement effect 1 is one hold icon among the hold icons 9A displayed in the decorative symbol variation effect, and in the example of FIG. 66(B), FIG. 66(A). Corresponds to the hold icon closest to the change icon 9C. The guide rail image XA1 is an image for guiding the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9A (numeral pattern 8X) is arranged inside the cylinder. The hold icon 9A (numeral symbol 8X) moves toward the variable icon display area for displaying the variable icon and stops. The hold icon 9A remains white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66C, the icon movement effect 2 is performed. In this icon movement effect 2, the numeric symbol 8X and the hold icon 9A are continuously arranged adjacent to each other. In this case, the numerical design 8X has changed from the "6" design to the "5" design. Further, the hold icon 9A changes from white to blue (in FIG. 66C, it is normally hatched). In the icon movement effect 2, the hold icon 9A moves toward the variable icon display area along the guide portion of the guide rail image XA1 and stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(D), the icon movement effect 3 is performed. In this icon movement effect 3, the hold icon 9A associated with the numeral pattern 8X moves along the guide rail image XA1 to reach the variable icon display area and stops. In this case, thereafter, this hold icon 9A functions as the change icon 9C. The hold icon 9A changes from blue to green (indicated by cross hatching in FIG. 66(D)).

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(E), a decorative symbol stop effect is performed. In this decorative symbol stop effect, the changing decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stop changing and form a stopped symbol array. In the example of FIG. 66(E), the stop symbol array is “6 7 6”, which is a lost symbol array. Further, in this decorative symbol stop effect, the hold icon 9A (green) that has been moved in the icon movement effect is the variable icon 9C.

In addition, in the icon numeral design effect B, the larger the number of times the hold icon 9A is moved/stopped, the higher the jackpot expectation is. Also, the greater the number of movements/stops of the hold icon 9A, the greater the chance that the hold icon 9A changes.

[Icon number design C]
FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining the icon numerical symbol effect C. In this icon numeral design effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 67(A), a decorative design variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are varied. In the decorative symbol variation effect, the variation icon 9C and the hold icon 9A are displayed below the display screen 7a. These icons are circular and white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(B), icon movement effect 1 is performed. In this icon movement effect 1, a numerical design 8X having the same form (same shape, same color, same design) as the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R, one holding icon 9A, and a guide rail image XA1 are displayed. .. This numerical design 8X is a design of the same mode as one of the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R, 1 to 9, and in the example of FIG. 67(B), the decorative design "6". A design in the same mode as the design is displayed. In addition, this numerical design 8X is arranged in one holding icon 9A. In this case, it can be said that the numeric symbol 8X is associated with this hold icon 9A. One hold icon 9A displayed in the icon movement effect 1 is one hold icon among the hold icons 9A displayed in the decorative pattern variation effect, and in the example of FIG. 67(B), FIG. 67(A). Corresponds to the hold icon closest to the change icon 9C. The guide rail image XA1 is an image for guiding the hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9A (numeral pattern 8X) is arranged inside the cylinder. The hold icon 9A (numeral symbol 8X) moves toward the variable icon display area for displaying the variable icon and stops. The hold icon 9A remains white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(C), icon movement effect 2 is performed. In this icon movement effect 2, the numeric symbol 8X is continuously arranged in the hold icon 9A. In this case, the numerical design 8X has changed from the "6" design to the "5" design. Further, the hold icon 9A changes from white to blue (in FIG. 67(C), it is normally hatched). In the icon movement effect 2, the hold icon 9A moves toward the variable icon display area along the guide portion of the guide rail image XA1 and stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(D), the icon movement effect 3 is performed. In the icon movement effect 3, the hold icon 9A including the numeral pattern 8X moves along the guide rail image XA1 to reach the variable icon display area and stops. In this case, thereafter, this hold icon 9A functions as the change icon 9C. The hold icon 9A changes from blue to green (indicated by cross hatching in FIG. 67(D)). In addition, the hold icon 9A includes the numerical symbol 8X even when it reaches the variable icon display area.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(E), a decorative symbol stop effect is performed. In this decorative symbol stop effect, the changing decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stop changing and form a stopped symbol array. In the example of FIG. 67(E), the stop symbol array is "6 7 6", which is a lost symbol array. Further, in this decorative symbol stop effect, the hold icon 9A (green) that has been moved in the icon movement effect is the variable icon 9C. Even in this case, the hold icon 9C includes the numeric symbol 8X even when the variable icon display area is reached.

In addition, in the icon numerical symbol effect C, the larger the number of times the hold icon 9A is moved/stopped, the higher the jackpot expectation is. Also, the greater the number of movements/stops of the hold icon 9A, the greater the chance that the hold icon 9A changes.
Further, the icon numerical symbol effect is an effect that is performed with the same variation.

[Modification]
In the icon numerical design production of the above-described embodiment, the numerical design 8X is the same as the decorative design, but the invention is not limited to this, and the numerical design 8X is the same as a part of the decorative design, but a part is the decorative design. It is also possible to adopt a mode different from.
In the icon numeral design effects B and C of the above-described embodiment, when performing the icon movement effect 1 to the icon movement effect 2, the hold icon 9A is changed, and the numeral pattern 8X associated with the hold icon 9A is also changed. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the numeric symbol 8X does not change even when the hold icon 9A changes.

[Effect example]
In the icon numeral design effect of the above embodiment, the hold icon 9A and the numeral pattern 8X move. According to this configuration, an entertaining effect can be realized by the movements of the hold icon 9A and the numeral pattern 8X, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.
In addition, in the icon numerical design effects B and C, the holding icon 9A and the numerical design 8X are moved in association with each other, so that the player can emphasize the movement of the holding icon 9A and the numerical design 8X. The interest of the game can be improved.
Furthermore, since the numerical design 8X has the same form (shape and color) as the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R, it is possible to display a new effect in which the hold icon and the decorative design collaborate with each other, which is amusement of the game. Can be improved.
In addition, in the icon numerical design effects B and C, since the holding icon 9A and the numerical design 8X are moved in association with each other, the mode (color, shape) of the holding icon 9A changes, and thus the holding icon and the numerical design 8X. The more the player moves, the more the player can increase the expectation of the pending change and improve the interest of the game.
Further, in the icon numerical design effects B and C, even if the mode (color, shape) of the reserved icon 9A changes after the holding icon 9A and the numerical pattern 8X are moved in association with each other, the mode of the numerical design 8X is Since it does not change, the player can be more impressed with the change of the hold icon 9A, and the interest of the game can be improved.
Further, in the icon numerical design effects B and C, when the holding icon 9A and the numerical design 8X move in association with each other, when the numerical design 8X changes, the holding icon 9A may also change. According to this configuration, when the numeric symbol changes, the hold icon 9A can be expected to change, so that the player pays attention to both the numeric symbol and the hold icon, which can improve the enjoyment of the game. it can.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect XA-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
There is a case where a first display effect is performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
There is a case where a third display effect is performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
There is a case where a fourth display effect is performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect of changing the decorative design,
The second display effect is an effect of displaying a predetermined icon, which is an icon representing the hold or the fluctuation, and a numerical pattern including a numeral,
The third display effect is an effect in which the predetermined icon moves,
The fourth display effect is an effect in which the numerical pattern moves,
There may be a combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, the third display effect, and the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, the second display effect is performed, and then the third display effect and the fourth display effect are performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XA-2]
A gaming machine according to Aspect XA-1,
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed when the third display effect is performed, and the predetermined icon in the third display effect and the number in the fourth display effect are performed. Move in association with the design,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XA-3]
A gaming machine according to Aspect XA-2,
The numerical design is in the same manner as the decorative design,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XA-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect XA-3,
In the combination effect, when the predetermined icon in the third display effect and the numerical symbol in the fourth display effect move in association with each other, the predetermined icon changes after moving,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XA-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect XA-4,
In the combination effect, when the predetermined icon in the third display effect and the numerical pattern in the fourth display effect are moved in association with each other, and the predetermined icon changes after the movement, The number pattern does not change,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XA-6]
A gaming machine according to Aspect XA-5,
In the combination effect, when the predetermined icon in the third display effect and the numerical symbol in the fourth display effect are moved in association with each other, the numerical symbol may change, and the numerical symbol may change. When the design changes, the predetermined icon also changes,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The reach-time hold icon effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 68 to 70. This reach-time hold icon effect may be executed during the effect of changing the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the hold-time hold icon effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image display device 7 displays. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Receive hold icon effect A]
FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining the reach-time hold icon effect A. In the reach effect that is executed when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the reach state, only the hold icon (variable icon) 9C is newly added from the state in which no hold icon is displayed. Is the effect displayed on. First, as shown in FIG. 68(A), when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are in the reach state (here, the reach of “2↓2”), the hold icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed. To be done. The hold icons 9A and 9B have disappeared from the display screen 7a. The hold icon (variable icon) 9C has a rectangular shape and is displayed in the hold display area (variable icon display area, hold digested image display area) below the center of the display screen 7a. Below this hold display area, a horizontally long rectangular image for indicating the position of the hold display area is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 68(B), with the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R continuing in the reach state, the hold icon (variable icon) 9C disappears (is not displayed) from the display screen 7a. That is, all the hold icons (hold icons 9A and 9B, the hold icon 9C) are not displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 68(C), the hold icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed again on the display screen 7a in a state where the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to reach. That is, among the hold icons, only the hold icon 9C is displayed, and the hold icons 9A and 9B are not displayed. The hold icon (variable icon) 9C that is displayed again has the same form as that before disappearing. The form here includes the shape, color, operation, size, etc. of the hold icon (variable icon) 9C.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 68(D), the mode of the hold icon (variable icon) 9C is changed, and a character image representing the changed mode of the hold icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed. Here, "representing the mode" indicates not only the shape, color, action, and size of the hold icon (variable icon) 9C but also the content and name (for example, character name) represented by the hold icon (variable icon) 9C. ), including the name of the name. The order in which the mode of the hold icon 9C changes is from the mode in which the expectation degree of the jackpot is low to the mode in which it is high. Here, the color of the hold icon (variable icon) 9C changes, and a character image of "square red" representing the shape and color of the hold icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 68(E), in a state where the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to reach, the effect of rotating both the hold icon (variable icon) 9C and the character image is executed. .. During the rotation, as shown in FIGS. 68(F), (G), and (H), an effect of changing the holding icon (variable icon) 9C is executed. Specifically, the holding icon (fluctuation icon) 9C is divided (divided) into two, and a new star-shaped holding icon (variation icon) 9C appears from the crack, and a new holding icon (variation icon) is displayed. A character image representing the aspect of (icon) 9C is displayed. Here, a "star" character image representing the shape of the new holding icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed. The two square-shaped fragments after the crack and the character image of “square red” are framed out. The new hold icon (change icon) 9C is displayed in the hold display area (change icon display area, hold digested image display area).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 68(I), in a state where the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to reach, the effect of rotating both the hold icon (variable icon) 9C and the character image is executed. .. During the rotation, as shown in FIG. 68(J), an effect of changing the hold icon (variable icon) 9C is executed. Specifically, the hold icon (variable icon) 9C and the character image are enlarged and displayed. After that, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in the manner of a big hit (here, "222").

[Receive hold icon effect B]
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining the reach-time hold icon effect B. In the reach effect that is executed when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the reach state, only the hold icon (variable icon) 9C is newly added from the state in which no hold icon is displayed. Is the effect displayed on. First, as shown in FIG. 69(A), four hold icons 9A and the hold icons (change icons) 9C are displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Both the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C have a round shape (spherical shape). Here, since both the hold icon 9C and the hold icon 9A have the same shape (hold icon shape), these are collectively referred to as "hold icons 9A and 9C". The hold icon (change icon) 9C is displayed in the hold display area (change icon display area, hold digested image display area) below the center of the display screen 7a. Below this hold display area, a horizontally long rectangular image for indicating the position of the hold display area is displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 69(B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are in the reach state (here, reach of “2↓2”), and the hold icons 9A, 9B and the hold display area from the display screen 7a. The rectangular image for indicating the position of is disappeared, and only the hold icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed. As shown in FIG. 69(C), the hold icon (variable icon) 9C disappears (is no longer displayed) from the display screen 7a while the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to reach. That is, all the hold icons (hold icons 9A and 9B, the hold icon 9C) are not displayed. Then, the specific image TG simulating the shape of the bomb is displayed. The specific image TG appears from the right side of the display screen 7a and moves to the left while drawing a parabola. Then, as shown in FIG. 69(D), the hold icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed again on the display screen 7a in a state where the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to reach. That is, among the hold icons, only the hold icon 9C is displayed, and the hold icons 9A and 9B and the horizontally long rectangular image for indicating the position of the hold display area are not displayed. The hold icon (variable icon) 9C that is displayed again has the same form as that before disappearing. The form here includes the shape, color, operation, size, etc. of the hold icon (variable icon) 9C.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 69(E) to (G), an effect of changing the hold icon (variable icon) 9C is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 69(E), the specific image TG imitating the shape of a bomb explodes, and as shown in FIG. 69(F), the holding icon (fluctuation icon) 9C becomes two. It breaks (is divided). Then, as shown in FIG. 69(G), the hold icon (changing icon) 9C of the new doll appears, and a character image representing the mode of the new hold icon (changing icon) 9C is displayed. Here, "representing the mode" indicates not only the shape, color, action, and size of the hold icon (variable icon) 9C but also the content and name (for example, character name) represented by the hold icon (variable icon) 9C. ), including the name of the name. Here, a character image of "character hold" representing the content of the new hold icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 69(H), in a state where the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to reach, the effect of rotating both the hold icon (variable icon) 9C and the character image is executed. .. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 69(I), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to reach, and the hold icon (variable icon) 9C continues to rotate. Disappears from the display screen 7a. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 69(J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in a manner of a big hit (here, “222”).

[Reaching hold icon effect C]
FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining the reach-time hold icon effect C. In the reach effect that is executed when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the reach state, only the hold icon (variable icon) 9C is newly added from the state in which no hold icon is displayed. Is the effect displayed on. First, as shown in FIG. 70(A), during the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the four holding icons 9A and the holding icons (changing icons) 9C are displayed. Both the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C have a round shape (spherical shape). Here, since both the hold icon 9C and the hold icon 9A have the same shape (hold icon shape), these are collectively referred to as "hold icons 9A and 9C". The hold icon (change icon) 9C is displayed in the hold display area (change icon display area, hold digested image display area) below the center of the display screen 7a. Below this hold display area, a horizontally long rectangular image for indicating the position of the hold display area is displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 70(B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are in the reach state (here, reach of "2↓2"), and the hold icons 9A, 9B and the hold display area from the display screen 7a. The rectangular image for indicating the position of No. disappears, and only the hold icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed. As shown in FIG. 70(C), with the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continuing in the reach state, the hold icon (variable icon) 9C disappears (is not displayed) from the display screen 7a. That is, all the hold icons (hold icons 9A and 9B, the hold icon 9C) are not displayed. Then, a specific image TG imitating a person holding a sword is displayed. The specific image TG appears from the right side of the display screen 7a and runs leftward to move. Then, as shown in FIG. 70D, the hold icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed again on the display screen 7a in a state where the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to reach. That is, among the hold icons, only the hold icon 9C is displayed, and the hold icons 9A and 9B and the horizontally long rectangular image for indicating the position of the hold display area are not displayed. The hold icon (variable icon) 9C that is displayed again has the same form as that before disappearing. The form here includes the shape, color, operation, size, etc. of the hold icon (variable icon) 9C.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 70E to 70G, an effect in which the hold icon (variable icon) 9C changes is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 70(E), a specific image TG imitating a person holding a sword passes through the holding icon (variable icon) 9C, and then as shown in FIG. 70(F). , The hold icon (variable icon) 9C is divided into two (divided). Then, as shown in FIG. 70(G), a new facial hold icon (variable icon) 9C appears, and a character image representing the new hold icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed. Here, "representing the mode" indicates not only the shape, color, action, and size of the hold icon (variable icon) 9C but also the content and name (for example, character name) represented by the hold icon (variable icon) 9C. ), including the name of the name. Here, a character image of "face hold" representing the content of the new hold icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 70(H), in a state where the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to reach, the effect of rotating both the hold icon (variable icon) 9C and the character image is executed. .. After that, as shown in FIG. 70(I), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to reach, and the hold icon (variable icon) 9C continues to rotate. Disappears from the display screen 7a. Then, as shown in FIG. 70(J), an effect of displaying the background image corresponding to the hold icon (variable icon) 9C is executed. Specifically, a background image of the same face as the face represented by the hold icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed. After that, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in the manner of a big hit (here, "222").

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the reach-time hold icon effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 68(B), (C), 69(C), (D), 70(C), and (D), the display screen 7a is displayed during the reach effect. From the state in which no hold icon is displayed, the first effect in which only the hold icon (change icon) 9C corresponding to the change is newly displayed can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel effect that has never been seen before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 68(E) to (H), 69(E) to (G), and 70(E) to (G), after the first effect, The second effect in which the hold icon (variable icon) 9C changes can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel effect that has never been seen before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 68(E) to (H), FIGS. 69(E) to (G), and FIGS. 70(E) to (G), in the second effect, The hold icon (variable icon) 9C changes to the second mode after the hold icon 9C of the first mode is divided into a plurality of parts. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel effect that has never been seen before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 69(C) to (G) and FIGS. 70(E) to (G), in the second effect, the specific image TG moves and the hold icon 9C. After passing through, the hold icon 9C of the first aspect is divided into a plurality of pieces. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel effect that has never been seen before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68(H), FIG. 69(G), and FIG. 70(G), in the second effect, the hold icon 9C in the second mode is displayed. At the same time, the character image representing the second mode is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel effect that has never been seen before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68(I), FIG. 69(H), and FIG. 70(H), the hold icon 9C in the second mode is rotating and the character image is also displayed. Rotate together. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel effect that has never been seen before, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
The following is a modification of the reach hold icon effect.
[Modification 1]
In the reach hold icon effects A to C, the first effect in which only the hold icon 9C is newly displayed is executed from the state where no hold icons 9A, 9B, and 9C are displayed. However, in the reach hold icon effects A to C, the first effect in which only the hold icon 9A or the hold icon 9B is newly displayed is executed from the state where no hold icons 9A, 9B, and 9C are displayed. May be.

[Modification 2]
In the production in which the hold icon (variable icon) 9C shown in FIGS. 68(F) and (G) of the reach hold icon production A changes, the hold icon (variable icon) 9C is divided into two (divided). A new star-shaped hold icon (variable icon) 9C appears from among the cracks. However, it may be considered that the rectangular portion of the hold icon (variable icon) 9C is divided (divided) into two parts, and an effect in which a new star-shaped figure appears is executed.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect A7-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a hold icon,
At the time of the reach effect, it is possible to execute the first effect in which only the hold icon corresponding to the change is newly displayed from the state in which no hold icon is displayed on the display means. Machine.
◇ [Aspect A7-2]
A gaming machine according to Aspect A7-1,
After the first effect, a second effect in which the hold icon changes can be executed.
◇ [Aspect A7-3]
A gaming machine according to Aspect A7-2,
In the second effect, the holding icon changes to the second mode after the holding icon of the first mode is divided into a plurality of pieces.
◇ [Aspect A7-4]
A gaming machine according to Aspect A7-3,
One of the plurality of types of images is a specific image,
In the second effect, after the specific image moves and passes through the hold icon, the hold icon of the first aspect is divided into a plurality of pieces.
◇ [Aspect A7-5]
A gaming machine according to Aspect A7-3 or A7-4,
In the second effect, the holding icon of the second aspect is displayed and a character image representing the second aspect is displayed.
◇ [Aspect A7-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A7-5,
The game machine according to the second aspect, wherein the hold icon is rotated and the character image is also rotated.

The special holding effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 71 to 73. This special hold effect can be executed during a change effect of the special symbol. That is, the effect is realized by the image control microcomputer 101 analyzing the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90, reading the corresponding image data from the ROM 103, and displaying the image on the display screen 7a. The special hold effect is an effect that is performed with the same variation of the special symbol.

[Special hold effect A]
FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining the special holding effect A. In the special hold effect A, first, an icon display effect is executed as shown in FIG. 71(A). In this icon display effect, the hold icon 9A and the change icon 9C are displayed. Further, the decorative design variation effect (variable display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. The hold icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are circular and white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(B), reach production is performed. In this reach effect, the teammate character CRA is displayed. In this case, the hold icon 9A is not displayed, but the variable icon 9C is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(C), a super reach effect is performed. In this super reach effect, the teammate character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed. In this case, the hold icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(D), a decorative symbol stop effect is performed. In this decorative symbol stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in a predetermined stop symbol array. In the example of FIG. 71(D), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are each 7 symbols and are stopped and displayed in the jackpot symbol array. In this case, the hold icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are displayed.

[Special hold effect B]
FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining the special holding effect B. In the special hold effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 72A, the icon display effect is executed. In this icon display effect, the hold icon 9A and the change icon 9C are displayed. Further, the decorative design variation effect (variable display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. The hold icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are circular and white.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(B), reach production is performed. In this reach effect, the teammate character CRA is displayed. In this case, the hold icon 9A is not displayed, but the variable icon 9C is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(C), a super reach effect is performed. In this super reach effect, the teammate character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed. In this case, the hold icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are not displayed. In this super reach effect, the third movable accessory 13 is moved from the home position (retracted position) to the expanded position (expanded position) on the display screen 7a, and a part of the ally character CRA or the enemy character CRB is hidden. Is.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(D), a decorative symbol stop effect is performed. In this decorative symbol stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in a predetermined stop symbol array. In the example of FIG. 72(D), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R each have 7 symbols and are stopped and displayed in the jackpot symbol array. In this case, the hold icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are displayed.

[Special hold effect C]
FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining the special holding effect C. In the special hold effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 73(A), the icon display effect is executed. In this icon display effect, the hold icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the decorative design variation effect (variation display) is displayed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. Is executed. The hold icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are circular and white. At this time, the number of hold icons 9A is four, that is, the number of hold icons is four.
Further, in the special hold effect C, the change icon XB1 and the hold icon XB2 are displayed on the right sub display screen 64R. The variation icon XB1 represents an effect situation in the variation and is an icon corresponding to the hold icon 9C. Further, the hold icon XB2 is an icon indicating a hold state and is an icon corresponding to the hold icon 9A. Like the hold icon 9A, the hold icon XB2 indicates the hold number by the number of icons, and has the same number as the hold icon 9A. That is, when the number of holdings is 3, the number of holding icons 9A is 3, but similarly, the number of holding icons XB2 is also 3. This hold icon XB2 does not change to hold. In addition, the hold icon XB2 may change to hold in correspondence with the hold icon 9A, or may change to hold differently from the hold icon 9A. For example, the hold icon XB2 may be changed to hold after a while after the hold icon 9A is changed to hold.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(B), reach production is performed. In this reach effect, the teammate character CRA is displayed. In this case, the hold icon 9A is not displayed but the variable icon 9C is displayed.
In this reach effect, the change icon XB1 and the hold icon XB2 are continuously displayed on the right sub display screen 64R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(C), a super reach effect is performed. In this super reach effect, the teammate character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed. In this case, the hold icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are not displayed. Further, in this super reach effect, the third movable accessory 13 is moved from the home position (retracted position) to the expanded position (expanded position) on the display screen 7a, and an effect of hiding a part of the ally character CRA or the enemy character CRB. Is.
In this reach effect, the change icon XB1 and the hold icon XB2 are continuously displayed on the right sub display screen 64R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(D), a decorative symbol stop effect is performed. In this decorative symbol stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in a predetermined stop symbol array. In the example of FIG. 73(D), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R each have 7 symbols and are stopped and displayed in the jackpot symbol array. In this case, the hold icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are displayed.
In this reach effect, the change icon XB1 and the hold icon XB2 are continuously displayed on the right sub display screen 64R.

[Modification]
In the special hold effect C, the variable icon XB1 and the hold icon XB2 are displayed on the right sub display screen 64R, but the invention is not limited to this, and the variable icon XB1 and the hold icon XB2 may be displayed on the left sub display screen 64L or the main display screen 7a. Good.
Further, the hold icon XB2 may be displayed by a method that allows the number of holds to be known. For example, when there are three hold icons XB2, they may be displayed with the number "3".
In the above special hold effect, during the reach effect, the change icon 9C is displayed without displaying the hold icon 9A, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the hold icon 9A may not be displayed when the variation icon 9C has a different form from the normal (circular and white in the embodiment) (for example, square and red).

[Effect example]
In the special hold effect of the above embodiment, in the same change, there are an icon display effect that displays the change icon 9C and the hold icon 9A, and a reach effect that displays the change icon 9C without displaying the hold icon 9A. It is carried out. Then, the reach effect is performed after the icon display effect. According to this configuration, the hold icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are recognized by the player during the icon display effect, and the variation icon 9C is emphasized over the hold icon 9A during the reach effect. The player can be made aware of the importance, and the expectation of reach production can be improved. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.
In the special hold effect of the above embodiment, in the same change, an icon display effect that displays the change icon 9C and the hold icon 9A, and a reach effect that displays the change icon 9C without displaying the hold icon 9A. A super reach effect in which the hold icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are not displayed is performed. In this case, the reach effect is performed after the icon display effect, and then the super reach effect is performed. According to this configuration, the hold icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are recognized by the player during the icon display effect, the variation icon 9C is emphasized more than the hold icon 9A during the reach effect, and further, the super reach effect is achieved. Since the super-reach effect can be emphasized at times, the player can be made aware of the importance of the super-reach effect itself, and the expectation of the super-reach effect can be improved. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.
In the special hold effect, in the super reach effect in which the hold icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are not displayed, the effect of moving the third movable accessory 13 in front of the display screen 7a is performed. According to this configuration, since the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are not displayed, it is possible to emphasize the effect of the third movable accessory 13 to the player, and as a result, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. ..

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect XB-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
There is a case where a first display effect is performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect of displaying the change icon indicating the change and a hold icon indicating hold,
The second display effect is an effect of displaying the variable icon without displaying the hold icon,
There may be a combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect,
In the combination effect, the first display effect and the second display effect are performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XB-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect XB-1,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed after the first display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XB-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect XB-2,
There is a case where a third display effect is performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display effect is an effect in which the variable icon and the hold icon are not displayed,
The combination effect may include the third display effect,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed and the third display effect is performed after the first display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XB-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect XB-3,
In the combination effect, the second display effect is performed after the first display effect, and the third display effect is performed after the second display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XB-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect XB-4,
In the combination effect, a movable accessory effect in which the movable accessory moves in front of the display means is performed when the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Icon success/failure effects will be described below with reference to FIGS. 74 to 76. This icon success/failure effect can be executed during a change effect of the special symbol. That is, the effect is realized by the image control microcomputer 101 analyzing the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90, reading the corresponding image data from the ROM 103, and displaying the image on the display screen 7a.

[Icon success/failure production A]
FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining the icon success/failure effect A. In this icon success/failure effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 74(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The hold icon 9A and the change icon 9C have a circular white shape. Further, the variation of the decorative design is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(B), an icon change effect is performed. In this icon change effect, the change icon 9C changes from a circular white mode to a mode that represents a teammate character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(C), an icon enlarging effect is performed. In this icon enlarging effect, the variable icon 9C (also referred to as an ally character 9C) pops out from the variable icon display area in which the variable icon is normally displayed to the outside of the variable icon display area, and is further enlarged. It is a production.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(D), a success/failure effect is performed. In this success/failure effect, an enemy character XC1 appears and a battle effect is developed with an ally character 9C to compete for which one to win, in other words, an effect to determine whether or not the battle is successful. Note that the success/failure effect broadly includes an effect that determines success or failure, such as an effect that determines whether to win or lose by playing a predetermined game, in addition to the battle effect. In addition, at the time of this success/failure effect, the variation icon is not displayed in the variation icon display area, but the suspension icon 9A is continuously displayed in the suspension icon display area.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(E), a successful effect is performed. In this successful presentation, the enemy character XC1 is not displayed, the ally character 9C is displayed in the center of the main display screen 7a, the character indicating that the player has won and the speed line are displayed, and a scene that celebrates the victory is developed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(F), icon promotion effect 1 is performed. In this icon promotion effect 1, the icon 9C that was a friend character changes to a premium icon 9C. This premium icon 9C indicates that the chance has increased and the jackpot expectation has increased. The premium icon 9C may indicate that the jackpot is confirmed. Further, the premium icon 9C has a circular and white mode before changing in the icon change effect, and a mode different from the ally character after changing in the icon change effect, and a circular image and a triangular image are combined. It is composed of images.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(G), icon promotion effect 2 is performed. In the icon promotion effect 2, the premium icon C changed in the icon promotion effect 1 moves to the variable icon display area and functions as the variable icon 9C.

[Icon success/failure production B]
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining the icon success/failure effect B. In this icon success/failure effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 75(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The hold icon 9A and the change icon 9C have a circular white shape. Further, the variable display of the decorative design is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(B), an icon change effect is performed. In this icon change effect, the change icon 9C changes from a circular white mode to a mode that represents a teammate character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(C), an icon enlarging effect is performed. In this icon enlarging effect, the variable icon 9C (also referred to as an ally character 9C) pops out from the variable icon display area in which the variable icon is normally displayed to the outside of the variable icon display area, and is further enlarged. It is a production.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(D), a success/failure effect is performed. In this success/failure effect, an enemy character XC1 appears and a battle effect is developed with an ally character 9C to compete for which one to win, in other words, an effect to determine whether or not the battle is successful. Note that the success/failure effect broadly includes an effect that determines success or failure, such as an effect that determines whether to win or lose by playing a predetermined game, in addition to the battle effect. During the success/failure effect, the variable icon is not displayed in the variable icon display area, and the hold icon 9A is not displayed in the hold icon display area.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(E), a successful effect is performed. In this successful presentation, the enemy character XC1 is not displayed, the ally character 9C is displayed in the center of the main display screen 7a, the character indicating that the player has won and the speed line are displayed, and a scene that celebrates the victory is developed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(F), icon promotion effect 1 is performed. In this icon promotion effect 1, the icon 9C that was a friend character changes to a premium icon 9C. This premium icon 9C indicates that the chance has increased and the jackpot expectation has increased. The premium icon 9C may indicate that the jackpot is confirmed. Further, the premium icon 9C is a circular and white mode before changing in the icon change effect, and a mode different from the ally character after changing in the icon change effect, and includes the circular image, the triangular image, and the enemy character XC1. It is composed of an image that is combined with a part of the sword image. Not limited to this, the premium icon 9C may include the entire enemy character XC1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(G), icon promotion effect 2 is performed. In the icon promotion effect 2, the premium icon C changed in the icon promotion effect 1 moves to the variable icon display area and functions as the variable icon 9C.

[Icon success/failure C]
FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining the icon success/failure effect C. In this icon success/failure effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 76(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The hold icon 9A and the change icon 9C have a circular white shape. Further, the variable display of the decorative design is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(B), an icon change effect is performed. In this icon change effect, the change icon 9C changes from a circular white mode to a mode that represents a teammate character.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(C), an icon enlarging effect is performed. In this icon enlarging effect, the variable icon 9C (also referred to as an ally character 9C) pops out from the variable icon display area in which the variable icon is normally displayed to the outside of the variable icon display area, and is further enlarged. It is a production.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(D), success/failure effect is performed. In this success/failure effect, an enemy character XC1 appears and a battle effect is developed with an ally character 9C to compete for which one to win, in other words, an effect to determine whether or not the battle is successful. Note that the success/failure effect broadly includes an effect that determines success or failure, such as an effect that determines whether to win or lose by playing a predetermined game, in addition to the battle effect. During the success/failure effect, the variable icon is not displayed in the variable icon display area, and the hold icon 9A is not displayed in the hold icon display area.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(E), a successful effect is performed. In this successful presentation, the enemy character XC1 is not displayed, the ally character 9C is displayed in the center of the main display screen 7a, the character indicating that the player has won and the speed line are displayed, and a scene that celebrates the victory is developed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(F), icon promotion effect 1 is performed. In this icon promotion effect 1, the icon 9C that was a friend character changes to a premium icon 9C. This premium icon 9C indicates that the chance has increased and the jackpot expectation has increased. The premium icon 9C may indicate that the jackpot is confirmed. Further, the premium icon 9C is a circular and white mode before changing in the icon change effect, and a mode different from the ally character after changing in the icon change effect, and includes the circular image, the triangular image, and the enemy character XC1. It is composed of an image in which a part of the sword image and a part of the star-shaped emblem image of the ally character 9C are combined. The present invention is not limited to this, and the premium icon 9C may include all the teammate characters 9C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(G), icon promotion effect 2 is performed. In the icon promotion effect 2, the premium icon C changed in the icon promotion effect 1 moves to the variable icon display area and functions as the variable icon 9C.

[Modification]
In the icon success/failure effect, when the variable icon 9C makes a first change in the icon change effect and succeeds in success/failure effect (when winning), the success effect is performed and the second change is made in the icon promotion effect 1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, the first change is made in the icon change effect for one of the hold icons 9A, and if the success/failure effect is successful (when winning), the success effect is performed. The icon promotion effect 1 may be changed for the second time. In this case, in the icon promotion effect 2, the changed icon may be returned to the position where it was originally displayed, or it may be moved to the position of a different icon and changed to the icon displayed at that place. You may
In the icon success/failure effect, the variable icon 9C is moved to the variable icon display area in the icon promotion effect 2, but the present invention is not limited to this, and one hold icon 9A of the other hold icons 9A is displayed. You may make it move and change it with the hold icon 9A.
In the icon success/failure effect, the change icon 9C is adapted to make the first change in the icon change effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the hold icon 9A makes the icon change effect and makes the first change, and thereafter. After the variable icon 9C is reached, the icon enlarging effect, success/failure effect, success effect, icon promotion effect 1, and icon promotion effect 2 may be performed.

[Effect example]
In the icon success/failure effect of the above-described embodiment, the hold icon 9A or the variable icon 9C is displayed, one of these icons changes thereafter, and then the success/failure effect is performed. Then, when the success/failure effect is successful (when the battle is won), the one icon is further changed. According to this configuration, the success/failure effect is performed by the change of one icon, and the change of the icon is further performed by the success of the success/failure effect. Therefore, it is possible to make the stepwise change of the icon rich in variety. The interest of the game can be improved.
In addition, when the hold icon 9A or the variation icon 9C is displayed, and then one of these icons changes, the changed icon changes to an icon representing a teammate character, and the teammate character and the enemy character are displayed. Success and failure production is performed using and. According to this configuration, since the success/failure effect is performed using the icon representing the character in which one icon has changed and the enemy character, it is possible to link the success/failure effect and the change in one icon. Thus, it is possible to make the player feel as if he/she wants the teammate character to stand on the shoulder, and to improve the enjoyment of the game.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect XC-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
There is a case where a first display effect is performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
There is a case where a third display effect is performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect in which a predetermined icon of an icon group consisting of the change icon indicating the change or a hold icon indicating a hold is displayed in a first form,
The second display effect is an effect in which the predetermined icon displayed in the first form changes and is displayed in a second form,
The third display effect is an effect in which a success/failure effect that determines success/failure is performed using the predetermined icon displayed in the second mode.
There may be a combined effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, then the second display effect is performed, and then the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XC-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect XC-1,
There is a case where a fourth display effect is performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is an effect which is displayed in the third form by changing the predetermined icon displayed in the second form when the success or failure effect is successful.
The combination effect may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed after the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XC-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect XC-2,
The predetermined icon of the second form is a first character,
A game machine characterized by [Aspect XC-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect XC-3,
A fifth display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects.
The fifth display effect is an effect of displaying a second character different from the first character,
The combination effect may include the fifth display effect,
In the combination effect, the third display effect is performed after the fifth display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XC-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect XC-4,
In the combination effect, in the third display effect, the success/failure effect is performed using the first character and the second character.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Icon selection effects will be described below with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79. This icon selection effect can be executed during the effect of changing the special symbol. That is, the effect is realized by the image control microcomputer 101 analyzing the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90, reading the corresponding image data from the ROM 103, and displaying the image on the display screen 7a.

[Icon selection effect A]
FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining the icon selection effect A. In this icon selection effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 77(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The hold icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are circular and white. Of the hold icons 9A, the hold icon 9A that is the closest to the change icon is also called the first hold icon 9A, the hold icon 9A that is the second closest to the change icon is also called the second hold icon 9A, and the third change icon is the third hold icon. The hold icon 9A close to is also called a third hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9A farthest from the variable icon is also called a fourth hold icon 9A. The hold corresponding to the first hold icon 9A is the oldest hold, the hold corresponding to the second hold icon 9A is the second oldest hold, and the hold corresponding to the third hold icon 9A is the third oldest hold. Yes, the hold corresponding to the fourth hold icon 9A is the newest hold. In the example of FIG. 77(A), the first hold icon 9A to the third hold icon 9A are displayed. Further, the variable display of the decorative design is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(B), icon selection effect 1 is performed. In the icon selection effect 1, the third hold icon 9A changes to the selected image XD1 including the character A and the star image. The character A included in the selected image XD1 represents the jackpot expectation degree, and the character A has a relatively low jackpot expectation degree. In addition, the star image included in the selected image XD1 expresses the jackpot expectation degree by the number of stars. Since this star image has one star, the jackpot expectation degree is relatively low. In the selected image XD1, the character A and the star image are displayed in association with each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(C), icon selection effect 2 is performed. In the icon selection effect 2, the third hold icon 9A changes to the selected image XD2 including the character B and the star image. The character B included in the selected image XD2 represents the jackpot expectation degree, and the character B has a medium hit expectation degree. In addition, the star image included in the selected image XD2 represents the jackpot expectation degree by the number of stars, and since this star image has two stars, the jackpot expectation degree is medium. In the selected image XD2, the character B and the star image are displayed in association with each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(D), icon selection effect 3 is performed. In the icon selection effect 3, the third hold icon 9A changes to the selected image XD3 including the character C and the star image. The character C included in the selected image XD3 represents the jackpot expectation degree, and the character C has a relatively high jackpot expectation degree. In addition, the star image included in the selected image XD3 represents the jackpot expectation degree by the number of stars. Since this star image has three stars, the jackpot expectation degree is relatively high. In the selected image XD3, the character C and the star image are displayed in association with each other.

After that, the icon selection effects 1 to 3 are repeatedly executed, that is, the third hold icon 9A is displayed so as to change at high speed in the selected image XD1 to the selected image XD3. Then, next, as shown in FIG. 77(E), an icon determination effect is performed. In this icon determination effect, the third hold icon 9A is determined to be the third hold icon 9A of any one of the icon selection effects 1 to 3 and stops. In this case, in the following description, it is assumed that the third hold icon 9A has been selected as the selected image XD2, as shown in FIG. 77(E).

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(F), icon movement effect is performed. In this icon movement effect, the third hold icon 9A determined in the selected image XD2 in the icon decision effect is shifted to the second hold icon 9A in that state, and further to the first hold icon 9A, and Finally, the variable icon display area is shifted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(G), a battle effect is performed. In this battle effect, the selected image XD2 that has been shifted to the variable icon display area in the state of the selected image XD2 jumps out of the variable icon display area, moves to the approximate center of the main display screen 7a, and is enlarged to the selected image. It is displayed as XD22. In the selected image XD22, a star image representing two enormous stars is displayed together with the enormous character B and the character of the degree of expectation. In the selected image XD22, similarly to the selected image XD2, the star images representing the character B and the two stars represent that the jackpot expectation degree is medium. Further, in the battle effect, the Nico Nico image XD4 is displayed, and the Nico Nico image XD4 and the character B of the selected image XD22 battle. If you win in this battle, it will be a jackpot, the jackpot pattern array will be displayed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and if you will be defeated in the battle, it will be lost and the decorative symbol array will be displayed in the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. ..

[Icon selection effect B]
FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining the icon selection effect B. In this icon selection effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 78(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The hold icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are circular and white. Of the hold icons 9A, the hold icon 9A that is the closest to the change icon is also called the first hold icon 9A, the hold icon 9A that is the second closest to the change icon is also called the second hold icon 9A, and the third change icon is the third hold icon. The hold icon 9A close to is also called a third hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9A farthest from the variable icon is also called a fourth hold icon 9A. The hold corresponding to the first hold icon 9A is the oldest hold, the hold corresponding to the second hold icon 9A is the second oldest hold, and the hold corresponding to the third hold icon 9A is the third oldest hold. Yes, the hold corresponding to the fourth hold icon 9A is the newest hold. In the example of FIG. 78(A), the first hold icon 9A to the third hold icon 9A are displayed. Further, the variable display of the decorative design is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(B), icon selection effect 1 is performed. In the icon selection effect 1, the third hold icon 9A changes to the selected image XD1 including the character A and the star image. The character A included in the selected image XD1 represents the jackpot expectation degree, and the character A has a relatively low jackpot expectation degree. In addition, the star image included in the selected image XD1 expresses the jackpot expectation degree by the number of stars. Since this star image has one star, the jackpot expectation degree is relatively low. In the selected image XD1, the character A and the star image are displayed in association with each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(C), icon selection effect 2 is performed. In the icon selection effect 2, the third hold icon 9A changes to the selected image XD2 including the character B and the star image. The character B included in the selected image XD2 represents the jackpot expectation degree, and the character B has a medium hit expectation degree. In addition, the star image included in the selected image XD2 represents the jackpot expectation degree by the number of stars, and since this star image has two stars, the jackpot expectation degree is medium. In the selected image XD2, the character B and the star image are displayed in association with each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(D), icon selection effect 3 is performed. In the icon selection effect 3, the third hold icon 9A changes to the selected image XD3 including the character C and the star image. The character C included in the selected image XD3 represents the jackpot expectation degree, and the character C has a relatively high jackpot expectation degree. In addition, the star image included in the selected image XD3 represents the jackpot expectation degree by the number of stars. Since this star image has three stars, the jackpot expectation degree is relatively high. In the selected image XD3, the character C and the star image are displayed in association with each other.

After that, the icon selection effects 1 to 3 are repeatedly executed, that is, the third hold icon 9A is displayed so as to change at high speed in the selected image XD1 to the selected image XD3. Then, next, as shown in FIG. 78(E), an icon determination effect is performed. In this icon determination effect, the third hold icon 9A is determined to be the third hold icon 9A of any one of the icon selection effects 1 to 3 and stops. In this case, in the following description, it is assumed that the third hold icon 9A has been selected as the selected image XD1 as shown in FIG. 78(E).

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(F), icon movement effect 1 is performed. In this icon movement effect 1, the third hold icon 9A determined as the selection image XD1 in the above-described icon determination effect is changed (promoted) to the selection image XD2 when shifting to the second hold icon 9A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(G), icon movement effect 2 is performed. In this icon move effect 2, the second hold icon 9A that has changed to the selected image XD2 in the icon move effect 1 described above shifts to the first hold icon 9A in that state, and finally reaches the variable icon display area. shift.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(H), a battle effect is performed. In this battle effect, the selected image XD2 that has been shifted to the variable icon display area in the state of the selected image XD2 jumps out of the variable icon display area, moves to the approximate center of the main display screen 7a, and is enlarged to the selected image. It is displayed as XD22. In the selected image XD22, a star image representing two enormous stars is displayed together with the enormous character B and the character of the degree of expectation. In the selected image XD22, similarly to the selected image XD2, the star images representing the character B and the two stars represent that the jackpot expectation degree is medium. Further, in the battle effect, the Nico Nico image XD4 is displayed, and the Nico Nico image XD4 and the character B of the selected image XD22 battle. If you win in this battle, it will be a jackpot, the jackpot pattern array will be displayed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and if you will be defeated in the battle, it will be lost and the decorative symbol array will be displayed in the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. ..

[Icon selection effect C]
FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining the icon selection effect C. In this icon selection effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 79(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The hold icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are circular and white. Of the hold icons 9A, the hold icon 9A that is the closest to the change icon is also called the first hold icon 9A, the hold icon 9A that is the second closest to the change icon is also called the second hold icon 9A, and the third change icon is the third hold icon. The hold icon 9A close to is also called a third hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9A farthest from the variable icon is also called a fourth hold icon 9A. The hold corresponding to the first hold icon 9A is the oldest hold, the hold corresponding to the second hold icon 9A is the second oldest hold, and the hold corresponding to the third hold icon 9A is the third oldest hold. Yes, the hold corresponding to the fourth hold icon 9A is the newest hold. In the example of FIG. 79(A), the first hold icon 9A to the third hold icon 9A are displayed. Further, the variable display of the decorative design is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(B), icon selection effect 1 is performed. In the icon selection effect 1, the variation icon 9C changes to the selection image XD1 including the character A and the star image. The character A included in the selected image XD1 represents the jackpot expectation degree, and the character A has a relatively low jackpot expectation degree. In addition, the star image included in the selected image XD1 expresses the jackpot expectation degree by the number of stars. Since this star image has one star, the jackpot expectation degree is relatively low. In the selected image XD1, the character A and the star image are displayed in association with each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79C, the icon selection effect 2 is performed. In the icon selection effect 2, the change icon 9C changes to the selected image XD2 including the character B and the star image. The character B included in the selected image XD2 represents the jackpot expectation degree, and the character B has a medium hit expectation degree. In addition, the star image included in the selected image XD2 represents the jackpot expectation degree by the number of stars, and since this star image has two stars, the jackpot expectation degree is medium. In the selected image XD2, the character B and the star image are displayed in association with each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(D), icon selection effect 3 is performed. In the icon selection effect 3, the variation icon 9C changes to the selection image XD3 including the character C and the star image. The character C included in the selected image XD3 represents the jackpot expectation degree, and the character C has a relatively high jackpot expectation degree. In addition, the star image included in the selected image XD3 represents the jackpot expectation degree by the number of stars. Since this star image has three stars, the jackpot expectation degree is relatively high. In the selected image XD3, the character C and the star image are displayed in association with each other.

After that, the icon selection effects 1 to 3 are repeatedly executed, that is, the variation icon 9C is displayed so as to change at high speed in the selected image XD1 to the selected image XD3. Then, next, as shown in FIG. 79(E), an icon determination effect is performed. In this icon determination effect, the variation icon 9C is determined as any one of the variation icons 9C of the icon selection effect 1 to the icon selection effect 3, and then stopped. In this case, in the following description, it is assumed that the variation icon 9C is determined as the selected image XD2 as shown in FIG. 79(E).

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(F), a battle effect is performed. In this battle effect, the selected image XD2 pops out of the variable icon display area, moves to the approximate center of the main display screen 7a, and is enlarged and displayed as the selected image XD22. In the selected image XD22, a star image representing two enormous stars is displayed together with the enormous character B and the character of the degree of expectation. In the selected image XD22, similarly to the selected image XD2, the star images representing the character B and the two stars represent that the jackpot expectation degree is medium. Further, in the battle effect, the Nico Nico image XD4 is displayed, and the Nico Nico image XD4 and the character B of the selected image XD22 battle. If you win in this battle, it will be a jackpot, the jackpot pattern array will be displayed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and if you will be defeated in the battle, it will be lost and the decorative symbol array will be displayed in the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. ..

[Modification]
In the above-mentioned icon selection effect A, the star image (expected degree display) is in a different position from that of the variation icon 9C (during icon movement production) during the battle production, but the present invention is not limited to this. The position may be the same as that of 9C (during icon movement production). Further, at the time of the battle effect, the variable icon 9C is not displayed in the variable icon display area, but may be displayed. In this case, the same icon as the selected image XD2 at the time of icon movement effect is displayed.
In the above-described icon selection effect, in the icon selection effects 1 to 3, different characters A to C or star images with different numbers of stars are used, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the same character or star is used. There may be star images with the same number.
In the icon selection effect, after the icon movement effect, the battle effect is performed using the character B of the selected image XD22, but the invention is not limited to this, and the character B is used to perform the super reach effect. Good.
In the above-mentioned icon selection effect, in the selected images XD1 to XD3, the character and the star image indicating the degree of expectation in the number of stars are displayed in association with each other, but the invention is not limited to this, and in the selected images XD1 to XD3, It is also possible to display the number of rounds at the time of a big hit, the probability of expected change, and the like in association with each other.

[Effect example]
In the icon selection effect, a decorative symbol variation effect for displaying the variation icon 9C and the hold icon 9A is performed, and a predetermined icon, which is one of the icon groups, has a relatively low degree of expectation. The icon selection effect 1 that is changed and displayed as one star and the character A, and the predetermined hold icon 9A is changed and displayed as two stars and the character B that indicate that the degree of expectation is medium. The icon selection effect 2 that is performed and the predetermined reservation icon 9A are changed to three stars and the character C that indicate that the degree of expectation is relatively high and the icon selection effect 3 that is displayed. Then, the icon selection effects 1 to 3 are repeatedly performed, and one icon is determined from the predetermined icons displayed in the icon selection effects 1 to 3 in the icon determination effect. According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which icon of which degree of expectation is determined or which icon of which character is determined, and it is possible to improve interest in the game. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.
In the icon selection effect A, after performing the icon selection effects 1 to 3 to determine one holding icon 9A in the icon determination effect, the icon moving effect moves in the state of the determined holding icon 9A (hold shift). With this configuration, it is possible to make the player foresee that this hold icon 9A becomes the variable icon 9C, and keep the player interested in the subsequent transition. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect XD-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
There is a case where a first display effect is performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
There is a case where a third display effect is performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect of displaying an icon group composed of a plurality of icons,
The second display effect is an effect in which a predetermined icon of the icon group changes in a plurality of modes,
The third display effect is an effect in which the predetermined icon that changes in the plurality of modes is determined as one mode of the plurality of modes,
There may be a combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect,
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, then the second display effect is performed, and then the third display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XD-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect XD-1,
In the second display effect, when the predetermined icon changes in the plurality of aspects, in each of the plurality of aspects, including an expectation degree display suggesting a jackpot expectation degree,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XD-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect XD-2,
In the second display effect, when the predetermined icon changes in the plurality of aspects, in each of the plurality of aspects, the expectation degree display and a character display representing a character are included,
The expectation display and the character display are associated with each other,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XD-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect XD-3,
The predetermined icon is a hold icon representing a hold,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XD-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect XD-4,
There is a case where a fourth display effect is performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is an effect in which the predetermined icon determined in one aspect of the plurality of aspects moves in a state of the determined aspect,
The combination effect includes the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, the fourth display effect is performed after the third display effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The icon special change effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 80 to 82. This icon special change effect can be executed during the change effect of the special symbol. That is, the effect is realized by the image control microcomputer 101 analyzing the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90, reading the corresponding image data from the ROM 103, and displaying the image on the display screen 7a.

[Expected jackpot by icon]
FIG. 80 is an icon jackpot expectation degree table XE1. Specifically, the icon-based jackpot expectation degree table XE1 represents a plurality of patterns in which the hold icon 9A or the variation icon 9C changes and the corresponding jackpot expectation degree. For example, the hold icon 9A or the change icon 9C may be circular or may be changed to a square. If the circular icon is a circle, the hold icon 9A may be blue, green, or red. , Green, red, golden. Further, when the hold icon 9A or the variation icon 9C is circular and changes to blue, the jackpot expectation is 10%, and when the circle icon is changed to green, the jackpot expectation is 30%. Yes, when the circle changes to red, the jackpot expectation is 50%, when the rectangle changes to green, the jackpot expectation is 40%, and when the rectangle changes to red, The jackpot expectation is 60%, and when the square changes to gold, the jackpot expectation is 80%. Based on the variation pattern command sent from the image control microcomputer 101, the sub-control board 90 distinguishes in advance whether it is a big hit or a loss, and puts the hold icon 9A or , The change icon 9C is changed. Further, the hold icon 9A or the variation icon 9C is usually circular and white, but can be changed to any mode of the icon-based jackpot expectation table XE1, and thereafter, the icon-based jackpot. It is possible to change to another aspect of the expectation table XE1. In this case, at the time of change, the jackpot expectation does not fall below the previous jackpot expectation. For example, if the icon changes from circular white to circular green (30% jackpot expectation), then the icon is red with a higher jackpot expectation than green green (50% jackpot jackpot). , Square green (big hit expectation 40%), square red (big hit expectation 60%), or square gold (big hit expectation 80%).

The following can be said in the jackpot expectation degree table XE1 for each icon. That is, among the plurality of patterns in the circular icon, the red circular icon, which is the pattern with the highest jackpot expectation, is the green with the lowest jackpot expectation in the pattern, which is the rectangle. It has a higher jackpot expectation than the square icon.
The red circular icon, which is the pattern with the highest jackpot expectation among the plurality of circular icons, is the pattern with the second highest jackpot expectation among the plurality of patterns with the rectangular icon. It has a lower jackpot expectation than the red square icon.
Furthermore, among the plurality of patterns in the circular icon, the red circular icon, which is the pattern with the highest jackpot expectation, is the gold pattern, which is the pattern with the highest jackpot expectation, among the patterns in the square icon. It has a lower jackpot expectation than the square icon.
Further, the rectangular icon is configured to be larger than the circular icon.

[Icon special change production A]
FIG. 81 is a diagram for explaining the icon special change effect A. In this icon special change effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 81(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The hold icon 9A and the change icon 9C are circular and white in a normal state. Of the hold icons 9A, the hold icon 9A that is the closest to the change icon is also called the first hold icon 9A, the hold icon 9A that is the second closest to the change icon is also called the second hold icon 9A, and the third change icon is the third hold icon. The hold icon 9A close to is also called a third hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9A farthest from the variable icon is also called a fourth hold icon 9A. The hold corresponding to the first hold icon 9A is the oldest hold, the hold corresponding to the second hold icon 9A is the second oldest hold, and the hold corresponding to the third hold icon 9A is the third oldest hold. Yes, the hold corresponding to the fourth hold icon 9A is the newest hold. In the example of FIG. 81(A), the first hold icon 9A to the third hold icon 9A are displayed. Further, the variable display of the decorative design is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(B), icon change effect 1 is performed. In this icon change effect, the third hold icon 9A changes to blue while continuing to be circular. The jackpot expectation at this point is 10%.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(C), the icon change effect 2 is performed. In this icon change effect 2, the third hold icon 9A shifts to become the second hold icon 9A, and the circle changes while continuing to be circular. The expectation for jackpots at this point is 30%.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(D), the icon change effect 3 is performed. In this icon change effect 3, the second holding icon 9A shifts to the first holding icon 9A, and the green color changes from a circle to a quadrangle while continuing. The jackpot expectation at this point is 40%.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(E), the variation effect is performed. In this variation effect, the first hold icon 9A shifts to become the variation icon 9C, and various effects using the character CRA are performed. After that, in the case of a big hit, a big hit pattern array is formed by using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and in the case of a loss, an outlier pattern array is formed by using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

[Icon special change production B]
FIG. 82 is a diagram for explaining the icon special change effect B. In this icon special change effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 82(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the hold icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are displayed. The hold icon 9A and the change icon 9C are circular and white in a normal state. Of the hold icons 9A, the hold icon 9A that is the closest to the change icon is also called the first hold icon 9A, the hold icon 9A that is the second closest to the change icon is also called the second hold icon 9A, and the third change icon is the third hold icon. The hold icon 9A close to is also called a third hold icon 9A, and the hold icon 9A farthest from the variable icon is also called a fourth hold icon 9A. The hold corresponding to the first hold icon 9A is the oldest hold, the hold corresponding to the second hold icon 9A is the second oldest hold, and the hold corresponding to the third hold icon 9A is the third oldest hold. Yes, the hold corresponding to the fourth hold icon 9A is the newest hold. In the example of FIG. 82(A), the first hold icon 9A to the third hold icon 9A are displayed. Further, the variable display of the decorative design is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(B), icon change effect 1 is performed. In this icon change effect, the third hold icon 9A changes to blue while continuing to be circular. The jackpot expectation at this point is 10%.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82C, the icon change effect 2 is performed. In this icon change effect 2, the third hold icon 9A shifts to become the second hold icon 9A, and changes from a circle to a quadrangle while changing to green. The jackpot expectation at this point is 40%.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(D), the icon change effect 3 is performed. In this icon change effect 3, the second holding icon 9A shifts to become the first holding icon 9A, and also changes to red while continuing the quadrangle. The jackpot expectation at this point is 60%.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(E), the variation effect is performed. In this variation effect, the first holding icon 9A shifts to become the variation icon 9C and changes to gold while continuing the quadrangle. The jackpot expectation at this point is 80%. In addition, in the variation effect, various effects using the character CRA are performed. After that, in the case of a big hit, a big hit pattern array is formed by using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and in the case of a loss, an outlier pattern array is formed by using the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

[Modification]
In the icon special change effect, an icon with a low jackpot expectation may be changed to an icon with a high jackpot expectation, and then an icon with a low jackpot expectation. In that case, the jackpot expectation degree may be higher than that when the icon having a low jackpot expectation degree is changed to the icon having a high jackpot expectation degree and then the icon having a high jackpot expectation degree is changed.
In the icon special change production, when the icon changes, it is a configuration that changes to a mode in which the jackpot expectation does not fall below the previous jackpot expectation, but is not limited to this, and the jackpot expectation is higher than the previous jackpot expectation. It may be changed to a lowering mode. In this case, as a special case, the big hit may be confirmed as the breaking of the law.
In the icon special change effect, the icon may be changed to a circular shape, a square shape, or a different shape (for example, a triangle). In that case, if the colors are the same, a square may have a higher jackpot expectation than a circle, and a triangle may have a higher jackpot expectation than a square.

[Effect example]
In the icon special change effect, one of the hold icon 9A or the variation icon 9C may be displayed in a circular or square manner or in a different color manner. Further, when one of the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C is circular, it can be displayed in a plurality of patterns of blue, green, and red. Furthermore, if one of the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C is a quadrangle, it can be displayed in a plurality of green, red, and gold patterns. According to this configuration, the hold icon 9A or the variation icon 9C can be changed in various patterns, and various icon changing modes can be provided to the player. As a result, the player can be more interested in the icon and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect XE-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
As one effect of the plurality of display effects, a predetermined icon in a group of icons including a change icon indicating the change or a hold icon indicating a hold is displayed in the first form and the first form. Performing an effect of displaying in either one of the second form different from the form,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XE-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect XE-1,
The predetermined icon of the first form has a plurality of patterns,
The plurality of patterns in the predetermined icon of the first mode have the same shape, and have different mode portions.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XE-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect XE-2,
The predetermined icon of the second form has a plurality of patterns,
The plurality of patterns in the predetermined icon of the second mode have the same shape, and have different mode portions.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XE-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect XE-3,
The plurality of patterns in the predetermined icon of the first form have the same shape and different colors.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XE-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect XE-4,
The plurality of patterns in the predetermined icon of the second mode have the same shape and different colors.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
The above aspect may be the following aspects.
You may change from the predetermined icon which is a 1st form to the icon which is a 2nd form.
The pattern with the highest jackpot expectation among the plurality of patterns in the icon of the first form is a jackpot rather than the pattern with the lowest jackpot expectation among the plurality of patterns in the icon of the second form. It may be configured with high expectations.
Among the plurality of patterns of the icon which is the first form, the pattern with the highest jackpot expectation is higher than the pattern with the second highest jackpot expectation among the plurality of patterns of the icon which is the second form. , It may be configured to have a low jackpot expectation.
The pattern with the highest jackpot expectation among the plurality of patterns in the icon of the first form is a jackpot rather than the pattern with the highest jackpot expectation among the plurality of patterns in the icon of the second form. The configuration may have low expectations.
The icon of the second form is larger than the icon of the first form.

The variable icon jump effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 83 to 85. 83 to 85, for example, the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and other movable accessory disposed around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are easy to see in the drawings. There are some that have been omitted.

This variable icon jump effect can be executed during the variable effect (during the variable display) by the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (for example, variation effect start command) received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the variation icon jump effect, it corresponds from the ROM 103. The image data is read and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Further, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands (for example, variation effect start command) received from the sub control board 90, and changes the position and the light emission mode of the second movable accessory 15 provided in the game board 2.

Here, the variable icon jump effect A will be described first, and the variable icon jump effect B and the variable icon jump effect C will be sequentially described.

[Variable icon jump effect A]
The variable icon jump effect A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 83 is a diagram for explaining the variable icon jump effect A. The variation icon jump effect A is performed during the variation effect (during variation display) by the decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 83(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative design 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative design 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. In the display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side, the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (symbol: number "1" to number "9") is started. When the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative design is started, the display of the decorative design that is stopped and displayed changes from the opaque state to the translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed to the high speed display mode. .. Thereby, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semitransparent decorative pattern which is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped). Note that the decorative pattern is in a display mode in which the decorative pattern moves in small increments in the vertical direction when the temporary stop display is performed.

Further, on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, there are a small left decorative design 8Lz, a small middle decorative design 8Cz, and a small right decorative design 8Rz corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, respectively. There is provided a sub-variation area where a variation effect (variation display) is provided. The small decorative pattern is always in an opaque state, does not become a translucent state even when the fluctuation starts, and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. When the fluctuating effect (variable display) by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R is started, the small left decorative design 8Lz, the small middle decorative design 8Cz, in the sub-variation region, are accompanied with this. The variation effect (variation display) by the small right decorative design 8Rz is started, and the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the small left decorative design 8Lz, the small medium. The decorative pattern 8Cz and the small right decorative pattern 8Rz are all stopped and displayed.

A state in which any one or more of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in the same design, and the reach is reached). Even in the state where the small decorative pattern 8Lz is formed, a small left decorative pattern 8Lz, a small middle decorative pattern 8Cz, a small right decorative pattern 8Rz (for example, a small left decorative pattern even if the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed). 8Lz, even if the right decorative design 8R is temporarily stopped, the small right decorative design 8Rz) is in a state in which the variable effect (variable display) is continued.

Further, when the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are all displayed in a stopped state, and they are not aligned in the same design and are displaced, a small left decorative design 8Lz, a small size The middle decorative design 8Cz and the small right decorative design 8Rz may be the same as the respective designs of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, or may be completely different designs.

On the other hand, when the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same design is a big hit, a small left decorative design 8Lz. The small middle decoration pattern 8Cz and the small right decoration pattern 8Rz are arranged in the same pattern as the left decoration pattern 8L, the middle decoration pattern 8C, and the right decoration pattern 8R.

The variation icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, which are currently changing as the end of the first special map reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (on the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (on the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad from the position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The reserved display positions 9Ad are arranged and displayed linearly along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, and no suspension icon is displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad to the fourth suspension display position 9Ad. That is, there is no stocked icon without digesting the hold icon. In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting opening 20 and the second starting opening 21.

Also, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbol, is supported. In addition to the hold icon 9A, the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20. The special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21 are arranged and displayed as unillustrated numbers in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 is shown in blue on the left side, and the number of the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21 is shown in red. The numbers are arranged on the upper side of the center of the display screen 7a so as to be spaced apart from each other on the right side and are always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as the number of reserved balls as numerical values, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and it is easy to intuitively understand. Note that these numbers are arranged on the forefront side of the display screen 7a and other images are displayed behind the foreground of the display screen 7a so that visibility is not hindered by the other images. It is like this.

Here, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “icon”) will be briefly described. Due to the difference in shape and color, the difference in expectation in winning in the lottery corresponding to the icon. Is represented. For example, of the four icons, a yellow (gold) star icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest likelihood of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hit, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hit, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hit. The smile sphere icon is further set to have a high expectation of being a jackpot in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (Rainbow (hit jackpot)).

In FIG. 83(A), the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern is started, and when the variation icon jump effect A is started, after that, as shown in FIG. 83(B), the left decorative pattern 8L is the number “. 1” is stopped and displayed, the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed with the number “3”, the variable effect (variable display) by the middle decorative symbol 8C is continued, and the flash FH1 is emitted from the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad do not become difficult to be visually recognized by the flash light FH1 and do not disappear from the display screen 7a. Further, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R become difficult to be visually recognized by the flash light FH1, and all disappear from the display screen 7a. On the other hand, the small left decorative design 8Lz, the small middle decorative design 8Cz, and the small right decorative design 8Rz are not visually recognized by the flash FH1 and do not disappear from the display screen 7a.

Then, when the flash FH1 disappears, the state in which the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R have all disappeared from the display screen 7a is maintained, and the fluctuation icon 9C at the fluctuation display position 9Cd jumps up toward the center of the display screen 7a. Meanwhile (while starting to move), the size of the variation icon 9C becomes large.

When the fluctuation icon 9C arrives at the center of the display screen 7a, the size of the fluctuation icon 9C is about 2 times larger than that of the fluctuation icon 9C at the fluctuation display position 9Cd, as shown in FIG. 83(C). It is about 5 times larger.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 83(D), a flash FH2 is emitted from the central portion of the fluctuation icon 9C. Then, as shown in FIG. 83(E), the flashing light FH2 makes the variation icon 9C difficult to visually recognize and disappears from the display screen 7a. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad also become difficult to visually recognize due to the flash light FH2 and temporarily disappear from the display screen 7a. On the other hand, the small left decorative design 8Lz, the small middle decorative design 8Cz, and the small right decorative design 8Rz are also not visually recognized by the flash FH2 and do not disappear from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, when the flash FH2 disappears, as shown in FIG. 83(F), the left decorative design 8L stopped and displayed with the number "1" and the right decorative design 8R stopped and displayed with the number "3" The change icon 9C is displayed again on the display screen 7a, and further changes from the white spherical variation icon 9C to the yellow (gold) star variation icon 9C. That is, the change of the variable icon 9C is successful. The star-shaped variation icon 9C is repeatedly rotated in a display mode in which the left side passes through the front side and goes to the right side. In FIG. 83(F), the white spherical variation icon 9C is changed to the yellow (gold) star variation icon 9C, and the variation icon 9C is successfully changed. If the icon 9C does not change to the yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon 9C but remains the white spherical variation icon 9C, it means that the variation of the variation icon 9C has failed.

Subsequently, when a crack is run and crushed in the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8, the fluctuation icon 9C starts to descend while contracting toward the fluctuation display position 9Cd while rotating (starting to move). To do. The left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8 are crushed, so that the variation effect (variable display) by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R is started again.

Subsequently, when the variation icon 9C is completely moved to the variation display position 9Cd, as shown in FIG. 83(G), the size of the variation icon 9C before jumping up (that is, to the size in FIG. 83(B)). It returns to the size of the white spherical variation icon 9C at the variation display position 9Cd shown in FIG.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 83(H), the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are temporarily stopped by the same design (number) (here, temporarily stopped by the number "7"), and the middle decorative design 8C. Is changed (variable display) and reach is formed. At this time, neither the small left decorative design 8Lz corresponding to the left decorative design 8L nor the small right decorative design 8Rz corresponding to the right decorative design 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the small left decorative design 8Lz, small The variable effect (variable display) is continued for the middle decoration pattern 8Cz and the small right decoration pattern 8Rz.

After that, as shown in FIG. 83(I), from the state where the second movable accessory 15 stands still at the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7, the front surface (front side) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 starts. In addition, the vehicle advances (moves) toward a position closer to the lower side (a lower advance position (lower effect position)), stops for a predetermined time (for example, about 1.5 seconds), and then is shown in FIG. 83(J). Like this, it returns to the retracted position (home position) again.

Subsequently, various effects may be further continued, and when the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are stopped and displayed with the same design (here, the number "7"), it is a big hit. After that, the big hit game (big hit production) is started, while the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are not stopped and displayed with the same design (here, the number "7"). Sometimes it is out of the way. When the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are stopped and displayed, the small left decorative design 8L, the small middle decorative design 8C, and the small right decorative design 8R are also stopped and displayed. When the jackpot or the deviation is confirmed, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

In a state in which the second movable accessory 15 is stopped in front of (front of) the display screen 7a and at a position near the lower side (downward advance position (downward production position)) for a predetermined time (eg, about 1.5 seconds), By placing the second movable accessory 15 in front of the variation icon 9C, the variation display position 9Cd, and the hold display position 9Ad, the variation icon 9C, the change display position 9Cd, and the hold display position for the player. 9Ad becomes difficult to visually recognize. In addition, when the hold icon 9A is present, of course, the second movable accessory 15 is arranged in front of the change icon 9C, the hold icon 9A, the change display position 9Cd, and the hold display position 9Ad, so that the player On the other hand, the change icon 9C, the hold icon 9A, the change display position 9Cd, and the hold display position 9Ad are difficult to visually recognize.

By stopping the second movable accessory 15 on the front surface (front side) of the display screen 7a and near the lower side (downward advance position (lower effect position)) for a predetermined time (for example, about 1.5 seconds), There may be a case where the change icon 9C changes to another icon to increase the jackpot expectation, and the second movable accessory 15 causes the change icon 9C, the hold icon 9A, the change display position 9Cd, and the hold display position 9Ad. By being arranged in front of, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the variation icon 9C, the hold icon 9A, the variation display position 9Cd, and the hold display position 9Ad, and the player can be expected to increase the jackpot expectation. You can do it. At this time, the variable icon 9C may not change, and the color and shape of the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad may be changed. Even in this case, it is possible to expect the player to expect a higher jackpot expectation.

[Variable icon jump effect B]
Next, the variable icon jump effect B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 84 is a diagram for explaining the variable icon jump effect B. The variation icon jump effect B is performed during the variation effect (during variation display) by the decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 84(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative design 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative design 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. In the display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side, the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (symbol: number "1" to number "9") is started. When the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative design is started, the display of the decorative design that is stopped and displayed changes from the opaque state to the translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed to the high speed display mode. .. Thereby, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semitransparent decorative pattern which is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped). Note that the decorative pattern is in a display mode in which the decorative pattern moves in small increments in the vertical direction when the temporary stop display is performed.

Further, on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, there are a small left decorative design 8Lz, a small middle decorative design 8Cz, and a small right decorative design 8Rz corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, respectively. There is provided a sub-variation area where a variation effect (variation display) is provided. The small decorative pattern is always in an opaque state, does not become a translucent state even when the fluctuation starts, and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. When the fluctuating effect (variable display) by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R is started, the small left decorative design 8Lz, the small middle decorative design 8Cz, in the sub-variation region, are accompanied with this. The variation effect (variation display) by the small right decorative design 8Rz is started, and the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the small left decorative design 8Lz, the small medium. The decorative pattern 8Cz and the small right decorative pattern 8Rz are all stopped and displayed.

A state in which any one or more of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in the same design, and the reach is reached). Even in the state where the small decorative pattern 8Lz is formed, a small left decorative pattern 8Lz, a small middle decorative pattern 8Cz, a small right decorative pattern 8Rz (for example, a small left decorative pattern even if the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed). 8Lz, even if the right decorative design 8R is temporarily stopped, the small right decorative design 8Rz) is in a state in which the variable effect (variable display) is continued.

Further, when the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are all displayed in a stopped state, and they are not aligned in the same design and are displaced, a small left decorative design 8Lz, a small size The middle decorative design 8Cz and the small right decorative design 8Rz may be the same as the respective designs of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, or may be completely different designs.

On the other hand, when the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same design is a big hit, a small left decorative design 8Lz. The small middle decoration pattern 8Cz and the small right decoration pattern 8Rz are arranged in the same pattern as the left decoration pattern 8L, the middle decoration pattern 8C, and the right decoration pattern 8R.

The variation icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, which are currently changing as the end of the first special map reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (on the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (on the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad from the position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The reserved display positions 9Ad are arranged and displayed linearly along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, and no suspension icon is displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad to the fourth suspension display position 9Ad. That is, there is no stocked icon without digesting the hold icon. In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting opening 20 and the second starting opening 21.

Also, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbol, is supported. In addition to the hold icon 9A, the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20. The special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21 are arranged and displayed as unillustrated numbers in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 is shown in blue on the left side, and the number of the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21 is shown in red. The numbers are arranged on the upper side of the center of the display screen 7a so as to be spaced apart from each other on the right side and are always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as the number of reserved balls as numerical values, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and it is easy to intuitively understand. Note that these numbers are arranged on the forefront side of the display screen 7a and other images are displayed behind the foreground of the display screen 7a so that visibility is not hindered by the other images. It is like this.

Here, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “icon”) will be briefly described. Due to the difference in shape and color, the difference in expectation in winning in the lottery corresponding to the icon. Is represented. For example, of the four icons, a yellow (gold) star icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest likelihood of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hit, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hit, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hit. The smile sphere icon is further set to have a high expectation of being a jackpot in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (Rainbow (hit jackpot)).

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started in FIG. 84(A) and the variation icon jump effect B is started, thereafter, as shown in FIG. 84(B), a disk is displayed from the left side of the display screen 7a. The image EG appears and appears, and the disk image EG moves at high speed toward the fluctuation icon 9C at the fluctuation display position 9Cd and collides with the fluctuation icon 9C. In addition, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R during the variable effect (during variable display) all disappear from the display screen 7a before the disk image EG appears.

When the disk image EG collides with the fluctuation icon 9C, the fluctuation icon 9C jumps toward the center of the display screen 7a (while starting to move), and as shown in FIG. 84(C), from the fluctuation display position 9Cd. The flash light FH is emitted to the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the change icon 9C becomes difficult to visually recognize due to the flash light FH. At this time, the fluctuating display position 9Cd may temporarily become difficult to be recognized by the flash light FH and disappear from the display screen 7a, whereas the hold display position 9Ad may disappear from the display screen 7a due to the flash light FH. There is no. Further, the small left decorative pattern 8Lz, the small middle decorative pattern 8Cz, and the small right decorative pattern 8Rz are not easily visually recognized by the flash light FH and do not disappear from the display screen 7a.

Then, when the flash FH1 begins to disappear, it becomes possible to gradually recognize the presence of the variation icon 9C in the center of the display screen 7a, and as shown in FIG. 84(D), the variation icon 9C has a white spherical shape. The icon MG changes to a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, and a message MG1 "UP!" indicating that the jackpot is expected to increase is displayed above the change icon 9C on the display screen 7a in a state of tilting upward. It That is, the change of the variable icon 9C is successful. The star-shaped variation icon 9C is repeatedly rotated in a display mode in which the left side passes through the front side and goes to the right side. In FIG. 84(D), the white spherical variation icon 9C is changed to the yellow (gold) star variation icon 9C, and the variation icon 9C is successfully changed. If the icon 9C does not change to the yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon 9C but remains the white spherical variation icon 9C, it means that the variation of the variation icon 9C has failed.

When the fluctuation icon 9C changes from a white spherical icon to a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, the size of the star-shaped fluctuation icon 9C is the size of the white spherical fluctuation icon 9C at the fluctuation display position 9Cd. It is about 2.5 times larger than that.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 84(E), when the fluctuation icon 9C is rotating around, and starts descending (moving start) toward the fluctuation display position 9Cd, the message MG1 disappears from the display screen 7a. Then, when the variation icon 9C is completely moved to the variation display position 9Cd, as shown in FIG. 84(F), the variation icon 9C is maintained in a rotating state.

Then, as shown in FIG. 84(G), the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R in the variable effect (during variable display) appear again on the display screen 7a.

Then, as shown in FIG. 84(H), the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same design (number) (here, temporarily stopped with the number "7"), and the middle decorative design 8C. Is changed (variable display) and reach is formed. At this time, neither the small left decorative design 8Lz corresponding to the left decorative design 8L nor the small right decorative design 8Rz corresponding to the right decorative design 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the small left decorative design 8Lz, small The variable effect (variable display) is continued for the middle decoration pattern 8Cz and the small right decoration pattern 8Rz.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 84(I), from the state where the second movable accessory 15 stands still at the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7, the front surface (front side) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 starts. 84 (J), after moving (moving) toward a position closer to the lower side (lower moving position (lower performance position)) and stopping for a predetermined time (for example, about 1.5 seconds). Like this, it returns to the retracted position (home position) again.

Subsequently, various effects may be further continued, and when the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are stopped and displayed with the same design (here, the number "7"), it is a big hit. After that, the big hit game (big hit production) is started, while the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are not stopped and displayed with the same design (here, the number "7"). Sometimes it is out of the way. When the jackpot or the deviation is confirmed, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

In a state in which the second movable accessory 15 is stopped in front of (front of) the display screen 7a and at a position near the lower side (downward advance position (downward production position)) for a predetermined time (eg, about 1.5 seconds), By placing the second movable accessory 15 in front of the variation icon 9C, the variation display position 9Cd, and the hold display position 9Ad, the variation icon 9C, the change display position 9Cd, and the hold display position for the player. 9Ad becomes difficult to visually recognize. In addition, when the hold icon 9A is present, of course, the second movable accessory 15 is arranged in front of the change icon 9C, the hold icon 9A, the change display position 9Cd, and the hold display position 9Ad, so that the player On the other hand, the change icon 9C, the hold icon 9A, the change display position 9Cd, and the hold display position 9Ad are difficult to visually recognize.

By stopping the second movable accessory 15 on the front surface (front side) of the display screen 7a and near the lower side (downward advance position (lower effect position)) for a predetermined time (for example, about 1.5 seconds), There may be a case where the change icon 9C changes to another icon to increase the jackpot expectation, and the second movable accessory 15 causes the change icon 9C, the hold icon 9A, the change display position 9Cd, and the hold display position 9Ad. By being arranged in front of, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the variation icon 9C, the hold icon 9A, the variation display position 9Cd, and the hold display position 9Ad, and the player can be expected to increase the jackpot expectation. You can do it. At this time, the variable icon 9C may not change, and the color and shape of the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad may be changed. Even in this case, it is possible to expect the player to expect a higher jackpot expectation.

[Variable icon jump effect C]
Next, the variable icon jump effect C will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining the variable icon jump effect C. The variation icon jump effect C is performed during the variation effect (during variation display) by the decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 85(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative design 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative design 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. In the display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side, the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (symbol: number "1" to number "9") is started. When the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative design is started, the display of the decorative design that is stopped and displayed changes from the opaque state to the translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed to the high speed display mode. .. Thereby, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semitransparent decorative pattern which is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped). Note that the decorative pattern is in a display mode in which the decorative pattern moves in small increments in the vertical direction when the temporary stop display is performed.

Further, on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, there are a small left decorative design 8Lz, a small middle decorative design 8Cz, and a small right decorative design 8Rz corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, respectively. There is provided a sub-variation area where a variation effect (variation display) is provided. The small decorative pattern is always in an opaque state, does not become a translucent state even when the fluctuation starts, and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. When the fluctuating effect (variable display) by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R is started, the small left decorative design 8Lz, the small middle decorative design 8Cz, in the sub-variation region, are accompanied with this. The variation effect (variation display) by the small right decorative design 8Rz is started, and the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the small left decorative design 8Lz, the small medium. The decorative pattern 8Cz and the small right decorative pattern 8Rz are all stopped and displayed.

A state in which any one or more of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in the same design, and the reach is reached). Even in the state where the small decorative pattern 8Lz is formed, a small left decorative pattern 8Lz, a small middle decorative pattern 8Cz, a small right decorative pattern 8Rz (for example, a small left decorative pattern even if the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed). 8Lz, even if the right decorative design 8R is temporarily stopped, the small right decorative design 8Rz) is in a state in which the variable effect (variable display) is continued.

Further, when the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are all displayed in a stopped state, and they are not aligned in the same design and are displaced, a small left decorative design 8Lz, a small size The middle decorative design 8Cz and the small right decorative design 8Rz may be the same as the respective designs of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, or may be completely different designs.

On the other hand, when the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same design is a big hit, a small left decorative design 8Lz. The small middle decoration pattern 8Cz and the small right decoration pattern 8Rz are arranged in the same pattern as the left decoration pattern 8L, the middle decoration pattern 8C, and the right decoration pattern 8R.

The variation icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, which are currently changing as the end of the first special map reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (on the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (on the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad from the position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The reserved display positions 9Ad are arranged and displayed linearly along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, and no suspension icon is displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad to the fourth suspension display position 9Ad. That is, there is no stocked icon without digesting the hold icon. In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting opening 20 and the second starting opening 21.

Also, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbol, is supported. In addition to the hold icon 9A, the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20. The special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21 are arranged and displayed as unillustrated numbers in the upper left corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 is shown in blue on the left side, and the number of the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21 is shown in red. The numbers are arranged on the upper side of the center of the display screen 7a so as to be spaced apart from each other on the right side and are always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as the number of reserved balls as numerical values, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and it is easy to intuitively understand. Note that these numbers are arranged on the forefront side of the display screen 7a and other images are displayed behind the foreground of the display screen 7a so that visibility is not hindered by the other images. It is like this.

Here, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “icon”) will be briefly described. Due to the difference in shape and color, the difference in expectation in winning in the lottery corresponding to the icon. Is represented. For example, of the four icons, a yellow (gold) star icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest likelihood of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hit, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hit, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hit. The smile sphere icon is further set to have a high expectation of being a jackpot in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (Rainbow (hit jackpot)).

In FIG. 85(A), the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, and when the variation icon jump effect C is started, thereafter, as shown in FIG. 85(B), the variation display position 9Cd and the hold state. The display position 9Ad disappears from the display screen 7a. Then, the variation icon 9C displayed at the variation display position 9Cd jumps toward the center of the display screen 7a (starts movement).

When the variation icon 9C arrives at the center of the display screen 7a, the variation icon 9C swells (that is, the size of the white spherical icon increases) and explodes, as shown in FIG. 85(C). At this time, the size of the variation icon 9C is about 2.5 times larger than the size of the variation icon 9C at the variation display position 9Cd. In FIG. 85(C), the variable icon 9C may swell (that is, the size of the white spherical icon may become large) and may not explode, and a crack may run into the variable icon 9C and be crushed. ..

Before changing the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R during the variation production (during variable display), the relevant variation icon 9C swells (that is, the size of the white spherical icon becomes large). Or, before the variable icon 9C swells (that is, the size of the white spherical icon becomes large) and cracks run and are crushed in the variable icon 9C, all disappear from the display screen 7a. On the other hand, the small left decorative design 8Lz, the small middle decorative design 8Cz, and the small right decorative design 8Rz during the variable effect (during variable display) do not disappear from the display screen 7a.

Then, when the fluctuation icon 9C expands (that is, the size of the white spherical icon increases) and explodes, or when the fluctuation icon 9C expands (that is, the size of the white spherical icon increases). ) When the variation icon 9C is cracked and crushed, the variation icon 9C having a white spherical shape changes to the variation icon 9C having a yellow (gold) star shape as shown in FIG. 85(D). That is, the change of the variable icon 9C is successful. The star-shaped variation icon 9C is repeatedly rotated in a display mode in which the left side passes through the front side and goes to the right side. In FIG. 85(D), the white spherical variation icon 9C is changed to the yellow (gold) star variation icon 9C, and the variation icon 9C is successfully changed. If the icon 9C does not change to the yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon 9C but remains the white spherical variation icon 9C, it means that the variation of the variation icon 9C has failed. In FIG. 85(C), when the variation icon 9C does not swell (that is, the size of the white spherical icon becomes large) and does not explode, but contracts again and returns to the original size, it becomes a white spherical shape. The change icon 9C remains as it is, which means that the change of the change icon 9C has failed.

Then, when the fluctuation icon 9C is rotating, it starts descending (moving start) while shrinking toward the fluctuation display position 9Cd, and when the fluctuation icon 9C completes the movement to the position before jumping, the fluctuation icon The size of 9C is returned to the size before jumping up (that is, the size of the white spherical fluctuation icon 9C at the fluctuation display position 9Cd shown in FIG. 85B), and the state of rolling around is maintained. Then, as shown in FIG. 85(E), the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad are displayed again on the display screen 7a and appear.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 85(F), from the state where the second movable accessory 15 stands still at the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7, the front surface (front side) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is moved forward. ) And move toward a position closer to the lower side (a lower advance position (lower effect position)), stop for a predetermined time (for example, about 1.5 seconds), and then, in FIG. 85(G). As shown, it returns to the retracted position (home position) again, and the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R in the variable effect (during variable display) appear again on the display screen 7a.

In a state in which the second movable accessory 15 is stopped in front of (front of) the display screen 7a and at a position near the lower side (downward advance position (downward production position)) for a predetermined time (eg, about 1.5 seconds), By placing the second movable accessory 15 in front of the variation icon 9C, the variation display position 9Cd, and the hold display position 9Ad, the variation icon 9C, the change display position 9Cd, and the hold display position for the player. 9Ad becomes difficult to visually recognize. In addition, when the hold icon 9A is present, of course, the second movable accessory 15 is arranged in front of the change icon 9C, the hold icon 9A, the change display position 9Cd, and the hold display position 9Ad, so that the player On the other hand, the change icon 9C, the hold icon 9A, the change display position 9Cd, and the hold display position 9Ad are difficult to visually recognize.

By stopping the second movable accessory 15 on the front surface (front side) of the display screen 7a and near the lower side (downward advance position (lower effect position)) for a predetermined time (for example, about 1.5 seconds), There may be a case where the change icon 9C changes to another icon to increase the jackpot expectation, and the second movable accessory 15 causes the change icon 9C, the hold icon 9A, the change display position 9Cd, and the hold display position 9Ad. By being arranged in front of, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the variation icon 9C, the hold icon 9A, the variation display position 9Cd, and the hold display position 9Ad, and the player can be expected to increase the jackpot expectation. You can do it. At this time, the variable icon 9C may not change, and the color and shape of the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad may be changed. Even in this case, it is possible to expect the player to expect a higher jackpot expectation.

Then, as shown in FIG. 85(H), the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are temporarily stopped by the same design (number) (here, temporarily stopped by the number "7"), and the middle decorative design 8C. Is changed (variable display) and reach is formed. At this time, neither the small left decorative design 8Lz corresponding to the left decorative design 8L nor the small right decorative design 8Rz corresponding to the right decorative design 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the small left decorative design 8Lz, small The variable effect (variable display) is continued for the middle decoration pattern 8Cz and the small right decoration pattern 8Rz.

Subsequently, various effects may be further continued, and when the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are stopped and displayed with the same design (here, the number "7"), it is a big hit. After that, the big hit game (big hit production) is started, while the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are not stopped and displayed with the same design (here, the number "7"). Sometimes it is out of the way. When the jackpot or the deviation is confirmed, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the variable icon jump effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, a plurality of types of images can be displayed in the variable icon jump effect A of FIG. 83, the variable icon jump effect B of FIG. 84, and the variable icon jump effect C of FIG. 85. After the image display device 7 (display means) is provided, the variable icon 9C moves from the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) to the center (second display position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the display mode of the fluctuation icon 9C is changed from a white spherical icon to a yellow (gold) star icon (another display mode), the fluctuation display position 9Cd (first display position) is displayed again. The first effect to move (FIG. 83(B) to (G) in the variable icon jump effect A, FIG. 84(B) to (F) in the variable icon jump effect B, and FIG. 85 in the variable icon jump effect C). (B) to (E)) can be executed. According to this configuration, after the variation icon 9C moves from the variation display position 9Cd (first display position) to the center (second display position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display mode changes. Since the display changes to another display mode and returns to the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) again, a dynamic variation is given to the variable icon 9C to change the effect of the variable icon 9C. Furthermore, the possibility of increasing the degree of expectation for hitting the fluctuation can be suggested to the player by increasing the fluctuation icon 9C and changing the fluctuation icon 9C due to a dynamic movement of the fluctuation icon 9C. Therefore, interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first effect in the variable icon jump effect A of FIG. 83 and the variable icon jump effect C of FIG. 85, the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) and The center (second display position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is not displayed. Specifically, no image indicating the center position is displayed on the display screen 7a at the center (second display position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, for example, in the first effect in FIGS. 83B to 83G of the variation icon jump effect A, the variation display position 9Cd (first display position) may not be displayed, and the variation icon may be displayed. In the first effect in FIGS. 84B to 84F of the jump effect B, the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) may not be displayed. Therefore, in the first effect, the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) and the center (second display position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 may not be displayed. According to this configuration, the change icon 9C can be focused on the change in the change icon 9C in the state where the change icon 9C is present at the center (second display position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first effect in the variable icon jump effect A of FIG. 83, the variable icon jump effect B of FIG. 84, and the variable icon jump effect C of FIG. 85, the image display device is used. In the center (second display position) of the display screen 7a of FIG. 7, the change icon 9C that has changed from a white spherical icon to a yellow (gold) star icon (another display mode) is the change display position 9Cd (the second display position). 1) again, the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) is displayed, and the center (second display position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is not displayed. There is. Specifically, no image indicating the center position is displayed on the display screen 7a at the center (second display position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Further, for example, in the first effect in FIGS. 83(B) to (G) of the variable icon jump effect A, the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) is displayed in FIG. 83(G), and In the first effect in FIGS. 84(B) to (F) of the variable icon jump effect B, the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) is displayed in FIG. 84(F), and the variable icon jump effect C In the first effect in FIGS. 85(B) to 85(E), the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) is displayed in FIG. 85(E). According to this configuration, when the fluctuation icon 9C returns to the fluctuation display position 9Cd, the completion of the change of the fluctuation icon 9C is displayed at the fluctuation display position 9Cd (first display position), and further, the image display device. No image indicating the central position is displayed on the display screen 7a at the center (second display position) of the display screen 7a of No. 7, so that the existing image, that is, the variable display position 9Cd( It is possible to notify using the first display position).

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the variable icon jump effect A of FIG. 83 and the variable icon jump effect C of FIG. 85, the hold display position 9Ad (third display position) indicating the display position of the hold icon 9A. In the first effect, when the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) is displayed, the hold display position 9Ad (third display position) is displayed, and the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) is displayed. When the display position) is not displayed, the hold display position 9Ad (third display position) is not displayed. Specifically, in the first effect in FIGS. 83(B) to (G) of the variable icon jump effect A, the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) and the hold display position in FIG. 83(B). 9Ad (third display position) is displayed, but in FIG. 83(E), the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) and the hold display position 9Ad (third display position) are not displayed. .. In the first effect in FIGS. 85(B) to (E) of the variation icon jump effect C, the variation display position 9Cd (first display position) and the hold display position 9Ad (first) in FIG. 85(B). The display position 3) is displayed, while the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) and the hold display position 9Ad (third display position) are not displayed in FIG. 85(D). Therefore, in the first effect, when displaying the variable display position 9Cd (first display position), the hold display position 9Ad (third display position) is displayed, and the variable display position 9Cd (first display). When the position) is not displayed, the hold display position 9Ad (third display position) may not be displayed. According to this configuration, the change icon 9Cd (first display position) and the hold display position 9Ad (third display position) are displayed or not displayed, so that the change icon is displayed. This can be combined with the movement and change of 9C to contribute to the improvement of the effect.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the variable icon jump effect A of FIG. 83, the variable icon jump effect B of FIG. 84, and the variable icon jump effect C of FIG. 85, the image display device 7 (display means). Has a second movable accessory 15 (movable body) that can appear on the near side, and after the first effect, the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) and the hold display position 9Ad (third display). (Display position) is displayed, the second movable accessory 15 (movable body) is operated to move the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) and the hold display position 9Ad (third display position). The second effect that makes it difficult to visually recognize (Fig. 83(I) in the variable icon jump effect A, 84(I) in the variable icon jump effect B, and 85(F) in the variable icon jump effect C). Is able to run. According to this configuration, the color of the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) and the hold display position 9Ad (third display position) can be changed by the operation of the second movable accessory 15 (movable body). Since it is possible to suggest that the jackpot expectation is increased by changing the shape, it is possible to make the player expect the jackpot expectation to be increased.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the second effect in the variable icon jump effect A of FIG. 83, the variable icon jump effect B of FIG. 84, and the variable icon jump effect C of FIG. The accessory 15 (movable body) is operated to cover the variable icon 9C and make it difficult to visually recognize. Specifically, in FIG. 83(I) in the variable icon jump effect A, FIG. 84(I) in the variable icon jump effect B, and FIG. 85(F) in the variable icon jump effect C, the second movable accessory object. 15 (movable body) covers the variable icon 9C to make it difficult to visually recognize. According to this configuration, since it is possible to suggest that the jackpot expectation level of changing the variable icon 9C to another icon by the operation of the second movable accessory 15 (movable body), the player can expect a jackpot. You can expect to improve the degree.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first effect in the variable icon jump effect A of FIG. 83, the variable icon jump effect B of FIG. 84, and the variable icon jump effect C of FIG. When 9C is moved again from the center (second display position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to the variable display position 9Cd (first display position), at the variable display position 9Cd (first display position). It can be rotated in a predetermined direction. Specifically, in FIG. 83(G) in the variable icon jump effect A, FIG. 84(F) in the variable icon jump effect B, and FIG. 85(E) in the variable icon jump effect C, the variable icon 9C is The display mode in which the left side passes through the front side and turns toward the right side is repeatedly rotated (rotated in a predetermined direction). According to this configuration, the change icon 9C after the change can be focused on.

[Modification]
The following is a modification of the variable icon jump effect.
[Modification 1]
The variable icon jump effect A of FIG. 83, the variable icon jump effect B of FIG. 84, and the variable icon jump effect C of FIG. 85 are performed based on the game ball entering the first starting opening 20. Met. In other words, it was performed in a so-called left-handed gaming state. However, it may be performed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second starting opening 21. In other words, it may be performed in a so-called right-handed gaming state.

[Modification 2]
The variable icon jump effect A in FIG. 83, the variable icon jump effect B in FIG. 84, and the second effect in the variable icon jump effect C in FIG. 85 (in the variable icon jump effect A, FIG. In FIG. 84(I) for the icon jump effect B and FIG. 85(F) for the variable icon jump effect C, when the hold icon 9A is present, the second movable accessory 15 (movable body) is operated to perform the hold display. The hold icon 9A at the position 9Ad (third display position) may be covered to make it difficult to visually recognize. By doing so, it is possible to suggest that the jackpot expectation degree that the hold icon 9A changes to another icon is increased, so that the second movable accessory 15 causes the change icon 9C, the hold icon 9A, the change display position 9Cd and By being arranged in front of the hold display position 9Ad, the variation icon 9C, the hold icon 9A, the variation display position 9Cd, and the hold display position 9Ad become difficult for the player to visually recognize, and the player is expected to increase the jackpot expectation. You can expect it.

[Modification 3]
In the second effect in the variable icon jump effect A in FIG. 83, the variable icon jump effect B in FIG. 84, and the variable icon jump effect C in FIG. 85, the second movable accessory 15 (movable body) is at the retracted position ( From the home position) to the front side (front side) of the display screen 7a and to the position near the lower side (downward advance position (downward production position)) for a predetermined time (for example, about 1.5 seconds), the player is stopped. The variation icon 9C, the variation display position 9Cd, and the hold display position 9Ad are difficult to visually recognize. When the hold icon 9A is present, of course, the second movable accessory 15 (movable body) is arranged in front of the change icon 9C, the hold icon 9A, the change display position 9Cd, and the hold display position 9Ad, It has been difficult for the player to visually recognize the change icon 9C, the hold icon 9A, the change display position 9Cd, and the hold display position 9Ad. However, the second movable accessory 15 (movable body) does not reach from the retracted position (home position) to the front surface (front side) of the display screen 7a and to the position near the lower edge (downward advance position (lower effect position)) ( For example, the evacuation position (home position) may be returned to the evacuation position (home position) by moving to the advance position (lower effect position) which is the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a. In this case, the second movable accessory 15 (movable body) does not cover the variation icon 9C, the variation display position 9Cd, and the hold display position 9Ad even when operated, and even when the hold icon 9A is present, Since the variable icon 9C, the hold icon 9A, the variable display position 9Cd, and the hold display position 9Ad are not covered, the jackpot expectation degree that the variable icon 9C and the hold icon 9A actually change to another icon is increased. Or a suggestion to increase the jackpot expectation that the color and shape of the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad are changed, the second movable accessory 15 (movable body) simply operates. Even in the case of doing so, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the jackpot expectation may be suggested.

[Modification 4]
The variable icon jump effect A in FIG. 83, the variable icon jump effect B in FIG. 84, and the first effect in the variable icon jump effect C in FIG. 85 (in the variable icon jump effect A, FIG. 84(B) to (F) in the variation icon jump effect B, and FIGS. 85(B) to (E) in the variation icon jump effect C), the white spherical variation icon at the variation display position 9Cd. 9C jumps toward the center of the display screen 7a, and then changes to another yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon 9C as another icon, and the variation icon 9C is successfully changed. However, the hold icon 9A has already changed from a white spherical icon to a blue smile sphere icon, and when the blue smile sphere hold icon 9A becomes the change icon 9C, the change icon jump effect is changed. The variation icon 9C of a blue smiling sphere jumps up toward the center of the display screen 7a, and then changes to another variation icon 9C of, for example, a yellow (gold) star to change the variation icon 9C. The change of the icon may be successful or unsuccessful. By doing so, it is possible to suggest to the player the possibility of increasing the degree of expectation for the variation due to the variation of the variation icon 9C due to the dynamic movement of the variation icon 9C. Therefore, interest can be improved.

[Modification 5]
In the variable icon jump effect C of FIG. 85, when the variable icon 9C arrives at the center of the display screen 7a, the variable icon 9C swells (that is, the white spherical icon increases in size) and explodes. Or, a crack was run and shattered in the fluctuation icon 9C without exploding. However, when the white spherical fluctuation icon 9C swells and explodes, the shell of the white spherical fluctuation icon 9C is peeled off by this explosion and a yellow (gold) star-shaped fluctuation icon 9C appears as another icon. Alternatively, the variation icon 9C having a white spherical shape may be inflated, torn and exploded, and the variation icon 9C having, for example, a yellow (gold) star shape may appear as another icon. By doing so, it is possible to increase the variation of the change of the change icon 9C and contribute to the improvement of the effect of the change of the change icon 9C.

[Modification 6]
In the variable icon jump effect A of FIG. 83, the variable icon jump effect B of FIG. 84, and the variable icon jump effect C of FIG. 85, the hold icon 9A does not exist, but for example, the first hold display position 9Ad ~ When the hold icon 9A exists in the third hold display position 9Ad, that is, when the three hold icons 9A exist, or when the hold icon 9A is displayed in the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, respectively. When present, that is, when the four hold icons 9A exist, the look-ahead effect causes the hold icon to be extinguished as the game progresses as a suggestion (notice) of the variable icon jump effect, and the hold icon 9A is shifted each time. The size of 9A may be increased. By doing so, it is possible to suggest to the player the start time of the variable icon jump effect, and it is possible to contribute to increasing the expectation for the change of the variable icon 9C by the variable icon jump effect.

[Modification 7]
In the variable icon jump effect A of FIG. 83, the variable icon jump effect B of FIG. 84, and the variable icon jump effect C of FIG. 85, the white spherical variable icon 9C at the variable display position 9Cd is at the center of the display screen 7a. After that, the icon changed to the yellow (gold) star-shaped variable icon 9C as another icon, and the icon of the variable icon 9C was successfully changed. Before and after this change, the size of the change icon 9C may be increased or decreased. By doing so, it is possible to increase the variation of the change of the change icon 9C and contribute to the improvement of the effect of the change of the change icon 9C.

[Modification 8]
In the variable icon jump effect A in FIG. 83, the variable icon jump effect B in FIG. 84, and the variable icon jump effect C in FIG. 85, after the left decorative design 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed, the right decorative design 8R is temporarily stopped. Immediately before, the fluctuation icon 9C may jump (start movement) from the fluctuation display position 9Cd toward the center of the display screen 7a. In this case, at the same time (or almost at the same time) when the right decorative design 8R is temporarily stopped, the variation display position 9Cd is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a with another icon (for example, the variation icon 9C having a white spherical shape is yellow from the variation icon 9C). It may be changed to the (gold) star-shaped variation icon 9C) and returned to the variation display position 9Cd again. In this way, after the variation icon 9C moves from the variation display position 9Cd (first display position) to the center (second display position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display mode is changed to another one. Since the display mode is changed to return to the variable display position 9Cd (first display position) again, dynamic variation is given to the variable icon 9C to increase the production variation to the variable icon 9C. Furthermore, the change of the variation icon 9C due to the dynamic movement of the variation icon 9C can suggest to the player the possibility of increasing the degree of expectation for the variation. Therefore, interest can be improved.

[Modification 9]
In the variable icon jump effect A of FIG. 83(I), the variable icon jump effect B of FIG. 84(I), and the variable icon jump effect C of FIG. 85(F), the second movable accessory 15 is the image display device. 7 from the stationary state at the retracted position (home position) above 7 toward the front side (front side) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward the lower side (downward advance position (downward production position)) ( After moving, the robot stops for a predetermined time (for example, about 1.5 seconds) and then returns to the retracted position (home position) again. However, instead of the second movable accessory 15, another movable accessory provided in the game board 2 may be used. For example, a lower movable accessory is provided below the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the front movable surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 from the state in which the lower movable accessory is stationary at the retracted position (home position) ( Forward), and advance (move) so as to cover all the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, the change icon 9C, the hold icon 9A (there may be a maximum of four hold balls), You may make it stop for a predetermined time (for example, about 1.5 seconds) and then return to the retracted position (home position) again. By doing so, it is possible to suggest that the jackpot expectation is increased by changing the color or changing the shape of the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad by the operation of the lower movable accessory. The player can be expected to increase the jackpot expectation, and since it is possible to suggest that the variation icon 9C or the hold icon 9A be changed to another icon, the jackpot expectation can be increased. Expectations can be expected to increase.

[Modification 10]
The variable icon jump effect A in FIG. 83, the variable icon jump effect B in FIG. 84, and the variable icon jump effect C in FIG. It may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect A12-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
When the display mode of the variable icon is changed to another display mode after the variable icon moves from the first display position to the second display position, the variable icon moves to the first display position again. 1 effect can be executed,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A12-2]
A gaming machine according to Aspect A12-1,
In the first effect, the first display position and the second display position may not be displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A12-3]
A gaming machine according to Aspect A12-1 or A12-2,
In the first effect, when the variable icon that has changed to the other display mode at the second display position moves to the first display position again, the first display position is displayed and the second display position is displayed. Does not display the display position of
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A12-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A12-1 to A12-3,
There is a third display position that represents the display position of the hold icon,
In the first effect, the third display position may be displayed when the first display position is displayed, and the third display position may not be displayed when the first display position is not displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A12-5]
A gaming machine according to Aspect A12-4,
Having a movable body that can appear on the front side of the display means,
After the first effect, when the first display position and the third display position are being displayed, the movable body is operated to move the first display position and the third display position. It is possible to execute a second effect that covers and and makes it difficult to see.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A12-6]
A gaming machine according to aspect A12-5,
In the second effect, the movable body may be operated to cover the variable icon to make it difficult to see.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A12-7]
A gaming machine according to Aspect A12-5 or A12-6,
In the second effect, the movable body may be operated to cover the hold icon at the third display position to make it difficult to visually recognize.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A12-8]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A12-1 to A12-7,
In the first effect, when the variable icon is moved from the second display position to the first display position again, the variable icon is rotated in a predetermined direction at the first display position.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The operation means appearance effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 86 to 88. In this way, the operation means appearance effect can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the operation unit appearance effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the image display device 7. Images are displayed on the screen 7a, the right sub display screen 64R, and the left sub display screen 64L.

[Operating means appearance effect A]
FIG. 86 is a diagram for explaining the operation means appearance production A. The operation means appearance effect is an effect when the operation means image BTN, which is an image imitating operation means such as the effect button 63, the sword member 65, and the select button 98, appears. First, as shown in FIG. 86(A), in the state where nothing is displayed on the right sub display screen 64R and the left sub display screen 64L, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are in the reach state (here) on the display screen 7a. Then the reach is "2↓2". The left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are displayed on the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a.

At a certain timing, as shown in FIG. 86(B), an operation promotion image SG for prompting the player to operate the operation means is displayed. Here, the operation promotion image SG is a character image of “press! Further, the operation promotion image SG is displayed outside the three screens. At this time, the operation means image BTN is not yet displayed. That is, in this effect, the operation promotion image SG is displayed before the operation means image BTN. Therefore, the player who sees the operation promotion image SG is confused for a moment as to what to operate. As a result, interest in the operation target can be increased and interest can be improved. A part of the operation promotion image SG is displayed so as to overlap the decorative patterns 8L and 8R. At this time, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are displayed on the front side of the operation promotion image SG.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 86(C), the operation prompting image SG is reduced and displayed, and the entire operation prompting image SG is displayed inside the three screens of the right sub display screen 64R, the display screen 7a, and the left sub display screen 64L. Fits. At this time, the image is enlarged and displayed across three screens. The operation means image BTN has not been displayed yet. A part of the operation promotion image SG is displayed so as to overlap the decorative patterns 8L and 8R, and the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are displayed on the front side of the operation promotion image SG.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 86(D), the operation prompting image SG is further reduced in size and displayed, and the entire operation prompting image SG fits inside the display screen 7a. At this time, the operation means image BTN is not yet displayed. A part of the operation promotion image SG is displayed so as to overlap the decorative patterns 8L and 8R, and the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are displayed on the front side of the operation promotion image SG.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 86(E), on the display screen 7a, the operation promotion image SG is further reduced in size and moved, and is displayed at a position not overlapping the decorative symbols 8L and 8R. Further, the operation means image BTN is newly displayed below the operation promotion image SG. Here, the operation means image BTN is an image simulating the effect button 63. By displaying the operation means image BTN, the player notices that the operation of the effect button 63 has been prompted, and the attention is focused on the effect button 63. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 86(F), both the operation means image BTN and the operation promotion image SG are reduced and displayed. Normally, the operation means image BTN and the operation promotion image SG are not displayed in a reduced size after being displayed together, so that the player can be interested again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86(G), the specific image TG is displayed on the back side of the operation means image BTN and the operation promotion image SG. The specific image TG is a rectangular meter and includes a plurality of scale panels. As for the specific image TG, as shown in FIGS. 86G and 86H, the scale panels are sequentially displayed from the left side, and an effect that is gradually completed is executed. When all of the scale panels are complete (here, 6 sheets) and the specific image TG is completed, the specific image TG can be operated by the player with the operation means (here, the production button 63) as shown in FIG. 86(I). The mode changes in tandem. Here, when the player presses the effect button 63, the color of the scale panel of the specific image TG is sequentially changed from the left side, and it is notified that the remaining period in which the operation of the effect button 63 is necessary is short. There is. If the player does not press the effect button 63, the color of the scale panel of the specific image TG does not change in order from the left side.

After that, when the period in which the operation of the effect button 63 is required expires, the display of the operation means image BTN, the operation promotion image SG, and the specific image TG disappear. Then, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are fixedly stopped. Here, it is definitely stopped in a lost manner.

[Operating means appearance production B]
FIG. 87 is a diagram for explaining the operation means appearance production B. The operation means appearance effect is an effect when the operation means image BTN, which is an image imitating operation means such as the effect button 63, the sword member 65, and the select button 98, appears. First, as shown in FIG. 87(A), in the state where nothing is displayed on the right sub display screen 64R and the left sub display screen 64L, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are in the reach state (here Then the reach is "2↓2". The left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are displayed on the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a.

At a certain timing, as shown in FIG. 87(B), an operation promotion image SG for prompting the player to operate the operation means is displayed. Here, the operation promotion image SG is a character image of "continuous hit!!", "press!", and "long press!", and these characters are sequentially displayed at predetermined timings alternately. Here, the sequence is changed in the order of “continuous hit!!”→“press!!”→“long press!”→“continuous hit!!”. The operation promotion image SG is enlarged and displayed across three screens of the right sub display screen 64R, the display screen 7a, and the left sub display screen 64L. Further, the operation promotion image SG is displayed outside the three screens. At this time, the operation means image BTN is not yet displayed. That is, in this effect, the operation promotion image SG is displayed before the operation means image BTN. Therefore, the player who sees the operation promotion image SG is confused for a moment as to what to operate. Furthermore, since the contents of the operation promotion image SG are periodically switched, it is confusing how to operate. As a result, interest in the operation target and the operation method can be increased and interest can be improved. A part of the operation promotion image SG is displayed so as to overlap the decorative patterns 8L and 8R. At this time, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are displayed on the front side of the operation promotion image SG.

After that, as shown in FIG. 87(C), the operation promotion image SG is reduced and displayed, and the entire operation promotion image SG is displayed inside the three screens of the right sub display screen 64R, the display screen 7a, and the left sub display screen 64L. Fits. The character content of the operation promotion image SG is continuously switched. At this time, the image is enlarged and displayed across three screens. The operation means image BTN has not been displayed yet. A part of the operation promotion image SG is displayed so as to overlap the decorative patterns 8L and 8R, and the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are displayed on the front side of the operation promotion image SG.

After that, as shown in FIG. 87(D), the operation prompting image SG is further reduced in size, and the entire operation prompting image SG fits inside the display screen 7a. The character content of the operation promotion image SG is continuously switched. At this time, the operation means image BTN is not yet displayed. A part of the operation promotion image SG is displayed so as to overlap the decorative patterns 8L and 8R, and the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are displayed on the front side of the operation promotion image SG.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 87(E), on the display screen 7a, the operation promotion image SG is further reduced in size and moved, and is displayed at a position not overlapping the decorative symbols 8L and 8R. Further, the operation means image BTN is newly displayed below the operation promotion image SG. Here, the operation means image BTN is an image simulating the effect button 63. By displaying the operation means image BTN, the player notices that the operation of the effect button 63 has been prompted, and the attention is focused on the effect button 63. Then, as shown in FIG. 87(F), both the operation means image BTN and the operation promotion image SG are reduced and displayed. Normally, the operation means image BTN and the operation promotion image SG are not displayed in a reduced size after being displayed together, so that it is possible to attract the player's attention again. At this time as well, the character content of the operation promotion image SG is continuously switched.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(G), the specific image TG is displayed on the back side of the operation means image BTN and the operation promotion image SG. The specific image TG is a rectangular meter and includes a plurality of scale panels. As for the specific image TG, the player operates the effect button 63 in accordance with the contents of the operation promotion image SG which is sequentially changed, so that the scale panels are sequentially displayed from the left side as shown in FIGS. 87(G) and (H). The production that is gradually completed is executed. That is, when the operation promoting image SG is “continuously hit!!”, the effect button 63 is continuously hit, when “press—!!”, the effect button 63 is pressed, and when “long press!”, the effect button 63 is pressed. By pressing and holding 63, the scale panels are displayed in order from the left side. When the player does not perform the operation according to the display content of the operation promotion image SG, the scale panel does not increase. The specific image TG is completed when all (6 in this case) scale panels are arranged within a predetermined period. When all the scale panels are not completed within the predetermined period, the operation means image BTN, the operation promotion image SG, and the specific image TG disappear at that time.

As shown in FIG. 87(I), the mode of the specific image TG changes in association with the operation of the operation means (here, the effect button 63) by the player. Here, the switching of the specific image TG is stopped in a state where “repeated hits!!” is displayed. In this state, when the player repeatedly presses the effect button 63, the colors of the scale panels of the specific image TG are sequentially changed from the left side, and when the colors of all the scale panels are changed, the operation means image BTN and the operation promotion image are displayed. The display of SG and the specific image TG disappears. Then, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are fixedly stopped. Here, it is definitely stopped in a lost manner.

[Operating means appearance production C]
FIG. 88 is a diagram for explaining the operation means appearance production C. The operation means appearance effect is an effect when the operation means image ASI, which is an image imitating operation means such as the effect button 63, the sword member 65, and the select button 98, appears. First, as shown in FIG. 88(A), in the state where nothing is displayed on the right sub display screen 64R and the left sub display screen 64L, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are in the reach state (here Then the reach is "2↓2". The left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are displayed on the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a.

At a certain timing, as shown in FIG. 88(B), an operation promotion image SG for prompting the player to operate the operation means is displayed. Here, the operation promotion image SG is a character image of “push in!” and is enlarged and displayed across three screens of the right sub display screen 64R, the display screen 7a, and the left sub display screen 64L. Further, the operation promotion image SG is displayed outside the three screens. At this time, the operation means image ASI is not yet displayed. That is, in this effect, the operation promotion image SG is displayed before the operation means image ASI. Therefore, the player who sees the operation promotion image SG is confused for a moment as to what to operate. As a result, interest in the operation target can be increased and interest can be improved. A part of the operation promotion image SG is displayed so as to overlap the decorative patterns 8L and 8R. At this time, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are displayed on the front side of the operation promotion image SG.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 88(C), the operation promotion image SG is reduced and displayed, and the entire operation promotion image SG is displayed inside the three screens of the right sub display screen 64R, the display screen 7a, and the left sub display screen 64L. Fits. At this time, the image is enlarged and displayed across three screens. The operation means image ASI is not yet displayed. A part of the operation promotion image SG is displayed so as to overlap the decorative patterns 8L and 8R, and the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are displayed on the front side of the operation promotion image SG.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 88(D), the operation prompting image SG is further reduced in size, and the entire operation prompting image SG fits inside the display screen 7a. At this time, the operation means image ASI is not yet displayed. The operation promoting image SG is displayed in a reduced size at a position not overlapping the decorative patterns 8L and 8R.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 88(E), the operation means image ASI is newly displayed below the operation promotion image SG. The operation means image ASI is displayed so as to overlap the operation promotion image SG. At this time, the operation means image ASI is displayed on the front side. As a result, the impact of the operation means image ASI can be given. Here, the operation means image ASI is an image imitating the sword member 65. By displaying the operation means image ASI, the player notices that the operation of the sword member 65 is being prompted, and the attention is concentrated on the sword member 65. Then, as shown in FIG. 88(F), both the operation means image ASI and the operation promotion image SG are reduced and displayed below the display screen 7a. Normally, the operation means image ASI and the operation promotion image SG are not displayed in a reduced size after being displayed together, so that it is possible to attract the player's attention again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88(G), the specific image TG is displayed on the back side of the operation means image ASI and the operation promotion image SG. The specific image TG is a rectangular meter and includes a plurality of scale panels. As for the specific image TG, as shown in FIGS. 88(G) and (H), the scale panels are sequentially displayed from the left side, and an effect that is gradually completed is executed. When all the scale panels are completed (here, 6 sheets) and the specific image TG is completed, the specific image TG is displayed on the operation device (here, the sword member 65) by the player, as shown in FIG. 88(I). The mode changes in tandem. Here, when the player pushes the sword member 65 downward, the color of the scale panel of the specific image TG sequentially changes from the left side, and the remaining period in which the sword member 65 needs to be operated is shortened. doing.

After that, when the period in which the operation of the sword member 65 is required expires, the display of the operation means image ASI, the operation promotion image SG, and the specific image TG disappear. Then, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are fixedly stopped. Here, it is definitely stopped in a lost manner.

[Effect example]
Below, the example of the effect of operation means appearance production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 86(B)-(D), 87(B)-(D), and 88(B)-(D), operation means images are displayed on the display screen 7a. In a state where BTN and ASI are not displayed, a first effect in which the operation promotion image SG is displayed and a second effect in which the operation means images BTN and ASI are displayed after the first effect are executed. can do. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel effect that has never been seen before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 86(B) to (D), 87(B) to (D), and 88(B) to (D), in the first effect, the operation is performed. The promotion image SG is displayed across at least one of the sub display screens 64R and 64L and the display screen 7a, and then reduced and displayed on the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel effect that has never been seen before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 86(B) to (D), 87(B) to (D), and 88(B) to (D), in the first effect, the operation is performed. The promotion image SG is displayed across the right sub display screen 64R and the display screen 7a, and is displayed across the left sub display screen 64L and the display screen 7a, and then is reduced and displayed on the display screen 7a. Is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel effect that has never been seen before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 86(B) to (E), 87(B) to (E), and 88(B) to (D), in the first effect, reach is achieved. After the operation promotion image SG is displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped in the state, it is reduced and displayed at a position that does not overlap the decorative pattern. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel effect that has never been seen before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 86(E) to (F), 87(E) to (F), and 88(E) to (F), after the second effect, The operation means images BTN and ASI and the operation promotion image SG are both reduced and displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel effect that has never been seen before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 86(F) to (I), 87(F) to (I), and 88(F) to (I), after the second effect, On the back side of the operation means images BTN and ASI, a specific image TG whose mode changes in association with the operation of the operation means by the player is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel effect that has never been seen before, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
The following is a modification of the operation means appearance effect.
[Modification 1]
In the operation means appearance effects A to C, the operation promotion image SG is displayed across the right sub display screen 64R and the display screen 7a, and is displayed across the left sub display screen 64L and the display screen 7a. After that, the image is reduced and displayed on the display screen 7a. However, the operation promotion image SG may be a display that is displayed across one of the right sub display screen 64R and the left sub display screen 64L and the display screen 7a and is not displayed on the other sub display screen.

[Modification 2]
In the operation means appearance production A, as shown in FIG. 86(I), the specific image TG is changed in form in association with the operation of the operation means (production button 63) by the player. That is, when the player presses the effect button 63, the color of the scale panel of the specific image TG sequentially changes from the left side, and the remaining period in which the operation of the effect button 63 is required becomes shorter. However, even if the player does not press the effect button 63, the color of the scale panel of the specific image TG may change sequentially from the left side with time.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Mode B1-1]
An operation means that can be operated by the player,
A gaming machine comprising a display unit capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is an operation means image imitating the operation means,
One of the plurality of types of images is an operation promotion image that prompts the player to operate the operation means,
A first effect in which the operation promotion image is displayed in a state where the operation means image is not displayed on the display means,
After the first effect, a second effect in which the operation means image is displayed can be executed,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Mode B1-2]
The gaming machine described in Aspect B1-1,
Equipped with sub-display means that can display multiple types of images,
In the first effect, the operation promotion image is displayed across the sub display unit and the display unit, and then is reduced and displayed on the display unit.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Mode B1-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect B1-2,
The sub display means is provided on both sides of the display means,
In the first effect, the operation promotion image is displayed across both of the sub display unit and the display unit, and then is reduced and displayed on the display unit.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Mode B1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-1 to B1-3,
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
In the first effect, after the operation promotion image is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative pattern that is temporarily stopped in the reach state, it is reduced and displayed at a position that does not overlap with the decorative pattern. Amusement machine.
◇ [Mode B1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-1 to B1-4,
After the second effect, the operation means image and the operation promotion image are both reduced and displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Mode B1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-1 to B1-5,
After the second effect, on the back side of the operation means image, a specific image whose mode changes in association with the operation of the operation means by the player is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The component assembly effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 89 to 91. 89 to 91, for example, the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and other movable accessory disposed around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are easy to see in the drawings. There are some that have been omitted.

This component assembly effect is performed during the variation effect (during variation display) by the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (for example, variation effect start command) received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute a specific area variable effect, the corresponding image from the ROM 103. The data is read and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the sub display screen 64 (the right sub display screen 64R, the left sub display screen 64L, and the upper sub display screen 64U).

Here, the component assembly effect A will be described first, and then the component assembly effect B and the component assembly effect C will be sequentially described.

[Parts assembly production A]
The component assembly effect A will be described with reference to FIG. 89. FIG. 89 is a diagram for explaining the component assembly effect A. The component assembly effect A is performed during the variation effect (during variation display) by the decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 89(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left decorative design 8L of the stereoscopic image, a middle decorative design 8C of the stereoscopic image, and a right decorative design 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. In the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side, the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (symbol: the number “1” to the number “9”) is started. At this time, the decorative design is not displayed on the right sub display screen 64R and the left sub display screen 64L.

When the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative design is started, the display of the decorative design that is stopped and displayed changes from the opaque state to the translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed to the high speed display mode. .. Thereby, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semitransparent decorative pattern which is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped). Note that the decorative pattern is in a display mode in which the decorative pattern moves in small increments in the vertical direction when the temporary stop display is performed.

The variation icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, which are currently changing as the end of the first special map reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (on the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (on the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad from the position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The reserved display positions 9Ad are arranged and displayed linearly along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

Here, a white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, a white spherical retention icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and second hold display positions 9Ad to fourth hold are displayed. The hold icon is not displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one stocked icon that has not been digested for the hold icon. In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting opening 20 and the second starting opening 21.

In addition, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbol, is supported. In addition to the hold icon 9A, which corresponds to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 The special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21 are arranged and displayed as unillustrated numbers on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 is shown in blue on the left side, and the number of the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21 is shown in red. The numbers are arranged on the upper side of the center of the display screen 7a so as to be spaced apart from each other on the right side and are always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as the number of reserved balls as numerical values, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and it is easy to intuitively understand. Note that these numbers are arranged on the forefront side of the display screen 7a and other images are displayed behind the foreground of the display screen 7a so that visibility is not hindered by the other images. It is like this.

Here, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “icon”) will be briefly described. Due to the difference in shape and color, the difference in expectation in winning in the lottery corresponding to the icon. Is represented. For example, of the four icons, a yellow (gold) star icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest likelihood of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hit, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hit, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hit. The smile sphere icon is further set to have a high expectation of being a jackpot in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (Rainbow (hit jackpot)).

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started in FIG. 89(A), thereafter, as shown in FIG. 89(B), the right sub display screen 64R and the left sub display screen 64L are displayed on the image display device 7. The right sub display screen 64R, the left sub display screen 64L, and the image display device 7 are displayed in a display mode in which five part images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG simulating the sword member 65 are gathered toward the center of the display screen 7a. Each is displayed on the display screen 7a. The five component images PT1 to PT5 are based on silver (silver). At this time, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, the change icon 9C, and the hold icon 9A all disappear from the display screen 7a.

As described above, the sword member 65 is an operation unit that imitates the shape of a sword, and can be pushed downward by the player at the time of performance executed as the game progresses. Therefore, the sword member 65 is a movable portion that allows the player to push the entire sword member downward. A sword button (not shown) is provided at the upper end of the sword member 65, that is, the end of the handle of the sword. The sword button is an operation unit, and is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of performance performed as the game progresses.

Of the five component images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG, the component image PT1 moves from the left side of the left sub display screen 64L into the left sub display screen 64L and moves toward the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The component image PT2 enters the right sub display screen 64R from the right side of the right sub display screen 64R and moves toward the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the component image PT3 becomes The display mode is such that the display image 7a enters the display screen 7a from the lower right of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and moves toward the center, and the component image PT4 moves from the upper left of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to the display screen 7a. The display mode is such that the part image PT5 enters and moves toward the center, and the part image PT5 enters the left sub display screen 64L from the left side of the left sub display screen 64L and moves toward the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It becomes a mode.

After that, as shown in FIG. 89C, the five part images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG have a left sub display screen 64L, a display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and a right sub display screen 64R as the part image PT1. It is in a state of being arranged near the lower center of each display screen straddling. The component image PT2 is in a state of being arranged in the upper center of each display screen across the left sub display screen 64L, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right sub display screen 64R. The part image PT3 is in a state of being arranged near the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and eventually the display screen of the image display device 7 does not go through the left sub display screen 64L and the right sub display screen 64R. It is displayed directly on 7a. The component image PT4 is placed near the center of the upper side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and in the end, the display screen of the image display device 7 does not go through the left sub display screen 64L and the right sub display screen 64R. It is displayed directly on 7a. The part image PT5 is placed in the center of the left sub display screen 64L, and eventually the left sub display screen 64L does not extend from the left sub display screen 64L to the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the right sub display screen 64R. Displayed directly on 64L. Note that the component image PT1 is arranged in the lower center of each display screen across the left sub display screen 64L, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right sub display screen 64R while rotating three-dimensionally. Becomes Also, the component image PT2 is arranged in the upper center of each display screen across the left sub display screen 64L, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the right sub display screen 64R while rotating three-dimensionally. Becomes The component images PT1 to PT5 are moving so as not to interfere with each other.

After that, when the five component images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG are moved in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 89(D), the sword image KG in a horizontally tilted state. Is assembled. The assembled sword image KG is silver (silver) because the five component images PT1 to PT5 are based on silver (silver), and the shape of the handle is a smooth surface. There is. When the sword image KG is assembled, the sizes of the component images PT1 to PT5 shown in FIGS. 89(B) and (C) become smaller, and the assembled sword image KG is shown in FIGS. 89(B) and (C). The size is smaller than the sizes of the component images PT1 to PT5 shown in.

Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 89E and 89F, the sword image KG in the horizontally tilted state is rotated clockwise so that the end of the handle of the sword faces upward to rotate the sword image KG. The sword image KG is moved downward so that the end of the handle of the sword is located at the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the end of the handle of the sword in the sword image KG (the sword button KBG The display part emits light.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 89(G), the sword image KG is enlarged, and the end portion of the sword handle in the sword image KG is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, the operation (press) of the sword button (the sword button KBG provided at the end of the sword handle in the sword image KG) provided at the upper end portion of the sword member 65, that is, the end of the sword handle is prompted. A message MG "Press here" is displayed near the upper side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The message MG is configured by being divided into three characters "here" and two characters "press", and "here" without covering the sword image KG to the left of the sword button KBG of the sword image KG. 3 characters are arranged, and the two characters “press” are arranged to the right of the sword button KBG of the sword image KG without covering the sword image KG. By arranging in this manner, it is possible to emphasize the content of “press here” to prompt the operation (press) of the sword button of the sword member 65 in a manner that is easy for the player to understand without the visibility of the sword image KG being hindered. Further, it is possible to emphasize the position of the sword button KBG of the sword image KG which imitates the sword button of the sword member 65 which is the operation target in an easy-to-understand manner for the player without the message MG hindering the visibility. it can.

An indicator image IG indicating a period for accepting an operation (press) of the sword button of the sword member 65 (hereinafter, referred to as an “operation acceptance period”) shows a part of the sword image KG (specifically, a part of the handle of the sword). The image is displayed near the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 so as to cover it. By arranging in this manner, the indicator image IG is not obstructed by the sword image KG, and the operation acceptance period can be emphasized and transmitted to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

When the player operates (presses) the sword button of the sword member 65 or when the player does not operate (press) the sword button of the sword member 65 and the operation acceptance period elapses, the left decorative pattern 8L Is stopped and displayed with the number "5", the middle decorative design 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "6", and the right decorative design 8R is stopped and displayed with the number "7", which is out of alignment. At this time, the change display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the change icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the change. Subsequently, the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd to become the change icon 9C, and the change effect by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R (Variable display) will be started.

[Part assembly production B]
Next, the parts assembly effect B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 90 is a diagram for explaining the component assembly effect B. The component assembly effect B is performed during the variable effect (during the variable display) by the decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 90(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative design 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative design 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. In the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side, the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (symbol: the number “1” to the number “9”) is started. At this time, the decorative design is not displayed on the right sub display screen 64R and the left sub display screen 64L.

When the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative design is started, the display of the decorative design that is stopped and displayed changes from the opaque state to the translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed to the high speed display mode. .. Thereby, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semitransparent decorative pattern which is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped). Note that the decorative pattern is in a display mode in which the decorative pattern moves in small increments in the vertical direction when the temporary stop display is performed.

The variation icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, which are currently changing as the end of the first special map reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (on the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (on the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad from the position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The reserved display positions 9Ad are arranged and displayed linearly along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

Here, a white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, a white spherical retention icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and second hold display positions 9Ad to fourth hold are displayed. The hold icon is not displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one stocked icon that has not been digested for the hold icon. In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting opening 20 and the second starting opening 21.

In addition, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbol, is supported. In addition to the hold icon 9A, which corresponds to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 The special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21 are arranged and displayed as unillustrated numbers on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 is shown in blue on the left side, and the number of the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21 is shown in red. The numbers are arranged on the upper side of the center of the display screen 7a so as to be spaced apart from each other on the right side and are always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as the number of reserved balls as numerical values, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and it is easy to intuitively understand. Note that these numbers are arranged on the forefront side of the display screen 7a and other images are displayed behind the foreground of the display screen 7a so that visibility is not hindered by the other images. It is like this.

Here, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “icon”) will be briefly described. Due to the difference in shape and color, the difference in expectation in winning in the lottery corresponding to the icon. Is represented. For example, of the four icons, a yellow (gold) star icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest likelihood of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hit, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hit, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hit. The smile sphere icon is further set to have a high expectation of being a jackpot in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (Rainbow (hit jackpot)).

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started in FIG. 90(A), thereafter, as shown in FIG. 90(B), the right sub display screen 64R and the left sub display screen 64L are displayed on the image display device 7. The right sub display screen 64R, the left sub display screen 64L, and the image display device 7 are displayed in a display mode in which five part images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG simulating the sword member 65 are gathered toward the center of the display screen 7a. Each is displayed on the display screen 7a. The five component images PT1 to PT5 are based on silver (silver). At this time, the change icon 9C changes from a white spherical icon to a yellow (gold) star icon, while the change display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A are displayed on the display screen 7a. Disappear. Thus, by displaying only the variable icon 9C that has become a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, the variable icon 9C can be emphasized in an easy-to-understand manner. Note that, here, the variation icon 9C is arranged on the most front side on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 so that the visibility is not hindered by other images.

As described above, the sword member 65 is an operation unit that imitates the shape of a sword, and can be pushed downward by the player at the time of performance executed as the game progresses. Therefore, the sword member 65 is a movable portion that allows the player to push the entire sword member downward. A sword button (not shown) is provided at the upper end of the sword member 65, that is, the end of the handle of the sword. The sword button is an operation unit, and is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of performance performed as the game progresses.

Of the five component images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG, the component image PT1 moves from the left side of the left sub display screen 64L into the left sub display screen 64L and moves toward the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The component image PT2 enters the right sub display screen 64R from the right side of the right sub display screen 64R and moves toward the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the component image PT3 becomes The display mode is such that the display image 7a enters the display screen 7a from the lower right of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and moves toward the center, and the component image PT4 moves from the upper left of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to the display screen 7a. The display mode is such that the part image PT5 enters and moves toward the center, and the part image PT5 enters the left sub display screen 64L from the left side of the left sub display screen 64L and moves toward the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It becomes a mode.

Thereafter, the five component images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG are displayed on the left sub display screen 64L, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the right sub display screen 64R as shown in FIG. 90(C). The display screen is arranged in the lower center of each display screen. The component image PT2 is in a state of being arranged in the upper center of each display screen across the left sub display screen 64L, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right sub display screen 64R. The part image PT3 is in a state of being arranged near the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and eventually the display screen of the image display device 7 does not go through the left sub display screen 64L and the right sub display screen 64R. It is displayed directly on 7a. The component image PT4 is placed near the center of the upper side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and in the end, the display screen of the image display device 7 does not go through the left sub display screen 64L and the right sub display screen 64R. It is displayed directly on 7a. The part image PT5 is placed in the center of the left sub display screen 64L, and eventually the left sub display screen 64L does not extend from the left sub display screen 64L to the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the right sub display screen 64R. Displayed directly on 64L. At this time, the state in which the yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon 9C is displayed is maintained.

Note that the component image PT1 is arranged in the lower center of each display screen across the left sub display screen 64L, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right sub display screen 64R while rotating three-dimensionally. Becomes Also, the component image PT2 is arranged in the upper center of each display screen across the left sub display screen 64L, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the right sub display screen 64R while rotating three-dimensionally. Becomes The component images PT1 to PT5 are moving so as not to interfere with each other.

After that, when the five component images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG are moved in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. Is assembled. The assembled sword image KG is silver (silver) because the five component images PT1 to PT5 are based on silver (silver), and the shape of the handle is a smooth surface. There is. When the sword image KG is assembled, the sizes of the component images PT1 to PT5 shown in FIGS. 90(B) and 90(C) are reduced, and the assembled sword image KG is shown in FIGS. 90(B) and 90(C). The size is smaller than the sizes of the component images PT1 to PT5 shown in. At this time, the state in which the yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon 9C is displayed is maintained.

Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 90(E) and 90(F), the end of the handle of the sword in the sword image KG in the sideways state is rotated clockwise so as to face upward, and then the sword is moved. The display mode is such that the entire image KG is further reduced and arranged in the center of the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. At this time, the state in which the yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon 9C is displayed is maintained.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 90(G), the sword image KG is enlarged this time, and the entire sword image KG is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. At this time, a message MG of "pushing in" prompting an operation (pushing in) of pushing the entire sword member 65 downward is displayed near the upper side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The message MG is configured by being divided into two characters of “push” and two characters of “push”, and two characters “push” are arranged on the left side of the sword image KG without covering the sword image KG. , 2 characters "Put" are arranged to the right of the sword image KG without covering the sword image KG. By arranging in this manner, the content of urging the operation of pushing in the entire sword member 65 called "pushing in" (pushing in) can be emphasized to the player in an easy-to-understand manner without hindering the visibility of the sword image KG. In addition, the sword image KG simulating the sword member 65 that is the operation target can be easily emphasized by the player without the message MG hindering the visibility.

An indicator image IG indicating a period for accepting an operation (push-in) of pushing the entire sword member 65 downward (hereinafter, referred to as “operation acceptance period”) is a part of the sword image KG (specifically, a part of the sword handle). Is displayed near the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 so as to cover. By arranging in this manner, the indicator image IG is not obstructed by the sword image KG, and the operation acceptance period can be emphasized and transmitted to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. Note that, also in FIG. 90G, the state in which the yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon 9C is displayed is maintained.

When the player performs an operation (pushing) of pushing the entire sword member 65 downward, or when the operation acceptance period elapses without the operation (pushing) of pushing the entire sword member 65 downward by the player, FIG. As shown in (H), the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 while emitting the flash light FH. At this time, the yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Then, as shown in FIG. 90(I), the battle effect is started. In the battle effect, two characters (an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB) fight each other, and the effect of expecting a jackpot is high. In the battle effect, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, the change icon 9C, and the hold icon 9A are maintained in a state of disappearing from the display screen 7a.

When the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB is defeated, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are stopped and displayed with the same design, and the big hit is followed by the big hit game (big hit production). On the other hand, when the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are not stopped and displayed in the same design, and are lost. When the battle effect is finished and the jackpot or the deviation is confirmed, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the change icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the change. .. Subsequently, the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd to become the change icon 9C, and the change effect by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R (Variable display) will be started.

[Part assembly performance C]
Next, the component assembly effect C will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 91 is a diagram for explaining the component assembly effect C. The component assembly effect C is performed during the variable effect (during the variable display) by the decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 91(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left decorative design 8L of the stereoscopic image, a middle decorative design 8C of the stereoscopic image, and a right decorative design 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. In the display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side, the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (symbol: the number “1” to the number “9”) is started. At this time, the decorative design is not displayed on the right sub display screen 64R and the left sub display screen 64L.

When the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative design is started, the display of the decorative design that is stopped and displayed changes from the opaque state to the translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed to the high speed display mode. .. Thereby, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semitransparent decorative pattern which is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped). Note that the decorative pattern is in a display mode in which the decorative pattern moves in small increments in the vertical direction when the temporary stop display is performed.

The variation icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, which are currently changing as the end of the first special map reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (on the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (on the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad from the position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The reserved display positions 9Ad are arranged and displayed linearly along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

Here, a white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, a white spherical retention icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and second hold display positions 9Ad to fourth hold are displayed. The hold icon is not displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one stocked icon that has not been digested for the hold icon. In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting opening 20 and the second starting opening 21.

In addition, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbol, is supported. In addition to the hold icon 9A, which corresponds to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 The special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21 are arranged and displayed as unillustrated numbers on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 is shown in blue on the left side, and the number of the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21 is shown in red. The numbers are arranged on the upper side of the center of the display screen 7a so as to be spaced apart from each other on the right side and are always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as the number of reserved balls as numerical values, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and it is easy to intuitively understand. Note that these numbers are arranged on the forefront side of the display screen 7a and other images are displayed behind the foreground of the display screen 7a so that visibility is not hindered by the other images. It is like this.

Here, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “icon”) will be briefly described. Due to the difference in shape and color, the difference in expectation in winning in the lottery corresponding to the icon. Is represented. For example, of the four icons, a yellow (gold) star icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest likelihood of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hit, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hit, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hit. The smile sphere icon is further set to have a high expectation of being a jackpot in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (Rainbow (hit jackpot)).

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started in FIG. 91(A), thereafter, as shown in FIG. 91(B), the right sub display screen 64R and the left sub display screen 64L are displayed on the image display device 7. The right sub display screen 64R, the left sub display screen 64L, and the image display device 7 are displayed in a display mode in which five part images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG simulating the sword member 65 are gathered toward the center of the display screen 7a. Each is displayed on the display screen 7a. The five component images PT1 to PT5 are based on silver (silver). At this time, the change icon 9C changes from a white spherical icon to a yellow (gold) star icon, while the change display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A are displayed on the display screen 7a. Disappear. Thus, by displaying only the variable icon 9C that has become a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, the variable icon 9C can be emphasized in an easy-to-understand manner. Note that, here, the variation icon 9C is arranged on the most front side on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 so that the visibility is not hindered by other images.

As described above, the sword member 65 is an operation unit that imitates the shape of a sword, and can be pushed downward by the player at the time of performance executed as the game progresses. Therefore, the sword member 65 is a movable portion that allows the player to push the entire sword member downward. A sword button (not shown) is provided at the upper end of the sword member 65, that is, the end of the handle of the sword. The sword button is an operation unit, and is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of performance performed as the game progresses.

Of the five component images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG, the component image PT1 moves from the left side of the left sub display screen 64L into the left sub display screen 64L and moves toward the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The component image PT2 enters the right sub display screen 64R from the right side of the right sub display screen 64R and moves toward the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the component image PT3 becomes The display mode is such that the display image 7a enters the display screen 7a from the lower right of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and moves toward the center, and the component image PT4 moves from the upper left of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to the display screen 7a. The display mode is such that the part image PT5 enters and moves toward the center, and the part image PT5 enters the left sub display screen 64L from the left side of the left sub display screen 64L and moves toward the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It becomes a mode.

Thereafter, the five component images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG are displayed on the left sub display screen 64L, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right sub display screen 64R as shown in FIG. 91(C). The display screen is arranged in the lower center of each display screen. The component image PT2 is in a state of being arranged in the upper center of each display screen across the left sub display screen 64L, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right sub display screen 64R. The part image PT3 is in a state of being arranged near the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and eventually the display screen of the image display device 7 does not go through the left sub display screen 64L and the right sub display screen 64R. It is displayed directly on 7a. The component image PT4 is placed near the center of the upper side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and in the end, the display screen of the image display device 7 does not go through the left sub display screen 64L and the right sub display screen 64R. It is displayed directly on 7a. The part image PT5 is placed in the center of the left sub display screen 64L, and eventually the left sub display screen 64L does not extend from the left sub display screen 64L to the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the right sub display screen 64R. Displayed directly on 64L. At this time, the state in which the yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon 9C is displayed is maintained.

Note that the component image PT1 is arranged in the lower center of each display screen across the left sub display screen 64L, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right sub display screen 64R while rotating three-dimensionally. Becomes Also, the component image PT2 is arranged in the upper center of each display screen across the left sub display screen 64L, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the right sub display screen 64R while rotating three-dimensionally. Becomes The component images PT1 to PT5 are moving so as not to interfere with each other.

After that, when the five component images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG are moved in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. Is assembled. The assembled sword image KG is silver (silver) because the five component images PT1 to PT5 are based on silver (silver), and the shape of the handle is a smooth surface. There is. When the sword image KG is assembled, the sizes of the component images PT1 to PT5 shown in FIGS. 91(B) and 91(C) are reduced, and the assembled sword image KG is shown in FIGS. 91(B) and 91(C). The size is smaller than the sizes of the component images PT1 to PT5 shown in. At this time, the state in which the yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon 9C is displayed is maintained.

Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 91(E) and (F), the end portion of the sword handle in the sword image KG in the sideways state is rotated clockwise so as to face upward, and then the sword is rotated. The display mode is such that the entire image KG is further reduced and arranged in the center of the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. At this time, the state in which the yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon 9C is displayed is maintained.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 91(G), this time, the sword image KG is enlarged and the entire sword image KG is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. Then, in order to disassemble the assembled sword image KG, the procedure so far is returned one by one, in the manner shown in FIG. 91(F)→FIG. 91(E)→FIG. 91(D)→FIG. 91(C) (FIG. 91). (H)) (FIG. 91(H) is the same view as FIG. 91(C)), and the component images PT1 to PT5 appear. Even in the case where such a procedure is returned one by one, the state in which the yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon 9C is displayed is maintained.

Then, again, in order to assemble the sword image KG from the component images PT1 to PT5, the procedure so far is advanced step by step in FIG. 91(C) (FIG. 91(H))→FIG. 91(D)→FIG. 91. (E)→FIG. 91(F), and subsequently, as shown in FIG. 91(I), the sword image KG is enlarged again, and the entire sword image KG is displayed at the center of the display screen 7 a of the image display device 7. It is displayed large. Even in a mode in which such a procedure is advanced one by one, the state in which the yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon 9C is displayed is maintained. The color and pattern of the sword image KG displayed in FIG. 91(G) are silver (silver) because the five component images PT1 to PT5 are based on silver (silver). Also, the shape of the handle is a smooth surface. On the other hand, the color and pattern shape of the sword image KG displayed in FIG. 91(I) change from silver (silver) to gold (gold), and the pattern shape is wound from a smooth surface with a rope. It will be broken and change into a shape with irregularities. That is, the color and pattern shape of the sword image KG displayed in FIG. 91(G) are different from the color and pattern shape of the sword image KG displayed in FIG. 91(I). This is an easy-to-understand and emphasized suggestion that the expectation for jackpots has increased.

In FIG. 91(I), further, a message MG of "pushing in" prompting an operation (pushing in) of pushing the entire sword member 65 downward is displayed near the upper side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The message MG is configured by being divided into two characters of “push” and two characters of “push”, and two characters “push” are arranged on the left side of the sword image KG without covering the sword image KG. , 2 characters "Put" are arranged to the right of the sword image KG without covering the sword image KG. By arranging in this manner, the content of urging the operation of pushing in the entire sword member 65 called "pushing in" (pushing in) can be emphasized to the player in an easy-to-understand manner without hindering the visibility of the sword image KG. In addition, the sword image KG simulating the sword member 65 that is the operation target can be easily emphasized by the player without the message MG hindering the visibility.

An indicator image IG indicating a period for accepting an operation (push-in) of pushing the entire sword member 65 downward (hereinafter, referred to as “operation acceptance period”) is a part of the sword image KG (specifically, a part of the sword handle). Is displayed near the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 so as to cover. By arranging in this manner, the indicator image IG is not obstructed by the sword image KG, and the operation acceptance period can be emphasized and transmitted to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

When the player performs an operation (pushing) of pushing the entire sword member 65 downward, or when the operation acceptance period elapses without the player performing an operation (pushing) of pushing the entire sword member 65 downward, FIG. As shown in (J), the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 while emitting the flash FH. At this time, the yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Then, as shown in FIG. 91(K), a battle effect is started. In the battle effect, two characters (an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB) fight each other, and the effect of expecting a jackpot is high. In the battle effect, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, the change icon 9C, and the hold icon 9A are maintained in a state of disappearing from the display screen 7a.

When the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB is defeated, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are stopped and displayed with the same design, and the big hit is followed by the big hit game (big hit production). On the other hand, when the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are not stopped and displayed in the same design, and are lost. When the battle effect is finished and the jackpot or the deviation is confirmed, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the change icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the change. .. Subsequently, the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd to become the change icon 9C, and the change effect by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R (Variable display) will be started.

[Effect example]
Below, the example of an effect of parts assembly production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, in the component assembly effect A of FIG. 89, the component assembly effect B of FIG. 90, and the component assembly effect C of FIG. The sub display screen 64R and the left sub display screen 64L (having a plurality of display means), the image display device 7, the right sub display screen 64R and the left sub display screen 64L (a plurality of display means) have the image display device 7 (main display). Means) and one or more right sub-display screen 64R and left sub-display screen 64L (sub-display means) excluding the image display device 7 (main display means), and a sword member 65 (operable by the player) The part images PT1 to PT5 (parts) of the sword image KG (operation part image) imitating the operation part) are displayed from the right sub display screen 64R and the left sub display screen 64L (sub display part) to the image display device 7 (main display part). The first effect moving toward (FIGS. 89(B) and (C) for the component assembly effect A, FIGS. 90(B) and (C) for the component assembly effect B, and FIG. 91(B) for the component assembly effect C). , (C)) and the first effect, the second effect for assembling the component images PT1 to PT5 (components) in the image display device 7 (main display means) to complete the sword image KG (operation means image). (FIG. 89(D) can be executed in the component assembly effect A, FIG. 90(D) can be executed in the component assembly effect B, and FIG. 91(D) can be executed in the component assembly effect C. With this configuration. According to this, the component images PT1 to PT5 (components) of the sword image KG (operating means image) simulating the sword member 65 (operating means) are displayed on the image display device 7, the right sub display screen 64R, and the left sub display screen 64L (plurality). It is possible to provide the player with an unprecedented novel effect of assembling the sword image KG (operation means image) by using the display means) of the sword image KG.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, in the second effect in the parts assembly effect A of FIG. 89, the parts assembly effect B of FIG. 90, and the parts assembly effect C of FIG. 91, the image display device 7 (main display means). A part of the component images PT1 to PT5 (components) displayed in is projected and displayed on the right sub display screen 64R and the left sub display screen 64L (sub display means). According to this configuration, the component images PT1 to PT5 (components) are displayed in a large size using the image display device 7 (main display means), and further the right sub display screen 64R and the left sub display screen 64L (sub display means). Therefore, it is possible to contribute to what kind of parts the sword member 65 is actually composed of by emphasizing and communicating it to the player.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the right sub display screen 64R and the left sub display in the first production in the component assembly production A of FIG. 89, the component assembly production B of FIG. 90, and the component assembly production C of FIG. The component images PT4 and PT5 (components) are directly displayed on the image display device 7 (main display unit) without using the screen 64L (sub display unit). According to this configuration, the component images PT1 to PT5 (components) are displayed on the image display device 7 (main display unit) via the right sub display screen 64R and the left sub display screen 64L (sub display unit). There is a component image PT1 and a component directly displayed on the image display device 7 (main display unit) without going through the right sub display screen 64R and the left sub display screen 64L (sub display unit). It is possible to give variety in the direction in which the PT5 (component) enters the image display device 7 (main display means). In other words, various effects by the component images PT1 to PT5 (components) are dealt with by using the image display device 7 (main display means), the right sub display screen 64R and the left sub display screen 64L (sub display means). Can be emphasized.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, the sword member 65 (operating means) is imitated in the second effect in the parts assembly effect A of FIG. 89, the parts assembly effect B of FIG. 90, and the parts assembly effect C of FIG. 91. When the completed sword image KG (operation means image) is completed, the size of the sword image KG (operation means image) is displayed in a large size, and a message MG (operation promotion image) prompting operation of the sword member 65 (operation means) is displayed. It is supposed to be displayed. According to this configuration, the size of the sword image KG (operation means image) is displayed in a large size, in other words, the sword image KG (operation means image) is enlarged and displayed, and further, the sword member 65 (operation means) is displayed. Since a message MG (operation promotion image) prompting the operation is displayed, the player is informed of the timing of the start of the operation timing of the sword member 65 (operation means) in an easy-to-understand manner, and the action that the player will perform from now on is played. Can be emphasized to others.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the sword member 65 (operation means) is operated in the second effect in the parts assembly effect A of FIG. 89, the parts assembly effect B of FIG. 90, and the parts assembly effect C of FIG. 91, for example. Then, the sword image KG (operation means image) disappears. With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the operation of the sword member 65 (operating means) has been accepted.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the second production in the component assembly production A of FIG. 89, the component assembly production B of FIG. 90, and the component assembly production C of FIG. 91, the operation of the sword member 65 (operating means). An indicator image IG (acceptance period image) indicating the acceptance period is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can grasp the remaining time of the period for accepting the operation of the sword member 65 (operating means), and therefore can operate the sword member 65 (operating means) at his or her own timing. You can

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the second effect in the parts assembly effect A of FIG. 89, the end of the handle of the sword (including the sword button KBG) in the sword image KG of the sword image KG (operation means image). A display mode in which (part) (part) emits light can be provided. According to this configuration, it is possible to contribute to making it easier for the player to recognize which part of the sword member 65 (operating means) that the sword image KG (operating means image) imitates. ..

[Modification]
The following is a modification of the specific area variable effect.
[Modification 1]
In the parts assembly effect A of FIG. 89, the parts assembly effect B of FIG. 90, and the parts assembly effect C of FIG. In other words, it was performed in a so-called left-handed gaming state. However, it may be performed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second starting opening 21. In other words, it may be performed in a so-called right-handed gaming state.

[Modification 2]
In the parts assembly effect A of FIG. 89, the parts assembly effect B of FIG. 90, and the parts assembly effect C of FIG. 91, the sword image KG simulating the sword member 65 is assembled from the part images PT1 to PT5. However, instead of the sword member 65, the decorative design may be assembled from a plurality of images. For example, when the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same design (for example, the number "7"), and the middle decorative design 8C is being varied (during variable display), the reach is formed. In order to assemble the middle decoration pattern 8C, the image display device 7, the right sub display screen 64R and the left sub display screen 64L (a plurality of display means) are used from all sides to the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, A plurality of fragment images may be gathered, and finally, the big hit or the deviation may be fixedly displayed by the assembled middle decoration pattern 8C. In this case, while the medium decorative pattern 8C is being assembled, the color of the medium decorative pattern 8C is changed (for example, changed to red or changed to rainbow) and the expectation degree of the jackpot is determined by the player. May be suggested.

[Modification 3]
In the parts assembly effect A of FIG. 89, the parts assembly effect B of FIG. 90, and the parts assembly effect C of FIG. 91, the sword image KG simulating the sword member 65 is assembled from the part images PT1 to PT5. However, instead of the sword member 65, other members arranged on the game board 2 or the front frame 53 may be used. For example, images that imitate the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and other movable accessory arranged on the game board 2 may be assembled from the component images, or may be arranged on the front frame 53. An image simulating the handle 60 may be assembled from the component images. By doing this, it is possible to increase the variation of production. In addition, a plurality of sword members 65, a handle 60, a first movable accessory 14, a second movable accessory 15, and other movable accessories are prepared as members to be assembled, and the jackpot expectations are set in advance. You may do it. In this way, it is possible for the player to find out the relationship between the members to be assembled and the expectation of the jackpot.

[Modification 4]
In the parts assembly effect A of FIG. 89, the parts assembly effect B of FIG. 90, and the parts assembly effect C of FIG. 91, the sword image KG simulating the sword member 65 is assembled from the component images PT1 to PT5, and then the image display device 7 The left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a, and the result of the winning/deciding determination (big hit or out) is transmitted to the player. However, in the case where a component assembly effect of assembling the sword image KG simulating the sword member 65 with the component images PT1 to PT5 is performed, the result of the winning determination (big hit, or An image indicating a suggestion image that suggests "disappearance" to the player (for example, when suggesting a jackpot, a ally character in the form of a wingman is displayed, and when suggesting detachment, an enemy character is displayed). 7, the right sub display screen 64R and the left sub display screen 64L may be displayed on any one of the display screens. When a component assembly production is performed, the development of the production after that is an important concern to the player, so the player should predict how the production will be developed by the appearance of the suggestive image. In addition, it is possible for the player to find out the relevance and rules of the parts assembly effect and the subsequent effects.

[Modification 5]
In the parts assembly effect A of FIG. 89, the parts assembly effect B of FIG. 90, and the parts assembly effect C of FIG. 91, the sword image KG simulating the sword member 65 is assembled from the part images PT1 to PT5. However, instead of the sword member 65, an effect button image simulating the effect button 63 can be assembled with component images, or a lever image simulating the lever provided on the front frame 53 can be assembled with component images. You can also do it. By doing this, it is possible to increase the variation of production. The lever provided on the front frame 53 may be a joystick or a rotary lever, and can be operated by the player at the time of performance executed as the game progresses.

[Modification 6]
In the parts assembly effect A of FIG. 89, the parts assembly effect B of FIG. 90, and the parts assembly effect C of FIG. 91, the sword image KG simulating the sword member 65 is assembled from the part images PT1 to PT5. However, an operation unit different from the sword member 65 may be displayed on any one of the image display device 7, the right sub display screen 64R, and the left sub display screen 64L. For example, a select button image simulating the select button 68 as an operation unit different from the sword member 65 is displayed on any one of the image display device 7, the right sub display screen 64R, and the left sub display screen 64L. You may Unlike the sword image KG which imitates the sword member 65, the select button image is not assembled by the component image in the component assembly production, but the production mode is changed (for example, in the spring mode, summer mode, autumn mode and winter mode). The player is informed that the change to any one of the modes can be performed (accepted) at the player's timing. That is, when the select button image is displayed, the effect mode can be changed (accepted) at the player's timing. The sword image KG simulating the sword member 65 and the select button image simulating the select button 68 are simultaneously displayed separately on any one of the image display device 7, the right sub display screen 64R and the left sub display screen 64L. May be displayed or displayed on the same display screen. As described above, among the sword member 65 and the select button 68 that can be operated by the player, the sword member 65 that is assembled by the component image in the component assembly effect, and the select button 68 that cannot be assembled by the component image in the component assembly effect. However, even if the sword image KG is displayed, the operation of the sword member 65 is as shown in FIG. 89(G) for the component assembly effect A, 90(G) for the component assembly effect B, and FIG. 91 for the component assembly effect C. (I) The operation is not accepted unless the indicator image IG is displayed, whereas the operation of the select button 68 is different in that it is accepted when the select button image is displayed. Even if the sword member 65 and the select button 68 happen to be displayed at the same time, the sword member 65 and the select button 68 as the operation unit can be selectively used in the production.

[Modification 7]
In the component assembly effect B of FIGS. 90(B) to (G) and the component assembly effect C of FIGS. 91(B) to (I), the white spherical variation icon 9C to the yellow (gold) star variation icon. It changed to 9C and was displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, for example, a moving image display mode in which the star-shaped variation icon 9C contracts or extends vertically so as to bounce up and down, or a moving image display in which it rotates around may be used. By doing so, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the effect of the display of the change icon 9C.

[Modification 8]
In the component assembly effect B of FIGS. 90(B) to (G) and the component assembly effect C of FIGS. 91(B) to (I), the white spherical variation icon 9C to the yellow (gold) star variation icon. It changed to 9C and was displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, the size of the variation icon 9C may be increased by a predetermined number (for example, about 5 to 8 times) larger than the size of the white spherical icon. This makes it possible for the player to emphasize the change of the change icon 9C in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Modification 9]
In the parts assembly effect A of FIG. 89, the parts assembly effect B of FIG. 90, and the parts assembly effect C of FIG. 91, the first special figure hold and the second starting opening 21 based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20. The second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into is displayed as a numeral not shown in the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, respectively. Since these numbers are displayed as the number of holding balls as numerical values, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish them by being confused with various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, since the image is arranged on the forefront side of the display screen 7a and the other image is displayed behind the foreground of the display screen 7a, the visibility is not hindered by the other image. It was In the present embodiment, when the parts assembly effect is started, thereafter, the five parts images PT1 to PT5 of the sword image KG are moved in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to assemble the sword image KG. This may cause the player to misunderstand the number (the number of reserved balls) arranged and displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a as the total number of component images forming the sword image KG. Therefore, in place of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, one of the sub display screens 64 (the right sub display screen 64R, the left sub display screen 64L, and the upper sub display screen 64U is displayed (for example, On the right sub-display screen 64R)), a number displayed with the number of holding balls described above as a numerical value may be displayed. In this way, the number displayed as the number of reserved balls is not misunderstood by the player as the total number of component images forming the sword image KG, and the number of reserved balls is displayed as a number. It is possible to make it easier to intuitively understand the numbers that are displayed because it is difficult to discriminate between the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Modification 10]
The component assembly effect A of FIG. 89, the component assembly effect B of FIG. 90, and the component assembly effect C of FIG. 91 may not include some of the effects described, or may have other effects added. ..

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Mode B2-1]
A gaming machine having a plurality of display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
The display means includes a main display means and one or more sub-display means excluding the main display means,
A first effect in which a component of an operation means image simulating an operation means that can be operated by a player moves from the sub display means toward the main display means,
After the first effect, a second effect of assembling the parts on the main display means to complete the operation means image can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Mode B2-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect B2-1,
In the second effect, a part of the component displayed on the main display unit is displayed on the sub-display unit.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B2-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect B2-1 or aspect B2-2,
In the first effect, there is the component that is directly displayed on the main display means without the sub-display means.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B2-1 to B2-3,
In the second effect, when the operation means image is completed, the size of the operation means image is displayed in a large size, and further, an operation promotion image that prompts the operation of the operation means is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B2-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect B2-4,
In the second effect, when the operation means is operated, the operation means image disappears,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect B2-6]
A gaming machine according to aspect B2-4 or aspect B2-5,
In the second effect, a reception period image showing a period during which the operation of the operation means is received is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by

◇ [Aspect B2-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B2-4 to B2-6,
In the second effect, a display mode in which a part of the operation means image emits light,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The reach decorative design effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94. This reach-time decorative design effect may be executed during the variation effect of the decorative design. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the decorative design effect at reach, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image display device 7 displays. Images are displayed on the display screen 7a, the right sub display screen 64R, and the left sub display screen 64L.

[Decorative design for reach A]
FIG. 92 is a diagram for explaining the decorative design effect A during reach. The reach decorative design is a reach production executed when the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R are in the reach state, and a design different from the reach design is the display screen 7a, the right sub display screen 64R, or the left sub display screen 64L. Is displayed, and then the reach symbol of the decorative symbol is changed to the symbol. First, as shown in FIG. 92(A), in the state where nothing is displayed on the right sub display screen 64R and the left sub display screen 64L, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are in the reach state (here) on the display screen 7a. Then the reach is "2↓2". The left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are displayed on the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a.

At a certain timing, as shown in FIG. 92(B), the symbol 8M is framed in from above the display screen 7a and moves downward. The design 8M is a number (“6” here) different from the reach design (“2” here) of the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R. As shown in FIGS. 92C to 92D, the symbol 8M is enlarged and displayed near the center of the display screen 7a after frame-in.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 92(E), the symbol 8M moves to the left and stops in a state of straddling the left sub display screen 64L and the display screen 7a. At this time, the left side of the symbol 8M is displayed so as to protrude from the left sub display screen 64L. After that, the symbol 8M moves to the right, returns to the inside of the display screen 7a, and further moves to the right, straddling the right sub display screen 64R and the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 92(F). Stop in a crouched state. At this time, the right side of the symbol 8M is displayed outside the right sub display screen 64R. Then, as shown in FIG. 92(G), the symbol 8M disappears (is not displayed) from the three screens of the right sub display screen 64R, the left sub display screen 64L, and the display screen 7a. The left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are continuously displayed on the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a.

Then, as shown in FIG. 92(H), the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R of the reach design move toward the center of the display screen 7a. Then, as shown in FIG. 92(I), the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are switched (changed) to a design (here, “6”) having the same number as the design 8M. Then, as shown in FIG. 92(J), the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R that are in the reach state with the switched numbers move toward the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a and stop there. After that, a predetermined reach effect is executed, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in a winning or losing manner.

[Decorative pattern production at reach B]
FIG. 93 is a diagram for explaining a decorative design effect B during reach. The reach decorative design is a reach production executed when the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R are in the reach state, and a design different from the reach design is the display screen 7a, the right sub display screen 64R, or the left sub display screen 64L. Is displayed, and then the reach symbol of the decorative symbol is changed to the symbol. First, as shown in FIG. 93(A), in the state where nothing is displayed on the right sub display screen 64R and the left sub display screen 64L, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are in the reach state (here Then the reach is "2↓2". The left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are displayed on the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a.

At a certain timing, as shown in FIG. 93(B), a plurality of symbols 8M are framed in from the right side of the right sub display screen 64R and move leftward. The design 8M is a number (“6” here) different from the reach design (“2” here) of the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R. In addition to the left direction, the plurality of symbols 8M also include a symbol 8M that moves in the upper left direction or the lower left direction, and moves radially from the right sub display screen 64R toward the display screen 7a. When moving from the right sub display screen 64R to the display screen 7a, the symbol 8M is temporarily displayed across the right sub display screen 64R and the display screen 7a. The symbol 8M also moves while spreading in the left direction, the upper left direction, and the lower left direction on the display screen 7a.

Then, as shown in FIG. 93(C), the symbol 8M further moves while diffusing from the display screen 7a toward the left sub display screen 64L. When moving from the display screen 7a to the left sub display screen 64L, the symbol 8M is temporarily displayed across the display screen 7a and the left sub display screen 64L. Further, a part of the design 8M temporarily overlaps the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R during the movement. At this time, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are displayed on the front side. The pattern 8M gradually increases in size during movement (enlarged display while moving).

After that, as shown in FIG. 93(D), all of the plurality of symbols 8M are framed out from the three screens of the right sub display screen 64R, the left sub display screen 64L, and the display screen 7a by moving, and the three screens are displayed. Disappear from (not displayed). The left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are continuously displayed on the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 93(E), a plurality of symbols 8M are framed in from below the display screen 7a, and move upward. The design 8M is a number (“6” here) different from the reach design (“2” here) of the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R. In addition to the upward direction, the plurality of symbols 8M also include a symbol 8M that moves in the upper right direction or the upper left direction. In addition to the upward direction of the display screen 7a, the symbols 8M face the right sub display screen 64R or the left sub display screen 64L. Move radially.

As shown in FIG. 93(F), when moving from the display screen 7a to the right sub display screen 64R, the symbol 8M is temporarily displayed across the display screen 7a and the right sub display screen 64R. When moving from the display screen 7a to the left sub display screen 64L, the symbol 8M is temporarily displayed across the display screen 7a and the left sub display screen 64L. Further, a part of the design 8M temporarily overlaps the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R during the movement. At this time, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are displayed on the front side. The pattern 8M gradually increases in size during movement (enlarged display while moving).

After that, as shown in FIG. 93(G), all of the plurality of symbols 8M are framed out from the three screens of the right sub display screen 64R, the left sub display screen 64L, and the display screen 7a by the movement. Then, it disappears (is not displayed) from the three screens. The left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are continuously displayed on the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 93(H), the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R of the reach design move toward the center of the display screen 7a while stereoscopically horizontally rotating. Then, as shown in FIG. 93(I), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped in a state where the left and right sides are reversed at the center of the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 93(J), it is switched (changed) to a symbol having the same number as the symbol 8M (here, “6”). Then, as shown in FIG. 92(J) of the decorative design effect A during reach, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R that are in the reach state with the switched numbers move toward the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a. And stop there. After that, a predetermined reach effect is executed, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in a winning or losing manner.

[Decorative pattern production at reach C]
FIG. 94 is a diagram for explaining the decorative design effect C during reach. The reach decorative design is a reach production executed when the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R are in the reach state, and a design different from the reach design is the display screen 7a, the right sub display screen 64R, or the left sub display screen 64L. Is displayed, and then the reach symbol of the decorative symbol is changed to the symbol. First, as shown in FIG. 93(A) of the decorative design effect A during reach, in the state where nothing is displayed on the right sub display screen 64R and the left sub display screen 64L, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C are displayed on the display screen 7a. , 8R are in the reach state (here, reach of “2↓2”). The left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are displayed on the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a.

At a certain timing, as shown in FIG. 94(A), the symbol 8M is framed in from above the display screen 7a and moves downward. The design 8M is a number (“6” here) different from the reach design (“2” here) of the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R.

As shown in FIGS. 94(B) to 94(C), the symbol 8M is enlarged and displayed near the center of the display screen 7a after being framed in. As a result of this enlarged display, as shown in FIG. 94(C), the left side of the symbol 8M is in a state of straddling the left sub display screen 64L and the display screen 7a, and the right side of the symbol 8M is the right sub display screen 64R. It is in a state of straddling the display screen 7a. Further, the design 8M is overlapped with the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R by the enlarged display. At this time, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are displayed on the front side.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 94(D), the design 8M is enlarged and displayed to some extent, and then disappears (not displayed) from the three screens of the right sub display screen 64R, the left sub display screen 64L, and the display screen 7a. The left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are continuously displayed on the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 94(E), a plurality of symbols 8M are framed in from above the display screen 7a and move downward. The design 8M is a number (“6” here) different from the reach design (“2” here) of the decorative designs 8L, 8C, 8R. In addition to the downward direction, the plurality of symbols 8M also include a symbol 8M that moves in the lower right direction or the lower left direction. In addition to the downward direction of the display screen 7a, the right sub display screen 64R and the left sub display screen 64L Moves radially toward.

As shown in FIG. 94(F), when moving from the display screen 7a to the right sub display screen 64R, the symbol 8M is temporarily displayed across the display screen 7a and the right sub display screen 64R. Further, when the symbol 8M moves from the display screen 7a to the left sub display screen 64L, it is temporarily displayed across the display screen 7a and the left sub display screen 64L. The pattern 8M gradually increases in size during movement (enlarged display while moving).

After that, as shown in FIG. 94(G), all of the plurality of symbols 8M are framed out from the three screens of the right sub display screen 64R, the left sub display screen 64L, and the display screen 7a by the movement. Then, it disappears (is not displayed) from the three screens. The left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are continuously displayed on the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 94(H), the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R of the reach design move toward the center of the display screen 7a. Then, as shown in FIG. 94(I), the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are switched (changed) to a design (here, “6”) having the same number as the design 8M. Then, as shown in FIG. 94(J), the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R that are in the reach state with the switched numbers move toward the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a and stop there. After that, a predetermined reach effect is executed, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in a winning or losing manner.

[Effect example]
Below, the example of the effect of the decorative pattern production at the time of reach is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 94, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the reach state with the first symbol (for example, “2”) on the display screen 7a, A first effect in which a second symbol different from the symbol 1 (for example, symbol 8M representing "6") is displayed on the display screen 7a, and after the first effect, the second symbol is the right sub display screen. The second effect displayed on 64R and, after the second effect, the third effect in which the decorative symbol in the reach state is changed from the first symbol to the second symbol can be executed. .. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel effect that has never been seen before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 94, the second design (design 8M) is also displayed on the display screen 7a in the second effect. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel effect that has never been seen before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 94, in the first effect, the second symbol (symbol 8M) gradually increases after being displayed on the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel effect that has never been seen before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 93 to 94, in the first effect, a plurality of second symbols (symbol 8M) are displayed on the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel effect that has never been seen before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 93 to 94, a part of the plurality of second symbols (symbol 8M) is displayed so as to overlap the reachable decorative symbol. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel effect that has never been seen before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 92 to 94, in the second effect, the second symbol (symbol 8M) is also displayed on the left sub display screen 64L. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel effect that has never been seen before, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
The following is a modification of the decorative design effect during reach.
[Modification 1]
The effects of the decorative design effects A to C during reach may be combined appropriately. For example, in the reach-time decorative design effect C, instead of the effects of FIGS. 94(A) to (D), the effects of reach-time decorative design effect A in FIGS. 92(B) to (G) may be executed. Further, in the reach-time decorative design effect A, instead of the effects of FIGS. 92(H) to (J), the reach-time decorative design effect B of FIGS. 93(H) to (J) may be executed.

[Modification 2]
The mode of the design 8M may be the same as or different from the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. The aspect here means a shape, a font, a color, a size, or the like.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect C1-1]
First display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images;
A gaming machine comprising a second display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
In the first display means, when the decorative symbol is in a reach state with the first symbol, a second effect different from the first symbol is displayed on the first display device, and
After the first effect, a second effect in which the second symbol is displayed on the second display means,
After the second effect, a third effect in which the decorative symbol in the reach state is changed from the first symbol to the second symbol, and a gaming machine capable of being executed.
◇ [Aspect C1-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect C1-1,
In the second effect, the second symbol is also displayed on the first display means. A gaming machine.
◇ [Aspect C1-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect C1-1 or aspect C1-2,
In the first effect, the second symbol gradually increases after being displayed on the first display means.
◇ [Aspect C1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C1-1 to C1-3,
In the first effect, a plurality of the second symbols are displayed on the first display means. A gaming machine.
◇ [Mode C1-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect C1-4,
A part of the plurality of second symbols is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbol in the reach state.
◇ [Mode C1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C1-1 to C1-5,
A third display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
In the second effect, the second symbol is also displayed on the third display means.

The group promotion effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 95 to 97. This group promotion effect may be executed during the effect effect of changing the effect symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the group promotion effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main display device. 7 is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a of 7.

[Group promotion production A]
FIG. 95 is a diagram for explaining the group promotion effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 95(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect pattern starts changing. Here, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing at high speed. Note that three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation and the variable image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(B), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect design is temporarily stopped in the reach mode. Here, it is shown that the left effect design 8L and the right effect design 8R are both temporarily stopped at "4". Note that three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation and the variable image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(C), group effect (first period) is executed. In the group effect (first period), a button image BGS simulating the effect button 63 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a. The button images BGS form a group and move to the left as shown by an arrow YG. At this time, the reach-formed effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the left and right upper portions of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(D), group production (middle term) is executed. In the group effect (middle period), the button image BGS moves in the central portion of the display screen 7a. Further, the button image BGS moves to the left as shown by the arrow YG. At this time also, the reach-formed effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the left and right upper portions of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(E), group effect (late stage) is executed. In the group effect (late stage), the button image BGS moves on the left side of the display screen 7a. Further, the button image BGS moves to the left as shown by the arrow YG and disappears outside the screen. At this time also, the reach-formed effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the left and right upper portions of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(F), a symbol effect is executed. In the symbol production, the symbol may be promoted. Here, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R have been promoted from "4" to "7". These effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the left and right upper portions of the display screen 7a. In addition, when it becomes a hit with the “7” symbol, the transition to the high-accuracy high-base state is confirmed through the big hit game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95(G), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is an effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB engage in a battle. In the battle production, the teammate character CRA wins by winning.
Next, as shown in FIG. 95(H), a fixed stop effect (hit) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (winning), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are fixedly stopped in a winning manner. Here, it is shown that all of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are definitely stopped at "7". In the case of a loss, for example, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are fixedly stopped at "7", and the middle effect symbol 8C is definitely stopped at "8".

[Group promotion production B]
FIG. 96 is a diagram for explaining group promotion effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 96(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect pattern starts changing. Here, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing at high speed. Note that three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation and the variable image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(B), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect design is temporarily stopped in the reach mode. Here, it is shown that the left effect design 8L and the right effect design 8R are both temporarily stopped at "4". Note that three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation and the variable image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(C), group effect (first period) is executed. In the group effect (first period), a button image BGS simulating the effect button 63 appears from the right side of the display screen 7a. The button images BGS form a group and move to the left as shown by an arrow YG. At this time, the reach-formed effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the left and right upper portions of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(D), group effect (middle term) is executed. In the group effect (middle period), the button image BGS moves in the central portion of the display screen 7a. Further, the button image BGS moves to the left as shown by the arrow YG. At this time also, the reach-formed effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the left and right upper portions of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(E), group effect (late stage) is executed. In the group effect (late stage), the button image BGS moves on the left side of the display screen 7a. Further, the button image BGS moves to the left as shown by the arrow YG and disappears outside the screen. At this time also, the reach-formed effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the left and right upper portions of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(F), a symbol effect is executed. In the symbol production, the symbol may be promoted. Here, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are not promoted as "4". These effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the left and right upper portions of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96(G), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is an effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB engage in a battle. In the battle production, the teammate character CRA wins by winning.
Next, as shown in FIG. 96(H), a fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (miss), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped in the manner of being lost. Here, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are definitely stopped at "4", and the intermediate effect symbol 8C is definitely stopped at "3". In the case of winning, for example, all the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are fixedly stopped at "4".

[Group promotion production C]
FIG. 97 is a diagram for explaining the group promotion effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 97(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect pattern starts changing. Here, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing at high speed. Note that three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation and the variable image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(B), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect design is temporarily stopped in the reach mode. Here, it is shown that the left effect design 8L and the right effect design 8R are both temporarily stopped at "4". Note that three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation and the variable image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(C), group effect (first period) is executed. In the group effect (first period), a 7-symbol image ZGS simulating the "7" symbol appears from the right side of the display screen 7a. The 7 symbol images ZGS form a group and move to the left as indicated by an arrow YG. At this time, the reach-formed effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the left and right upper portions of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(D), group effect (middle term) is executed. In the group effect (middle period), the 7 symbol image ZGS moves in the central portion of the display screen 7a. Further, the 7-symbol image ZGS moves to the left as shown by the arrow YG. At this time also, the reach-formed effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the left and right upper portions of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(E), group effect (late stage) is executed. In the group effect (late stage), the 7 symbol image ZGS moves on the left side of the display screen 7a. Further, the 7 symbol image ZGS moves to the left as shown by the arrow YG and disappears outside the screen. At this time also, the reach-formed effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the left and right upper portions of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(F), a symbol effect is executed. In the symbol production, the symbol may be promoted. Here, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are promoted from "4" to "7". These effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the left and right upper portions of the display screen 7a. In addition, when it becomes a hit with the “7” symbol, the transition to the high-accuracy high-base state is confirmed through the big hit game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97(G), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is an effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB engage in a battle. In the battle production, the teammate character CRA wins by winning.
Next, as shown in FIG. 97(H), the fixed stop effect (win) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (winning), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are fixedly stopped in a winning manner. Here, it is shown that all of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are definitely stopped at "7". In the case of a loss, for example, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are fixedly stopped at "7", and the middle effect symbol 8C is definitely stopped at "8".

[Effect example]
Below, the example of the effect of group promotion production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, group effect (first period), group effect (middle period), and group effect (late period) can be executed (FIG. 95(C)(D)(E), FIG. 96(C). )(D)(E), FIG. 97(C)(D)(E)). Then, triggered by this, a symbol effect capable of promoting the symbol is executed (FIG. 95(F), FIG. 96(F), FIG. 97(F)). According to this configuration, since it is possible to expect the promotion of the symbols triggered by the group effect, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the effect symbols 8L and 8R temporarily stopped in the reach mode by the reach formation effect (FIG. 95(B) and FIG. 97(B)) are promoted by the symbol effect (FIG. 95(F)). , FIG. 97(F)). According to this configuration, since it is possible to expect the promotion of the effect design after the reach, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, a 7 symbol image ZGS simulating the "7" symbol crosses the display screen 7a from right to left (FIGS. 97(C)(D)(E)), and the effect symbol 8L. , 8R are promoted from “4” to “7” (FIG. 97(F)). According to this configuration, the group effect and the promotion of the symbol are related to each other, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are promoted from "4" to "7" (FIG. 95(F), FIG. 97(F)). Then, if the "7" symbol is won, the transition to the highly accurate and high base state is confirmed through the big hit game. According to this configuration, expectations are raised for promotion of the effect symbol, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the group effect (FIG. 95(C)(D)(E), FIG. 96(C)(D)(E), FIG. 97(C)(D)(E)) In the design production, when the production design 8L, 8R is promoted from "4" to "7" (Fig. 95(F), Fig. 97(F)), the production design 8L, 8R is promoted as "4". In some cases, it may not be performed (FIG. 96(F)). According to this configuration, the player can be thrilled and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of group promotion production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the effect patterns 8L and 8R that have reached the reach mode by the reach formation effect (FIG. 95(B), FIG. 96(B), and FIG. 97(B)) are promoted. On the other hand, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R temporarily stopped in the winning manner may be promoted by the group effect.

[Modification 2]
In the above, in the group effects (FIG. 95(C)(D)(E), FIG. 96(C)(D)(E), and FIG. 97(C)(D)(E)), the effect symbols 8L and 8R are It was displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a. On the other hand, in the group effect, the effect symbols 8L and 8R may be temporarily hidden. Further, in the group effect, the button image BGS and the 7 symbol image ZGS may cover the effect symbols 8L and 8R.

[Modification 3]
In the above, the effect on the first special figure hold is taken as an example, but the effect on the second special figure hold may be used.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect C2-1]
A gaming machine,
It is possible to execute a group movement effect that moves in a state where specific images are gathered, and it is possible to execute a promotion effect that promotes a symbol to an advantageous symbol with the group movement effect as a trigger.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C2-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect C2-1,
The promotion effect is an effect for promoting an effect design that is temporarily stopped in a reach mode in a reach formation effect.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C2-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect C2-1 or aspect C2-2,
The promotion effect is an effect to promote the effect design that is temporarily stopped in a winning manner,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-1 to C2-3,
The specific image is an image related to the advantageous symbol after being promoted in the promotion effect,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-1 to C2-4,
The advantageous design after being promoted in the promotion production is a design that suggests a transition to a specific game state through a special game in which a game ball can be obtained,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-1 to C2-5,
There are cases where the promotion effect is executed when the group effect is executed, and cases where the promotion effect is not executed even when the group effect is executed,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The stop decoration symbol appearance effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 98 to 100. This stop decorative symbol appearance effect can be executed during the variable effect of the decorative symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the stop decoration pattern appearance effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image display device 7 displays. Images are displayed on the display screen 7a, the right sub display screen 64R, and the left sub display screen 64L.

[Stop decoration design appearance A]
FIG. 98 is a diagram for explaining the stop decoration symbol appearance effect A. In the stop decorative pattern appearance effect, after the fluctuation of the special map is started, the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is not displayed, but the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed in a winning manner are displayed. Is a production. First, after the fluctuation of the special map is started (after the special map lottery is started), as shown in FIG. 98(A), the decorative patterns 8L and 8C are displayed on the display screen 7a, the right sub display screen 64R, and the left sub display screen 64L. , 8R fluctuation display is not displayed continuously. That is, in the special symbol display 41 (FIG. 2), even after the variable display (variable display) of the special symbol (identification information) is started, the display screen 7a, the right sub display screen 64R, the left sub display screen The state in which the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is not displayed on any of the 64L continues.

When a predetermined period elapses after the fluctuation starts, as shown in FIGS. 98(B) to (D), on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stopped and displayed in the winning manner “here, “777”” are displayed. Fades in. That is, an effect in which the images of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R gradually become darker and gradually visible is executed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are stationary. As described above, in the main effect, after the variation of the special drawing is started, the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is not displayed, but the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed in the winning manner are displayed. ..

After the fade-in effect of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is completed and the image is displayed in the normal darkness, as shown in FIG. 98(E), the enlarged display effect of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed. Is executed at this time, the left decorative design 8L is displayed across the left sub display screen 64L and the display screen 7a, and the right decorative design 8R spans between the right sub display screen 64R and the display screen 7a. Is displayed. After that, the special figure fluctuation is finished, and the special symbols of the big hit are stopped and displayed.

98(F) to (J) show another example of the stop decorative symbol appearance effect A. 98(A) to (E), after the start of fluctuation of special maps (after the start of special drawing lottery), as shown in FIG. 98(F), display screen 7a, right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen The state in which the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is not displayed on any of the 64L continues.

When a predetermined period elapses after the fluctuation starts, as shown in FIGS. 98(G) to (J), on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stopped and displayed in the winning mode “here, “777”” are displayed. Fade in in order. Here, an effect in which the image gradually becomes darker in the order of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, and is gradually visible from left to right is executed. The left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are stationary. As described above, in the main effect, after the variation of the special drawing is started, the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is not displayed, but the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed in the winning manner are displayed. ..

After the fade-in effect of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is completed and the image is displayed in the normal darkness, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed as shown in FIG. 98(E). The enlarged display effect is executed, at this time, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed across the left sub display screen 64L and the display screen 7a, and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed on the right sub display screen 64R and the display screen 7a. It is displayed across. After that, the special figure fluctuation is finished, and the special symbols of the big hit are stopped and displayed.

[Stopped decorative pattern appearance production B]
FIG. 99 is a diagram for explaining the stop decoration symbol appearance effect B. In the stop decorative pattern appearance effect, after the fluctuation of the special map is started, the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is not displayed, but the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed in a winning manner are displayed. Is a production. First, after the start of fluctuation of the special map (after the start of the special lottery), as shown in FIG. 99(A), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C are displayed on the display screen 7a, the right sub display screen 64R, and the left sub display screen 64L. , 8R fluctuation display is not displayed continuously. That is, in the special symbol display 41 (FIG. 2), even after the variable display (variable display) of the special symbol (identification information) is started, the display screen 7a, the right sub display screen 64R, the left sub display screen The state in which the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is not displayed on any of the 64L continues.

When a predetermined period elapses after the start of fluctuation, as shown in FIGS. 99B to 99D, on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stopped and displayed in the winning mode “here, “777”” are displayed. Is partially displayed, the display range gradually increases, and the entire display is finally displayed. Here, a part of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed inside the rectangular frame image WG, and the inside of the frame image WG gradually expands in the vertical direction, so that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R The production in which the visible area expands is executed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are stationary. As described above, in the main effect, after the variation of the special drawing is started, the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is not displayed, but the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed in the winning manner are displayed. ..

After the above effect is completed and the entire range of the visible portions of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is completed and the entire decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed, as shown in FIG. The enlarged display effect of the symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is executed, at this time, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed across the left sub display screen 64L and the display screen 7a, and the right decorative pattern 8R is the right sub display. It is displayed across the screen 64R and the display screen 7a. After that, the special figure fluctuation is finished, and the special symbols of the big hit are stopped and displayed.

99(F) to (J) show another example of the stop decoration symbol appearance effect B. 99(A) to (E) after the start of fluctuation of special maps (after the start of special drawing lottery), as shown in FIG. 99(F), display screen 7a, right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen The state in which the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is not displayed on any of the 64L continues.

When a predetermined period elapses after the start of fluctuation, as shown in FIGS. 99(G) to (J), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a in the winning mode “here, “777””. A part of the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed, the display range gradually increases, and finally the entire decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed. Here, a part of the middle decoration pattern 8C is displayed inside the rectangular frame image WG, and the inside of the frame image WG gradually expands in the left-right direction, so that the decoration patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R can be visually recognized. The effect of expanding the area is executed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are stationary. In FIG. 99(H), the visible portion of the left decorative design 8L and the visible portion of the right decorative design 8R are different from each other. That is, in FIG. 99(H), the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are in a state in which different portions of the decorative design are displayed. In the present production, after the variation of the special drawing starts, the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is not displayed, but the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stopped and displayed in the winning manner are displayed.

After the above effect is completed in which the visible range of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is gradually expanded and the entire decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed, as shown in FIG. 99(J), the decorative symbol 8L, An enlarged display effect in which 8C and 8R protrude from the frame image WG is executed. At this time, the left decorative design 8L is displayed across the left sub display screen 64L and the display screen 7a, and the right decorative design 8R is right. It is displayed across the sub display screen 64R and the display screen 7a. After that, the special figure fluctuation is finished, and the special symbols of the big hit are stopped and displayed.

[Stop decoration pattern appearance effect C]
FIG. 100 is a diagram for explaining the stop decoration symbol appearance effect C. In the stop decorative pattern appearance effect, after the fluctuation of the special map is started, the variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is not displayed, but the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed in a winning manner are displayed. Is a production. First, after the start of fluctuation of the special map (after the start of the special map lottery), as shown in FIG. 100(A), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C are displayed on the display screen 7a, the right sub display screen 64R, and the left sub display screen 64L. , 8R fluctuation display is not displayed continuously. That is, in the special symbol display 41 (FIG. 2), even after the variable display (variable display) of the special symbol (identification information) is started, the display screen 7a, the right sub display screen 64R, the left sub display screen The state in which the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is not displayed on any of the 64L continues.

When a predetermined period elapses after the fluctuation starts, as shown in FIGS. 100(B) to 100(D), on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stopped and displayed in the winning mode “here, “777”” are displayed. While fading in, first, a part is displayed, then the display range gradually increases and finally the whole is displayed. Here, a part of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed inside the rectangular frame image WG, and the inside of the frame image WG gradually expands in the vertical direction, so that the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R Along with the effect of expanding the visible area, the effect of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R gradually becoming darker and gradually becoming visible is combined and executed. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are stationary. As described above, in the main effect, after the variation of the special drawing is started, the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is not displayed, but the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed in the winning manner are displayed. ..

After the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are faded in, the effect of gradually widening the range of the visible portion is completed, and the entire decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed in the normal darkness, and then FIG. As shown in (E), the enlarged display effect of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is executed. At this time, the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed across the left sub display screen 64L and the display screen 7a, The right decorative pattern 8R is displayed across the right sub display screen 64R and the display screen 7a. After that, the special figure fluctuation is finished, and the special symbols of the big hit are stopped and displayed.

100(F) to (J) show another example of the stop decoration symbol appearance effect C. After the start of fluctuations in special maps different from those in FIGS. 100(A) to (E) (after the start of special drawing lottery), as shown in FIG. 100(F), display screen 7a, right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen The state in which the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is not displayed on any of the 64L continues.

When a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of fluctuation, as shown in FIGS. 100(G) to (J), on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stopped and displayed in the winning mode “here, “777”” are displayed. A part of the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed while fading in, the display range gradually increases, and finally the entire decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed. Here, a part of the middle decoration pattern 8C is displayed inside the rectangular frame image WG, and the inside of the frame image WG gradually expands in the left-right direction, so that the decoration patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R can be visually recognized. Along with the effect of expanding the area, the effect that the images of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R become gradually darker and gradually visible is executed in combination. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are stationary. In FIG. 100(H), the visible portion of the left decorative design 8L and the visible portion of the right decorative design 8R are in different states. That is, in FIG. 100(H), the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are in a state where different portions of the decorative design are displayed. In the present production, after the variation of the special drawing starts, the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is not displayed, but the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stopped and displayed in the winning manner are displayed.

After the above effect is completed in which the visible range of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is gradually expanded and the entire decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed, as shown in FIG. 100(J), the decorative symbol 8L, An enlarged display effect in which 8C and 8R protrude from the frame image WG is executed. At this time, the left decorative design 8L is displayed across the left sub display screen 64L and the display screen 7a, and the right decorative design 8R is right. It is displayed across the sub display screen 64R and the display screen 7a. After that, the special figure fluctuation is finished, and the special symbols of the big hit are stopped and displayed.

[Effect example]
Below, the example of an effect of a stop decoration design appearance production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 98 to 100, after the fluctuation starts, the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is not displayed, and the decorative symbol 8L stopped and displayed in the winning manner is displayed. , 8C, 8R can be displayed as the first effect. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel effect that has never been seen before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 98 and 100, in the first effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed in the winning manner are displayed in fade-in. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel effect that has never been seen before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 99 and 100, in the first effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed in the winning manner are entirely displayed after a part of them is displayed. Is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel effect that has never been seen before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 99(H) and FIG. 100(H), in the first effect, when a part of the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the winning mode is displayed, the decorative pattern is displayed. The portion displayed in one of the plurality of symbols included in the symbol and the portion displayed in the other one symbol are different from each other. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel effect that has never been seen before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 98 to 100, in the first effect, after the variation starts, until the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stopped and displayed in the winning manner are displayed. , Decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are not displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel effect that has never been seen before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 98 to 100, in the first effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stopped and displayed in the winning manner are enlarged and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. It is displayed across the sub display screen 64R and the display screen 7a and the left sub display screen 64L. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel effect that has never been seen before, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of a stop decoration symbol appearance production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the stopped decorative symbol appearance effects A to C, after the start of fluctuation of the special symbol (after the start of the special symbol lottery), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed until the stopped decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed. It is supposed not to be displayed. However, in the stop decorative symbol appearance effects A to C, after the variation start of the special symbol (after the special symbol lottery is started), until the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R that are stopped and displayed are displayed in a manner other than the variable display. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R may be displayed. For example, after the start of fluctuation of the special map (after the start of the special map lottery), only the decorative symbol 8L that is stopped and displayed may be displayed until the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed are displayed.

[Modification 2]
In the stopped decorative symbol appearance effects A to C, it is assumed that there is a period of time after the special symbols start changing (after the special symbol lottery starts) and until the stopped decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed. .. However, in the stopped decorative symbol appearance effects A to C, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed immediately after the start of fluctuation of the special symbol may be displayed.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Mode C3-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
A game machine characterized in that, after the start of variation, the first effect in which the decorative design stopped and displayed in a winning manner is displayed without the variable display of the decorative design being displayed is displayed.
◇ [Aspect C3-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect C3-1,
In the first effect, the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in a winning manner is displayed by fade-in.
◇ [Mode C3-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect C3-1 or aspect C3-2,
In the first effect, the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in a winning manner is partially displayed, and then the entire decorative pattern is displayed.
◇ [Mode C3-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect C3-3,
In the first effect, when a part of the decorative design stopped and displayed in a winning manner is displayed, a portion displayed in one of the plurality of designs included in the decorative design and another A game machine characterized in that the portions displayed in one symbol are different from each other.
◇ [Aspect C3-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-4,
In the first effect, the decorative design is not displayed until the decorative design stopped and displayed in a winning manner is displayed after the start of variation.
◇ [Aspect C3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-5,
Equipped with sub-display means that can display multiple types of images,
In the first effect, the decorative design stopped and displayed in a winning manner is enlarged and displayed across the display means and the sub-display means.

The pattern color change effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 101 to 103. This symbol color change effect can be executed during the effect of changing the effect symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the symbol color change effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main display is performed. This is an effect for displaying an image on the display screen 7a of the device 7.

[Design color change effect A]
FIG. 101 is a diagram for explaining the symbol color change effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 101(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect pattern starts changing. Here, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing at high speed. Note that three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation and the variable image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(B), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect design is temporarily stopped in the reach mode. Here, it is shown that the left effect design 8L and the right effect design 8R are both temporarily stopped at "4". Note that three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation and the variable image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(C), the reach development effect is executed. The reach development effect is an effect that notifies the progress from the normal reach to the super reach. Here, a message image MSG of "start of final battle" is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. Further, the effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the left and right upper portions of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(D), a color change effect is executed. The color change effect is an effect for changing the display color of the effect pattern in the reach mode. Here, the display colors of the effect symbols 8L and 8R displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a are changed. Specifically, the display color of the effect symbols 8L and 8R is assumed to be changed from "blue" to "red".

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(E), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is an effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB engage in a battle. In the battle presentation, the teammate character CRA wins by winning. Here also, the effect symbols 8L and 8R whose display color is "red" are displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(F), a win/loss notification effect is executed. The winning/losing notification effect is an effect of notifying the victory or defeat of the teammate character CRA. When the teammate character CRA wins, the winning is confirmed. Here, it is assumed that the teammate character CRA has won. At this time, the teammate character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Further, a message image MSG of "win" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(G), the winning notification effect is executed. The winning notification effect is an effect of notifying the winning result by using the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Here, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen, and the medium effect symbol 8C is enlarged and displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a. Here, all of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are "4", and the display color is "red".

Next, as shown in FIG. 101(H), the fixed stop effect (win) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (winning), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are fixedly stopped in a winning manner. Here, a state is shown in which all of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the left and right are definitely stopped at "4". Here, too, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all displayed in the "red" display color. As a result, the transition to the highly accurate and high base state is confirmed after the jackpot game.

[Design color change effect B]
FIG. 102 is a diagram for explaining the symbol color change effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 102(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect pattern starts changing. Here, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing at high speed. Note that three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation and the variable image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(B), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect design is temporarily stopped in the reach mode. Here, it is shown that the left effect design 8L and the right effect design 8R are both temporarily stopped at "4". Note that three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation and the variable image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(C), the reach development effect is executed. The reach development effect is an effect that notifies the progress from the normal reach to the super reach. Here, a message image MSG of "start of final battle" is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. Further, the effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the left and right upper portions of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(D), a color change effect is executed. The color change effect is an effect for changing the display color of the effect pattern in the reach mode. Here, the display colors of the effect symbols 8L and 8R displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a are changed. Specifically, the display color of the effect symbols 8L and 8R is assumed to be changed from "blue" to "red".

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(E), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is an effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB engage in a battle. In the battle presentation, the teammate character CRA wins by winning. Here also, the effect symbols 8L and 8R whose display color is "red" are displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(F), a win/loss notification effect is executed. The winning/losing notification effect is an effect of notifying the victory or defeat of the teammate character CRA. When the teammate character CRA wins, the winning is confirmed. Here, it is assumed that the teammate character CRA is defeated. At this time, the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Further, a message image MSG of "defeat" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(G), the winning notification effect is executed. The winning notification effect is an effect of notifying the winning result using the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Here, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen, and the medium effect symbol 8C is enlarged and displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a. Here, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are "5", and the middle effect symbol 8C is "5". The left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R have a display color of "red", and the middle effect symbol 8C has a display color of "blue".

Next, as shown in FIG. 102(H), a fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (missing), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in the manner of losing. Here, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are definitely stopped at "4", and the middle effect symbol 8C is definitely stopped at "5". At this time, immediately before the fixed stop, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R return from "red" to "blue".

[Design color change effect C]
FIG. 103 is a diagram for explaining the symbol color change effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 103(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect pattern starts changing. Here, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing at high speed. Note that three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation and the variable image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(B), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect design is temporarily stopped in the reach mode. Here, it is shown that the left effect design 8L and the right effect design 8R are both temporarily stopped at "4". Note that three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation and the variable image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(C), the reach development effect is executed. The reach development effect is an effect that notifies the progress from the normal reach to the super reach. Here, a message image MSG of "start of final battle" is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. Further, the effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the left and right upper portions of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(D), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is an effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB engage in a battle. In the battle presentation, the teammate character CRA wins by winning. Here, too, the effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(E), a win/loss notification effect is executed. The winning/losing notification effect is an effect of notifying the victory or defeat of the teammate character CRA. When the teammate character CRA wins, the winning is confirmed. Here, it is assumed that the teammate character CRA has won. At this time, the teammate character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Further, a message image MSG of "win" is displayed. Here, too, the effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the left and right upper portions of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(F), a color change effect is executed. The color change effect is an effect of changing the display color of the effect design after the win/loss notification effect. Here, the display colors of the effect symbols 8L and 8R displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen 7a are changed. Specifically, the display color of the effect symbols 8L and 8R is assumed to be changed from "blue" to "red".

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(G), the winning notification effect is executed. The winning notification effect is an effect of notifying the winning result by using the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Here, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are displayed on the upper left and right sides of the display screen, and the medium effect symbol 8C is enlarged and displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a. Here, all of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are "4", and the display color is "red".

Next, as shown in FIG. 103(H), a fixed stop effect (winning) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (winning), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are fixedly stopped in a winning manner. Here, a state is shown in which all of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the left and right are definitely stopped at "4". Here, too, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all displayed in the "red" display color. As a result, the transition to the highly accurate and high base state is confirmed after the jackpot game.

[Effect example]
Below, the example of the effect of design color change production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the display color of the effect symbols 8L and 8R temporarily stopped in the reach mode is changed with a specific effect as an opportunity (FIG. 101(C)(D), FIG. 102(C)(D). ), FIG. 103(E)(F)). According to this configuration, the expectation of winning can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the display color of the effect symbols 8L and 8R temporarily stopped in the reach mode is changed with the reach development effect as a trigger (FIG. 101(C)(D), FIG. 102(C)(D). )). According to this configuration, since the display color of the effect design is changed with the development to the super reach, it is possible to further increase the expectation of winning and improve the enjoyment of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the display color of the number image forming the effect design is changed (FIG. 101(C)(D), FIG. 102(C)(D), FIG. 103(E)(F)). .. According to this configuration, the change in the display color of the effect design can be easily understood, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, if a hit occurs after the color change effect (FIG. 101(D), FIG. 102(D), FIG. 103(F)), the jackpot game is passed to the highly accurate and high base state. Is confirmed (FIG. 101(H), FIG. 103(H)). According to this configuration, the display color of the effect design is expected to be further changed, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display color of the effect symbols 8L and 8R changed to the display color of "red" in the fixed stop effect after the game is lost in the winning notification effect (Fig. 102(G)). Is returned to "blue" (FIG. 102(H)). According to this configuration, the fixed stop display of the effect design becomes easy to understand, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the fixed stop effect, the display color of the effect symbols 8L and 8R changed to the display color of “red” is returned to “blue” immediately before the fixed stop (FIG. 102 (H. )). According to this configuration, the fixed stop display of the effect design becomes easy to understand, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
The following is a modification of the design color change effect.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the reach design effect (FIG. 101(C), FIG. 102(C)) or the winning/losing notification effect (FIG. 103(E)) has been used as an opportunity to change the display color of the effect design (FIG. 101( D), FIG. 102(D), and FIG. 103(F)). However, the timing of changing the display color of the effect design is not limited to this. For example, the display color of the effect design may be changed with the reach forming effect as a trigger.

[Modification 2]
Although the display color of the numeral image is changed in the above, the display color of the portion other than the numeral image may be changed when the effect design includes components other than the numeral image. Further, the display colors of both the numerical image and the part other than the numerical image may be changed.

[Modification 3]
In the above, the effect on the first special figure hold is taken as an example, but the effect on the second special figure hold may be used.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect C4-1]
A gaming machine,
After performing a reach formation effect in which the effect pattern is temporarily stopped in the reach mode, it is possible to execute a display color change effect that changes the display color of the effect pattern that is temporarily stopped in the reach mode, with a predetermined effect as an opportunity.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C4-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect C4-1,
The predetermined effect is a development effect from a normal reach effect to a super reach effect,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C4-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect C4-1 or aspect C4-2,
The display color of the effect design is a display color of a numerical image forming the effect design,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C4-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C4-1 to C4-3,
When the winning notification effect indicating that the winning result is a win is executed after the display color changing effect is executed, the transition to the specific game state is confirmed through the special game capable of acquiring the game ball,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C4-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C4-1 to C4-4,
When the winning notification result indicating that the winning result is a loss is executed after the display color change effect is executed, a color return effect is performed to return the display color of the effect design to the original display color,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C4-6]
A gaming machine according to aspect C4-5,
The color restoration effect is executed prior to the fixed stop effect of the effect design,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The color change reach effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. This color change reach effect can be executed during the effect change of the effect symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the color change reach effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main display is performed. This is an effect for displaying an image on the display screen 7a of the device 7.

[Color change reach production A]
FIG. 104 is a diagram for explaining the color change reach effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 104(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect pattern starts changing. Here, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing at high speed. Note that three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation and the variable image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(B), a left symbol stop effect is executed. The left symbol stop effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped. Here, it is shown that the left effect design 8L is temporarily stopped at "4". Further, the variation of the right effect design 8R becomes slower, and the movement as shown by the arrow Y is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(C), a right symbol inversion effect is executed. The right symbol inversion effect is an effect in which the right effect symbol 8R that has been moving toward the lower portion of the display screen 7a reverses the movement direction and moves toward the upper portion of the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y.
Next, as shown in FIG. 104(D), a color change effect is executed. The color change effect is an effect in which the right effect design 8R moving toward the upper part of the display screen 7a changes the display color of the numerical image. For example, in a normal state, the right effect design 8R of "blue" becomes "red".

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(E), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect design is temporarily stopped in the reach mode. Here, it is shown that the left effect design 8L and the right effect design 8R are both temporarily stopped at "4". Here, the display color is changed so as to stir whether or not the “4” symbol whose display color has been changed becomes reach (for example, to move so as to vibrate), temporarily stop and change the display color. For example, the display color of the "4" symbol changed to "red" is changed to the normal "blue".

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(F), a medium symbol incentive effect is executed. The medium symbol stirring effect is an effect of moving (for example, moving so as to vibrate) so as to stir whether or not the “4” symbol moving in the direction of the arrow Y stops in the normal reach.
Next, as shown in FIG. 104(G), the winning notification effect is executed. The winning notification effect is an effect of notifying the winning result by using the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Here, as compared with the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R, the medium effect symbol 8C is enlarged and displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all "4".

Next, as shown in FIG. 104(H), a fixed stop effect (winning) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (winning), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are fixedly stopped in a winning manner. Here, it is shown that all the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are definitely stopped at "4".

[Color change reach production B]
FIG. 105 is a diagram for explaining the color change reach effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 105(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect pattern starts changing. Here, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing at high speed. Note that three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation and the variable image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(B), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left symbol stop effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped. Here, it is shown that the left effect design 8L is temporarily stopped at "4". Further, the variation of the right effect design 8R becomes slower, and the movement as shown by the arrow Y is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(C), a right symbol inversion effect is executed. The right symbol inversion effect is an effect in which the right effect symbol 8R that has been moving toward the lower portion of the display screen 7a reverses the movement direction and moves toward the upper portion of the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y.
Next, as shown in FIG. 105(D), a color change effect is executed. The color change effect is an effect in which the right effect design 8R moving toward the upper part of the display screen 7a changes the display color of the numerical image. For example, in the normal state, the right effect design 8R of "4" of "blue" becomes "red".

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(E), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect design is temporarily stopped in the reach mode. Here, it is shown that the left effect design 8L and the right effect design 8R are both temporarily stopped at "4". Here, the display color is changed so as to stir whether or not the “4” symbol whose display color has been changed becomes reach (for example, to move so as to vibrate), temporarily stop and change the display color. For example, the display color of the "4" symbol changed to "red" is changed to the normal "blue".

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(F), a medium symbol incentive effect is executed. The medium symbol stirring effect is an effect of moving (for example, moving so as to vibrate) so as to stir whether or not the “4” symbol moving in the direction of the arrow Y stops in the normal reach. At this time, the display color of the "4" symbol is changed. For example, in a normal state, the “4” pattern of “blue” becomes “red”.
Next, as shown in FIG. 105(G), the winning notification effect is executed. The winning notification effect is an effect of notifying the winning result by using the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Here, as compared with the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R, the medium effect symbol 8C is enlarged and displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all "4". At this time, the display color of the middle effect design 8C is the original display color. For example, the display color of the "4" symbol changed to "red" is changed to the normal "blue".

Next, as shown in FIG. 105(H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (winning), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are fixedly stopped in a winning manner. Here, a state is shown in which all of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the left and right are definitely stopped at "4".

[Color change reach production C]
FIG. 106 is a diagram for explaining the color change reach effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 106(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect pattern starts changing. Here, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing at high speed. Note that three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation and the variable image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(B), a left symbol stop effect is executed. The left symbol stop effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped. Here, it is shown that the left effect design 8L is temporarily stopped at "4". Further, the variation of the right effect design 8R becomes slower, and the movement as shown by the arrow Y is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(C), a right symbol inversion effect is executed. The right symbol inversion effect is an effect in which the right effect symbol 8R that has been moving toward the lower portion of the display screen 7a reverses the movement direction and moves toward the upper portion of the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y. At this time, the left effect design 8L is enlarged. The expansion timing may be before, during or after the right effect design 8R is reversed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 106(D), a color change effect is executed. The color change effect is an effect in which the right effect design 8R moving toward the upper part of the display screen 7a changes the display color of the numerical image. For example, in a normal state, the “4” pattern of “blue” becomes “red”. At this time, the right effect design 8R is enlarged similarly to the left effect design 8L. The size of the right effect design 8R after expansion may be larger, smaller, or the same as the left effect design 8L after expansion.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(E), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect design is temporarily stopped in the reach mode. Here, it is shown that the left effect design 8L and the right effect design 8R are both temporarily stopped at "4". Here, the display color is changed, and the "4" symbol that has been enlarged is moved (for example, moved so as to vibrate) so as to stir whether or not it reaches, and the display color is changed while temporarily stopped. .. For example, the display color of the "4" symbol changed to "red" is changed to the normal "blue".

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(F), a medium symbol incentive effect is executed. The medium symbol stirring effect is an effect of moving (for example, moving so as to vibrate) so as to stir whether or not the “4” symbol moving in the direction of the arrow Y stops in the normal reach.
Next, as shown in FIG. 106(G), the winning notification effect is executed. The winning notification effect is an effect of notifying the winning result by using the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Here, as compared with the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R, the medium effect symbol 8C is enlarged and displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are all "4".

Next, as shown in FIG. 106(H), a fixed stop effect (hit) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (winning), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are fixedly stopped in a winning manner. Here, a state is shown in which all of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the left and right are definitely stopped at "4".

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the color change reach effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in stopping the right effect design 8R, after changing the display color of the right effect design 8R, the right effect design 8R is temporarily stopped ((D) (E) in FIG. 104, FIG. 105 ( D)(E), FIG. 106(D)(E)). In addition, in stopping the intermediate effect design 8C, after changing the display color of the intermediate effect design 8C, the intermediate effect design 8C is temporarily stopped (FIGS. 105(F)(G)). According to this configuration, the temporary stop of the effect symbol is conspicuous, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display color of the effect design is changed, and when the effect design is temporarily stopped, the display color is returned to the original display color (FIG. 104(E), FIG. 105(E)(G), FIG. 106). (E)). According to this configuration, the temporary stop of the effect design is further emphasized, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the right effect design 8R is moved in the direction opposite to the changing direction and the display color of the right effect design 8R is changed, and is moved in the same direction as the changing direction and temporarily stopped (FIG. 104). (C)(D)(E), FIG. 105(C)(D)(E), FIG. 106(C)(D)(E)). According to this configuration, since the effect symbol moves in the direction opposite to the changing direction, the temporary stop of the effect symbol becomes more prominent, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the reach formation effect, the "4" symbol whose display color has been changed is moved so as to fuel the reach (for example, moved so as to vibrate), and is temporarily stopped. At the same time, the display color is changed (FIG. 104(D)(E), FIG. 105(D)(E), FIG. 106(D)(E)). According to this configuration, the reach forming effect is conspicuous and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the right effect design 8R is temporarily stopped after being enlarged (FIGS. 106(D) and (E)). According to this configuration, the temporary stop of the effect design is further emphasized, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the reach formation effect, the enlarged right production symbol 8R of “4” is moved so as to fuel whether it reaches or not (for example, moved so as to vibrate), and is temporarily stopped. (FIG. 106(E)). According to this configuration, the temporary stop of the effect design is further emphasized, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
The following is a modification of the color change reach effect.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the reach formation effect is performed after the color change effect (FIG. 104(D)(E), FIG. 105(D)(E), FIG. 106(D)(E)). Is not always done. For example, when the reach formation is not performed, it is conceivable that the right effect design 8R is stopped at a value other than "4", and then the middle effect design 8C is stopped, resulting in a dislocation.

[Modification 2]
Although the example in which the display color of the right effect design 8R and the middle effect design 8C is changed has been described above, the display color of the left effect design 8L may be changed.

[Modification 3]
In the above, the effect on the first special figure hold is taken as an example, but the effect on the second special figure hold may be used.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect C5-1]
A gaming machine,
In stopping the fluctuating effect design, after changing the display color of the effect design, it is possible to execute a color change stop effect of temporarily stopping the effect design,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C5-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect C5-1,
In the color change stop production, the display color of the production design is temporarily changed, and when the production design is temporarily stopped, the display color of the production design is returned to the original display color,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C5-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect C5-2,
In the color change stop effect, while moving the effect symbol in the direction opposite to the changing direction, the display color of the effect symbol is temporarily changed, and is temporarily stopped by moving in the same direction as the changing direction,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C5-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C5-1 to C5-3,
The color change stop effect constitutes a part of the reach effect for temporarily stopping the effect pattern in a predetermined mode,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C5-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C5-1 to C5-4,
In stopping the fluctuating effect design, after changing the size of the effect design, it is possible to execute a size change stop effect of temporarily stopping the effect design,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C5-6]
A gaming machine according to aspect C5-5,
The size change stop effect constitutes a part of the reach effect for temporarily stopping the effect pattern in a predetermined mode,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The character attack effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 107 to 109. This character attack effect can be executed during the effect of changing the effect symbol. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the character attack effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main display device. 7 is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a of 7.

[Character attack production A]
FIG. 107 is a diagram for explaining the character attack effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 107(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect pattern starts changing. Here, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing at high speed. Note that three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation and the variable image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(B) or 107(D), a temporary stop effect is executed. The temporary stop effect is an effect in which the effect design is temporarily stopped in a predetermined mode. There are two types of temporary stop effects. It is a mode in which the special symbol is temporarily stopped instead of the medium effect symbol 8C as shown in FIG. 107(B), and a mode in which the medium effect symbol 8C is temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 107(D).

In the temporary stop effect A shown in FIG. 107(B), the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped at "1", the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped at "2", and the special symbol is temporarily changed in place of the middle effect symbol 8C. It showed that it stopped. The special symbol is an enemy character symbol CRBG that imitates the enemy character. For example, the changing production symbol is provisionally stopped in the order of the left effect symbol 8L, the right effect symbol 8R, and the special symbol.

When the special symbol is temporarily stopped instead of the medium effect symbol 8C as shown in FIG. 107(B), the attack effect (before reach) is executed as shown in FIG. 107(C). That is, the attack effect (before the reach) is an effect executed when the special symbol is temporarily stopped in the temporary stop effect. In the attack effect (before reach), an attack line AL indicating an attack is displayed over the enemy character symbol CRBG. Further, a message image MSG "ATTACK" is displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a.

In the temporary stop effect B shown in FIG. 107(D), the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped at "4", the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped at "9", and the intermediate effect symbol 8C is temporarily stopped at "3". I showed you how. For example, the effect design that is changing is provisionally stopped in the order of left effect design 8L→right effect design 8R→medium effect design 8C.

After the attack effect (before the reach) shown in FIG. 107(C) or after the temporary stop effect B shown in FIG. 107(D), the variation start effect shown in FIG. 107(A) is executed. Then, it will be a pseudo-reproduction. In the present embodiment, a repetitive pseudo continuous effect is performed in which such a pseudo continuous effect is repeated seven times. Then, in the repeated pseudo continuous effect, the enemy character image CRBG is stopped instead of the middle effect symbol 8C (FIG. 107(B)), and the attack effect (before reach) is executed (FIG. 107(C)).

After the end of the repeated pseudo continuous effect, the reach formation effect is executed as shown in FIG. 107(E). The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect design is temporarily stopped in the reach mode. Here, it is shown that the left effect design 8L and the right effect design 8R are both temporarily stopped at "5".

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(F), an attack effect (after reach) is executed. The attack effect (after reach) is an effect that further attacks the enemy character. Here, the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Then, an attack image AG showing an attack on the enemy character CRB is displayed. A plurality of attack images AG are sequentially displayed, and the enemy character CRB and the attack image AG overlap with each other, which causes damage to the enemy character CRB.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(G), a win/loss notification effect is executed. The winning/losing notification effect is an effect of notifying the victory or defeat of the teammate character CRA. When the teammate character CRA wins, the winning is confirmed. Here, it is assumed that the teammate character CRA has won. At this time, the teammate character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Further, a message image MSG of "win" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107(H), a fixed stop effect (hit) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (winning), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are fixedly stopped in a winning manner. Here, a state is shown in which all of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the left and right are definitely stopped at "5".

[Character attack production B]
FIG. 108 is a diagram for explaining the character attack effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 108(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect pattern starts changing. Here, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing at high speed. Note that three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation and the variable image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(B) or FIG. 108(D), a temporary stop effect is executed. The temporary stop effect is an effect in which the effect design is temporarily stopped in a predetermined mode. There are two types of temporary stop effects. It is a mode in which the special symbol is temporarily stopped instead of the medium effect symbol 8C as shown in FIG. 108(B), and a mode in which the medium effect symbol 8C is temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 108(D).

In the temporary stop effect A shown in FIG. 108(B), the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped at "1", the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped at "2", and the special symbol is temporarily changed in place of the middle effect symbol 8C. It showed that it stopped. The special symbol is an enemy character symbol CRBG that imitates the enemy character. For example, the changing production symbol is provisionally stopped in the order of the left effect symbol 8L, the right effect symbol 8R, and the special symbol.

When the special symbol is temporarily stopped instead of the medium effect symbol 8C as shown in FIG. 108(B), the attack effect (before reach) is executed as shown in FIG. 108(C). That is, the attack effect (before the reach) is an effect executed when the special symbol is temporarily stopped in the temporary stop effect. In the attack effect (before reach), an attack line AL indicating an attack is displayed over the enemy character symbol CRBG. Further, a message image MSG "ATTACK" is displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a.

In the temporary stop effect B shown in FIG. 108(D), the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped at "4", the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped at "9", and the intermediate effect symbol 8C is temporarily stopped at "3". I showed you how. For example, the effect design that is changing is provisionally stopped in the order of left effect design 8L→right effect design 8R→medium effect design 8C.

The variation start effect shown in FIG. 108(A) is executed after the attack effect (before reach) shown in FIG. 108(C) or after the temporary stop effect B shown in FIG. 108(D). Then, it will be a pseudo-reproduction. In the present embodiment, a repetitive pseudo continuous effect is performed in which such a pseudo continuous effect is repeated seven times. Then, in the repeated pseudo continuous effect, the enemy character image CRBG is stopped instead of the middle effect symbol 8C (FIG. 108(B)), and the attack effect (before reach) is executed (FIG. 108(C)).

After the end of the repeated pseudo continuous effect, the reach formation effect is executed as shown in FIG. 108(E). The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect design is temporarily stopped in the reach mode. Here, it is shown that the left effect design 8L and the right effect design 8R are both temporarily stopped at "5".

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(F), an attack effect (after reach) is executed. The attack effect (after reach) is an effect that further attacks the enemy character. Here, the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. In addition, a message image MSG of “continuous hit” is displayed above the button image BG. Then, every time the player presses the effect button 63, an attack image AG showing an attack on the enemy character CRB is displayed. A plurality of attack images AG are sequentially displayed, and the enemy character CRB and the attack image AG overlap with each other, which causes damage to the enemy character CRB.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(G), a win/loss notification effect is executed. The winning/losing notification effect is an effect of notifying the victory or defeat of the teammate character CRA. When the teammate character CRA wins, the winning is confirmed. Here, it is assumed that the teammate character CRA has won. At this time, the teammate character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Further, a message image MSG of "win" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108(H), the fixed stop effect (win) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (winning), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are fixedly stopped in a winning manner. Here, a state is shown in which all of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the left and right are definitely stopped at "5".

[Character attack production C]
FIG. 109 is a diagram for explaining the character attack effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 109(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect pattern starts changing. Here, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing at high speed. Note that three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation and the variable image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(B) or FIG. 109(D), a temporary stop effect is executed. The temporary stop effect is an effect in which the effect design is temporarily stopped in a predetermined mode. There are two types of temporary stop effects. It is a mode in which the special symbol is temporarily stopped instead of the medium effect symbol 8C as shown in FIG. 109(B), and a mode in which the medium effect symbol 8C is temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. 109(D).

In the temporary stop effect A shown in FIG. 109(B), the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped at "1", the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped at "2", and the special symbol is temporarily changed instead of the middle effect symbol 8C. It showed that it stopped. The special symbol is an enemy character symbol CRBG that imitates the enemy character. For example, the changing production symbol is provisionally stopped in the order of the left effect symbol 8L, the right effect symbol 8R, and the special symbol.

When the special symbol is temporarily stopped instead of the medium effect symbol 8C as shown in FIG. 109(B), the attack effect (before reach) is executed as shown in FIG. 109(C). That is, the attack effect (before the reach) is an effect executed when the special symbol is temporarily stopped in the temporary stop effect. In the attack effect (before reach), a message image MSG1 "ATTACK" is displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a. At this time, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. Further, a message image MSG2 of "press" is displayed above the button image BG. Then, when the player presses the effect button 63, the attack line AL indicating the attack is displayed over the enemy character symbol CRBG.

In the temporary stop effect B shown in FIG. 109(D), the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped at "4", the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped at "9", and the intermediate effect symbol 8C is temporarily stopped at "3". I showed you how. For example, the effect design that is changing is provisionally stopped in the order of left effect design 8L→right effect design 8R→medium effect design 8C.

The variation start effect shown in FIG. 109(A) is executed after the attack effect (before the reach) shown in FIG. 109(C) or after the temporary stop effect B shown in FIG. 109(D). Then, it will be a pseudo-reproduction. In the present embodiment, a repetitive pseudo continuous effect is performed in which such a pseudo continuous effect is repeated seven times. Then, in the repeated pseudo continuous effect, the enemy character image CRBG is stopped instead of the middle effect symbol 8C (FIG. 109(B)), and the attack effect (before reach) is executed (FIG. 109(C)).

After the end of the repeated pseudo continuous effect, the reach formation effect is executed as shown in FIG. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect design is temporarily stopped in the reach mode. Here, it is shown that the left effect design 8L and the right effect design 8R are both temporarily stopped at "5".

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(F), an attack effect (after reach) is executed. The attack effect (after reach) is an effect that further attacks the enemy character. Here, the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. In addition, a message image “continuous hit” is displayed above the button image BG. Then, every time the player presses the effect button 63, an attack image AG showing an attack on the enemy character CRB is displayed. A plurality of attack images AG are sequentially displayed, and the enemy character CRB and the attack image AG overlap with each other, which causes damage to the enemy character CRB.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(G), a win/loss notification effect is executed. The winning/losing notification effect is an effect of notifying the victory or defeat of the teammate character CRA. When the teammate character CRA wins, the winning is confirmed. Here, it is assumed that the teammate character CRA is defeated. At this time, the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Further, a message image MSG of "defeat" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109(H), a fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (missing), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in the manner of losing. Here, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are definitely stopped at "5", and the middle effect symbol 8C is definitely stopped at "6".

[Effect example]
Below, the example of the effect of character attack production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, a series of effects can be executed before and after the reach formation effect (FIG. 107(E), FIG. 108(E), FIG. 109(E)) (FIG. 107(C)(F), FIG. 108(C)(F), and FIG. 109(C)(F). According to this configuration, since a unified production can be performed in one change, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, an effect in which the same enemy character CRB appears before and after the reach formation effect (FIG. 107(E), FIG. 108(E), and FIG. 109(E)) is executed. (FIG. 107(C)(F), FIG. 108(C)(F), FIG. 109(C)(F)). According to this configuration, more uniform production can be performed in one change, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, an effect of attacking the same enemy character CRB is executed before and after the reach formation effect (FIG. 107(E), FIG. 108(E), and FIG. 109(E)). (FIG. 107(C)(F), FIG. 108(C)(F), FIG. 109(C)(F)). According to this configuration, more uniform production can be performed in one change, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, before the reach formation effect (FIG. 107(E), FIG. 108(E), FIG. 109(E)), the pseudo continuous effect (FIG. 107(A)(B)(C)). (D), FIGS. 108(A)(B)(C)(D), and FIGS. 108(A)(B)(C)(D)). According to this configuration, the interest of the game can be improved by the effect including the pseudo-relation.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, it is possible to execute an effect in which the enemy character symbol CRBG simulating the enemy character is temporarily stopped instead of the middle effect symbol 8C (FIG. 107(B), FIG. 108(B), FIG. 109). (B)). According to this configuration, the pseudo-relational production is highly likely to be interesting, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the attack effect (before reach) is an effect using the effect button 63 (FIG. 109(C)). The attack effect (after reach) is an effect using the effect button 63 (FIG. 108(F), FIG. 109(F)). With this configuration, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of operation stock production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above, in the attack effect (after reach), the button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed, and the message image MSG of “continuous hit” is displayed to encourage the player to repeatedly hit. On the other hand, a message image of "long press" may be displayed to prompt the player to long press.

[Modification 2]
Although not particularly mentioned above, in attacking the enemy character CRB (attack effect (before reach), attack effect (after reach)), a display indicating the physical strength of the enemy character CRB may be performed. For example, the physical strength is displayed on a horizontally long bar.

[Modification 3]
In the above, the operation of the effect button 63 has been described as an example, but the operation section is not limited to the operation of the effect button 63 as long as the operation unit can be operated by the player.

[Modification 4]
In the above, the effect on the first special figure hold is taken as an example, but the effect on the second special figure hold may be used.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect C6-1]
A gaming machine,
In the variable period including the first period from the start of variation of the effect symbol to the reach formation in which the effect symbol stops in a predetermined mode, and the second period from the reach formation to the notification of the win, the first period and It is possible to execute a series of effects over the second period,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C6-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect C6-1,
The series of effects is an effect in which a specific character appears,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C6-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect C6-1 or aspect C6-2,
The series of effects is an attack effect of attacking a specific character,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C6-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C6-1 to C6-3,
The series of effects includes a pseudo continuous effect in which the effect symbol repeats temporary stop and re-change in the first period.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C6-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect C6-4,
In the pseudo continuous production, when the production symbol is temporarily stopped, it is possible to execute a character symbol stop production in which a pattern simulating a specific character is temporarily stopped.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C6-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C6-1 to C6-5,
The series of effects includes an operation unit effect using an operation unit operable by a player in at least one of the first period and the second period,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The decorative pattern color change effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 110 to 112, for example, the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and other movable accessory disposed around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are easy to see in the drawings. Therefore, it is omitted.

In this decorative design color change effect, its occurrence is first announced by the look-ahead effect, and further, the color of the decorative pattern can be changed to another color. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 (for example, variation effect start command, pre-determination command), and includes an instruction to execute a decorative pattern color change effect, The corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

The background image used in the decorative pattern color change effect (referred to as “specific background image”) is a specific image that is not included in the normal background image. For example, the moon image, dark space plunge image, dark space escape image. , A specific image such as an image of the inside of a spacecraft. The normal background image is a normal image such as a city image, a forest image, a sea image, a seabed image, and an underground image. The specific background image and the normal background image may be a still image or a moving image.

Here, the decorative design pattern color change effect A will be described first, and the decorative design pattern color change effect B and the decorative pattern color change effect C will be sequentially described.

[Decorative pattern color change effect A]
The decorative pattern color change effect A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern color change effect A. In the decorative design color change effect A, the occurrence thereof is first announced by the look-ahead effect, and the color of the decorative pattern can be changed to another color.

First, as shown in FIG. 110(A), the city image THG1 is displayed as a normal background image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, In the display mode in which the right decorative design 8R of the stereoscopic image is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a, the variation effect (variable display) of the decorative design (design: number "1" to number "9") Be started.

The number "7" has a bright red color. The odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" except the number "7" all have the same bright green color. The even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color.

When the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative design is started, the display of the decorative design that is stopped and displayed changes from the opaque state to the translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed to the high speed display mode. .. Thereby, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semitransparent decorative pattern which is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped). Note that the decorative pattern is in a display mode in which the decorative pattern moves in small increments in the vertical direction when the temporary stop display is performed.

The variation icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, which are currently changing as the end of the first special map reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (on the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (on the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad from the position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The reserved display positions 9Ad are arranged and displayed linearly along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad. The variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad are always displayed without disappearing from the display screen 7a when the decorative symbol color change effect A is performed.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, the blue spherical retention icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold are displayed. The hold icon is not displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one stocked icon that has not been digested for the hold icon. In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting opening 20 and the second starting opening 21.

In addition, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbol, is supported. In addition to the hold icon 9A, which corresponds to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 The special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21 are arranged and displayed as unillustrated numbers on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 is a blue number (bright blue may be used, dark blue may be used, or blue in the middle between light blue and dark blue may be used). On the left side, the number of the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is a red number (either bright red, dark red, or red between bright red and dark red) ) Is arranged on the upper side of the center of the display screen 7a in a state of being separated from each other on the right side and is always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as the number of reserved balls as numerical values, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and it is easy to intuitively understand. Note that these numbers are arranged on the forefront side of the display screen 7a and other images are displayed behind the foreground of the display screen 7a so that visibility is not hindered by the other images. It is like this.

Here, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “icon”) will be briefly described. Due to the difference in shape and color, the difference in expectation in winning in the lottery corresponding to the icon. Is represented. For example, among the six icons, a yellow (gold) star icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, a red spherical icon, a blue spherical icon, and a white spherical icon, a yellow (gold) star icon. The icon with the highest hit probability, the black spherical icon with the second highest expectation of success, the smiling sphere icon with the third highest expectation of success, and the red spherical icon with the fourth highest expectation of success. , The blue spherical icon has the fifth highest expectation of success, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of success. The smile sphere icon is further set to have a high expectation of being a jackpot in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (Rainbow (hit jackpot)).

In addition, the blue spherical icon has a display mode that constantly blinks, a display mode that has a dark blue color when it is turned off, a display mode that has a bright blue color when it is turned on, and a display mode that turns on from a light off state. The color gradually changes to bright blue, and then gradually changes from darkness to darkness to dark blue.

In addition, the red spherical icon has a display mode that constantly flashes, a display mode that has a dark red color when it is turned off, a display mode that has a bright red color when it is turned on, and a display mode that turns on from a light off state. It gradually changes to bright red, and then changes gradually from dark to dark to red.

In FIG. 110(A), a blue spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad. This suggests a notice that the game ball enters the first starting opening 20 and the decorative pattern color change effect A is started by the look-ahead effect. When the fluctuating effect (variable display) of the decorative design is started, the left decorative design 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "5" having light green, and the middle decorative design 8C having light blue is stopped at the number "6". The displayed right decorative pattern 8R having a bright red color is stopped and displayed with the number "7", so that the variable icon 9C disappears and the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 110(B), the blue spherical hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the blue spherical change icon 9C. When the color change effect A is started, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R disappear from the display screen 7a, and further, from the city image THG1 which is the normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a. As the first specific background image, the dark space rush image THG2 is switched to, and the character CRB is displayed blinking a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 to 15 times) in the center of the display screen 7a. Specifically, when the character CRB appears in the center of the display screen 7a, the character CRB blinks largely (for example, once or twice), then blinks small, and finally blinks again largely (for example, once). 2 to 3 times). This makes it easier for the player to recognize the start of the decorative pattern color change effect A.

When the character CRB is blinked a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 to 15 times), the dark space entry which is the first specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a is entered as shown in FIG. 110(C). The image THG2 is switched to the dark space escape image THG3 as the second specific background image, and the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R appear again on the display screen 7a. The left decorative design 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "5" having dark blue, and the right decorative design 8R is temporarily stopped with the number "4" having dark blue.

As described above, the number "5" has a bright green color, but when the decorative design color change effect A is started, it is forcibly changed from a light green color to a dark blue color, and the decorative pattern color change effect A is produced. It has a bright green color and does not appear. Further, as described above, the number "4" has a bright blue color, but when the decorative design color change effect A is started, it is forcibly changed from a light blue color to a dark blue color, and a decorative design color change occurs. The effect A has a bright blue color and does not appear. That is, when the decorative design color change effect A is started, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a in the state of having the same color, dark blue. Light blue and dark blue are bluish colors and are similar to each other.

When the decorative pattern color change effect A is started, the sizes of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are compared with the sizes of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R that are normally displayed in the background image. , One size larger.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 110(D), the right decorative design 8R of the number "4" that has been temporarily stopped is semi-transparent and rapidly moves forward to the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3. The opaque number "5" having a dark blue color appears from the rear as a right decorative design 8R and is temporarily stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 110(E). 8L and the right decorative design 8R are the same design, and are temporarily stopped and displayed with an opaque number "5" having a dark blue color.

After that, as shown in FIG. 110(F), the left decorative design 8L of the number "5" that has been temporarily stopped becomes semi-transparent and rapidly moves forward to the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3. The opaque number “6” having a dark blue color appears from the rear as a left decorative design 8L and is temporarily stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 110(G). 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "6" having a dark blue color, and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped with the number "5" having a dark blue color. As described above, the number "6" has a light blue color, but when the decorative design color change effect A is started, it is forcibly changed from light blue to dark blue, and the decorative pattern color change effect A Has a bright blue color and does not appear.

After that, as shown in FIG. 110(H), the right decorative design 8R of the number "5" that has been temporarily stopped is semi-transparent and rapidly moves forward to the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3. Escape from the opaque number "6" having a dark blue color from the rear as it appears as a right decorative design 8R and is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are the same design. Then, it is temporarily stopped and displayed with an opaque number "6" having a dark blue color.

After that, the left decorative design 8L of the number "6" that has been temporarily stopped is semi-transparent and rapidly moves toward the front to escape from the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3, and accordingly bright from the rear. An opaque number "7" having red appears as a left decorative design 8L and is temporarily stopped and displayed. The left decorative design 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed as a bright red number "7", and right decorative design is displayed. 8R is temporarily stopped at the number "6" with dark blue color. As described above, the number "7" has a bright red color, and when the decorative pattern color change effect A is started, it does not change from bright red to dark blue, that is, the decorative pattern color change effect A starts. However, the only thing that appears is that no color change occurs.

After that, the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "6" that was temporarily displayed is semi-transparent and rapidly moves toward the front to escape from the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3, which is bright from the rear. When an opaque number "7" having a red color appears as the right decorative pattern 8R, as shown in FIG. 110(I), it appears semi-transparent and becomes semi-transparent and rapidly moves forward. Escape from the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3, and as shown in FIG. 110(J), the left decorative design 8L of the number "7" is temporarily displayed on the display screen 7a, and the right decorative design 8R and the middle decorative design. 8C does not appear on the display screen 7a.

After that, when the size of the left decorative design 8L of the number "7" starts to shrink and a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) elapses, the second screen displayed on the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. The dark space escape image THG3, which is the specific background image of, is switched again to the city image THG1 which is the normal background image (at this time, the city image THG1 may be switched to another normal image (for example, an underground image) as the normal background image) , The opaque number "8" having a light blue color appears on the display screen 7a as the right decorative pattern 8R and is temporarily stopped, and then the size of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "7" is the original size (normal background image). Returning to the size of the left decorative design 8L that was displayed in (1), the opaque number "3" having a bright green color appears as the middle decorative design 8C on the display screen 7a and is temporarily stopped. As a result, the decorative pattern color change effect A ends.

After that, as shown in FIG. 110(L), the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "7" having a bright red color, the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "3" having a bright green color, and the right decoration When the symbol 8R is stopped and displayed with the number "6" having a light blue color, the symbol 8R is lost and the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

[Decorative pattern color change effect B]
Next, the decorative pattern color change effect B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 111 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern color change effect B. In the decorative design color change effect B, the occurrence thereof is first announced by the look-ahead effect, and the color of the decorative pattern can be changed to another color.

First, as shown in FIG. 111(A), the city image THG1 is displayed as a normal background image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, In the display mode in which the right decorative design 8R of the stereoscopic image is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a, the variation effect (variable display) of the decorative design (design: number "1" to number "9") Be started.

The number "7" has a bright red color. The odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" except the number "7" all have the same bright green color. The even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color.

When the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative design is started, the display of the decorative design that is stopped and displayed changes from the opaque state to the translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed to the high speed display mode. .. Thereby, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semitransparent decorative pattern which is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped). Note that the decorative pattern is in a display mode in which the decorative pattern moves in small increments in the vertical direction when the temporary stop display is performed.

The variation icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, which are currently changing as the end of the first special map reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (on the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (on the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad from the position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The reserved display positions 9Ad are arranged and displayed linearly along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad. The variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad are always displayed without disappearing from the display screen 7a when the decorative pattern color change effect B is performed.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, the blue spherical retention icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold are displayed. The hold icon is not displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one stocked icon that has not been digested for the hold icon. In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting opening 20 and the second starting opening 21.

In addition, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbol, is supported. In addition to the hold icon 9A, which corresponds to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 The special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21 are arranged and displayed as unillustrated numbers on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 is a blue number (bright blue may be used, dark blue may be used, or blue in the middle between light blue and dark blue may be used). On the left side, the number of the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is a red number (either bright red, dark red, or red between bright red and dark red) ) Is arranged on the upper side of the center of the display screen 7a in a state of being separated from each other on the right side and is always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as the number of reserved balls as numerical values, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and it is easy to intuitively understand. Note that these numbers are arranged on the forefront side of the display screen 7a and other images are displayed behind the foreground of the display screen 7a so that visibility is not hindered by the other images. It is like this.

Here, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “icon”) will be briefly described. Due to the difference in shape and color, the difference in expectation in winning in the lottery corresponding to the icon. Is represented. For example, among the six icons, a yellow (gold) star icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, a red spherical icon, a blue spherical icon, and a white spherical icon, a yellow (gold) star icon. The icon with the highest hit probability, the black spherical icon with the second highest expectation of success, the smiling sphere icon with the third highest expectation of success, and the red spherical icon with the fourth highest expectation of success. , The blue spherical icon has the fifth highest expectation of success, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of success. The smile sphere icon is further set to have a high expectation of being a jackpot in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (Rainbow (hit jackpot)).

In addition, the blue spherical icon has a display mode that constantly blinks, a display mode that has a dark blue color when it is turned off, a display mode that has a bright blue color when it is turned on, and a display mode that turns on from a light off state. The color gradually changes to bright blue, and then gradually changes from darkness to darkness to dark blue.

In addition, the red spherical icon has a display mode that constantly flashes, a display mode that has a dark red color when it is turned off, a display mode that has a bright red color when it is turned on, and a display mode that turns on from a light off state. It gradually changes to bright red, and then changes gradually from dark to dark to red.

In FIG. 111(A), a blue spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad. This suggests a notice that the game ball enters the first starting port 20 and the decorative pattern color change effect B is started by the look-ahead effect. When the fluctuating effect (variable display) of the decorative design is started, the left decorative design 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "5" having light green, and the middle decorative design 8C having light blue is stopped at the number "6". The displayed right decorative pattern 8R having a bright red color is stopped and displayed with the number "7", so that the variable icon 9C disappears and the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 111(B), the blue spherical hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd and becomes the blue spherical change icon 9C. When the color change effect B is started, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R disappear from the display screen 7a, and further, from the city image THG1 which is the normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a. As the first specific background image, the dark space rush image THG2 is switched to, and the character CRB is displayed blinking a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 to 15 times) in the center of the display screen 7a. Specifically, when the character CRB appears in the center of the display screen 7a, the character CRB blinks largely (for example, once or twice), then blinks small, and finally blinks again largely (for example, once). 2 to 3 times). This makes it easier for the player to recognize the start of the decorative pattern color change effect B.

When the character CRB is blinked a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 to 15 times), the dark space entry which is the first specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a is entered as shown in FIG. 111(C). The image THG2 is switched to the dark space escape image THG3 as the second specific background image, and the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R appear again on the display screen 7a. The left decorative design 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "5" having dark blue, and the right decorative design 8R is temporarily stopped with the number "4" having dark blue.

As described above, the number "5" has a bright green color, but when the decorative design color change effect B is started, it is forcibly changed from the light green color to the dark blue color, and the decorative pattern color change effect B. It has a bright green color and does not appear. Further, as described above, the number “4” has a light blue color, but when the decorative design color change effect B is started, it is forcibly changed from a light blue color to a dark blue color, and a decorative design color change occurs. The effect B has a bright blue color and does not appear. That is, when the decorative design color change effect B is started, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a in the state of having the same color, dark blue. Light blue and dark blue are bluish colors and are similar to each other.

When the decorative design color change effect B is started, the sizes of the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are compared with the sizes of the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R displayed in the normal background image. , One size larger.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 111(D), the right decorative design 8R of the number "4" that has been temporarily stopped is semi-transparent and rapidly moves forward to the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3. The opaque number “5” having a dark blue color appears from the rear as a right decorative design 8R and is temporarily stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 111(E). 8L and the right decorative design 8R are the same design, and are temporarily stopped and displayed with an opaque number "5" having a dark blue color.

After that, as shown in FIG. 111(F), the left decorative design 8L of the number "5" that has been temporarily stopped becomes semitransparent and rapidly moves forward, and the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3. The opaque number "6" having a dark blue color appears from the rear as a left decorative design 8L and is temporarily stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 111(G). 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "6" having a dark blue color, and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped with the number "5" having a dark blue color. As described above, the number “6” has a light blue color, but when the decorative design color change effect B is started, it is forcibly changed from light blue to dark blue, and the decorative pattern color change effect B Has a bright blue color and does not appear.

After that, as shown in FIG. 111(H), the right decorative design 8R of the number "5" that has been temporarily stopped is semi-transparent and moves rapidly forward to the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3. When the opaque number "6" having a dark blue color appears from the rear as the right decorative pattern 8R, it is tentatively displayed as shown in FIGS. 111(I) and 111(J). , Becomes semi-transparent and rapidly moves forward to escape from the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3, and as shown in FIG. 111(K), the left decorative pattern 8L of the numeral “6” is displayed on the display screen 7a. The display pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the right decorative design 8R and the middle decorative design 8C are not displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, when the size of the left decorative design 8L of the number "6" starts to be reduced and a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) elapses, the second screen displayed on the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. The dark space escape image THG3, which is the specific background image of, is switched again to the city image THG1 which is the normal background image (at this time, the city image THG1 may be switched to another normal image (for example, an underground image) as the normal background image) , The opaque number "7" having a bright red color appears on the display screen 7a as a right decorative pattern 8R and is temporarily stopped, and then the size of the left decorative pattern 8L having a dark blue number "6" is the original size. While returning to (the size of the left decorative pattern 8L displayed in the normal background image), the color returns from dark blue to bright blue, and an opaque number "3" having a bright green appears on the display screen 7a as a medium decorative pattern 8C. Stop temporarily. As a result, the decorative design color change effect B ends.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 111(M), the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "6" having a light blue color, the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "3" having a light green color, and the right decoration When the symbol 8R is stopped and displayed with the number "7" having a bright red color, the symbol 8R is lost and the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

[Decorative pattern color change effect C]
Next, the decorative pattern color change effect C will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 112 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern color change effect C. In the decorative design color change effect C, the occurrence thereof is first announced by the look-ahead effect, and further, the color of the decorative pattern can be changed to another color.

First, as shown in FIG. 112(A), the city image THG1 is displayed as a normal background image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the stereoscopic image left decorative pattern 8L, the stereoscopic image middle decorative pattern 8C, In the display mode in which the right decorative design 8R of the stereoscopic image is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a, the variation effect (variable display) of the decorative design (design: number "1" to number "9") Be started.

The number "7" has a bright red color. The odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" except the number "7" all have the same bright green color. The even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color.

When the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative design is started, the display of the decorative design that is stopped and displayed changes from the opaque state to the translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed to the high speed display mode. .. Thereby, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semitransparent decorative pattern which is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped). Note that the decorative pattern is in a display mode in which the decorative pattern moves in small increments in the vertical direction when the temporary stop display is performed.

The variation icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, which are currently changing as the end of the first special map reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (on the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (on the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad from the position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The reserved display positions 9Ad are arranged and displayed linearly along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad. The variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad are always displayed without disappearing from the display screen 7a when the decorative pattern color change effect C is performed.

Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, the blue spherical retention icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and the second hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold are displayed. The hold icon is not displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one stocked icon that has not been digested for the hold icon. In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting opening 20 and the second starting opening 21.

In addition, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbol, is supported. In addition to the hold icon 9A, which corresponds to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 The special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21 are arranged and displayed as unillustrated numbers on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 is a blue number (bright blue may be used, dark blue may be used, or blue in the middle between light blue and dark blue may be used). On the left side, the number of the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is a red number (either bright red, dark red, or red between bright red and dark red) ) Is arranged on the upper side of the center of the display screen 7a in a state of being separated from each other on the right side and is always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as the number of reserved balls as numerical values, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and it is easy to intuitively understand. Note that these numbers are arranged on the forefront side of the display screen 7a and other images are displayed behind the foreground of the display screen 7a so that visibility is not hindered by the other images. It is like this.

Here, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “icon”) will be briefly described. Due to the difference in shape and color, the difference in expectation in winning in the lottery corresponding to the icon. Is represented. For example, among the six icons, a yellow (gold) star icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, a red spherical icon, a blue spherical icon, and a white spherical icon, a yellow (gold) star icon. The icon with the highest hit probability, the black spherical icon with the second highest expectation of success, the smiling sphere icon with the third highest expectation of success, and the red spherical icon with the fourth highest expectation of success. , The blue spherical icon has the fifth highest expectation of success, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of success. The smile sphere icon is further set to have a high expectation of being a jackpot in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (Rainbow (hit jackpot)).

In addition, the blue spherical icon has a display mode that constantly blinks, a display mode that has a dark blue color when it is turned off, a display mode that has a bright blue color when it is turned on, and a display mode that turns on from a light off state. The color gradually changes to bright blue, and then gradually changes from darkness to darkness to dark blue.

In addition, the red spherical icon has a display mode that constantly flashes, a display mode that has a dark red color when it is turned off, a display mode that has a bright red color when it is turned on, and a display mode that turns on from a light off state. It gradually changes to bright red, and then changes gradually from dark to dark to red.

In FIG. 112(A), a blue spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad. This suggests a notice that the game ball enters the first starting port 20 and the decorative pattern color change effect C is started by the look-ahead effect. When the fluctuating effect (variable display) of the decorative design is started, the left decorative design 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "5" having light green, and the middle decorative design 8C having light blue is stopped at the number "6". The displayed right decorative pattern 8R having a bright red color is stopped and displayed with the number "7", so that the variable icon 9C disappears and the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 112(B), the blue spherical hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd to become the blue spherical change icon 9C and the decorative pattern. When the color change effect C is started, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R disappear from the display screen 7a, and further, from the city image THG1 which is the normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a. As the first specific background image, the dark space rush image THG2 is switched to, and the character CRB is displayed blinking a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 to 15 times) in the center of the display screen 7a. Specifically, when the character CRB appears in the center of the display screen 7a, the character CRB blinks largely (for example, once or twice), then blinks small, and finally blinks again largely (for example, once). 2 to 3 times). This makes it easier for the player to recognize the start of the decorative design color change effect C.

When the character CRB is blinked a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 to 15 times), the dark space entry which is the first specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a is entered as shown in FIG. 112(C). The image THG2 is switched to the dark space escape image THG3 as the second specific background image, and the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R appear again on the display screen 7a. The left decorative design 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "5" having dark blue, and the right decorative design 8R is temporarily stopped with the number "4" having dark blue.

As described above, the number "5" has a bright green color, but when the decorative design color change effect C is started, it is forcibly changed from the light green color to the dark blue color, and the decorative pattern color change effect C is obtained. It has a bright green color and does not appear. Further, as described above, the number “4” has a light blue color, but when the decorative design color change effect C is started, it is forcibly changed from a light blue color to a dark blue color, and a decorative design color change occurs. The effect C has a bright blue color and does not appear. That is, when the decorative design color change effect C is started, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a in the state of having the same color, dark blue. Light blue and dark blue are bluish colors and are similar to each other.

When the decorative design color change effect C is started, the sizes of the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are compared with the sizes of the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R that are normally displayed in the background image. , One size larger.

After that, as shown in FIG. 112(D), the right decorative design 8R of the number "4" that has been temporarily stopped is semi-transparent and rapidly moves forward to the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3. The opaque number “5” having a dark blue color appears from the rear as a right decorative design 8R and is temporarily stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 112(E). 8L and the right decorative design 8R are the same design, and are temporarily stopped and displayed with an opaque number "5" having a dark blue color.

After that, as shown in FIG. 112(F), the left decorative design 8L of the number "5" that has been temporarily stopped becomes semi-transparent and rapidly moves forward to the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3. The opaque number "6" having a dark blue color appears from the rear as a left decorative design 8L and is temporarily stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 112(G). 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "6" having a dark blue color, and the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped with the number "5" having a dark blue color. As described above, the number "6" has a light blue color, but when the decorative design color change effect C is started, it is forcibly changed from light blue to dark blue, and the decorative pattern color change effect C It has a bright blue color and does not appear.

After that, as shown in FIG. 112(H), the right decorative design 8R of the number "5" that has been temporarily stopped becomes semi-transparent and moves rapidly forward to the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3. When the opaque number “6” having a dark blue color appears from the rear as the right decorative pattern 8R, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R approach each other as shown in FIG. 112(I). Then, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R having the dark blue number "6" are returned to the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R having the bright blue number "6", and the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design are again provided. The symbols 8R are separated from each other and return to the original position again. Then, as shown in FIG. 112(J), a fireball (fireball) appears from the center of the display screen 7a and moves toward the blue spherical fluctuation icon 9C existing below to draw an arc, and the fluctuation is caused. The display mode collides with the icon 9C.

As a result of this collision, as shown in FIG. 112(K), the blue spherical variation icon 9C changes to a yellow (gold) star variation icon.

After that, as shown in FIG. 112(L), the dark space escape image THG3 which is the second specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched again to the city image THG1 which is the normal background image (at this time, the normal image). As the background image, the city image THG1 may be switched to another normal image (for example, an underground image). As a result, the decorative pattern color change effect C ends.

After that, when the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R disappear from the display screen 7a, the variation effect (variable display) of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R is started again. At this time, the colors of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R return to their original values, and all odd numbers "1", "3", "5", and "9" except the number "7" are Returning to the same light green, the even "2", "4", "6" and "8" all return to the same light blue. The number "7" is always bright red regardless of the presence or absence of the decorative pattern color change effect C.

After that, when the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are stopped and displayed with the same design, it becomes a big hit and then the big hit game (big hit production) is started, while the left decoration When the symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed with the same symbol, it is lost. When the jackpot or the deviation is confirmed, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the decorative design color change effect.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, a plurality of types of images can be displayed in the decorative pattern color change effect A of FIG. 110, the decorative pattern color change effect B of FIG. 111, and the decorative pattern color change effect C of FIG. 112. An even number “2”, “4”, “6” and “8” (first pattern) having a bright blue color (first color) and a bright blue color (first color) is provided with the image display device 7 (display means). Variation production (variation display) by one or more of odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" (second pattern) except odd number "7" having different bright green color (second color) Of these, the specific effects that can be changed to the dark blue (third color) similar to the light blue (first color) of the first symbol and the second symbol (decorative symbol color change effect A in FIGS. 110(C) to (H). 111(C) to (K) in the decorative design color change effect B, and FIGS. 112(C) to (H) in the decorative pattern color change effect C. According to this configuration, in the specific effect, the first symbol and the second symbol can be changed to a dark blue color (third color) similar to the light blue color (first color). By changing the color, it is possible to contribute to eliminating monotony with respect to the variation effect (variation display) of the design. Therefore, interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative pattern color change effect A of FIG. 110, the decorative pattern color change effect B of FIG. 111, and the decorative pattern color change effect C of FIG. 112, bright blue (first color) is , And the same color as that of the blue spherical variation icon 9C. The blue spherical icon is a display mode that constantly flashes, a display mode that has a dark blue color when it is turned off, a display mode that has a bright blue color when it is turned on, and a stepwise mode from a turn-off to a turn-on state It changes to bright blue, and then gradually changes from dark to dark blue. That is, since the blue spherical variation icon 9C is in the display mode of blinking, when blinking, the even blue colors of the even numbers “2”, “4”, “6” and “8” (first symbol) ( The color may be the same as the first color). According to this configuration, the blue spherical variation icon 9C blinks, and the blue spherical variation icon 9C for the even numbers “2”, “4”, “6” and “8” (first pattern) is displayed. A display mode in which colors are partially linked can be adopted.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative pattern color change effect A of FIG. 110, the decorative pattern color change effect B of FIG. 111, and the decorative pattern color change effect C of FIG. 112, the specific effect is the first symbol. As a predetermined combination with the second design, the left decorative design 8L is an odd number "5" (second design) and the right decorative design is an even number "4" (first design) so that it starts from a combination. ing. According to this configuration, since the predetermined combination of the first symbol and the second symbol is started as the start of the specific effect, it is possible to easily inform the player of the start time of the specific effect.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, for example, in the decorative pattern color change effect C of FIG. 112, in the specific effect, when the reach is formed by the even number “6” (first pattern) having dark blue color, the even number “6”. "(1st pattern) can be changed from dark blue (3rd color) to light blue (1st color) again. According to this configuration, when the reach is formed with the first pattern in the specific effect, the formation of the reach can be made more noticeable due to the color change, and the expectation of hitting the player is improved due to the color change. It can contribute to making you feel.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative pattern color change effect A of FIG. 110, the decorative pattern color change effect B of FIG. 111, and the decorative pattern color change effect C of FIG. (3rd color) Even number changed to "2", "4", "6" and "8" (1st pattern) to bright blue (1st color) again, dark blue (3rd color) The odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" (2nd pattern) except the changed odd number "7" can be changed to bright green (2nd color) again. There is. According to this configuration, it is possible to contribute to the flow from the end of the specific effect to another effect without a sense of discomfort due to the end of the specific effect.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative pattern color change effect A of FIG. 110, the decorative pattern color change effect B of FIG. 111, and the decorative pattern color change effect C of FIG. 112, odd numbers “1” and “3” , "5" and "9" (second pattern) further include bright blue (first color), bright green (second color) and dark blue (third color), and bright red (fourth color). ) Is included, and in the specific effect, the odd number “7” (second pattern) having bright red (fourth color) is not changed to dark blue (third color). According to this configuration, the odd number "7" (second symbol) in which the color change does not occur in the specific effect can be the only symbol, and the existence of the odd number "7" (second symbol) can be made more conspicuous. It is possible to contribute to making the player feel that the expectation of winning is increased when the odd number “7” (the second symbol) appears in the specific effect.

[Modification]
The following is a modification of the decorative design color change effect.
[Modification 1]
The decorative pattern color change effect A of FIG. 110, the decorative pattern color change effect B of FIG. 111, and the decorative pattern color change effect C of FIG. 112 are performed based on the game ball entering the first starting opening 20. Met. In other words, it was performed in a so-called left-handed gaming state. However, it may be performed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second starting opening 21. In other words, it may be performed in a so-called right-handed gaming state.

[Modification 2]
In the decorative pattern color change effect A of FIG. 110, the decorative pattern color change effect B of FIG. 111, and the decorative pattern color change effect C of FIG. 112, various symbols are numeric symbols and no character image is provided. However, only odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" (second symbol) are provided with character images, and specific effects (decorative symbol color change effects A in FIGS. 110(C) to (H), 111(C) to (K) in the decorative design color change effect B and FIGS. 112(C) to (H) in the decorative pattern color change effect C), odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and " You may make it delete the character image provided in 9" (2nd pattern). By doing so, it is not the character image that causes the color change in the specific effect, but the number portion such as an odd number or even number. Therefore, by deleting the character image, it is easy for the player to emphasize the occurrence of the color change in the number portion. can do. When the character image is provided in the odd number “7” (second pattern), the character image provided in the odd number “7” (second pattern) is not deleted in the specific effect. As a result, it can be the only symbol provided with the character image in the specific effect, and the existence of the odd number "7" (second symbol) can be made more conspicuous, and the odd number "7" (second symbol) in the specific effect. ) Appears, it can contribute to making the player feel that the degree of expectation of winning is increased.

[Modification 3]
In the decorative pattern color change effect A of FIG. 110, the decorative pattern color change effect B of FIG. 111, and the decorative pattern color change effect C of FIG. 112, a game ball enters the first starting port 20 and a blue ball is formed by the look-ahead effect. The hold icon 9A is displayed at the hold display position 9Ad to suggest the advance notice of starting the decorative pattern color change effect. However, when the game ball enters the first starting opening 20 and the red spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the hold display position 9Ad by the look-ahead effect, a notice to start the decorative pattern color change effect may be suggested. .. In this case, in the specific effect, except for the odd number “7”, like the decorative pattern color change effect A of FIG. 110, the decorative pattern color change effect B of FIG. 111, and the decorative pattern color change effect C of FIG. 1”, “3”, “5” and “9” and even numbers “2”, “4”, “6” and “8” may be forcibly changed to dark blue. Since the red spherical hold icon 9A has a higher expectation of winning than the blue spherical hold icon 9A, the odd number “1”, “3”, and the same color as the bright red color of the odd number “7”, You may make it forcibly change "5" and "9" and even "2", "4", "6" and "8" to bright red.

[Modification 4]
In the decorative pattern color change effect A of FIG. 110, the decorative pattern color change effect B of FIG. 111, and the decorative pattern color change effect C of FIG. 112, when the specific effect ends, the even number changed to dark blue (third color) 2", "4", "6" and "8" (1st pattern) are changed to bright blue (1st color) again, and changed to dark blue (3rd color) Odd number except "7""1","3","5" and "9" (second pattern) were changed to bright green (second color) again. However, the even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" (1st pattern) changed to dark blue (3rd color) are not changed to light blue (1st color) but are changed to dark blue as they are. You may keep it, but odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" (2nd pattern) except the odd number "7" changed to dark blue (third color) are bright green. The dark blue color may be maintained as it is without changing to (second color). By doing so, it is possible to increase the variation of the effect after the end of the specific effect and provide the player with various effects depending on the color of the design.

[Modification 5]
In the decorative design pattern color change effect A of FIG. 110, the decorative pattern color change effect B of FIG. 111, and the decorative pattern color change effect C of FIG. 112, even numbers “2”, “4”, “6” and “8” are used in the specific effect. "(1st pattern) is forcibly changed from light blue to dark blue, and odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" (2nd pattern) except odd number "7" are changed from bright green. It was forcibly changed to dark blue. However, in the specific effect, even "2", "4", "6" and "8" (first pattern) is forcibly changed from light blue to dark green, and odd "1" except odd "7". , “3”, “5” and “9” (second pattern) may be forcibly changed from light green to dark green. The bright green and the dark green are greenish colors and are similar to each other.

[Modification 6]
In the decorative pattern color change effect A of FIG. 110, the decorative pattern color change effect B of FIG. 111, and the decorative pattern color change effect C of FIG. 112, the number pattern temporarily displayed in the specific effect (for example, the number “4”). The right decorative pattern 8R) becomes semi-transparent and rapidly moves toward the front to escape from the dark space represented by the dark space image THG3, and along with this, a pattern of opaque numbers having a dark blue color from behind (for example, , The number “5” appears as the right decorative pattern 8R) and is temporarily stopped and displayed. However, when the numerical design (for example, the right decorative design 8R of the number "4") that has been temporarily stopped is translucent and moves rapidly toward the front, the numerical design (for example, the number "4"). The display pattern may be such that the size of the right decorative pattern 8R) is gradually increased. By doing this, the design of the number displayed in the temporary stop can become semi-transparent and can move rapidly while increasing toward the front, so that the design of the number displayed in the temporary stop approaches the player side. It is possible to realize the expression of coming and to provide the player with a dynamic effect by high-speed movement of the numerical design.

[Modification 7]
In the specific effect in the decorative pattern color change effect A of FIG. 110, the decorative pattern color change effect B of FIG. 111, and the decorative pattern color change effect C of FIG. 112, the sizes of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are normal background images. The size was slightly larger than the sizes of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R displayed in. However, the sizes of the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R in the specific effect may be the same as the sizes of the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R that are displayed in the normal background image, or may be the same. The sizes of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R in the effect may be slightly smaller than the sizes of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R displayed in the normal background image.

[Modification 8]
In the decorative pattern color change effect A in FIG. 110, the decorative pattern color change effect B in FIG. 111, and the decorative pattern color change effect C in FIG. 112, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R have the same dark blue color. It was displayed on the display screen 7a in a state of having it. However, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R may be displayed on the display screen 7a in a state of having the same color, bright blue. This bright blue color is the same as the bright blue color that even numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” have in the normal background image.

[Modification 9]
In the decorative pattern/pattern color change effect A of FIG. 110, the decorative pattern/color change effect B of FIG. 111, and the decorative pattern/color color change effect C of FIG. 112, some of the described effects may not be provided, and other effects may be provided. It may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect C7-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
Among the variable display by one or more kinds of the first design having the first color and the second design having the second color different from the first color, the first design and the second design are defined as the first color. It is possible to execute a specific effect that can be changed to a similar third color,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C7-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect C7-1,
The first color may be the same color as the color attached to the variation icon,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C7-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect C7-1 or aspect C7-2,
The specific effect starts from a predetermined combination of the first symbol and the second symbol,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Mode C7-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C7-1 to C7-3,
In the specific effect, when the reach is formed by the first symbol, the first symbol may be changed from the third color to the first color again.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Mode C7-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C7-1 to C7-4,
A character image is provided only for the second design,
In the specific effect, the character image provided in the second design is deleted,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C7-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C7-1 to C7-5,
When the specific effect is finished, the first design changed to the third color is changed to the first color again, and the second design changed to the third color is changed to the second color again. There is
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Mode C7-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C7-1 to C7-6,
The second pattern further includes one having a fourth color different from the first color, the second color and the third color,
In the specific effect, the second pattern having a fourth color is not changed to the third color,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The special symbol effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 113 to 115. This special symbol effect can be executed during a variable effect of the effect symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the special symbol effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main display device is read. 7 is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a of 7.

[Special design production A]
FIG. 113 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol effect A. The special symbol effect A is executed in a low-probability low-base state in which the game progresses by left-handing. The special symbol effect A is executed using the special symbol effect. Therefore, first, the special effect design will be described.

The special effect design is composed of numerical images of "0 to 9", and numerical images of "1, 3, 5, 7, 9" indicating odd numbers are "0, 2, 4, 6," indicating even numbers. The size is smaller than the number image of "8". Then, when the number image showing the odd number becomes a predetermined mode (doublet) and the big hit is notified, after the big hit game is executed, the transition to the highly accurate high base game state is confirmed.

First, as shown in FIG. 113(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect pattern starts changing. Here, the appearance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing at high speed. Note that three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation and the variable image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(B), a left symbol stop effect is executed. The left symbol stop effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped. The left effect design 8L changes from the upper part to the lower part of the display screen 7a. Here, it is shown that the left effect design 8L is temporarily stopped at "4". At this time, the symbol “3” is displayed below the symbol “4” and the symbol “5” is displayed above the symbol “4”. These symbols "3" and "5" are invisible or semi-transparent at almost the same time as the temporary stop. Here, in particular, among the number images of “0 to 9” forming the left effect design 8L, the number image indicating an odd number is smaller than the number image indicating an even number.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(C), the right symbol movement effect is executed. The right symbol movement effect is an effect in which the right effect symbol 8R moves from the upper part to the lower part of the display screen 7a as shown by an arrow Y. Here, the symbol "3" is moving near the central portion, the symbol "2" is displayed below the symbol "3", and the symbol "4" is displayed above the symbol "3". Here, in particular, among the number images of “0 to 9” that form the right effect design 8R, the number image indicating an odd number is smaller than the number image indicating an even number.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(D), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect design is temporarily stopped in the reach mode. Here, following the left effect design 8L, the right effect design 8R is temporarily stopped at "4". At this time, the symbol “3” is displayed below the symbol “4” and the symbol “5” is displayed above the symbol “4”. These symbols "3" and "5" are invisible or semi-transparent at almost the same time as the temporary stop.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(E), a middle symbol movement effect is executed. The middle symbol movement effect is an effect in which the middle effect symbol 8C moves from the upper part to the lower part of the display screen 7a as shown by an arrow Y. Here, the symbol “2” is moving in the vicinity of the central portion, the symbol “1” is displayed below the symbol “2”, and the symbol “3” is displayed above the symbol “2”. Here, in particular, among the number images of “0 to 9” that form the medium effect design 8C, the number image indicating an odd number is smaller than the number image indicating an even number.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(F), a medium symbol incentive effect is executed. The medium design fanning effect is an effect of moving (for example, moving so as to vibrate) so as to fan whether or not the middle effect symbol 8C moving in the direction of the arrow Y stops at “4” in the normal reach. Here, the symbol “4” is moving near the central portion, the symbol “3” is displayed below the symbol “4”, and the symbol “5” is displayed above the symbol “4”.

Next, as shown in FIG. 113(G), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is an effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB engage in a battle. If the teammate character CRA wins this battle effect, the game is won.
Next, as shown in FIG. 113(H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (winning), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are fixedly stopped in a winning manner. Here, a state is shown in which all of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the left and right are definitely stopped at "4".

[Special design production B]
FIG. 114 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol effect B. The special symbol effect B is another example of the special symbol effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 114(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect pattern starts changing. Here, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing at high speed. Note that three reserved images 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation and the variable image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(B), the left symbol stop effect is executed. The left symbol stop effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped. The left effect design 8L changes from the upper part to the lower part of the display screen 7a. Here, it is shown that the left effect design 8L is temporarily stopped at "4". At this time, the symbol “3” is displayed below the symbol “4” and the symbol “5” is displayed above the symbol “4”. These symbols "3" and "5" are invisible or semi-transparent at almost the same time as the temporary stop. Here, in particular, among the number images of “0 to 9” forming the left effect design 8L, the number image indicating an odd number is smaller than the number image indicating an even number.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(C), the right symbol movement effect is executed. The right symbol movement effect is an effect in which the right effect symbol 8R moves from the upper part to the lower part of the display screen 7a as shown by an arrow Y. Here, the symbol "3" is moving near the central portion, the symbol "2" is displayed below the symbol "3", and the symbol "4" is displayed above the symbol "3". Here, in particular, among the number images of “0 to 9” that form the right effect design 8R, the number image indicating an odd number is smaller than the number image indicating an even number.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(D), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect design is temporarily stopped in the reach mode. Here, following the left effect design 8L, the right effect design 8R is temporarily stopped at "4". At this time, the symbol “3” is displayed below the symbol “4” and the symbol “5” is displayed above the symbol “4”. These symbols "3" and "5" are invisible or semi-transparent at almost the same time as the temporary stop.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(E), a middle symbol movement effect is executed. The middle symbol movement effect is an effect in which the middle effect symbol 8C moves from the upper part to the lower part of the display screen 7a as shown by an arrow Y. Here, the symbol “2” is moving in the vicinity of the central portion, the symbol “1” is displayed below the symbol “2”, and the symbol “3” is displayed above the symbol “2”. Here, in particular, among the number images of “0 to 9” that form the medium effect design 8C, the number image indicating an odd number is smaller than the number image indicating an even number. In addition, the numerical images of "0-9" forming the medium effect design 8C are smaller than the numerical images of "0-9" forming the left and right effect patterns 8L and 8R, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(F), a medium symbol incentive effect is executed. The medium design fanning effect is an effect of moving (for example, moving so as to vibrate) so as to fan whether or not the middle effect symbol 8C moving in the direction of the arrow Y stops at “4” in the normal reach. Here, the symbol “4” is moving near the central portion, the symbol “3” is displayed below the symbol “4”, and the symbol “5” is displayed above the symbol “4”.

Next, as shown in FIG. 114(G), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is an effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB engage in a battle. If the teammate character CRA wins this battle effect, the game is won.
Next, as shown in FIG. 113(H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (winning), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are fixedly stopped in a winning manner. Here, a state is shown in which all of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the left and right are definitely stopped at "4".

[Special design effect C]
FIG. 115 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol effect C. The special symbol effect C is executed in a highly accurate and high base state where the game progresses by hitting to the right. Further, the special symbol effect C is executed using a normal effect symbol. Therefore, first, the normal effect design will be described.

The normal effect design is composed of numerical images of "0 to 9", and all the numerical images have the same size. Then, when the number image showing the odd number becomes a predetermined mode (doublet) and the big hit is notified, after the big hit game is executed, the transition (continuation) to the high-accuracy high base game state is confirmed.

First, as shown in FIG. 115(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect pattern starts changing. Here, the appearance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing at high speed. Note that three reserved images 9B corresponding to the second special figure reservation and the variable image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(B), a fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (missing), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in the manner of losing. Here, it is shown that the left effect design 8L is "4", the middle effect design 8C is "1", and the right effect design 8R is "5". At this time, the variable image 9C disappears, and the three reserved images 9B corresponding to the second special figure reservation are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(C), the variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect pattern starts changing. Here, the appearance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing at high speed. At this time, the hold is shifted, and two hold images 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold and the variable image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(D), a fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (missing), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in the manner of losing. Here, it is shown that the left effect design 8L is "0", the middle effect design 8C is "3", and the right effect design 8R is "6". At this time, the variable image 9C disappears, and two reserved images 9B corresponding to the second special figure reservation are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(E), the variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect pattern starts changing. Here, the appearance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing at high speed. At this time, the hold is shifted, and one hold image 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold and the variation image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(F), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect design is temporarily stopped in the reach mode. Here, it is shown that the left effect design 8L and the right effect design 8R are both temporarily stopped at "4". At this time, one reserved image 9B corresponding to the second special figure reservation and the variable image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 115(G), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is an effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB engage in a battle. If the teammate character CRA wins this battle effect, the game is won.
Next, as shown in FIG. 115(H), a fixed stop effect (win) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (winning), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are fixedly stopped in a winning manner. Here, a state is shown in which all of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the left and right are definitely stopped at "4".

[Effect example]
Below, the effect example of special design production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when looking at each of the number image of the left effect design 8L, the number image of the right effect design 8R, and the number image of the middle effect design 8C, the specific number image is the remaining number image. It is smaller than that (FIG. 113(B)(C)(D)(E)(F) and FIG. 114(B)(C)(D)(E)(F)). According to this configuration, a change occurs in the variation of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when looking at each of the number image of the left effect design 8L, the number image of the right effect design 8R, and the number image of the middle effect design 8C, the number image indicating an odd number indicates an even number. It is smaller than the numerical image (FIG. 113(B)(C)(D)(E)(F), FIG. 114(B)(C)(D)(E)(F)). According to this configuration, a change occurs in the variation of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the numerical image for which the transition to the high-accuracy high-base state is confirmed when a big hit is smaller than the remaining numerical images (FIGS. 113(B)(C)( D)(E)(F), FIGS. 114(B)(C)(D)(E)(F)). According to this configuration, a change occurs in the variation of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the numerical images of "0 to 9" forming the medium effect design 8C are smaller than the numerical images of "0 to 9" forming the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R. (FIG. 114(B)(C)(D)(E)(F)). According to this configuration, a further change is produced by the variation of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, there are cases where variable display is performed with special effect symbols (FIGS. 113 and 114), and variable display is performed with normal effect symbols (FIG. 115). According to this configuration, a further change is produced by the variation of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the variable effect display is performed in the special effect symbol in the low accurate low base state (FIGS. 113 and 114), and the variable effect display is performed in the normal effect symbol in the high accurate high base state (FIG. 115). According to this configuration, the variation of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is changed depending on the game state, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of special symbol production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above, in the special effect design, the size of the number image indicating the odd number is smaller than the size of the number image indicating the even number. On the other hand, the size of the number image indicating odd numbers may be larger than the size of the number image indicating even numbers.

[Modification 2]
In the above, in the special effect design, the numerical image in which the transition to the high-accuracy high-base state is confirmed when a big hit is smaller than the remaining numerical images. On the other hand, the numerical image for which the transition to the high-accuracy/high-base state is confirmed in the case of a big hit may be larger than the remaining numerical images.

[Modification 3]
In the above, the special symbol effect C (FIG. 115) is executed in the highly accurate and high base state, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, the special symbol effect C is executed in any one of the low accurate low base state (normal game state), the high accurate high base state (probability variation game state), the low accurate low base state (time saving game state), Further, the special symbol effect A (special symbol effect B) may be executed in any game state.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect C8-1]
By varying and stopping the production symbols in a plurality of rows, a gaming machine that notifies the winning result by the production symbols,
The effect design is composed of numerical images,
In each of the plurality of columns, a variable display is performed with a special effect design in which a specific number image of the number images is smaller than the remaining number images,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C8-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect C8-1,
The specific number image is a number image indicating an odd number, and the remaining number images are number images indicating an even number,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C8-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect C8-1,
When notifying that the winning result is a win, the specific number image is a number image in which the transition to a specific game state is confirmed through a special game in which a game ball can be obtained,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C8-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C8-1 to C8-3,
A specific column of the plurality of columns has a smaller size of the specific number image and the remaining number image as compared with the remaining columns.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C8-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C8-1 to C8-4,
In each of the plurality of columns, when performing a variable display with the special effect design, a variable display with a normal effect design in which the specific number image and the remaining number image of the number images have the same size. Sometimes,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C8-6]
A gaming machine according to aspect C8-5,
In the first game state, the variable display is performed with the special effect symbol, and in the second game state, the variable display is performed with the normal effect symbol,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The decorative pattern visibility changing effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 116 to 118. In FIGS. 116 to 118, for example, the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and other movable accessory disposed around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are easy to see in the drawings. There are some that have been omitted.

This decorative symbol visibility changing effect is performed during the variable effect (during variable display) by the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (for example, variation effect start command) received from the sub-control board 90, and includes an instruction to execute the decorative pattern visibility change effect, it corresponds from the ROM 103. The image data to be read is read and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Further, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands (for example, variation effect start command) received from the sub control board 90, and the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory of the first movable accessory 14 provided in the game board 2 are analyzed. The position and the light emission mode of 14R are changed.

Here, first, the decorative symbol visibility changing effect A will be described, and the decorative symbol visibility changing effect B and the decorative symbol visibility changing effect C will be sequentially described.

[Decorative pattern visibility change effect A]
The decorative symbol visibility changing effect A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 116 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol visibility changing effect A. The decorative pattern visibility change effect A is performed during the variable effect (during variable display) by the decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 116(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative design 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative design 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen. In each of the variation regions 8Lr, 8Cr, 8Rr from the upper side to the lower side of 7a, the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative design (design: number "1" to number "9") in a display mode in which the reel is rotated. ) Is started.

The number "7" has a bright red color. The odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" except the number "7" all have the same bright green color. The even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color.

When the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative design is started, the display of the decorative design that is stopped and displayed changes from the opaque state to the translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed to the high speed display mode. .. Thereby, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semitransparent decorative pattern which is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped). Note that the decorative pattern is in a display mode in which the decorative pattern moves in small increments in the vertical direction when the temporary stop display is performed.

The variation icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, which are currently changing as the end of the first special map reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (on the rectangular image). The variation icon 9C and the variation display position 9Cd are referred to as the variation display area. In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, that is, the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display area, a reserved display area is provided as a first special figure reservation. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (on the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad from the position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The reserved display positions 9Ad are arranged and displayed linearly along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad. Here, the area composed of the variable display area and the hold display area is referred to as the variable and hold display area THA. The fluctuation and hold display area THA is formed as a transparent area.

The variable display area and the reserved display area are transparent areas, and the background image at the rear can be visually recognized through the variable display area and the reserved display area. In addition, when the variable display position 9Cd is displayed in the variable display area, the background image behind is not visible through the variable display position 9Cd, and the variable icon 9C is displayed in the variable display area. When being displayed, the background image at the rear cannot be visually recognized through the variation icon 9C. Further, when the hold display position 9Ad is displayed in the hold display area, the background image behind is not visible through the hold display position 9Ad, and when the hold icon 9A is displayed in the hold display area. , The background image on the rear side cannot be visually recognized through the hold icon 9A.

The variable region 8Lr extending from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a on which the left decorative design 8L is fluctuated (variable display) has a region overlapping with the fluctuating and reserved display area THA before and after the fluctuating and reserved display area. It is located behind the THA. Thereby, since the hold display area is a transparent area, the variation effect (variation display) of the left decorative pattern 8L can be visually recognized through the hold display area. In addition, when the hold display position 9Ad is displayed in the hold display area, the variation effect (change display) of the left decorative pattern 8L cannot be visually recognized through the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A is displayed in the hold display area. When is not displayed (that is, when there is no game ball (holding ball) that has not been used in the game yet), the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative design 8L is visually confirmed through the holding display area. However, when a plurality of hold icons 9A are displayed in the hold display area, the variation effect (variation display) of the left decorative design 8L cannot be visually recognized through the hold icon 9A.

The variation area 8Cr extending from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a on which the medium decoration pattern 8C is fluctuated (variable display) has an area overlapping with the fluctuation and the hold display area THA before and after the change and the hold display area. It is located behind the THA. As a result, since the hold display area is a transparent area, the variation effect (variation display) of the medium decoration pattern 8C can be visually recognized through the hold display area. When the hold display position 9Ad is displayed in the hold display area, the variation effect (variable display) of the middle decoration pattern 8C cannot be visually recognized through the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A is displayed in the hold display area. When is displayed, the variation effect (variation display) of the medium decoration pattern 8C cannot be visually recognized through the hold icon 9A.

Further, since the variable display area is a transparent area, the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C can be visually recognized through the variable display area. When the variation display position 9Cd is displayed in the variation display area, the variation effect (variation display) of the medium decoration pattern 8C cannot be visually recognized through the variation display position 9Cd, and the variation display area is displayed. When the variation icon 9C is displayed in, the variation effect (variation display) of the middle decoration pattern 8C cannot be visually recognized through the variation icon 9C.

The variable region 8Rr extending from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a on which the right decorative design 8R is fluctuated (variable display) does not have a region that overlaps the fluctuation and the reserved display area THA before and after. As a result, the variation effect (variation display) of the right decorative design 8R can be visually recognized without being obstructed by the variation and the hold display area THA.

Here, a white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, a white spherical retention icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and second hold display positions 9Ad to fourth hold are displayed. The hold icon is not displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one stocked icon that has not been digested for the hold icon. In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting opening 20 and the second starting opening 21.

In addition, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbol, is supported. In addition to the hold icon 9A, which corresponds to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 The special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21 are arranged and displayed as unillustrated numbers on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 is shown in blue on the left side, and the number of the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21 is shown in red. The numbers are arranged on the upper side of the center of the display screen 7a so as to be spaced apart from each other on the right side and are always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as the number of reserved balls as numerical values, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and it is easy to intuitively understand. Note that these numbers are arranged on the forefront side of the display screen 7a and other images are displayed behind the foreground of the display screen 7a so that visibility is not hindered by the other images. It is like this.

Here, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “icon”) will be briefly described. Due to the difference in shape and color, the difference in expectation in winning in the lottery corresponding to the icon. Is represented. For example, of the four icons, a yellow (gold) star icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest likelihood of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hit, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hit, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hit. The smile sphere icon is further set to have a high expectation of being a jackpot in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (Rainbow (hit jackpot)).

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern is started in FIG. 116(A), after that, as shown in FIG. 116(B), the center of the left side of the display screen 7a (the distance dimension of the left side of the display screen 7a is 2). (A position corresponding to one-third) to the right side of the center of the lower side (a position from the lower side of the lower side of the display screen 7a corresponding to two-thirds of the distance dimension of the lower side of the display screen 7a), a smooth curve having a bow shape ( An area MHG for producing a mini character surrounded by the curved line), the left side of the display screen 7a, and the lower side of the display screen 7a is displayed and appears on the display screen 7a. In the mini-character production area MHG, various mini-characters appear and production by the mini-character is performed.

In the mini character effect area MHG, the variable area 8Lr in which the left decorative design 8L is variable effect (variable display), the variable area 8Cr in which the middle decorative pattern 8C is variable effect (variable display) and the right decorative pattern 8R are variable effect ( (Variation display) There is a region that overlaps with the variation region 8Rr before and after, and is arranged on the front side of these variation regions 8Lr, 8Cr, 8Rr, and there is a region that overlaps with the variation and the reserved display area THA before and after the variation region 8Rr. It is arranged on the rear side of the variable and hold display area THA. In other words, the mini character effect area MHG is arranged between the variable areas 8Lr, 8Cr, 8Rr and the variable and reserved display areas THA.

A colored and opaque background image is provided in the mini character production area MHG. Therefore, when the mini character effect area MHG appears, the left decorative pattern 8L is in an area where the variable areas 8Lr, 8Cr, 8Rr of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R and the mini character effect area MHG overlap. The variable effect (variable display) of the middle decoration pattern 8C and the right decoration pattern 8R cannot be visually recognized through the mini character effect area MHG. On the other hand, since the variation and hold display area THA is arranged in front of the mini character production area MHG, even if the mini character production area MHG appears, the visibility is hindered by the mini character production area MHG. Never. In this way, the variation and hold display area THA is arranged so as to overlap the variation areas 8Lr, 8Cr, 8Rr of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R and the mini character effect production area MHG. , The variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, the change icon 9C, the hold icon 9A in the change and hold display area THA are the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, the right decorative design 8R, and the mini character production area MHG. And so that it is not difficult to see.

Although the mini-characters appearing in the mini-character production area MHG are arranged on the front side of the mini-character production area MHG, they are arranged on the rear side of the variation and suspension display area THA, and therefore the variation and the suspension display area THA. Even if a mini character appears in the mini character production area MHG, the mini character does not hinder the visibility.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 116(C), the left decorative design 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1" having a bright green color, and the variation effect (variable display) of the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R continues. Has been done. At the position of the left decorative design 8L that is temporarily displayed, the lower part of the left decorative design 8L (a part of the left decorative design 8L) is covered by the mini character production area MHG arranged in front of the left decorative design 8L. Therefore, the lower portion of the temporarily stopped display of the left decorative design 8L (a part of the left decorative design 8L) is visually recognized while being covered by the mini character effect production area MHG arranged in front of the left decorative design 8L. I can't.

After that, as shown in FIG. 116(D), a colored and opaque ally character CRA as a mini character appears in the mini character rendering area MHG and moves around. When the teammate character CRA appears in the mini character production area MHG, the variable icon 9C can be changed to another icon by the sword of the teammate character CRA at a predetermined timing. Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is changed to a yellow (gold) star icon by the sword of the ally character CRA, and the variation icon 9C is successfully changed. In some cases, the sword of the ally character CRA does not change the white spherical variation icon 9C to another icon and the variation icon 9C fails to change.

When the ally character CRA appears in the mini character production area MHG, the upper half of the ally character CRA exceeds the mini character production area MHG and changes to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R in the variable areas 8Lr, 8Cr, 8Rr. It may be displayed across the display screen 7a. For example, in FIG. 116(D), when the teammate character CRA appears in the mini character production area MHG, the upper half of the teammate character CRA is not covered with the mini character production area MHG in the left decorative pattern 8L that is temporarily stopped. It will cover the part. In other words, when the ally character CRA is displayed while straddling the variation area 8Lr of the left decorative design 8L and the mini character production area MHG, the temporarily decorated left decorative design 8L is covered with the mini character production area MHG. The exposed portion overlaps with the teammate character CRA and cannot be visually recognized. As the teammate character CRA moves around, the left decorative pattern 8L that is temporarily stopped and displayed is not covered by the mini character production area MHG and the exposed teammate character CRA, and the teammate character CRA is temporarily stopped and displayed. The exposed portion of the left decorative design 8L that is not covered by the mini character production area MHG can be visually recognized without being disturbed by the teammate character CRA.

After that, as shown in FIG. 116(E), the right decorative design 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1" having a bright green color, and the variation effect (variable display) of the middle decorative design 8C is continued to form a reach. It At the position of the right decorative design 8R that is temporarily stopped, since it is not covered by the mini character production area MHG arranged in front of the right decorative design 8R, the entire right decorative design 8R that is temporarily stopped is visually recognized. You can Even at this point, the ally character CRA moves around in the mini character production area MHG, and the upper half of the ally character CRA exceeds the mini character production area MHG, and the variable area 8Lr of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. , 8Cr, 8Rr may be displayed on the display screen 7a.

The right decorative pattern 8R is not temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1" having a bright green color, but is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "9" having a light green color, and the variation effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C is continued. If the reach is not formed, the mini character production area MHG disappears from the display screen 7a, and when the middle decoration pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed, the left decoration pattern 8L, the middle decoration pattern 8C, and the right decoration pattern 8R. May not be stopped and displayed with the same symbol, and may be out of order.

Further, the right decorative pattern 8R is not temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1" having light green, but is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "9" having light green, and the variation effect (fluctuation display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C is continued. When the reach is not formed, the ally character CRA moving around in the mini character production area MHG jumps over the mini character production area MHG, and the variation area 8Rr of the right decorative pattern 8R (or the variation area 8Rr and the middle decoration of the right decorative symbol 8R). With the sword of the ally character CRA, the number "9" is sent to the lower side of the variable area 8Rr with the sword of the ally character CRA in a state where the symbol 8C crosses the variable area 8Cr and the number "1" is drawn from above the variable area 8Rr to temporarily stop the display and reach. After forming, the teammate character CRA may return to the mini character production area MHG again.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 116(F), when the mini character effect area MHG disappears from the display screen 7a, the ally character CRA also disappears from the display screen 7a, and the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decoration symbol 8C is continued. It As a result, the decorative pattern visibility change effect A ends. When the decorative symbol visibility changing effect A is being performed, when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed while the mini character effect region MHG is displayed, Of the temporarily stopped left decorative design 8L, middle decorative design 8C, and right decorative design 8R, the lower part of the left decorative design 8L and middle decorative design 8C (a part of the left decorative design 8L and the middle decorative design 8C) (Part) is covered with the mini character production area MHG and cannot be visually recognized.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 116(G), when the teammate character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a for a predetermined period (for example, about 1.5 seconds) (may be displayed in blinking), the left decorative pattern 8L. The middle decoration pattern 8C, the right decoration pattern 8R, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, the change icon 9C, and the hold icon 9A disappear from the display screen 7a.

When the ally character CRA disappears from the display screen 7a, thereafter, as shown in FIG. 116(H), the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R that are temporarily stopped by the number "1" having a bright red color are displayed on the display screen 7a. , And the variation effect (variation display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C is continued.

Before the appearance of the teammate character CRA in FIG. 116(G), both the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R in FIG. 116(F) were temporarily stopped and displayed with the number “1” having a bright green color. On the other hand, after the appearance of the ally character CRA in FIG. 116(G), both the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R in FIG. 116(H) have the same color as the number “7”. It is changed to the number "1" having a bright red color and is temporarily stopped. Thereby, by changing the color of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R from the normal color (bright green) to the bright red which is the same color as the number "7" (that is, the color change of the decorative pattern) I have high expectations. When the reach is formed by the number “7” having a bright red color, the expectation degree of the jackpot is set in advance higher than when the reach is formed by other numbers.

In FIG. 116(H), changing the color of the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R from a normal color (bright green) to a bright red color that is the same as the number “7” (that is, the color change of the decorative design). ), an image that suggests a jackpot expectation degree out of five levels (for example, 5 face images of ally characters CRA are lined up, and an image that suggests a jackpot expectation degree of 3.5 out of five steps is set as 3). One face image is yellow, half face image is yellow, half face image is black, and the remaining one face image is black.) may be displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, various effects may be further continued, and when the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are stopped and displayed with the same design, it becomes a big hit and then a big hit game (big hit performance) On the other hand, when the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are not stopped and displayed in the same design, it is lost.

[Decorative pattern visibility change effect B]
Next, the decorative symbol visibility changing effect B will be described with reference to FIG. 117. FIG. 117 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol visibility change effect B. The decorative symbol visibility changing effect B is performed during the variable effect (during variable display) by the decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 117(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative design 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative design 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen. In each of the variation regions 8Lr, 8Cr, 8Rr from the upper side to the lower side of 7a, the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative design (design: number "1" to number "9") in a display mode in which the reel is rotated. ) Is started.

The number "7" has a bright red color. The odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" except the number "7" all have the same bright green color. The even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color.

When the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative design is started, the display of the decorative design that is stopped and displayed changes from the opaque state to the translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed to the high speed display mode. .. Thereby, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semitransparent decorative pattern which is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped). Note that the decorative pattern is in a display mode in which the decorative pattern moves in small increments in the vertical direction when the temporary stop display is performed.

The variation icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, which are currently changing as the end of the first special map reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (on the rectangular image). The variation icon 9C and the variation display position 9Cd are referred to as the variation display area. In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, that is, the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display area, a reserved display area is provided as a first special figure reservation. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (on the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad from the position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The reserved display positions 9Ad are arranged and displayed linearly along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad. Here, the area composed of the variable display area and the hold display area is referred to as the variable and hold display area THA. The fluctuation and hold display area THA is formed as a transparent area.

The variable display area and the reserved display area are transparent areas, and the background image at the rear can be visually recognized through the variable display area and the reserved display area. In addition, when the variable display position 9Cd is displayed in the variable display area, the background image behind is not visible through the variable display position 9Cd, and the variable icon 9C is displayed in the variable display area. When being displayed, the background image at the rear cannot be visually recognized through the variation icon 9C. Further, when the hold display position 9Ad is displayed in the hold display area, the background image behind is not visible through the hold display position 9Ad, and when the hold icon 9A is displayed in the hold display area. , The background image on the rear side cannot be visually recognized through the hold icon 9A.

The variable region 8Lr extending from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a on which the left decorative design 8L is fluctuated (variable display) has a region overlapping with the fluctuating and reserved display area THA before and after the fluctuating and reserved display area. It is located behind the THA. Thereby, since the hold display area is a transparent area, the variation effect (variation display) of the left decorative pattern 8L can be visually recognized through the hold display area. In addition, when the hold display position 9Ad is displayed in the hold display area, the variation effect (change display) of the left decorative pattern 8L cannot be visually recognized through the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A is displayed in the hold display area. When is not displayed (that is, when there is no game ball (holding ball) that has not been used in the game yet), the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative design 8L is visually confirmed through the holding display area. However, when a plurality of hold icons 9A are displayed in the hold display area, the variation effect (variation display) of the left decorative design 8L cannot be visually recognized through the hold icon 9A.

The variation area 8Cr extending from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a on which the medium decoration pattern 8C is fluctuated (variable display) has an area overlapping with the fluctuation and the hold display area THA before and after the change and the hold display area. It is located behind the THA. As a result, since the hold display area is a transparent area, the variation effect (variation display) of the medium decoration pattern 8C can be visually recognized through the hold display area. When the hold display position 9Ad is displayed in the hold display area, the variation effect (variable display) of the middle decoration pattern 8C cannot be visually recognized through the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A is displayed in the hold display area. When is displayed, the variation effect (variation display) of the medium decoration pattern 8C cannot be visually recognized through the hold icon 9A.

Further, since the variable display area is a transparent area, the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C can be visually recognized through the variable display area. When the variation display position 9Cd is displayed in the variation display area, the variation effect (variation display) of the medium decoration pattern 8C cannot be visually recognized through the variation display position 9Cd, and the variation display area is displayed. When the variation icon 9C is displayed in, the variation effect (variation display) of the middle decoration pattern 8C cannot be visually recognized through the variation icon 9C.

The variable region 8Rr extending from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a on which the right decorative design 8R is fluctuated (variable display) does not have a region that overlaps the fluctuation and the reserved display area THA before and after. As a result, the variation effect (variation display) of the right decorative design 8R can be visually recognized without being obstructed by the variation and the hold display area THA.

Here, a white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, a white spherical retention icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and second hold display positions 9Ad to fourth hold are displayed. The hold icon is not displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one stocked icon that has not been digested for the hold icon. In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting opening 20 and the second starting opening 21.

In addition, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbol, is supported. In addition to the hold icon 9A, which corresponds to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 The special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21 are arranged and displayed as unillustrated numbers on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 is shown in blue on the left side, and the number of the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21 is shown in red. The numbers are arranged on the upper side of the center of the display screen 7a so as to be spaced apart from each other on the right side and are always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as the number of reserved balls as numerical values, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and it is easy to intuitively understand. Note that these numbers are arranged on the forefront side of the display screen 7a and other images are displayed behind the foreground of the display screen 7a so that visibility is not hindered by the other images. It is like this.

Here, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “icon”) will be briefly described. Due to the difference in shape and color, the difference in expectation in winning in the lottery corresponding to the icon. Is represented. For example, of the four icons, a yellow (gold) star icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest likelihood of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hit, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hit, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hit. The smile sphere icon is further set to have a high expectation of being a jackpot in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (Rainbow (hit jackpot)).

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern is started in FIG. 117(A), thereafter, as shown in FIG. 117(B), the center of the left side of the display screen 7a (the distance dimension of the left side of the display screen 7a is 2 A smooth curve having a gentle concave shape connecting from the center of the right side of the display screen (the position corresponding to half the distance dimension of the left side of the display screen 7a) to the display screen 7a. The mini character effect area MHG surrounded by the left side of the display screen 7a, the lower side of the display screen 7a, and the right side of the display screen 7a appears and appears on the display screen 7a. In the mini-character production area MHG, various mini-characters appear and production by the mini-character is performed.

In the mini character effect area MHG, the variable area 8Lr in which the left decorative design 8L is variable effect (variable display), the variable area 8Cr in which the middle decorative pattern 8C is variable effect (variable display) and the right decorative pattern 8R are variable effect ( (Variation display) There is a region that overlaps with the variation region 8Rr before and after, and is arranged on the front side of these variation regions 8Lr, 8Cr, 8Rr, and there is a region that overlaps with the variation and the reserved display area THA before and after the variation region 8Rr. It is arranged on the rear side of the variable and hold display area THA. In other words, the mini character effect area MHG is arranged between the variable areas 8Lr, 8Cr, 8Rr and the variable and reserved display areas THA.

A colored and opaque background image is provided in the mini character production area MHG. Therefore, when the mini character effect area MHG appears, the left decorative pattern 8L is in an area where the variable areas 8Lr, 8Cr, 8Rr of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R and the mini character effect area MHG overlap. The variable effect (variable display) of the middle decoration pattern 8C and the right decoration pattern 8R cannot be visually recognized through the mini character effect area MHG. On the other hand, since the variation and hold display area THA is arranged in front of the mini character production area MHG, even if the mini character production area MHG appears, the visibility is hindered by the mini character production area MHG. Never. In this way, the variation and hold display area THA is arranged so as to overlap the variation areas 8Lr, 8Cr, 8Rr of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R and the mini character effect production area MHG. , The variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, the change icon 9C, the hold icon 9A in the change and hold display area THA are the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, the right decorative design 8R, and the mini character production area MHG. And so that it is not difficult to see.

Although the mini-characters appearing in the mini-character production area MHG are arranged on the front side of the mini-character production area MHG, they are arranged on the rear side of the variation and suspension display area THA, and therefore the variation and the suspension display area THA. Even if a mini character appears in the mini character production area MHG, the mini character does not hinder the visibility.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 117(C), the left decorative design 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed by the number "1" having a bright green color, and the variation effect (variable display) of the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R continues. Has been done. At the position of the left decorative design 8L that is temporarily displayed, the lower part of the left decorative design 8L (a part of the left decorative design 8L) is covered by the mini character production area MHG arranged in front of the left decorative design 8L. Therefore, the lower portion of the temporarily stopped display of the left decorative design 8L (a part of the left decorative design 8L) is visually recognized while being covered by the mini character effect production area MHG arranged in front of the left decorative design 8L. I can't.

Then, as shown in FIG. 117(D), a colored and opaque ally character CRA as a mini character appears in the mini character production area MHG and moves around. When the teammate character CRA appears in the mini character production area MHG, the variable icon 9C can be changed to another icon by the sword of the teammate character CRA at a predetermined timing. Here, the white spherical variation icon 9C is changed to a yellow (gold) star icon by the sword of the ally character CRA, and the variation icon 9C is successfully changed. In some cases, the sword of the ally character CRA does not change the white spherical variation icon 9C to another icon and the variation icon 9C fails to change.

When the ally character CRA appears in the mini character production area MHG, the upper half of the ally character CRA exceeds the mini character production area MHG and changes to the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R in the variable areas 8Lr, 8Cr, 8Rr. It may be displayed across the display screen 7a. For example, in FIG. 117(D), when the ally character CRA appears in the mini character production area MHG, the upper half of the ally character CRA is not covered with the mini character production area MHG in the left decorative pattern 8L that is temporarily displayed. It will cover the part. In other words, when the ally character CRA is displayed while straddling the variation area 8Lr of the left decorative design 8L and the mini character production area MHG, the temporarily decorated left decorative design 8L is covered with the mini character production area MHG. The exposed portion overlaps with the teammate character CRA and cannot be visually recognized. As the teammate character CRA moves around, the left decorative pattern 8L that is temporarily stopped and displayed is not covered by the mini character production area MHG and the exposed teammate character CRA, and the teammate character CRA is temporarily stopped and displayed. The exposed portion of the left decorative design 8L that is not covered by the mini character production area MHG can be visually recognized without being disturbed by the teammate character CRA.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 117(E), the right decorative design 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1" having a bright green color, and the variation effect (variable display) of the middle decorative design 8C is continued to form a reach. It At the position of the right decorative design 8R that is temporarily displayed, the lower part of the right decorative design 8R (a part of the right decorative design 8R) is covered by the mini character production area MHG arranged in front of the right decorative design 8R. Therefore, the lower portion of the right decorative design 8R (a part of the right decorative design 8R) that is temporarily stopped is visually covered with the mini character effect production area MHG arranged in front of the right decorative design 8R. I can't. Even at this point, the ally character CRA moves around in the mini character production area MHG, and the upper half of the ally character CRA exceeds the mini character production area MHG, and the variable area 8Lr of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. , 8Cr, 8Rr may be displayed on the display screen 7a.

The right decorative pattern 8R is not temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1" having a bright green color, but is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "9" having a light green color, and the variation effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C is continued. If the reach is not formed, the mini character production area MHG disappears from the display screen 7a, and when the middle decoration pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed, the left decoration pattern 8L, the middle decoration pattern 8C, and the right decoration pattern 8R. May not be stopped and displayed with the same symbol, and may be out of order.

Further, the right decorative pattern 8R is not temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1" having light green, but is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "9" having light green, and the variation effect (fluctuation display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C is continued. When the reach is not formed, the ally character CRA moving around in the mini character production area MHG jumps over the mini character production area MHG, and the variation area 8Rr of the right decorative pattern 8R (or the variation area 8Rr and the middle decoration of the right decorative symbol 8R). With the sword of the ally character CRA, the number "9" is sent to the lower side of the variable area 8Rr with the sword of the ally character CRA in a state where the symbol 8C crosses the variable area 8Cr and the number "1" is drawn from above the variable area 8Rr to temporarily stop the display and reach. After forming, the teammate character CRA may return to the mini character production area MHG again.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 117(F), when the mini character effect area MHG disappears from the display screen 7a, the ally character CRA also disappears from the display screen 7a, and the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C is continued. It As a result, the decorative pattern visibility change effect B ends. When the decorative symbol visibility changing effect B is being performed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed while the mini-character effect area MHG is displayed. The temporarily stopped left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R lower part (part of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C and right decorative pattern 8R) is a mini character production area It is covered with MHG and cannot be seen.

Then, as shown in FIG. 117(G), when the teammate character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a for a predetermined period (for example, about 1.5 seconds) (may be displayed in blinking), the left decorative pattern 8L. The middle decoration pattern 8C, the right decoration pattern 8R, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, the change icon 9C, and the hold icon 9A disappear from the display screen 7a.

When the ally character CRA disappears from the display screen 7a, thereafter, as shown in FIG. 117(H), the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R that are temporarily stopped by the number "1" having a bright red color are displayed on the display screen 7a. , And the variation effect (variation display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C is continued.

Before the appearance of the ally character CRA in FIG. 117(G), both the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R in FIG. 117(F) were temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1" having a bright green color. On the other hand, after the appearance of the ally character CRA in FIG. 117(G), in FIG. 117(H), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are both the same color as the number “7”. It is changed to the number "1" having a bright red color and is temporarily stopped. Thereby, by changing the color of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R from the normal color (bright green) to the bright red which is the same color as the number "7" (that is, the color change of the decorative pattern) I have high expectations. When the reach is formed by the number “7” having a bright red color, the expectation degree of the jackpot is set in advance higher than when the reach is formed by other numbers.

In FIG. 117(H), changing the color of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R from a normal color (bright green) to a bright red color that is the same as the number "7" (that is, the color change of the decorative pattern). ), an image that suggests a jackpot expectation degree out of five levels (for example, 5 face images of ally characters CRA are lined up, and an image that suggests a jackpot expectation degree of 3.5 out of five steps is set as 3). One face image is yellow, half face image is yellow, half face image is black, and the remaining one face image is black) may be displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, various effects may be further continued, and when the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are stopped and displayed with the same design, it becomes a big hit and then a big hit game (big hit performance) On the other hand, when the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are not stopped and displayed in the same design, it is lost.

[Decorative pattern visibility change effect C]
Next, the decorative symbol visibility changing effect C will be described with reference to FIG. 118. FIG. 118 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol visibility changing effect C. The decorative pattern visibility change effect C is performed during the variable effect (during variable display) by the decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 118(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative design 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative design 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen. In each of the variation regions 8Lr, 8Cr, 8Rr from the upper side to the lower side of 7a, the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative design (design: number "1" to number "9") in a display mode in which the reel is rotated. ) Is started.

The number "7" has a bright red color. The odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" except the number "7" all have the same bright green color. The even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color.

When the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative design is started, the display of the decorative design that is stopped and displayed changes from the opaque state to the translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed to the high speed display mode. .. Thereby, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semitransparent decorative pattern which is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped). Note that the decorative pattern is in a display mode in which the decorative pattern moves in small increments in the vertical direction when the temporary stop display is performed.

The variation icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, which are currently changing as the end of the first special map reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (on the rectangular image). The variation icon 9C and the variation display position 9Cd are referred to as the variation display area. In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, that is, the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display area, a reserved display area is provided as a first special figure reservation. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (on the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad from the position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The reserved display positions 9Ad are arranged and displayed linearly along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad. Here, the area composed of the variable display area and the hold display area is referred to as the variable and hold display area THA. The fluctuation and hold display area THA is formed as a transparent area.

The variable display area and the reserved display area are transparent areas, and the background image at the rear can be visually recognized through the variable display area and the reserved display area. In addition, when the variable display position 9Cd is displayed in the variable display area, the background image behind is not visible through the variable display position 9Cd, and the variable icon 9C is displayed in the variable display area. When being displayed, the background image at the rear cannot be visually recognized through the variation icon 9C. Further, when the hold display position 9Ad is displayed in the hold display area, the background image behind is not visible through the hold display position 9Ad, and when the hold icon 9A is displayed in the hold display area. , The background image on the rear side cannot be visually recognized through the hold icon 9A.

The variable region 8Lr extending from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a on which the left decorative design 8L is fluctuated (variable display) has a region overlapping with the fluctuating and reserved display area THA before and after the fluctuating and reserved display area. It is located behind the THA. Thereby, since the hold display area is a transparent area, the variation effect (variation display) of the left decorative pattern 8L can be visually recognized through the hold display area. In addition, when the hold display position 9Ad is displayed in the hold display area, the variation effect (change display) of the left decorative pattern 8L cannot be visually recognized through the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A is displayed in the hold display area. When is not displayed (that is, when there is no game ball (holding ball) that has not been used in the game yet), the variable effect (variable display) of the left decorative design 8L is visually confirmed through the holding display area. However, when a plurality of hold icons 9A are displayed in the hold display area, the variation effect (variation display) of the left decorative design 8L cannot be visually recognized through the hold icon 9A.

The variation area 8Cr extending from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a on which the medium decoration pattern 8C is fluctuated (variable display) has an area overlapping with the fluctuation and the hold display area THA before and after the change and the hold display area. It is located behind the THA. As a result, since the hold display area is a transparent area, the variation effect (variation display) of the medium decoration pattern 8C can be visually recognized through the hold display area. When the hold display position 9Ad is displayed in the hold display area, the variation effect (variable display) of the middle decoration pattern 8C cannot be visually recognized through the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A is displayed in the hold display area. When is displayed, the variation effect (variation display) of the medium decoration pattern 8C cannot be visually recognized through the hold icon 9A.

Further, since the variable display area is a transparent area, the variable effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C can be visually recognized through the variable display area. When the variation display position 9Cd is displayed in the variation display area, the variation effect (variation display) of the medium decoration pattern 8C cannot be visually recognized through the variation display position 9Cd, and the variation display area is displayed. When the variation icon 9C is displayed in, the variation effect (variation display) of the middle decoration pattern 8C cannot be visually recognized through the variation icon 9C.

The variable region 8Rr extending from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a on which the right decorative design 8R is fluctuated (variable display) does not have a region that overlaps the fluctuation and the reserved display area THA before and after. As a result, the variation effect (variation display) of the right decorative design 8R can be visually recognized without being obstructed by the variation and the hold display area THA.

Here, a white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, a white spherical retention icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and second hold display positions 9Ad to fourth hold are displayed. The hold icon is not displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one stocked icon that has not been digested for the hold icon. In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting opening 20 and the second starting opening 21.

In addition, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbol, is supported. In addition to the hold icon 9A, which corresponds to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 The special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21 are arranged and displayed as unillustrated numbers on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 is shown in blue on the left side, and the number of the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21 is shown in red. The numbers are arranged on the upper side of the center of the display screen 7a so as to be spaced apart from each other on the right side and are always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as the number of reserved balls as numerical values, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and it is easy to intuitively understand. Note that these numbers are arranged on the forefront side of the display screen 7a and other images are displayed behind the foreground of the display screen 7a so that visibility is not hindered by the other images. It is like this.

Here, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “icon”) will be briefly described. Due to the difference in shape and color, the difference in expectation in winning in the lottery corresponding to the icon. Is represented. For example, of the four icons, a yellow (gold) star icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest likelihood of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hit, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hit, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hit. The smile sphere icon is further set to have a high expectation of being a jackpot in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (Rainbow (hit jackpot)).

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern is started in FIG. 118(A), after that, as shown in FIG. 118(B), the center of the left side of the display screen 7a (the distance dimension of the left side of the display screen 7a is 2). (A position corresponding to one-half) toward the right side of the front screen 7a, the left movable accessory image KGL simulating the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 corresponds to the operation area of the left movable accessory 14L. Thus, it appears so as to cover the variable region 8Lr of the left decorative pattern 8L. Further, from the center of the right side of the display screen 7a (the position corresponding to ½ of the distance dimension of the right side of the display screen 7a) toward the left side of the front screen 7a, the right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14 is simulated. The right movable accessory image KGR that has appeared appears so as to cover the variable region 8Rr of the right decorative pattern 8R so as to correspond to the operation region of the right movable accessory 14R. When the left movable accessory image KGL and the right movable accessory image KGR appear in a state of being separated from each other, lightning is performed in the left movable accessory image KGL and the right movable accessory image KGR.

The left movable accessory image KGL has a region overlapping the front and rear of the variable region 8Lr in which the left decorative design 8L is fluctuated (variably displayed), and is arranged on the front side of the variable region 8Lr, and the variable and reserved display area. It is arranged so that it does not overlap with the THA in the front and back. Further, the right movable accessory image KGR has an area that overlaps with the variable area 8Rr in which the right decorative design 8R is subjected to variable effect (variable display) before and after, and is arranged on the front side of the variable area 8Rr, and the variation and the hold. The display area THA is arranged so as not to overlap with the front and rear.

The left movable accessory image KGL imitates the left movable accessory 14L and is colored and opaque. Therefore, when the left movable accessory image KGL appears, in the area where the variable region 8Lr of the left decorative symbol 8L and the left movable accessory image KGL overlap, the variation effect (variable display) of the left decorative symbol 8L is changed to the left movable symbol. It is no longer visible through the object image KGL. Further, the right movable accessory image KGR is an imitation of the right movable accessory 14R and is colored and opaque. Therefore, when the right movable accessory image KGR appears, in the area where the variable region 8Rr of the right decorative symbol 8R and the right movable accessory image KGR overlap, the variation effect (variable display) of the right decorative symbol 8R is changed to the right movable symbol. It is no longer visible through the object image KGR.

Note that the left movable accessory image KGL and the right movable accessory image KGR appear in a state of being separated from each other, and lightning is performed in the left movable accessory image KGL and the right movable accessory image KGR. Since the character image KGL and the right movable character image KGR are arranged so as not to overlap the fluctuation and the hold display area THA before and after, the lightning bolt does not overlap the fluctuation and the hold display area THA before and after the fluctuation. Also, in the hold display area THA, even if the left movable accessory image KGL and the right movable accessory image KGR appear in a state in which they are separated from each other and the lightning strikes, the lightning may hinder the visibility. Absent.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 118(C), the left decorative design 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1" having a bright green color, and the variation effect (variable display) of the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R continues. Has been done. At the position of the left decorative design 8L that is temporarily displayed, the left side portion of the left decorative design 8L (part of the left decorative design 8L) is covered by the left movable accessory image KGL arranged in front of the left decorative design 8L. Therefore, the left side portion (a part of the left decorative pattern 8L) of the temporarily displayed left decorative pattern 8L is covered and visually recognized by the left movable accessory image KGL arranged in front of the left decorative pattern 8L. I can't.

Then, as shown in FIG. 118(D), when the left movable accessory image KGL and the right movable accessory image KGR appear in a state of being separated from each other, the ring-shaped decoration portion of the left movable accessory image KGL is displayed. Areas in the left side decoration part which is half and the right side decoration part which is half of the ring-shaped decoration part of the right movable accessory image KGR (that is, the area extending from the upper side to the lower side of the left side decoration part and the right side decoration part). It is possible to run appropriately in a region from the upper side to the lower side. When the lightning bolt SND runs, it is possible to change from the variable icon 9C to another icon under the influence of the lightning bolt SND at a predetermined timing. Here, under the influence of the lightning bolt SND, the white spherical variation icon 9C changes to a yellow (gold) star icon, and the variation icon 9C changes successfully. In addition, there is a case where the white spherical variation icon 9C does not change to another icon even under the influence of the lightning bolt SND, and the variation icon 9C fails to change.

When the left movable accessory image KGL and the right movable accessory image KGR appear in a state in which they are separated from each other and the lightning bolt SND runs, the lightning bolt SND exceeds the left movable accessory image KGL and the right movable accessory image KGR and the left decorative design The display screen 7a may be displayed across the variable regions 8Lr, 8Cr, and 8Rr of 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. For example, in FIG. 118(D), when the left movable accessory image KGL and the right movable accessory image KGR appear in a state in which they are separated from each other and the lightning bolt SND runs, the left movable accessory image KGL is temporarily stopped and displayed. Of the decorative pattern 8L, the part which is not covered with the left movable accessory image KGL is covered. In other words, when the lightning bolt SND is displayed while straddling the variable region 8Lr of the left decorative design 8L and the left movable accessory image KGL, the temporarily decorated left decorative design 8L is covered with the left movable accessory image KGL. The exposed portion overlaps the lightning bolt SND and cannot be visually recognized. It should be noted that the lightning bolt SND appropriately runs in the range from the upper side to the lower side in the semicircular portions of the left movable accessory image KGL and the right movable accessory image KGR, so that the left decorative symbol 8L temporarily displayed is left movable. The exposed portion that is not covered with the object image KGL and the lightning bolt SND are in a state where they do not overlap with each other, and the left decorative pattern 8L that is temporarily stopped is not covered with the left movable accessory image KGL and interferes with the exposed lightning portion SND. They can be visually recognized without being damaged (see FIG. 118E).

After that, as shown in FIG. 118(E), the right decorative design 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1" having a bright green color, and the variation effect (variable display) of the middle decorative design 8C is continued to form a reach. It At the position of the right decorative design 8R that is temporarily displayed, the right side portion of the right decorative design 8R (a part of the right decorative design 8R) is covered by the right movable accessory image KGR arranged in front of the right decorative design 8R. Therefore, the part on the right side (a part of the right decorative pattern 8R) of the temporarily displayed right decorative pattern 8R is covered and visually recognized by the right movable accessory image KGR arranged in front of the right decorative pattern 8R. I can't. Even at this point, the lightning bolt SND appropriately runs in the range from the upper side to the lower side in the semicircular portions of the left movable accessory image KGL and the right movable accessory image KGR, so that the lightning bolt SND has the left movable accessory image KGL. In some cases, the display screen 7a may be displayed across the variable regions 8Lr, 8Cr, 8Rr of the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R beyond the right movable accessory image KGR.

The right decorative pattern 8R is not temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1" having a bright green color, but is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "9" having a light green color, and the variation effect (variable display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C is continued. When the reach is not formed, the left movable accessory image KGL and the right movable accessory image KGR disappear from the display screen 7a, and when the middle decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed, the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle symbol are displayed. The decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R may not be stopped and displayed in the same design and may be out of alignment.

Further, the right decorative pattern 8R is not temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1" having light green, but is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "9" having light green, and the variation effect (fluctuation display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C is continued. If the reach is not formed, the lightning bolt SND that appropriately runs in the range from the upper side to the lower side in the semicircular portion of the left movable accessory image KGL and the right movable accessory image KGR is the variable region 8Rr of the right decorative pattern 8R. In some cases, the lightning SND may be subsided after the number "9" is sent out below the variable region 8Rr and the number "1" is drawn in from above the variable region 8Rr to temporarily stop the display to form a reach.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 118(F), when the lightning SND subsides, the left movable accessory image KGL and the right movable accessory image KGR disappear from the display screen 7a, and the variation effect (variation display) of the middle decorative symbol 8C. Is continued. As a result, the decorative pattern visibility changing effect C is completed. When the decorative symbol visibility changing effect C is performed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed with the left movable accessory image KGL and the right movable accessory image KGR displayed. When is temporarily displayed, the left part of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right part of the right decorative pattern 8R (a part of the left decorative pattern 8L and a part of the right decorative pattern 8R) that are temporarily stopped are left movable. While the object image KGL and the right movable accessory image KGR cannot be visually recognized because they are respectively covered, the middle decoration pattern 8C is not covered by the left movable accessory image KGL and the right movable accessory image KGR, respectively, and visually recognized. be able to.

Then, as shown in FIG. 118(G), in the center of the display screen 7a, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are respectively moved to the front (front) center advance positions of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Are moved (moved) from the home position toward (close to each other), and are attached to the front end side of the left movable accessory 14L at the front (front) center position (extended position (expanded position)) of the display screen 7a. The left side decorative part that is half of the ring-shaped decorative part and the right side decorative part that is half of the ring-shaped decorative part that is attached to the tip end side of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form the left movable accessory 14L. The left decorative portion and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R form a single decorative member (a united accessory) having a ring shape.

When the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form a united accessory having a ring shape, the area formed in the ring has a circular shape ( Hereinafter, it is referred to as a "circular area"). The ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area. At this time, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, the right decorative design 8R, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, the change icon 9C, and the hold icon 9A disappear from the display screen 7a.

When a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a, the ally character CRA disappears from the display screen 7a, and the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are separated from each other. In the direction, the left movable accessory 14L retreats (moves) from the advance position at the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a, and the right movable accessory. 14R retreats (moves) from the advance position in the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a toward the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 118(H), the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R, which are temporarily displayed with the number "1" having a bright red color, are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the variation effect of the middle decorative design 8C is displayed. (Variable display) continues.

Before the appearance of the teammate character CRA in FIG. 118(G), both the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R in FIG. 118(F) were temporarily stopped and displayed with the number “1” having a bright green color. On the other hand, after the appearance of the teammate character CRA in FIG. 118(G), in FIG. 118(H), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are both the same color as the number “7”. It is changed to the number "1" having a bright red color and is temporarily stopped. Thereby, by changing the color of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R from the normal color (bright green) to the bright red which is the same color as the number "7" (that is, the color change of the decorative pattern) I have high expectations. When the reach is formed by the number “7” having a bright red color, the expectation degree of the jackpot is set in advance higher than when the reach is formed by other numbers.

In FIG. 118(H), changing the color of the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R from a normal color (bright green) to a bright red color that is the same as the number “7” (that is, the color change of the decorative design). ), an image that suggests a jackpot expectation degree out of five levels (for example, 5 face images of ally characters CRA are lined up, and an image that suggests a jackpot expectation degree of 3.5 out of five steps is set as 3). One face image is yellow, half face image is yellow, half face image is black, and the remaining one face image is black) may be displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, various effects may be further continued, and when the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are stopped and displayed with the same design, it becomes a big hit and then a big hit game (big hit performance) On the other hand, when the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are not stopped and displayed in the same design, it is lost.

[Effect example]
Below, the effect example of the decorative pattern visibility change production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative pattern visibility change effect A of FIG. 116, the decorative pattern visibility change effect B of FIG. 117, and the decorative pattern visibility change effect C of FIG. An image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying is provided, and a specific image (decorative pattern visual confirmation) is provided so as to overlap a part of the variable region 8Lr (first region) in which the variable display by the left decorative pattern 8L (symbol image) is performed. In the sex change effects A and B, a ally character CRA that is a mini character, and in the decorative pattern visibility change effect C, a lightning bolt SND can be displayed in the second area (decorative pattern visibility change effects A and B in the mini character effect area MHG). In the decorative pattern visibility change effect C, the left movable accessory image KGL) is provided in front of the variable region 8Lr (first region), and a part of the left decorative pattern 8L (symbol image) is in the second region. 116 (C) in the decorative pattern visibility change effect B, FIG. 117 (C) in the decorative pattern visibility change effect B, and the FIG. 118 (C in the decorative pattern visibility change effect C )) can be performed. According to this configuration, the second area is purposefully arranged in front of the variable area 8Lr (first area) so as to overlap a part of the variable area 8Lr (first area) of the left decorative design 8L (pattern image). Since it is arranged and provided, a part of the left decorative design 8L (design image) can be made difficult to see by the second area, and the entire image of the left decorative design 8L (design image) can be displayed by the player himself. Can be imagined at. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a variation effect (variation display) based on a novel pattern image that has not existed in the past. Therefore, interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first effect in the decorative pattern visibility change effect A of FIG. 116, the decorative pattern visibility change effect B of FIG. 117, and the decorative pattern visibility change effect C of FIG. 118, Further, the fluctuation and hold display area THA capable of displaying the change icon 9C and the hold icon 9A so as to overlap a part of the change area 8Lr (first area) and a part of the second area of the left decorative pattern 8L. The (third area) is provided in front of the second area so that the variable icon 9C and the hold icon 9A are not visually recognizable due to the left decorative design 8L (design image) and the specific image. .. The variable icon 9C may be used as a notice ("change effect" that changes the display mode) for the change effect (during change display), and the hold icon 9A is not actually used in the game. In a state, it may be used as an effect that suggests a future effect by a look-ahead effect. This makes it possible to prevent the visibility of the variable icon 9C and the hold icon 9A from being hindered by the symbol image and the specific image when the variable display is performed by the symbol image. This can contribute to making it difficult to overlook changes in the change icon 9C and changes in the hold icon.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first effect in the decorative pattern visibility change effect A of FIG. 116, the decorative pattern visibility change effect B of FIG. 117, and the decorative pattern visibility change effect C of FIG. 118, A specific image (a decorative character visibility change effect A, B, a ally character CRA that is a mini character, a decorative pattern visibility change, in a state of straddling the variable area 8Lr (first area) and the second area of the left decorative pattern 8L When the lightning SND is displayed in the effect C, the other portion (decorative pattern visibility change effect A in FIG. 116D and decorative pattern visibility) that is different from the part of the left decorative pattern 8L (design image) by the specific image is displayed. In FIG. 117(D) of the change effect B, the temporarily stopped display of the left decorative pattern 8L overlaps the ally character CRA, and in FIG. 118(D) of the decorative pattern visibility change effect C, the left decorative pattern 8L overlaps the lightning bolt SND. Part) is difficult to see. According to this configuration, a part of the pattern image is difficult to be visually recognized by the second region, and other parts different from the part can be hard to be visually recognized by the specific image. It is possible to provide the player with a variation effect (variation display) by a more novel symbol image.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first effect in the decorative pattern visibility change effect A of FIG. 116, the decorative pattern visibility change effect B of FIG. 117, and the decorative pattern visibility change effect C of FIG. 118, The second region disappears from the display screen 7a, and the entire left decorative design 8L (design image) is easily visible. According to this configuration, since a part of the symbol image is difficult to visually recognize due to the second region, the player can imagine the whole image of the symbol image, and the second region disappears from the display screen 7a. By doing so, it is possible to match the answer with what one has imagined by himself, and it is possible to contribute to reducing the monotonousness with respect to the variable display by the symbol image.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the first effect in the decorative pattern visibility change effect A of FIG. 116, the decorative pattern visibility change effect B of FIG. 117, and the decorative pattern visibility change effect C of FIG. 118 is: It can be executed before the temporary stop display after the variable display by the symbol image is started. According to this configuration, a part of the symbol image can be made difficult to be visually recognized by the second area before the symbol image is temporarily stopped and displayed, so that the variable display by the symbol image can be changed. This can contribute to making it difficult for the variable display by the symbol image to be monotonous.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the variable icon 9C in the decorative pattern visibility change effect A of FIG. 116, the decorative pattern visibility change effect B of FIG. 117, and the decorative pattern visibility change effect C of FIG. When a specific image (a friend character CRA, which is a mini character in the decorative pattern visibility changing effects A and B, and a lightning bolt SND in the decorative pattern visibility changing effect C) is displayed, it is possible to change to a highly anticipated hit. It is like this. According to this configuration, the change icon 9C can be used as a notice (“change effect” that changes the display mode) for the change effect (during change display). In addition, when the specific image is displayed on the display screen 7a, the expectation of winning may change, so that even if only the specific image is displayed on the display screen 7a, the player can feel the expectation. Can be given to.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, after the first effect in the decorative pattern visibility change effect A of FIG. 116, the decorative pattern visibility change effect B of FIG. 117, and the decorative pattern visibility change effect C of FIG. 118. , 2nd effect (decorative pattern visual recognition) that changes the color of the pattern image to another color (for example, changes the color of the number "1" from a normal color (bright green) to a bright red) to increase the expectation of winning 116(H) in the sex change effect A, FIG. 117(H) in the decorative pattern visibility change effect B, and FIG. 118(H) in the decorative pattern visibility change effect C can be executed. .. According to this configuration, the second effect in which the color of the symbol image is changed may be executed after the end of the first effect. Therefore, when the first effect is started, the player While enjoying the first effect, it is possible to have an expectation for the second effect which is not yet executed but may be executed in the future.

[Modification]
The following is a modification of the decorative pattern visibility changing effect.
[Modification 1]
In the decorative pattern visibility change effect A of FIG. 116, the decorative pattern visibility change effect B of FIG. 117, and the decorative pattern visibility change effect C of FIG. 118, based on the game ball entering the first starting opening 20. It was done. In other words, it was performed in a so-called left-handed gaming state. However, it may be performed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second starting opening 21. In other words, it may be performed in a so-called right-handed gaming state.

[Modification 2]
In the decorative pattern visibility change effect A of FIGS. 116(E) and (F) and the decorative pattern visibility change effect B of FIGS. 117(E) and 117(F), when the reach is formed, the mini character effect area MHG is created. It disappeared from the display screen 7a. However, before the reach is formed, the mini-character production area MHG may disappear from the display screen 7a. Further, in the decorative pattern visibility changing effect C of FIGS. 118(E) and (F), when the reach is formed, the left movable accessory image KGL and the right movable accessory image KGR disappear from the display screen 7a. However, the left movable accessory image KGL and the right movable accessory image KGR may disappear from the display screen 7a before the reach is formed. This allows the player to be informed of the timing of the temporary stop display of the right decorative pattern 8R.

[Modification 3]
In the decorative pattern visibility change effect A of FIG. 116, the decorative pattern visibility change effect B of FIG. 117, and the decorative pattern visibility change effect C of FIG. 118, first, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily numbered “1” having a bright green color. It was stopped and displayed, and then the right decorative design 8R was provisionally stopped and displayed with the number "1" having a bright green color, and the reach was formed by the odd decorative design (design image). However, for example, the left decorative design 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2" having a light blue color, and then the right decorative design 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2" having light blue, that is, an even number. A reach may be formed by a decorative design (design image).

[Modification 4]
In the decorative pattern visibility change effect C of FIGS. 118(B) to (E), the left movable accessory image KGL simulating the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 changes the variable region 8Lr of the left decorative symbol 8L. The right movable accessory image KGR imitating the right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14 appeared so as to cover the variable region 8Rr of the right decorative symbol 8R. However, the left side movable accessory image KGL may be replaced by the left side movable accessory image 14L, or the right side movable accessory image KGR may be replaced by the right side movable accessory object 14R. Part of the left decorative design 8L can be made difficult to be visible by covering a part of the left decorative design 8L with the left movable accessory 14L, and part of the right decorative design 8R can be covered with the right movable accessory 14R. Since it is possible to make a part of the right decorative pattern 8R difficult to visually recognize, the player can imagine the whole image of the left decorative pattern 8L and the whole image of the right decorative pattern 8R. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a variation effect (variation display) based on a novel pattern image that has not existed in the past. Therefore, interest can be improved.

Further, the left movable accessory image KGL is displayed on the display screen 7a so as to correspond to the operation area of the left movable accessory 14L, and the right movable accessory image KGR is displayed so as to correspond to the operation area of the right movable accessory 14R. The left movable accessory image KGL and the right movable accessory image KGR do not overlap the fluctuation and hold display area THA before and after the display on the screen 7a. Even if the left movable accessory 14L is used instead of the KGL, and the right movable accessory 14R is used instead of the right movable accessory image KGR, in the first place, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R become the fluctuation and suspension display area THA. Do not overlap before and after. That is, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R do not cover the fluctuation display position 9Cd, the reservation display position 9Ad, the fluctuation icon 9C, and the reservation icon 9A in the fluctuation and reservation display area THA.

[Modification 5]
In the decorative pattern visibility change effect A of FIG. 116, the decorative pattern visibility change effect B of FIG. 117, and the decorative pattern visibility change effect C of FIG. 118, some of the effects described may not be provided, and The effect of may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect C9-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
A second area capable of displaying a specific image is provided in front of the first area so as to overlap a part of the first area in which variable display is performed by the symbol image, and a part of the symbol image is provided. Is capable of executing the first effect that is difficult to see due to the second area,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Mode C9-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect C9-1,
In the first effect, a third area in which the variable icon and the hold icon can be displayed is overlapped with a part of the first area and a part of the second area. Provided in front of, the variation icon and the hold icon does not become difficult to visually recognize by the symbol image and the specific image,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C9-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect C9-1 or aspect C9-2,
In the first effect, when the specific image is displayed in a state of straddling the first area and the second area, another portion different from a part of the symbol image is visually recognized by the specific image. Can be difficult,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C9-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C9-1 to C9-3,
In the first effect, there is a case where the second area disappears and the entire pattern image is easily visible.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C9-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C9-1 to C9-4,
The first effect can be executed before the temporary stop display after the variable display by the symbol image is started,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C9-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C9-1 to C9-5,
The variation icon is changeable to a highly expected hit when the specific image is displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C9-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C9-1 to C9-6,
After the first effect, it is possible to execute a second effect in which the color of the symbol image is changed to another color to increase the expectation of winning.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The decorative symbol rotation stop display effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 119 to 121. In FIGS. 119 to 121, for example, the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and other movable accessory disposed around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are easy to see in the drawings. Therefore, it is omitted.

This decorative symbol rotation stop display effect is performed during the variable effect (during variable display) by the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (for example, variation effect start command) received from the sub-control board 90, and includes an instruction to execute the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect, it corresponds from the ROM 103. The image data to be read is read and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Here, the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect A will be described first, the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect B, and the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect C will be sequentially described.

[Decorative design rotation stop display effect A]
The decorative symbol rotation stop display effect A will be described with reference to FIG. 119. FIG. 119 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect A. The decorative symbol rotation stop display effect A is performed during the variable effect (during variable display) by the decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 119(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative design 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative design 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen. In each variable region from the upper side to the lower side of 7a, the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (symbol: number "1" to number "9") is started in a display mode in which the reel is rotated. .. In addition, in the middle decoration pattern 8C, in addition to the numerical design, there are special designs. This special symbol is composed only of the symbol of the character.

The number "7" has a bright red color. The odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" except the number "7" all have the same bright green color. The even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color. The odd-numbered designs are made up of various character designs (all different character designs) having multiple colors (full color), while the even-numbered designs are made up of the character designs at all. It has not been. The character design attached to the odd-numbered design is largely displayed mainly by the character design. Therefore, the odd-numbered symbols have a size smaller than the size of the symbols of the characters attached to the odd-numbered symbols. On the other hand, since the symbols of the characters are not attached to the even symbols, the even symbols themselves are largely displayed. Therefore, the even-numbered symbols have the same size as the symbol size of the character attached to the odd-numbered symbols. The special design is a design of a character in the form of a wingman, and has a plurality of colors (full color). The special design is composed only of the characters of the wing character form, and the size of the special design is the same or larger than the size of the character of the character attached to the odd design. ing.

When the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative design is started, the display of the decorative design that is stopped and displayed changes from the opaque state to the translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed to the high speed display mode. .. Thereby, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semitransparent decorative pattern which is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped). Note that the decorative pattern is in a display mode in which the decorative pattern moves in small increments in the vertical direction when the temporary stop display is performed.

The variation icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, which are currently changing as the end of the first special map reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (on the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (on the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad from the position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The reserved display positions 9Ad are arranged and displayed linearly along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

Here, a white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, a white spherical retention icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and second hold display positions 9Ad to fourth hold are displayed. The hold icon is not displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one stocked icon that has not been digested for the hold icon. In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting opening 20 and the second starting opening 21.

In addition, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbol, is supported. In addition to the hold icon 9A, which corresponds to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 The special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21 are arranged and displayed as unillustrated numbers on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 is shown in blue on the left side, and the number of the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21 is shown in red. The numbers are arranged on the upper side of the center of the display screen 7a so as to be spaced apart from each other on the right side and are always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as the number of reserved balls as numerical values, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and it is easy to intuitively understand. Note that these numbers are arranged on the forefront side of the display screen 7a and other images are displayed behind the foreground of the display screen 7a so that visibility is not hindered by the other images. It is like this.

Here, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “icon”) will be briefly described. Due to the difference in shape and color, the difference in expectation in winning in the lottery corresponding to the icon. Is represented. For example, of the four icons, a yellow (gold) star icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest likelihood of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hit, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hit, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hit. The smile sphere icon is further set to have a high expectation of being a jackpot in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (Rainbow (hit jackpot)).

In FIG. 119(A), the left decorative design 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2" having a light blue color, and the middle decorative design 8C is provided with the character design 8Cb to the pattern 8Ca having the number "3" having a light green color. Are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the right decorative design 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "6" having a bright blue color, and then the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are stopped and displayed, which is out of alignment. When the deviation is confirmed, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd and becomes the change icon 9C, as shown in FIG. 119(B), the change of the decorative symbol again. The effect (variable display) is started, and the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect A is started.

After that, the left decorative pattern 8L during the variable effect (during variable display) changes from the translucent state to the opaque state again, and as shown in FIG. 119(C), the left decorative pattern 8L changes to the left decorative pattern 8L. At a position slightly higher than the center line connecting the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a in the variable region, the symbol 8La of the number "1" having a bright green color appears with the symbol 8Lb of the character attached. When the left decorative design 8L changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state, the design 8La of the number "1" having a bright green color is still facing the front and is fluctuated (variable display). In addition, the character design 8Lb attached to the design "8" of the number "1" having a bright green color is tilted to the right front when viewed from the design 8Lb of the character, although its eyes are shining yellow, but not facing the front, A variation effect (variation display) is obtained in the state of a silhouette like this. At this time, the variation effect (variation display) of the middle decoration symbol 8C and the right decoration symbol 8R is continued.

Then, as shown in FIG. 119(D), the left decorative design 8L faces the front from the front right to the front while the design 8La of the number "1" having a bright green color is still facing the front. When the character's design 8Lb is turned to the front as in this case, the silhouette is changed from a silhouette to a full color, and the entire left decorative design 8L is displayed in a small and gradual vertical movement. As a result, the left decorative design 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the design 8La of the number "1" having a bright green color and the design 8Lb of the character facing the front.

Subsequently, the right decorative pattern 8R during the variable effect (during variable display) changes from the semitransparent state to the opaque state again, and as shown in FIG. 119(E), the right decorative pattern 8R is the right decorative pattern 8R. At a position slightly higher than the center line connecting the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a in the variable area, the character 8Ra of the number "2" having light blue appears without being attached. When the right decorative design 8R changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state, the design "8" of the number "2" having a bright blue color does not face the front and tilts to the left front when viewed from the design "8" of the number "2". It is in a state as it is, and a variable effect (variable display) is displayed. At this time, the variation effect (variation display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C is continued.

As shown in FIG. 119(F), the right decorative design 8R slowly changes its posture so that the design 8Ra of the number "2" having a bright blue color is directed from the front left to the front, and the number "B" having a bright blue color. When the "2" symbol 8Ra faces the front, the entire right decorative symbol 8R is in a display mode in which it moves loosely in small increments in the vertical direction. As a result, the right decorative design 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the design 8Ra of the number "2" having a bright blue color facing the front.

Subsequently, the medium decoration pattern 8C in the fluctuating effect (during change display) changes from the translucent state to the opaque state again, and as shown in FIG. 119(G), the middle decoration pattern 8C is the middle decoration pattern 8C. At a position slightly higher than the center line connecting the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a in the variable area, the pattern 8Ca of the number "7" having a bright red color appears with the character pattern 8Cb attached. When the medium decoration pattern 8C changes from the semi-transparent state to the opaque state, the pattern 8Ca of the number "7" having a bright red color is in a state of facing the front and is fluctuated (variable display). Further, the character pattern 8Cb attached to the pattern 8Ca of the number "7" having a bright red color has its eyes shining yellow, but it does not face the front but tilts to the right front when viewed from the character pattern 8Cb. A variation effect (variation display) is obtained in the state of a silhouette like this.

Then, as shown in FIG. 119(H), the middle-decoration pattern 8C is such that the pattern 8Ca of the character "7" having a bright red color is facing the front, and the character pattern 8Cb is facing from the front right to the front. When the character's design 8Cb is turned to the front as in this case, the silhouette-like silhouette is changed to a full color, and the whole middle decorative design 8C is displayed in a small and small vertical movement. As a result, the middle-decoration pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the pattern 8Ca of the number “7” having a bright red color and the character pattern 8Cb facing the front. As a result, the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect A ends.

After that, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are stopped and displayed, and are left. When the deviation is confirmed, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Thus, in the left decorative design 8L, the posture is slowly changed so that the character design 8Lb attached to the odd design 8La faces from the right front to the front when viewed from the character design 8Lb, and in the middle decorative design 8C. The character 8Cb of the character attached to the odd number of symbols 8Ca slowly changes its posture so as to face from the front right to the front when viewed from the symbol 8Cb of the character, while in the right decorative symbol 8R, the number of even symbols When 8Ra is viewed from an even number of symbols 8Ra, the posture is slowly changed from left front to front. That is, when the decorative design includes the character design, the character design rotates, and when the decorative design does not include the character design, the numerical design rotates, and the target to be rotated is different. It is like this. Furthermore, the direction in which the character design rotates in the case where the character design exists in the decorative design and the direction in which the numerical design rotates in the case where the character design does not exist in the decorative design are opposite to each other. Has become.

[Decorative design rotation stop display effect B]
Next, the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect B will be described with reference to FIG. 120. FIG. 120 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect B. The decorative symbol rotation stop display effect B is performed during the variable effect (during variable display) by the decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 120(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative design 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative design 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen. In each variable region from the upper side to the lower side of 7a, the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (symbol: number "1" to number "9") is started in a display mode in which the reel is rotated. .. In addition, in the middle decoration pattern 8C, in addition to the numerical design, there are special designs. This special symbol is composed only of the symbol of the character.

The number "7" has a bright red color. The odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" except the number "7" all have the same bright green color. The even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color. The odd-numbered designs are made up of various character designs (all different character designs) having multiple colors (full color), while the even-numbered designs are made up of the character designs at all. It has not been. The character design attached to the odd-numbered design is largely displayed mainly by the character design. Therefore, the odd-numbered symbols have a size smaller than the size of the symbols of the characters attached to the odd-numbered symbols. On the other hand, since the symbols of the characters are not attached to the even symbols, the even symbols themselves are largely displayed. Therefore, the even-numbered symbols have the same size as the symbol size of the character attached to the odd-numbered symbols. The special design is a design of a character in the form of a wingman, and has a plurality of colors (full color). The special design is composed only of the characters of the wing character form, and the size of the special design is the same or larger than the size of the character of the character attached to the odd design. ing.

When the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative design is started, the display of the decorative design that is stopped and displayed changes from the opaque state to the translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed to the high speed display mode. .. Thereby, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semitransparent decorative pattern which is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped). Note that the decorative pattern is in a display mode in which the decorative pattern moves in small increments in the vertical direction when the temporary stop display is performed.

The variation icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, which are currently changing as the end of the first special map reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (on the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (on the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad from the position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The reserved display positions 9Ad are arranged and displayed linearly along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

Here, a white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, a white spherical retention icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and second hold display positions 9Ad to fourth hold are displayed. The hold icon is not displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one stocked icon that has not been digested for the hold icon. In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting opening 20 and the second starting opening 21.

In addition, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbol, is supported. In addition to the hold icon 9A, which corresponds to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 The special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21 are arranged and displayed as unillustrated numbers on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 is shown in blue on the left side, and the number of the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21 is shown in red. The numbers are arranged on the upper side of the center of the display screen 7a so as to be spaced apart from each other on the right side and are always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as the number of reserved balls as numerical values, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and it is easy to intuitively understand. Note that these numbers are arranged on the forefront side of the display screen 7a and other images are displayed behind the foreground of the display screen 7a so that visibility is not hindered by the other images. It is like this.

Here, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “icon”) will be briefly described. Due to the difference in shape and color, the difference in expectation in winning in the lottery corresponding to the icon. Is represented. For example, of the four icons, a yellow (gold) star icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest likelihood of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hit, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hit, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hit. The smile sphere icon is further set to have a high expectation of being a jackpot in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (Rainbow (hit jackpot)).

In FIG. 120(A), the left decorative design 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2" having a light blue color, and the middle decorative design 8C is provided with the character design 8Cb on the pattern 8Ca having the number "3" having a light green color. Are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the right decorative design 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "6" having a bright blue color, and then the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are stopped and displayed, which is out of alignment. When the deviation is confirmed, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd and becomes the change icon 9C, as shown in FIG. 120(B), the change of the decorative symbol again. The effect (variable display) is started, and the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect B is started.

After that, the left decorative pattern 8L during the variable effect (during variable display) changes from the semitransparent state to the opaque state again, and as shown in FIG. 120(C), the left decorative pattern 8L changes to the left decorative pattern 8L. At a position slightly above the center line connecting the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a in the variable region, the symbol 8La of the number "1" having a bright green color appears with the symbol 8Lb of the character attached. When the left decorative design 8L changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state, the design 8La of the number "1" having a bright green color is still facing the front and is fluctuated (variable display). In addition, the character design 8Lb attached to the design "8" of the number "1" having a bright green color is tilted to the right front when viewed from the design 8Lb of the character, although its eyes are shining yellow, but not facing the front, A variation effect (variation display) is obtained in the state of a silhouette like this. At this time, the variation effect (variation display) of the middle decoration symbol 8C and the right decoration symbol 8R is continued.

Then, as shown in FIG. 120(D), in the left decorative design 8L, the design 8Lb of the character faces from the front right to the front while the design 8La of the number "1" having a bright green color is facing the front. When the character's design 8Lb is turned to the front as in this case, the silhouette is changed from a silhouette to a full color, and the entire left decorative design 8L is displayed in a small and gradual vertical movement. As a result, the left decorative design 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the design 8La of the number "1" having a bright green color and the design 8Lb of the character facing the front.

Then, the right decorative design 8R during the variable effect (during variable display) changes from the semitransparent state to the opaque state again, and as shown in FIG. 120(E), the right decorative design 8R is the right decorative design 8R. At a position slightly higher than the center line connecting the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a in the variable area, the character 8Ra of the number "2" having light blue appears without being attached. When the right decorative design 8R changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state, the design "8" of the number "2" having a bright blue color does not face the front and tilts to the left front when viewed from the design "8" of the number "2". It is in a state as it is, and a variable effect (variable display) is displayed. At this time, the variation effect (variation display) of the middle decorative pattern 8C is continued.

Then, as shown in FIG. 120(F), the right decorative design 8R slowly changes its posture so that the design 8Ra of the number "2" having a light blue color is directed from the front left to the front, and the number "B" having a light blue color. When the "2" symbol 8Ra faces the front, the entire right decorative symbol 8R becomes a display mode in which the entire right decorative symbol 8R moves slowly in small increments. As a result, the right decorative design 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the design 8Ra of the number "2" having a bright blue color facing the front.

Subsequently, the medium decoration pattern 8C during the change effect (during change display) changes from the translucent state to the opaque state again, and as shown in FIG. 120(G), the middle decoration pattern 8C is the middle decoration pattern 8C. At a position slightly higher than the center line connecting the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a in the variation area of, the symbol 8Cb of the wing character form appears. When the semi-transparent state changes from the translucent state to the opaque state, the middle decoration pattern 8C is in a state in which all the wingman-shaped character patterns 8Cb have a silver color and are fluctuated (variable display).

Then, when the middle decoration pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 120(H), the middle decoration pattern 8C becomes large while emitting a flashing light FH, and a pattern of a wingman-shaped character having a silver color. 8Cb changes to another color (full color), and the eye color also changes from silver to yellow. At this time, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R disappear from the display screen 7a. On the other hand, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C are still displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the change icon 9C are displayed such that the flash FH is arranged behind the change display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the change icon 9C. Therefore, the visibility of the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C is not obstructed by being not covered by the flashlight FH. When the hold icon 9A exists, the hold icon 9A does not disappear from the display screen 7a, and the flash FH is arranged behind the hold icon 9A to be displayed. 9A is not covered by the flash FH, and the visibility of the hold icon 9A is not impaired.

Then, in a state where the flash FH is emitted, as shown in FIG. 120(I) (the flash FH is omitted in the figure), the symbol of the wingman form character in the enlarged middle decorative pattern 8C is shown. 8Cb jumps out from the middle decoration symbol 8C to the front and is displayed in a larger size, and a moving image effect of the symbol 8Cb of the character in the wing form is performed. At this time, the middle decorative pattern 8C disappears from the display screen 7a. As a result, the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect B ends.

In FIG. 120(I), in the case where the wingman-shaped character pattern 8Cb in the middle decorative pattern 8C does not jump forward from the middle decorative pattern 8C, the middle decorative pattern 8C moves to the lower side of the variable region of itself. Then, it appears in a state in which the symbol 8Cb of the character is attached to the symbol 8Ca of the number "1" having a bright green color from above. When the medium decoration pattern 8C changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state, the pattern 8Ca of the number "1" having a bright green color is in a state of facing the front and is fluctuated (variable display). In addition, the character pattern 8Cb attached to the pattern "8" of bright green number "1" has its eyes shining yellow, but it does not look to the front but tilts to the right front when viewed from the character's pattern 8Cb. A variation effect (variation display) is obtained in the state of a silhouette like this. The middle decoration symbol 8C slowly changes its posture so that the character symbol 8Cb faces from the front right to the front while the symbol 8Ca of the number "1" having a bright green color is facing the front, When the design 8Cb faces the front, it changes from a silhouette like a silhouette to a full color, and the middle decoration design 8C is in a display mode in which it moves slowly in small increments in the vertical direction. As a result, the middle decorative design 8C is in a state of being temporarily stopped and displayed with the design 8Ca of the number "1" having a bright green color and the design 8Cb of the character facing the front. As a result, the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect B ends. After that, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are not stopped and displayed in the same design, and are lost. When the deviation is confirmed, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Then, as shown in FIG. 120(J), a battle effect is started. In the battle effect, two characters (an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB) fight each other, and the effect of expecting a jackpot is high. In the battle effect, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C disappear from the display screen 7a. If the hold icon 9A exists, the hold icon 9A also disappears from the display screen 7a.

When the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB is defeated, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are stopped and displayed with the same design, and the big hit is followed by the big hit game (big hit production). On the other hand, when the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are not stopped and displayed in the same design, and are lost. When the battle effect is finished and the jackpot or the deviation is confirmed, the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad are displayed again on the display screen 7a. When the hold icon 9A exists, the hold icon 9A is also displayed again on the display screen 7a.

In this way, in the middle decorative design 8C, although the posture of the character 8Cb of the character of the wing character form which is a special design does not change while facing the front, in the left decorative design 8L, it becomes an odd design 8La. While the symbol 8Lb of the attached character slowly changes its posture so as to face from the front right to the front, in the right decorative symbol 8R, the posture slowly changes so that even numbers of symbols 8Ra face from the front left to the front. It is designed to let you. In other words, the character design is rotated when the character design is present in the decorative design excluding the special design, and the numerical design is rotated when the character design is not present in the decorative design, The objects that rotate are different. Furthermore, the direction in which the character design rotates when the character design exists in the decorative design excluding the special design and the direction in which the numerical design rotates when the character design does not exist in the decorative design are the opposites. It has become different.

Further, even when a character design is present in the decorative design, there are one in which the character design rotates and one in which the character design faces the front and does not rotate. Furthermore, if there is a decorative design that is composed of a numerical design as the only design and a decorative design is composed of the design of a character in the form of a wingman, as the only design, the unique design is It is designed to rotate.

[Decorative design rotation stop display effect C]
Next, the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect C will be described with reference to FIG. 121. FIG. 121 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect C. The decorative symbol rotation stop display effect C is performed during the variable effect (during variable display) by the decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 121(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative design 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative design 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen. In each variable region from the upper side to the lower side of 7a, the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (symbol: number "1" to number "9") is started in a display mode in which the reel is rotated. .. Here, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are card-type decorative designs, and various characters are attached to the numerical design in the card. In addition, there is a special design in the middle decorative design 8C. This special symbol is composed only of the symbol of the character.

The number "7" has a bright red color. The odd numbers "1", "3", "5" and "9" except the number "7" all have the same bright green color. The even numbers "2", "4", "6" and "8" all have the same bright blue color. Numerical patterns (odd number patterns and even number patterns) are each configured with various character patterns having different colors (full color) (all different character patterns), and the character patterns are the main constituents. Is displayed in large size. For this reason, the size of the numerical design is smaller than the size of the design of the character attached to the numerical design. The special design is a design of a character in the form of a wingman, and has a plurality of colors (full color). The special pattern is composed only of the characters of the wingman form, and the size of the special pattern is about the same as or larger than the size of the character attached to the numerical pattern. ing.

When the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative design is started, the display of the decorative design that is stopped and displayed changes from the opaque state to the translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed to the high speed display mode. .. Thereby, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semitransparent decorative pattern which is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped). Note that the decorative pattern is in a display mode in which the decorative pattern moves in small increments in the vertical direction when the temporary stop display is performed.

The variation icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, which are currently changing as the end of the first special map reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (on the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (on the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad from the position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The reserved display positions 9Ad are arranged and displayed linearly along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

Here, a white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, a white spherical retention icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and second hold display positions 9Ad to fourth hold are displayed. The hold icon is not displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one stocked icon that has not been digested for the hold icon. In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting opening 20 and the second starting opening 21.

In addition, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbol, is supported. In addition to the hold icon 9A, which corresponds to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 The special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21 are arranged and displayed as unillustrated numbers on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 is shown in blue on the left side, and the number of the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21 is shown in red. The numbers are arranged on the upper side of the center of the display screen 7a so as to be spaced apart from each other on the right side and are always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as the number of reserved balls as numerical values, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and it is easy to intuitively understand. Note that these numbers are arranged on the forefront side of the display screen 7a and other images are displayed behind the foreground of the display screen 7a so that visibility is not hindered by the other images. It is like this.

Here, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “icon”) will be briefly described. Due to the difference in shape and color, the difference in expectation in winning in the lottery corresponding to the icon. Is represented. For example, of the four icons, a yellow (gold) star icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest likelihood of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hit, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hit, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hit. The smile sphere icon is further set to have a high expectation of being a jackpot in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (Rainbow (hit jackpot)).

In FIG. 121(A), the left decorative design 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed by adding the character design 8Lb to the number "2" having a bright blue color, and the middle decorative design 8C is a design 8Ca of the number "3" having a bright green color. Is temporarily stopped and displayed with the character design 8Cb attached, and the right decorative design 8C is provisionally stopped with the character design 8Rb attached to the number "6" having a bright blue color, and then the left decorative design 8L and middle decoration are displayed. The design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are stopped and displayed, and the design is lost. When the deviation is confirmed, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd and becomes the change icon 9C, as shown in FIG. 121(B), the change of the decorative symbol again. The effect (variable display) is started, and the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect C is started.

After that, the left decorative design 8L during the variable effect (during variable display) changes from the translucent state to the opaque state again, and as shown in FIG. 121(C), the left decorative design 8L changes to the left decorative design 8L. At a position slightly higher than the center line connecting the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a in the variable region, the symbol 8La of the number "1" having a bright green color appears with the symbol 8Lb of the character attached. When the left decorative design 8L changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state, the design 8La of the number "1" having a bright green color is still facing the front and is fluctuated (variable display). In addition, the character design 8Lb attached to the design "8" of the number "1" having a bright green color is tilted to the right front when viewed from the design 8Lb of the character, although its eyes are shining yellow, but not facing the front, A variation effect (variation display) is obtained in the state of a silhouette like this. At this time, the variation effect (variation display) of the middle decoration symbol 8C and the right decoration symbol 8R is continued.

Then, as shown in FIG. 121(D), the left decorative design 8L is a state in which the design 8La of the number "1" having a bright green color is facing the front, and the design 8Lb of the character is facing from the front right to the front. When the character's pattern 8Lb is turned to the front as shown in the figure, the silhouette of the character changes from a silhouette to a full color, and the entire card-type left decorative pattern 8L moves slowly in small vertical directions. Become. As a result, the left decorative design 8L of the card type is temporarily stopped and displayed with the design 8La of the number "1" having a bright green color and the design 8Lb of the character facing the front.

Subsequently, the right decorative pattern 8R during the change effect (during change display) changes from the translucent state to the opaque state again, and as shown in FIG. 121(E), the right decorative pattern 8R is the right decorative pattern 8R. At a position slightly higher than the center line connecting the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a in the variable area, the symbol 8Ra of the number "2" having a light blue color appears with the symbol 8Rb of the character attached. When the right decorative design 8R changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state, the design "8" of the number "2" having a bright blue color does not face the front and tilts to the left front when viewed from the design "8" of the number "2". It is in a state of being as it is and is fluctuated (variable display), and the pattern 8Rb of the character attached to the pattern 8Ra of the number "2" that has a bright blue color has its eyes shining yellow and turned to the front in full color. As it is, the variable effect (variable display) is displayed. At this time, the variation effect (variation display) of the middle decoration symbol 8C and the right decoration symbol 8R is continued.

Then, as shown in FIG. 121(F), the right decorative design 8R slowly changes its posture so that the design 8Ra of the number "2" having a bright blue color is directed from the front left to the front, and the number "B" having a bright blue color. When the "2" pattern 8Ra faces the front, the entire card type right decorative pattern 8R is in a display mode in which it moves slowly in small increments in the vertical direction. As a result, the card type right decorative design 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the design "8Ra" of the number "2" having a bright blue color and the design 8Rb of the character facing the front.

Subsequently, the medium decoration pattern 8C in the fluctuating effect (during change display) changes from the translucent state to the opaque state again, and as shown in FIG. 121(G), the medium decoration pattern 8C is the middle decoration pattern 8C. At a position slightly higher than the center line connecting the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a in the variable area, the pattern 8Ca of the number "7" having a bright red color appears with the character pattern 8Cb attached. When the medium decoration pattern 8C changes from the semi-transparent state to the opaque state, the pattern 8Ca of the number "7" having a bright red color is in a state of facing the front and is fluctuated (variable display). Further, the character pattern 8Cb attached to the pattern 8Ca of the number "7" having a bright red color has its eyes shining yellow, but it does not face the front but tilts to the right front when viewed from the character pattern 8Cb. A variation effect (variation display) is obtained in the state of a silhouette like this.

As shown in FIG. 121(H), the middle-decoration pattern 8C is in a state where the pattern 8Ca of the number "7" having a bright red color is facing the front, and the character pattern 8Cb is facing from the front right to the front. When the character's design 8Cb is turned to the front like this, the silhouette-like silhouette changes to full color, and the entire card-type middle decorative design 8C moves slowly in small vertical directions. Become. As a result, the card-type middle decorative design 8C is in a state of being temporarily stopped and displayed with the design 8Ca of the number "7" having a bright red color and the design 8Cb of the character facing the front. As a result, the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect C ends.

After that, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are stopped and displayed, and are left. When the deviation is confirmed, the fluctuation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

In this way, in the card-type left decorative design 8L, the posture is slowly changed so that the character design 8Lb attached to the odd design 8La faces from the right front to the front when viewed from the character design 8Lb, and the card type In the middle decoration pattern 8C, the character pattern 8Cb attached to the odd number pattern 8Ca slowly changes its posture so as to face from the right front to the front when viewed from the character pattern 8Cb, while the card type right In the decorative design 8R, the posture is slowly changed so that the even design 8Ra faces from the left front to the front when viewed from the even design 8Ra. That is, even if various characters are attached to the odd-numbered symbols and the even-numbered symbols, the character symbols are rotated in the odd-numbered symbols, and the numerical symbols are rotated in the even-numbered symbols. Are different. Further, the direction in which the character symbols in the odd-numbered symbols rotate and the direction in which the numbered symbols in the even-numbered symbols rotate are opposite to each other.

[Effect example]
Below, the effect example of the decorative design rotation stop display effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative pattern rotation stop display effect A of FIG. 119, the decorative pattern rotation stop display effect B of FIG. 120, and the decorative pattern rotation stop display effect C of FIG. A displayable image display device 7 (display means) is provided, and among the decorative patterns (a plurality of pattern images) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8L, a character pattern is attached to an odd number of patterns. The decorative design (first design image) is temporarily stopped and displayed in the first stop mode, and the decorative design (second design image) having an even number of designs is the second stop mode (second stop mode is , Which is different from the first stop mode. (FIG. 119(B) to (H) in the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect A, and FIG. 120( in the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect). B) to (G) and the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect C, it is possible to execute FIGS. 121(B) to (I). According to this configuration, among the decorative patterns (a plurality of pattern images) of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8L, the characters are attached to the odd-numbered symbols which are temporarily stopped and displayed in the first stop mode. By the decorative pattern (first symbol image) and the even number of decorative symbols (second symbol image) that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the second stop mode, a novel variation effect of the decorative symbol (variation) Display) can be provided to the player. Therefore, interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect A of FIG. 119, the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect B of FIG. 120, and the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect C of FIG. 121, the first symbol image And the second symbol image is a symbol symbol (numerical image), and the first symbol image further includes a symbol symbol (decorative image). According to this configuration, the first symbol image is a symbol symbol (numerical image) including the symbol symbol (decorative image), and the second symbol image is the numeral symbol (numeral image). Become. Therefore, there is already a difference between the decorative design that is the first design image and the decorative design that is the second design image, and the variation effect (variable display) of the decorative design is started and temporarily stopped and displayed. And, it is possible to give a different impression to the player depending on the combination of the decorative patterns displayed in the temporary stop display, and it is possible to contribute to eliminating the monotony with respect to the temporary stop display of the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative patterns. it can.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the fluctuating effect in the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect A of FIG. 119, the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect B of FIG. 120, and the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect C of FIG. As a stop mode, the first symbol image is temporarily stopped and displayed after the character symbol (decorative image) is rotated without rotating the numeral symbol (numeral image) in the first symbol image, and the second symbol is stopped. As a result, after rotating the numerical design (numerical image) in the second design image, the second design image can be temporarily stopped and displayed. According to this configuration, the first symbol image in which the symbol symbol (numeral image) includes the symbol symbol (decorative image), the symbol symbol (numeral image) does not rotate, and the symbol symbol (decorative image) is not rotated. Is rotated and then temporarily stopped and displayed, and the second symbol image, which is a numerical design (numerical image), is such that the numerical design (numerical image) is tentatively stopped and then rotated. It's different. Thereby, as a variation in which the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, there are cases where only the first symbol image is used, cases where only the second symbol image is used, and cases where the first symbol image and the second symbol image are used, In any of the variations, since the decorative pattern always has a rotating portion, the unified effect of "rotation" is performed for the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative pattern. Even if the object to be rotated is different between the symbol image and the second symbol image, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel a sense of discomfort with respect to the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect A of FIG. 119, the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect B of FIG. 120, and the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect C of FIG. 121, the first symbol image Numerical patterns (numerical image) in 2 are those having a bright green color (first color) and bright red (second color), and numerical patterns in the second symbol image (numerical image). ) Has a bright blue color (third color). According to this configuration, the first symbol image and the second symbol image have a difference in the manner of temporary stop display in the first place, and also have a difference in the color of the numerical symbol (numerical image). Furthermore, since there are two colors in the numerical design (numerical image) in the first design image, a different impression can be given to the player depending on the combination of the temporary stop displays.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, for example, in the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect B of FIGS. 120(G) to (I), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8L are decorative symbols (a plurality of symbols). In the pattern image), there is a special pattern (third pattern image) of the middle decorative pattern 8C that further has a character pattern (decorative image) and does not have a numerical pattern (numerical image). The special symbol (third symbol image) of the medium decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed in the third stop mode, and in the third stop mode, the special symbol (third symbol image) of the medium decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped. When displayed, the design (decoration image) of the character in the wingman form in the special design (third design image) of the middle decoration design 8C jumps out to the outside of the special design (third design image) of the middle decoration design 8C and operates. You can do it. According to this configuration, when the special symbol (third symbol image) of the medium decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed, the symbol of the character in the wing form in the special symbol (third symbol image) of the medium decorative symbol 8C. The (decorative image) suddenly jumps out from the special symbol (third symbol image) of the medium decorative symbol 8C and operates, which is a moving image that cannot be imagined by the player. It can be provided to the player.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, in the variation effect in the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect A of FIG. 119, the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect B of FIG. 120, and the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect C of FIG. When the pattern image of (1) is started to change, a part of the character pattern (decorative image) in the first pattern image is changed to a silhouette (shadow image) like a silhouette, and in the first stop mode, the original ( It is possible to return to a full-color character design (decorative image). According to this configuration, by returning from the silhouette (shadow image) like a silhouette to the design (decoration image) of the original (full-color) character, it is possible to easily determine what character the pattern is. By providing a silhouette (silhouette image) like a silhouette, the effect of the effect can be further enhanced.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect A of FIG. 119, the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect B of FIG. 120, and the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect C of FIG. 121, the first symbol image The size of the number pattern (number image) in is smaller than the size of the number pattern (number image) in the second pattern image. In the first design image, since the design of the character (decoration image) is included in the design of the number (numerical image), the design (decoration image) of the character becomes large in the first design image, The size of the numerical design is smaller than that of the character design (decorative image). Further, the second symbol image becomes a numeral symbol (numerical image), and the numeral symbol itself becomes large as a main component. That is, the player is focused on the design of the character (decorative design) that is displayed large in the first design image, and the player is focused on the design of the number (numerical image) that is displayed large in the second design image. It can be done, and the target of attention is different. As a result, it is possible to contribute to making it difficult for the decorative effect that is the first symbol image and the decorative symbol that is the second symbol image to be monotonous with respect to the variable effect (variable display).

[Modification]
The following is a modification of the decorative symbol rotation stop display effect.
[Modification 1]
In the decorative pattern rotation stop display effect A of FIG. 119, the decorative pattern rotation stop display effect B of FIG. 120, and the decorative pattern rotation stop display effect C of FIG. It was done. In other words, it was performed in a so-called left-handed gaming state. However, it may be performed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second starting opening 21. In other words, it may be performed in a so-called right-handed gaming state.

[Modification 2]
In the decorative pattern rotation stop display effect A of FIG. 119, the decorative pattern rotation stop display effect B of FIG. 120, and the decorative pattern rotation stop display effect C of FIG. 121, when the temporary stop display is performed, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative design 8R are arranged in a line at a position slightly above the center line connecting the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a in the variable region of the left decorative design 8L. However, for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged at a position slightly above this center line, the middle decorative pattern 8C is arranged further rearward, and the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged. You may make it arrange|position in the triangle shape made into a base. In this case, the size of the middle decorative pattern 8C is made smaller than the sizes of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R. Thereby, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged on the front side, and the middle decorative pattern 8C is arranged on the depth side, whereby a three-dimensional arrangement can be realized.

[Modification 3]
In the decorative design rotation stop display effect B of FIG. 120, the special character is a wingman-shaped character, and the wingman-shaped character jumps forward from the middle decorative pattern 8C, and is further displayed on the display screen 7a in a large size. Animation of human figure characters was performed. However, in addition to the wingman-shaped character design, a character design may be used as the special design. For example, it may be a pattern of characters for performing pseudo-linking (a pattern of characters for "pseudo-linking"), or may be one that changes the variable icon 9C or the hold icon 9A (a pattern of characters for "change"). By doing this, it is possible to perform an effect in which the character design jumps forward from the middle decoration design 8C and activates the content of the character design, and the variation of the special design increases, so that the special design The effect of the production can be further enhanced.

[Modification 4]
The decorative pattern rotation stop display effect A of FIG. 119, the decorative pattern rotation stop display effect B of FIG. 120, and the decorative pattern rotation stop display effect C of FIG. 121 may not include some of the effects described, The effect of may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect C10-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
Of the plurality of symbol images, it is possible to perform a variable effect in which the first symbol image is temporarily stopped and displayed in the first stop mode, and further the second symbol image is temporarily stopped and displayed in the second stop mode.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C10-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect C10-1,
The first design image and the second design image are numeric images,
The first pattern image further includes a decoration image,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C10-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect C10-2,
In the variation effect, as the first stop mode, the decoration image is rotated without rotating the number image in the first symbol image, and then the first symbol image is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the second symbol is displayed. As a stop mode, after rotating the number image in the second symbol image, the second symbol image is temporarily stopped and displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C10-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect C10-2 or aspect C10-3,
The number image in the first pattern image has one having a first color and one having a second color,
Some of the number images in the second design image have a third color,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C10-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C10-2 to C10-4,
The plurality of symbol images further include a third symbol image having the decoration image and not the numeral image,
In the variation effect, the third symbol image is temporarily stopped and displayed in a third stop mode,
In the third stop mode, when the third design image is temporarily stopped and displayed, the decoration image in the third design image can be operated by popping out of the third design image.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Mode C10-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C10-2 to C10-5,
In the variation effect, when the variation of the first symbol image is started, a part of the decoration image in the first symbol image is changed to a model resembling a shadow image, and the original in the first stop mode. Return to the decoration image,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect C10-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C10-2 to C10-6,
The size of the number image in the first design image is smaller than the size of the number image in the second design image,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The expectation level numeral display effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. This expectation number display effect may be executed during the effect of changing the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the expectation number display effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image display device 7 displays. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Expectation number display effect A]
FIG. 122 is a diagram for explaining the expected number display effect A. The degree-of-expectation display effect is an effect in which during the reach effect, an image that represents the degree of expectation at the time of reach development is displayed as a number. First, as shown in FIG. 122(A), on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are in the reach state (here, the reach of "2↓2"). The left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are displayed on the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a. When a predetermined period of time elapses after this reach effect, a black doll character CRA1 is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, a character image of "probability variation jackpot rush chance" is displayed together with the character CRA1.

The character image of the “probability variation jackpot rush chance” is a hit type suggestion image that suggests a jackpot type at the time of a jackpot. In other words, it suggests that if you hit in the fluctuation, it will be a sure change jackpot. Here, it is suggested that if the jackpot becomes the jackpot after the change, the jackpot will be 16R (round) V passing jackpot (actually 15R or 13R). In this character image, the jackpot in the change is confirmed by the lottery at the time of winning the prize, and the jackpot type is the 16RV scheduled big jackpot, and it is fluctuating when it is selected in the lottery to display this character image when the variation pattern is selected. Displayed in. Further, it is selected that this character image is displayed by lottery even when the loss in the variation is confirmed by lottery at the time of winning. It should be noted that this character image may be set to be displayed only when the jackpot type is the 16RV passing jackpot at the time of jackpot, or when other jackpots (for example, 16RV non-passing jackpot) are hit during the jackpot. May also be set to be displayed.

The character image of “probability variation jackpot rush chance” disappears from the display screen 7a after being displayed for a predetermined period. After the character image of “probability variation jackpot rush chance” disappears, the character CRA1 is displayed below the display screen 7a during the same change, as shown in FIG. 122(B). The character CRA1 is an image showing the same target (black person) as in FIG. 122(A), but the display position is different (changing) from that in FIG. 122(A). In addition, a character image of “Expectation level 40% in smile reach development” is displayed together with the character CRA1. The character image of “40% expected with smile reach” is displayed as a balloon of the character CRA. The reach state of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R continues.

The character image of “Expectation rate 40% in smile reach development” is a hit expectation degree suggesting image that represents the expectation degree of the jackpot when the reach development effect is executed, at the time of the reach of the fluctuation, in numerical form. That is, if the smile reach development effect is executed after this display, it is suggested that the expectation degree of the jackpot is 40%. Here, this character image is executed both when the jackpot in the change is confirmed by lottery at the time of winning and when the loss is confirmed. When it is selected by lottery to display this character image at the time of selecting the variation pattern, it is displayed during the variation. It is set so that the ratio of displaying the character image is selected to be 4:6 between the variation pattern at the time of big hit and the variation pattern at the time of losing.

The character image of "40% expected in smile reach development" is displayed for a predetermined period and then disappears from the display screen 7a. After the character image of "40% expected in smile reach development" disappears, the character image of "smile reach development" is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a during the same fluctuation as shown in FIG. 122(C). To be done. This is an image notifying that the reach has been developed in the reach effect. Then, as shown in FIG. 122(D), the reach development effect is executed. Here, a plurality of smile face images are displayed. Then, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are fixedly stopped. Here, it is definitely stopped in the manner of the loss of "282".

122F is a variation different from FIGS. 122A to 122E, and the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed on the display screen 7a. Then, as shown in FIG. 122(G), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are in the reach state (here, the reach of “6↓6”). The left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R move to the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a, and the special reach effect is executed. Here, first, a battle image in which the teammate character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight each other is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. While this battle video is being displayed, a character image of "30% expectation for development of smile reach" is displayed. The character image of “Expected degree of smile reach is 30%” is displayed in a rectangular frame below the teammate character CRA and the enemy character CRB.

The character image of “30% of expectation in smile reach development” is a hitting expectation suggesting image that represents the expectation of the big hit when the reach development effect is executed with a numeral at the time of reaching the variation. That is, if the smile reach development effect is executed after this display, it is suggested that the expectation degree of the jackpot is 30%. Here, this character image is executed both when the jackpot in the change is confirmed by lottery at the time of winning and when the loss is confirmed. When it is selected by lottery to display this character image at the time of selecting the variation pattern, it is displayed during the variation. It is set such that the ratio of displaying the character image is selected to be 3:7 between the large hitting variation pattern and the losing variation pattern.

Comparing this character image with "30% expectation with smile reach development" and the character image with "40% expectation with smile reach development" in Fig. 122(B), the same reach development effect (smile reach development) is executed. While the image shows the degree of expectation at the time of being displayed, a different numerical value is displayed as the degree of expectation. In this way, since different numerical values of expectation may be displayed in the same reach development effect (smile reach development), it is possible to make the player pay attention to the numerical value. Further, this character image of “Smile reach development expectation 30%” is displayed together with the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB, while the character image of “Smile reach development expectation 40%” of FIG. 122B. Is displayed together with the black doll character CRA1. In this way, an image representing a different target is displayed between the character image of “Smile reach development expectation 30%” and the character image of “Smile reach development expectation 40%” in FIG. 122(B). It This makes it difficult to understand what kind of image the character image of “Expectation degree of smile reach is 0%” is displayed together with, and it is possible to increase the expectation of display to the player.

The character image of “Expectation level of 30% due to development of smile reach” disappears from the display screen 7a after being displayed for a predetermined period. After the character image of "30% expected in smile reach development" disappears, the character image of "smile reach development" is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a during the same fluctuation as shown in FIG. 122(H). To be done. This is an image notifying that the reach has been developed in the reach effect. Then, as shown in FIG. 122(I), the reach development effect is executed. Here, the teammate character CRA is throwing a plurality of smile face images toward the enemy character CRB. Then, as shown in FIG. 122(J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are fixedly stopped. Here, together with the image in which the ally character CRA is defeated, it is definitely stopped in the losing mode of "686".

[Expectation number display effect B]
FIG. 123 is a diagram for explaining the expectation number display effect B. The degree-of-expectation display effect is an effect in which during the reach effect, an image that represents the degree of expectation at the time of reach development is displayed as a number. First, as shown in FIG. 123(A), on the display screen 7a, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are in the reach state (here, the reach of "2↓2"). The left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are displayed on the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a. When a predetermined period of time elapses after the reach effect, a battle video in which the teammate character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight each other is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. The smile character CRA1 is displayed while the battle video is displayed. In addition, a character image of “Rush chance to enter RUSH with battle victory” is displayed together with the smile character CRA1.

The character image of "Rush has a chance of entering RUSH" is a hit type suggestion image that suggests a jackpot type when the teammate character CRA wins in the battle production. That is, it is suggested that when the player hits the fluctuation, it becomes a jackpot with RUSH. Here, it is suggested that if the jackpot becomes the jackpot after the change, the jackpot will be 16R (round) V passing jackpot (actually 15R or 13R). In this character image, the jackpot in the change is confirmed by the lottery at the time of winning the prize, and the jackpot type is the 16RV scheduled big jackpot, and it is fluctuating when it is selected in the lottery to display this character image when the variation pattern is selected. Displayed in. Further, it is selected that this character image is displayed by lottery even when the loss in the variation is confirmed by lottery at the time of winning. In this case, an image in which the teammate character CRA is defeated is displayed. This character image may be set to be displayed only when the jackpot type is a 16RV passing big jackpot at the time of a big hit, or may be displayed when another big jackpot (for example, 16RV non-passing jackpot) at a big hit. It may be set to be performed.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the character image of "RUSH rush opportunity with battle victory" is displayed, the character image of "RUSH rush opportunity with battle victory" continues to be displayed as shown in FIG. 123(B). The smile character CRA2 is further displayed in the state. The smile character CRA2 is an image showing the same target (smile face) as the smile character CRA1, but has different display positions (arranged vertically). In addition, a character image of “Expectation level of 60% for development of Smileman participation reach” is displayed together with the smile character CRA2. The character image of “Expectation level of 60% for development of smile man participation reach” is displayed as a balloon of the smile character CRA2. The reach state of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R continues.

The character image of “Expectation rate of 60% in Smileman participation reach development” is a hit expectation degree suggesting image that represents the expectation degree of the jackpot when the reach development effect is executed at the time of the reach of the fluctuation by a numeral. That is, if the smileman participation reach development effect is executed after this display, it is suggested that the expectation degree of the jackpot is 60%. Here, this character image is executed both when the jackpot in the change is confirmed by lottery at the time of winning and when the loss is confirmed. When it is selected by lottery to display this character image at the time of selecting the variation pattern, it is displayed during the variation. It is set such that the ratio of displaying the character image is selected to be 6:4 between the variation pattern at the time of big hit and the variation pattern at the time of losing.

The character image of "Expectation level of 60% due to development of Smileman participation" is displayed for a predetermined period and then disappears from the display screen 7a. At this time, the character image of "Rush's chance of entering the battle with victory" also disappears. After the character images of "Expectation rate of 60% for the development of Smileman participation reach" and "Rush chance to enter RUSH by battle victory" disappear, as shown in Fig. 123(C), during the same change, the center of the display screen 7a A text image of "Smileman participation!" is displayed nearby. This is an image notifying that the reach has been developed in the reach effect. Smileman CRC participates in the battle video in which the teammate character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight together with this notification image. After that, as shown in FIG. 123(D), the reach development effect is executed. Here, an image in which the ally character CRA and the Smileman CRC are defeated by the enemy character CRB is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 123(E), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are fixedly stopped. Here, it is definitely stopped in the manner of the loss of "282".

FIG. 123(F) is a variation different from FIGS. 123(A) to 123(E), and the variation display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed on the display screen 7a. Then, as shown in FIG. 123(G), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are in the reach state (here, the reach of “6↓6”). The left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R move to the upper left and upper right of the display screen 7a, and the special reach effect is executed. Here, first, a battle image in which the teammate character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight each other is displayed near the center of the display screen 7a. A rectangular striped pattern image is displayed during the display of the battle video. After that, as shown in FIGS. 123(H) to (I), when the striped pattern in the rectangular striped pattern image slides to the left, the characters of “Expectation level of 60% in Smileman participation reach development” are displayed. The image is displayed. The character image of “Expectation level of 60% for reach development by Smileman” is displayed inside the rectangular frame.

The character image of “Expectation rate of 60% in Smileman participation reach development” is a hit expectation degree suggesting image that represents the expectation degree of the jackpot when the reach development effect is executed at the time of the reach of the fluctuation by a numeral. That is, if the smileman participation reach development effect is executed after this display, it is suggested that the expectation degree of the jackpot is 60%. Here, this character image is executed both when the jackpot in the change is confirmed by lottery at the time of winning and when the loss is confirmed. When it is selected by lottery to display this character image at the time of selecting the variation pattern, it is displayed during the variation. It is set such that the ratio of displaying the character image is selected to be 6:4 between the variation pattern at the time of big hit and the variation pattern at the time of losing.

A character image of "Expectation rate of 60% for development of Smileman participation" in FIGS. 123(G) to (I) and a character image of "Expectation level of 60% for development of Smileman participation reach" in FIG. 123(B) By comparison, it is an image showing the degree of expectation when the same reach development effect (smileman participation reach development) is executed, and the same numerical value is displayed as the degree of expectation. On the other hand, the character images of “Expectation level of 60% in Smileman participation reach development” in FIGS. 123(G) to (I) are displayed from the inside when the striped pattern of the rectangular striped pattern image slides to the left. On the other hand, the character image of “Expectation level of 60% in the development of smile man participation reach” in FIG. 123(B) is displayed as a balloon of the smile character CRA2. In this way, the display mode is different even if the contents are the same. In addition, while the character images of "Expectation level of 60% in the development of the Smileman participation reach" in FIGS. 123(G) to (I) are displayed together with the teammate character CRA and the enemy character CRB, the "smile in FIG. 123(B)" is displayed. The character image with the expectation of 60% in the development of man participation reach" is displayed together with the smile character CRA2. In this way, the character images of “Smileman participation reach development 60% expected” in FIGS. 123(G) to (I) and “Smileman participation reach development expected 60%” in FIG. 123(B) are displayed. Images representing different objects are displayed as the character image. As a result, it is difficult to understand what kind of image the character image of “Smileman participation reach development is expected to be 60%” and with which image is displayed, and the expectation of display to the player can be increased. it can.

The character image of "Expectation level of 60% due to development of Smileman participation" is displayed for a predetermined period and then disappears from the display screen 7a. If the reach development effect is not executed after the character image of "Expectation rate of 60% in smile man participation reach development" disappears (when Smileman CRC in FIG. 123 does not appear), as shown in FIG. 123(J). Then, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are fixedly stopped. Here, together with the image in which the ally character CRA is defeated, it is definitely stopped in the losing mode of "686".

[Expectation number display effect C]
FIG. 124 is a diagram for explaining the expected number display effect C. FIGS. 124(A) to (C) are the same as FIGS. 123(A) to (C) of the expectation numeral display effect B. After (C) in FIG. 124, the reach development effect is executed as shown in (D) in FIG. Here, an image is displayed in which the teammate character CRA and the smileman CRC win or lose the enemy character CRB. Thereafter, with this victory, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are definitely stopped. Here, since the ally character CRA has won, it is definitely stopped in the manner of hitting "222".

124(F) to (G) are the same as FIGS. 123(F) to (H) of the expectation number display effect B. After the character image of “Expectation level of 60% due to the development of Smileman participation reach” shown in FIG. 124(G) disappears, as shown in FIG. 124(H), “Smileman participation! The character image of “” is displayed. This is an image notifying that the reach has been developed in the reach effect. Smileman CRC participates in the battle video in which the teammate character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight together with this notification image. Then, as shown in FIG. 124(I), the reach development effect is executed. Here, an image is displayed in which the teammate character CRA and the smileman CRC win or lose the enemy character CRB. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 124(J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are fixedly stopped. Here, since the teammate character CRA has won, it is definitely stopped in a manner of hitting "666".

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the expected degree number display effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 122(B), FIG. 123(B), and FIG. 124(B), at the time of reach, the first effect in which the expectation at the time of reach development is expressed by numbers is executed. can do. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel effect that has never been seen before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIG. 122(A), FIG. 123(A), and FIG. 124(A), during the same change as the change in which the first effect is executed, The second effect that suggests the hit type at the time of hitting can be executed before the effect. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel effect that has never been seen before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 122(A)(B), FIG. 123(A)(B), and FIG. 124(A)(B), the first effect and the second effect. In, the image showing the same target is displayed, and in the first effect and the second effect, the images showing the same object are displayed at different positions. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel effect that has never been seen before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 122(B) and (G), in the first effect, the degree of expectation when a specific reach development effect is executed is represented by a number. At times, it is possible to execute a third effect in which the expectation when a specific reach development effect is executed is represented by a number different from the numerical value in the first effect. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel effect that has never been seen before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 122(B) and (G), images representing different objects are displayed in the first effect and the third effect. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel effect that has never been seen before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 123(B)(G) to (I) and FIGS. 124(B)(G), a specific reach development effect is executed in the first effect. In the case of reach, the expectation when a specific reach development effect is executed is expressed by the same number as the numerical value in the first effect, but different from the first effect. The fourth effect displayed in the form can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel effect that has never been seen before, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
The following is a modification of the expected number display effect.
[Modification 1]

In FIG. 122(G) of the expectation number display effect A, the expectation degree represented by the character image of “Smile reach development is 30% expectation” is shown in FIG. 122(B) of “Smile reach development expectation is 40%”. It may be the same numerical value as the degree of expectation represented by the character image. In this case, at the time of reach, the effects that represent the degree of expectation when a specific reach development effect is executed are executed in different modes, so that the interest can be improved. In addition, in FIGS. 123(G) to (I) of the expectation degree number display effect B, the expectation degree represented by the character image of “Expectation degree 60% in development of Smileman participation reach” is “Smileman in FIG. 123(B)”. The numerical value may be different from the expected degree represented by the character image of “expected degree of 60% in participation reach development”. In this case, at the time of the reach, an effect that represents the degree of expectation when a specific reach development effect is executed is expressed by different numerical values is executed, so that the interest can be improved.
[Modification 2]
In the degree-of-expected-number display effect A, the effect of displaying the character image of “Expectation degree XX% in smile reach development” may be executed multiple times during one change. That is, the degree of expectation may change during one change. In this case, the expectation displayed later may be higher or lower than the expectation displayed first.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Mode D1-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
At the time of reach, a game machine characterized by being able to execute a first effect that represents the degree of expectation at the time of reach development with a number.
◇ [Mode D1-2]
The gaming machine according to claim 1,
A game machine characterized by being able to execute a second effect that suggests a hit type during a hit before the first effect during the same change as the change in which the first effect is executed. ..
◇ [Aspect D1-3]
The gaming machine according to claim 2,
In the first effect and the second effect, images representing the same target are displayed,
An image representing the same target is displayed at different positions in the first effect and the second effect.
◇ [Mode D1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
In the first effect, the degree of expectation when a specific reach development effect is executed is represented by a number,
At the time of reach, a game machine characterized by being able to execute a third effect in which the degree of expectation when the specific reach development effect is executed is expressed by a number different from the numerical value in the first effect.
◇ [Mode D1-5]
The gaming machine according to claim 4,
An image representing an object different from each other in the first effect and the third effect is displayed.
◇ [Mode D1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
In the first effect, the degree of expectation when a specific reach development effect is executed is represented by a number,
At the time of the reach, the expectation when the specific reach development effect is executed is represented by the same numeral as the numerical value in the first effect, while the fourth effect displayed in a mode different from the first effect is displayed. A game machine characterized by being executable.

The specific effect execution suggesting effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 125 to 127. This specific effect execution suggestion effect may be executed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the specific effect execution suggestion effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image display device 7 displays. Images are displayed on the display screen 7a, the right sub display screen 64R, and the left sub display screen 64L.

[Specific production execution suggestion production A]
FIG. 125 is a diagram for explaining the specific effect execution suggestion effect A. The specific effect execution suggestion effect is an effect that suggests that the specific effect is about to be executed in the change. First, as shown in FIG. 125(A), the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is not displayed on any of the display screen 7a, the right sub display screen 64R, and the left sub display screen 64L. That is, in the special symbol display 41 (FIG. 2), even after the variable display (variable display) of the special symbol (identification information) is started, the display screen 7a, the right sub display screen 64R, the left sub display screen The state in which the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is not displayed on any of the 64L continues. The hold icon (change icon) 9C is displayed in the hold display area (change icon display area, hold digested image display area) below the center of the display screen 7a. Below the hold display area, a horizontally long rectangular image for displaying the position of the hold display area is displayed.

When a predetermined period elapses after the change starts, the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG that indicates that the specific effect will be executed in the change is displayed. Here, the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is a character image of "Smile you large set!", and notifies that the special reach effect (SP reach effect) is executed. When appearing, the character image of “Smile Kimi Daisetsu!” is enlarged and displayed across three screens of the right sub display screen 64R, the display screen 7a, and the left sub display screen 64L. Further, the effect execution suggesting image ESG is displayed outside the three screens. At this time, the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is not yet displayed. That is, in this effect, the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is displayed after the fluctuation starts and before the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed. Therefore, the player who sees the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG suddenly executes a specific effect such as a special reach effect without knowing the state of the decorative pattern, such as whether or not the decorative pattern is reached. Be informed. As a result, the player can be greatly surprised and the interest can be improved. Part of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is displayed so as to overlap the hold icon (variable icon) 9C. At this time, the hold icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed on the front side of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG.

After that, as shown in FIG. 125(C), the specific effect execution suggesting image ESG is reduced and displayed, and the entire specific effect execution suggesting image ESG is divided into three parts, that is, the right sub display screen 64R, the display screen 7a, and the left sub display screen 64L. Fits inside the screen. At this time, the image is enlarged and displayed across three screens. The variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is not displayed yet. A part of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is continuously displayed so as to overlap the hold icon (variable icon) 9C. At this time, the hold icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed on the front side of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG.

After that, as shown in FIG. 125(D), the specific effect execution suggesting image ESG is further reduced in size, and the entire specific effect execution suggesting image ESG fits inside the display screen 7a. At this time, the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is not yet displayed. A part of the specific effect execution suggesting image ESG is continuously displayed so as to overlap the hold icon (variable icon) 9C, and the hold icon (changing icon) 9C is displayed on the front side of the specific effect execution suggestive image ESG. It

Then, as shown in FIG. 125(E), in the state where the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is displayed on the display screen 7a, the left decorative pattern 8L moves downward from above the display screen 7a, and is specified. Temporary stop is performed at a position overlapping the effect execution suggestion image ESG. The left decorative pattern 8L is "7" here and is displayed on the front side of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG. After that, as shown in FIG. 125(F), in the display screen 7a, the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG and the temporarily stopped left decorative design 8L are displayed, and the right decorative design 8R is above the display screen 7a. To move downward, and temporarily stops at a position overlapping the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG. The right decorative design 8R is the same "7" as the left decorative design 8L, and is displayed on the front side of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG. As a result, a reach of "7↓7" is formed in front of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 125(G), the specific effect execution suggesting image ESG is broken, and the special reach effect as the specific effect is started. The right decorative pattern 8R and the left decorative pattern 8L are stopped in the reach mode. Here, the specific effect execution suggesting image ESG is cracked, and a plurality of smile face images (Smiley Mr.) that execute the specific effect (special reach effect) appear from the back side of the specific effect executing suggestion image ESG. After that, as shown in FIGS. 125(H) and 125(I), a specific effect (special reach effect) by a plurality of smile face images is executed. That is, the character corresponding to the content shown in the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG destroys the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG, and this character appears in the special reach effect. Here, in the specific effect, an effect with a high expectation of a big hit is executed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 125(J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are fixedly stopped. Here, it is definitely stopped in the manner of the big hit of "777".

[Specific production execution suggestion production B]
FIG. 126 is a diagram for explaining the specific effect execution suggestion effect B. The specific effect execution suggestion effect is an effect that suggests that the specific effect is about to be executed in the change. First, as shown in FIG. 126A, the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continues to be displayed on none of the display screen 7a, the right sub display screen 64R, and the left sub display screen 64L. That is, in the special symbol display 41 (FIG. 2), even after the variable display (variable display) of the special symbol (identification information) is started, the display screen 7a, the right sub display screen 64R, the left sub display screen The state in which the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is not displayed on any of the 64L continues. The hold icon (change icon) 9C is displayed in the hold display area (change icon display area, hold digested image display area) below the center of the display screen 7a. Below the hold display area, a horizontally long rectangular image for displaying the position of the hold display area is displayed.

When a predetermined period elapses after the change starts, as shown in FIGS. 126B and 126C, the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG that indicates that the specific effect will be executed in the change is displayed. Here, the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is a character image of "Smile you large set!", and notifies that the special reach effect (SP reach effect) is executed. The character image of "Smile you large set!" appears while moving from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen 7a. At this time, the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is not yet displayed. That is, in this effect, the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is displayed after the fluctuation starts and before the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed. Therefore, the player who sees the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG suddenly executes a specific effect such as a special reach effect without knowing the state of the decorative pattern, such as whether or not the decorative pattern is reached. Be informed. As a result, the player can be greatly surprised and the interest can be improved. When the specific effect execution suggesting image ESG is stopped at the position shown in FIG. 126C, a part of the specific effect execution suggesting image ESG is displayed so as to overlap the hold icon (variable icon) 9C. At this time, the hold icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed on the front side of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 126(D), the specific effect execution suggesting image ESG is enlarged and displayed, and the specific effect execution suggesting image ESG is displayed on three screens of the right sub display screen 64R, the display screen 7a, and the left sub display screen 64L. It is displayed across. The variable display of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R is not displayed yet. A part of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is continuously displayed so as to overlap the hold icon (variable icon) 9C. At this time, the hold icon (variable icon) 9C is displayed on the front side of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 126(E), the specific effect execution suggesting image ESG is reduced and displayed, and the entire specific effect execution suggesting image ESG is fit inside the display screen 7a again. At this time, the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is not yet displayed. A part of the specific effect execution suggesting image ESG is continuously displayed so as to overlap the hold icon (variable icon) 9C, and the hold icon (changing icon) 9C is displayed on the front side of the specific effect execution suggestive image ESG. It

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 126(F), in the state where the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is displayed on the display screen 7a, the left decorative pattern 8L moves downward from above the display screen 7a, and is specified. Temporary stop is performed at a position overlapping the effect execution suggestion image ESG. The left decorative pattern 8L is "7" here and is displayed on the front side of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG. Then, as shown in FIG. 126(G), in the display screen 7a, the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG and the temporarily stopped left decorative design 8L are displayed, and the right decorative design 8R is above the display screen 7a. To move downward, and temporarily stops at a position overlapping the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG. The right decorative design 8R is the same "7" as the left decorative design 8L, and is displayed on the front side of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG. As a result, a reach of "7↓7" is formed in front of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 126(H), the specific effect execution suggesting image ESG is broken, and the special reach effect as the specific effect is started. The right decorative pattern 8R and the left decorative pattern 8L are stopped in the reach mode. Here, the specific effect execution suggesting image ESG is cracked, and a plurality of smile face images (Smiley Mr.) that execute the specific effect (special reach effect) appear from the back side of the specific effect executing suggestion image ESG. After that, as shown in FIG. 126(I), a specific effect (special reach effect) by a plurality of smile face images is executed. That is, the character corresponding to the content shown in the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG destroys the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG, and this character appears in the special reach effect. Here, in the specific effect, an effect with a high expectation of a big hit is executed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 126(J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are fixedly stopped. Here, it is definitely stopped in the manner of the big hit of "777".

[Specific performance execution suggestive performance C]
FIG. 127 is a diagram for explaining the specific effect execution suggestion effect C. In the specific effect execution suggestion effect C, the specific effect execution suggestion effect and the pseudo continuous effect are executed in combination. First, as shown in FIG. 127(A), the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is not displayed on any of the display screen 7a, the right sub display screen 64R, and the left sub display screen 64L. That is, in the special symbol display 41 (FIG. 2), even after the variable display (variable display) of the special symbol (identification information) is started, the display screen 7a, the right sub display screen 64R, the left sub display screen The state in which the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is not displayed on any of the 64L continues. The hold icon (change icon) 9C is displayed in the hold display area (change icon display area, hold digested image display area) below the center of the display screen 7a. Below the hold display area, a horizontally long rectangular image for displaying the position of the hold display area is displayed.

When a predetermined period elapses after the start of fluctuation, the effects shown in FIGS. 127(B) to (D) are executed. The effects shown in FIGS. 127(B) to (D) are the same as those in FIGS. 126(B) to (H) of the specific effect execution suggesting effect B. As shown in FIG. 127(D), the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is broken, and the special reach effect (SP reach effect) as the specific effect is started. The right decorative pattern 8R and the left decorative pattern 8L are stopped in the reach mode. Here, the specific effect execution suggesting image ESG is cracked, and a plurality of smile face images (Smiley Mr.) that execute the specific effect (special reach effect) appear from the back side of the specific effect executing suggestion image ESG. After that, a specific effect (special reach effect) by a plurality of smile face images is executed. That is, the character corresponding to the content shown in the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG destroys the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG, and this character appears in the special reach effect. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 127(E), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are temporarily stopped. Here, the temporary stop is performed in the mode of the loss of "767". After that, as shown in FIG. 127(F), the character image of "again!" is displayed, and the pseudo continuous production is started to start changing the decorative symbol again. 127(G) to (I) are similar to FIGS. 127(B) to (D). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 127(J), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are definitely stopped. Here, it is definitely stopped in the manner of the big hit of "777".

[Effect example]
Below, the example of an effect of specific production execution suggestion production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 125 to 127, in the state where the variable display of the decorative symbol is not continuously displayed after the start of the variation, the specific effect is executed in the variation. A first effect in which the suggested specific effect execution suggestive image ESG is displayed, and a second effect in which after the first effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are temporarily stopped overlapping with the specific effect execution suggestive image ESG. Can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel effect that has never been seen before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 125 to 127, in the second effect, the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are displayed in a reach state so as to overlap the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel effect that has never been seen before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 125 to 127, after the second effect, the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is cracked in a state where the decorative symbols 8L and 8R are overlapped, and the SP reach effect is achieved. It is possible to execute the third effect to be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel effect that has never been seen before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 125 to 127, in the third effect, the character (smiley face image) corresponding to the content shown in the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is the specific effect execution suggestion. A character (smiley face image) appears in the SP reach production after destroying the image ESG. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel effect that has never been seen before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 125 to 127, in the first effect, a hold icon (the hold icon (variable icon) 9C) is displayed in an overlapping manner on the front of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG. To be done. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel effect that has never been seen before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 125 to 127, in the first effect, the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG is displayed on the display screen 7a and the right sub display screen 64R, and on the display screen 7a and the left sub display. The display screen 64L is displayed across the sub display means. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel effect that has never been seen before, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of specific production execution suggestion production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the specific effect execution suggesting effects A to C, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped in the reach state on the front side of the specific effect executing suggestion image ESG, but may be stopped in a manner other than the reach. For example, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R may be temporarily stopped at "567" on the front side of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG. In addition, for example, after temporarily stopping at "567", it may be changed again by the pseudo continuous effect, and at that time, the specific effect may be executed.

[Modification 2]
The content of the specific effect execution suggestion image ESG may indicate that an effect other than the special reach effect is executed. For example, it may be suggested that a jackpot confirmation effect or a loss confirmation effect is executed.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Mode D2-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
In a state where the variation display of the decorative pattern is not continuously displayed after the variation starts, a first effect in which a specific effect execution suggesting image that indicates that the specific effect is executed in the variation is displayed,
After the first effect, a second effect in which the decorative design is temporarily stopped overlapping with the specific effect execution suggestion image, and a game machine can be executed.
◇ [Mode D2-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect D2-1,
In the second effect, the decorative pattern is displayed in a reach state so as to overlap the specific effect execution suggestion image.
◇ [Mode D2-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect D2-1 or aspect D2-2,
After the second effect, the specific effect execution suggestion image is cracked in a state where the decorative symbols are overlapped, and a third effect in which SP reach effect is executed can be executed.
◇ [Mode D2-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect D2-3,
In the third effect, a character corresponding to the content shown in the specific effect execution suggestion image destroys the specific effect execution suggestion image, and in the SP reach effect, the character appears. Machine.
◇ [Mode D2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-1 to D2-4,
One of the plurality of types of images is a hold icon,
In the first effect, the holding icon is displayed in front of the specific effect execution suggesting image in an overlapping manner.
◇ [Mode D2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-1 to D2-5,
Equipped with sub-display means that can display multiple types of images,
In the first effect, the specific effect execution suggestion image is displayed across the display means and the sub-display means.

The special direction suggestion effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 128 to 130. This special direction suggesting effect can be executed during a special symbol variation effect or during a big hit game. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command and the jackpot game start command received from the sub control board 90, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103, and displays the image on the display screen 7a. It is a production.

[Special direction suggestion production A]
FIG. 128 is a diagram for explaining the special direction suggestive effect A. In this special direction suggestion effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 128(A), a time saving and medium time effect is executed. This time saving and medium time effect is performed in a time saving game state that is relatively advantageous to the player, and displays a teammate character XF1, a direction suggestion display XF2, and a time saving number display XF3. The ally character XF1 includes a belt item XF11 which is a predetermined item. The direction indication display XF2 includes a direction display XF21. The directional display XF21 is composed of an arrow that suggests the player to hit the right side and a character "right hitting" in the arrow. The hour/hour count display XF3 is a display indicating the number of remaining hour/hours, and is indicated as "50 more times" in the example of FIG. 128(A). Further, in the time saving effect, although the hold icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are displayed, they are omitted in the figure. Further, the decorative design variation effect (variable display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128(B), direction suggestion display effect 1 is executed. This direction suggestion display effect 1 is a continuation of the time saving effect, and is performed during the time saving game. In this direction suggestion display effect 1, the belt item XF11 of the ally character XF1 flies toward the direction suggestion display XF2, and finally becomes a part of the direction suggestion display XF2. That is, the direction suggestion display XF2 includes the belt item XF11 and the direction display XF21. The belt item XF11 and the direction display XF21 are arranged adjacent to each other, and the belt item XF11 is arranged in the arrow head (arrow trunk) portion of the direction display XF21.

Next, as shown in FIG. 128(C), direction suggestion display effect 2 is executed. This direction suggestion display effect 2 is a continuation of the direction display effect 1 and is performed during the time saving game. In this direction suggestion display effect 2, the teammate character XF1, the direction suggestion display XF2, and the time saving display XF3 are continuously displayed. It is carried out.
This direction suggestion display effect 2 is executed until the time saving game ends or a big hit.

[Special direction suggestion production B]
FIG. 129 is a diagram for explaining the special direction suggestive effect B. In this special direction suggestion effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 129(A), a normal medium effect is executed. This normal production is performed when the player is in a normal game state that is relatively unfavorable to the player, and displays the teammate character XF1 and the direction suggestion display XF2. The ally character XF1 includes a belt item XF11 which is a predetermined item. The direction indication display XF2 includes a direction display XF21. The directional display XF21 is composed of an arrow that suggests the player to hit the right side and a character "right hitting" in the arrow. Further, in this normal medium presentation, the hold icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are displayed, but they are omitted in the figure. Further, the decorative design variation effect (variable display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. After that, the following will be described as a big hit and entering the short-time gaming state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 129(B), direction suggestion display effect 1 is executed. This direction suggestion display effect 1 is performed during the time saving game which is relatively advantageous to the player. In this direction suggestion display effect 1, the belt item XF11 of the ally character XF1 flies toward the direction suggestion display XF2, and finally becomes a part of the direction suggestion display XF2. That is, the direction suggestion display XF2 includes the belt item XF11 and the direction display XF21. The belt item XF11 and the direction display XF21 are arranged adjacent to each other, and the belt item XF11 is arranged in the arrow head (arrow trunk) portion of the direction display XF21. Further, in the direction suggestion display effect 1, the hour/hour display XF3 is displayed. The hour/hour count display XF3 is a display indicating the remaining number of hour/hour reductions, and is indicated as "50 more times" in the example of FIG. 129(B).

Next, as shown in FIG. 129(C), direction suggestion display effect 2 is executed. This direction suggestion display effect 2 is a continuation of the direction suggestion display effect 1 and is performed in the time saving game state. In this direction suggestion display effect 2, the teammate character XF1, the direction suggestion display XF2, and the time saving display XF3 are continuously displayed. It is carried out.
This direction suggestion display effect 2 is executed until the time saving game ends or a big hit.

[Special direction suggestion production C]
FIG. 130 is a diagram for explaining the special direction suggestive effect C. In this special direction suggestion effect C, first, a normal medium effect is executed as shown in FIG. 130(A). This normal production is performed when the player is in a normal game state that is relatively unfavorable to the player, and displays the teammate character XF1 and the direction suggestion display XF2. The ally character XF1 includes a belt item XF11 which is a predetermined item. The direction indication display XF2 includes a direction display XF21. The directional display XF21 is composed of an arrow that suggests the player to hit the right side and a character "right hitting" in the arrow. Further, in this normal medium presentation, the hold icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are displayed, but they are omitted in the figure. Further, the decorative design variation effect (variable display) is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R. After that, the following will be described as a big hit and a big hit game state is entered.

Next, as shown in FIG. 130(B), direction suggestion display effect 1 is executed. This direction suggestion display effect 1 is performed during the big hit game. In this direction suggestion display effect 1, the belt item XF11 of the ally character XF1 flies toward the direction suggestion display XF2, and finally becomes a part of the direction suggestion display XF2. That is, the direction suggestion display XF2 includes the belt item XF11 and the direction display XF21. The belt item XF11 and the direction display XF21 are arranged adjacent to each other, and the belt item XF11 is arranged in the arrow head (arrow trunk) portion of the direction display XF21. Further, in this direction suggestion display effect 1, the acquired payout display XF4 is displayed. The acquired payout display XF4 is a display showing the acquired payout during the big hit, and is shown as “acquired payout: 1860” in the example of FIG. 130(B).

Next, as shown in FIG. 130(C), direction suggestion display effect 2 is executed. This direction suggestion display effect 2 is a continuation of the direction suggestion display effect 1 and is performed in the jackpot gaming state. In this direction suggestion display effect 2, the teammate character XF1, the direction suggestion display XF2, and the obtained payout display XF4 are continuously displayed. In the direction suggestion display XF2, the belt item XF11 moves the arrow pattern portion of the direction indication XF21. Is performed.
This direction suggestion display effect 2 is executed until the jackpot game is over.

[Modification]
In the special direction suggestion effects A to C, the display position of the direction suggestion display XF2 is fixed, but not limited to this, the direction suggestion display XF2 may be moved while the belt item XF11 is moving. ..
Further, in the direction suggestion display XF2, the direction display XF21 may also be moved. Further, in the direction suggestion display XF2, the direction display XF21 may blink. Further, in the direction suggestion display XF2, the belt item XF11 may be moved to a position overlapping the direction display XF21. In this case, the belt item XF11 may be in front of the direction display XF21. Further, the belt item XF11 may be behind the direction display XF21. In the direction suggestion display XF2, when another image (a character or the like (may be the ally character XF1)) is moved to a position where it overlaps, the direction suggestion display XF2 is displayed in front of the other images. In other words, the other image moves behind the direction indicating display XF2. The direction suggestion display XF2 includes the belt item XF11 that is a part of the ally character XF1, but may include other parts of the ally character XF1 (for example, a sword) or the entire ally character XF1. , May include other characters or parts of other images.

[Effect example]
In the special direction suggestion effect B, a normal medium effect is displayed in which the ally character XF1 is displayed in a normal game state relatively unfavorable to the player, and thereafter, rightward is suggested in the time saving game state relatively advantageous to the player. The direction suggestion display XF2 including the direction display XF21 and the XF11 representing a part of the teammate character XF1 is displayed. According to this configuration, since the direction suggestion display XF2 includes a part of the ally character XF1 displayed in the normal game state, which is relatively disadvantageous to the player, the player who sees the direction suggestion display XF2 at the time of right-handing is While the time is shortened, the teammate character XF1 that appears in the normal game state can be recognized and a mysterious atmosphere can be felt, and the time can be further enjoyed. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.
In the special direction suggestion effect C, a time saving medium effect for displaying the ally character XF1 in a normal game state relatively unfavorable to the player is performed, and then, during a jackpot game, a direction display XF21 that indicates the launch direction of the game ball. And the direction suggestion display XF2 including XF11 representing a part of the teammate character XF1. According to this configuration, since the direction suggestion display XF2 includes a part of the ally character XF1 displayed in the normal game state, which is relatively disadvantageous to the player, the player who sees the direction suggestion display XF2 at the time of right-handing is While the big hit game is being played, the mysterious atmosphere can be felt by recognizing the teammate character XF1 that appeared in the normal game state, and the big hit game can be enjoyed more. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect XF-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
There is a case where a first display effect is performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
There is a case where a third display effect is performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect of displaying a first image,
The second display effect is an effect of performing direction suggestion display,
The direction suggestion display includes a direction display that suggests a launching direction of the game ball and a second image that represents a part of the first image,
After the first display effect, the second display effect is performed,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XF-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect XF-1,
The second display effect is performed in the second gaming state of the first gaming state relatively disadvantageous to the player and the second gaming state relatively advantageous to the player.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XF-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect XF-2,
The first display effect is performed in the first gaming state,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XF-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect XF-1,
The second display effect is performed during the jackpot game,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XF-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects XF-2 to XF-4,
The first image is a character,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The effect sound effect effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 131 to 133. In FIGS. 131 to 133, for example, the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and other movable accessory disposed around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are easy to see in the drawings. Therefore, it is omitted.

This effect sound effect effect can be executed over a plurality of variable effects (variable display) by the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 (for example, variation effect start command, advance determination command), and includes an instruction to execute the effect sound effect, the ROM 103 is included. The corresponding image data is read from and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

The background image (referred to as “specific background image”) used in the effect sound effect production is a specific image that is not normally included in the background image. Has become. The normal background image is a normal image such as a city image, a forest image, a sea image, a seabed image, and an underground image. The specific background image and the normal background image may be a still image or a moving image.

Here, the effect sound effect effect A will be described first, and the effect sound effect effect B and the effect sound effect effect C will be sequentially described.

[Sound effect effect A]
The effect sound effect A will be described with reference to FIG. 131. FIG. 131 is a diagram for explaining the effect sound effect A. The effect sound effect effect A is performed over a plurality of variable effects (variable display) by the decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 131(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left decorative design 8L of a stereoscopic image, a middle decorative design 8C of the stereoscopic image, and a right decorative design 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. In the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side, the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (symbol: the number “1” to the number “9”) is started. When the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative design is started, the display of the decorative design that is stopped and displayed changes from the opaque state to the translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed to the high speed display mode. .. Thereby, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semitransparent decorative pattern which is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped). Note that the decorative pattern is in a display mode in which the decorative pattern moves in small increments in the vertical direction when the temporary stop display is performed.

The variation icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, which are currently changing as the end of the first special map reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (on the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (on the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad from the position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The reserved display positions 9Ad are arranged and displayed linearly along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

Here, a white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, and a white spherical retention icon 9A is displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad and the second suspension display position 9Ad, respectively. No hold icon is displayed at the hold display position 9Ad and the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, there are only two stock icons that have been stocked without being digested.

In addition, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbol, is supported. In addition to the hold icon 9A, which corresponds to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 The special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21 are arranged and displayed as unillustrated numbers on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 is shown in blue on the left side, and the number of the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21 is shown in red. The numbers are arranged on the upper side of the center of the display screen 7a so as to be spaced apart from each other on the right side and are always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as the number of reserved balls as numerical values, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and it is easy to intuitively understand. Note that these numbers are arranged on the forefront side of the display screen 7a and other images are displayed behind the foreground of the display screen 7a so that visibility is not hindered by the other images. It is like this.

Here, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “icon”) will be briefly described. Due to the difference in shape and color, the difference in expectation in winning in the lottery corresponding to the icon. Is represented. For example, of the four icons, a yellow (gold) star icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest likelihood of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hit, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hit, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hit. The smile sphere icon is further set to have a high expectation of being a jackpot in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (Rainbow (hit jackpot)). In addition, the icon also includes a specific icon having various characters. In this specific icon, various characters appear in a white spherical icon and are used in the effect sound effect production. In the effect sound effect production, a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere is used. Icon, or a white spherical icon.

In FIG. 131(A), when the city image THG1 is displayed as the normal background image on the display screen 7a and the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern is started, the figure is changed to the figure during the variation effect (during variation display). As shown in 131(B), the game ball enters the first starting opening 20 and a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad (prefetch effect is associated with this ball). Although it was done, there was no change from the white spherical hold icon 9A to another icon, resulting in a white spherical hold icon 9A). At this time, the first winning sound “Pyon” is played from the speaker 67 in association with the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20. That is, the first winning sound flows from the speaker 67 in correspondence with the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad.

After that, when the game ball enters the first starting opening 20 during the variable effect (during variable display) and the effect sound effect effect A is started by the look-ahead effect, as shown in FIG. A hold icon 9A having a teammate character CRA as a specific icon (hereinafter, referred to as "specific hold icon 9A") is displayed at the hold display position 9Ad. At this time, a second winning sound "Curcule" which is different from the first winning sound related to the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 is played from the speaker 67, and then the second winning sound is followed by an ally. The first effect sound “OARO”, which is the name of the character CRA, is played from the speaker 67. That is, when the second winning sound is played from the speaker 67 corresponding to the specific holding icon 9A displayed at the fourth holding display position 9Ad, the first effect sound is then played from the speaker 67.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting opening 20 and the second starting opening 21.

After that, the variation effect (variation display) continues due to the hold digestion, and the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad in FIGS. 131(A) to 131(C) moves to the change display position 9Cd. When the variation icon 9C is reached, variation effect (variation display) is started, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 131(D), the left decorative design 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "1", and the middle decorative design 8C is designated with the number "2". When the display is stopped, the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed by the number "3", and when it is out of alignment, the change icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a when the change effect (change display) ends.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 131(E), when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd to become the change icon 9C, the second icon is changed accordingly. The specific hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad. When the specific hold icon 9A moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the second effect sound, which is the theme song of the teammate character CRA, starts to flow from the speaker 67.

Then, the variation effect (variable display) is started, and when the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are changed from the opaque state to the semitransparent state and started to change at high speed, FIG. As shown in F), the city image THG1 which is the normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched to the space image THG2 as the specific background image, and the name "OARO" of the ally character CRA flashes as the name image TIL. A large first display period (for example, 1 second) is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a with FH. When the city image THG1 which is the normal background image is switched to the space image THG2 as the specific background image, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R disappear from the display screen 7a. In the first display period (for example, 1 second), even when the city image THG1 which is a normal background image is switched to the space image THG2 as the specific background image, the space image THG2 is displayed for a short period and the space image THG2 is half. In some cases, the city image THG1 can be seen behind the space image THG2 in a transparent state.

The name image TIL and the flash FH are arranged and displayed behind the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, the change icon 9C, and the specific hold icon 9A. Therefore, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, the change icon 9C, and the specific hold icon 9A are not covered with the name image TIL and the flash FH, and visibility is not hindered.

When the first display period (for example, 1 second) elapses, the name image TIL and the flash light FH gradually disappear from the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 131(G), and accordingly, the name image TIL and the flash light FH are displayed on the display screen 7a. The space image THG2, which is the specific background image, is gradually switched again to the city image THG1 which is the normal background image, and the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R gradually appear again on the display screen 7a. Continuation of fluctuation (variation display).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 131(H), the left decorative design 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "3", the middle decorative design 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the right decorative design 8R is displayed with the number "1". When the display is stopped and displayed, the change icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a when the change effect (change display) ends. At this time, the second effect sound, which is the theme song of the ally character CRA, does not flow from the speaker 67. That is, the output of the second effect sound is stopped.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 131(I), when the specific hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd and becomes the change icon 9C, the theme of the ally character CRA. The second effect sound, which is a song, begins to flow from the speaker 67. The output of the second effect sound is stopped immediately before, but the second effect sound is not restarted from the position where it has progressed to immediately before the stop, but is returned to the beginning and restarted.

Then, the variation effect (variable display) is started, and when the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are changed from the opaque state to the semitransparent state and started to change at high speed, FIG. As shown in J), the city image THG1 which is the normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched again to the space image THG2 as the specific background image, and the name "OARO" of the ally character CRA is used as the name image TIL. The second display period (for example, 4 seconds) that is large and is longer than the first display period is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a with the flash FH. The second display period (for example, 4 seconds) is longer than the first display period (for example, 1 second), and even if the city image THG1 which is the normal background image is switched to the space image THG2 as the specific background image, the space image THG2 is displayed. Since the period in which is displayed becomes long, the universe image THG2 does not become a semitransparent state but becomes an opaque state, and the city image THG1 cannot be seen behind the space image THG2. Also here, the name image TIL and the flash light FH are arranged and displayed behind the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C. Therefore, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C are not covered by the name image TIL and the flash FH, and visibility is not hindered.

While the name image TIL and the flash FH are displayed on the display screen 7a, that is, before the second display period (for example, 4 seconds) elapses, the third effect sound "OARO" which is the name of the ally character CRA. Flows from the speaker 67. The third effect sound ends before the second display period (for example, 4 seconds) elapses. The third effect sound has the same content as the first effect sound (“OARO”, which is the name of the ally character CRA), but is different in intonation. The first effect sound is stable and calm without excessive intonation, whereas the third effect sound is different because it has an excessive intonation and is impressive. The volume of the third effect sound is louder than that of the first effect sound, and the content (the name of the ally character CRA, "OARO") transmitted by the first effect sound and the third effect sound is Even if they are the same, the first effect sound and the third effect sound are transmitted to the player as different impressions.

When the second display period (for example, 4 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 131(K), when the name image TIL and the flash FH disappear from the display screen 7a, the specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a is displayed. A certain space image THG2 is switched to the moon surface image THG3 as the same specific background image, and the ally character CRA is displayed large on the display screen 7a. The teammate character CRA is arranged and displayed behind the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C. Therefore, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C are not covered by the teammate character CRA and visibility is not impaired.

Then, in FIG. 131(I), the lyrics image TG of the second effect sound (that is, the lyrics of the theme song of the ally character CRA as a specific image related to the second effect sound that is the theme song of the ally character CRA that starts to flow from the speaker 67). ) Is displayed on the display screen 7a. The lyrics image TG is displayed on the display screen 7a according to the rhythm of the second effect sound, and is composed of a single character image or a plurality of character images. Specifically, for example, as a part of the lyrics of the theme song of the ally character CRA, the lyrics image TG is displayed for the part "start from here on one day..." (13 characters in hiragana). According to the rhythm of the second effect sound, first, the lyrics image TG1 "A certain day" is displayed at the first position (on the left side of the ally character CRA) on the display screen 7a, and then the lyrics image TG2 "NI" is displayed. It is displayed at the second position of the display screen 7a (upper left of the ally character CRA), and then the lyrics image TG3 "From here" is displayed at the third position of the display screen 7a (right of the ally character CRA). The lyrics image TG4 “Start” is displayed at the fourth position (upper right of the teammate character CRA) on the display screen 7a.

After that, when the output of the second effect sound ends, as shown in FIG. 131(L), the moon image THG3 that is the specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a is changed to the city image THG1 that is the normal background image again. Switching and continuing the variable effect (variable display), the fireball appears from the center of the display screen 7a. When the fireball is released toward the variation icon 9C in a circular arc, the fireball collides with the variation icon 9C and changes from the variation icon 9C having the ally character CRA to the yellow (gold) star variation icon. Change to 9C. As a result, the effect sound effect effect A ends.

The size of the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon is the same as the size of the white spherical variation icon 9C in FIGS. 131A to 131G. Various effects may be further continued after the effect sound effect effect A, and when the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are stop-displayed in the same design, it becomes a big hit and thereafter. When the big hit game (big hit production) is started, when the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are not stopped and displayed in the same design, it is out.

[Sound effect effect production B]
Next, the effect sound effect B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 132 is a diagram for explaining the effect sound effect B. The effect sound effect effect B is performed over a plurality of variable effects (variable display) by the decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 132(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative design 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative design 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. In the display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side, the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (symbol: the number “1” to the number “9”) is started. When the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative design is started, the display of the decorative design that is stopped and displayed changes from the opaque state to the translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed to the high speed display mode. .. Thereby, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semitransparent decorative pattern which is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped). Note that the decorative pattern is in a display mode in which the decorative pattern moves in small increments in the vertical direction when the temporary stop display is performed.

The variation icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, which are currently changing as the end of the first special map reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (on the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (on the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad from the position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The reserved display positions 9Ad are arranged and displayed linearly along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

Here, a white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, a white spherical retention icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and second hold display positions 9Ad to fourth hold are displayed. The hold icon is not displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one stocked icon that has not been digested for the hold icon.

In addition, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbol, is supported. In addition to the hold icon 9A, which corresponds to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 The special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21 are arranged and displayed as unillustrated numbers on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 is shown in blue on the left side, and the number of the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21 is shown in red. The numbers are arranged on the upper side of the center of the display screen 7a so as to be spaced apart from each other on the right side and are always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as the number of reserved balls as numerical values, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and it is easy to intuitively understand. Note that these numbers are arranged on the forefront side of the display screen 7a and other images are displayed behind the foreground of the display screen 7a so that visibility is not hindered by the other images. It is like this.

Here, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “icon”) will be briefly described. Due to the difference in shape and color, the difference in expectation in winning in the lottery corresponding to the icon. Is represented. For example, of the four icons, a yellow (gold) star icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest likelihood of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hit, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hit, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hit. The smile sphere icon is further set to have a high expectation of being a jackpot in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (Rainbow (hit jackpot)). In addition, the icon also includes a specific icon having various characters. In this specific icon, various characters appear in a white spherical icon and are used in the effect sound effect production. In the effect sound effect production, a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere is used. Icon, or a white spherical icon.

In FIG. 132(A), when the city image THG1 is displayed as the normal background image on the display screen 7a and the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern is started, the figure is then changed to during the variation effect (during variation display). As shown in 132(B), the game ball enters the first starting opening 20 and a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad (prefetch effect is associated with this ball). Although it was done, there was no change from the white spherical hold icon 9A to another icon, resulting in a white spherical hold icon 9A). At this time, the first winning sound “Pyon” is played from the speaker 67 in association with the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20. That is, the first winning sound flows from the speaker 67 in association with the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad.

Then, when the game ball enters the first starting opening 20 during the variable effect (during the variable display) and the effect sound effect effect B is started by the look-ahead effect, as shown in FIG. A hold icon 9A having a ally character CRB as a specific icon (hereinafter, referred to as "specific hold icon 9A") is displayed at the hold display position 9Ad. At this time, a second winning sound "Curcule" different from the first winning sound related to the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 is played from the speaker 67, and then the second winning sound is followed by an ally. The first effect sound “OARO-B”, which is the name of the character CRB, is played from the speaker 67. That is, when the second winning sound flows from the speaker 67 corresponding to the specific holding icon 9A displayed at the third holding display position 9Ad, the first effect sound then flows from the speaker 67.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting opening 20 and the second starting opening 21.

After that, the variation effect (variation display) continues due to the hold digestion, and the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad in FIGS. 132(A) to 132(C) moves to the change display position 9Cd. When the variation icon 9C is reached, variation effect (variation display) is started, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 132(D), the left decorative design 8L is stopped and displayed by the number "1", and the middle decorative design 8C is designated by the number "2". When the display is stopped, the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed by the number "3", and when it is out of alignment, the change icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a when the change effect (change display) ends.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 132(E), when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd to become the change icon 9C, the second icon The specific hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad. When the specific hold icon 9A moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the second effect sound, which is the theme song of the teammate character CRB, starts to flow from the speaker 67.

Then, the fluctuating effect (variable display) is started, and when the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are changed from the opaque state to the translucent state and start fluctuating at high speed, As shown in F), the city image THG1 which is the normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched to the space image THG2 as the specific background image, and the name image TIL of the ally character CRB is "OARO-B". As a result, a large first display period (for example, 1 second) is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a with the flash FH. When the city image THG1 which is the normal background image is switched to the space image THG2 as the specific background image, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R disappear from the display screen 7a. In the first display period (for example, 1 second), even when the city image THG1 which is a normal background image is switched to the space image THG2 as the specific background image, the space image THG2 is displayed for a short period and the space image THG2 is half. In some cases, the city image THG1 can be seen behind the space image THG2 in a transparent state.

The name image TIL and the flash FH are arranged and displayed behind the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, the change icon 9C, and the specific hold icon 9A. Therefore, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, the change icon 9C, and the specific hold icon 9A are not covered with the name image TIL and the flash FH, and visibility is not hindered.

When the first display period (for example, 1 second) elapses, as shown in FIG. 132(G), the name image TIL and the flash light FH gradually disappear from the display screen 7a, and accordingly, the name image TIL and the flash light FH are displayed on the display screen 7a. The space image THG2, which is the specific background image, is gradually switched again to the city image THG1 which is the normal background image, and the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R gradually appear again on the display screen 7a. Continuation of fluctuation (variation display).

Then, as shown in FIG. 132(H), the left decorative design 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "3", the middle decorative design 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the right decorative design 8R is displayed with the number "1". When the display is stopped and displayed, the change icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a when the change effect (change display) ends. At this time, the second effect sound, which is the theme song of the teammate character CRB, does not flow from the speaker 67. That is, the output of the second effect sound is stopped.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 132(I), when the specific hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd and becomes the change icon 9C, the theme of the teammate character CRB. The second effect sound, which is a song, begins to flow from the speaker 67. The output of the second effect sound is stopped immediately before, but the second effect sound is not restarted from the position where it has progressed to immediately before the stop, but is returned to the beginning and restarted.

Then, the fluctuating effect (variable display) is started, and when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R change from the opaque state to the semitransparent state and start fluctuating at high speed, FIG. As shown in J), the city image THG1 which is the normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched again to the space image THG2 as the specific background image, and the name image "OARO-B" of the ally character CRB is displayed as the name image. As a TIL, a large second display period (for example, 4 seconds) is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a while being accompanied by a flash FH, which is longer than the first display period. The second display period (for example, 4 seconds) is longer than the first display period (for example, 1 second), and even if the city image THG1 which is the normal background image is switched to the space image THG2 as the specific background image, the space image THG2 is displayed. Since the period in which is displayed becomes long, the universe image THG2 does not become a semitransparent state but becomes an opaque state, and the city image THG1 cannot be seen behind the space image THG2. Also here, the name image TIL and the flash light FH are arranged and displayed behind the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C. Therefore, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C are not covered by the name image TIL and the flash FH, and visibility is not hindered.

In a state where the name image TIL and the flash FH are displayed on the display screen 7a, that is, before the second display period (for example, 4 seconds) has elapsed, the third name "OARO-B" which is the name of the ally character CRB is displayed. The effect sound flows from the speaker 67. The third effect sound ends before the second display period (for example, 4 seconds) elapses. The third effect sound is the same as the content transmitted by the first effect sound (“OARO-B”, which is the name of the ally character CRB), but has a different intonation. The first effect sound is stable and calm without excessive intonation, whereas the third effect sound is different because it has an excessive intonation and is impressive. Further, the volume of the third effect sound is louder than that of the first effect sound, and the contents transmitted by the first effect sound and the third effect sound (“ORO-B” which is the name of the ally character CRB). ) Are the same, the first effect sound and the third effect sound are transmitted to the player as different impressions.

When the second display period (for example, 4 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 132(K), when the name image TIL and the flash FH disappear from the display screen 7a, the specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a is displayed. The space image THG2 is switched to the lunar image THG3 as the same specific background image, and the ally character CRB is displayed large on the display screen 7a. The teammate character CRB is arranged and displayed behind the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C. Therefore, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C are not covered by the teammate character CRB and visibility is not impaired.

Then, in FIG. 132(I), the lyrics image TG of the second effect sound (that is, the lyrics of the theme song of the ally character CRB is used as a specific image related to the second effect sound that is the theme song of the ally character CRB that starts to flow from the speaker 67. ) Is displayed on the display screen 7a. The lyrics image TG is displayed on the display screen 7a according to the rhythm of the second effect sound, and is composed of a single character image or a plurality of character images. Specifically, for example, as a part of the lyrics of the theme song of the ally character CRB, the lyrics image TG is the second part for the part (12 characters in hiragana) that has "hot passion". In accordance with the rhythm of the effect sound, the lyrics image TG1 "Hot" is first displayed at the first position of the display screen 7a (upper left of the ally character CRB), and then the lyrics image TG2 "Passion" is displayed on the display screen 7a. It is displayed at the second position (lower right of the ally character CRB), then the lyrics image TG3 of "wa" is displayed at the third position (right of the ally character CRB) of the display screen 7a, and then "Well". The lyrics image TG4 is displayed at the fourth position (upper right of the teammate character CRB) on the display screen 7a.

After that, when the output of the second effect sound ends, as shown in FIG. 132(L), the moon image THG3, which is the specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a, is changed again to the city image THG1, which is the normal background image. Switching and continuing the variable effect (variable display), a fireball appears from the center of the display screen 7a. When the fireball is released toward the variation icon 9C so as to draw an arc, the fireball collides with the variation icon 9C and changes from the variation icon 9C having the ally character CRB to the variation icon 9C having a blue smiling sphere. Change. As a result, the effect sound effect effect B ends.

Note that the size of the smiling sphere icon having a blue color is the same as the size of the white spherical variation icon 9C in FIGS. 132(A) to 132(G). Various effects may be further continued after the effect sound effect effect B, and when the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are stopped and displayed with the same design, it becomes a big hit and thereafter. When the big hit game (big hit effect) is started, while the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are not stopped and displayed in the same design, it is out.

[Sound effect effect production C]
Next, the effect sound effect C will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 133 is a diagram for explaining the effect sound effect effect C. The effect sound effect effect C is performed over a plurality of variable effects (variable display) by the decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 133(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative design 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative design 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. In the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side, the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (symbol: the number “1” to the number “9”) is started. When the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative design is started, the display of the decorative design that is stopped and displayed changes from the opaque state to the translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed to the high speed display mode. .. Thereby, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semitransparent decorative pattern which is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped). Note that the decorative pattern is in a display mode in which the decorative pattern moves in small increments in the vertical direction when the temporary stop display is performed.

The variation icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, which are currently changing as the end of the first special map reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (on the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (on the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad from the position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The reserved display positions 9Ad are arranged and displayed linearly along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

Here, a white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, and a white spherical retention icon 9A is displayed at the first suspension display position 9Ad and the second suspension display position 9Ad, respectively. No hold icon is displayed at the hold display position 9Ad and the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, there are only two stock icons that have been stocked without being digested.

In addition, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbol, is supported. In addition to the hold icon 9A, which corresponds to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 The special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21 are arranged and displayed as unillustrated numbers on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 is shown in blue on the left side, and the number of the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21 is shown in red. The numbers are arranged on the upper side of the center of the display screen 7a so as to be spaced apart from each other on the right side and are always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as the number of reserved balls as numerical values, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and it is easy to intuitively understand. Note that these numbers are arranged on the forefront side of the display screen 7a and other images are displayed behind the foreground of the display screen 7a so that visibility is not hindered by the other images. It is like this.

Here, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “icon”) will be briefly described. Due to the difference in shape and color, the difference in expectation in winning in the lottery corresponding to the icon. Is represented. For example, of the four icons, a yellow (gold) star icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest likelihood of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hit, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hit, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hit. The smile sphere icon is further set to have a high expectation of being a jackpot in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (Rainbow (hit jackpot)). In addition, the icon also includes a specific icon having various characters. In this specific icon, various characters appear in a white spherical icon and are used in the effect sound effect production. In the effect sound effect production, a yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere is used. Icon, or a white spherical icon.

In FIG. 133(A), when the city image THG1 is displayed as the normal background image on the display screen 7a and the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern is started, the figure is then changed to during the variation effect (during variation display). As shown in 133(B), the game ball enters the first starting opening 20 and a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad (the look-ahead effect is related to this ball). Although it was done, there was no change from the white spherical hold icon 9A to another icon, resulting in a white spherical hold icon 9A). At this time, the first winning sound “Pyon” is played from the speaker 67 in association with the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20. That is, the first winning sound flows from the speaker 67 in correspondence with the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad.

After that, when the game ball enters the first starting opening 20 during the variable effect (during the variable display) and the effect sound effect effect C is started by the look-ahead effect, as shown in FIG. A hold icon 9A having a teammate character CRA as a specific icon (hereinafter, referred to as "specific hold icon 9A") is displayed at the hold display position 9Ad. At this time, a second winning sound "Curcule" which is different from the first winning sound related to the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 is played from the speaker 67, and then the second winning sound is followed by an ally. The first effect sound “OARO”, which is the name of the character CRA, is played from the speaker 67. That is, when the second winning sound is played from the speaker 67 corresponding to the specific holding icon 9A displayed at the fourth holding display position 9Ad, the first effect sound is then played from the speaker 67.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting opening 20 and the second starting opening 21.

After that, the variation effect (variation display) continues due to the hold digestion, and the retention icon 9A displayed at the second retention display position 9Ad in FIGS. 133A to 133C moves to the variation display position 9Cd. When the variation icon 9C is reached, variation effect (variation display) is started, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 133(D), the left decorative design 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "1", and the middle decorative design 8C is designated with the number "2". When the display is stopped, the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed by the number "3", and when it is out of alignment, the change icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a when the change effect (change display) ends.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 133(E), when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the variable display position 9Cd to become the change icon 9C, the second icon is changed accordingly. The specific hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad. When the specific hold icon 9A moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the second effect sound, which is the theme song of the teammate character CRA, starts to flow from the speaker 67.

Then, the fluctuating effect (variable display) is started, and when the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R change from the opaque state to the semitransparent state and start fluctuating at high speed, FIG. As shown in F), the city image THG1 which is the normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched to the space image THG2 as the specific background image, and the name "OARO" of the ally character CRA flashes as the name image TIL. A large first display period (for example, 1 second) is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a with FH. When the city image THG1 which is the normal background image is switched to the space image THG2 as the specific background image, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R disappear from the display screen 7a. In the first display period (for example, 1 second), even when the city image THG1 which is a normal background image is switched to the space image THG2 as the specific background image, the space image THG2 is displayed for a short period and the space image THG2 is half. In some cases, the city image THG1 can be seen behind the space image THG2 in a transparent state.

The name image TIL and the flash FH are arranged and displayed behind the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, the change icon 9C, and the specific hold icon 9A. Therefore, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, the change icon 9C, and the specific hold icon 9A are not covered with the name image TIL and the flash FH, and visibility is not hindered.

When the first display period (for example, 1 second) elapses, as shown in FIG. 133(G), the name image TIL and the flash light FH gradually disappear from the display screen 7a, and accordingly, the name image TIL and the flash light FH are displayed on the display screen 7a. The space image THG2, which is the specific background image, is gradually switched again to the city image THG1 which is the normal background image, and the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R gradually appear again on the display screen 7a. Continuation of fluctuation (variation display).

After that, as shown in FIG. 133(H), the left decorative design 8L is stopped and displayed by the number "3", the middle decorative design 8C is stopped and displayed by the number "2", and the right decorative design 8R is displayed by the number "1". When the display is stopped and displayed, the change icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a when the change effect (change display) ends. At this time, the second effect sound, which is the theme song of the ally character CRA, does not flow from the speaker 67. That is, the output of the second effect sound is stopped.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 133(I), when the specific hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd and becomes the change icon 9C, the theme of the teammate character CRA. The second effect sound, which is a song, starts to flow from the speaker 67. The output of the second effect sound is stopped immediately before, but the second effect sound is not restarted from the position where it has progressed to immediately before the stop, but is returned to the beginning and restarted.

Then, the fluctuating effect (variable display) is started, and when the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R change from the opaque state to the semitransparent state and start fluctuating at high speed, FIG. As shown in J), the city image THG1 which is the normal background image displayed on the display screen 7a is switched again to the space image THG2 as the specific background image, and the name "OARO" of the ally character CRA becomes the name image TIL. The second display period (for example, 4 seconds) which is large and is longer than the first display period is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a with the flash FH. The second display period (for example, 4 seconds) is longer than the first display period (for example, 1 second), and even if the city image THG1 which is the normal background image is switched to the space image THG2 as the specific background image, the space image THG2 is displayed. Since the period in which is displayed becomes long, the universe image THG2 does not become a semitransparent state but becomes an opaque state, and the city image THG1 cannot be seen behind the space image THG2. Also here, the name image TIL and the flash light FH are arranged and displayed behind the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C. Therefore, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C are not covered by the name image TIL and the flash FH, and visibility is not hindered.

While the name image TIL and the flash FH are displayed on the display screen 7a, that is, before the second display period (for example, 4 seconds) elapses, the third effect sound "OARO" which is the name of the ally character CRA. Flows from the speaker 67. The third effect sound ends before the second display period (for example, 4 seconds) elapses. The third effect sound has the same content as the first effect sound (“OARO”, which is the name of the ally character CRA), but is different in intonation. The first effect sound is stable and calm without excessive intonation, whereas the third effect sound is different because it has an excessive intonation and is impressive. The volume of the third effect sound is louder than that of the first effect sound, and the content (the name of the ally character CRA, "OARO") transmitted by the first effect sound and the third effect sound is Even if they are the same, the first effect sound and the third effect sound are transmitted to the player as different impressions.

When the second display period (for example, 4 seconds) elapses, as shown in FIG. 133(K), when the name image TIL and the flash FH disappear from the display screen 7a, the specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a is displayed. A certain space image THG2 is switched to the moon surface image THG3 as the same specific background image, and the ally character CRA is displayed large on the display screen 7a. The teammate character CRA is arranged and displayed behind the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C. Therefore, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C are not covered by the teammate character CRA and visibility is not impaired.

Then, in FIG. 133(I), the lyrics image TG of the second effect sound (that is, the lyrics of the theme song of the ally character CRA as a specific image related to the second effect sound that is the theme song of the ally character CRA that has started to flow from the speaker 67. ) Is displayed on the display screen 7a. The lyrics image TG is displayed on the display screen 7a according to the rhythm of the second effect sound, and is composed of a single character image or a plurality of character images. Specifically, for example, as a part of the lyrics of the theme song of the ally character CRA, instead of the part "start from one day here..." (13 characters in hiragana), "soon Replaced by the part (13 characters in hiragana), the lyrics image TG first displays the lyrics image TG1 “soon” at the first position on the display screen 7a in accordance with the rhythm of the second effect sound. (The left side of the ally character CRA), then the lyric image TG2 of "hit" is displayed at the second position (upper left side of the ally character CRA) of the display screen 7a, and then the lyric image TG3 of "ga". Is displayed at the third position on the display screen 7a (on the right side of the teammate character CRA), and then the lyrics image TG4 of "coming" is displayed at the fourth position on the display screen 7a (upper right side of the teammate character CRA). Even if a part of the lyrics is replaced, since it has the same number of characters (13 characters) as a hiragana, it can be displayed according to the rhythm, and it is difficult for the player to feel discomfort. In addition, the contents of this replacement can suggest to the player that a big hit has occurred.

After that, when the output of the second effect sound is completed, as shown in FIG. 133(L), the moon image THG3 which is the specific background image displayed on the display screen 7a is changed again to the city image THG1 which is the normal background image. Switching and continuing the variable effect (variable display), a fireball appears from the center of the display screen 7a. When the fireball is released toward the variation icon 9C so as to draw an arc, the fireball collides with the variation icon 9C and the variation of the smiling sphere having seven colors (rainbow) from the variation icon 9C having the ally character CRA. The icon changes to 9C. As a result, the effect sound effect effect C ends.

The size of the icon of the smiling sphere having seven colors (rainbow) is about twice as large as the size of the white spherical variation icon 9C in FIGS. 133A to 133G. When the variation icon 9C of the smiling sphere having seven colors (rainbow) is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, it is a big hit and various effects may be further continued after the effect sound effect C. When the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are stopped and displayed with the same design, it becomes a big hit, and then a big hit game (big hit production) is started.

[Effect example]
Below, the effect example of the effect sound effect production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the effect sound effect effect A of FIG. 131, the effect sound effect effect B of FIG. 132, and the effect sound effect effect C of FIG. 133, the first starting opening into which the game ball can enter. 20 (ball entrance), an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying a plurality of types of images, and a speaker 67 capable of outputting a plurality of types of effect sounds. The name and effect sound effect of the teammate character CRA for the first effect sound (effect sound effects A and C) corresponding to the specific hold icon 9A among the hold icons 9A displayed in association with the entry of the game ball into the mouth. In the effect B, the first effect capable of outputting the ally character CRB (FIG. 131(C) in the effect sound effect effect A, FIG. 132(C) in the effect sound effect effect B, and FIG. 133 in the effect sound effect effect C). (C)), and after the first effect, the specific hold icon 9A is displayed as the variation icon 9C and the second effect sound (in the effect sound effect effects A and C, the theme song and effect sound effect of the ally character CRA). In the effect B, the second effect (the effect sound effect effect A in FIGS. 131(I) to (K)), and in the effect sound effect effect B in FIGS. 132(I) to (K), which can output the ally character CRB theme song. , (I) to (K) of FIG. 133 can be executed in the effect sound effect effect C. According to this configuration, when the game ball enters the first starting opening 20 (ball entrance) and the specific hold icon increases as the hold icon, the first effect sound is output from the speaker, and the specific hold icon is the variable icon. In this case, the second effect sound flows from the speaker, so that it is possible to provide the player with a novel effect using the first effect sound and the second effect sound. Therefore, interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the second effect sound before the second effect in the effect sound effect effect A of FIG. 131, the effect sound effect effect B of FIG. 132, and the effect sound effect effect C of FIG. 133. May be output and the output of the second effect sound is stopped until the specific hold icon 9A becomes the variation icon 9C (FIG. 131(E) in the effect sound effect effect A, effect sound effect effect). 132(E) in B, and FIG. 133(E) in effect sound effect production C. According to this configuration, the second effect sound that flows when the specific hold icon becomes the variable icon may flow as a notice before the specific hold icon becomes the variable icon, so that the player will develop it. Expectations of hitting the produced performance are increased.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the second effect in the effect sound effect effect A of FIG. 131, the effect sound effect effect B of FIG. 132, and the effect sound effect effect C of FIG. 133, the output of the second effect sound. In addition, a third effect sound (name of ally character CRA in effect sound effect effects A and C, name of ally character CRB in effect sound effect effect B) can be further output. According to this configuration, when the second effect sound is flowing, the third effect sound is overlapped and flows, so that each effect is compared with when the second effect sound and the third effect sound are individually performed. It is possible to provide a player with an effect sound that combines the impressions of sounds with impact, and enhance the effect of effect.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the second effect in the effect sound effect A in FIG. 131, the effect sound effect B in FIG. 132, and the effect sound effect C in FIG. 133, the second effect sound is further added. The lyrics image TG (specific image) related to is displayed. According to this configuration, when the second effect sound flows, the specific image related to the second effect sound is displayed. Therefore, the player imagines the specific image displayed by imagining the progress of the second effect sound. It is possible to imagine the second effect sound that flows by imagining the progress of the specific image, and it is possible to provide the player with an attractive effect that complements the second effect sound and the specific image. ..

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the second effect in the effect sound effect effect A of FIG. 131, the effect sound effect effect B of FIG. 132, and the effect sound effect effect C of FIG. 133, the rhythm of the second effect sound. The lyrics image TG (specific image) can be displayed in accordance with. According to this configuration, the relationship between the second effect sound and the lyrics image TG (specific image) can be emphasized more easily.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the lyrics image TG (specific image) in the effect sound effect effect A of FIG. 131, the effect sound effect effect B of FIG. 132, and the effect sound effect effect C of FIG. 133 is single or. It is composed of a plurality of character images. With this configuration, it is possible to increase variations in the expression method of the lyrics image TG (specific image), and it is also possible to individually emphasize the character image of the lyrics image TG (specific image) that the player wants to pay attention to.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, after the second effect in the effect sound effect A of FIG. 131, the effect sound effect B of FIG. 132, and the effect sound effect effect C of FIG. 133, the change icon 9C is changed. It is possible to execute the fourth effect to be changed (FIG. 131(L) for effect sound effect effect A, FIG. 132(L) for effect sound effect effect B, and FIG. 133(L) for effect sound effect effect C). It has become. According to this configuration, since the change icon may change after the second effect sound ends, it is possible to maintain an expectation for the change of the change icon when the second effect sound is playing. ..

[Modification]
Below, the modification of the effect sound effect production is shown.
[Modification 1]
The effect sound effect effect A in FIG. 131, the effect sound effect effect B in FIG. 132, and the effect sound effect effect C in FIG. .. In other words, it was performed in a so-called left-handed gaming state. However, it may be performed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second starting opening 21. In other words, it may be performed in a so-called right-handed gaming state.

[Modification 2]
In the effect sound effect effect A of FIG. 131, the effect sound effect effect B of FIG. 132, and the effect sound effect effect C of FIG. 133, the lyrics image TG was displayed on the display screen 7a. However, instead of the lyrics image TG, the image may be a video associated with the second effect sound (the theme song of the ally character CRA in the effect sound effects A and C, and the theme song of the ally character CRB in the effect sound effect effect B). For example, a movie, a video broadcast on television, a scene of these, or the like in which the second effect sound is played can be cited.

[Modification 3]
In the effect sound effect effect A of FIGS. 131(I) to (K), the effect sound effect effect B of FIGS. 132(I) to (K), and the effect sound effect effect C of FIGS. 133(I) to (K), 2 The production sound (the theme song of the ally character CRA in the production sound effect productions A and C, the theme song of the teammate character CRB in the production sound effect production B) flows from the speaker 67 to the end, and then the change icon 9C changes. Was there. However, when the second effect sound ends midway, the change icon 9C may not be changed. In this case, the variation icon 9C is a white sphere having the lowest expectation of winning.

[Modification 3]
In the effect sound effect effect A of FIG. 131(C), the effect sound effect effect B of FIG. 132(C), and the effect sound effect effect C of FIG. 133(C), the first start opening is being changed (during change display). The game ball enters 20 and the specific hold icon 9A is displayed on the display screen 7a by the look-ahead effect, and at this time, the first effect sound (in the effect sound effects A and C, the name of the ally character CRA and the effect sound effect effect). In B, the name of the ally character CRB) was playing from the speaker 67. However, the specific hold icon 9A may be displayed on the display screen 7a so that the first effect sound does not flow from the speaker 67. In this case, the second winning sound "Curcule" different from the first winning sound may or may not flow from the speaker 67.

[Modification 4]
The lyrics image TG (specific image) in the effect sound effect effect A of FIG. 131(K), the effect sound effect effect B of FIG. 132(K), and the effect sound effect effect C of FIG. 133(K) is single or plural. It was composed of character images and displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the lyrics image TG (specific image) may be rotated, or the size may be increased or decreased. In this way, variations can be increased depending on the expression method of the lyrics image TG (specific image), and the character image of the lyrics image TG (specific image) that the player wants to pay attention to can be individually emphasized.

[Modification 5]
In the effect sound effect effect A of FIG. 131(K), the effect sound effect effect B of FIG. 132(K), and the effect sound effect effect C of FIG. 133(K), the variation display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the variation. The icon 9C was displayed on the display screen 7a. However, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the variable icon 9C may disappear from the display screen 7a. In this case, of course, when the hold icon 9A exists, it may disappear from the display screen 7a. This is because the variable icon 9C is used as a notice (“change effect” that changes the display mode) for the change effect (during change display), and therefore it does not necessarily have to be continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. Because. Further, since the variable display position 9Cd also indicates the position (display position) at which the variable icon 9C is displayed, the variable display position 9Cd does not necessarily have to be continuously displayed on the display screen 7a, and the hold display position 9Ad also holds the hold icon. This is because 9A indicates the display position (display position) and does not necessarily have to be continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. On the other hand, the hold icon 9A indicates the number of hold balls that are not yet used in the game, and thus it is necessary to display the hold screen on the display screen 7a, but as described above, the game ball to the first starting opening 20. The first special figure hold based on the entry of the ball and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21 are arranged as unillustrated numbers in the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Since it is displayed by being displayed, the hold icon 9A can also be erased from the display screen 7a. Accordingly, in the effect sound effect effect A of FIG. 131(K), the effect sound effect effect B of FIG. 132(K), and the effect sound effect effect C of FIG. 133(K), the display is performed in accordance with the rhythm of the second effect sound. It is possible to contribute to paying attention to the lyrics image TG displayed.

[Modification 6]
In the effect sound effect effect A of FIG. 131(L), the effect sound effect effect B of FIG. 132(L), and the effect sound effect effect C of FIG. 133(L), the variation display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the variation The icon 9C was displayed on the display screen 7a. However, the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad may disappear from the display screen 7a. In this case, of course, when the hold icon 9A exists, it may disappear from the display screen 7a. In other words, only the variable icon 9C of the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, the variable icon 9C and the hold icon 9A may be displayed on the display screen 7a. As a result, when a fireball appears from the center of the display screen 7a, the fireball collides with the fluctuation icon 9C, which can contribute to the attention of the change of the fluctuation icon 9C. Since the variable display position 9Cd indicates the position (display position) at which the variable icon 9C is displayed, it does not necessarily have to be continuously displayed on the display screen 7a, and the hold display position 9Ad is also held. Since the icon 9A indicates the display position (display position), it does not have to be continuously displayed on the display screen 7a. Therefore, the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Ad are erased from the display screen 7a. be able to. On the other hand, the hold icon 9A indicates the number of hold balls that are not yet used in the game, and thus it is necessary to display the hold screen on the display screen 7a, but as described above, the game ball to the first starting opening 20. The first special figure hold based on the entry of the ball and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21 are arranged as unillustrated numbers in the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Since it is displayed by being displayed, the hold icon 9A can also be erased from the display screen 7a.

[Modification 7]
In the effect sound effect effect A of FIGS. 131(I) to (K), the effect sound effect effect B of FIGS. 132(I) to (K), and the effect sound effect effect C of FIGS. 133(I) to (K), Two effect sounds (the theme song of the ally character CRA in the effect sound effects A and C and the theme song of the ally character CRB in the effect sound effect production B) were played from the speaker 67. However, the second effect sound may not be played from the speaker 67.

[Modification 8]
In the effect sound effect effect A of FIGS. 131(I) to (K), the effect sound effect effect B of FIGS. 132(I) to (K), and the effect sound effect effect C of FIGS. 133(I) to (K), While the 2 effect sounds (the effect music of the friend character CRA in the effect sound effects A and C and the theme song of the friend character CRB in the effect sound effect B) are being output, the third effect sound (effect sound effect A, C In C, the name of the ally character CRA, and in the effect sound effect production B, the name of the ally character CRB) was played from the speaker 67. However, the third effect sound may not be played from the speaker 67.

[Modification 9]
In the effect sound effect effect A of FIG. 131(L), the effect sound effect effect B of FIG. 132(L), and the effect sound effect effect C of FIG. 133(L), the change icon 9C is changed. However, the change icon 9C may not be changed. In this case, the variation icon 9C is a white sphere having the lowest expectation of winning.

[Modification 10]
In the effect sound effect effect A of FIG. 131(L), the effect sound effect effect B of FIG. 132(L), and the effect sound effect effect C of FIG. 133(L), the game ball enters the first starting opening 20. The first special figure hold based on and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21 are arranged and displayed as unillustrated numbers on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Was there. Since these numbers are displayed as the number of holding balls as numerical values, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish them by being confused with various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, since the image is arranged on the forefront side of the display screen 7a and the other image is displayed behind the foreground of the display screen 7a, the visibility is not hindered by the other image. It was In the present embodiment, when the effect sound effect production is started, the specific hold icon 9A having the ally character CRA as the specific icon is displayed at the hold display position 9Ad. This may cause the player to misunderstand the number (the number of holding balls) displayed and arranged on the upper center of the display screen 7a as a countdown until the specific holding icon 9A becomes the variable icon 9C. Therefore, in place of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, one of the sub display screens 64 (the right sub display screen 64R, the left sub display screen 64L, and the upper sub display screen 64U is displayed (for example, On the right sub-display screen 64R)), a number displayed with the number of holding balls described above as a numerical value may be displayed. In this way, the number displayed as the number of holding balls is not misunderstood by the player as a countdown until the specific holding icon 9A becomes the variation icon 9C, and the number of holding balls is further reduced. The numerical value displayed as a numerical value can be made difficult to be easily discriminated by being mixed with various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and can be intuitively understood.

[Modification 11]
In the effect sound effect effect A of FIG. 131, the effect sound effect effect B of FIG. 132, and the effect sound effect effect C of FIG. 133, some of the effects described may not be provided, and other effects are added. May be.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Mode D4-1]
A game machine including a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, a display unit capable of displaying a plurality of types of images, and a speaker capable of outputting a plurality of types of effect sounds,
A first effect capable of outputting a first effect sound corresponding to a specific hold icon among hold icons displayed in association with the entry of the game ball into the entrance.
After the first effect, it is possible to execute a second effect in which the specific hold icon is displayed as the variable icon and a second effect sound can be output.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Mode D4-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect D4-1,
The second effect sound may be output before the second effect, and the second effect sound is output before the second effect sound is output and the specific hold icon becomes the variable icon. It is possible to execute the third effect of stopping
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Mode D4-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect D4-1 or aspect D4-2,
In the second effect, it is possible to further output a third effect sound while the second effect sound is being output.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Mode D4-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D4-1 to D4-3,
In the second effect, a specific image related to the second effect sound can be displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Mode D4-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect D4-4,
In the second effect, the specific image can be displayed according to the rhythm of the second effect sound.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Mode D4-6]
A gaming machine according to aspect D4-5,
The specific image is composed of a single or a plurality of character images,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Mode D4-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D4-1 to D4-6,
After the second effect, a fourth effect that changes the variable icon can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The lyrics image effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 134 to 136. This lyrics image effect can be executed during the effect effect of changing the effect symbol. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the lyrics image effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the main display device. 7 is an effect of displaying an image on the display screen 7a of 7.

[Lyrics image production A]
FIG. 134 is a diagram for explaining the lyrics image effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 134(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect pattern starts changing. Here, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing at high speed. Note that three reserved images 9B corresponding to the second special figure reservation and the variable image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134(B), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect design is temporarily stopped in the reach mode. Here, it is shown that the left effect design 8L and the right effect design 8R are both temporarily stopped at "4". Note that three reserved images 9B corresponding to the second special figure reservation and the variable image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134(C), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is an effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB engage in a battle. In the battle presentation, the teammate character CRA wins by winning. Here, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed at the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 134(D)(E)(F), the lyrics display effect is executed. The lyrics display effect is an effect in which a lyrics image is displayed on the display screen 7a in accordance with the music played during the battle effect. A plurality of lyrics images will be sequentially displayed as the music progresses. Here, an example is shown in which the lyrics “Let's live romantically” are sequentially displayed with a plurality of lyrics images.

First, as shown in FIG. 134(D), the lyrics display effect (first period) is executed. In the lyrics display effect (first term), a lyrics image KG1 "Romantic" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Since the battle effect also continues, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are also displayed on the display screen 7a (the same applies hereafter).

Next, as shown in FIG. 134(E), the lyrics display effect (middle term) is executed. In the lyrics display effect (middle period), the lyrics image KG2 of "raw" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, in particular, the lyric image KG2 of "raw" is a lyric image of one character, which is larger than the characters constituting the lyric image KG1 of the lyric display effect (first period). Further, the lyrics image KG2 “raw” is displayed in a rotated state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134(F), the lyrics display effect (late stage) is executed. In the lyrics display effect (late stage), a lyrics image KG3 of "Kitemiyo" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Here, in particular, the characters that make up the lyrics image KG3 of “Kitemiyo” are smaller than the characters that make up the lyrics image KG2 of the lyrics display effect (middle period).

Next, as shown in FIG. 134(G), a win/loss notification effect is executed. The winning/losing notification effect is an effect of notifying whether the teammate character CRA has won or lost. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed, and the message image MSG of "win" is displayed. When the teammate character is defeated, for example, the enemy character CRB is displayed and the message image “defeat” is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 134(H), the fixed stop effect (winning) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (winning), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are fixedly stopped in a winning manner. Here, a state is shown in which all of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the left and right are definitely stopped at "4". In the case of a loss, for example, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are fixedly stopped at "4", and the middle effect symbol 8C is definitely stopped at "5".

[Lyrics image production B]
FIG. 135 is a diagram for explaining the lyrics image effect B. The lyrics image effect B is another example of the lyrics image effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 135(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect pattern starts changing. Here, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing at high speed. Note that three reserved images 9B corresponding to the second special figure reservation and the variable image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135(B), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect design is temporarily stopped in the reach mode. Here, it is shown that the left effect design 8L and the right effect design 8R are both temporarily stopped at "4". Note that three reserved images 9B corresponding to the second special figure reservation and the variable image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135(C), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is an effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB engage in a battle. In the battle presentation, the teammate character CRA wins by winning. Here, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed at the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 135(D)(E)(F), the lyrics display effect is executed. The lyrics display effect is an effect in which a lyrics image is displayed on the display screen 7a in accordance with the music played during the battle effect. A plurality of lyrics images will be sequentially displayed as the music progresses. Here, an example is shown in which the lyrics “Let's live romantically” are sequentially displayed with a plurality of lyrics images.

First, as shown in FIG. 135(D), the lyrics display effect (first period) is executed. In the lyrics display effect (first term), a lyrics image KG1 called "Roman" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Here, in particular, the characters "ro" and "ma" forming the lyrics image KG1 are transparent except for the outline, and the ally character CRA as the background image is visible. Since the battle effect also continues, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are also displayed on the display screen 7a (the same applies hereafter).

Next, as shown in FIG. 135(E), the lyrics display effect (middle term) is executed. In the lyrics display effect (middle term), a lyrics image KG2 of "tick" is displayed at the top of the display screen 7a. Also, a lyrics image KG3 of "raw" is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, in particular, the characters that make up the lyrics image KG2 "Tick ni" are smaller than the characters that make up the lyrics image KG1 in the lyrics display effect (first period), and the lyrics image KG2 is displayed after the arrow Y1. Move to the left side of the display screen 7a as shown by. Also, the lyrics image KG3 called "raw" is a single-character lyrics image, which is larger than the characters that make up the lyrics image KG1 in the lyrics display effect (first period), and the lyrics image KG3 called "raw" is , And then rotates counterclockwise as indicated by arrow Y2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135(F), the lyrics display effect (late period) is executed. In the lyrics display effect (late stage), a lyrics image KG4 "Kitemiyo" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Here, in particular, the characters forming the lyrics image KG4 "Kitemiyou" are larger than the characters forming the lyrics image KG2 of the lyrics display effect (middle period) and smaller than the characters forming the lyrics image KG3. ing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135(G), a win/loss notification effect is executed. The winning/losing notification effect is an effect of notifying whether the teammate character CRA has won or lost. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed, and the message image MSG of "win" is displayed. When the teammate character is defeated, for example, the enemy character CRB is displayed and the message image “defeat” is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 135(H), the fixed stop effect (win) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (winning), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are fixedly stopped in a winning manner. Here, a state is shown in which all of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the left and right are definitely stopped at "4". In the case of a loss, for example, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are fixedly stopped at "4", and the middle effect symbol 8C is definitely stopped at "5".

[Lyrics image production C]
FIG. 136 is a diagram for explaining the lyrics image effect C. The lyrics image effect C is another example of the lyrics image effects A and B.
First, as shown in FIG. 136(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect pattern starts changing. Here, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing at high speed. Note that three reserved images 9B corresponding to the second special figure reservation and the variable image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 136(B), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect design is temporarily stopped in the reach mode. Here, it is shown that the left effect design 8L and the right effect design 8R are both temporarily stopped at "4". Note that three reserved images 9B corresponding to the second special figure reservation and the variable image 9C are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 136(C), a battle effect is executed. The battle effect is an effect in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB engage in a battle. In the battle presentation, the teammate character CRA wins by winning. Here, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are displayed at the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 136(D)(E)(F), the lyrics display effect is executed. The lyrics display effect is an effect in which a lyrics image is displayed on the display screen 7a in accordance with the music played during the battle effect. A plurality of lyrics images will be sequentially displayed as the music progresses. Here, an example is shown in which the lyrics “Let's live romantically” are sequentially displayed with a plurality of lyrics images.

First, as shown in FIG. 136(D), the lyrics display effect (first period) is executed. In the lyrics display effect (first term), a lyrics image KG1 "Romantic" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Since the battle effect also continues, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB are also displayed on the display screen 7a (the same applies hereafter).

Next, as shown in FIG. 136(E), the lyrics display effect (middle term) is executed. In the lyrics display effect (middle term), a lyrics image KG2 "Let's live" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 136(F), the lyrics display effect (late stage) is executed. In the lyrics display effect (late stage), a lyrics image KG3 "Let's live" is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Here, in particular, the lyrics image KG2 "Let's live" displayed in the lyrics display effect (middle term) is gradually enlarged and displayed as the lyrics image KG3. That is, the lyrics image KG3 is enlarged after being displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 136(G), a win/loss notification effect is executed. The winning/losing notification effect is an effect of notifying whether the teammate character CRA has won or lost. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed, and the message image MSG of "win" is displayed. When the teammate character is defeated, for example, the enemy character CRB is displayed and the message image “defeat” is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 136(H), the fixed stop effect (winning) is executed. In the fixed stop effect (winning), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are fixedly stopped in a winning manner. Here, a state is shown in which all of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the left and right are definitely stopped at "4". In the case of a loss, for example, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R are fixedly stopped at "4", and the middle effect symbol 8C is definitely stopped at "5".

[Effect example]
Below, the example of an effect of lyrics image production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, when displaying the lyrics "Let's live romantically" as a plurality of lyrics images, the lyrics images that are sequentially displayed can be displayed in various modes (Fig. 134(D)(E)(F), FIG. 135(D)(E)(F), and FIG. 136(D)(E)(F). According to this configuration, it is possible to further enjoy the music that is output and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the lyrics image "raw" can be displayed in a rotated state (FIG. 134(E)). According to this configuration, since the display of the lyrics image is changed, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, it is possible to display the lyrics image in various sizes (FIG. 134(D)(E)(F), FIG. 135(D)(E)(F). ). According to this configuration, since the display of the lyrics image is changed, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, it is possible to display a lyrics image composed of one character (FIG. 134(E), FIG. 135(E)). With this configuration, the lyrics image can be displayed with an impact, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, it is possible to display the lyrics image in a transparent or semi-transparent manner so that the background image can be visually recognized (FIG. 135(D)). With this configuration, the background image can be enjoyed together with the lyrics image, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after displaying the lyrics image, it is possible to change the mode of the lyrics image (FIG. 135(E), FIG. 136(E)(F)). According to this configuration, the lyrics image after the display changes, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after displaying the lyrics image, the lyrics image can be moved (FIG. 135(E)). With this configuration, the lyrics image can be displayed with an impact, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Effect 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after displaying the lyrics image, the lyrics image can be rotated (FIG. 135(E)). With this configuration, the lyrics image can be displayed with an impact, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Effect 9]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the lyrics image is displayed, the size of the lyrics image can be changed (FIGS. 136(E)(F)). With this configuration, the lyrics image can be displayed with an impact, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of lyrics image production is shown.
[Modification 1]
Although not particularly mentioned above, the display color of the lyrics image may be changed after the lyrics image is displayed. For example, it is possible to change the display color of the lyrics image in accordance with the output of the music.

[Modification 2]
Although an example in which the displayed lyrics image is rotated about the front-rear direction as an axis has been described above (FIG. 135(E)), for example, a three-dimensional lyrics image is prepared and rotated in the up-down direction or the left-right direction. May be.

[Modification 3]
In the above, the effect on the second special figure hold is described as an example, but the effect on the first special figure hold may be used.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect D5-1]
A gaming machine that displays the lyrics of the song as a plurality of lyrics images according to the output of the song,
When sequentially displaying the plurality of lyrics images, it is possible to perform a mode display effect of displaying the sequentially displayed lyrics images in various modes.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D5-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect D5-1,
The aspect display effect includes an effect of displaying the lyrics image in a rotated state,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D5-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect D5-1 or aspect D5-2,
The aspect display effect includes an effect of displaying the lyrics image in various sizes,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D5-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D5-1 to D5-3,
The aspect display effect includes an effect of displaying the lyrics image composed of one character,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D5-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D5-1 to D5-4,
The aspect display effect includes an effect of displaying the lyrics image in a transparent or semi-transparent manner such that the background image is visible,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D5-6]
A gaming machine that displays the lyrics of the song as a plurality of lyrics images according to the output of the song,
When sequentially displaying the plurality of lyrics images, after displaying the lyrics images, it is possible to execute a mode change effect of changing the mode of the lyrics images.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D5-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D5-1 to D5-5,
When sequentially displaying the plurality of lyrics images, after displaying the lyrics images, it is possible to execute a mode change effect of changing the mode of the lyrics images.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D5-8]
A gaming machine according to aspect D5-6 or aspect D5-7,
The aspect change effect includes an effect of moving the lyrics image,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D5-9]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D5-6 to D5-8,
The aspect change effect includes an effect of rotating the lyrics image,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D5-10]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D5-6 to D5-9,
The aspect change effect includes an effect of changing the size of the lyrics image,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Aspect D5-11]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D5-6 to D5-10,
The aspect change effect includes an effect of changing the display color of the lyrics image,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The specific area variable effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 137 to 139. 137 to 139, for example, the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and other movable accessory disposed around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are easy to see in the drawings. There are some that have been omitted.

This specific area variable effect is performed during the variable effect (during the variable display) by the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (for example, variation effect start command) received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the specific area variable effect, the corresponding image from the ROM 103. The data is read and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Further, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands (for example, variation effect start command) received from the sub control board 90, and the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory of the first movable accessory 14 provided in the game board 2 are analyzed. The position and the light emission mode of 14R are changed.

Here, the specific area variable effect A will be described first, and the specific area variable effect B and the specific area variable effect C will be sequentially described.

[Specific area variable effect A]
The specific area variable effect A will be described with reference to FIG. 137. FIG. 137 is a diagram for explaining the specific area variable effect A. The specific area variable effect A is performed during the variable effect (during the variable display) by the decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 137(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative design 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative design 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen. In each variable region from the upper side to the lower side of 7a, the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (symbol: number "1" to number "9") is started in a display mode in which the reel is rotated. ..

When the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative design is started, the display of the decorative design that is stopped and displayed changes from the opaque state to the translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed to the high speed display mode. .. Thereby, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semitransparent decorative pattern which is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped). Note that the decorative pattern is in a display mode in which the decorative pattern moves in small increments in the vertical direction when the temporary stop display is performed.

The variation icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, which are currently changing as the end of the first special map reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (on the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (on the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad from the position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The reserved display positions 9Ad are arranged and displayed linearly along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

Here, a white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, a white spherical retention icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and second hold display positions 9Ad to fourth hold are displayed. The hold icon is not displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one stocked icon that has not been digested for the hold icon. In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting opening 20 and the second starting opening 21.

In addition, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbol, is supported. In addition to the hold icon 9A, which corresponds to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 The special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21 are arranged and displayed as unillustrated numbers on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 is shown in blue on the left side, and the number of the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21 is shown in red. The numbers are arranged on the upper side of the center of the display screen 7a so as to be spaced apart from each other on the right side and are always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as the number of reserved balls as numerical values, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and it is easy to intuitively understand. Note that these numbers are arranged on the forefront side of the display screen 7a and other images are displayed behind the foreground of the display screen 7a so that visibility is not hindered by the other images. It is like this.

Here, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “icon”) will be briefly described. Due to the difference in shape and color, the difference in expectation in winning in the lottery corresponding to the icon. Is represented. For example, of the four icons, a yellow (gold) star icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest likelihood of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hit, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hit, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hit. The smile sphere icon is further set to have a high expectation of being a jackpot in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (Rainbow (hit jackpot)).

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started in FIG. 137(A), thereafter, the flash FH is emitted from the center of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 137(B). At this time, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8L in the variable effect (during variable display) disappear from the display screen 7a, and further, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A. It disappears from the display screen 7a. In other words, among the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, the right decorative design 8L, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, the change icon 9C and the hold icon 9A, only the change icon 9C is displayed on the display screen 7a. It will be displayed. The flash light FH is arranged and displayed behind the fluctuation icon 9C, and the fluctuation icon 9C is not covered by the flash light FH and visibility is not impaired.

After that, when the flash light FH gradually disappears from the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 137(C), the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R of the image display device 7 are respectively located at the center of the display screen 7a. At the front (front) center position of the display screen 7a (moving toward each other) from the home position, the front (front) center position (advance position (deployment position)) of the display screen 7a A left side decoration part which is half of the ring-shaped decoration part attached to the tip side of the left movable accessory 14L and a right decoration part which is half of the ring-shaped decoration part attached to the tip side of the right movable part 14R. And the left decoration part of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decoration part of the right movable accessory 14R form a single decorative member (a combination accessory).

When the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form a united accessory having a ring shape, the area formed in the ring has a circular shape ( Hereinafter, it is referred to as a "circular area"). The ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area. At this time, the change icon 9C is maintained in the state displayed on the display screen 7a.

When a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a, the ally character CRA disappears from the display screen 7a, and the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are separated from each other. In the direction, the left movable accessory 14L retreats (moves) from the advance position at the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a, and the right movable accessory. 14R retreats (moves) from the advance position in the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a toward the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a.

Then, when the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are suddenly displayed in a large size while approaching from the rear to the front of the display screen 7a with the number "1" displayed, as shown in FIG. 137(D), Reach is formed by temporary stop display at a position slightly above the center line connecting the center of the left side and the center of the right side of the display screen 7a in each of the variable regions. At this time, the variable icon 9C is maintained in the state displayed on the display screen 7a, and the middle decoration pattern 8C is maintained in the state disappeared from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 137(E), when the left decorative design 8L of the temporarily stopped display number "1" starts to move below the variable region of itself, the number "2" is displayed from the rear of the left decorative design 8L. The left decorative design 8L of "" appears, and the left decorative design 8L of the number "2" starts to move above its variable region. On the other hand, when the right decorative design 8R of the number "1" temporarily displayed is started to move to the upper side of the variable region of itself, the right decorative design 8R of the number "2" appears from the rear of this right decorative design 8R, and the number The right decorative pattern 8R of "2" starts moving below the variable region of itself.

After that, as shown in FIG. 137(F), the left decorative pattern 8L of the number “1” is completely moved to the lower side of the variable area of itself and is temporarily stopped and displayed at the lower left side of the display screen 7a, and the number “2” is displayed. In the state in which the left decorative pattern 8L has finished moving above its own variable region and is temporarily stopped and displayed in the upper left part of the display screen 7a, the size at the time of normal appearance of each (hereinafter, referred to as “normal size”). It is smaller (for example, about one size smaller). On the other hand, the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "1" is completed moving to the upper side of its own variable region and is temporarily stopped and displayed at the upper right of the display screen 7a, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" is of its own variable region. In the state where the downward movement is completed and the temporary stop display is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, the left decorative design 8L of the number "1" and the left decorative design 8L of the number "2" are compared with the size at the normal time. Are smaller (for example, about one size smaller). As a result, the first reach is formed on the line going up to the right by the left decorative design 8L of the number "1" temporarily displayed on the lower left and the right decorative design 8R of the number "1" temporarily displayed on the upper right. , A second reach is formed on the line descending to the right by the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" temporarily displayed on the upper left and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" temporarily displayed on the lower right, and a double is formed. Reach.

In FIG. 137(F), a double reach is formed by the two left decorative patterns 8L and the two right decorative patterns 8R, and two left decorative patterns 8L and two right decorative patterns 8R are respectively defined as vertex images, and thus four. A rectangular first specific region connecting the vertex images is formed. In other words, the first specific area surrounded by the four vertex images is formed. When the first specific area is formed, the middle decoration pattern 8C is displayed again from the display screen 7a, and a variable effect (variable display) is performed in the first specific area. Since the middle decoration pattern 8C is changing at high speed, it will be visually recognized as an unclear image in the first specific region.

After that, as shown in FIG. 137(G), the left decorative design 8L of the number "2" temporarily stopped and displayed in the upper left direction jumps out from its own variation area toward the center of the left side of the display screen 7a so as to draw an arc. When the movement is started, the left decorative design 8L of the number "3" appears from the rear of the left decorative design 8L, and the left decorative design 8L of the number "3" stays on the spot and is temporarily stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" temporarily displayed on the lower right side jumps out from its own variable region toward the center of the right side of the display screen 7a and starts moving, this right decorative pattern 8R The right decorative design 8R of the number "3" appears from behind, and the right decorative design 8R of the number "3" stays on the spot and is temporarily displayed.

In FIG. 137(G), the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" temporarily stopped and displayed on the upper left side is switched to the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "3", and the number "2" temporarily stopped and displayed on the lower right side. Since the right decorative pattern 8R of No. 3 has been switched to the right decorative pattern 8R of number "3", the left decorative pattern 8L of number "3" temporarily displayed at the upper left and the number "1" temporarily displayed at the lower left The left decorative design 8L, the right decorative design 8R of the number "3" temporarily displayed in the lower right, and the right decorative design 8R of the number "1" temporarily displayed in the upper right are the vertex images. Then, a rectangular second specific region connecting the four vertex images is formed. In other words, the first specific area surrounded by the four vertex images is formed. The second specific area has the same size as the first specific area.

The left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" temporarily stopped and displayed on the upper left side jumps out of its own variable region toward the center of the left side of the display screen 7a and starts moving, and is temporarily stopped and displayed on the lower right side. Since the right decorative pattern 8R of the numeral "2" has started to move out of its own variable area toward the center of the right side of the display screen 7a so as to draw an arc, the left decorative pattern of the numeral "2" that started moving 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" that has started to be moved are set as the second specific area, the size of the second specific area is larger than that of the first specific area. Grows.

Since the variation effect (variation display) of the medium decoration pattern 8C is performed in the first specific area, the variation effect (variation display) of the middle decoration pattern 8C is continued in the second specific area as well. .. Since the medium decoration pattern 8C is changing at high speed, it will be visually recognized as an unclear image even in the second specific region. In the second specific area, the variation effect (variation display) of the middle decoration pattern 8C is continued, but instead of this, the middle decoration pattern 8C may be erased from the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 137(H), the left decorative pattern 8L of the number “2” jumps out of the variable region of itself and completes the movement to the vicinity of the center of the left side of the display screen 7a, and is temporarily located near the center of the left side of the display screen 7a. In the state of being stopped and displayed, the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "3" temporarily displayed at the upper left, the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" temporarily displayed near the center of the left side, and the temporary stop display at the lower left The left decorative design 8L of the number "1" is smaller (for example, about the size of the lid) than the size in the normal state. In other words, it is smaller than when it was double reach. On the other hand, in the state where the right decorative pattern 8R of the number “2” jumps out of the variable region of itself and is completely moved to the vicinity of the center of the right side of the display screen 7a and is temporarily stopped and displayed in the vicinity of the center of the right side of the display screen 7a, the lower right direction. The right decoration pattern 8R of the number "3" temporarily displayed, the right decoration pattern 8R of the number "2" temporarily displayed near the center of the right side, and the right decoration pattern of the number "1" temporarily displayed at the upper right. 8R is smaller than the size at the normal time (for example, smaller around the lid). In other words, it is smaller than when it was double reach. As a result, the first reach is formed on the line going up to the right by the left decorative design 8L of the number "1" temporarily displayed on the lower left and the right decorative design 8R of the number "1" temporarily displayed on the upper right. , A second reach is formed on the lower right line of the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "3" temporarily displayed on the upper left and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "3" temporarily displayed on the lower right, and the second reach is formed on the left side. The third reach is formed on the horizontal line by the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" temporarily displayed near the center and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" temporarily displayed near the center on the right side. Becomes

In FIG. 137(H), a triple reach is formed by the three left decorative designs 8L and the three right decorative designs 8R, and three left decorative designs 8L and three right decorative designs 8R are respectively defined as vertex images. A hexagonal third specific region connecting the vertex images is formed. In other words, the third specific area surrounded by the six vertex images is formed. Comparing the sizes of the first specific area (second specific area) and the third specific area, in FIG. 137(G), the left decorative design 8L of the number "2" temporarily displayed is an arc. As it draws, it jumps out from its own variable region toward the center of the left side of the display screen 7a and starts moving, and the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "3" appears from the rear of this left decorative pattern 8L, and the left of the number "3". The decorative pattern 8L stays on the spot and is temporarily stopped and displayed. On the other hand, the right decorative pattern 8R of the temporarily stopped display number "2" draws an arc, and moves toward the center of the right side of the display screen 7a. From the right decorative design 8R, the right decorative design 8R of the number "3" appears from the rear of the right decorative design 8R, and the right decorative design 8R of the number "3" stays on the spot and is temporarily displayed. The size of the third specific area is larger than the size of the first specific area (second specific area). The third specific area has a hexagonal shape when the six vertex images are connected, but actually has a substantially circular shape (a shape similar to the circular shape) that passes through the six vertex images.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 137(I), the middle decoration pattern 8C of the number "1" is displayed in a display mode that approaches from the rear toward the front in the center of the display screen 7a in the third specific region. Appears as a clear image and is temporarily stopped. The size of the clear image temporarily displayed is larger than the size in the normal state (for example, the size of the lid is larger than the size in the normal state). Then, the intermediate decoration pattern 8C temporarily stopped and displayed as the number "1" moves forward and disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 137(J), the middle decoration pattern 8C of the number “2” is displayed in a display mode that increases from the rear to the front in the center of the display screen 7a in the third specific region. Appears as a clear image and is temporarily stopped. The size of the clear image temporarily displayed is larger than the size in the normal state (for example, the size of the lid is larger than the size in the normal state). Then, the intermediate decoration pattern 8C that is temporarily stopped and displayed as the number "2" moves forward and disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 137(K), the middle decoration pattern 8C of the number "3" is displayed in a display manner in which the size increases from the rear to the front in the center of the display screen 7a in the third specific region. Appears as a clear image and is temporarily stopped. The size of the clear image temporarily displayed is larger than the size in the normal state (for example, the size of the lid is larger than the size in the normal state).

In addition, when the decoration symbol 8C that is temporarily stopped and displayed as the number "3" moves forward and disappears from the display screen 7a, it becomes out of alignment and the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. As a result, the specific area variable effect A ends. Then, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the hold icon 9A displayed in the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd. When it becomes the variation icon 9C, variation effect (variation display) by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R is performed.

As shown in FIG. 137(L) subsequent to FIG. 137(K), in the center of the display screen 7a, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, respectively. The player moves forward (moves) from the home position toward the forward center position (closer to each other), and moves to the left at the front (front) center position (advance position (expand position)) of the display screen 7a. A left side decoration part that is half of the ring-shaped decoration part attached to the tip side of the object 14L, and a right side decoration part that is half of the ring-shaped decoration part attached to the tip side of the right movable accessory 14R. By combining, the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R form a single decorative member (combined accessory). At this time, the three left decorative designs 8L, the three right decorative designs 8R, and the middle decorative design 8C disappear from the display screen 7a, while the variable icon 9C is maintained in the state displayed on the display screen 7a. ing.

When the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form a united accessory having a ring shape, an image display corresponding to the circular area formed in the ring shape is formed. The ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7. With the appearance of the left movable accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R, and the ally character CRA displayed in the circular area, it is possible to inform the player that the jackpot is a big hit.

When a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a, the ally character CRA disappears from the display screen 7a, and the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are separated from each other. In the direction, the left movable accessory 14L retreats (moves) from the advance position at the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a, and the right movable accessory. 14R retreats (moves) from the advance position in the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a toward the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a. As a result, the specific area variable effect A ends.

After that, as shown in FIG. 137(M), the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are larger than the size at the normal time (for example, larger than the size at the normal time by the size of the lid). ) The size is arranged at the central position of each variable region, and the number "3" is lined up on the horizontal line and temporarily stopped and displayed. At this time, the intermediate decoration pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with a number different from the number "3", and when stopped and displayed, the variation is lost and the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. Then, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the hold icon 9A displayed in the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd. When it becomes the variation icon 9C, variation effect (variation display) by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R is performed.

137(M), after that, when the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are stopped and displayed with the number "3", it becomes a big hit and the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. .. When the jackpot game (jackpot effect) is started and finished, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the hold icon 9A displayed in the first hold display position 9Ad. When is moved to the variation display position 9Cd and becomes the variation icon 9C, variation effect (variation display) by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R is performed.

Note that in FIG. 137(H), the quadruple reach may be formed after the triple reach is formed. In this case, when the left decorative design 8L of the number "3" temporarily stopped and displayed in the upper left direction jumps out of its own variation area toward the upper center of the left side of the display screen 7a so as to draw an arc, and starts moving, The left decorative design 8L of the number "4" appears from the rear of the decorative design 8L, the left decorative design 8L of the number "4" stays in place and is temporarily stopped, and the temporary stop displayed near the center of the left side is "2". Will start moving to the bottom center of the left side. On the other hand, when the right decoration pattern 8R of the number "3" temporarily stopped and displayed in the lower right direction jumps out of the variable region of itself toward the lower center of the right side of the display screen 7a and starts moving, this right decoration is displayed. The right decorative design 8R of the number "4" appears from the rear of the design 8R, the right decorative design 8R of the number "4" stays in place and is temporarily stopped, and the number "2" is temporarily stopped near the center of the right side. Starts moving to the upper center of the right side.

When the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "3" jumps out of its own variable area and is moved to the upper center of the left side of the display screen 7a and is temporarily stopped, the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" is displayed on the display screen 7a. The movement to the bottom center of the left side of is completed and the temporary stop is displayed. In this state, the left decorative pattern 8L with the number "4" temporarily displayed on the upper left side, the left decorative pattern 8L with the number "3" temporarily displayed on the upper left side center, the temporary stop display on the lower left side center The left decorative design 8L of the number "2" and the left decorative design 8L of the number "1" temporarily stopped at the lower left are smaller (for example, about a half around the lid) smaller than the normal size. There is. In other words, it is smaller than when it was triple reach. On the other hand, when the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "3" jumps out of the variable region of itself and is completely moved to the lower center of the right side of the display screen 7a and is temporarily stopped, the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" is displayed. The movement to the upper center of the right side of the screen 7a is completed, and the temporary stop is displayed. In this state, the right decorative pattern 8R with the number "4" temporarily displayed in the lower right, the right decorative pattern 8R with the number "3" temporarily displayed in the lower right center, and the temporary stop displayed in the upper right center The right decorative design 8R of the number "2" and the right decorative design 8R of the number "1" temporarily stopped at the upper right are smaller (for example, about a half around the lid) smaller than the normal size. There is. In other words, it is smaller than when it was triple reach. As a result, the first reach is on the first upward rising line by the left decorative design 8L of the number "1" temporarily displayed on the lower left and the right decorative design 8R of the number "1" temporarily displayed on the upper right. A second reach is formed on the first downward line to the right by the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" that is temporarily stopped and displayed on the upper left side and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" that is temporarily stopped and displayed on the lower right side. Formed on the second right upward line by the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "2" temporarily stopped and displayed on the lower left center and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "2" temporarily displayed on the upper right center. The third reach is formed, and the second decorative pattern 8L with the number "3" temporarily displayed on the upper left side center and the right decorative pattern 8R with the number "3" temporarily displayed on the lower center right side are second A fourth reach is formed on the line that descends to the right, forming a quadruple reach.

In this way, a quadruple reach is formed by the four left decorative designs 8L and the four right decorative designs 8R, and when the four left decorative designs 8L and the four right decorative designs 8R are respectively vertex images, eight vertex images When the are connected, an octagonal fourth specific region is formed. In other words, the fourth specific area surrounded by the eight vertex images is formed. Comparing the size of the fourth specific area and the size of the third specific area formed by the triple reach described above, the display screen is such that the left decorative design 8L of the temporarily stopped display number "3" draws an arc. 7a jumped out of its own variable area toward the upper left center and started moving, and the left decorative design 8L of the number "4" appeared from the rear of this left decorative design 8L, and was temporarily stopped and displayed near the center of the left side. The number "2" starts moving to the lower center of the left side, and the left decorative pattern 8L of the number "4" stays in place and is temporarily stopped, while the right decorative pattern of the number "3" that is temporarily stopped is displayed. 8R jumps out from the variable region of itself toward the lower right center of the display screen 7a so as to draw an arc and starts moving, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "3" appears from the rear of this right decorative pattern 8R, The number "2" temporarily displayed near the center of the right side starts moving to the upper center of the right side, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the number "4" stays on the spot and is temporarily displayed. The size is larger than the size of the third specific area. That is, the first specific area (second specific area) formed by the double reach, the third specific area formed by the triple reach, and the fourth specific area formed by the quadruple reach are sized in this order. Is getting bigger.

The expectation of winning is higher in the order of double reach, triple reach, and quadruple reach. In other words, the double reach has four vertex images, the triple reach has six vertex images, and the quadruple reach has eight vertex images.

In addition, also in the fourth specific region formed by the quadruple reach, the variation effect (variation display) by the middle decorative pattern 8C shown in FIGS. 137(I) to 137(K) is performed, and is shown in FIG. 137(L). An effect is produced by the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R.

[Specific area variable effect B]
Next, the specific area variable effect B will be described with reference to FIG. 138. FIG. 138 is a diagram for explaining the specific area variable effect B. The specific area variable effect B is performed during the variable effect (during the variable display) by the decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 138(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative design 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative design 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen. In each variable region from the upper side to the lower side of 7a, the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (symbol: number "1" to number "9") is started in a display mode in which the reel is rotated. ..

When the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative design is started, the display of the decorative design that is stopped and displayed changes from the opaque state to the translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed to the high speed display mode. .. Thereby, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semitransparent decorative pattern which is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped). Note that the decorative pattern is in a display mode in which the decorative pattern moves in small increments in the vertical direction when the temporary stop display is performed.

The variation icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, which are currently changing as the end of the first special map reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (on the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (on the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad from the position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The reserved display positions 9Ad are arranged and displayed linearly along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

Here, a white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, a white spherical retention icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and second hold display positions 9Ad to fourth hold are displayed. The hold icon is not displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one stocked icon that has not been digested for the hold icon. In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting opening 20 and the second starting opening 21.

In addition, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbol, is supported. In addition to the hold icon 9A, which corresponds to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 The special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21 are arranged and displayed as unillustrated numbers on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 is shown in blue on the left side, and the number of the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21 is shown in red. The numbers are arranged on the upper side of the center of the display screen 7a so as to be spaced apart from each other on the right side and are always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as the number of reserved balls as numerical values, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and it is easy to intuitively understand. Note that these numbers are arranged on the forefront side of the display screen 7a and other images are displayed behind the foreground of the display screen 7a so that visibility is not hindered by the other images. It is like this.

Here, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “icon”) will be briefly described. Due to the difference in shape and color, the difference in expectation in winning in the lottery corresponding to the icon. Is represented. For example, of the four icons, a yellow (gold) star icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest likelihood of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hit, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hit, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hit. The smile sphere icon is further set to have a high expectation of being a jackpot in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (Rainbow (hit jackpot)).

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started in FIG. 138(A), thereafter, as shown in FIG. 138(B), a circle is displayed in a display mode that enters from the periphery of the display screen 7a into the display screen 7a. Three effect images EG having a shape (hereinafter, referred to as “round effect image EG”) appear, are arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a so as not to overlap each other, and are temporarily stopped and displayed.

Then, the three round-shaped effect images EG are maintained at the positions where the three round-shaped effect images EG are arranged as they are, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 (3 times to 3 times) each, the movement is started, and as shown in FIG. 138(C), the three round shape effect images EG are used as vertex images to form a straight line RG connecting the three vertex images, and three round shapes are formed. When the effect image EG has been moved a predetermined number of times and is temporarily stopped and displayed, the three round shape effect images EG emit light all at once once. Thereby, the first specific region having a triangular shape is formed by the three straight lines RG connecting the vertex images of the three round-shaped effect images EG.

The ally character CRA appears as an unclear image (an out-of-focus image (an out-of-focus image)) immediately before the three round-shaped effect images EG simultaneously emit light in the first specific region. The straight line RG has a blue color, and in the case of a clear image (an in-focus image (an image that is not out of focus)), the boundary line between the inner side and the outer side of the first specific region can be easily understood. can do. On the other hand, the straight line RG has a blue color, and in the case of an unclear image (an image out of focus (an out-of-focus image)), the straight line RG is the first from the unclear image. It is possible to realize a display mode in which some influence is exerted on the specific area of.

After that, when the three round-shaped effect images EG disappear from the display screen 7a, the ally character CRA and the three straight lines RG, which are unclear images, gradually disappear from the display screen 7a, and the first specific area disappears.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 138(D), an effect image EG having a triangular shape (hereinafter, referred to as “triangular effect image EG”) in a display mode that enters the display screen 7a from the periphery of the display screen 7a. Four of them appear, are arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a so as not to overlap each other, and are temporarily stopped and displayed. The size of the triangular effect image EG is larger than the size of the round effect image EG, which can contribute to increasing the player's expectation of winning.

Then, the four triangular effect images EG are maintained at the positions where the four triangular effect images EG are arranged as they are, and this time clockwise toward a position of the adjacent triangular effect image EG a predetermined number of times (for example, Each time, the movement is started only 2 to 3 times), and as shown in FIG. 138(E), four triangular effect images EG are used as vertex images to form a straight line RG connecting the four vertex images, and four triangles are formed. When the pattern effect image EG has been moved a predetermined number of times and is temporarily stopped and displayed, the four triangular effect images EG simultaneously emit light all at once. As a result, the second specific region having a quadrangular shape is formed by the four straight lines RG connecting the vertex images of the four triangular effect images EG. The size of the second specific region is larger than the size of the first specific region formed in FIG. 138(C). Also in this respect, it is possible to contribute to increasing the expectation of winning for the player.

Immediately before the four triangular effect images EG simultaneously emit light, the ally character CRA again appears as an unclear image (an out-of-focus image (an out-of-focus image)) in the second specific region. To do. The straight line RG has a green color, and in the case of a clear image (an in-focus image (an image that is not out of focus)), the boundary line between the inner side and the outer side of the second specific area can be easily understood. can do. On the other hand, the straight line RG has a green color, and in the case of an unclear image (an image out of focus (an out-of-focus image)), the straight line RG is the second from the unclear image. It is possible to realize a display mode in which some influence is exerted on the specific area of. The fact that the color of the straight line RG is green instead of blue in FIG. 138(C) can also contribute to increasing the player's expectation of winning.

After that, when the four triangular effect images EG disappear from the display screen 7a, the unclear image of the ally character CRA and the four straight lines RG gradually disappear from the display screen 7a, and the second specific area disappears.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 138(F), a performance image EG having a quadrangular shape (hereinafter, referred to as “square-shaped effect image EG”) in a display mode that enters the display screen 7a from the periphery of the display screen 7a. Five appear, are arranged in the center of the display screen 7a so as not to overlap each other, and are temporarily stopped and displayed. The size of the square-shaped effect image EG is larger than the size of the triangular-shaped effect image EG, which can contribute to further increasing the player's expectation of winning.

Then, the positions of the five square-shaped effect images EG are maintained as they are, and the five square-shaped effect images EG are maintained counterclockwise a predetermined number of times toward the position of the adjacent square-shaped effect image EG. (2 to 3 times) respectively, the movement is started, and as shown in FIG. 138(G), five square-shaped effect images EG are used as vertex images to form a straight line RG connecting the five vertex images to form five vertices. When the square-shaped effect image EG has been moved a predetermined number of times and is temporarily stopped and displayed, the five square-shaped effect images EG emit light all at once once. As a result, the five specific straight lines RG connecting the vertex images of the five rectangular effect images EG form a third specific area having a pentagonal shape. The size of the third specific region is larger than the size of the second specific region formed in FIG. 138(E). Also in this respect, it is possible to contribute to further increasing the player's expectation of winning.

In this embodiment, three vertex images are shown in FIGS. 138(B) and (C), four vertex images are shown in FIGS. 138(D) and (E), and five vertex images are shown in FIGS. 138(F) and (G). As the number of vertex images increases, the sizes of the first specific region to the third specific region increase.

Immediately before the five square-shaped effect images EG simultaneously emit light, the ally character CRA again appears as an unclear image (an out-of-focus image (an out-of-focus image)) in the third specific region. To do. The straight line RG has a red color, and in the case of a clear image (an in-focus image (an image that is not out of focus)), the boundary line between the inner side and the outer side of the third specific region can be easily understood. can do. On the other hand, the straight line RG has a green color, and in the case of an unclear image (an image that is out of focus (an out-of-focus image)), the straight line RG is the third from the unclear image. It is possible to realize a display mode in which some influence is exerted on the specific area of. The fact that the color of the straight line RG is red, which is different from the green color in FIG. 138(E), can contribute to further increasing the player's expectation of winning.

After that, when the five square-shaped effect images EG disappear from the display screen 7a, the ally character CRA and the five straight lines RG, which are unclear images, gradually disappear from the display screen 7a and the third specific area disappears. As a result, the specific area variable effect B ends.

After that, as shown in FIG. 138(H), the left decorative design 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "6", the middle decorative design 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "3", and the right decorative design 8R is displayed with the number "5". The change icon 9C is stopped and displayed, and the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

[Specific area variable effect C]
Next, the specific area variable effect C will be described with reference to FIG. 139. FIG. 139 is a diagram for explaining the specific area variable effect C. The specific area variable effect C is performed during the variable effect (during the variable display) by the decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 139(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative design 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative design 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen. In each variable region from the upper side to the lower side of 7a, the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (symbol: number "1" to number "9") is started in a display mode in which the reel is rotated. ..

When the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative design is started, the display of the decorative design that is stopped and displayed changes from the opaque state to the translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed to the high speed display mode. .. Thereby, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semitransparent decorative pattern which is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped). Note that the decorative pattern is in a display mode in which the decorative pattern moves in small increments in the vertical direction when the temporary stop display is performed.

The variation icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, which are currently changing as the end of the first special map reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (on the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (on the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad from the position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The reserved display positions 9Ad are arranged and displayed linearly along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

Here, a white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, a white spherical retention icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and second hold display positions 9Ad to fourth hold are displayed. The hold icon is not displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one stocked icon that has not been digested for the hold icon. In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting opening 20 and the second starting opening 21.

In addition, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbol, is supported. In addition to the hold icon 9A, which corresponds to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 The special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21 are arranged and displayed as unillustrated numbers on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 is shown in blue on the left side, and the number of the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21 is shown in red. The numbers are arranged on the upper side of the center of the display screen 7a so as to be spaced apart from each other on the right side and are always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as the number of reserved balls as numerical values, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and it is easy to intuitively understand. Note that these numbers are arranged on the forefront side of the display screen 7a and other images are displayed behind the foreground of the display screen 7a so that visibility is not hindered by the other images. It is like this.

Here, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “icon”) will be briefly described. Due to the difference in shape and color, the difference in expectation in winning in the lottery corresponding to the icon. Is represented. For example, of the four icons, a yellow (gold) star icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest likelihood of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hit, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hit, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hit. The smile sphere icon is further set to have a high expectation of being a jackpot in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (Rainbow (hit jackpot)).

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started in FIG. 139(A), then, as shown in FIG. Three effect images EG having a shape (hereinafter, referred to as “round effect image EG”) appear, are arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a so as not to overlap each other, and are temporarily stopped and displayed.

Then, the three round-shaped effect images EG are maintained at the positions where the three round-shaped effect images EG are arranged as they are, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 (3 times to 3 times), the movement is started each time, and as shown in FIG. 139(C), the three round-shaped effect images EG are used as vertex images to form a straight line RG connecting the three vertex images, and three round shapes are formed. When the effect image EG has been moved a predetermined number of times and is temporarily stopped and displayed, the three round shape effect images EG emit light all at once once. Thereby, the first specific region having a triangular shape is formed by the three straight lines RG connecting the vertex images of the three round-shaped effect images EG.

The ally character CRA appears as an unclear image (an out-of-focus image (an out-of-focus image)) immediately before the three round-shaped effect images EG simultaneously emit light in the first specific region. The straight line RG has a blue color, and in the case of a clear image (an in-focus image (an image that is not out of focus)), the boundary line between the inner side and the outer side of the first specific region can be easily understood. can do. On the other hand, the straight line RG has a blue color, and in the case of an unclear image (an image out of focus (an out-of-focus image)), the straight line RG is the first from the unclear image. It is possible to realize a display mode in which some influence is exerted on the specific area of.

After that, when the three round-shaped effect images EG disappear from the display screen 7a, the ally character CRA and the three straight lines RG, which are unclear images, gradually disappear from the display screen 7a, and the first specific area disappears.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 139(D), an effect image EG having a triangular shape (hereinafter, referred to as “triangular effect image EG”) in a display mode that enters the display screen 7a from the periphery of the display screen 7a. Four of them appear, are arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a so as not to overlap each other, and are temporarily stopped and displayed. The size of the triangular effect image EG is larger than the size of the round effect image EG, which can contribute to increasing the player's expectation of winning.

Then, the four triangular effect images EG are maintained at the positions where the four triangular effect images EG are arranged as they are, and this time clockwise toward a position of the adjacent triangular effect image EG a predetermined number of times (for example, Each time the movement is started only 2 to 3 times), as shown in FIG. 139(E), the four triangular effect images EG are used as vertex images to form a straight line RG connecting the four vertex images to form four triangles. When the pattern effect image EG has been moved a predetermined number of times and is temporarily stopped and displayed, the four triangular effect images EG emit light all at once once. As a result, the second specific region having a quadrangular shape is formed by the four straight lines RG connecting the vertex images of the four triangular effect images EG. The size of the second specific region is larger than the size of the first specific region formed in FIG. 139(C). Also in this respect, it is possible to contribute to increasing the expectation of winning for the player.

Immediately before the four triangular effect images EG simultaneously emit light, the ally character CRA again appears as an unclear image (an out-of-focus image (an out-of-focus image)) in the second specific region. To do. The straight line RG has a green color, and in the case of a clear image (an in-focus image (an image that is not out of focus)), the boundary line between the inner side and the outer side of the second specific area can be easily understood. can do. On the other hand, the straight line RG has a green color, and in the case of an unclear image (an image out of focus (an out-of-focus image)), the straight line RG is the second from the unclear image. It is possible to realize a display mode in which some influence is exerted on the specific area of. The fact that the color of the straight line RG is green instead of blue in FIG. 139(C) can also contribute to increasing the player's expectation of winning.

After that, when the four triangular effect images EG disappear from the display screen 7a, the unclear image of the ally character CRA and the four straight lines RG gradually disappear from the display screen 7a, and the second specific area disappears.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 139(F), an effect image EG having a quadrangular shape (hereinafter, referred to as “square effect image EG”) in a display mode that enters the display screen 7a from the periphery of the display screen 7a. Five appear, are arranged in the center of the display screen 7a so as not to overlap each other, and are temporarily stopped and displayed. The size of the square-shaped effect image EG is larger than the size of the triangular-shaped effect image EG, which can contribute to further increasing the player's expectation of winning.

Then, the positions of the five square-shaped effect images EG are maintained as they are, and the five square-shaped effect images EG are maintained counterclockwise a predetermined number of times toward the position of the adjacent square-shaped effect image EG. (2 to 3 times) respectively, the movement is started, and as shown in FIG. 139(G), five square-shaped effect images EG are used as vertex images to form a straight line RG connecting the five vertex images to form five vertices. When the square-shaped effect image EG has been moved a predetermined number of times and is temporarily stopped and displayed, the five square-shaped effect images EG emit light all at once once. As a result, the five specific straight lines RG connecting the vertex images of the five rectangular effect images EG form a third specific area having a pentagonal shape. The size of the third specific region is larger than the size of the second specific region formed in FIG. 139(E). Also in this respect, it is possible to contribute to further increasing the player's expectation of winning.

In this embodiment, three vertex images in FIGS. 139(B) and (C), four vertex images in FIGS. 139(D) and (E), and five vertex images in FIGS. 139(F) and (G). As the number of vertex images increases, the sizes of the first specific region to the third specific region increase.

Immediately before the five square-shaped effect images EG simultaneously emit light, the ally character CRA again appears as an unclear image (an out-of-focus image (an out-of-focus image)) in the third specific region. To do. The straight line RG has a red color, and in the case of a clear image (an in-focus image (an image that is not out of focus)), the boundary line between the inner side and the outer side of the third specific region can be easily understood. can do. On the other hand, the straight line RG has a green color, and in the case of an unclear image (an image that is out of focus (an out-of-focus image)), the straight line RG is the third from the unclear image. It is possible to realize a display mode in which some influence is exerted on the specific area of. The fact that the color of the straight line RG is red, which is different from the green color in FIG. 139(E), can also contribute to increasing the player's expectation of winning.

After that, the five rectangular effect images EG do not simply disappear from the display screen 7a, but the length and direction of the straight line RG change due to the action of flying away in all directions toward the outside of the display screen 7a. The shape changes. When the five square-shaped effect images EG fly away, as shown in FIG. 139(H), the five straight lines RG forming the third specific area form one substantially circular shape (shape similar to the circular shape). To a line RG, and a fourth specific region having a substantially circular shape (shape similar to the circular shape) is formed. The size of the fourth specific region is larger than the size of the third specific region formed in FIG. 139(G), which contributes to further increasing the player's expectation of winning. can do.

In the fourth specific area, the teammate character CRA appears as a clear image (an in-focus image (an image that is not out of focus)). The color of the straight line RG is inherited as it is and is red, but it may be yellow (gold). This can contribute to further increasing the player's expectation of winning.

Then, the ally character CRA, which is a clear image, and the line RG having a substantially circular shape (a shape similar to the circular shape) gradually disappears from the display screen 7a, and the fourth specific area disappears, and FIG. 139(I). As shown in, before the left decorative design 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "6" and the right decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1", five square-shaped effect images EG that have flew away in all directions. One of the square-shaped effect images EG becomes larger (about four times the size when displayed in FIGS. 139(F) and (G)) and appears near the center of the upper side of the display screen 7a. To do. Then, when the right decorative design 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1", a lightning bolt is emitted from the square-shaped effect image EG to the right decorative design 8R, and the right decorative design 8R is forcibly changed (variable display). ) Is displayed and a temporary stop is displayed with the number “6” to form a reach. As a result, the specific area variable effect C ends.

Then, as shown in FIG. 139(K), the battle effect is started. In the battle effect, two characters (an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB) fight each other, and the effect of expecting a jackpot is high. In the battle effect, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, the right decorative design 8R, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A disappear from the display screen 7a and the change icon 9C is displayed. The state is maintained. When the battle effect is being performed, the sword of the ally character CRA is swung down to change from the white spherical variation icon 9C to the yellow (gold) star variation icon 9C.

Then, as shown in FIG. 139(L), in the center of the display screen 7a, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are respectively in the forward (front) center advance positions of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Toward (toward each other) from the home position again (moving), and attached to the front end side of the left movable accessory 14L at the front (front) center position (advancing position (expanding position)) of the display screen 7a. The left side decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part, and the right side decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip side of the right movable accessory 14R, are united to form the left movable accessory. One decorative member (a united accessory) in which the left decorative portion of 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R have an annular shape is formed. At this time, the change icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

When the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form a united accessory having a ring shape, an image display corresponding to the circular area formed in the ring shape is formed. The ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7. With the appearance of the left movable accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R, and the ally character CRA displayed in the circular area, it is possible to inform the player that the jackpot is a big hit.

When a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a, the ally character CRA disappears from the display screen 7a, and the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are separated from each other. In the direction, the left movable accessory 14L retreats (moves) from the advance position at the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a, and the right movable accessory. 14R retreats (moves) from the advance position in the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a toward the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 139(M), the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are respectively arranged at the center positions of the respective variable areas, and the number "6" is lined up on the horizontal line and is temporarily stopped. To be done. At this time, the intermediate decoration pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with a number different from the number "6", and when stopped and displayed, it is lost. Then, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the hold icon 9A displayed in the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd. When it becomes the variation icon 9C, variation effect (variation display) by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R is performed.

Subsequently to FIG. 139(M), when the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are stopped and displayed with the number "6", it is a big hit. When the jackpot game (jackpot effect) is started and finished, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the hold icon 9A displayed in the first hold display position 9Ad. When is moved to the variation display position 9Cd and becomes the variation icon 9C, variation effect (variation display) by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R is performed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the specific area variable effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, an image display device capable of displaying a plurality of types of images in the specific area variable effect A in FIG. 137, the specific area variable effect B in FIG. 138, and the specific area variable effect C in FIG. 139. 7 (display means), and in the first specific region to the third specific region (specific region) surrounded by a plurality of vertex images (a plurality of first effect images), the middle decorative pattern 8C or the ally character CRA (second). 137 (E) to (K) in the specific area variable effect A, and 138 (C), (E), (G) in the specific area variable effect B, the specific area capable of displaying the effect image 139 (C), (E), (G), (H)) can be executed in the variable effect C. According to this configuration, the image display device 7 (display unit) is purposefully formed with the first specific region to the third specific region (specific region) surrounded by the plurality of vertex images (the plurality of first effect images). By displaying the middle decoration pattern 8C or the ally character CRA (second effect image) in the formed first to third specific areas (specific areas), the player has an unprecedented novel effect. Can be provided. Therefore, interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the specific area variable effect A of FIG. 137, the specific area variable effect B of FIG. 138, and the specific area variable effect C of FIG. 139, a plurality of vertex images (a plurality of first effect images ), the size of the first specific region to the third specific region (specific region) increases. Even if the number of the plurality of vertex images (the plurality of first effect images) is the same, if the positions where the plurality of vertex images (the plurality of first effect images) are arranged are different, the size of the specific area becomes small. , It may become large. For this reason, even if the number of a plurality of vertex images (a plurality of first effect images) increases, the size of the specific area may decrease, and the sense of expectation for the effect may decrease. Therefore, when the number of a plurality of vertex images (a plurality of first effect images) is increased, the size of the specific region is increased, which can contribute to a reduction in the sense of expectation for the effect. ..

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the specific area variable effect A of FIG. 137, the specific area variable effect B of FIG. 138, and the specific area variable effect C of FIG. 139, a plurality of vertex images (a plurality of first effect images As the number of )increases, the degree of expectation of winning increases. According to this configuration, by paying attention to the number of a plurality of vertex images (a plurality of first effect images), it is possible to emphasize the degree of expectation of winning in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the first effect in the specific area variable effect A of FIG. 137, the specific area variable effect B of FIG. 138, and the specific area variable effect C of FIG. 137(F) to (K), FIG. 138(C), (E), (G) in the specific area variable effect B, and FIG. 139(C), (E), (G) in the specific area variable effect C. , The middle decoration pattern 8C or the ally character CRA (second effect image) is unclearly displayed (an out-of-focus image (out-of-focus image)) in the first specific region to the third specific region (specific region). You can do it. According to this configuration, the middle decorative pattern 8C or the ally character CRA (the first specific region to the third specific region (specific region)) as an unclear image (an image out of focus (an out-of-focus image)) (2 effect images) can be displayed to draw attention to the player, so that the player can imagine what an unclear image looks like, and if another effect is performed after that, it becomes unclear. The player can find out the relation or law of the image and other effects.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the first effect in the specific area variable effect A in FIG. 137 and the specific area variable effect C in FIG. 139 (FIG. 137 (H) to (K) in the specific area variable effect A, In the specific area variable effect C in FIG. 139(H), after being surrounded by a plurality of vertex images (a plurality of first effect images), the specific area (in the specific area variable effect A, the third specific area, the specific area variable) is displayed. In the effect C, when the fourth specific area) is formed in a shape similar to the circular shape, the middle decoration pattern 8C or the ally character CRA (second effect image) is clearly (an in-focus image (an unfocused image). )) can be displayed in a specific area. According to this configuration, when the specific area surrounded by the plurality of vertex images (the plurality of first effect images) is formed as a polygonal area, it is thereafter formed into a shape similar to a circular shape, Let the player pay attention to the change from a straight line by a polygon to a smooth curve, and change the image of the middle decorative pattern 8C or the ally character CRA (second effect image) displayed in the specific area (for example, unclear). An image (change from an out-of-focus image (out-of-focus image)) to a clear image (in-focus image (out-of-focus image)) can be easily recognized.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the first effect in the specific area variable effect A in FIG. 137, the specific area variable effect B in FIG. 138, and the specific area variable effect C in FIG. 137(E), (G), FIG. 138(B), (D), (F) for the specific area variable effect B, and FIG. 139(B), (D), (F)) for the specific area variable effect C. After moving a plurality of vertex images (a plurality of first effect images) in a predetermined direction, they can be temporarily stopped and displayed. According to this configuration, after a plurality of vertex images (a plurality of first effect images) appear, the first vertex surrounded by the plurality of vertex images (a plurality of first effect images) is moved in a predetermined direction. Specific region to third specific region (specific region) can be suggested.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the specific area variable effect A of FIG. 137 and the specific area variable effect C of FIG. 139, the first movable accessory that can appear in front of the image display device 7 (display means). 14 (movable body), the first effect (FIG. 137(E) to (K) for the specific area variable effect A, and FIG. 139(C), (E), (G) for the specific area variable effect C). (H)), a second effect (specific region variable) in which a plurality of vertex images (a plurality of first effect images) and the middle decoration pattern 8C or ally character CRA (second effect image) are erased to move the movable body 137(L) can be executed in the effect A, and FIG. 139(L) can be executed in the specific area variable effect C. According to this configuration, the action of the first movable accessory 14 (movable body), that is, the left movable accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R, and the ally character CRA displayed in the circular area, results in a jackpot. Can be conveyed to the player.

[Effect 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the first effect in the specific area variable effect B of FIG. 138 and the specific area variable effect C of FIG. 139 (FIG. 138(C), (E), in the specific area variable effect B). 139 ((C), (E), and (G)) in (G) and specific region variable effect C, a straight line RG (line) connecting the vertex images (a plurality of first effect images) is displayed on the display screen 7a. According to this structure, the first specific region to the third specific region (specific) formed by the straight line RG (line) connecting the vertex images (the plurality of first effect images) are formed. (Area) can be emphasized in an easily understandable manner.

[Effect 9]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the first effect in the specific area variable effect B of FIG. 138 and the specific area variable effect C of FIG. 139 (FIG. 138(D) to (G) in the specific area variable effect B, 139(B) to (G) in the specific area variable effect C, the number of vertex images (a plurality of first effect images) is increased, so that the corners of the polygon are increased. 138(C) in the specific area variable effect B, three polygonal corners are shown in FIG. 138(E) in the specific area variable effect B, and four polygonal corners are shown in FIG. 138(G) in the specific area variable effect B. In (), the polygon has five corners, and the number of vertex images (a plurality of first effect images) increases, so that the number of polygon corners increases. Also, in FIG. 139(C) in the specific area variable effect C, three polygonal corners are shown in FIG. 139(E) in the specific area variable effect C, and four polygonal corners are shown in FIG. 139 in the specific area variable effect C. In (G), the polygon has five corners, and the number of vertex images (a plurality of first effect images) increases, so the number of polygon corners increases. According to this configuration, the number of the corners of the polygon increases as the number of vertex images (the plurality of first effect images) increases, so that the number of corners of the polygon can be focused.

[Modification]
The following is a modification of the specific area variable effect.
[Modification 1]
The specific area variable effect A in FIG. 137, the specific area variable effect B in FIG. 138, and the specific area variable effect C in FIG. 139 are performed based on the game ball entering the first starting opening 20. .. In other words, it was performed in a so-called left-handed gaming state. However, it may be performed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second starting opening 21. In other words, it may be performed in a so-called right-handed gaming state.

[Modification 2]
The first effect in the specific area variable effect B of FIG. 138 and the specific area variable effect C of FIG. 139 (FIGS. 138(C), (E), and (G) in the specific area variable effect B, and the figure in the specific area variable effect C) 139(C), (E), (G)), the ally character CRA (second effect image) is unclear (an image out of focus (an out-of-focus image)) in the first specific region to the third region. It was displayed in a specific area (specific area). However, another image may be used instead of the ally character CRA. For example, when there are a plurality of enemy characters, the first specific area to the third specific area are displayed in a step-up display mode based on the degree of expectation that the enemy character fighting the teammate character CRA is set. You may make it display in order. Further, instead of the ally character CRA, an image of an icon of the variable icon 9C that can be changed, an image of an icon that can change the hold icon 9A, an image of an icon that gives notice of the occurrence of pseudo-link, and a notice effect It may be an image of an icon that gives advance notice of the occurrence. By doing so, it is possible to increase the variation of the production.

[Modification 3]
The first effect in the specific area variable effect A of FIG. 137, the specific area variable effect B of FIG. 138, and the specific area variable effect C of FIG. 139 (FIG. 137(F) to (K), specific area in the specific area variable effect A. 138 (C), (E), (G) in the variable effect B, and 139 (C), (E), (G) in the specific area variable effect C, in the medium decorative pattern 8C or the ally character CRA (No. The two effect images are displayed unclearly (an image out of focus (an out-of-focus image)) in the first specific region to the third specific region (specific region). However, a specific portion of the middle decoration pattern 8C or the ally character CRA (second effect image) is made unclear (an image which is out of focus (out of focus image)) and other portions are clear (an in-focus image (out of focus image). It may be an image that is not). In addition, the sub-control board 90 may perform the lottery independently, and when the winning is achieved, the middle decoration pattern 8C or the ally character CRA (second effect image) may be made clear. By doing so, it is possible to increase the variation of the production.

[Modification 4]
The first effect in the specific area variable effect A of FIG. 137 and the specific area variable effect C of FIG. 139 (FIG. 137(H) to (K) in the specific area variable effect A, and FIG. 139(H) in the specific area variable effect C). ), a specific area (the third specific area in the specific area variable effect A and the fourth specific area in the specific area variable effect C) is circled after being surrounded by a plurality of vertex images (a plurality of first effect images). When the shape is similar to the shape, the middle decoration pattern 8C or the ally character CRA (second effect image) is displayed clearly (an in-focus image (an image that is not out of focus)) in a specific area. However, a specific portion of the middle decoration pattern 8C or the ally character CRA (second effect image) is made unclear (an image which is out of focus (out of focus image)) and other portions are clear (an in-focus image (out of focus image). It may be an image that is not). In addition, the sub-control board 90 may perform the lottery independently, and when the winning is achieved, the middle decoration pattern 8C or the ally character CRA (second effect image) may be made unclear. By doing so, it is possible to increase the variation of the production.

[Modification 5]
The first effect in the specific area variable effect A of FIG. 137, the specific area variable effect B of FIG. 138, and the specific area variable effect C of FIG. 139 (FIG. 137(E), (G), specific area in the specific area variable effect A. 138 (B), (D), (F) in the variable effect B, and 139 (B), (D), (F) in the specific area variable effect C, in the plurality of vertex images (the plurality of first effects). Image) was moved in a predetermined direction and then temporarily stopped. However, the plurality of vertex images (the plurality of first effect images) may be temporarily stopped and displayed after appearing on the display screen 7a without moving in the predetermined direction. By doing so, it is possible to increase the variation of the production. As the planned direction, it may be moved in one direction, may be moved in one direction and then moved in the opposite direction, or may be rotated clockwise or counterclockwise (clockwise). Direction and then counterclockwise rotation, counterclockwise and clockwise rotation again), zigzag movement, or a combination of these May be Note that the sub-control board 90 may perform a lottery independently, and if it is won, it may move in a predetermined direction and then a temporary stop display may be displayed.

[Modification 6]
In the specific area variable effect A of FIG. 137, the specific area variable effect B of FIG. 138, and the specific area variable effect C of FIG. 139, the first movable auditors 14 (that can appear on the front side of the image display device 7 (display means) ( 139 (C), (E), (G), and (H) in the first effect (specific area variable effect A, FIG. 137(F) to (K), and in specific area variable effect C). )), a second effect (specific area variable effect A) in which a plurality of vertex images (a plurality of first effect images) and the middle decoration pattern 8C or the ally character CRA (second effect image) are erased to move the movable body 137 (L), and in the specific area variable effect C, FIG. 139 (L). However, since the first movable accessory 14 (movable body) appears on the front side of the image display device 7 (display means), the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are respectively arranged in the image display device 7. While advancing (moving) from the home position toward the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a (in the direction toward each other), it does not appear on the front (front) of the display screen 7a You may return to the home position again. In this case, a plurality of vertex images (a plurality of first effect images) and the middle decoration pattern 8C or the ally character CRA (second effect image) do not disappear from the display screen 7a, and the variable effect (variable display) proceeds. Become. By doing so, it is possible to increase the variation of the production.

[Modification 7]
In the specific area variable effect A of FIG. 137, the specific area variable effect B of FIG. 138, and the specific area variable effect C of FIG. The second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the starting opening 21 is arranged and displayed as a numeral not shown in the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Since these numbers are displayed as the number of holding balls as numerical values, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish them by being confused with various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, since the image is arranged on the forefront side of the display screen 7a and the other image is displayed behind the foreground of the display screen 7a, the visibility is not hindered by the other image. It was In the present embodiment, when the specific region variable effect is started, a plurality of vertex images (a plurality of first effect images) are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. This may cause the player to misunderstand that the number (the number of reserved balls) arranged and displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a is the number of a plurality of vertex images (a plurality of first effect images). Therefore, in place of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, one of the sub display screens 64 (the right sub display screen 64R, the left sub display screen 64L, and the upper sub display screen 64U is displayed (for example, On the right sub-display screen 64R)), a number displayed with the number of holding balls described above as a numerical value may be displayed. By doing this, the number displayed as the number of holding balls is not misunderstood by the player as the number of a plurality of vertex images (a plurality of first effect images), and the number of holding balls is further reduced. The numerical value displayed as a numerical value can be made difficult to be easily discriminated by being mixed with various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and can be intuitively understood.

[Modification 8]
In the specific area variable effect A of FIG. 137, the specific area variable effect B of FIG. 138, and the specific area variable effect C of FIG. It may be a stereoscopic image. The straight line RG may be a two-dimensional image or a three-dimensional image. The teammate character CRA (second effect image) may be a two-dimensional image or a three-dimensional image. Further, the sub-control board 90 may independently perform a lottery on these images to determine one of a two-dimensional image and a three-dimensional image. By doing so, it is possible to increase the variation of the production.

[Modification 9]
The first effect in the specific area variable effect A of FIG. 137, the specific area variable effect B of FIG. 138, and the specific area variable effect C of FIG. 139 (FIG. 137(F) to (K), specific area in the specific area variable effect A. 138 (C), (E), (G) in the variable effect B, and 139 (C), (E), (G) in the specific area variable effect C, in the medium decorative pattern 8C or the ally character CRA (No. The two effect images are displayed unclearly (an image out of focus (an out-of-focus image)) in the first specific region to the third specific region (specific region). However, the middle decoration pattern 8C or the ally character CRA (second effect image) may not be displayed at all on the display screen 7a, or the middle decoration pattern 8C or the ally character CRA (second effect image) may be displayed for a predetermined period (for example, (3 seconds) may not be displayed on the display screen 7a. In addition, the sub-control board 90 may independently perform the lottery to determine whether to display or not display the middle decoration pattern 8C or the ally character CRA (second effect image). By doing so, it is possible to increase the variation of the production.

[Modification 10]
In the specific area variable effect A of FIG. 137, the specific area variable effect B of FIG. 138, and the specific area variable effect C of FIG. 139, unclear images are out of focus (out of focus images). As a method of expressing an image that is out of focus, it may be one that undulates and sways like a wave, or one that sways slightly like a heat haze. In this case, it may be a still image or a moving image. By doing so, it is possible to increase the variation of the production.

[Modification 11]
137. The specific area variable effect A of FIG. 137, the specific area variable effect B of FIG. 138, and the specific area variable effect C of FIG. May be.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Mode D6-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
It is possible to execute a first effect capable of displaying a second effect image in a specific area surrounded by a plurality of first effect images.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Mode D6-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect D6-1,
As the number of the plurality of first effect images increases, the size of the specific area increases.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Mode D6-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect D6-1 or aspect D6-2,
As the number of the plurality of first effect images increases, the expectation of winning increases,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Mode D6-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D6-1 to D6-3,
In the first effect, the second effect image may be unclearly displayed in the specific area,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Mode D6-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D6-1 to D6-4,
In the first effect, when the specific area is formed into a shape similar to a circular shape after being surrounded by the plurality of first effect images, the second effect image is clearly displayed in the specific area. Sometimes,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D6-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D6-1 to D6-5,
In the first effect, the plurality of first effect images may be temporarily stopped and displayed after being moved in a predetermined direction.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D6-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D6-1 to D6-6,
Having a movable body that can appear on the front side of the display means,
After the first effect, it is possible to execute a second effect in which the plurality of first effect images and the second effect image are erased and the movable body is operated.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Mode D6-8]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D6-1 to D6-7,
In the first effect, a line connecting the plurality of first effect images is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Mode D6-9]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D6-1 to D6-8,
In the first effect, the number of the plurality of first effect images increases, so that the number of corners of the polygon increases.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The reliability change effects A and B will be described below with reference to FIGS. 140 to 142. 141 and 142, for example, the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and other movable accessory disposed around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are easy to see in the drawings. Therefore, it is omitted.

This reliability change effect is performed during the variable effect (during the variable display) by the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (for example, variation effect start command) received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the reliability change effect, the corresponding image from the ROM 103 is included. The data is read and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Here, first, the reliability in individual appearance and double appearance by each character appearing in the reliability change effect will be described, and the reliability change effect A and the reliability change effect B will be sequentially described.

[Reliability in single appearance and double appearance by each character]
The reliability of individual appearance and double appearance by each character will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 140 is a diagram for explaining the reliability of each character in single appearance and double appearance.

In the reliability change effect, a single character that appears alone can destroy the multiple balloons that cover the cards on which the winning/winning results are displayed, or a specific character appears in addition to the character that appears alone. ), and the reliability that is the expectation of the jackpot is different.

First, the "character" includes not only symbols such as a cross mark, a circle mark, a square mark, a heart mark, and a star mark, but also balloons, characters, etc. Here, as characters belonging to the first group, A cross mark, a circle mark, a square mark, a heart mark, and a star mark, and a balloon that does not belong to the first group.

In addition, the above-mentioned characters that appear independently are characters that belong to the first group and are a cross mark, a circle mark, a triangle mark, a square mark, and a heart mark. The star mark does not appear independently, and as a specific character, Destroy multiple balloons (characters that do not belong to the first group) by double (joint) with the character that appears in.

The reliability (that is, the reliability at the time of a single attack) when the cross mark, the circle mark, the triangle mark, the square mark, and the heart mark, which are the characters belonging to the first group, appear independently is as shown in FIG. 140(A). The cross mark is 8%, the round mark is 16%, the triangle mark is 12%, the square mark is 15%, and the heart mark is 50%. If the heart mark appears alone, the reliability is already high. As much as 50%.

In addition to the single appearance of the cross mark, circle mark, triangle mark, square mark, and heart mark, which are characters belonging to the first group, the reliability in the case of a double appearance of a star character that is a specific character (that is, during double attack). As shown in FIG. 140(B), the reliability is 18% for the cross mark (up 10% from the individual time), 23% for the circle mark (7% up from the single time), and 42% for the triangular mark (individual time). 30% up), 55% for the square mark (40% up from the stand alone) and 47% for the heart mark (3% down from the stand alone). When the star mark that is the specific character appears in double (joint), the reliability is 7% to 40% higher than when it appears alone.

On the other hand, in the case of the heart mark only, when the star mark that is the specific character appears in double (joint), the reliability is 3% lower than when it appears alone. Furthermore, when the heart mark appears alone, it has the highest degree of reliability, and when the square mark appears alone, it has the second highest degree of reliability, but double (joint) with the specific character. When they appear, the reliability of the square mark and the star mark that is the specific character is the highest, and the reliability of the heart mark and the star mark that is the specific character is the second highest. , The rank with high reliability is reversed in the case where the character appears double (jointly) with the specific character.

In this way, in addition to the cross mark, circle mark, triangle mark, and square mark appearing independently, when the star character that is the specific character appears in double (joint), the cross mark, circle mark, triangle mark, and square mark The reliability is higher than that when it appears alone, and exceptionally, only the heart mark and the case where the star character that is the specific character appears in double (joint) appears independently. Is less reliable than. As a result, basically, the reliability increases when the star mark that is the specific character appears, so that the player can expect an increase in the reliability of the production by the appearance of the star mark that is the specific character. It is possible to find the relevance and the law of the degree of expectation in the appearance of the mark, the triangular mark, the square mark, and the heart mark, and the star mark that is the specific character.

[Reliability change effect A]
Next, the reliability change effect A will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 141 is a diagram for explaining the reliability change effect A. The reliability change effect A is performed during the variable effect (during the variable display) by the decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 141(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative design 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative design 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen. In each variable region from the upper side to the lower side of 7a, the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (symbol: number "1" to number "9") is started in a display mode in which the reel is rotated. ..

When the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative design is started, the display of the decorative design that is stopped and displayed changes from the opaque state to the translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed to the high speed display mode. .. Thereby, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semitransparent decorative pattern which is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped). Note that the decorative pattern is in a display mode in which the decorative pattern moves in small increments in the vertical direction when the temporary stop display is performed.

The variation icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, which are currently changing as the end of the first special map reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (on the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (on the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad from the position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The reserved display positions 9Ad are arranged and displayed linearly along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

Here, a white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, a white spherical retention icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and second hold display positions 9Ad to fourth hold are displayed. The hold icon is not displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one stocked icon that has not been digested for the hold icon. In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting opening 20 and the second starting opening 21.

In addition, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbol, is supported. In addition to the hold icon 9A, which corresponds to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 The special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21 are arranged and displayed as unillustrated numbers on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 is shown in blue on the left side, and the number of the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21 is shown in red. The numbers are arranged on the upper side of the center of the display screen 7a so as to be spaced apart from each other on the right side and are always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as the number of reserved balls as numerical values, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and it is easy to intuitively understand. Note that these numbers are arranged on the forefront side of the display screen 7a and other images are displayed behind the foreground of the display screen 7a so that visibility is not hindered by the other images. It is like this.

Here, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “icon”) will be briefly described. Due to the difference in shape and color, the difference in expectation in winning in the lottery corresponding to the icon. Is represented. For example, of the four icons, a yellow (gold) star icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest likelihood of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hit, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hit, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hit. The smile sphere icon is further set to have a high expectation of being a jackpot in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (Rainbow (hit jackpot)).

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative design is started in FIG. 141(A), after that, although not shown, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are provisionally the same design (for example, the number "5"). A stop is displayed and a reach is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 141(B), the reliability change effect A is started, the cross mark GZ1 belonging to the first group is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and appears independently, and "to the right of the cross mark GZ1. A message MS "X mark" is displayed. Since the cross mark GZ1 appears alone, the reliability shown in FIG. 140(A) is 8%. At this time, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R in the variable effect (during variable display) disappear from the display screen 7a, and further, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A also. It disappears from the display screen 7a. In other words, among the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, the right decorative design 8R, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, the change icon 9C and the hold icon 9A, only the change icon 9C is displayed on the display screen 7a. It will be displayed. Note that, here, the change icon 9C remains as a white spherical icon, and there is no change to another icon.

After that, when the cross mark GZ1 and the message MS disappear from the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 141(C), a double attack chance icon TG having a rhombus shape having a character of double attack chance flashes in the center of the display screen 7a. It appears and appears in the form of emitting FH and approaching from the back to the front while blinking. At this time, the flashing light FH is arranged and displayed behind the fluctuation icon 9C, and the fluctuation icon 9C is not covered by the flashing light FH and visibility is not impaired. This double attack chance icon TG indicates the appearance of a star mark which is a specific character in addition to the cross mark GZ1.

When the double attack chance icon TG blinks and disappears from the display screen 7a while approaching from the rear to the front, the flash FH also disappears from the display screen 7a, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 141(D), the left decorative pattern 8L. Is stopped and displayed with the number "5", the middle decorative design 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "6", and the right decorative design 8R is stopped and displayed with the number "5", so that it is lost. At this time, the change display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the change icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a when the change effect (change display) ends. As a result, the reliability change effect A ends. Subsequently, the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd to become the change icon 9C, and the change effect by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R (Variable display) will be started.

On the other hand, when the double attack chance icon TG flashes from rear to front again following FIG. 141(C), as shown in FIG. 141(E), a left movable accessory 14L and a right movable accessory 14R are displayed. Move (moves) from the home position toward the center (front side) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (toward each other), and move to the center (front side) of the display screen 7a (front side). At the position (deployment position), the left side decoration part which is half of the ring-shaped decoration part attached to the tip side of the left side movable accessory 14L and the ring-shaped decoration attached to the tip side of the right side movable accessory 14R. The right decorative portion, which is a half of the portion, is united, and one decorative member (a united accessory) in which the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R have an annular shape is formed. It

When the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form a united accessory having a ring shape, the area formed in the ring has a circular shape ( Hereinafter, it is referred to as a "circular area"). A smile image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area. At this time, the white spherical variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

When the first predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the smile image is displayed on the display screen 7a, the smile image disappears from the display screen 7a, and the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are separated from each other. The left movable accessory 14L moves backward from the advanced position in the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a, and the right movable accessory. The object 14R moves backward (moves) from the advance position in the center of the front surface (front side) of the display screen 7a toward the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a.

Then, as shown in FIG. 141(F), a star mark GZ2 belonging to the first group is emitted and displayed by emitting a flash FH in the center of the display screen 7a, and is called a "star mark" to the right of the star mark GZ2. The message MS is displayed. With the appearance of the star mark GZ2, the cross mark GZ1 and the star mark GZ2 are doubled (joint), and the reliability shown in FIG. 140(B) is 18% (up 10% from the single time).

When a second predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) longer than the first predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the star mark GZ2 was displayed on the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 141(G). Appears by arranging and displaying a plurality of balloons GZ4 on the left side of the display screen 7a. At this time, the star mark GZ2 which is the specific character is arranged and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a, and the reliability image KDG indicating the reliability is arranged and displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a.

The reliability image KDG shows the reliability that the winning result displayed on the card by defeating the balloon by double (joint) the cross mark GZ1 and the star mark GZ2 which is the specific character is a win. The reliability image KDG indicates this reliability by ranking it in five levels, and indicates the number of black circle images out of the five white circle images and half white circles and half white circles (hereinafter referred to as “half black circles”). And suggests. Here, as the reliability image KDG, “expectation degree” is shown in the figure, but it means “reliability”, and there are three black circle images, and the expectation degree (after trust) has five levels. Among them, it is suggested that it is level 3.

Subsequently, first, when lightning is emitted from the star character GZ2, which is a specific character, toward the plurality of balloons GZ4 to start defeating, as shown in FIG. 141(H), the cross mark GZ1 also emits lightning toward the plurality of balloons GZ4. And start destroying.

When the plurality of balloons GZ4 are destroyed, the smoke due to the blast gradually disappears and the card appears, and when the winning result displayed on the card is a hit, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are the same. It will be stopped and displayed as a design (number "5"), and it will be a big hit. As a result, the reliability change effect A ends. After that, the big hit game (big hit production) is started. When the jackpot game (jackpot effect) is finished, the variation display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variation icon 9C is displayed on the display screen with the end of the variation effect (variation display). It disappears from 7a. Subsequently, the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd to become the change icon 9C, and the change effect by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R (Variable display) will be started.

On the other hand, when the winning result displayed on the card is wrong, the left decorative design 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "5", the middle decorative design 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "6", and the right decorative design 8R. Is stopped by the number "5", and it is lost. At this time, the change display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the change icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a when the change effect (change display) ends. As a result, the reliability change effect A ends. Subsequently, the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd to become the change icon 9C, and the change effect by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R (Variable display) will be started.

Thus, in the reliability change effect A, the cross mark GZ1 belonging to the first group is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a and appears independently. At this point, the reliability is 8%. After that, the star mark GZ2 belonging to the first group emits a flash FH and is displayed and appears in the center of the display screen 7a. The appearance of the star mark GZ2 makes a double (joint) of the cross mark GZ1 and the star mark GZ2. As a result, the reliability is 18% (up 10% from the single time).

[Reliability change effect B]
Next, the reliability change effect B will be described with reference to FIG. 142. FIG. 142 is a diagram for explaining the reliability change effect B. The reliability change effect B is performed during the variable effect (during the variable display) by the decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 142(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative design 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative design 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen. In each variable region from the upper side to the lower side of 7a, the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (symbol: number "1" to number "9") is started in a display mode in which the reel is rotated. ..

When the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative design is started, the display of the decorative design that is stopped and displayed changes from the opaque state to the translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed to the high speed display mode. .. Thereby, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semitransparent decorative pattern which is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped). Note that the decorative pattern is in a display mode in which the decorative pattern moves in small increments in the vertical direction when the temporary stop display is performed.

The variation icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, which are currently changing as the end of the first special map reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (on the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (on the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad from the position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The reserved display positions 9Ad are arranged and displayed linearly along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

Here, a white spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, a white spherical retention icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and second hold display positions 9Ad to fourth hold are displayed. The hold icon is not displayed at the display position 9Ad. In other words, there is only one stocked icon that has not been digested for the hold icon. In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting opening 20 and the second starting opening 21.

In addition, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbol, is supported. In addition to the hold icon 9A, which corresponds to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 The special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21 are arranged and displayed as unillustrated numbers on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 is shown in blue on the left side, and the number of the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21 is shown in red. The numbers are arranged on the upper side of the center of the display screen 7a so as to be spaced apart from each other on the right side and are always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as the number of reserved balls as numerical values, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and it is easy to intuitively understand. Note that these numbers are arranged on the forefront side of the display screen 7a and other images are displayed behind the foreground of the display screen 7a so that visibility is not hindered by the other images. It is like this.

Here, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “icon”) will be briefly described. Due to the difference in shape and color, the difference in expectation in winning in the lottery corresponding to the icon. Is represented. For example, of the four icons, a yellow (gold) star icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest likelihood of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hit, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hit, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hit. The smile sphere icon is further set to have a high expectation of being a jackpot in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (Rainbow (hit jackpot)).

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative design is started in FIG. 142(A), thereafter, although not shown, the left decorative design 8L and the right decorative design 8R are provisionally the same design (for example, the number "5"). A stop is displayed and a reach is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 142(B), the reliability change effect B is started, the heart mark GZ3 belonging to the first group is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a and appears independently, and this heart mark GZ3 is alone. 140A, the reliability shown in FIG. 140A is 50%. A message MS "heart mark" is displayed to the right of the heart mark GZ3. At this time, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R in the variable effect (during variable display) disappear from the display screen 7a, and further, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A also. It disappears from the display screen 7a. In other words, among the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, the right decorative design 8R, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, the change icon 9C and the hold icon 9A, only the change icon 9C is displayed on the display screen 7a. It will be displayed. In addition, here, the variation icon 9C is changed from a white spherical icon to an icon of a smiling sphere having a red color.

After that, when the heart mark GZ3 and the message MS disappear from the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 142(C), a double attack chance icon TG having a rhombus shape having a character of double attack chance is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. A flashing light FH is emitted, and it is displayed and appears in a manner approaching from the rear to the front while blinking. At this time, the flashing light FH is arranged and displayed behind the fluctuation icon 9C, and the fluctuation icon 9C is not covered by the flashing light FH and visibility is not impaired. This double attack chance icon TG indicates the appearance of a star mark, which is a specific character, in addition to the heart mark GZ3.

When the double attack chance icon TG flashes and disappears from the display screen 7a while approaching from the rear to the front, the flash FH also disappears from the display screen 7a, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 142(D), the left decorative pattern 8L. Is stopped and displayed with the number "5", the middle decorative design 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "6", and the right decorative design 8R is stopped and displayed with the number "5", so that it is lost. At this time, the change display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the change icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a when the change effect (change display) ends. As a result, the reliability change effect B ends. Subsequently, the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd to become the change icon 9C, and the change effect by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R (Variable display) will be started.

On the other hand, when the double attack chance icon TG flashes from rear to front again following FIG. 142(C), as shown in FIG. 142(E), a left movable accessory 14L and a right movable accessory 14R are displayed. Move (moves) from the home position toward the center (front side) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (toward each other), and move to the center (front side) of the display screen 7a (front side). At the position (deployment position), the left side decoration part which is half of the ring-shaped decoration part attached to the tip side of the left side movable accessory 14L and the ring-shaped decoration attached to the tip side of the right side movable accessory 14R. The right decorative portion, which is a half of the portion, is united, and one decorative member (a united accessory) in which the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R have an annular shape is formed. It

When the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form a united accessory having a ring shape, the area formed in the ring has a circular shape ( Hereinafter, it is referred to as a "circular area"). A smile image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area. At this time, the change icon 9C of the red smiling sphere disappears from the display screen 7a.

When the first predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the smile image is displayed on the display screen 7a, the smile image disappears from the display screen 7a, and the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are separated from each other. The left movable accessory 14L moves backward from the advanced position in the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a, and the right movable accessory. The object 14R moves backward (moves) from the advance position in the center of the front surface (front side) of the display screen 7a toward the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a.

Then, as shown in FIG. 142(F), a star mark GZ2 belonging to the first group is emitted and displayed by flashing FH in the center of the display screen 7a, and is called a "star mark" to the right of the star mark GZ2. The message MS is displayed. The appearance of the star mark GZ2 makes the heart mark GZ3 and the star mark GZ2 double (joint), and the reliability shown in FIG. 140(B) is 47% (3% down from the single time).

When a second predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) longer than the first predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the star mark GZ2 was displayed on the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 142(G). Appears by arranging and displaying a plurality of balloons GZ4 on the left side of the display screen 7a. At this time, the star mark GZ2 which is the specific character is arranged and displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a, and the reliability image KDG indicating the reliability is arranged and displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a.

The reliability image KDG shows the reliability that the winning result displayed on the card by defeating the balloon by double (joint) the heart mark GZ3 and the star mark GZ2 which is the specific character is a win. The reliability image KDG indicates this reliability by ranking it in five levels, and indicates the number of black circle images out of the five white circle images and half white circles and half white circles (hereinafter referred to as “half black circles”). And suggests. Here, the reliability image KDG is shown as “expectation degree” in the figure, but it means “reliability”, and there are three black circle images and one half black circle. ) Indicates that the level is 3.5 out of 5 levels, which is an intermediate level between level 3 and level 4.

Subsequently, first, when lightning is emitted from the star character GZ2, which is the specific character, toward the plurality of balloons GZ4 and the destruction is started, as shown in FIG. 142(H), the heart mark GZ3 also emits lightning toward the plurality of balloons GZ4. Emitted to start destroying.

When the plurality of balloons GZ4 are destroyed, the smoke due to the blast gradually disappears and the card appears, and when the winning result displayed on the card is a hit, the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C and the right decorative design 8R are the same. It will be stopped and displayed as a design (number "5"), and it will be a big hit. As a result, the reliability change effect B ends. After that, the big hit game (big hit production) is started. When the jackpot game (jackpot effect) is finished, the variation display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the variation icon 9C is displayed on the display screen with the end of the variation effect (variation display). It disappears from 7a. Subsequently, the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd to become the change icon 9C, and the change effect by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R (Variable display) will be started.

On the other hand, when the winning result displayed on the card is wrong, the left decorative design 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "5", the middle decorative design 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "6", and the right decorative design 8R. Is stopped by the number "5", and it is lost. At this time, the change display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the change icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a when the change effect (change display) ends. As a result, the reliability change effect B ends. Subsequently, the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the change display position 9Cd to become the change icon 9C, and the change effect by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R (Variable display) will be started.

Thus, in the reliability change effect B, the heart mark GZ3 belonging to the first group is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a and appears independently. At this point, the reliability is 50%. After that, the star mark GZ2 belonging to the first group emits a flash FH and is displayed and appears in the center of the display screen 7a. When this star mark GZ2 appears, it becomes a double (joint) of the heart mark GZ3 and the star mark GZ2. As a result, the reliability is 47% (3% down from the single time).

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the reliability change effect is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the reliability change effect A of FIG. 141 and the reliability change effect B of FIG. 142, the image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying a plurality of types of images is provided, and a cross mark is provided. When the star mark GZ2 (second image) is displayed after GZ1 (first image) is displayed, the expectation of winning is high (the reliability is 18% (up from 10% alone)) , When the heart mark GZ3 (third image) is displayed and then the star mark GZ2 (second image) is displayed, the expectation of winning is low (the reliability is 47% (down from 3% by itself) )) First effect (FIGS. 141(A) to (C) and (D) for reliability change effect A, and FIG. 142(A) to (C) and (D) for reliability change effect B) are executed. You can do it. According to this configuration, even if the star mark GZ2 (second image) is displayed, the expectation degree of winning may be changed to a high value or may be changed to a low value. It is possible to provide the player with a novel effect of being changed by a combination with the mark GZ2 (second image). Therefore, interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first effect in the reliability change effect A of FIG. 141 and the reliability change effect B of FIG. 142, the cross mark GZ1 (first image) or the heart mark GZ3 (third image). Image), the variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, then the cross mark GZ1 (first image) or the heart mark GZ3 (third image) is hidden, and the variation The variable display position 9Cd of the icon 9C and the variable display position 9Cd can be hidden. With this configuration, even when the cross mark GZ1 (first image) or the heart mark GZ3 (third image) is changed from being displayed to being hidden, the change icon 9C is displayed. Therefore, whether or not the variable icon 9C changes to another icon can be noticed.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the first effect in the reliability change effect A of FIG. 141 and the reliability change effect B of FIG. The attack chance icon TG (specific image) can be displayed. According to this configuration, by displaying the double attack chance icon TG (specific image), it is possible to contribute to increasing the expectation that the star mark GZ2 (second image) will be displayed.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the reliability change effect A of FIG. 141 and the reliability change effect B of FIG. 142, the first movable accessory that can appear on the front side of the image display device 7 (display means). 14 (movable body), and in the first effect, the first movable accessory 14 (movable body) can be operated as an indication of the display of the star mark GZ2 (second image). .. According to this configuration, the feeling of expectation that the star mark GZ2 (second image) is displayed due to the operation of the first movable accessory 14 (movable body), that is, the appearance of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R. Can contribute to increasing the

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, after the first effect in the reliability change effect A of FIG. 141 and the reliability change effect B of FIG. 142, a plurality of star marks GZ2 (second image) are displayed. A second effect (in the reliability change effect A) that displays the balloon GZ4 (fourth image) and further displays the reliability image KDG (image of expectation per hit) by the star mark GZ2 (second image) In FIG. 141(E) and the reliability change effect B, FIG. 142(E) can be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible for the player to easily emphasize the suggestion that the production by the star mark GZ2 (second image) and the plurality of balloons GZ4 (fourth image) will be started. Further, since the reliability image KDG (image of expectation of winning) is displayed, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the reliability of this effect.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the second effect in the reliability change effect A of FIG. 141 and the reliability change effect B of FIG. 142, in addition to the plurality of balloons GZ4 (fourth image), cross marks When GZ1 (first image) and star mark GZ2 (second image) are displayed, or heart mark GZ3 (third image) and star mark GZ2 (second image) are displayed There are cases. According to this configuration, since the production is developed by double (joint) by the cross mark GZ1 (first image) and the star mark GZ2 (second image), in addition to the cross mark GZ1 (first image), Further, the participation of the star mark GZ2 (second image) in the effect can contribute to the mutual complementation of the cross mark GZ1 (first image) and the star mark GZ2 (second image). , A heart mark GZ3 (third image) and a star mark GZ2 (second image) are used to create a double (joint) effect, so in addition to the heart mark GZ3 (third image), a star mark is added. The participation in the effect by the GZ2 (second image) can contribute to the mutual enhancement of the heart mark GZ3 (third image) and the star mark GZ2 (second image).

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the reliability change effect A of FIG. 141 and the reliability change effect B of FIG. 142, the cross mark GZ1 (first image) is a cross mark or a circle mark that belongs to the first group. , Cross mark, square mark, heart mark and star mark (plural characters) excluding star mark (first character) and heart mark (second character), cross mark, circle mark, triangle mark and square mark (others) Character), a star mark GZ2 (second image) is a star mark (first character), a heart mark GZ3 (third image) is a heart mark (second character), The plurality of balloons GZ4 (fourth image) are characters that do not belong to the first group. According to this configuration, before the star mark (first character), which is the second image, is displayed, the first image, among the cross mark, the circle mark, the triangle mark, and the square mark (other characters), is displayed. When any one of the characters is displayed, the degree of expectation of winning is changed to a high value, whereas before the star mark (first character), which is the second image, is displayed, it is displayed in the third image. When a certain heart mark (second character) is displayed, the degree of expectation of winning is changed to be low, and the first character, the second character, and another character belong to the same first group. Although it is a thing, before the star mark (first character) which is the second image is displayed, it is possible to change the expectation degree of the hit depending on what kind of character is displayed. There is. Further, although the plurality of balloons GZ4 (fourth image) are characters that do not belong to the first group, they can contribute to finding out the relationship with the characters belonging to the first group by the player himself.

[Modification]
The following is a modification of the reliability change effect.
[Modification 1]
The reliability change effect A in FIG. 141 and the reliability change effect B in FIG. 142 are performed based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first starting opening 20. In other words, it was performed in a so-called left-handed gaming state. However, it may be performed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second starting opening 21. In other words, it may be performed in a so-called right-handed gaming state.

[Modification 2]
In the reliability change effect A in FIG. 141 and the reliability change effect B in FIG. 142, the characters belonging to the first group are a cross mark, a circle mark, a triangle mark, a square mark, a heart mark and a star mark. Instead, it may be a character. For example, as the characters belonging to the first group, a teammate character A is used instead of the cross mark, a teammate character B is used instead of the circle mark, a teammate character C is used instead of the triangle mark, a teammate character D is used instead of the square mark, and a heart mark is replaced. And an ally character E and a star mark as an ally character F. If the reliability in this case is the same as in FIGS. 140(A) and 140(B), the ally changed from the star mark GZ2 after the ally character A (first image) changed from the cross mark GZ1 is displayed. When the character F (second image) is displayed, the expectation of winning is high (the reliability is 18% (10% higher than when alone)), and the ally character E (the third character) replaced from the heart mark GZ3 is displayed. When the ally character F (second image) replaced with the star mark GZ2 is displayed after the (image) is displayed, the expectation of winning is low (the reliability is 47% (down from 3% when alone)). .. By doing this, it is possible to increase the variation of production.

Although the balloon is used as the character that does not belong to the first group, a different character who belongs to the first group may be used instead of the balloon. In this case, there may be a plurality of characters. For example, the characters that do not belong to the first group are the enemy character A, the enemy character B, the enemy character C, the enemy character D, and the enemy character E. Then, an effect in which the ally character A and the enemy character A are associated with each other, an effect in which the ally character B and the enemy character B are associated with each other, and an effect in which the ally character C and the enemy character C are associated with each other are performed, The effect in which the ally character D and the enemy character D are associated is performed, and the effect in which the ally character E and the enemy character E are associated are performed. If the reliability in this case is the same as in FIGS. 140A and 140B, the ally character F appears as a double (joint) with the ally character A to the ally character E, and repels the enemy character. This means that after the ally character A (first image) replaced with the cross mark GZ1 is displayed, a performance in which the ally character A (first image) and the enemy character A (fourth image) are associated with each other is performed. When the ally character F (second image) replaced with the star mark GZ2 is displayed, the expectation of winning is high (reliability is 18% (up from 10% alone)) and from the heart mark GZ3. After the replaced ally character E (third image) is displayed, an effect in which the ally character E (third image) and the enemy character E (fourth image) are associated with each other is performed, and the star mark GZ2 is displayed. When the replaced ally character F (second image) is displayed, the expectation of winning is low (the reliability is 47% (down from 3% when alone)). By doing this, it is possible to increase the variation of production.

[Modification 3]
In the reliability change effect A of FIG. 141(C) and the reliability change effect B of FIG. 142(C), a double attack chance icon TG (specific image) is displayed as an indication of the display of the star mark GZ2 (second image). Was. However, the double attack chance icon TG (specific image) is not displayed, and in the reliability change effect A of FIG. 141(D) and the reliability change effect B of FIG. You may make it form one decorative member (a united accessory) in which the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R has an annular shape. It is possible to determine whether or not this is performed by a unique lottery by the sub control board 90. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of production.

[Modification 4]
In the reliability change effect A of FIG. 141(D) and the reliability change effect B of FIG. 142(D), the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R have an annular shape 1 Two decorative members (union parts) were formed. However, the decorative member (union accessory) may not be formed. It is possible to determine whether or not this is performed by a unique lottery by the sub control board 90. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of production.

[Modification 5]
In the reliability change effect B of FIG. 142(B), the change icon 9C is changed from a white spherical icon to a smiling sphere icon having a red color. At this time, the size of the variation icon 9C may be increased by a predetermined number (for example, about 5 to 8 times) larger than the size of the white spherical icon. This makes it possible for the player to emphasize the change of the change icon 9C in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Modification 6]
In the reliability change effect A of FIG. 141 and the reliability change effect B of FIG. 142, the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 and the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21. The second special figure reservation based on the sphere is arranged and displayed as a number not shown in the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Since these numbers are displayed as the number of holding balls as numerical values, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish them by being confused with various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, since the image is arranged on the forefront side of the display screen 7a and the other image is displayed behind the foreground of the display screen 7a, the visibility is not hindered by the other image. It was In the present embodiment, when the reliability change effect is started, thereafter, the reliability image KDG showing the reliability in which the winning result displayed on the card is defeated in five stages is displayed on the bottom of the display screen 7a. It was displayed on the side. This may cause the player to misunderstand the number (the number of reserved balls) arranged and displayed on the upper center of the display screen 7a as the reliability shown in the five levels. Therefore, in place of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, one of the sub display screens 64 (the right sub display screen 64R, the left sub display screen 64L, and the upper sub display screen 64U is displayed (for example, On the right sub-display screen 64R)), a number displayed with the number of holding balls described above as a numerical value may be displayed. In this way, the number displayed as the number of reserved balls will not be misunderstood by the player as the reliability shown at the stage, and the number displayed as the number of reserved balls will be displayed. It is possible to make it difficult to distinguish the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the screen 7a, and it is possible to make it intuitively easy to understand.

[Modification 7]
In the reliability change effect A of FIG. 141(H) and the reliability change effect B of FIG. 142(H), the change icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. However, the variable icon 9C may be displayed again on the display screen 7a to appear. In this case, lightning is emitted from the character star mark GZ2 toward the plurality of balloons GZ4 to start defeat, and further, in the reliability change effect A of FIG. 141(H), the cross mark GZ1 is also directed toward the plurality of balloons GZ4. 142 to start destroying, and in the reliability change effect B of FIG. 142(H), since the heart mark GZ3 also emits lightning toward the plurality of balloons GZ4 and starts destroying, the display mode of the variation icon 9C is as follows. For example, a moving image may be displayed in such a manner that the ball shrinks or extends vertically so that it bounces up and down, or a moving image may be displayed in which it rotates. By doing so, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the effect of the display of the change icon 9C.

[Modification 8]
In the reliability change effect A of FIG. 141(H) and the reliability change effect B of FIG. 142(H), the change icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. However, the variable icon 9C may be displayed again on the display screen 7a to appear. In this case, lightning is emitted from the character star mark GZ2 toward the plurality of balloons GZ4 to start defeat, and further, in the reliability change effect A of FIG. 141(H), the cross mark GZ1 is also directed toward the plurality of balloons GZ4. 142H, the heart mark GZ3 also emits a lightning bolt toward the plurality of balloons GZ4 to start the destruction, so that the variable icon 9C has a plurality of balloons GZ4. It may collide toward and explode to contribute to the destruction of the plurality of balloons GZ4. By doing so, the plurality of balloons GZ4 can be destroyed by the variation icon 9C in addition to the two characters, so that the player is provided with a more powerful effect of destroying the plurality of balloons GZ4. By contributing to the destruction of the plurality of balloons GZ4 by the variation icon 9C, it is possible to give the player the impression that the reliability is further increased, and contribute to the improvement of the effect. You can

[Modification 9]
The reliability change effect A in FIG. 141 and the reliability change effect B in FIG. 142 may not include some of the effects described, or may have other effects added.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Mode D7-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
When the second image is displayed after the first image is displayed, the expectation of winning is high, and when the second image is displayed after the third image is displayed, the winning probability is high. It is possible to execute the first effect in which the expectation level of
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Mode D7-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect D7-1,
In the first effect, when the first image or the third image is displayed, the variable icon is displayed at the variable display position, and then the first image or the third image is not displayed. In addition, the variable display position is hidden from the variable icon and the variable display position.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Mode D7-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect D7-1 or aspect D7-2,
In the first effect, a specific image can be displayed as a suggestion for displaying the second image.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Mode D7-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D7-1 to D7-3,
Having a movable body that can appear on the front side of the display means,
In the first effect, the movable body can be operated as a suggestion for displaying the second image.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Mode D7-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D7-1 to D7-4,
After the first effect, it is possible to execute a second effect in which a fourth image is displayed in addition to the second image, and further, an image of the expected degree of hitting by the second image is displayed. is there,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D7-6]
A gaming machine according to aspect D7-5,
In the second presentation, in addition to the fourth image, the first image and the second image are displayed, or the third image and the second image are displayed. May be
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Mode D7-7]
A gaming machine according to aspect D7-5 or aspect D7-6,
The first image is a character other than the first character and the second character among the plurality of characters belonging to the first group,
The second image is the first character,
The third image is the second character,
The fourth image is a character that does not belong to the first group,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The item superposition effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 143 to 145. This item superimposition effect can be executed during a variable effect of the special symbol. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90, moves the third movable accessory 13, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103, and displays the image on the display screen 7a. It is a production realized by that.

[Item overlay effect A]
FIG. 143 is a diagram for explaining the item superposition effect A. In this item superimposition effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 143(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative design effect, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed, but the display is omitted. Further, the variable display of the decorative design is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143(B), an item image display effect is performed. In this item image display effect, the face image XG1 is displayed. The face image XG1 includes a glasses image XG11 representing glasses as a predetermined item. In the glasses image XG11, the portions corresponding to the lenses are displayed in a transparent manner.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143(C), an item accessory movable effect is performed. In this item accessory movable production, the third movable accessory 13L, the third movable accessory 13R, and the third movable accessory 13R are moved from the retracted position to the deployed position, and are combined at the position of the glasses image XG11 (on the glasses image XG11) to represent glasses. 3 The movable accessory 13 is formed. In this case, the third movable accessory 13 has the same size as the glasses image XG11, but may be slightly larger than the glasses image XG11. In this item role object movable effect, the face image XG1 is continuously displayed. A portion of the third movable accessory 13 corresponding to the lens is permeable.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143(D), a super reach effect is performed. In this super reach effect, the face image XG1 is continuously displayed, but in the face image XG1, the eyeglass image XG11 is deleted, and an image of the eye that is hidden by the eyeglass image XG11 is displayed.

[Item overlay effect B]
FIG. 144 is a diagram for explaining the item superposition effect B. In this item superimposition effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 144(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative design effect, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed, but the display is omitted. Further, the variable display of the decorative design is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(B), an item image display effect is performed. In this item image display effect, the face image XG1 is displayed. The face image XG1 includes a glasses image XG11 representing glasses as a predetermined item. In the glasses image XG11, the portion corresponding to the lens is displayed transparently.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(C), an item accessory movable effect is performed. In this item accessory movable production, the third movable accessory 13L, the third movable accessory 13R, and the third movable accessory 13R are moved from the retracted position to the deployed position, and are combined at the position of the glasses image XG11 (on the glasses image XG11) to represent glasses. 3 The movable accessory 13 is formed. In this case, the third movable accessory 13 has the same size as the glasses image XG11, but may be slightly larger than the glasses image XG11. In this item role object movable effect, the face image XG1 is continuously displayed. A portion of the third movable accessory 13 corresponding to the lens is permeable.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(D), a super reach effect is performed. In this super reach effect, the character XG2 is displayed at the position where the face image XG1 was displayed.

[Item overlay effect C]
FIG. 145 is a diagram for explaining the item superposition effect C. In this item superimposition effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 145(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative design effect, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed, but the display is omitted. Further, the variable display of the decorative design is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(B), an item image display effect is performed. In this item image display effect, the face image XG1 is displayed. The face image XG1 includes a glasses image XG11 representing glasses as a predetermined item. In the glasses image XG11, the portions corresponding to the lenses are displayed in a transparent manner.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(C), the item accessory movable effect is performed. In this item accessory movable production, the third movable accessory 13L, the third movable accessory 13R, and the third movable accessory 13R are moved from the retracted position to the deployed position, and are combined at the position of the glasses image XG11 (on the glasses image XG11) to represent glasses. 3 The movable accessory 13 is formed. In this case, the third movable accessory 13 has the same size as the glasses image XG11, but may be slightly larger than the glasses image XG11. In this item role object movable effect, the face image XG1 is continuously displayed. A portion of the third movable accessory 13 corresponding to the lens is permeable.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(D), the item accessory transparent effect 1 is performed. In this item transmission effect 1, the main display screen 7a causes the eyes to be displayed on the portion of the third movable accessory 13 corresponding to the lens, and the lens portion of the third movable accessory 13 is made transparent to the player. The eyes of the face image XG1 are visible through the 3 movable accessory 13.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(E), the item accessory transparent effect 2 is performed. In this item transmission effect 2, the characters "geki" and "heat" are displayed on the portion of the main display screen 7a corresponding to the lens of the third movable accessory 13, and the lens portion of the third movable accessory 13 is transmitted. Thus, the player can see these characters through the third movable accessory 13.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(D), a super reach effect is performed. In this super reach effect, the character XG2 is displayed at the position where the face image XG1 was displayed.

[Modification]
In the above item superimposing effect, the glasses are used as the items, and the third movable accessory 13 representing the glasses is moved to the position of the glasses image XG11, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other items may be used. May be. For example, a mask may be used as an item, and the third movable accessory 13 representing the mask may be moved to the position of the mask image to perform the same effect as the item superimposing effect.
In the item superimposition effect, in the item image display effect, a portion of the glasses image XG11 corresponding to the lens is displayed so as to be transparent, and a predetermined image (for example, an image of an eye or “heavy” “heat” is displayed in the transparent portion. Characters) may be displayed.

[Effect example]
In the item superimposing effect, a glasses image XG11 representing glasses as an item is displayed, and then the third movable accessory 13 representing glasses is moved to the unfolded position and arranged in front of the glasses image XG11, and then a predetermined amount Production (super reach production) is performed. According to this configuration, a stereoscopic eyeglass image can be delivered to the player by the eyeglass image XG11 and the third movable accessory 13, and a dynamic display effect can be realized. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.
In the item superimposing effect, the glasses image XG11 is displayed, and then the third movable accessory 13 representing glasses is moved to the unfolded position and arranged in front of the glasses image XG11, and then the third movable accessory 13 is displayed. After returning to the retreat position (home position), the character XG2 that performs a predetermined effect (super reach effect) is displayed at the position where the glasses image XG11 was displayed. According to this configuration, the glasses image XG11 and the third movable accessory 13 can deliver a stereoscopic glasses image to the player, and dynamic display effect can be realized and the third movable accessory. After 13 has returned to the retracted position, not the glasses image XG11 but the character XG2 performing the super reach effect is displayed, so that it is possible to provide the effect with a good tempo and give the player a refreshing feeling. .. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.
In the item overlapping effect, the third movable accessory 13 includes a third movable accessory 13L and a third movable accessory 13R, and in the item effect movable effect, the third movable accessory 13L and the third movable accessory. The object 13R is moved to the unfolded position, and is merged on the glasses image XG11. According to this configuration, a more stereoscopic eyeglass image can be delivered to the player by the eyeglass image XG11 and the third movable accessory 13, and a dynamic display effect can be realized. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect XG-1]
A gaming machine capable of executing a plurality of effects,
There is a case where the first effect is performed as one of the plurality of effects,
There is a case where a second effect is performed as one of the plurality of effects,
There is a case where a third effect is performed as one of the plurality of effects,
The first effect is an effect of displaying a first image representing a predetermined item on the display means,
The second effect is an effect of moving a movable accessory representing the predetermined item to a developed position on the first image,
The third effect is an effect of performing a predetermined display effect on the display means,
A combined effect including the first effect, the second effect, and the third effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XG-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect XG-1,
In the combination effect, the first effect is performed, then the second effect is performed, and then the third effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XG-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect XG-2,
There is a case where a fourth effect is performed as one of the plurality of effects,
The fourth effect is an effect of moving the movable accessory from the deployed position to the basic position,
The combination effect may include the fourth effect,
In the combination effect, the fourth effect is performed after the second effect, the third effect is performed after the fourth effect, and in the third effect, in the display unit. A second image in the predetermined effect is displayed instead of the first image displayed at the position corresponding to the expanded position of the movable accessory.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XG-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect XG-3,
The movable accessory has a first accessory and a second accessory,
The movable accessory represents one accessory by combining the first accessory and the second accessory.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XG-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect XG-4,
In the combination effect, in the second display effect, the first accessory and the second accessory of the movable accessory are moved to the expanded position on the first image, Of the second character and the second character in the expanded position,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Movable accessory decoration light emitting effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 146 to 148. 146 to 148, for example, the second movable accessory 15 and other movable accessories disposed around the front surface (front side) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for clarity.

The movable accessory decoration light emission effect can be executed during the variable effect (during the variable display) by the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 (for example, variation effect start command), and includes an instruction to execute the movable accessory decoration light emission effect, the corresponding from the ROM 103. The image data to be read is read and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Further, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 (for example, variation effect start command), and changes the position and the light emission mode of the first movable auditors object 14 provided in the game board 2.

Here, the game board 2 having a transparent acrylic plate will be described, and the movable accessory decoration light emitting effect by the first movable accessory 14 will be sequentially described.

[Game board 2 made of transparent acrylic plate]
First, the game board 2 formed of a transparent acrylic plate will be described with reference to FIGS. 146 and 147. FIG. 146 is a diagram for explaining the game board 2 formed of a transparent acrylic plate. FIG. 147 is a continuation of the diagram for explaining the game board 2 formed of the transparent acrylic plate of FIG. 146.

As shown in FIG. 146(A), the game board 2 is composed of a transparent acrylic plate 2z which is a transparent acrylic plate, and a plurality of game nails and the like are projected in the game area 3 on the front surface of the transparent acrylic plate 2z. It is (planted), and the first movable accessory 14, the image display device 7, and the like are arranged behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z. A through hole is formed in the transparent acrylic plate 2z at substantially the center thereof, and the image display device 7 is arranged at a position corresponding to the through hole. The first movable accessory 14 is arranged in the space between the transparent acrylic plate 2z and the image display device 7, and the front side is covered with the transparent acrylic plate 2z in the standby state at the home position. When it is in a state of advancing and moving toward the center of the display screen 7a, it appears in front of (front of) the image display device 7, and is not covered with the transparent acrylic plate 2z due to the opening of the transparent acrylic plate 2z.

Although the first movable accessory 14 is arranged behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z, since the transparent acrylic plate 2z is transparent, the center of the display screen 7a is displayed even when the first movable accessory 14 stands by at the home position. It is said that it is easy to visually recognize even if it is moving toward. The game board 2 having the transparent acrylic plate 2z has the same configuration as the game board 2 described above except that it has the transparent acrylic plate 2z, and a description thereof will be omitted.

Although not shown, the first movable accessory 14 includes a decorative substrate on which a plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted, an inner lens covering the front of the decorative substrate is arranged, and the inner lens and the decorative substrate are accommodated by a decorative member. Is configured. An opening is formed in the decorative member, and the inner lens is exposed from this opening. The inner lens diffuses light from a plurality of full-color LEDs and makes it difficult to recognize the presence of a decorative substrate arranged behind the inner lens. Therefore, even when all of the plurality of full-color LEDs are turned off, it is difficult to visually recognize the plurality of full-color LEDs through the inner lens. The inner lens may be transparent or semi-transparent. The light emitted by the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate passes through the inner lens and is irradiated forward (hereinafter, “first movable accessory 14 emits light”).

Since the transparent acrylic plate 2z is arranged in front of the first movable accessory 14, when the first movable accessory 14 emits light, the light passes through the transparent acrylic plate 2z to the front of the transparent acrylic plate 2z. It will be irradiated. As a result, a game ball flowing down the area of the game area 3 corresponding to the front of the first movable accessory 14 and a game ball flowing down the area of the game area 3 not corresponding to the front of the first movable accessory 14. By comparison, the game ball flowing down the area of the game area 3 corresponding to the front of the first movable accessory 14 is illuminated brightly and is easily visible.

In addition, a plurality of game nails and the like are projected (planted) on the front surface of the transparent acrylic plate 2z, and when the first movable accessory 14 emits light, the light illuminates the game nail, so that a game ball. It is possible to emphasize the passage through which the player flows in an easy-to-understand manner.

Here, a state in which the first movable accessory 14 stands by at the home position will be described. As described above, the first movable accessory 14 includes the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R. The left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are each configured to be movable in the left-right direction, and half of the ring-shaped decorative portion (the left decorative portion and the right decorative portion) is attached to the tip side. .. That is, the left side decoration portion and the right side decoration portion each have an arc shape that is half the ring shape.

The first movable accessory 14 is stationary at the retracted position (home position) in which the left movable accessory 14L is stored on the left side of the display screen 7a and the right movable accessory 14R is stored on the right side of the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 146(B), the left movable accessory 14L standing by at the home position is rotated by the left decorative portion having a half arc shape of a ring shape with the center point of the vertical distance dimension of the arc on the arc. The center point LKP is set, and at the rotation center point LKP on this arc, the upper arc-shaped left side movable accessory 14LU is further divided into the upper arc-shaped left side movable accessory 14LU and the upper arc-shaped left side movable accessory 14LU. And the lower arc-shaped left side movable accessory 14LD rotates clockwise, and the upper arc-shaped left side movable accessory 14LU and the lower arc-shaped left side movable accessory 14LD are opened to approximately 180 degrees.

When the left movable accessory 14L starts to advance toward the center of the display screen 7a, first, the upper arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LU rotates clockwise at the rotation center point LKP on the arc, and the lower arc-shaped left side. The movable accessory 14LD rotates counterclockwise to become a left-side decorative portion having a half arc shape of a ring shape, and then moves forward toward the center of the display screen 7a.

In the right movable accessory 14R standing by at the home position, as shown in the figure, the right decorative portion having a half arc shape of a ring shape takes the center point of the vertical distance dimension of the arc on the arc as the rotation center point RKP. At the center of rotation RKP on this arc, the upper arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RU and the lower arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RD are further divided, and the upper-arc right movable accessory 14RU rotates clockwise. , The lower arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RD rotates counterclockwise and is in an opened state of about 180 degrees.

When the right movable accessory 14R starts advancing toward the center of the display screen 7a, first, at the rotation center point RKP on the arc, the upper arc shape right movable accessory 14RU rotates counterclockwise to form the lower arc shape. The right movable accessory 14RD rotates clockwise and becomes a right side decorative portion having a half arc shape of a ring shape, and then moves forward toward the center of the display screen 7a.

When the left movable accessory 14L standing by at the home position emits light, the light is emitted by the upper arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LU and the lower arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LD by approximately 180 degrees, as shown in FIG. 146C. With the open state, the front side corresponding to the upper arc-shaped left side movable accessory 14LU and the lower arc-shaped left side movable accessory 14LD is brightly illuminated.

When the right movable accessory 14R standing by at the home position emits light, the light causes the upper arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RU and the lower arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RD to open approximately 180 degrees. In this state, the front side corresponding to the upper arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RU and the lower arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RD are brightly illuminated.

As described above, the game area 3 has a left game area 3A on the left side and a right game area 3B on the right side from the center in the left-right direction. The way of hitting to shoot is called "left hitting", and the way of hitting to shoot the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 3B is called "right hitting".

When the left movable accessory 14L stands by at the home position, as shown in FIGS. 147(D) and (E), when the left movable accessory 14L emits light, that is, the upper arc shape left movable accessory 14LU and the lower arc shape. When the left movable accessory 14LD emits light, the light is emitted from the left game area 3A in the front area corresponding to the upper arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LU and the lower arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LD (hereinafter, "left hitting"). The side light emitting area 3AF” will be illuminated brightly. Thereby, in the left game area 3A, comparing the game ball flowing down the left hitting side light emitting area 3AF with the game ball flowing down the other areas in the left game area 3A excluding the left hitting side light emitting area 3AF, The game ball flowing down the left-hand side light emitting area 3AF is illuminated brightly and is easily visible.

Further, in the left-hand side light emitting area 3AF, a plurality of game nails (indicated by small "○" in the figure) are projected (planted), so when the left movable accessory 14L emits light, that is, When the upper arc-shaped left side movable accessory 14LU and the lower arc-shaped left side movable accessory 14LD emit light, the light illuminates the game nail in the left-hand side light emitting area 3AF, so that the player passes through the passage through which the game ball flows. Can be emphasized in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, in the left-hand side light emitting area 3AF, when the lower arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LD emits light, a so-called windmill is arranged in addition to the game nails in an area that is brightly illuminated by the light. The rotation can be emphasized to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. The windmill is as important to the player as the game nail, because the rolling of the game ball to the first starting opening 20 changes depending on the rotating direction and the rotating speed.

In the state where the right movable accessory 14R is on standby at the home position, as shown in the figure, when the right movable accessory 14R emits light, that is, the upper arc shaped right movable accessory 14RU and the lower arc shaped right movable accessory 14RD are generated. When the light is emitted, the light is a front region (hereinafter, referred to as "right hitting side light emitting region 3BF") corresponding to the upper arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RU and the lower arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RD in the right game area 3B. ) Will be illuminated brightly. Thereby, in the right game area 3B, comparing the game ball flowing down the right-hand side light emitting area 3BF with the game ball flowing down other areas in the right game area 3B excluding the right-hand side light emitting area 3BF, The game ball flowing down the right-hand side light emitting area 3BF is illuminated brightly and is easily visible.

Further, in the right-hand side light emitting area 3BF, a plurality of game nails (indicated by small "○" in the figure) and the like are projected (planted), so when the right movable accessory 14R emits light, Since the game nails in the right-hand side light emitting area 3BF are illuminated by the light, the passage through which the game balls flow can be easily emphasized by the player. Specifically, when the upper arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RU emits light in the left-hand side light emitting area 3AF, the game nail is not projected (planted) in the area brightly illuminated by the light, and the center decoration The passage along which the game ball flows down along the right side contour of the body 10 can be easily emphasized by the player. When the lower arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RD in the left-hand side light emitting area 3AF emits light, a plurality of game nails and the like are projected (planted) in the area brightly illuminated by the light, so the game nails It is possible to emphasize the passage where the game ball is illuminated by being illuminated brightly by the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

In FIG. 147(E), since the left movable accessory 14L can emit light and the right movable accessory 14R can emit light in the home position, left-handed strike is performed regardless of left-handed or right-handed strike. The side light emitting area 3AF and the right-hand side light emitting area 3BF are illuminated brightly, and it is as if the decorative decoration member is arranged behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z (in other words, the decorative decoration member is arranged behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z. (Fixed), it is possible to realize an expression in which a light-emission effect is performed by an electric decoration member. That is, it is possible to perform a light emission effect equivalent to that of the decorative decoration member without providing the decorative decoration member behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z.

Of course, the light emission modes of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R include lighting, gradation lighting, blinking, and the like. In addition, there is an effect that the left movable accessory 14L emits light and the right movable accessory 14R goes out, so that only the left-hand side light emitting area 3AF is brightly illuminated, and the left movable accessory 14L goes out and the right movable role. There is an effect that the object 14R emits light and only the right-hand side light emitting area 3BF is illuminated brightly, and the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are in a state of being extinguished, and the left-side light emitting area 3AF and the right side. There is an effect that the hitting side light emitting area 3BF is turned off.

[Movable accessory decorative light emission effect by the first movable accessory 14]
Next, a movable accessory decoration light emitting effect by the first movable accessory 14 will be described with reference to FIG. 148. FIG. 148 is a diagram for explaining a movable accessory decoration light emission effect by the first movable accessory 14 (hereinafter, referred to as “movable accessory decoration light emission effect”). The movable accessory decoration light emission effect is performed during the variable effect (during the variable display) by the decorative pattern.

First, as shown in FIG. 148(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative design 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative design 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. In the display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side, the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (symbol: the number “1” to the number “9”) is started. When the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative design is started, the display of the decorative design that is stopped and displayed changes from the opaque state to the translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed to the high speed display mode. .. Thereby, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semitransparent decorative pattern which is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped). Note that the decorative pattern is in a display mode in which the decorative pattern moves in small increments in the vertical direction when the temporary stop display is performed.

In FIG. 148(A), the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, and the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R stand by at the home position in the state where the movable accessory decoration light emission effect is started. In the state, when a left-handed game is being played, or when a right-handed game is being played, for example, as shown in FIG. In a state where the movable accessory 14R is turned off, when the left movable accessory 14L emits light, that is, the upper arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LU and the lower arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LD emit light, and the light is left game. Of the area 3A, the left striking side light emitting area 3AF, which is a front area corresponding to the upper arc-shaped left side movable accessory 14LU and the lower arc shape left side movable accessory 14LD, is illuminated brightly, and the left striking side light emitting area 3AF is excluded. The left game area 3A is not illuminated brightly and becomes darker than the left-hand side light emitting area 3AF. On the other hand, since the right movable accessory 14R is turned off, the entire right game area 3B is not illuminated by the right movable accessory 14R and becomes dark.

In addition, when the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are in a standby state at the home position, respectively, when a game is performed by left-handing or when a game is performed by right-handing. For example, when the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R emit light, when the left movable accessory 14L emits light, that is, the upper arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LU and the lower arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LD emit light. In the left game area 3A, the light brightly illuminates the left hitting side light emitting area 3AF which is a front area corresponding to the upper arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LU and the lower arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LD. Therefore, the left game area 3A excluding the left hitting side light emitting area 3AF is not illuminated brightly and becomes darker than the left hitting side light emitting area 3AF. When the right movable accessory 14R emits light, that is, the upper arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RU and the lower arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RD emit light, and the light is the upper arc-shaped movable right in the right game area 3B. The right hitting side light emitting area 3BF, which is the front area corresponding to the accessory 14RU and the lower arc shape right movable accessory 14RD, is illuminated brightly, and the right game area 3B excluding the right hitting side emitting area 3BF is not illuminated brightly and the right side. It becomes darker than the striking side light emitting region 3BF.

In addition, when the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are in a standby state at the home position, respectively, when a game is performed by left-handing or when a game is performed by right-handing. For example, in a state where the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are turned off, the entire left game area 3A is not illuminated by the left movable accessory 14L and becomes dark. The entire right game area 3B is not illuminated brightly by the right movable accessory 14R and becomes dark.

In this way, when a left-handed game is being played or a right-handed game is being played, the left movable accessory 14L can emit light and the right movable accessory 14R can emit light at the home position. Therefore, the left-hand side light emitting area 3AF and the right-hand side light emitting area 3BF are brightly illuminated, and it is as if the decorative decoration member is arranged behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z (in other words, the transparent acrylic plate). The illumination decoration member is fixed to the rear of 2z), and it is possible to realize the expression in which the light emission effect is performed by the illumination decoration member. That is, it is possible to perform a light emission effect equivalent to that of the decorative decoration member without providing the decorative decoration member behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z.

Next, from the state where the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R stand by at their home positions, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are respectively in front of (front of) the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the state where the player has advanced (moved) from the home position toward the central advance position (in a direction in which they are close to each other), when a left-handed game is being played or a right-handed game is being played, FIG. As shown in B), at the front (front) center position (advance position (deployment position)) of the display screen 7a, the left side decoration that is half of the ring-shaped decoration part attached to the tip side of the left movable accessory 14L. Part and the right side decorative part which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip side of the right side movable accessory 14R are united, and the left side decorative part of the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side of the right side movable part 14R are combined. One decorative member (union accessory) having an annular shape with the decorative portion is formed.

When the left decorative portion of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative portion of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form a united accessory having a ring shape, the area formed in the ring has a circular shape ( Hereinafter, it is referred to as a "circular area"). A smile image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area.

At this time, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R have already advanced (moved) from their home positions toward the advanced position in the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a (in the direction in which they approach each other). Has become. Therefore, even if the left movable accessory 14L emits light, that is, even if the upper arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LU and the lower arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LD emit light, the light is in the left game area 3A. The left striking side light emitting area 3AF, which is the front area corresponding to the upper arc-shaped left side movable accessory 14LU and the lower arc-shaped left side movable accessory 14LD, is not illuminated brightly, but is transparent at the center (front) forward position of the display screen 7a. It is irradiated forward without passing through the acrylic plate 2z. Further, even if the right movable accessory 14R emits light, that is, even if the upper arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RU and the lower arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RD emit light, the light is in the upper right game area 3B. The right-side light emitting area 3BF, which is the front area corresponding to the arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RU and the lower arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RD, is not illuminated brightly, and is transparent acrylic in the front (front) center advance position of the display screen 7a. It is irradiated forward without passing through the plate 2z.

In the present embodiment, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R advance (move) from the home position toward the advance position in the front (front) center of the display screen 7a (in a direction in which they approach each other). Since the effect suggests the start of an effect with a high expectation of a big hit, the player can move the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R to the center (front) advance position of the display screen 7a. Looking toward (moving) from the home position toward (towards each other) increases the expectation for the production to proceed.

In this way, when a left-handed game is being played or a right-handed game is being played, the left-side movable accessory 14L and the right-side movable accessory 14R are left at their home positions and are left-sided. In the state where 14L and the right movable accessory 14R respectively advance (move) from the home position toward the advance position of the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (in the direction toward each other), the left movable Even if the accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R emit light, the left hitting side light emitting area 3AF and the right hitting side light emitting area 3BF are not illuminated brightly.

In addition, when the decorative decoration member is arranged behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z (in other words, when the decorative decoration member is fixed behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z), the decorative decoration member. Even when the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R advance (move) from the home position toward the advance position in the center of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a (in the direction close to each other). Although it can be performed, it may not be possible to emphasize the left-side movable accessory 14L and the right-side movable accessory 14R by focusing on the light-emission effect by the electric decoration member.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are respectively displayed from the state where the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R stand by at the home position. When the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R emit light in a state where they are advanced (moved) from the home position toward the center (front side) of the front surface (front) of the screen 7a (in a direction toward each other), the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R emit light. Since the striking side light emitting area 3AF and the right striking side light emitting area 3BF are not brightly illuminated, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are moved toward the center (front) advance position of the display screen 7a. The left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R can be emphasized by making the player pay attention to the state of moving (moving) from the home position (in a direction in which they approach each other).

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the movable accessory decoration light emission effect by the game board 2 having the transparent acrylic plate and the first movable accessory 14.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, in the game board 2 having the transparent acrylic plate of FIGS. 146 and 147 and the movable accessory decorative light emission production of FIG. 148, the transparent acrylic plate 2z (transparent) in which the game area 3 is formed. Part), and a game board 2 having a plurality of game nails projecting from the front of a transparent acrylic plate 2z (transparent part). The game plate 2 emits light behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z (transparent part). A plurality of possible left movable accessory 14L (movable body) (right movable movable object 14R in addition to left movable accessory 14L) are arranged, and the left movable accessory 14L (movable body) is a transparent acrylic plate 2z (transparent part). When the left movable accessory 14L (movable body) emits light while the left movable accessory 14L (movable body) stands by at the home position, the game area corresponding to the left movable accessory 14L (movable body) is visible. The first effect (FIG. 147(E), FIG. 148(A)) that illuminates the left-hand side light emitting area 3AF (specific area) among the three areas can be executed. According to this configuration, since the left-hand side light emitting area 3AF (specific area) is illuminated brightly, the electric decoration member is arranged as if it were behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z (in other words, the light is provided behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z. The decorative decoration member is fixed), and it is possible to realize an expression in which a light emission effect is performed by the decorative decoration member. That is, it is possible to perform a light emission effect equivalent to that of the decorative decoration member without providing the decorative decoration member behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z. Therefore, interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, when the left movable accessory 14L (movable body) emits light in the game board 2 having the transparent acrylic plate shown in FIGS. 146 and 147 and the movable accessory decorative light emission effect shown in FIG. 148, The game ball flowing down the left hitting side light emitting area 3AF (specific area) flows down the left game area 3A (area) excluding the left hitting side light emitting area 3AF which is not illuminated by the light emission of the left movable accessory 14L (movable body). It is designed to be easier to see than a game ball. According to this configuration, the left side light emitting area 3AF (specific area) is illuminated brightly by the light emission of the left movable accessory 14L (movable body), so that the left side light emitting area 3AF (specific area) flows down the game ball. It is possible to contribute to emphasize the turning trend. Further, when adjusting the launch strength of the game ball, when the player operates the handle 60, it is possible to easily see the rolling direction of the game ball depending on the strength of the launch strength, which facilitates the adjustment of the launch strength. Can contribute to that.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, in the game board 2 having the transparent acrylic plate in FIGS. 146 and 147, in the movable accessory decoration light emission effect in FIG. 148, when the left movable accessory 14L (movable body) emits light, The game nail projected (planted) in the left-hand side light emitting area 3AF (specific area) is illuminated. According to this configuration, the passage along which the game ball flows can be emphasized to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the game board 2 having the transparent acrylic plate in FIGS. 146 and 147 and the movable accessory decoration light emission effect in FIG. 148, the left side of the game area 3 is the game area 3 in the game area. A left game area 3A (first flow area) in which the ball flows down, and a right game area 3B (second flow area) in which a game ball flows down on the right side of the game area 3 are provided on the game board 2. The left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R (movable body) that are arranged illuminate the left hitting side light emitting area 3AF (specific area) in the left game area 3A (first downflow area) and the right game. Some areas illuminate the right-hand side light emitting area 3BF (specific area) in the area 3B (second downflow area). According to this configuration, in the left game area 3A, the game ball flowing down the left-hand side light emitting area 3AF can be illuminated brightly for easy visual recognition, and in the right game area 3B, the right-hand side light emitting area 3BF can be seen. It is possible to illuminate the flowing game ball brightly for easy visual recognition.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, in the game board 2 having the transparent acrylic plate in FIGS. 146 and 147, and the first effect in the movable accessory decoration light emission effect in FIG. 148, the game ball is the left game area 3A ( When a movable body such as the left movable role object 14L or the right movable role object 14R emits light while performing a left hitting (first game) flowing down to the first flow area, the left game area 3A (first The left hitting side light emitting area 3AF (specific area) in the downflow area) and the right hitting side light emitting area 3BF (specific area) in the right game area 3B (second downflow area) may be illuminated. According to this configuration, when the left movable role object 14L and the right side movable role object 14R emit light while performing the left-handed play (first game), the left in the left game area 3A (first downflow area) The hitting side light emitting area 3AF (specific area) and the right hitting side light emitting area 3BF (specific area) in the right game area 3B (second downflow area) can be illuminated to be bright. In addition, when the left movable role object 14L emits light and the right side movable role object 14R is turned off when the player is left-handed (first game), the left game area 3A (first downflow area) The left-hand side light emitting area 3AF (specific area) is illuminated and becomes bright, and the right-hand side light emitting area 3BF (specific area) in the right game area 3B (second downflow area) can be made unlit and dark. In addition, when the left movable role object 14L is turned off and the right side movable role object 14R emits light when the player is left-handed (first game), in the left game area 3A (first downflow area). The left-hand side light emitting area 3AF (specific area) is not illuminated and becomes dark, and the right-hand side light emitting area 3BF (specific area) in the right game area 3B (second downflow area) can be illuminated and brightened. In this way, when the left hitting (first game) is performed, variations are given to the light emitting modes of the left hitting side light emitting area 3AF (specific area) and the right game area 3B (second downflow area). be able to.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the game board 2 having the transparent acrylic plate shown in FIGS. 146 and 147, and the first effect in the movable accessory decorative light emission effect of FIG. 148, the game ball is the right game area 3B( When a movable body such as the left movable accessory 14L or the right movable accessory 14R emits light while performing a right hit (second game) flowing down to the second downstream area, the left game area 3A (first The left hitting side light emitting area 3AF (specific area) in the downflow area) and the right hitting side light emitting area 3BF (specific area) in the right game area 3B (second downflow area) may be illuminated. According to this structure, when the left movable role object 14L and the right side movable role object 14R emit light while performing right hitting (second game), left in the left game area 3A (first downflow area). The hitting side light emitting area 3AF (specific area) and the right hitting side light emitting area 3BF (specific area) in the right game area 3B (second downflow area) can be illuminated to be bright. In addition, when the left movable role object 14L emits light and the right side movable role object 14R is turned off during the right hitting (second game), in the left game area 3A (first downflow area). The left-hand side light emitting area 3AF (specific area) is illuminated and becomes bright, and the right-hand side light emitting area 3BF (specific area) in the right game area 3B (second downflow area) can be made dark without being illuminated. In addition, when the left movable role object 14L is turned off and the right side movable role object 14R emits light when performing right hitting (second game), in the left game area 3A (first downflow area). The left-hand side light emitting area 3AF (specific area) is not illuminated and becomes dark, and the right-hand side light emitting area 3BF (specific area) in the right game area 3B (second downflow area) can be illuminated and brightened. In this way, when the right hitting (second game) is being performed, variations are given to the light emitting modes of the left hitting side light emitting area 3AF (specific area) and the right game area 3B (second downflow area). be able to.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the movable accessory decoration light emission effect of FIG. 148, the movable bodies such as the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are located from the home position to the front (front) center of the display screen 7a. The second effect (FIG. 148(B)), which is united into one decorative member (combined accessory) (combined movable body), can be executed after moving to the advance position (reproduction position). ing. According to this configuration, what is recognized by the player as an electric decoration member behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z suddenly becomes the left movable accessory 14L or the right movable accessory 14R from the home position to the display screen 7a. When moving to the advance position (production position) in the center of the front surface (front) of the game, since it becomes one decorative member (combined accessory) (combined movable body), the game changes from an electric decorative member to a movable body. It is possible to provide an effect that is unexpected for a person and has an impact, and further, a light emitting effect equivalent to the light emitting effect by the electric decoration member fixed at a predetermined position is applied to the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R. It can be performed with a movable body such as.

[Effect 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, in the second effect in the movable accessory decoration light emission effect of FIG. 148, one decorative member (combined accessory) by the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R (union) Even if the movable body emits light, the left-side light emitting area 3AF and the right-side light emitting area 3BF are not illuminated. According to this configuration, the left movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14L and the right side in a state where the player has advanced (moved) from the home position toward the advance position (production position) in the center of the front surface (front side) of the display screen 7a (in a direction close to each other) Even if a movable body such as the movable role object 14R emits light, the left-side hitting side light emitting area 3AF and the right-side hitting side light emitting area 3BF are not illuminated brightly. The player moves the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable to the player, paying attention to the state where the player has advanced (moved) from the home position toward the advance position (direction of production) in the center of the front surface (front side) of the display screen 7a (in a direction in which they approach each other). The movable body such as the accessory 14R can be emphasized.

[Modification]
The following is a modified example of a game board having a transparent acrylic plate and a movable accessory decorative light emitting effect.
[Modification 1]
In the game board 2 having the transparent acrylic plate of FIGS. 146 and 147, the movable accessory decorative light emission effect of FIG. 148, it is performed during the variable effect (during the variable display) by the decorative pattern. However, it may be performed as a part of the demonstration production for waiting for customers. In this way, before playing the game, it is possible to experience the movable accessory decoration light emitting effect that can be experienced when the game is actually played. The main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81) sets a customer waiting standby command for displaying a standby scene in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 after a predetermined standby time has elapsed, and the sub control Output to the substrate 90. The image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the customer waiting standby command received from the sub control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the movable accessory decoration light emission effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7. Further, the lamp control board 107 analyzes the customer waiting standby command received from the sub control board 90, and changes the position and the light emission mode of the first movable accessory 14 provided in the game board 2.

[Modification 2]
In the game board 2 having the transparent acrylic plate shown in FIGS. 146 and 147, and the movable accessory decorative light emission effect shown in FIG. 148, the transparent acrylic plate 2z which is a transparent acrylic plate is adopted as the transparent portion formed in the game area 2. However, instead of the transparent acrylic plate 2z, a plywood (so-called veneer plate) is adopted as an opaque plate, and further, a portion corresponding to the upper arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LU and the lower arc-shaped left movable accessory 14LD and the upper arc shape. A through hole is provided in the right movable accessory 14RU and a portion corresponding to the lower arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RD, and a transparent portion is provided at the position of a cell image attached to the front surface of a plywood (so-called plywood board) corresponding to the through hole. (Transparent or semi-transparent) may be provided. Further, the through hole may be closed by a transparent member (for example, a transparent acrylic member). The transparent member may be shaped.

[Modification 3]
In the game board 2 having the transparent acrylic plate of FIGS. 146 and 147 and the movable accessory decoration light emission effect of FIG. 148, the left side decorative portion having an arc shape half of the ring shape of the left movable accessory 14L is at the home position. It is divided into an arc-shaped left-side movable accessory 14LU and a lower arc-shaped left-side movable accessory 14LD, and a right-side decorative portion having an arc shape that is half the ring shape of the right-side movable accessory 14R is an upper-arc right-side movable accessory 14RU and a lower arc. The shape was divided into a movable accessory 14RD on the right side. However, the left side decorative portion having an arc shape that is half the ring shape of the left movable accessory 14L may stand by without being divided into upper and lower parts at the home position, or may be half of the ring shape of the right movable accessory 14R. The right side decorative portion having the arc shape may stand by without being divided into upper and lower parts at the home position.

In the case where the left decorative portion having an arc shape that is half the ring shape of the left movable accessory 14L overlaps with the transparent acrylic plate 2z (transparent portion) in the front-rear direction with a part of the left decorative portion even in a standby state at the home position. In some cases, the overlapping area may be formed as the left-hand side light emitting area 3AF, and when the left movable accessory 14L emits light, the left-hand side light emitting area 3AF can be illuminated brightly. Even when the right decorative portion having an arc shape half of the ring shape of the right movable accessory 14R stands by at the home position as it is, the transparent acrylic plate 2z (transparent portion) and a part of the right decorative portion in the front-rear direction. Since there is a case where they overlap with each other or there is a case where they overlap with the entire right side decorative portion, when this overlapping area is formed as the right-hand side light emitting area 3BF and the right movable accessory 14R emits light, the right-hand side light emitting area 3BF can be illuminated brightly. ..

[Modification 4]
In the game board 2 having the transparent acrylic plate of FIGS. 146 and 147, movable bodies such as the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are arranged behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z (transparent part), and the transparent acrylic plate 2z No decorative member was arranged in the space between the back surface of the (transparent part) and the front surface of the movable body. However, a decorative member having a transparent portion is arranged in the space between the back surface of the transparent acrylic plate 2z (transparent portion) and the front surface of the movable body, and the positional relationship between the decorative member and the transparent acrylic plate 2z (transparent portion) changes. The decorative member may be fixed so as not to do so. The decorative member having a transparent portion has no light emitting portion such as a full-color LED mounted thereon, and is arranged on the back surface side of the transparent acrylic plate 2z via another member. The decorative member having the transparent portion may or may not be attached to the back surface side of the transparent acrylic plate 2z.

By disposing a decorative member having a transparent portion in front of the left movable accessory 14L at a position corresponding to the home position of the left movable accessory 14L, the existence of the left movable accessory 14L is hidden and the left movable accessory 14L emits light. Then, the light is emitted forward through the transparent portion of the decorative member. The transparent portion of the decorative member is, for example, a transparent acrylic member, may be shaped, or may be an inner lens. The inner lens diffuses light incident from the rear, and when the left movable accessory 14L is arranged behind the inner lens, it is difficult to recognize the presence of the left movable accessory 14L. The left movable accessory 14L can be made difficult to visually recognize by the inner lens in the decorative member. The inner lens may be transparent or semi-transparent. Thereby, it is as if the electric decoration member is arranged behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z (in other words, the electric decoration member is fixed behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z), and the light emission effect by the electric decoration member is performed. Can be realized. That is, it is possible to perform a light emission effect equivalent to that of the decorative decoration member without providing the decorative decoration member behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z. Further, when the left movable accessory 14L emits light in the state of moving (moving) from the home position toward the advance position (production position) in the center of the front surface (front side) of the display screen 7a (in a direction in which they approach each other), Since the light does not already pass through the transparent portion of the decorative member, there is no light emitted from the decorative member having the transparent portion, and the left movable accessory 14L is in the advance position (direction position) in the front (front) center of the display screen 7a. The left movable accessory 14L can be emphasized by making the player pay attention to the state in which the player has advanced (moved) from the home position toward each other (in a direction toward each other). In other words, since the presence of the left movable accessory 14L in the standby state at the home position is hidden by the decorative member, when the left movable accessory 14L emits light, it is placed in front of the left movable accessory 14L. While the presence of the decorative member having the transparent portion can be emphasized, the left movable accessory 14L that has advanced (moved) from the home position has the transparent portion when the left movable accessory 14L emits light. It is not necessary to emphasize the existence of the decorative member to hide its own existence, but it is possible to emphasize the existence of itself.

Further, by arranging a decorative member having a transparent portion in front of the right movable accessory 14R at a position corresponding to the home position of the right movable accessory 14R, the existence of the right movable accessory 14R is hidden (in other words, the right movable accessory 14R is hidden). When the accessory 14R becomes difficult to see due to the decoration member and the right movable accessory 14R emits light, the light is emitted forward through the transparent portion of the decoration member. The transparent portion of the decorative member is, for example, a transparent acrylic member, may be shaped, or may be an inner lens. The inner lens diffuses light incident from the rear, and when the right movable accessory 14R is arranged behind the inner lens, it is difficult to recognize the presence of the right movable accessory 14R. The right movable accessory 14R can be made difficult to visually recognize by the inner lens in the decorative member. The inner lens may be transparent or semi-transparent. Thereby, it is as if the electric decoration member is arranged behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z (in other words, the electric decoration member is fixed behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z), and the light emission effect by the electric decoration member is performed. Can be realized. That is, it is possible to perform a light emission effect equivalent to that of the decorative decoration member without providing the decorative decoration member behind the transparent acrylic plate 2z. Further, when the right movable accessory 14R emits light in a state of moving (moving) from the home position toward the advance position (production position) at the center of the front surface (front side) of the display screen 7a (in a direction close to each other), Since the light does not already pass through the transparent portion of the decorative member, there is no light emitted from the decorative member having the transparent portion, and the right movable accessory 14R is in the center (front position) of the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a. The right movable accessory 14R can be emphasized by making the player pay attention to the state of moving (moving) from the home position toward (toward approaching each other). In other words, since the presence of the right movable accessory 14R in the standby state at the home position is hidden by the decorative member, when the right movable accessory 14R emits light, it is placed in front of the right movable accessory 14R. While the presence of the decorative member having the transparent portion can be emphasized, the right movable accessory 14R that has advanced (moved) from the home position has the transparent portion when the right movable accessory 14R emits light. It is not necessary to emphasize the existence of the decorative member to hide its own existence, but it is possible to emphasize the existence of itself.

[Modification 5]
In the game board 2 having the transparent acrylic plate shown in FIGS. 146 and 147, and the movable accessory decorative light emitting effect shown in FIG. An inner lens that covers the front of the decorative substrate is arranged, and the inner lens and the decorative substrate are housed by a decorative member. An opening was formed in this decorative member, and the inner lens was exposed from this opening. The inner lens diffuses light from a plurality of full-color LEDs and makes it difficult to recognize the presence of the decorative substrate arranged behind the inner lens. Even when all the LEDs were turned off, it was difficult to visually recognize the full-color LEDs through the inner lens. In other words, in the game board 2 having the transparent acrylic plate shown in FIGS. 146 and 147 and the movable accessory decorative light emitting effect shown in FIG. The full-color LED was difficult to see. However, the inner lens may be formed so that the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate housed in the first movable accessory 14 can be easily viewed, or the inner lens may be replaced with a design. It may be a transparent member provided with. This transparent member may be transparent or semi-transparent.

[Modification 6]
In the game board 2 having the transparent acrylic plate of FIGS. 146 and 147, and the movable accessory decoration light emitting effect of FIG. 148, in the case where the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are in a standby state at their home positions, respectively. In some cases, the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are in a state of emitting light when a left-handed game is being played or a right-handed game is being played. However, when the game of left-handed striking is changed to the game of right-handed striking, the left movable accessory 14L may be turned off and the right movable accessory 14R may emit light, or from right-handed game to left-handed game. When changing, the left movable accessory 14L may emit light and the right movable accessory 14R may be turned off. By doing this, when switching between a left-handed game and a right-handed game, which player should play the game is determined by the light emission mode of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R. Can be easily understood.

[Modification 7]
In the game board 2 having the transparent acrylic plate of FIG. 147(E) and the movable accessory decoration light emission effect of FIG. 148, when the upper arc-shaped right movable accessory 14RU emits light in the left-hand side light emitting area 3AF, the light causes the light. No game nails were projected (planted) in the brightly illuminated area. However, the game nail may be projected (planted). In this way, since the game nail is illuminated brightly, the passage through which the game ball flows can be emphasized to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Modification 8]
In the movable accessory decoration light emission effect of FIG. 148, a part of the effects described may not be provided, or another effect may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect E2-1]
A gaming machine having a transparent portion in which a game area is formed, and a gaming board having a plurality of gaming nails protruding from the front surface of the transparent portion,
A plurality of movable bodies capable of emitting light are arranged behind the transparent portion on the game board,
The movable body is visible through the transparent portion,
When the movable body emits light in a state where the movable body stands by at the home position, it is possible to execute a first effect of illuminating a specific area of the game area corresponding to the movable body.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect E2-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect E2-1,
When the movable body emits light, the game ball flowing down the specific area is easier to see than the game ball flowing down the area not illuminated by the light emission of the movable body,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect E2-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect E2-1 or aspect E2-2,
When the movable body emits light, the game nail projecting in the specific area is illuminated.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect E2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E2-1 to E2-3,
The game area has a first flow-down area in which a game ball flows down on the left side of the game area, and a second flow-down area in which a game ball flows down on the right side of the game area,
There are a plurality of the movable bodies arranged on the game board, one for illuminating the specific area in the first flow-down area, and one for illuminating the specific area in the second flow-down area.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect E2-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect E2-4,
In the first effect, when the movable body emits light during a first game in which a game ball flows down to the first downflow area, the specific area and the first downflow area are provided. 2 may illuminate the specific area in the flow-down area,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E2-6]
A gaming machine according to aspect E2-4 or aspect E2-5,
In the first effect, when the movable body emits light during the second game in which the game ball flows down to the second downflow area, the specific area and the first downflow area 2 may illuminate the specific area in the flow-down area,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect E2-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E2-1 to E2-6,
When the movable body moves from the home position to the effect position, it is possible to execute a second effect in which the movable body is united to be a united movable body.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect E2-8]
A gaming machine according to aspect E2-7,
In the second effect, even if the combined movable body emits light, the specific area is not illuminated.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

The W mode display effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 149 to 151. This W mode display effect may be executed during the effect of changing the special symbol. That is, the effect is realized by the image control microcomputer 101 analyzing the variation effect start command received from the sub control board 90, reading the corresponding image data from the ROM 103, and displaying the image on the display screen 7a. In the W mode display effect, the hold icon 9A and the variation icon 9C are actually displayed, but the display is omitted in the figure. The left sub display screen 64L has a smaller display screen area than the main display screen 7a.

[W mode display effect A]
FIG. 149 is a diagram for explaining the W mode display effect A. In this W mode display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 149(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative design change effect, the variable display of the decorative design is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, and the first mode image XH1, the second mode image XH2, and the button image are displayed. XH3 is displayed. The first mode image XH1 is displayed on the main display screen 7a, and the second mode image XH2 and the button image XH3 are displayed on the left sub display screen 64L. The first mode image XH1 is composed of a mode A image XH11 representing the mode A, a mode B image XH12 representing the mode B, and a mode C image XH13 representing the mode C. The second mode image XH2 is composed of a mode A image XH21 representing the mode A, a mode B image XH22 representing the mode B, and a mode C image XH23 representing the mode C. In each mode, a background image, music, sound effect, appearance frequency of a predetermined character, character type, appearance frequency of chance up, expectation jackpot of chance up, and the like are set. These settings are different in Mode A to Mode C, respectively. In the first mode image XH1, the mode A image XH11, the mode B image XH12, and the mode C image XH13 are displayed in parallel without overlapping. On the other hand, in the second mode image XH2, the mode A image XH21, the mode B image XH22, and the mode C image XH23 are displayed so as to overlap each other. The button image XH3 is an image representing the select button 68, and is an image for prompting the player to change the mode by operating the select button 68. In this W mode display effect, the mode can be changed regardless of whether the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing or the reach effect. In the example of FIG. 149(A), the mode A is selected, the mode A image XH11 is darkly displayed in the first mode image XH1 (shown by hatching in the figure), and the second mode image XH2 is The mode A image XH21 is arranged at the top, which suggests that it is the mode A. Further, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R pass at high speed on the mode A image XH11, the mode B image XH12, and the mode C image XH13, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149(B), a decorative symbol low-speed fluctuation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol low-speed variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at low speed, and pass on the mode A image XH11, the mode B image XH12, and the mode C image XH13, respectively. In this case, in the mode A image XH11, the mode B image XH12, and the mode C image XH13, when the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the front, those portions are hidden by the decorative pattern and disappear. Further, the player who sees the button image XH3 operates the select button 68 to change the mode from the mode A to the mode B. Therefore, in the first mode image XH1, the mode B image XH12 is displayed dark (indicated by hatching in the figure), and in the second mode image XH2, the mode B image XH22 is arranged at the top.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149(C), a decorative symbol stop effect is performed. In this decorative symbol stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed on the mode A image XH11, the mode B image XH12, and the mode C image XH13, respectively. In this case, the mode A image XH11, the mode B image XH12, and the mode C image XH13 cannot be seen because the portions where the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in front are hidden by the decorative symbols. In FIG. 149(C), the mode B image XH12 is darkly displayed in the first mode image XH1, and the mode B image XH22 is displayed in the second mode image XH2, that is, the mode B remains.
After the decorative symbol stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R display the big hit symbol array in the case of a big hit, and the large symbol pattern array in the case of a big hit.

[W mode display effect B]
FIG. 150 is a diagram for explaining the W mode display effect B. In this W mode display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 150(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative design change effect, the variable display of the decorative design is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, and the first mode image XH1, the second mode image XH2, and the button image are displayed. XH3 is displayed. The first mode image XH1 is displayed on the main display screen 7a, and the second mode image XH2 and the button image XH3 are displayed on the left sub display screen 64L. The first mode image XH1 is composed of a mode A image XH11 representing the mode A, a mode B image XH12 representing the mode B, and a mode C image XH13 representing the mode C. The second mode image XH2 is composed of a mode A image XH21 representing the mode A, a mode B image XH22 representing the mode B, and a mode C image XH23 representing the mode C. In each mode, a background image, music, sound effect, appearance frequency of a predetermined character, character type, appearance frequency of chance up, expectation jackpot of chance up, and the like are set. These settings are different in Mode A to Mode C, respectively. In the first mode image XH1, the mode A image XH11, the mode B image XH12, and the mode C image XH13 are displayed in parallel without overlapping. On the other hand, in the second mode image XH2, the mode A image XH21, the mode B image XH22, and the mode C image XH23 are displayed so as to overlap each other. The button image XH3 is an image representing the select button 68, and is an image for prompting the player to change the mode by operating the select button 68. In this W mode display effect, the mode can be changed regardless of whether the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing or the reach effect. In the example of FIG. 150(A), the mode A is selected, the mode A image XH11 is darkly displayed in the first mode image XH1 (shown by hatching in the figure), and the second mode image XH2 is The mode A image XH21 is arranged at the top, which suggests that it is the mode A. Further, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R pass at high speed on the mode A image XH11, the mode B image XH12, and the mode C image XH13, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150(B), character appearance effect 1 is performed. In the character appearance effect 1, the character image XH4 is displayed on the main display screen 7a, and the character image XH4 moves on the main display screen 7a and moves on the mode A image XH11, the mode B image XH12, and the mode C image XH13. pass. In this case, the mode A image XH11, the mode B image XH12, and the mode C image XH13 are hidden by the character image XH4 when the character image XH4 is in front. Further, the player who sees the button image XH3 operates the select button 68 to change the mode from the mode A to the mode B. Therefore, in the first mode image XH1, the mode B image XH12 is displayed dark (indicated by hatching in the figure), and in the second mode image XH2, the mode B image XH22 is arranged at the top.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150(C), character appearance effect 2 is performed. In the character appearance effect 2, the character image XH4 moves to the left sub display screen 64L and moves to the position of the second mode image XH2. In this case, the character image XH4 moves behind the second mode image XH2, and the mode A image XH11, the mode B image XH12, and the mode C image XH13 are always visible. In FIG. 150(C), the mode B image XH12 is darkly displayed in the first mode image XH1, and the mode B image XH22 is displayed in the second mode image XH2, that is, the mode B remains.
After this character appearance production 2, the decoration symbols 8L, 8C, 8R display the big hit symbol array in the case of a big hit, and the big symbol pattern array in the case of a big hit.

[W mode display effect C]
FIG. 151 is a diagram for explaining the W mode display effect C. In this W mode display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 151(A), a decorative symbol variation effect is executed. In this decorative design change effect, the variable display of the decorative design is executed by the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, and the first mode image XH1, the second mode image XH2, and the button image are displayed. XH3 is displayed. The first mode image XH1 is displayed on the main display screen 7a, and the second mode image XH2 and the button image XH3 are displayed on the left sub display screen 64L. The first mode image XH1 is composed of a mode A image XH11 representing the mode A, a mode B image XH12 representing the mode B, and a mode C image XH13 representing the mode C. The second mode image XH2 is composed of a mode A image XH21 representing the mode A, a mode B image XH22 representing the mode B, and a mode C image XH23 representing the mode C. In each mode, a background image, music, sound effect, appearance frequency of a predetermined character, character type, appearance frequency of chance up, expectation jackpot of chance up, and the like are set. These settings are different in Mode A to Mode C, respectively. In the first mode image XH1, the mode A image XH11, the mode B image XH12, and the mode C image XH13 are displayed in parallel without overlapping. On the other hand, in the second mode image XH2, the mode A image XH21, the mode B image XH22, and the mode C image XH23 are displayed so as to overlap each other. The button image XH3 is an image representing the select button 68, and is an image for prompting the player to change the mode by operating the select button 68. In this W mode display effect, the mode can be changed regardless of whether the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changing or the reach effect. In the example of FIG. 151(A), the mode A is selected, the mode A image XH11 is darkly displayed in the first mode image XH1 (shown by hatching in the figure), and the second mode image XH2 is The mode A image XH21 is arranged at the top, which suggests that it is the mode A. Further, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R pass at high speed on the mode A image XH11, the mode B image XH12, and the mode C image XH13, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151(B), a mode change effect is performed. In this mode change effect, the player who sees the button image XH3 changes the mode from the mode A to the mode B by operating the select button 68. Therefore, in this mode change effect, the mode B image XH12 is darkly displayed in the first mode image XH1 (shown by hatching in the figure), and the mode B image XH22 is arranged at the top in the second mode image XH2. It

Next, as shown in FIG. 151(C), reach production is performed. In this reach effect, the decorative patterns 8L and 8R are stopped and displayed as a "7" symbol, and the decorative pattern 8C is variably displayed to form a reach state. Further, in this reach effect, the character image XH4 is displayed on the main display screen 7a, and the character image XH4 moves on the main display screen 7a and moves on the mode A image XH11, the mode B image XH12, and the mode C image XH13. pass. In this case, the mode A image XH11, the mode B image XH12, and the mode C image XH13 are hidden by the character image XH4 when the character image XH4 is in front. In this reach effect, mode B is continuously selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151(D), a button pressing effect is performed. In this button press effect, the button image XH5 is displayed together with the character image XH4. This button image XH5 represents the effect button 63, and is an image for urging the player to press the effect button 63. In this button press effect, mode B is continuously selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151(E), a chance-up effect is performed. In this chance-up effect, the character image XH6 is displayed when the player who sees the button image XH5 presses the effect button 63. This character image XH6 is described as "Gekiatsu", which is a chance increase suggesting that the jackpot expectation is relatively high. In this chance-up effect, mode B is continuously selected.
After this chance-up effect, the decoration symbols 8L, 8C, 8R display the jackpot symbol array in the case of a big hit, and the detached symbol array in the case of a hit.

[Modification]
In the W mode display effect, the mode A image XH21, the mode B image XH22, and the mode C image XH23 are arranged so as to overlap each other in the second mode image XH2 on the left sub-display screen 64L, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the 1-mode image XH1, the mode A image XH11, the mode B image XH12, and the mode C image XH13 may be arranged so as to overlap with each other. Further, in the second mode image XH2, the mode A image XH21, the mode B image XH22, and the mode C image XH23 may be arranged in parallel so as not to overlap.
In the W mode display effect, the first mode image XH1 and the second mode image XH2 are each composed of a mode A image, a mode B image, and a mode C image, but the present invention is not limited to this. .. For example, the first mode image XH1 and the second mode image XH2 may each be composed of different mode images. For example, a mode A image XH11, a mode B image XH12, and a mode C image XH13 are displayed as the first mode image XH1, and a mode D image and a mode indicating a mode D different from the modes A to C are displayed as the second mode image XH2. A mode E image different from A to D and a mode F image different from modes A to E may be displayed. The mode A image XH11, the mode B image XH12, and the mode C image XH13 are displayed as the first mode image XH1, and the mode A image XH21, the mode B image XH22, and the modes A to C are displayed as the second mode image XH2. You may make it display a different mode D image.

[Effect example]
In the W mode display effect, the first mode image XH1 is performed on the main display screen 7a, and the second mode image XH2 is displayed on the left sub display screen 64L. According to this configuration, since the mode display is performed on each of the two display devices, the player can easily recognize which mode the player is currently in and can enjoy the mode effect. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.
In the W mode display effect, the first mode image XH1 displayed on the main display screen 7a and the second mode image XH2 displayed on the left sub display screen 64L suggest the same mode. According to this configuration, since the same mode is displayed on each of the two display devices, the player can easily recognize one mode and can enjoy the mode effect. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.
In the W mode display effect, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed on the main display screen 7a, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed when the first mode image XH1 is displayed. In some cases, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the first mode image XH1 may overlap, in which case the first mode image XH1 is arranged behind the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C. , 8R at least partially hides. According to this configuration, the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is given priority over the mode display on the main display screen 7a, and the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is selected on the left sub display screen 64L. Since the display is prioritized, the player can easily grasp the mode and enjoy the mode effect while enjoying the game effect. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.
In the W mode display effect, the character image XH4 is displayed on the main display screen 7a, the character image XH4 is displayed when the first mode image XH1 is displayed, and the character image XH4 and the first mode image are displayed. XH1 may overlap, and in that case, the first mode image XH1 is arranged behind the character image XH4, and at least a part thereof is hidden by the character image XH4. According to this configuration, the variable display of the character image XH4 is given priority over the mode display on the main display screen 7a, and the mode display is given priority over the variable display of the character image XH4 on the left sub display screen 64L. The player can easily understand the mode and enjoy the mode effect while enjoying the game effect. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
[Aspect XH-1]
A gaming machine having display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects,
The display means includes a first display means and a second display means different from the first display means,
There is a case where a first display effect is performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
A second display effect may be performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The first display effect is an effect of performing a first mode suggestion display suggesting a mode on the first display means,
The second display effect is an effect of performing a second mode suggestion display suggesting a mode on the second display means,
In some cases, a combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XH-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect XH-1,
The mode represented by the first mode suggestion display is the same as the mode represented by the second mode suggestion display,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XH-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect XH-2,
There is a case where a third display effect is performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The third display effect is an effect of variably displaying a decorative symbol on the first display means,
The combination effect may include the third display effect,
In the combination effect, the third display effect is performed when the first display effect is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XH-4]
A gaming machine according to aspect XH-3,
In the combination effect, when the third display effect is performed while the first display effect is being performed, in the first display means, the first mode suggestion display and the decorative pattern are When overlapping, the first mode suggestion display is arranged behind the decorative pattern and is hidden by the decorative pattern,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XH-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect XH-4,
There is a case where a fourth display effect is performed as one of the plurality of display effects,
The fourth display effect is an effect for displaying a predetermined image different from the decorative pattern on the first display means,
The combination effect may include the fourth display effect,
In the combination effect, when the first display effect is performed, the fourth display effect is performed, and when the first mode suggestion display and the predetermined image overlap each other, The mode suggestion display of No. 1 is arranged behind the predetermined image and is hidden by the predetermined image,
A gaming machine characterized by that.
The following modes may be adopted.
The first mode suggestion display (first mode image XH1) and the second mode suggestion display (second mode image XH2) are displayed simultaneously.
The first mode suggestion display includes a plurality of mode displays, and the plurality of mode displays are displayed so as not to overlap each other.
The second mode suggestion display includes a plurality of mode displays, and the plurality of mode displays are displayed so as to overlap each other.
The first display means (main display screen 7a) has a larger display screen area than the second display means (left sub display screen 64L).
A predetermined image (character image XH4, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, etc.) may be displayed on the first display means and the second display means, and the predetermined image overlaps the second mode suggestion display. When in the position, the second mode suggestion display is located in front of the predetermined image and is visible, and when the predetermined image is in a position overlapping the first mode suggestion display, the first mode suggestion display is present. The display is located behind the predetermined image, and the overlapping portion cannot be visually recognized.
In the second display means, the second mode suggestion display corresponds to the first operation unit image (for example, button image XH3) showing the first operation unit (for example, select button 68) for changing the mode. A second operation unit image (for example, button image XH5) representing the second operation unit (for example, the effect button 63) is displayed on the first display means, and the second operation unit is played. By a person operating, a predetermined effect (for example, display of the character image XH6) different from the mode change is performed (see W mode display effect C).

The movable part operation warning effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 152 to 154. 152 to 154, for example, the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and other movable accessory disposed around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are easy to see in the drawings. Therefore, it is omitted.

This movable part operation warning effect can be executed after the power supply to the game machine 1 is turned on, and can also be executed during the variable effect by the decorative pattern (during the variable display). That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (for example, variation effect start command) received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the movable part operation warning effect, the ROM 103 corresponds to the instruction. The image data is read and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the sub display screen 64 (the right sub display screen 64R, the left sub display screen 64L, and the upper sub display screen 64U).

Here, a method of locking the sword member 65 on the upper tray 61 will be described, and the movable part operation warning effect A and the movable part operation warning effect B will be sequentially described.

[How to lock the sword member 65 on the upper plate 61]
First, a method of locking the sword member 65 on the upper plate 61 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 152 is a diagram for explaining a method of locking the sword member 65 on the upper tray 61.

As described above, the sword member 65 is an operation unit that imitates the shape of a sword, and can be pushed downward by the player at the time of performance executed as the game progresses. Therefore, the sword member 65 is a movable portion that allows the player to push the entire sword member downward. A sword button (not shown) is provided at the upper end of the sword member 65, that is, the end of the handle of the sword. The sword button is an operation unit, and is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of performance performed as the game progresses. Therefore, the sword button is a movable part that can be operated (pressed) by the player. The sword member 65 is configured to be able to execute two different operations, a first operation of pushing the entire sword member 65 downward and a second operation of pushing the sword button at the tip.

The sword portion and the handle portion of the sword member 65 are decorative members capable of emitting light, and are capable of emitting light in a predetermined light emitting mode in accordance with the progress of production. In other words, the sword member 65 has a decoration member, and various lights can be emitted in a light emission mode by the light emission of the decoration member.

To lock the sword member 65 on the upper tray 61, first, as shown in FIG. 152(A), insert the sword member 65 into an insertion opening (not shown) provided on the upper left side of the upper tray 61 and push it downward. While rotating in the counterclockwise direction HTY. Then, as shown in FIG. 152(B), the sword member 65 and the upper plate 61 are completely locked by continuing to rotate until there is a click.

In the state in which this lock is completed, assuming that the vertical direction of the sword member 65 is an axis for the player sitting on the front surface of the gaming machine 1, the sword member 65 is slightly rotated around this axis. The player is in a posture that allows the player to easily grasp the handle portion of the sword member 65 with both hands and push the sword member 65 downward.

A lock completion sensor (not shown) for detecting the lock completion of the sword member 65 is provided inside the upper plate 61, and a detection signal from the lock completion sensor is input to the sub control board 90. The detection signal from the lock completion sensor has a lock completion logic when the sword member 65 is locked to the upper plate 61 (hereinafter, referred to as “lock completion”), and the sword member 65 is locked to the upper plate 61. The electric circuit is constructed so that the lock completion logic is inverted when the lock state is not present (hereinafter referred to as “lock incomplete”).

If the wiring to which the detection signal from the lock completion sensor is transmitted is broken due to fraud, or if the connector at one end of this wiring and the connector on the board are about to come off, the detection signal from the lock completion sensor will be detected. As for the logic, an electric circuit is preassembled so as to be a lock incomplete logic. As a result, it is possible to notify the sub CPU 92 of the sub control board 90 that some trouble has occurred in the wiring that transmits the detection signal from the lock completion sensor, and the sub CPU 92 of the sub control board 90 warns of this trouble. It can be notified by an image or a warning sound (specific sound).

In addition to the sword member 65 which can be operated by the player, the upper plate 61 is also provided with an effect button 63 and a select button 68 which can be operated by the player. The effect button 63 is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of effect executed as the game progresses. Therefore, the effect button 63 is a movable portion that can be operated (pressed) by the player. In addition, the select button 68 is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of performance executed as the game progresses, or operated (pressed) by the player at the time of changing a predetermined setting of the gaming machine 1. To do. Therefore, the select button 68 is a movable portion that can be operated (pressed) by the player. As described above, the upper plate 61 is provided with the sword member 65, the sword button of the sword member 65, the effect button 63, and the select button 68 as a plurality of movable parts that can be operated (pressed) by the player. Further, since all the movable parts are arranged on the upper plate 61 which is easily visible, all the movable parts are arranged at positions where the player can easily recognize them.

Further, the effect button 63 has a pressing member formed by a transparent member that is operated (pressed) by the player, and a decorative member capable of emitting light is provided inside the pressing member. When the decorative member emits light, the light passes through the pressing member, and the effect button 63 can emit light in a predetermined light emitting mode.

The select button 68 includes a transparent member as a pressing member operated (pressed) by the player, and a decorative member capable of emitting light is provided inside the pressing member. When the decorative member emits light, the light passes through the pressing member, and the select button 68 can emit light in a predetermined light emitting manner. The pressing member of the select button 68 may be formed of an opaque member (for example, a member having black color). In this case, a decorative member capable of emitting light is not provided inside the pressing member of the select button 68, and the select button 68 does not emit light.

[Moveable part operation warning effect A]
Next, the movable part operation warning effect A will be described with reference to FIG. 153. FIG. 153 is a diagram for explaining the movable part operation warning effect A. The movable part operation warning effect A can be executed after the game machine 1 is powered on, and can also be executed during the variable effect due to the decorative pattern (during variable display). Here, the movable part operation warning effect A that is executed during the variable effect (during the variable display) by the decorative pattern will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 153(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative design 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative design 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. In the display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side, the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (symbol: the number “1” to the number “9”) is started. When the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative design is started, the display of the decorative design that is stopped and displayed changes from the opaque state to the translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed to the high speed display mode. .. Thereby, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semitransparent decorative pattern which is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped). Note that the decorative pattern is in a display mode in which the decorative pattern moves in small increments in the vertical direction when the temporary stop display is performed.

The variation icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, which are currently changing as the end of the first special map reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (on the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (on the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad from the position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The reserved display positions 9Ad are arranged and displayed linearly along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

Here, the black spherical variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, the white spherical retention icon 9A is displayed at each of the first suspension display position 9Ad to the third suspension display position 9Ad, and the fourth suspension display position 9Ad is displayed. No hold icon is displayed at the hold display position 9Ad. In other words, there are only three stock icons that have been stocked without being digested. In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting opening 20 and the second starting opening 21.

In addition, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbol, is supported. In addition to the hold icon 9A, which corresponds to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 The special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21 are arranged and displayed as unillustrated numbers on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 is shown in blue on the left side, and the number of the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21 is shown in red. The numbers are arranged on the upper side of the center of the display screen 7a so as to be spaced apart from each other on the right side and are always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as the number of reserved balls as numerical values, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and it is easy to intuitively understand. Note that these numbers are arranged on the forefront side of the display screen 7a and other images are displayed behind the foreground of the display screen 7a so that visibility is not hindered by the other images. It is like this.

Here, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “icon”) will be briefly described. Due to the difference in shape and color, the difference in expectation in winning in the lottery corresponding to the icon. Is represented. For example, of the four icons, a yellow (gold) star icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest likelihood of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hit, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hit, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hit. The smile sphere icon is further set to have a high expectation of being a jackpot in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (Rainbow (hit jackpot)).

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started in FIG. 153(A), thereafter, as shown in FIG. 153(B), an effect button image BG simulating the effect button 63 is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. An arrow image YBG that is displayed large and moves vertically above the effect button image BG is displayed, and a message MG1 that prompts the operation (press) of the effect button 63 is displayed near the upper side of the display screen 7a. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, the change icon 9C, and the hold icon 9A all disappear from the display screen 7a.

After that, when the player does not operate (press) the effect button 63 and rotates the sword member 65 in a direction opposite to the counterclockwise direction HTY shown in FIG. 152(A), that is, clockwise, FIG. 153(C). As shown in FIG. 15, the image shown in FIG. 153B is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a to urge the player to operate (press) the effect button 63, and the right sub display screen 64R of the sub display screen 64 is displayed. Alternatively, a warning image is displayed on the left sub display screen 64L. That is, a warning is issued by the player operating the sword member 65 (rotating in the clockwise direction). Here, since the player operates the sword member 65 (rotates in the statistical direction), the player does not gain anything and no sense of accomplishment is obtained, and a warning is issued.

This warning image is a warning image that notifies that the locking of the sword member 65 has not been completed, and further that a warning release method. In other words, the warning image is an image notifying that the locking of the sword member 65 is incomplete, and further is an image that conveys the method of completing the locking of the sword member 65.

The sword member 65 is imitated in the center of the right sub display screen 64R or the left sub display screen 64L, and the lock incomplete sword image has the same posture as when the sword member 65 is incompletely locked. KG is displayed. A message MG2 "Warning" is displayed below the incompletely locked sword image KG, and a message "Please turn the sword member in the direction of the arrow until it clicks to complete the lock" is displayed below the message MG2. MG3 is displayed, and a counterclockwise arrow image YG indicating the rotation direction is displayed around the center of the lock-uncompleted sword image KG.

While the warning image is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L, the message MG3 saying "Please turn the sword member in the direction of the arrow until it clicks to complete the lock" is displayed. Is repeatedly emitted from the speaker 67 as a notification sound (specific sound) for notifying a warning. In other words, in the present embodiment, the dedicated sound for notifying the warning is not provided, and the voice of the message MG3 for notifying the warning cancellation method is also used as the sound for notifying the warning. In other words, the warning sound has both the function of sounding the warning and the function of the sound of the message MG3 that conveys the warning cancellation method.

Then, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 153(D), the player operates (presses) the ally character CRA to appear in the center of the display screen 7a. The production condition is achieved. At this time, the warning image shown in FIG. 153C is continuously displayed on the right sub display screen 64R or the left sub display screen 64L of the sub display screen 64.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the teammate character CRA is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a, it indicates the start of an effect with a high expectation of a big hit. When the ally character CRA is displayed in a large size in the center, the sense of expectation for the progressing performance increases.

Here, the player has a sense of accomplishment that the ally character CRA appears when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63. Even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the ally character CRA may not appear in the center of the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, various effects may be further continued, and when the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are stopped and displayed with the same design (for example, the number "7"), it is a big hit. After that, the big hit game (big hit production) is started, while the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are not stopped and displayed in the same design (for example, the number "7"), It will be out of the way. When the jackpot or the deviation is confirmed, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the change icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the change.

Note that after FIG. 153(D), the player mistakenly rotates the sword member 65 from the clockwise direction to the original state, so when the sword member 65 is rotated counterclockwise, On the right sub display screen 64R or the left sub display screen 64L of the sub display screen 64, the warning image disappears, and the message MG3 "Please turn the sword member in the direction of the arrow until it clicks to complete the lock" is displayed. Will not be heard from the speaker 67.

[Moveable part operation warning effect B]
Next, the movable part operation warning effect B will be described with reference to FIG. 154. FIG. 154 is a diagram for explaining the movable part operation warning effect B. The movable part operation warning effect B can be executed after the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is turned on, and can also be executed during the variable effect due to the decorative pattern (during variable display). Here, the movable part operation warning effect B executed during the variable effect (during the variable display) by the decorative pattern will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 154(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative design 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative design 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative design 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed on the display screen 7a. In the display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side, the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (symbol: number "1" to number "9") is started. When the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative design is started, the display of the decorative design that is stopped and displayed changes from the opaque state to the translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from the low speed to the high speed display mode. .. Thereby, the background image arranged behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the semitransparent decorative pattern which is changing at high speed. The decorative pattern decelerates immediately before stopping and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped). Note that the decorative pattern is in a display mode in which the decorative pattern moves in small increments in the vertical direction when the temporary stop display is performed.

The variation icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R, which are currently changing as the end of the first special map reservation, is displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the variable display position 9Cd (on the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the variable display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (on the rectangular image), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are the first hold display position 9Ad, the second hold display position 9Ad, the third hold display position 9Ad, and the fourth hold display position 9Ad from the position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a. The reserved display positions 9Ad are arranged and displayed linearly along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of the reserved display position 9Ad.

Here, the yellow (gold) star-shaped variation icon 9C is displayed at the variation display position 9Cd, and white spherical retention icons 9A are respectively displayed at the first retention display position 9Ad to the third retention display position 9Ad. The hold icon is displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, there are only three stock icons that have been stocked without being digested. In the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting opening 20 and the second starting opening 21.

In addition, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable effect (variable display) of the decorative symbol, is supported. In addition to the hold icon 9A, which corresponds to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 The special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21 are arranged and displayed as unillustrated numbers on the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The number of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20 is shown in blue on the left side, and the number of the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 21 is shown in red. The numbers are arranged on the upper side of the center of the display screen 7a so as to be spaced apart from each other on the right side and are always displayed. Since these numbers are displayed as the number of reserved balls as numerical values, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish the various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and it is easy to intuitively understand. Note that these numbers are arranged on the forefront side of the display screen 7a and other images are displayed behind the foreground of the display screen 7a so that visibility is not hindered by the other images. It is like this.

Here, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as “icon”) will be briefly described. Due to the difference in shape and color, the difference in expectation in winning in the lottery corresponding to the icon. Is represented. For example, of the four icons, a yellow (gold) star icon, a black spherical icon, a smiling sphere icon, and a white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star icon has the highest likelihood of winning. The black spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hit, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hit, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hit. The smile sphere icon is further set to have a high expectation of being a jackpot in the order of, for example, blue→green→red→gold (yellow)→seven colors (Rainbow (hit jackpot)).

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern is started in FIG. 154(A), thereafter, as shown in FIG. 154(B), the sword member 65 is imitated, and the sword member 65 is completely locked. The lock completion sword image PG in the same attitude as when the lock completion sword is being displayed is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and an arrow image YPG moving vertically is displayed to the right of the lock completion sword image PG. A message MG1 is displayed near the upper side of 7a to urge the operation (pushing downward) of the sword member 65. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, the change icon 9C, and the hold icon 9A all disappear from the display screen 7a.

After that, the player does not operate (push downward) the sword member 65 and rotates the sword member 65 in a direction opposite to the counterclockwise direction HTY shown in FIG. As shown in (C), the image shown in FIG. 154(B) is continuously displayed on the display screen 7a to urge the player to operate the sword member 65 (push it downward), and the sub-display screen 64 is displayed. A warning image is displayed on the right sub display screen 64R or the left sub display screen 64L. That is, a warning is issued by the player operating the sword member 65 (rotating in the clockwise direction). Here, since the player operates the sword member 65 (rotates in the statistical direction), the player does not gain anything and no sense of accomplishment is obtained, and a warning is issued.

This warning image is a warning image that notifies that the locking of the sword member 65 has not been completed, and further that a warning release method. In other words, the warning image is an image notifying that the locking of the sword member 65 is incomplete, and further is an image that conveys the method of completing the locking of the sword member 65.

The sword member 65 is imitated in the center of the right sub display screen 64R or the left sub display screen 64L, and the lock incomplete sword image has the same posture as when the sword member 65 is incompletely locked. KG is displayed. A message MG2 "Warning" is displayed below the incompletely locked sword image KG, and a message "Please turn the sword member in the direction of the arrow until it clicks to complete the lock" is displayed below the message MG2. MG3 is displayed, and a counterclockwise arrow image YG indicating the rotation direction is displayed around the center of the lock-uncompleted sword image KG.

While the warning image is displayed on the right sub-display screen 64R or the left sub-display screen 64L, the message MG3 saying "Please turn the sword member in the direction of the arrow until it clicks to complete the lock" is displayed. Is repeatedly emitted from the speaker 67 as a notification sound (specific sound) for notifying a warning. In other words, in the present embodiment, the dedicated sound for notifying the warning is not provided, and the voice of the message MG3 for notifying the warning cancellation method is also used as the sound for notifying the warning. In other words, the warning sound has both the function of sounding the warning and the function of the sound of the message MG3 that conveys the warning cancellation method.

Then, when the player operates (pushes downward) the sword member 65, as shown in FIG. 154(D), the player operates (presses) the display of the ally character CRA at the center of the display screen 7a. The production condition that "appears" is achieved. At this time, the warning image shown in FIG. 154(C) is continuously displayed on the right sub display screen 64R or the left sub display screen 64L of the sub display screen 64.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the teammate character CRA is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a, it indicates the start of an effect with a high expectation of a big hit. When the ally character CRA is displayed in a large size in the center, the sense of expectation for the progressing performance increases.

Here, the player has a sense of accomplishment that the ally character CRA appears due to the player operating (pushing downward) the sword member 65. Even if the player operates the sword member 65 (pushing it downward), the ally character CRA may not appear in the center of the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, various effects may be further continued, and when the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are stopped and displayed with the same design (for example, the number "7"), it is a big hit. After that, the big hit game (big hit production) is started, while the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are not stopped and displayed in the same design (for example, the number "7"), It will be out of the way. When the jackpot or the deviation is confirmed, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the change icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the change.

Note that after FIG. 154(D), the player mistakenly rotates the sword member 65 from the clockwise direction to the original state, so when the sword member 65 is rotated counterclockwise, On the right sub display screen 64R or the left sub display screen 64L of the sub display screen 64, the warning image disappears, and the message MG3 "Please turn the sword member in the direction of the arrow until it clicks to complete the lock" is displayed. Will not be heard from the speaker 67.

[Effect example]
Below, the example of an effect of movable part operation warning production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the movable part operation warning effect A of FIG. 153 and the movable part operation warning effect B of FIG. 154, the player can operate the effect button 63 and the sword member 65 (movable part). Having (having a plurality of movable parts), the movable part has a first effect (movable part operation warning effect A shown in FIG. 153 (D)) that can be achieved by an operation by the player. 154 (D) in the section operation warning effect B, and the second effect (movable section operation warning effect A in FIG. 153 (C), (D), movable section operation) in which a warning is issued by the player's operation. 154 (C) and (D)) can be executed in the warning effect B. According to this configuration, there are a case where the player operates the performance condition to obtain a sense of accomplishment, and a case where the player operates the player cannot obtain a sense of achievement and a warning is issued. Since the effect obtained by the movable part operated by the player can be made different, a sense of accomplishment can be obtained when there are a plurality of movable parts that the player can operate. It is possible to easily emphasize which movable portion can be formed. Therefore, interest can be improved.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the movable part operation warning effect A of FIG. 153 and the movable part operation warning effect B of FIG. 154, the second effect is simultaneously performed while the first effect is in progress. It is ready to run. According to this configuration, even if the player's operation achieves a sense of accomplishment by achieving the effect condition, the player can be alerted by always maintaining a situation in which a warning can be issued. This can contribute to the suppression of such operations.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the movable part operation warning effect A of FIG. 153 and the movable part operation warning effect B of FIG. 154, a sub display screen 64 (display means) capable of displaying a plurality of types of images is provided. However, in the second effect, a warning image (specific image) that conveys the warning cancellation method is displayed. According to this configuration, since the warning image (specific image) that conveys the warning cancellation method is displayed on the sub display screen 64 (display unit), it is possible to promptly respond by knowing the warning cancellation procedure. In addition, the player can easily notice that there is a problem with the operation of the movable part of the player, and it is possible to contribute to the prevention of the operation of the player with respect to the movable part where a warning is issued.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, in the second effect in the movable part operation warning effect A of FIG. 153 and the movable part operation warning effect B of FIG. 154, a notification sound (specific sound) for warning is output. You can do it. According to this configuration, the notification sound (specific sound) first causes the player to recognize the point where the warning is issued, and the action performed by the player immediately before the notification sound (specific sound) is issued is not good. Can convey that it is an act.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the effect button 63 (movable part) in the movable part operation warning effect A of FIG. 153 and the sword member 65 (movable part) in the movable part operation warning effect B of FIG. 154 emit light. You can do it. According to this configuration, the movable portion that can be operated by the player is further illuminated and emphasized, so that the player is prompted to operate the movable portion. Can contribute to that.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the effect button 63 (movable part) in the movable part operation warning effect A of FIG. 153 and the sword member 65 (movable part) in the movable part operation warning effect B of FIG. 154 are decorative members. To have. According to this configuration, the movable portion that can be operated by the player can be decorated with the decoration member to be emphasized, which can contribute to making the presence of the movable portion noticeable to the player.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, the effect button 63 (movable part) in the movable part operation warning effect A of FIG. 153 and the sword member 65 (movable part) in the movable part operation warning effect B of FIG. It is supposed to be placed in a different position. According to this configuration, the arrangement of the movable portion can be easily understood by the player.

[Modification]
The following is a modification of the movable part operation warning effect.
[Modification 1]
The movable part operation warning effect A in FIG. 153 and the movable part operation warning effect B in FIG. In other words, it was performed in a so-called left-handed gaming state. However, it may be performed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second starting opening 21. In other words, it may be performed in a so-called right-handed gaming state.

[Modification 2]
In the movable part operation warning effect A of FIG. 153(C) and the movable part operation warning effect B of FIG. 154(C), a notification sound (specific sound) for notifying a warning can be output. However, the notification sound (specific sound) may not be output. That is, the warning image may be displayed on the right sub display screen 64R or the left sub display screen 64L. Further, as the output of the notification sound (specific sound), the volume of the notification sound (specific sound) may be lower than the volume of the effect sound for the effect unfolded on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In this way, the effect sound for the effect unfolded on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is not hindered, and the winning and winning result that is most interesting to the player is advanced for the time being by the effect on the display screen 7a and derived. Can be displayed.

[Modification 3]
In the movable part operation warning effect A of FIG. 153(C) and the movable part operation warning effect B of FIG. 154(C), the first special figure hold and the second start based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 20. The second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the mouth 21 is arranged and displayed as a numeral not shown in the upper center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Since these numbers are displayed as the number of holding balls as numerical values, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish them by being confused with various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, since the image is arranged on the forefront side of the display screen 7a and the other image is displayed behind the foreground of the display screen 7a, the visibility is not hindered by the other image. It was In the present embodiment, when the movable part operation warning effect is started, the warning image is displayed on the right sub display screen 64R or the left sub display screen 64L of the sub display screen 64. When displaying on the display screen 64R, a number displayed with the number of holding balls as a numerical value may be displayed on the left sub display screen 64L, or a warning image is displayed on the left sub display screen 64L. In this case, a number displayed with the number of reserved balls as a numerical value may be displayed on the right sub display screen 64R. By doing this, the number displayed as the number of holding balls can be displayed on another sub-display screen different from the warning image, and the number displayed as the number of holding balls can be displayed. It is possible to make it difficult to make a distinction due to various background images and various decorative images displayed on the screen 7a, and to make it intuitively easy to understand.

[Modification 4]
The movable part operation warning effect A in FIG. 153(C) and the movable part operation warning effect B in FIG. 154(C) are executed during the variable effect by the decorative pattern (during the variable display). However, the movable part operation warning effect can be executed after the power supply to the game machine 1 is turned on. When the game machine 1 is turned on, for example, waiting for a customer is irrespective of the change effect (during the change display). It can also be executed in the demonstration production for. That is, when the sub CPU 92 of the sub control board 90 determines that the sword member 65 has not been locked based on the detection signal from the lock completion sensor, the warning image or the warning sound (specific sound) is issued. be able to. In this way, regardless of the progress of the production, and further, regardless of the state of the game, when the sword member 65 is incompletely locked, it can be notified by a warning image or a warning sound (specific sound).

[Modification 5]
In the movable part operation warning effect A of FIG. 153(C) and the movable part operation warning effect B of FIG. 154(C), the fact that the sword member 65 has not been locked is determined based on the detection signal from the lock completion sensor. Then, when the sub CPU 92 of the sub control board 90 makes a determination, it is possible to notify by a warning image or a warning sound (specific sound). However, a special lever that can be operated by the player is arranged and provided near the cylinder lock CYK (see FIGS. 152(A) and (B)) on the front frame 53 and at a position easily visible. May be. When the key is inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and rotated in a predetermined direction and the special lever is operated (pushed downward), the front frame 53 is released from the inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached. It has become. When the special lever is operated (pushed downward), it is detected by the special lever detection sensor, and the detection signal from the special lever detection sensor is input to the sub control board 90. The detection signal from the special lever detection sensor has an opening operation logic when the special lever is operated (pushed downward), and an opening operation when the special lever is not operated (pushed downward). The electric circuit is constructed so as to be a closed logic with the logic inverted.

Further, when a key is inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and is rotated in a predetermined direction, this operation is detected by the cylinder lock detection sensor, and the detection signal from the cylinder lock detection sensor is dispensed. It is input to the substrate 110. The detection signal from the cylinder lock detection sensor is an open logic when the key is inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and is rotated in a predetermined direction, and the key is inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and rotated in a predetermined direction. The electric circuit is constructed so that the closed logic is the inverted open logic when it is not operated. The payout control board 110 transmits a command to the main control board 80 when the key is inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and is rotated in a predetermined direction, and the main control board 80 that has received the command indicates to that effect. Is transmitted to the sub control board 90. Accordingly, the sub CPU 92 of the sub control board 90 can recognize that the key is inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and the sub lock is rotated in a predetermined direction.

The sub CPU 92 operates the special lever based on the detection signal from the special lever detection sensor in a state where the sub CPU 92 does not know that the key is inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and is rotated in a predetermined direction. When it is determined that it is in the state of being pushed (downward), a warning image may be displayed on the right sub display screen 64R or the left sub display screen 64L, or a warning sound (specific sound) may be played from the speaker 67. it can. The warning image is an image simulating a special lever in place of the lock-uncompleted sword image KG shown in FIGS. 153(C), (D) and 154(C), (D). The message MG3 "Please raise in the direction of the arrow until it clicks" is displayed. Further, instead of the counterclockwise arrow image YG shown in FIGS. 153(C) and (D) and FIGS. 154(C) and (D), an upward arrow image YG is displayed. ..

At least, if the wiring through which the detection signal from the special lever detection sensor is transmitted is broken due to misconduct or the connector at one end of this wiring and the connector on the board are about to come off, the special lever detection sensor will An electric circuit is preliminarily assembled so that the detection signal has a logic of an open operation logic. As a result, it is possible to inform the sub CPU 92 of the sub control board 90 that some trouble has occurred in the wiring that transmits the detection signal from the special lever detection sensor, and the sub CPU 92 of the sub control board 90 can report this trouble. It can be notified by a warning image or a warning sound (specific sound). Also, if the wiring to which the detection signal from the cylinder lock detection sensor is transmitted is broken due to fraud, or if the connector at one end of this wiring and the connector on the board are coming off, the cylinder lock detection sensor will detect The electric logic may be pre-assembled so that the signal logic is an open logic.

By the way, the open state and the closed state of the front frame 53 and the inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached are detected by the front frame closing detection sensor. Detection signal is input to the payout control board 110. The detection signal from the front frame closing detection sensor is a closing logic when the front frame 53 and the inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached are closed, and the front frame 53 and the game board 2 are attached. The electric circuit is constructed so that when the frame is open, the closed logic is inverted to open logic.

If the wiring through which the detection signal from the closure detection sensor is transmitted is broken due to fraud, or if the connector at one end of this wiring and the connector on the board are about to come off, the logic of the detection signal from the closure detection sensor will change. , An electric circuit is pre-assembled so as to have an open logic. As a result, it is possible to notify the payout control board 110 that some trouble has occurred in the wiring that transmits the detection signal from the closing detection sensor, and the payout control board 110 sends this trouble to the main control board 80 as a command. The main control board 80 which has transmitted the command and has received this command transmits a command to that effect to the sub-control board 90. Thereby, the sub-control board 90 can notify by the door opening image and the door opening sound when the front frame 53 and the inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached are in the opened state.

Although the front frame 53 and the inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached are opened by a staff member or a worker, they may be opened by a fraudulent act. Therefore, the front frame 53 and the game board 2 are attached. The inner frame and the state of the inner frame (open state, closed state) are monitored. For this reason, when the front frame 53 and the inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached are opened, it is necessary to provide an image with high alertness that can be transmitted to the periphery of the game machine 1 compared to the warning image. Furthermore, it is necessary to make the notification sound that can be transmitted to the vicinity of the gaming machine 1 as compared with the warning sound (specific sound).

In other words, the sub CPU 92, in a state in which it cannot grasp that the key is inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and is rotated in the predetermined direction, based on the detection signal from the special lever detection sensor, When it is determined that the lever is operated (pushed downward), a warning image is displayed on the right sub display screen 64R or the left sub display screen 64L, and a warning sound (specific sound) is output from the speaker 67. On the other hand, the sub CPU 92 grasps that the key is inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and is rotated in a predetermined direction, and further, based on the detection signal from the special lever detection sensor. When it is determined that the special lever is operated (pushed downward), a door opening image having a higher alertness that can be transmitted to the periphery of the gaming machine 1 compared to the warning image is displayed on the right sub display screen 64R. Alternatively, instead of the left sub display screen 64L, a door opening sound that is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and can be transmitted to the surroundings of the gaming machine 1 compared to the warning sound (specific sound) is provided. It flows from the speaker 67.

[Modification 6]
In the movable part operation warning effect A of FIG. 153(C) and the movable part operation warning effect B of FIG. 154(C), the fact that the sword member 65 has not been locked is determined based on the detection signal from the lock completion sensor. Then, when the sub CPU 92 of the sub control board 90 makes a determination, it is possible to notify by a warning image or a warning sound (specific sound). However, in order to fix other members arranged on the front frame 53 or other members arranged on the game board 2 to the specific decorative portion attached to the front frame 53 (the effect by electric decoration can also be performed). A movable part having the function of may be provided. The movable portion is arranged at a position visible to the player and can be operated by touching. This movable part is basically operated by a staff member or a worker when the game machine 1 is installed in the game hall. By continuing the rotation of the movable part in the counterclockwise direction until there is a click, for example, other members arranged on the front frame 53 or other members arranged on the game board 2 can be fixed, The lock is completed.

Inside the front frame 53 to which the specific decorative portion is attached, a specific decorative portion lock completion sensor for detecting the lock completion of the movable portion is provided, and a detection signal from the specific decorative portion lock completion sensor is sent to the sub-control board 90. It has been entered. The detection signal from the specific decorative portion lock completion sensor is in a state in which the other member arranged on the front frame 53 or the other member arranged on the game board 2 is fixed and locked (hereinafter, "specific decorative portion lock completed"). When the movable portion is not rotated or is fixed until there is a click, for example, in the counterclockwise direction, the movable portion is not locked. When the other member arranged on the front frame 53 or the other member arranged on the game board 2 is not fixed (hereinafter, referred to as “unlocked specific decorative portion”), it is specified. An electric circuit is assembled so that the decoration portion lock completion logic is inverted to the specific decoration portion lock incomplete logic. When the sub CPU 92 of the sub control board 90 determines that the lock of the specific decorative portion is not completed based on the detection signal from the lock sensor of the specific decorative portion, the warning image is displayed on the right sub display screen 64R or the left sub display screen 64L. Or a warning sound (specific sound) can be played from the speaker 67. Note that the warning image is an image simulating a specific decorative portion, instead of the lock-uncompleted sword image KG shown in FIGS. 153(C), (D) and 154(C), (D), and the “specific A message MG3 is displayed that says, "Please turn the decorative part in the direction of the arrow until it clicks to complete the lock."

If the wiring to which the detection signal from the specific decorative portion lock completion sensor is transmitted is broken due to misconduct or the connector at one end of this wiring and the connector on the board are about to come off, the specific decorative portion lock completion is completed. As for the logic of the detection signal from the sensor, an electric circuit is preassembled so that the lock of the specific decorative portion is not completed. As a result, it is possible to inform the sub CPU 92 of the sub control board 90 that some trouble has occurred in the wiring that transmits the detection signal from the specific decorative portion lock completion sensor, and the sub CPU 92 of the sub control board 90 can A trouble can be notified by a warning image or a warning sound (specific sound).

[Modification 7]
In the movable part operation warning effect A of FIG. 153(C) and the movable part operation warning effect B of FIG. 154(C), the fact that the sword member 65 has not been locked is determined based on the detection signal from the lock completion sensor. Then, when the sub CPU 92 of the sub control board 90 makes a determination, it is possible to notify by a warning image or a warning sound (specific sound). However, it is also possible to detect that an unauthorized device has been inserted into the cylinder lock CYK (see FIGS. 152(A) and 152(B) ), and notify by a warning image or a warning sound (specific sound). In the cylinder lock CYK, when an unauthorized instrument is inserted into the key insertion port, the internal cylinder (movable part) may slightly rotate (may rotate halfway). That is, the internal cylinder (movable part) may be operated by the player.

When an illicit device is inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and the internal cylinder (movable part) is slightly rotated, the cylinder lock detection sensor detects that the internal cylinder (movable part) is not completely rotated. The detection signal from the cylinder lock detection sensor is input to the payout control board 110. The detection signal from the cylinder lock detection sensor becomes an illegal opening logic when the illegal tool is inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and the internal cylinder (movable part) is not completely rotated, and the illegal signal is given to the cylinder lock CYK. Is inserted and the internal cylinder (movable part) is not rotated, the electric circuit is assembled so that the normal closing logic is obtained by inverting the illegal opening logic. The payout control board 110 transmits a command to the main control board 80 and receives the command when an illegal instrument is inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and the internal cylinder (movable part) is not completely rotated. The main control board 80 sends a command to that effect to the sub control board 90. Thereby, the sub CPU 92 of the sub control board 90 can grasp that the illegal tool is inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and the internal cylinder (movable part) is not completely rotated. The warning image is an image simulating a cylinder lock, instead of the lock-uncompleted sword image KG shown in FIGS. 153(C), (D) and 154(C), (D). The message MG3 is displayed. "Please turn in the direction of the arrow until it clicks and lock it."

When the sub CPU 92 determines that the internal cylinder (movable part) is not completely rotated due to the unauthorized device being inserted into the cylinder lock CYK, the warning image is displayed on the right sub display screen 64R or the left sub display screen. It can be displayed on 64 L, and a warning sound (specific sound) can be played from the speaker 67. The warning image is an image simulating the cylinder lock CYK instead of the lock-uncompleted sword image KG shown in FIGS. 153(C), (D) and 154(C), (D).

If the wiring to which the detection signal from the cylinder lock detection sensor is transmitted is broken due to fraud, or if the connector at one end of this wiring and the connector on the board are about to come off, the cylinder lock detection sensor detects it. An electric circuit is pre-assembled so that the signal logic is an unauthorized opening logic. As a result, it is possible to inform the sub CPU 92 of the sub control board 90 that some trouble has occurred in the wiring that transmits the detection signal from the cylinder lock detection sensor, and the sub CPU 92 of the sub control board 90 can report this trouble. It can be notified by a warning image or a warning sound (specific sound).

By the way, the open state and the closed state of the front frame 53 and the inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached are detected by the front frame closing detection sensor. Detection signal is input to the payout control board 110. The detection signal from the front frame closing detection sensor is a closing logic when the front frame 53 and the inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached are closed, and the front frame 53 and the game board 2 are attached. The electric circuit is constructed so that when the frame is open, the closed logic is inverted to open logic.

If the wiring through which the detection signal from the closure detection sensor is transmitted is broken due to fraud, or if the connector at one end of this wiring and the connector on the board are about to come off, the logic of the detection signal from the closure detection sensor will change. , An electric circuit is pre-assembled so as to have an open logic. As a result, it is possible to notify the payout control board 110 that some trouble has occurred in the wiring that transmits the detection signal from the closing detection sensor, and the payout control board 110 sends this trouble to the main control board 80 as a command. The main control board 80 which has transmitted the command and has received this command transmits a command to that effect to the sub-control board 90. Thereby, the sub-control board 90 can notify by the door opening image and the door opening sound when the front frame 53 and the inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached are in the opened state.

Although the front frame 53 and the inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached are opened by a staff member or a worker, they may be opened by a fraudulent act. Therefore, the front frame 53 and the game board 2 are attached. The inner frame and the state of the inner frame (open state, closed state) are monitored. For this reason, when the front frame 53 and the inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached are opened, it is necessary to provide an image with high alertness that can be transmitted to the periphery of the game machine 1 compared to the warning image. Furthermore, it is necessary to make the notification sound that can be transmitted to the vicinity of the gaming machine 1 as compared with the warning sound (specific sound).

In other words, when the sub CPU 92 determines that the internal cylinder (movable part) has not been completely rotated due to an illegal instrument being inserted into the cylinder lock CYK, the sub CPU 92 displays the warning image on the right sub display screen 64R or the left. It is displayed on the sub display screen 64L, and a warning sound (specific sound) is emitted from the speaker 67. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 92 determines that the illegal device is inserted into the cylinder lock CYK and the internal cylinder (movable part) is completely rotated, the sub CPU 92 compares the warning image with that of the gaming machine 1. A highly openable door opening image that can be transmitted to the surroundings is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 instead of the right sub display screen 64R or the left sub display screen 64L, and compared with a warning sound (specific sound). The speaker 67 emits a door-opening sound having a high notification property that can be transmitted to the periphery of the gaming machine 1.

[Modification 8]
In the movable part operation warning effect A of FIG. 153 and the movable part operation warning effect B of FIG. 154, the warning image is displayed on the right sub display screen 64R or the left sub display screen 64L. However, as a warning image, a message MG2 "Warning" is displayed, and a message MG3 "Counterclockwise" is displayed below the message MG2 "Please turn the sword member in the direction of the arrow until it clicks to complete the lock". The error code (for example, "warning: error code E4") may be displayed instead of displaying the arrow image YG. Suddenly, the error code is displayed, the player is made uneasy, and it is possible to convey that the action performed by the player immediately before the error code is displayed is a bad action.

[Modification 9]
In the movable part operation warning effect A of FIG. 153 and the movable part operation warning effect B of FIG. 154, some of the effects described may not be provided, or other effects may be added.

[Example of embodiment]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can implement the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect E4-1]
A gaming machine having a plurality of movable parts operable by a player,
For the effect by the movable part, a first effect that can be achieved by the player to achieve an effect condition and a second effect that is issued by the player to give a warning can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Mode E4-2]
A gaming machine according to aspect E4-1,
It is possible to simultaneously execute the second effect while the first effect is in progress.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect E4-3]
A gaming machine according to aspect E4-1 or aspect E4-2,
Having display means capable of displaying multiple types of images,
In the second effect, a specific image that conveys the warning cancellation method is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect E4-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E4-1 to E4-3,
In the second effect, it is possible to output a specific sound for notifying the warning.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect E4-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E4-1 to E4-4,
The movable portion is capable of emitting light,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect E4-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E4-1 to E4-5,
The movable part may have a decorative member,
A gaming machine characterized by

◇ [Aspect E4-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E4-1 to E4-65,
The movable part is arranged at a position where it is easily visible,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

[Other modifications]
The various display effects described above may include a configuration that does not include some of the effects and effects other than those described above.

The gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment has been described taking the pachinko gaming machine as an example, but the gaming machine 1 is not limited to this. For example, instead of a pachinko game machine, the present invention may be applied to a spinning machine game machine such as a slot machine, an arrange ball game machine, or a sparrow ball game machine. When the gaming machine 1 is a slot machine, the game medium may be changed from a game ball to a game medal.

The gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment is provided with the effect button 63, the sword member 65, and the select button 68 as the operation unit to be operated by the player, but is not limited to these, and a lever, an operation unit to be operated by the player, , A trigger or the like may be used. Further, in the display effect in the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the display effect may be executed using the button image representing the effect button 63, but instead of this, the display effect is displayed using the image representing the sword member 65. You may make it perform, and you may make it perform display effects using the image showing a lever and a trigger.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device for paying out balls, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of the gaming machine 1, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine that does not have a payout device, such as a so-called enclosed gaming machine.

The gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment uses the display device (main display screen 7a, sub display screen 64, etc.) to execute various effects. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, these effects may be combined with each other to form one display effect. That is, two or more effect examples and/or modified examples may be combined from the plurality of effect examples and/or modified examples described above.
Further, the gaming machine 1 is provided with a sub display screen 64 in addition to the image display device 7 (main display screen 7a), but the display effect performed on the main display screen 7a may be performed on the sub display screen 64, The display effect performed on the sub display screen 64 may be performed on the main display screen 7a.

Although the present aspect has been described above based on the embodiment and the modified examples, the embodiment of the aspect described above is intended to facilitate understanding of the present aspect and does not limit the present aspect. The present embodiment can be modified and improved without departing from the spirit and scope of the claims, and the present embodiment includes the equivalents thereof.

1... Gaming machine 3... Gaming area 5... Board lamp 7... Image display device 9A, 9B... Hold image (hold icon)
9C... relevant hold image (hold icon)
13... 3rd movable auditors 14... 1st movable auditors 15... 2nd movable auditors 17... Large winning opening opening starting opening 20... 1st starting opening (1st entrance opening)
21... 2nd starting opening (2nd entrance)
64... Sub display screen 66... Frame lamp 81... Game control microcomputer 91... Production control microcomputer 101... Image control microcomputer

Claims (7)

A gaming machine having display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
When the second image is displayed after the first image is displayed, the expectation of winning is high, and when the second image is displayed after the third image is displayed, the winning probability is high. It is possible to execute the first effect in which the expectation level of
A gaming machine characterized by that. The gaming machine according to claim 1,
In the first effect, when the first image or the third image is displayed, the variable icon is displayed at the variable display position, and then the first image or the third image is not displayed. In addition, the variable display position is hidden from the variable icon and the variable display position.
A gaming machine characterized by that. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2,
In the first effect, a specific image can be displayed as a suggestion for displaying the second image.
A gaming machine characterized by that. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
Having a movable body that can appear on the front side of the display means,
In the first effect, the movable body can be operated as a suggestion for displaying the second image.
A gaming machine characterized by that. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
After the first effect, it is possible to execute a second effect in which a fourth image is displayed in addition to the second image, and further, an image of the expected degree of hitting by the second image is displayed. is there,
A gaming machine characterized by that. The gaming machine according to claim 5,
In the second presentation, in addition to the fourth image, the first image and the second image are displayed, or the third image and the second image are displayed. May be
A gaming machine characterized by that. The gaming machine according to claim 5 or 6,
The first image is a character other than the first character and the second character among the plurality of characters belonging to the first group,
The second image is the first character,
The third image is the second character,
The fourth image is a character that does not belong to the first group,
A gaming machine characterized by that.